This report examines how Cross Compliance contributes to Scotland’s Vision for Agriculture, and whether introducing greater ambition will support Scotland in achieving its goals.
All farmers and crofters in Scotland who receive income support under the Basic Payment Scheme must observe Cross Compliance requirements, which are a set of rules that enforce laws around animal and plant health as well as sustainable agricultural practices. Cross Compliance requirements are set as Statutory Management Requirements (SMRs) and Good Agricultural and Environmental Conditions (GAECs). Breaches of these requirements can result in a penalty applied to the value of a business’s Basic Payment Scheme payment entitlement.
The report explores the differences between the Cross Compliance rules in Scotland and EU Member States with a conditionality policy, and analyses the strengths, weaknesses and macro-environmental considerations of three selected opportunities which could be implemented to better align with Scotland’s Vision for Agriculture. A conditionality policy in this context is a rule linking EU farm income support to farmers’ compliance with essential environmental, health, welfare, and land‑management standards.
Findings
We found that the contribution of Scottish Cross Compliance to the five outcomes of the Vision for Agriculture are uneven, with stronger alignment to environmental and animal welfare outcomes, and more limited support for thriving agricultural businesses and a just transition. There was limited evidence in the literature on the implementation and outcome of more ambitious Cross Compliance approaches.
We selected three Cross Compliance opportunities based on the evidence assessment and a set of criteria, and examined them in detail:
Opportunity 1: Enhancement of buffer areas to be in line with best practice for maximum protection to nature and water pollution
Opportunity 2: Extension of management requirements to reduce soil erosion risk
Opportunity 3: Incorporation of hedgerow maintenance requirements
We identified four overarching considerations relevant to any development of the current Cross Compliance rules to better deliver on the Vision’s outcomes:
Balancing environmental ambition with profitability
Developing a strong monitoring and evidence base, including robust data to justify changes and increase the acceptability of policy adjustments
Co‑designing rules with farmers, crofters and land managers
Increasing support, training and communication
Finally, the research emphasised the importance of considering any revisions to Cross Compliance within the wider Scottish agricultural policy framework. Increasing the ambition of Cross Compliance rules in Scotland to improve outcomes may create a gap between the EU conditionality requirements and the Scottish Cross Compliance system.
Conclusions
The opportunities studied here do not constitute an exhaustive list of possible improvements to deliver better economic, environmental and social outcomes, nor an indication of future policy changes to be applied to Cross Compliance rules in Scotland. There is clear potential to strengthen the Cross Compliance rules to support the outcomes of the Vision for Agriculture, but more evidence is needed to support any future changes, as well as holistic consideration of the wider agricultural and environmental policies.
Glossary / Abbreviations table
ARC Act
Agriculture and Rural Communities Act
CAP
Common Agricultural Policy
EU
European Union
FYM
Farmyard Manure
GAEC
Good Agricultural and Environmental Conditions
MS
Member State
PESTLE
Political, Economic, Social, Technical, Legal and Environmental
RAG
Red-Amber-Green
REA
Rapid Evidence Assessment
RPID
Rural Payments & Inspections Division
SEPA
Scottish Environment Protection Agency
SMRs
Statutory Management Requirements
SOM
Soil Organic Matter
SWOT
Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats
Introduction
Context
Scotland’s Vision for Agriculture is to be a global leader in sustainable and regenerative agriculture (see Figure 1). Together with the accompanying Route Map[1], it outlines policies aligned with national climate change[2] and biodiversity[3] targets in a post-Brexit context. As noted in the Agriculture and Rural Communities (ARC) Act[4], the overarching objectives of agricultural policy in Scotland include:
the adoption and use of sustainable and regenerative agricultural practices,
the production of high-quality food,
the promotion and support of agricultural practices that protect and improve animal health and welfare,
the facilitation of on-farm nature restoration, climate mitigation and adaptation, and
enabling rural communities to thrive.
These five Strategic Outcomes have been developed to articulate and evidence what successful delivery of the ARC Act objectives would mean in practice for Scotland’s agriculture, rural communities and the rural economy.
Figure 1: Illustration of the five outcomes of the Scottish Vision for Agriculture
These objectives aim to create a framework that supports environmental and climate goals while ensuring the economic viability and sustainability of Scotland’s agricultural sector.
Cross Compliance
Cross Compliance is a set of rules comprising SMRs (Statutory Management Requirements) and GAECs (Good Agricultural and Environmental Conditions). SMRs are enforced by separate sectorial law in Scotland and include regulations such as the requirements for animal identification. GAECs introduce protections of natural resources such as water, soils & carbon stocks and the minimum level of maintenance required. Therefore, they align closely with Scottish Government climate priorities. Through measures such as maintaining buffer strips, limiting soil erosion or regulating hedge trimming to protect biodiversity, GAECs help mitigate environmental degradation, support ecosystem services and align with several of Scotland’s broader goals of halting biodiversity loss and improving land and water health.
The Cross Compliance rules contribute to Scotland’s environmental targets by setting baseline standards for environmental protection, climate change, good agricultural condition of land, water quality, public health, animal and plant health and animal welfare. Farmers must adhere to these rules to receive support payments, through delivering actions such as buffer strips. Cross Compliance launched in 2005 when the UK was part of the European Union (EU), and Scottish Government has retained the Cross Compliance rules since the UK left the EU in 2020.
Since the UK’s withdrawal from the EU in 2020, Scotland is no longer bound to follow the set of conditionality rules known as “conditionality” included in the Common Agriculture Policy (CAP). This means that Scotland has the legal ability to review and revise Cross Compliance to better support national outcomes and to improve effectiveness. Through the review of GAECs in Scotland there is the potential to have far-reaching climate and biodiversity impacts as roughly 17,000 farmers across Scotland are currently required to meet GAECs requirements.
Aim of this project
This research examines how Cross Compliance contributes to Scotland’s Vision for Agriculture, and to understand whether introducing greater ambition (i.e. conditionality) will support Scotland in achieving its goals. There were three key aims:
Provide clarity and understanding of the current contribution of Scottish Cross Compliance to the five outcomes of the Vision for Agriculture,
identify the opportunities and barriers to developing the current set of Cross Compliance rules to better deliver on these outcomes, including from a practical implementation or economic perspective for farmers, crofters and land managers,
gather any specific lessons from comparable nations in the United Kingdom or the European Union from developments in Cross Compliance in other jurisdictions.
The analysis focusses on GAECS, because SMRs are embedded in separate Scottish Legislation, and therefore GAECs are more likely to be flexible in terms of scope. The research project does not present an analysis of the efficiency and relevance of the current set of Cross Compliance rules in Scotland, nor recommend changing them.
This project looks at the alignment between the Cross Compliance rules and the Vision for Agriculture, exploring differences between these rules in Scotland and other nations with a conditionality policy, and analysing the strengths, weaknesses and macro-environmental considerations of three selected opportunities which could be implemented in order to better align with Scotland’s Vision for Agriculture.
Selection of Cross Compliance opportunities
To select the Cross Compliance opportunities to be analysed for the potential to expand their ambition, a Rapid Evidence Assessment (REA), and stakeholder engagement was undertaken.
Based on the findings, the contribution of the rules was mapped to the outcomes of the Vision for Agriculture, including identifying any evidence gaps, weaknesses and examples of other nations’ Cross Compliance rules showing greater ambition. Based on this assessment and stakeholder inputs, three opportunities were selected for further investigation. The methodological process followed for this project is illustrated in Figure 2.
Figure 2: The five-step approach to develop the analysis of Cross Compliance opportunities
Assessment of the published evidence
We explored the role of Cross Compliance in Scotland within the context of the Scottish Government’s Vision for Agriculture.
A structured REA approach was used to ensure transparency and rigour. A search strategy protocol, including key search terms, inclusion criteria and example search strings was developed, reviewed and agreed by the Steering Group. Evidence was gathered systematically, with searches recorded with information on search date and search engine and string used. Sources were screened for relevance and robustness, and relevant evidence was then extracted and appraised to address the research questions and identify knowledge gaps. Appendix A provides further detail and examples on the search strategy developed.
Findings and information gaps
Research question 1:
What are the Cross Compliance requirements in Scotland, which environmental benefits and limitations do they provide and how do they contribute to the Scottish Government’s Vision for Agriculture?
A list of the SMR and GAEC requirements in Scotland was compiled (Table 1) and expert judgement was used to analyse alignment with the five outcomes of Scotland’s Vision for Agriculture, scored using Red-Amber-Green (RAG) rating system:
”Strong” indicates strong alignment with the outcome,
“Partial/moderate” reflects partial or moderate alignment,
“Negligible” signifies little to no contribution toward that outcome.
This assessment demonstrates that while Scotland’s current Cross Compliance requirements contribute meaningfully to several outcomes within the Vision for Agriculture—particularly in areas such as climate change—their overall impact is uneven. Notably, Outcomes 2 (Thriving Agricultural Businesses) and 5 (Support for a Just Transition) appear to be the least well-supported by existing standards. This is consistent with the intended purpose of Cross Compliance, which focuses on maintaining baseline environmental protections rather than supporting economic or social‑equity outcomes. Nonetheless, for the purposes of this research question- assessing the extent to which current Cross Compliance requirements align with the Vision for Agriculture – these findings point to clear opportunities to improve alignment, raise ambition, and address gaps in delivery.
GAEC/SMR
Contribution to Scottish Governments’ Vision for Agriculture
Outcome 1- High Quality Food Production (inc. animal health and welfare)
Outcome 2- Thriving Agricultural Businesses
Outcome 3- Climate Change Mitigation and Adaptation
Outcome 4- Nature Restoration
Outcome 5- Support for a Just Transition
GAEC 1
Buffer strips along watercourses
Negligible
Negligible
Strong
Strong
Negligible
GAEC 2
Abstraction of water for irrigation
Negligible
Partial/moderate
Strong
Partial/moderate
Negligible
GAEC 3
Protection of groundwater against pollution
Negligible
Negligible
Strong
Partial/moderate
Negligible
GAEC 4
Minimum soil cover
Partial/moderate
Negligible
Strong
Partial/moderate
Negligible
GAEC 5
Minimum land management reflecting site specific conditions to limit erosion
Partial/moderate
Negligible
Strong
Negligible
Negligible
GAEC 6
Maintenance of soil organic matter
Partial/moderate
Negligible
Strong
Partial/moderate
Negligible
GAEC 7
Retention of landscape features
Negligible
Negligible
Strong
Strong
Negligible
SMR 1
Nitrate Vulnerable Zones
Partial/moderate
Partial/moderate
Strong
Partial/moderate
Negligible
SMR 2
Conservation of wild birds
Negligible
Negligible
Strong
Strong
Negligible
SMR 3
Conservation of flora and fauna
Negligible
Negligible
Strong
Strong
Negligible
SMR 4
Food and feed law
Strong
Negligible
Strong
Negligible
Negligible
SMR 5
Restrictions on the use of substances having hormonal or thyrostatic action and beta-agonists in farm animals
Strong
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
SMR 6
Pig identification and registration
Strong
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
SMR 7
Cattle identification and registration
Strong
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
SMR 8
Sheep and goat identification
Strong
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
SMR 9
Prevention and control of TSEs
Strong
Negligible
Partial/moderate
Partial/moderate
Negligible
SMR 10
Restrictions on the use of plant protection products
Partial/moderate
Negligible
Partial/moderate
Strong
Negligible
SMR 11
Welfare of calves
Strong
Negligible
Strong
Negligible
Negligible
SMR 12
Welfare of pigs
Strong
Negligible
Strong
Negligible
Negligible
SMR 13
Welfare of farmed animals
Strong
Negligible
Strong
Negligible
Negligible
Table 1: Contribution of Cross Compliance requirements to Scottish Governments’ Vision of Agriculture.
Environmental benefits of current Cross Compliance regulations
Information on the environmental benefits of Cross Compliance in Scotland is available in the literature, however available evidence on environmental limitations is limited and largely pre-2020. Based on interviews with the Scottish Government and its agencies, a study by Blackstock et al., 2018 found:
Concerns that policy instruments that could address soil protection were not as well implemented as they could be (including under GAECs)
There is scope to strengthen soil protection under the GAECs, and;
There is potential for policy instruments, including GAECs, to deliver greater biodiversity outcomes if requirements were redesigned or implemented differently.
More recent analysis of the environmental limitations of Cross Compliance was not identified. In this context, ‘environmental limitations’ refers to areas where current Cross Compliance requirements may not fully address all environmental pressures, including emerging risks.
Table 2 presents a summary of the environmental benefits of GAECs (the study was focused on GAECs). A full list including the environmental benefits of SMRs is presented in Appendix B.
Table 2: Main environmental benefits associated with GAEC rules
Biodiversity support; supports air and water quality; Climate change mitigation
7 – Retention of landscape features
Nature conservation ; Climate change mitigation
Barriers to implementation
We also identified barriers which can limit the effectiveness of Cross Compliance as a tool for changing the management practises of farmers, crofters, and land managers in Scotland and more widely in the EU. These include:
Administrative burden: The administrative burden of Cross Compliance, primarily the time and effort required both understand requirements and maintain/collate evidence to demonstrate compliance has been widely discussed and remains a major concern despite attempts by public authorities to reduce the burden. Minimising the administrative burden of Cross Compliance can increase the efficiency of agricultural policy. (El Benni et al., 2025)
Lack of awareness and training: A lack of awareness around the environmental benefits of compliance indicates the need for a cultural shift within the farming sector. Improved training and communication could help build understanding of how Cross Compliance supports water quality, soil health, biodiversity, and long-term business sustainability. Emphasising the value of environmental protection as part of business resilience, not just for regulatory purposes, may encourage uptake (Blackstock et al., 2018)
Fear of penalties and inspections: Some farmers and land managers expressed concerns over the risk of prosecution and fines, particularly due to the complexity of rules and fear of inadvertent non-compliance (MacLeod et al., 2008 and Blackstock et al., 2018). This apprehension around inspections can discourage engagement with compliance measures.
Limited access to advice and guidance: Earlier studies (Baldock et al., 2013 and Bennett at al., 2006) highlighted challenges in accessing clear, practical guidance on Cross Compliance across both Scotland and the EU and suggested that existing support mechanisms were not always user-friendly or well-communicated. While current guidance is now clearly set out by Rural Payments and Services, farmers may still experience difficulties in navigating complex requirements or knowing where to look for further information.
Research question 2: Are there any other UK devolved administrations and/or EU Member States (MS) which have shown greater ambition beyond the basic Cross Compliance requirements?
A key challenge in exploring the second research question was the limited literature sources focussing specifically on Cross Compliance ambition. Many references concentrated on eco-schemes or agri-environment schemes, which, while related, fall outside the scope of this project. Among the sources addressing Cross Compliance directly, the emphasis was often on inspections, breaches, and the communication or interpretation of regulatory requirements rather than their ambition beyond the basic Cross Compliance requirements.
While some sources provided insights into how individual European Member States and other UK devolved administrations implement Cross Compliance, it was often unclear whether these examples represented the most ambitious approaches relative to other countries. In a few cases, sources suggested that certain countries go beyond the basic requirements; however, there was a lack of detailed information on how these enhanced measures were implemented, the outcomes achieved, and any barriers or lessons learned. Table 4 presents some examples. As previously indicated, these examples do not cover each GAEC individually, and it remains unclear whether they represent the most ambitious approaches across Member States. As such, the insights should be interpreted as indicative rather than comprehensive. The examples also largely draw on earlier CAP programming periods, given that comprehensive analysis of implementation and outcomes under the new CAP is less available.
Table 4: Examples of Cross Compliance rules in EU MS presented a wider scope than Scotland
Country
Cross Compliance requirements going beyond current GAEC requirements in Scotland
Related Scottish GAEC
References
France and Spain
Management of irrigation systems.
GAEC 2
Farmer, M. and Swales, V., 2004.
France
Unfertilised buffer strips of 5–10 metres width along watercourses.
GAEC 3
European Court of Auditors, 2008
Belgium Flanders
Soil analysis (measure related to soil erosion)
GAEC 5
Farmer, M. and Swales, V., 2004
Netherlands
Notification of more than normal erosion and submit a plan with the measurements they take to adequately fight this erosion
Application of soil treatment measures: targeted post-harvest soil tillage/ wiping tractor-wheel lines and seeding maize and sugar beet/use of follow up green manure crop after cereal and maize/Create water flow-hindering provisions at beneath-side of parcels
Prohibition to exploit soils with slope of 18% or more in another way than grassland
Insurance that permanent pasture area (used as grassland for a period of 5 years or more) does not decline
Jongeneel, R. and Brouwer, F., 2007
France
In the category of other soil erosion standards, France has established an obligation to set up buffer stripes along watercourses. The standard requires farmers who have a watercourse present on the farmland, to set up 5m-10m buffer zones (grass strips)
Kristensen, L. and Primdahl, J. (2006)
Netherlands
Farmers are to report cases of extraordinary erosion
Greece & Lithuania
Arable stubble: incorporation in soil or grazing
GAEC 6
Kristensen, L. and Primdahl, J. (2006)
Czech Republic
Application of liquid manure
Netherlands & Italy
Green cover on set aside land
France & Germany
Crop rotation providing a yearly cultivation of at least three crops (excluding permanent crops)
Greece
Cultivate grain legumes and incorporate these into the soil on 20 % of the cultivated area of their farm each year to improve soil organic matter (SOM)
European Court of Auditors, 2008
Denmark
No tillage is allowed on soils with >12% carbon within protected areas
Environmental Pillar, 2025
Due to limited published evidence, we were unable to draw meaningful comparisons with other jurisdictions. The matrix developed and presented in Appendix C provides a high-level overview of EU GAECs that most closely align with the Scottish GAECs, highlights the countries implementing the greatest number of farm practices under these standards, and presents a selected Member State (based on similarity to Scotland climate and agriculture) to illustrate key farm practices and potential opportunities for development of existing GAEC requirements relevant to Scotland. These potential opportunities include:
GAEC 1- Ploughing bans/restrictions
GAEC 4- Summer cover crop; ban of ploughing grassland
GAEC 5- low/no till; Presence of other unproductive areas and strips
GAEC 6- Crop residues left on soil; biodiversity plan
GAEC 7- Maintenance and conservation of field margins
The review of published evidence highlighted significant knowledge gaps, and the information available was largely high-level, meaning the insights gathered were not sufficient to identify clear opportunities for Scotland to address the five outcomes of the ‘Vision for Agriculture’ through the current Cross Compliance requirements.
Conclusion
The review of the published evidence found that Scotland’s Cross Compliance requirements align most strongly with environmental and animal welfare outcomes of the Vision for Agriculture but offer limited support for business resilience and a just transition. This is as expected given Cross Compliance’s environmental protection remit. While evidence of more ambitious approaches beyond the baseline was identified, this was generally high-level and often lacked detail on implementation or outcomes. As a result, whilst potential opportunities for Scotland do exist, the lack of detailed evidence makes it challenging to understand how these approaches could be used to enhance Cross Compliance in support of all five Vision outcomes.
Stakeholder engagement
The project engaged with stakeholders through a series of structured interviews and workshops to build on the findings of the REA. The first workshop presented the REA results and worked with expert stakeholders to provide Scottish context, helping to refine the research focus and develop a shortlist of Cross Compliance rules considered to have the greatest potential for positive impact.
The second workshop held with policy experts and the structured interviews focused on a deeper exploration of the selected Cross Compliance opportunities, identifying their strengths, weaknesses and the main macro-environmental factors to be considered, if a change in Cross Compliance rules was implemented.
The stakeholder engagement process involved first the development of a Stakeholder Engagement Plan, an Interview Guide and a Workshop Guide. We conducted 3 structured interviews with experts and then held the first workshop with industry representatives to identify the opportunities to be further analysed. We then conducted a second workshop with Scottish Government representatives and 4 structured interviews with experts to complement and refine our opportunity analysis.
The list of organisations which attended the workshops is presented in Appendix D and the main findings are presented in section 4.1.2.
Stakeholder Engagement research findings
In addition to supporting the identification of opportunities, stakeholders provided input on wider considerations on whether Cross Compliance could or should be evolved to better support the Vision for Agriculture.
Lack of alignment of Cross Compliance with the Vision for Agriculture: Both the literature analysis and the stakeholder engagement identified that the Vision for Agriculture and the present GAECs are aligned largely on Outcome 3 (Climate Change Mitigation and Adaptation) and to some extend to Outcome 4 (Nature Restoration). Some stakeholders highlighted that compliance with Cross Compliance rules allows the full payment of support schemes such as the Basic Payment Scheme or the Less Favoured Area Support Scheme, and in that regard plays a significant role in contributing to thriving rural communities (Outcome 2), by helping to maintain farm incomes. However, Cross Compliance was created with the intent to help maintaining baseline environmental protections, rather than supporting economic or social‑equity outcomes.
The need to balance environmental ambition and business profitability, within a broader policy framework: Stakeholders repeatedly highlighted the importance of balancing environmental or social ambition with profitability and farmer’s buy-in. Increasing the level of requirements in the Cross Compliance rules presents some cross-cutting risks such as:
competitiveness concerns for farmers, crofters and land managers if the enforcement of these rules imply investments, a reduction of productive land, are more labour-intensive, increase the administrative burden, etc.
Reduced compliance and decrease in enforcement rates, if the rules are not well understood or deemed impractical. This could necessitate more frequent controls from enforcement authorities, that would place an additional burden on public finance.
An increased number of farmers, crofters or land-managers deciding not to claim Basic Payments, and therefore no longer subject to GAECs, leaving greater gaps in environmental protection.
Several stakeholders stressed the need to consider GAECs within the broader Scottish agricultural policy framework, as Cross Compliance rules interact with other policy mechanisms such as Greening, Tier 2, Agri Environment Climate Scheme, Whole Farm Plan and wider environmental policies and regulations, in order to avoid disconnections and gaps.
An increase of the environmental ambition of the current Cross Compliance rules could be achieved by introducing new requirements, strengthening the existing ones or by shifting some practices which are currently incentivised by other policy mechanisms such as the Agri-Environment Climate Scheme into the baseline requirements. Depending on the changes, some GAECs may be strengthened without major administrative or economic burden, whereas others may deliver better outcomes with some support through incentivised schemes.
The involvement of Scottish farmers, crofters and land managers in a co-design process of the rules: The importance of adopting a multi-stakeholder approach to design policy instruments is widely recognised (Reed, M., 2008). Stakeholder participation increases the quality of environmental decisions, improves the legitimacy of the instruments and the likelihood of their adoption. Stakeholders emphasised the importance of engaging with the farming community and co-designing any changes in Cross Compliance rules to ensure practicality, increase buy-in and improve compliance and therefore effectiveness. Several ideas were mentioned, such as the possibility of involving farmers, crofters and land managers in monitoring and self-regulation to improve engagement or strengthen education and awareness by linking compliance to visible environmental outcomes.
The need for support, training & communication: The importance of improved access to advice, training, and communication has been repeatedly highlighted during the stakeholder engagement activities. For example, soil poaching by livestock near watercourses is a relatively common breach, often due to lack of awareness or habitual livestock management. Training and advice are key to improve compliance, as cumulative impacts of small breaches are poorly understood by farmers.
Information gaps identified
Stakeholder interviews and workshops highlighted several additional research possibilities, which build on the information gaps identified in section 4.1.1. Further research, as detailed below, could improve understanding of how current Cross Compliance supports Scotland’s Vision for Agriculture. It could also indicate how greater ambition in Cross Compliance requirements could support Scotland achieve its goals.
Strengthening monitoring and scientific evidence, with standardised collation between different farm visit and inspection teams. Stakeholders highlighted the importance of providing evidence-based elements to support any changes in the baseline of Cross Compliance requirements to increase their acceptability. However, the desk-based research performed in this project highlighted the current lack of robust monitoring and evaluation data on GAEC rules and their contribution to economic, environmental or social outcomes.
A broader mapping of the interaction between the Cross Compliance requirements and the other following schemes included in the Scottish agricultural policy framework, as they related to support of Scotland’s Vision for Agriculture objectives:
Legal requirements which apply to farmers beyond Cross Compliance (e.g. the General Binding Rules in the Environmental Authorisations (Scotland) Regulations 2018),
The Whole Farm Plan
Greening
The Agri-Environment Climate Scheme
Farm assurance schemes in Scotland.
A detailed assessment of comparable EU countries’ Cross Compliance guidelines, to understand real-world standards and practices and their contribution to goals aligned with Scotland’s Vision for Agriculture objectives. This could include a review of the post-2028 CAP proposal to replace enhanced conditionality with “protective practices”.
Selection of opportunities
Based on the results of the evidence assessment, we identified three opportunities for further investigation based on the following criteria:
Does this opportunity address at least one outcome of the Vision for Agriculture?
Has this opportunity been implemented elsewhere, to benefit from any lessons learnt?
Is this opportunity already covered or partly covered by another Scottish Policy?
Can this opportunity be monitored?
The GAECs selected for further analysis in the final stage of the project were:
Opportunity 1: Enhancement of buffer areas to be in line with best practice for maximum protection to nature and water pollution (related to GAEC 1 – Buffer strips along watercourses)
This section covers an analysis of the Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats (SWOT), and a high-level assessment of the Political, Economic, Social, Technical, Legal and Environmental (PESTLE) factors associated with the shortlisted opportunities. This analysis was completed using Ricardo’s in house expertise and judgement and findings from the stakeholder engagement activities performed during this project. The full analysis for each opportunity is presented in SWOT and PESTLE tables in Appendix E.
Across all three opportunities, the analysis shows some cross-cutting findings: each option provides additional environmental benefits that contribute to the outcomes of Scotland’s Vision for Agriculture, particularly on climate action, nature restoration, and long‑term resilience. All measures strengthen protection of natural assets: buffer strips or areas improve water quality and riparian habitats; erosion‑focused rules safeguard soils and reduce flood risk; and hedgerow maintenance enhances habitat connectivity, carbon storage and shelter for livestock. These opportunities also support the delivery of stronger environmental standards and visibly demonstrate stewardship, meeting high public expectations.
However, this higher environmental ambition comes with challenges. Each opportunity presents greater management complexity, often requiring a more detailed appreciation of local environmental conditions, seasonal planning, or active maintenance. This raises the cognitive burden on farmers, crofters and land managers, especially where holdings have varied soils, slopes, or landscape features. A recurring theme is the need for substantial advisory support, training, and user‑friendly guidance to bridge knowledge gaps and ensure proportionate, practical rules. All options also increase monitoring and enforcement demands on government, particularly where requirements are context‑specific or condition‑based.
Economically, short‑term costs created by land taken out of production, changes in practice, or additional labour may be balanced by longer‑term productivity and resilience gains, such as reduced soil loss, improved water management, and healthier ecological networks. Politically, all three opportunities align well with current EU conditionality requirements but could be exposed to future divergence, as the EU sets out potential new changes for the future of conditionality. Social considerations also emerge across all opportunities, including the need to ensure fairness between upland and lowland systems, the risk of placing disproportionate demands on smaller farms and crofts, and the possibility of pushback if the rules are viewed as inflexible or overly demanding.
Overall, the common message is that the environmental case for improvement is strong, but successful implementation depends on clarity, flexibility, and well‑resourced support – ensuring that higher ambition complements, rather than compromises, the viability of agricultural businesses.
Opportunity 1: Enhancement of buffer areas to be in line with best practice for maximum protection to nature and water pollution
Opportunity description
This opportunity relates to GAEC 1, which covers buffer strips along watercourses[5], among other practices to protect water against pollution. The requirements, which seek to restrict the storage, application of fertilisers and pesticides and cultivations along watercourses, cover the following:
Application of manure/fertiliser at a certain distance from a water course or during certain conditions;
Location of field heaps/storage of manure on holding at certain distances from water courses;
Cultivation of land a certain distance from top of a bank (exemptions apply).
GAEC 1 was explored as a potential opportunity for improvement to further support and align with the aims of the Vision for Agriculture, particularly outcomes 3 and 4. The proposed opportunity covers an enhancement of buffer areas to increase protections to nature and reduce water pollution, by following best practices guidelines focusing on soil type, watercourse type, buffer strip width, buffer strip species composition, and buffer zone size, based on the REA results with examples from other countries.
Other countries, particularly those in the EU following conditionality rules, have set out various ranges and compositions of buffer zones. GAEC 4 in the EU conditionality rules refers to the establishment of buffer strips along water courses[6]. For example, Ireland, which has similarities in cropping systems to Scotland, has a wider range of buffer zone distances (from 3-250m) for spreading organic fertiliser, and for the storage of farmyard manure (FYM) depending on the type of waterbody and cropping activity. In addition, some EU countries go above the basic GAEC requirements and include practices such as restricting certain crop species, or including specific soil management actions along watercourses.
Summary of the findings
The SWOT and PESTLE analysis identified the potential for strong environmental benefits through the enhancement of watercourse buffer areas. Wider and better‑designed buffer strips help reduce nutrient and soil runoff, which improves water quality and creates healthier habitats along watercourses. Adjusting buffer width, vegetation and management to local soil, slope and watercourse conditions makes them more effective, especially during heavy rainfall. This approach is in line with good practice across a number of EU Member States’ approaches and supports climate adaptation by reducing erosion, stabilising soils and improving soil carbon storage capacity.
However, the changes would make farm management more complex. Different buffer widths and management rules increase the amount of information farmers must keep track of and require greater knowledge of local soils and water systems. Smaller farms or crofts with a higher proportion of land adjacent to watercourses may lose more productive area, which could disproportionately affect their income and long‑term business viability. Regulators would also face higher monitoring demands, as they would need to check site‑specific requirements. In the short term, farmers may face a reduction of productive land and additional maintenance load, although over time the benefits – such as lower water treatment costs and reduced damage from erosion – could be significant.
Finally, farmers, crofters and land manager may push back, and compliance levels may suffer if the rules feel too complicated or punitive, especially without good advisory support.
The full analysis of strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, threats and wider macro-environmental factors is presented in Appendix E, section 8.1.
Opportunity 2: Extension of management requirements to reduce erosion risk
Opportunity description
This opportunity relates to GAEC 5, which currently covers minimum land management reflecting site specific conditions to limit erosion and aims to protect soil against erosion in certain situations. The requirements cover the following:
Limit erosion from overgrazing or heavy poaching by livestock.
Put in place measures to limit soil erosion if conditions prevent subsequent crop or cover from being sown (e.g., grubbing and sediment traps/fences)
GAEC 5 was explored as a potential opportunity for improvement to further support and align with the aims of the Vision for Agriculture, particularly outcome 3. The opportunity covers an inclusion of tillage restrictions on specific areas to reduce the risk of erosion.
For EU countries, GAEC 5 is broad and designed to “prevent soil erosion through relevant practices” and different Member States have specific variations on GAEC 5 rules. For example, Ireland includes tillage management rules for both arable and grassland areas:
For grassland parcels, Ireland’s GAEC 5 mandates that there is no ploughing allowed between the 16th of October and 30th of November, and no ploughing on land with a ≥20% slope between the 1st and 31st of December.
For arable land, there is no ploughing on land with a ≥15% slope between 1st and 31st of December; if arable land is ploughed between 1st of July to the 30th of November, farmers must sow a green cover within 14 days of ploughing.
In France, ploughing is prohibited downhill during the most sensitive periods (from 1st of December to 15th of February), specifically on plots located on slopes greater than 10%. While there are some exemptions, this greatly reduces soil erosion impacts in these fields.
Summary of the findings
Strengthening erosion‑risk management would bring clear environmental and climate benefits. Limiting tillage on steep or vulnerable land, or during high‑risk periods, helps reduce soil loss and prevents sediment reaching watercourses. These measures improve soil structure, support better water infiltration and reduce runoff, offering stronger protection during increasingly frequent heavy rainfall. Evidence from other countries shows that these targeted restrictions work well in practice and support long‑term soil health.
At the same time, this opportunity would add complexity for farmers. Erosion risk varies widely across Scotland, so rules may differ by field, slope or season. This means farmers may need to build additional knowledge about erosion risks and suitable management options and may have to adjust operations based on conditions each year. Some measures could also reduce flexibility in how land is managed, particularly where steep slopes or varied topography are involved, which may cause concern. The monitoring burden for Scottish Government would also increase due to the need to check more detailed and time‑sensitive requirements.
Short‑term costs may arise through changes to current practice, for example, fencing to protect sensitive areas or establishing ground cover more frequently. But over time, better soil management can deliver important economic benefits, including maintaining soil fertility, reducing remediation needs and preventing more serious erosion damage. As with the other opportunities, acceptance will depend on clear guidance, practical support, and rules that take account of different farm systems and landscapes.
The full analysis of strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, threats and wider macro-environmental factors is presented in Appendix E, section 8.2.
Opportunity 3: Incorporation of hedgerow maintenance requirements
Opportunity description
This opportunity relates to GAEC 7, which currently covers retention of landscape features to protect them. The current GAEC requires the following:
Dry stone or flagstone dykes, turf and stone-faced banks, walls, hedges, ponds, watercourses or trees must not be removed or destroyed without consent.
No hedges trimming or lopping of tree branches during the bird nesting and rearing season (there are some exemptions).
No cultivation of land within two metres of the centre line of a hedge (exemptions apply)
No application of fertilisers (organic manure, chemical or nitrogen) or pesticides within two metres of the centre line of a hedge (exemptions apply).
GAEC 7 was explored as a potential opportunity to incorporate hedgerow maintenance requirements in Scotland to further support and align with the aims of the Vision for Agriculture.
GAEC 7 in Scotland is equivalent to GAEC 8 in the EU[7], which requires the maintenance of non-productive areas and landscape features, and the retention of landscape features, including hedgerows. As noted previously, other countries have variations on the rules, going further than the minimum requirement. For example, in France, hedges less than or equal to 10 metres wide must be managed for biodiversity, and a hedge may not have any discontinuity (“gap” or portion of the linear feature containing elements that do not meet the definition of a hedge) greater than 5 metres. In Ireland, there is a specific focus on invasive species control on landscape features and non-productive areas, and any replacement hedgerows must consist of traditional local species.
Summary of the findings
Introducing hedgerow maintenance requirements would provide a wide range of environmental, climate and landscape benefits. Well managed hedgerows improve biodiversity, support wildlife movement, store carbon and help reduce wind erosion and runoff. They also play an important role in farming systems by providing shelter for livestock and contributing to healthier soils and water. International experience shows that active management – such as planned cutting, gap filling and using appropriate species – greatly improves hedgerow condition and long‑term function.
However, moving from basic protection to active maintenance increases the workload and knowledge required of farmers. Hedgerows vary in age, type and condition, so it can be difficult to apply one set of rules that fits all situations. This means farmers may need new advice on cutting cycles, species selection and how to manage gaps, while inspectors may need to make more judgement‑based assessments of hedge condition. These factors make monitoring and enforcement more challenging and may increase costs for both farmers and government.
Although farmers could face new short‑term costs – such as replanting, gap filling and more regular maintenance – the potential longer‑term gains could be substantial, including reduced erosion, healthier ecosystems, and improved animal welfare through increased livestock shelter. Public support is likely to be high because hedgerows are visible features and strongly associated with a well‑managed rural environment.
The full analysis of strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, threats and wider macro-environmental factors is presented in Appendix E, section 8.3.
Conclusion
This project examined how Cross Compliance contributes to Scotland’s Vision for Agriculture, and whether introducing greater ambition will support Scotland in achieving its goals. We delivered an analysis of three selected opportunities of enhanced Cross Compliance rules. The selected opportunities do not constitute an exhaustive list of possible improvements to deliver better economic, environmental and social outcomes, nor an indication of future policy changes to be applied to Cross Compliance rules in Scotland.
Current Contribution of Cross Compliance to the Vision for Agriculture
Mapping the current Cross Compliance rules against the five outcomes of the Vision for Agriculture has clarified where Scotland already has a solid foundation (particularly for Outcomes 3 and 4), and where opportunities exist to strengthen alignment.
The project emphasised the importance of considering any revisions to Cross Compliance within the wider Scottish agricultural policy framework, given the interactions between Cross Compliance and mechanisms such as Greening, Tier 2 schemes, the Agri Environment Climate Scheme, Whole Farm Plans, and broader environmental policies and regulations.
Opportunities and barriers to enhanced Cross Compliance
Across the literature, stakeholder engagement, and the analysis of three selected opportunities, a set of cross-cutting themes have been identified.
Common strengths and opportunities
Enhancing environmental ambition within Cross Compliance through wider buffer areas, strengthened erosion‑control measures, or more active hedgerow maintenance could deliver additional benefits for water quality, biodiversity, soil health, carbon storage, and climate resilience.
Several improvements would allow for more targeted, locally tailored requirements rather than uniform rules, such as differentiating rules by soil type, slope, etc. Stakeholders noted that this approach is fairer, avoids placing disproportionate burdens on certain farms or crofts, and is likely to deliver better environmental outcomes as it directs effort to the places where risks are highest and benefits greatest.
These environmental gains could also support long‑term business resilience, for example by reducing erosion damage, improving soil structure, and moderating the impacts of extreme weather.
Shared constraints and risks
Increasing ambition introduces greater management complexity for farmers, crofters and land managers, and raises the risk of unintentional non‑compliance. For the Scottish Government, there is a risk of increased enforcement challenges where rules are highly site specific or qualitative.
Stronger rules could lead to increased short‑term economic costs, such as reduced productive area or additional labour, and may create perceptions of competitive disadvantage.
There is a consistent need for clear guidance, tailored training, advisory support, and co‑design with farmers, crofters and land managers to ensure rules are both practical and acceptable.
The analysis also highlighted the strong role for digital tools, remote sensing, mapping, and precision technologies to support targeting and monitoring. Overall, stakeholders emphasised that environmental ambition must be balanced with profitability, fairness, and proportionality, and must be considered alongside the suite of other policy instruments that also contribute to the Vision’s outcomes.
Lessons from Other Jurisdictions
This project gathered lessons from EU Member States on increasing the ambition of Cross Compliance rules. We identified examples of stronger or more specific requirements, which offered useful indications of possible directions for Scotland. However, the evidence base was high‑level, fragmented, and often outdated, with limited detail on implementation, enforcement, practical delivery, cost-effectiveness or observed outcomes. This makes it difficult to determine which international approaches are genuinely most effective, or most relevant to the Scottish context.
Key information gaps
The literature review found limited evidence on the implementation and outcome of more ambitious Cross Compliance approaches. The project identified several information gaps, limiting Scotland’s ability to make well‑evidenced decisions about increasing ambition within Cross Compliance.:
Limited monitoring and evaluation data on how existing Cross Compliance requirements perform in practice, and on their contribution to environmental, economic or social outcomes.
Lack of detailed implementation evidence from other countries, particularly on costs, compliance, enforcement, and effectiveness.
Unclear interactions between Cross Compliance and other Scottish policy instruments such as Tier 2, Agri Environment Climate Scheme, Whole Farm Plans or Greening, making it difficult to assess the overall contribution to the Vision for Agriculture.
Ambiguity around future EU conditionality developments, and how Scotland might seek to enhance the Cross Compliance ambition without creating unintended divergence between the EU conditionality and the Scottish Cross Compliance systems.
General considerations
The findings indicate that Scotland has clear opportunities to strengthen environmental outcomes through Cross Compliance. This project identified some overarching considerations for developing the current set of Cross Compliance rules to better deliver on the Vision’s outcomes:
Balancing environmental ambition with competitiveness
Developing a strong monitoring and evidence base, including robust data to justify changes and improve the acceptability of policy adjustments
Co‑designing rules with farmers, crofters, and land managers
Increasing support, training and communication
References
Baldock, D., Desbarats, J., Hart, K., Newman, S., and Scott, E. (2013) “Assessing Scotland’s Progress in the Environmental Agenda”. Institute for European Environment Policy: London.
Bennett, H., Osterburg, B., Nitsch, H., Kristensen, L., Primdahl, J. and Verschuur, G., 2006. Strengths and Weaknesses of Crosscompliance in the CAP. EuroChoices, 5(2), pp.50-57.
Blackstock K.L, Juarez-Bourke A, Maxwell J.L., Tindale S., Waylen K.A (2018) “Aligning Policy Instruments for Water, Soil and Biodiversity”, Report, James Hutton Institute, Aberdeen, 24pp
Farmer, M. and Swales, V (2004). The development and implementation of Cross Compliance in the EU 15: an analysis (p. 84). Institute for European Environmental Policy.
Farming for a better climate (n.d) -Regenerative Agriculture: Keeping soil covered- practical guide
Friends of the Earth Europe (2022) CAP Strategic Plans: Green Deal or No Deal? . [Online] Available at: FRI-22-Pac-UK6.pdf
MacLeod, Moxey, McBain, Bevan, Bell, Vosough Ahmadi and Evans. (2008) “Overview of costs and benefits associated with regulation in Scottish agriculture”. SAC Commercial Ltd, Pareto Consulting, Sue Evans Research
Reed, M. (2008). Stakeholder participation for environmental management: A literature review. Biological Conservation, Volume 141, Issue 10, Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.biocon.2008.07.014
TITLE-ABS-KEY “Scotland” AND “(“Cross Compliance” OR “GAEC” OR “SMR”) AND “environmental” (“benefits” OR “limitations”)
TITLE-ABS-KEY “Scotland” AND (“Cross Compliance” OR “GAEC” OR “SMR”) AND current “environmental” (“weakness* OR “gaps” OR “limitations”)
TITLE-ABS-KEY “Scotland” AND “(“Cross Compliance” OR “GAEC” OR “SMR”) AND (“implementation” OR “Delivery”) AND (“Barrier*” OR “Challenge*”) AND (“Farmer*” OR “Crofter*”)
Research question 2:
TITLE-ABS-KEY (“European” OR “member state” OR “Defra” OR “Welsh Government” OR “Irish Government”) AND “ambition” AND “beyond” AND “Cross Compliance”
TITLE-ABS-KEY “*” AND (“Implementation” OR “Delivery”) AND (“Outcomes” OR “findings”)
*name/detail of increased ambition requirement
Screening criteria
Literature was screened for information on the following inclusion criteria
Cross Compliance environmental benefits and limitations (REA Section 1)
Barriers to implementation of current Cross Compliance requirements for farmers and crofters (REA Section 1)
Cross Compliance requirements contribution to the Scottish Government’s Vision for Agriculture (REA Section 1)
Cross Compliance gaps or areas of current weakness related to environmental outcomes (REA Section 1)
Countries which have shown/ are showing requirements with greater ambition beyond the basic Cross Compliance requirements (REA Section 2)
How these requirements have been implemented, outcomes achieved, barriers to implementation, unexpected consequences and lesson learnt (REA Section 2)
Cross Compliance requirements and associated environmental benefits
limit further greenhouse gas emissions (must not ploughing/reseeding rough grazing or other semi-natural areas; not draining wetlands; not removing/burning scrub and gorse; not carrying out muirburn outside the burning season
Overview of GAEC Implementation in the EU: country-level practices and opportunities for Scotland
This table provides a high-level overview of EU GAECs that most closely align with the Scottish GAECs, highlights the countries implementing the highest number of farm practices under these standards, and presents a selected Member State (based on similarity to Scotland climate and agriculture) to illustrate key farm practices and potential opportunities relevant to Scotland.
GAEC
Associated/most closely related GAEC (EU)
Countries implementing the most farm practices under the GAEC
Country chosen for comparison
Farm Practices codes implemented – high level description of basic practices
Farm Practices codes implemented – high level description of more niche practices
Potential opportunities to investigate for Scotland
GAEC 1
GAEC 4 – Establishment of buffer strips along water courses
Czech Republic
Denmark
Greece
France
Hungary
Italy
Luxembourg
Denmark
Maintenance and conservation of unproductive buffer strips along water courses
Bans or restrictions of ploughing on limited areas of the arable field
Ban of plant protection products along water courses
Ban on fertilisation along water courses
Ban of some crop species
Soil management
Soil management
Bans or restrictions of ploughing on limited areas of the arable field
Ban of some crop species
GAEC 4
GAEC 6 – Minimum soil cover to avoid bare soil in periods that are most sensitive
Bulgaria
Germany
Croatia
The Netherlands
Slovakia.
The Netherlands
Intermediate cash crops
Catch crops
Crop residues left on soil, leaving stubbles on the field
Winter cover crop
Green cover on permanent crops
Soil cover
Ban of ploughing of grassland
Mulching
Summer cover crop
Intermediate cash crops
Catch crops
Winter cover crop
Green cover on permanent crops
Soil cover
Ban of ploughing of grassland
Mulching
Summer cover crop
GAEC 5
GAEC 5 – Tillage management, reducing the risk of soil degradation and erosion, including consideration of the slope gradient
Austria
Germany
Luxembourg
Luxembourg
Maintenance and conservation of unproductive buffer strips along water courses
Terraces
Presence of landscape features
Other unproductive areas and strips (excluding fallows)
Low input systems
Low tillage
No tillage
Restriction on tillage (timing, direction in slopes…)
Tillage
Other practices to combat erosion
Soil management
Buffer strips against soil erosion
Ban of ploughing of grassland
Grassland management
Grassland and grazing
Maintenance and conservation of terraces
Presence of other unproductive areas and strips
Machinery use
Maintenance and conservation of unproductive buffer strips along water courses
Terraces
Presence of landscape features
Other unproductive areas and strips (excluding fallows)
Low input systems
Low tillage
No tillage
Restriction on tillage (timing, direction in slopes…)
Tillage
Other practices to combat erosion
Soil management
Buffer strips against soil erosion
Ban of ploughing of grassland
Grassland management
Maintenance and conservation of terraces
Presence of other unproductive areas and strips
Machinery use
GAEC 6
GAEC 2- Protection of wetland and peatland
Austria
Denmark
Greece
Sweden
Spain
Germany
Lithuania
Sweden
Wetland maintenance and conservation
Peatland maintenance and conservation
Low tillage
Tillage
Soil management
Drainage restrictions
Restriction on tillage (timing, direction in slopes.)
Crop residues left on soil, leaving stubbles on the field
Crop residues left on soil, leaving stubbles on the field
GAEC 3- Ban on burning arable stubble, except for plant health reasons
Belgium (F)
Greece
Malta
Portugal
Belgium (F)
No burning of crop residues
Biodiversity plan
Biodiversity plan
GAEC 7
GAEC 8- Minimum share of agricultural area devoted to non-productive areas or features
Austria
Belgium (W)
Cyprus
Greece
Germany
France
Hungary
Italy
Romania
Belgium (W)
Ban and restrictions of fertilisers on limited areas of the field other than along water courses
Mowing or grazing obligations on limited areas of the field other than along water courses
Maintenance and conservation of hedges/wooded strips
Maintenance and conservation of isolated trees
Maintenance and conservation of group of trees/field copses
Maintenance and conservation of trees in line
Maintenance and conservation of field margins
Maintenance and conservation of patches
Maintenance and conservation of unproductive buffer strips along water courses
Ponds
Small wetlands
Ditches
Streams
Stone walls
Terraces
Other landscape features
Seeded flower areas/strips
Strips for other aims
Other unproductive areas and strips (excluding fallows)
Landscape
Bans or restrictions on the use of plant protection products on limited areas of the field other than along water courses
Land laying fallow
Cultivation of Nitrogen fixing/protein crops
Bans or restrictions of ploughing on limited areas of the arable field
Restriction of timing of activities (seasonal or daily) for wildlife
Other bans or restrictions on limited areas of the field other than along watercourses
Other obligations on limited areas of the field other than along watercourses
Seeded areas/strips
Mowing or grazing obligations on limited areas of the field other than along water courses
Maintenance and conservation of field margins
Maintenance and conservation of patches
Maintenance and conservation of unproductive buffer strips along water courses
Other landscape features
Seeded flower areas/strips
Strips for other aims
Other unproductive areas and strips (excluding fallows)
Landscape
Land laying fallow
Cultivation of Nitrogen fixing/protein crops
Bans or restrictions of ploughing on limited areas of the arable field
Other bans or restrictions on limited areas of the field other than along watercourses
Other obligations on limited areas of the field other than along watercourses
Seeded areas/strips
Other EU GAECs
GAEC 1
Czech Republic
Luxembourg
Denmark
Luxembourg
Grassland management
No conversion of grassland into other uses
No tillage
GAEC 7
Czech Republic
Germany
Spain
Ireland
Luxembourg
Poland
Portugal
Ireland
Crop rotation
Intermediate cash crops
Catch crops
Crop diversification
GAEC 9
Czech Republic
France
Croatia
Luxembourg
Portugal
Luxembourg
Ban of ploughing of grassland
No conversion of grassland into other uses
Interventions in Natura 2000 areas
Limitation in timing and other limitations for plant protection products other than along water courses
Low tillage
List of organisations engaged in the workshops
The following organisations participated in the first workshop:
NFU Scotland
SAOS
RSPB Scotland
AHDB Scotland
Nature Friendly Farming Network
SAC Consulting
Land Workers Alliance
Rural Payments Agency England
The following organisations participated in the second workshop:
Scottish Government
Historic Environment Scotland
SEPA
RPID
Crofting Commission
Scottish Forestry
NatureScot
SWOT and PESTLE analysis for the 3 selected opportunities
Opportunity 1: Enhancement of buffer areas for nature and water pollution
Opportunity 1 – SWOT analysis
Strengths
Weaknesses
Supports Outcome 3 Climate change mitigation and adaptation: Enhanced buffer areas can reduce nutrient and sediment losses during extreme rainfall events, supporting adaptation to climate change. Permanent vegetation within buffers may also provide modest carbon sequestration benefits and improve soil stability.
Supports Outcome 4 Nature Restoration: Wider and well-managed buffer areas can provide additional riparian habitat, contributing to biodiversity gains alongside improvements in water quality.
Targeted design is supported by evidence-based improvements in protecting water against pollution: Tailoring buffer width and management to soil type, slope and watercourse characteristics can improve pollutant interception compared with uniform minimum standards.
Alignment with best practice: Alignment with countries that apply wider and more differentiated buffer requirements supports cross border consistency with established best practice.
Climate resilience & adaptation: Permanently vegetated buffer strips can soil stability and may contribute to longer term soil carbon storage while improving resilience to extreme weather.
Increased management and compliance complexity for farmers: Requirement expansion would likely add to the number of management rules farmers must consider, increasing the complexity of day-to-day compliance and recordkeeping.
Cognitive burden: Differentiated buffer widths or conditions based on location, soil or watercourse type may increase the cognitive burden on farmers, particularly where rules vary within a single holding.
Knowledge gaps may require significant advisory support and training: Implementing more targeted buffer designs may highlight knowledge gaps around soil, hydrology, and best practice, increasing demand for advisory support and training.
Monitoring burden: More variable or site-specific requirements could increase the complexity of monitoring and enforcement for regulators, particularly where buffer standards differ across holdings.
Uneven impacts on smaller holdings with water courses: Smaller holdings or crofts with a high proportion of land adjacent to watercourses may experience disproportionate impacts from wider buffer requirements compared with larger farms.
Alignment with existing statutory requirements: Many buffer distances are set within existing legislation, meaning current rules must at least meet statutory minima and revisions are likely to focus on maintaining consistency with existing legal requirements.
Opportunities
Threats
Alignment with future environmental goals: Enhancing buffer areas could align with future longer term environmental and climate objectives by supporting integrated approaches to water quality, biodiversity, and climate resilience.
Positive public perception and market benefits: Visible action to protect watercourses and nature may positively influence public perception of farming and support market, or assurance scheme benefits linked to environmental performance.
Stacked environmental benefits i.e. beyond protecting water against pollution: Beyond reducing water pollution, enhanced buffer zones can deliver multiple co-benefits such as carbon sequestration, biodiversity gains and improvements in soil organic matter.‑benefits such as carbon sequestration, biodiversity gains and improvements in soil organic matter.
Innovation and research funding to identify how to maximise the benefits: Support targeted innovation and research funding, including pilot projects or academic partnerships, to identify how buffer design and management can maximise environmental benefits.
Adopt proven models: Drawing on existing approaches implemented in other countries allows Scotland to adopt proven models and lessons learned rather than developing measures from scratch.
Demonstration of leadership on environmental protection: Strengthening buffer requirements would demonstrate leadership in environmental protection by going beyond minimum standards while building on measures that are already well understood.
Opportunity to refine requirements to suit locally specific physical conditions: Refine buffer and management requirements to better reflect local physical conditions, such as soil type, slope, hydrology, and watercourse characteristics, improving effectiveness and proportionality.
Allow direct drilling into Buffers to establish more deep routed plants: Allowing direct drilling within buffer areas could support the establishment of deeper rooted plant species, enhancing soil structure, water infiltration, and long-term nutrient interception without additional soil disturbance.
Opportunity to introduced infield measures / buffers to address soil erosion: Infield measures or buffers could be used alongside watercourse buffers to target erosion hotspots within fields, providing additional flexibility to address soil loss at source rather than relying solely on edge of field controls.
Farmer resistance (cost, complexity, maintenance and land loss): Enhanced buffer requirements may face resistance from farmers if perceived as increasing costs, management complexity, maintenance obligations, or loss of productive land.
Policy uncertainty: Ongoing policy reform creates uncertainty over whether Cross Compliance will be retained in the long term, potentially limiting confidence in investing in enhanced requirements.
Enforcement challenges: More complex rules may make it harder to demonstrate non‑compliance consistently and to apply penalties fairly and proportionately.
Budget constraints for advisory and monitoring services: Additional advisory, mapping and monitoring requirements may place pressure on public budgets and delivery bodies, particularly in the context of wider resource constraints.
Non-compliance: Increased rule complexity may raise the risk of unintentional non‑compliance
Stakeholder pushback and loss of trust: If perceived as costly, impractical or disproportionately affecting smaller businesses, enhanced requirements may generate stakeholder resistance and reduce trust in future reforms.
Perception of competitive disadvantage with overseas markets: Stronger environmental requirements may be perceived as placing domestic producers at a competitive disadvantage compared with overseas markets operating under less stringent standards.
Misalignment with EU following future changes: Future changes to EU conditionality or related legislation could create divergence or misalignment, requiring further revisions to maintain consistency or comparability.
Categorisation of water courses: farmers will need clear and consistently applied definitions of which watercourses are in scope to avoid confusion and implementation challenges
Requirement for additional risk mapping: Enhanced or targeted buffer requirements may necessitate further risk mapping or spatial data to clearly demonstrate compliance
Reduction of productive land area: Widening buffer strips may reduce the area of productive land available for in‑field soil health improvement activities, potentially limiting farmers’ ability to implement other beneficial practices within cropped fields.
Risk to small crofts and field viability: On small crofts or fields, wide buffer requirements could render some parcels impractical to manage, increasing the risk of land abandonment and a reduction in active land management.
Opportunity 1 – PESTLE analysis
Political
Economic
Alignment with current EU rules: Aligning enhanced buffer requirements with existing EU GAEC standards supports policy coherence and helps maintain consistency. However, there is a risk of future misalignment with the EU and risk of competitive disadvantage. Future changes to EU conditionality or environmental legislation could result in misalignment, potentially creating a perceived or actual competitive disadvantage for Scottish producers over time.
Policy delays: Further policy development, consultation, or alignment with wider agricultural reforms may delay implementation.
Increased costs for farmers: land loss, maintenance- Enhanced buffer requirements may result in direct costs for farmers through loss of productive land and ongoing management and maintenance of buffer areas
Long term economic benefits from reduced pollution and damage: Improved buffer areas may deliver long term economic benefits through reduced water treatment costs, lower soil loss, and decreased flood damage to infrastructure and farmland.
Cost for government: Enhanced requirements could increase costs for government, including the provision of advisory services, monitoring and enforcement, data management, and administrative oversight.
Concerns about fairness across farm types and locations: Costs and impacts may vary between upland and lowland areas, farm sizes, and farming systems, raising concerns about fairness and proportionality if measures are applied uniformly.
Social
Technological
Public expectation for stronger environmental standards: There is growing public expectation for farming to deliver stronger environmental standards
Positive perception of farming as environmentally responsible: Well-designed buffer areas can enhance the visual landscape and biodiversity, supporting a more positive public perception of farming as environmentally responsible
Possible farmer resistance: More complex or costly requirements may generate resistance among farmers, particularly where impacts on profitability or land use are perceived as significant.
Concerns about fairness (practicality in upland vs lowland areas): Differences in practicality between upland and lowland areas may raise social concerns about fairness if requirements are not sufficiently flexible or context specific
Ongoing croft abandonment linked to economic viability: There is an existing trend of croft abandonment where agricultural income is insufficient to cover costs, and additional land use restrictions could exacerbate this issue.
Opportunity for precision mapping and remote sensing: Advances in precision mapping and remote sensing could support more accurate identification of watercourses, buffer requirements and higher risk areas, improving targeting and compliance.
Opportunity for digital advisory and monitoring tools: Precision mapping and remote sensing could support more accurate identification of watercourses, buffer requirements and higher risk areas, improving targeting and compliance.
Improved fertiliser spreading accuracy: Advances in fertiliser spreading technology can improve application accuracy
Use of satellite tracking collars to manage grazing pressure: The use of satellite tracking collars on cattle can control grazing to avoid sensitive areas such as water margins and historic sites.
Legal
Environmental
Enforcement challenges: Legally robust enforcement may be challenging where buffer requirements are complex.
Risk of disputes over interpretation of rules: Unclear or ambiguous legal wording could lead to disputes overrule interpretation
Requirement for clear, context specific rules and definitions: From a legal perspective, clear and precise definitions of buffer width, species composition, and management requirements are essential to ensure enforceability and legal certainty
Improved water quality (zones and strips), soil quality and biodiversity (strips): Enhanced buffer zones and strips can improve water quality by reducing nutrient and sediment runoff, while also supporting soil condition and increasing on-farm biodiversity.
Climate adaptation: Vegetated buffer strips can help slow overland flow, reduce soil erosion, and contribute to reduced flood risk under extreme rainfall events.
Climate mitigation: Permanent vegetation within buffer strips can contribute to climate mitigation through soil carbon sequestration, alongside associated benefits for soil and water quality.
Habitat connectivity: Buffer strips can act as linear habitats, improving connectivity between fragmented habitats and supporting wider ecological networks.
Potential for invasive species: If poorly managed, buffer areas may create conditions that allow invasive or undesirable species to establish and spread.
Increased runoff risk under a changing climate: Changing climate, with heavier rainstorms may increase the risk of run off - stakeholders suggest buffers should be mandatory against all watercourses to intercept soil
Opportunity 2: Extension of management requirements to reduce erosion risk
Opportunity 2 – SWOT analysis
Strengths
Weaknesses
Supports Outcome 3 Climate change mitigation and adaptation: Restrictions on tillage in erosion-prone areas can reduce soil loss and sediment runoff during extreme weather events, supporting both climate mitigation and adaptation objectives.
Prohibiting tillage during high-risk times of year and on high-risk land is supported by evidence: limiting tillage on steep slopes and during high-risk periods reduces soil erosion, sediment transport and associated impacts on water quality.
Supports climate resilience & adaptation: Reducing erosion through targeted land management can improve soil structure and infiltration, helping to moderate runoff and reduce downstream flood risk.
Increased compliance complexity for famers: Extending management requirements may increase compliance complexity for farmers, particularly where rules differ by land type, slope, or time of year.
Cognitive burden: Seasonal restrictions and spatially targeted rules could increase the cognitive burden on farmers, especially on holdings with varied topography or land use.
Knowledge gaps may require significant advisory support and training: Introducing new or expanded erosion controls may highlight knowledge gaps around slope thresholds, soil erosion risk, and appropriate mitigation measures, increasing the need for advisory support and training.
Monitoring burden: More differentiated erosion controls may increase monitoring and enforcement requirements, particularly where compliance depends on timing, slope measurements or site-specific conditions.
Risk of overly prescriptive rules given variable local conditions: It is a difficult GAEC to change as circumstances can vary significantly – Examples are of large fields with slope exposed to wind and erosion – overly prescriptive rules may fail to address the most significant real world erosion risks.
Mismatch between Rural Payments & Inspections Division (RPID) and SEPA classification of non‑compliance: Differences in how RPID and SEPA classify breaches or non‑compliance may create confusion
Opportunities
Threats
Alignment with future environmental goals: Strengthening erosion related management requirements supports longer term environmental goals by integrating soil protection, climate resilience, and water quality objectives.
Positive public perception and market benefits: Clear action to reduce erosion and protect soils may strengthen public confidence in sustainable land management and support market or assurance scheme expectations.
Stacked environmental benefits i.e. beyond protecting soil from erosion: In addition to reducing erosion, targeted land management can improve soil structure, support biodiversity, enhance water quality, and contribute to flood risk reduction.
Innovation potential: Extending erosion controls could encourage the uptake of innovative approaches such as precision grazing or virtual fencing
Evidence based development using farm level data: Evidence-based development using data/examples of common issues found during farm visits
Targeted approach rather than a one size fits all model: A targeted approach allows erosion measures to focus on higher risk fields or areas, improving effectiveness and proportionality across different farm and croft systems.
Opportunity to address in‑field soil erosion: Opportunity to tackle in‑field soil erosion, which is recognised as a significant and widespread issue in parts of Scotland.
Inclusion of protection of scheduled monuments: Including scheduled monuments within areas where erosion should be avoided would support alignment with Historic Environment Policy for Scotland and help protect cultural assets at risk from soil loss.
Strengthen restrictions on steep ground adjacent to watercourses: Further restrictions on working or ploughing steep ground near watercourses could reduce erosion and sediment delivery to water, particularly during high-risk periods.
Measures to minimise bare soil over winter: Promoting practices that minimise bare soil over winter targets one of the periods when erosion risk is highest, particularly under wetter and more variable weather conditions.
Improved tramline management: Better tramline management offers a practical way to reduce runoff pathways and soil erosion
Promoting good practice rather than solely prohibitive rules: Opportunity to promote good practice rather than just a solely restrictive set of requirements
Farmer resistance due to increased regulatory complexity, and reduced flexibility to manage land as see fit: Additional or more restrictive erosion controls may face resistance from farmers if they reduce flexibility to manage land in response to local conditions.
Policy uncertainty: Uncertainty around future agricultural policy and the long-term role of Cross Compliance may reduce confidence in implementing enhanced requirements.
Enforcement challenges: Where erosion rules are highly site specific or time limited, demonstrating noncompliance and applying proportionate penalties could present enforcement challenges.
Budget constraints for advisory and monitoring services: Expanded erosion management requirements may increase demand for advisory support, monitoring, and administration
Non-compliance: Greater complexity in erosion related rules may increase the likelihood of unintentional noncompliance.
Stakeholder pushback and loss of trust: If requirements are perceived as overly restrictive, there is a risk of stakeholder pushback that could undermine trust in future agricultural policy reforms.
Perception of competitive disadvantage: Stronger erosion control requirements may be perceived as placing Scottish producers at a competitive disadvantage relative to producers operating under less stringent regimes.
May require risk map: Implementing slope-based tillage restrictions may require detailed risk mapping to identify relevant slope thresholds
Opportunity 2 – PESTLE analysis
Political
Economic
Alignment with current EU rules: Aligning enhanced buffer requirements with existing EU GAEC standards supports policy coherence and helps maintain consistency. However, there is a risk of future misalignment with the EU and risk of competitive disadvantage. Future changes to EU conditionality or environmental legislation could result in misalignment, potentially creating a perceived or actual competitive disadvantage for Scottish producers over time.
Policy delays: Further policy development, consultation, or alignment with wider agricultural reform processes may delay implementation
Long term economic benefit from reduced soil loss and improved soil fertility: Reducing erosion through targeted management can deliver long term economic benefits by maintaining soil fertility, sustaining productivity, and reducing the need for inputs or remediation.
Cost for government: Implementing enhanced erosion controls may increase costs for government, including expenditure on advisory services, monitoring and administration.
Additional costs to farmers: Strengthened erosion management requirements may result in additional costs for farmers, such as installing or maintaining fencing to control livestock access to erosion prone or sensitive areas.
Social
Technological
Public expectation for stronger environmental standards: There is increasing public expectation for farming to deliver stronger environmental standards, including sustainable food production and improved protection of soils.
Positive perception of farming as environmentally responsible (soil protection): Visible action to prevent soil erosion can reinforce a positive public perception of farming as environmentally responsible and committed to long term land stewardship.
Possible farmer resistance due to complexity: More complex or site-specific erosion requirements may lead to resistance from some farmers, particularly where rules are perceived as difficult to understand or implement.
Opportunity for digital advisory and remote monitoring tools: Digital advisory platforms and remote monitoring tools could support farmers in understanding site specific erosion requirements and help streamline compliance and monitoring.
Use of soil monitoring technologies to monitor erosion risk: Soil monitoring technologies, such as sensors could help identify and monitor areas at higher erosion risk and support more targeted land management decisions.
Legal
Environmental
Enforcement challenges: Legally robust enforcement may be difficult where erosion related requirements are highly site specific or conditional, increasing the risk of inconsistent compliance decisions.
Risk of disputes over interpretation of rules: Ambiguity in how erosion controls are interpreted (e.g. slope thresholds or management obligations) could lead to disputes, appeals, or challenges.
Requirement for clear, context specific rules and definitions: Clear legal definitions of erosion risk, including how thresholds are defined and applied in different landscapes, will be essential to ensure certainty, enforceability, and fairness.
Improved water and soil quality: Reducing soil erosion through targeted land management can improve both soil condition and water quality by limiting sediment and nutrient runoff into watercourses.
Climate adaptation: Improved soil structure and ground cover can increase resilience to heavier rainfall, flooding and periods of drought by enhancing infiltration and water retention.
Climate mitigation: Reduced disturbance of soils in erosion prone areas can support soil carbon retention while delivering co-benefits for soil and water quality.
Soil habitat enhancement: Protecting soils from erosion helps maintain soil biological activity and structure, supporting healthier soil habitats and ecosystem function.
Opportunity 3: Incorporation of hedgerow maintenance requirements
Opportunity 3 – SWOT analysis
Strengths
Weaknesses
Supports Outcome 3 Climate change mitigation and adaptation: Well-maintained hedgerows can contribute to climate mitigation through carbon storage and support adaptation by reducing wind exposure, runoff and soil loss.
Supports Outcome 4 Nature Restoration: Enhanced hedgerow maintenance supports nature restoration by improving habitat quality, connectivity and species diversity across agricultural landscapes.
Supports Outcome 1 High quality food production (includes animal health and welfare): Hedgerows provide shelter for livestock, helping to reduce weather stress and support animal health and welfare.
Hedgerow maintenance is supported by evidence-based improvements to protect the landscape feature: Evidence shows that active hedgerow management, including appropriate cutting regimes and species composition, improves hedgerow condition and long-term landscape function.
Alignment with best practice: Aligning hedgerow maintenance requirements with approaches used in other EU countries supports cross border consistency and reflects established best practice beyond minimum baseline standards.
Increased management and compliance complexity for farmers: Introducing hedgerow maintenance requirements may increase management and compliance complexity for farmers.
Knowledge gaps may require significant advisory support and training: More detailed hedgerow management standards may highlight knowledge gaps around appropriate cutting regimes, species composition, and invasive species control, increasing the need for advisory support and training.
Monitoring burden: Moving from passive protection to active hedgerow maintenance may increase monitoring and enforcement demands, particularly where compliance depends on management timing or hedgerow condition.
Difficulty prescribing active maintenance rules across diverse hedgerow contexts: Prescribing active hedgerow maintenance rules is challenging due to the wide variation in hedgerow type, age, condition and location
Opportunity to include cutting date restrictions to protect birds: Including clearer hedgerow cutting date restrictions within GAEC 7 could strengthen protection for nesting and breeding birds
Opportunities
Threats
Alignment with environmental goals- Strengthening hedgerow maintenance requirements supports future wider environmental goals by contributing to climate action, nature restoration, and landscape resilience.
Positive public perception and market benefits: Well-maintained hedgerows provide visible evidence of environmental stewardship, which may support positive public perception and market or assurance scheme expectations.
Stacked environmental benefits: In addition to protecting hedgerows themselves, improved management can deliver co‑benefits such as carbon sequestration, biodiversity enhancement, air quality improvements, and reduced flood risk.
Digital tools (e.g. remote sensing and mapping) to reduce inspection costs: Remote sensing, mapping and digital tools could be used to support monitoring of hedgerow condition and management, potentially reducing inspection costs and administrative burden.
Farmer resistance: More detailed hedgerow maintenance requirements may face resistance from farmers if they are perceived to increase management complexity, costs, or ongoing time commitments.
Policy uncertainty: Uncertainty over the long-term role of Cross Compliance may reduce confidence in introducing enhanced hedgerow maintenance requirements.
Enforcement challenges: Active management standards may make it more difficult to demonstrate non‑compliance objectively and to apply penalties consistently and proportionately.
Budget constraints for advisory and monitoring services: Implementing and supporting enhanced hedgerow maintenance may place additional demands on advisory, monitoring and enforcement resources, within existing budget constraints.
Non-compliance: Increased complexity around hedgerow management rules may raise the risk of unintentional non‑compliance.
Additional complexity in definitions and scope: Further clarity would be required on hedgerow definitions, including what constitutes a hedge and how native or invasive species are classified, to avoid inconsistency and dispute.
Opportunity 3 – PESTLE analysis
Political
Economic
Alignment with current EU rules: Aligning enhanced buffer requirements with existing EU GAEC standards supports policy coherence and helps maintain consistency. However, there is a risk of future misalignment with the EU and risk of competitive disadvantage. Future changes to EU conditionality or environmental legislation could result in misalignment, potentially creating a perceived or actual competitive disadvantage for Scottish producers over time.
Policy delays: Further policy development, consultation, or alignment with wider agricultural and environmental reforms may delay implementation.
Costs for farmers: Introducing active hedgerow maintenance standards may create direct costs for farmers, including gap filling, replanting, and ongoing management.
Long term economic benefit: Well-maintained hedgerows can deliver long term economic benefits by helping reduce soil and wind erosion, supporting natural pest control, and protecting wider farm productivity.
Cost for government: Enhanced hedgerow maintenance requirements may increase public sector costs associated with advisory support, monitoring, administration, and enforcement.
Social
Technological
Public expectation for stronger environmental standards: There is growing public expectation for attractive, well maintained rural landscapes that reflect stronger environmental standards and stewardship.
Positive perception of farming as a steward of heritage, biodiversity and livestock welfare: Active hedgerow maintenance can reinforce positive public perceptions of farming as a custodian of cultural heritage, biodiversity and livestock welfare.
Possible farmer resistance due to added workload: Additional hedgerow maintenance requirements may lead to resistance among some farmers if they increase workload or ongoing management demands.
Opportunity for digital advisory and remote monitoring tools: Digital advisory platforms and remote monitoring tools could support farmers in understanding hedgerow maintenance requirements.
Use of remote sensing and drones to monitor hedge condition and gaps: Remote sensing and drone technologies could be used to identify hedgerow condition, gaps, and discontinuities.
Legal
Environmental
Enforcement challenges: Enforcing hedgerow maintenance requirements may be legally challenging where standards are qualitative or condition based, increasing the risk of inconsistent compliance decisions.
Risk of disputes over interpretation of rules and maintenance standards: Variation in how hedgerow condition or maintenance standards are interpreted could lead to disputes, appeals, or legal challenge.
Requirement for clear, context specific rules and definitions: Clear legal definitions of what constitutes a hedgerow, acceptable maintenance activities, permitted gap sizes, and native or invasive species will be essential to ensure enforceability, consistency, and legal certainty.
Improved water and soil quality (erosion control): Well-maintained hedgerows can help reduce soil and surface runoff, supporting improved soil condition and protecting water quality by limiting sediment and nutrient losses.
Biodiversity support: Active hedgerow management can enhance habitat quality for a wide range of species, supporting farmland biodiversity.
Climate adaptation: Hedgerows can improve climate resilience by reducing wind exposure, moderating microclimates, and helping manage runoff during heavy rainfall and periods of heat stress.
Climate mitigation: Healthy hedgerows contribute to climate mitigation through carbon storage in woody biomass and soils, alongside associated improvements in soil and water quality.
Habitat connectivity: Linear hedgerow networks provide important habitat corridors that support species movement and connectivity, particularly for birds, pollinators and other wildlife.
Potential for invasive species if poorly managed/ non-compliance: If maintenance is poorly implemented or compliance is low, hedgerows may create opportunities for invasive or undesirable species to establish and spread.
How to cite this publication:
Harpham, L , Peters, E, Decherf, C, Gill, D, Wood, C. (2026) How Cross Compliance contributes to Scotland’s Vision for Agriculture, ClimateXChange.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
Heat networks use fluid-filled pipes to carry thermal energy from one place to another, serving multiple end users.
Traditional heat networks typically feature an ‘energy centre’ where high temperature heat is generated before it is sent out to the heat-using properties which are connected to the network. By contrast, low temperature heat networks connect two or more properties to a shared source of thermal energy, without a central station where high temperatures are generated. Instead, heat pumps within individual properties or buildings extract heat from the network, which typically operates at less than 35 degrees centigrade, and upgrade it to provide heating and hot water.
Heat networks are identified as a key strategic technology for meeting Scotland’s greenhouse gas emissions reductions targets (Scottish Government, 2022). Assessing their potential is a core requirement for local authorities’ Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategies (LHEES), the first versions of which were published in 2023 and 2024.
To date, most local and national energy planning in Scotland has focused on high temperature heat networks, typically operating at more than 65 degrees centigrade. This research addresses that gap by identifying where low temperature heat network are most likely to be suitable.
Aims
The results of this assessment identify where low temperature heat networks are most likely to be suitable across Scotland.
The results can support a range of uses, including local and national energy planning, project identification and prioritisation, public engagement (including awareness-raising), business planning and strategy development, knowledge-building and as an input to future research. The intended users include the Scottish Government, local authorities, energy system planners, enterprise development agencies, heat network developers, social landlords, researchers and members of the public.
The approach that has been developed also has policy value. It provides a tested and documented methodology that can be repeated and refined in future assessments.
This is a national level, first pass assessment of locations where low temperature heat networks may be suitable. It does not assess the relative attractiveness or feasibility of specific opportunities. Instead, the data outputs provide data that users can apply to screen and prioritise opportunities according to their own objectives.
Findings
Figure 1 provides an overview of the methodology used in the assessment:
Figure 1: Simplified representation of national assessment methodology
In many areas, the most effective approach is likely to involve several smaller low temperature networks rather than a single large network. In denser urban locations, particularly in city centres, there are often multiple possible configurations. The opportunities identified should therefore be interpreted as areas of high potential rather than clearly defined project proposals.
The national assessment does not account for existing low temperature heat networks, recent or planned new build developments, networks that rely on both heating and cooling, or schemes involving large distances between buildings. To maintain a manageable and practical set of data outputs, smaller opportunities below a defined scale threshold were excluded. However, smaller low temperature heat networks connecting only a few properties can still be viable.
The assessment identified around 11,000 Multi-Building Opportunities and 17,000 Communal Opportunities across Scotland. Together, these represent approximately 900,000 domestic properties and around 100,000 non-domestic properties, around a third of each total. The heat demand represented by these opportunities combined amounts to over 20 TWh/yr.
Most opportunities involve relatively small numbers of properties, typically up to 30, with total heat demand of up to 300 megawatt-hours per year. A smaller number of opportunities have much higher total heat demand, especially where anchor loads such as hospitals and higher education buildings are present.
Low temperature heat network opportunities are distributed across each of Scotland’s 32 local authority areas. While concentrations are highest in more densely populated regions, including the Central Belt and urban areas around Aberdeen and Dundee, opportunities are also present in smaller towns, rural areas and coastal communities across Scotland.
Most opportunities were matched with nearby green spaces that could potentially host heat collection infrastructure. A smaller proportion were matched with nearby water bodies, and relatively few with nearby waste heat sources, although, in some cases these offer significant potential.
More than half of all opportunities are in areas where over 90% of properties currently use mains gas for heating. However, a notable proportion, around 16%, are located in areas with no mains gas use, often in off-gas locations or electrically heated buildings.
Recommendations
Scottish local authorities and other organisations involved in energy planning can use the results of the national assessment to inform strategies and delivery plans relating to heat networks, heat decarbonisation, and electricity network upgrades.
Organisations involved in project identification, including building owners, heat network project developers, community groups and economic development agencies, can use the datasets to screen and prioritise opportunities for further assessment. In some cases, access to the datasets will require compliance with data sharing agreements.
Confidence in the results of the national assessment could be improved through better evidence on the relationship between heat demand and viable connection distances between properties. Improvements to input datasets, particularly relating to heat demand and waste heat sources, would help to better capture the full potential for low temperature heat networks.
Glossary / Abbreviations
Anchor Load
A large heat user within a heat network opportunity whose substantial annual heat demand provides a stable base of consumption, improving revenue certainty and supporting the overall viability of a heat network. This research defined anchor loads according to their estimated annual heat demand (above 100 megawatt-hours per year for public sector properties and above 200 megawatt-hours per year for all other properties).
Air source heat pump
A type of heating system that uses electricity and the energy in ambient air to generate useable heat and/or hot water.
Building
A built structure containing one or more heat-using properties that is mapped with a single footprint in Ordnance Survey MasterMap.
Closed loop borehole
The underground component of a ground source heat system in which pipes circulate fluid through a sealed loop contained within a borehole to extract heat from the ground.
Communal Opportunity
A location likely to be suitable for a heat network serving multiple properties within the same building, such as blocks of flats or multi-occupancy commercial buildings.
First pass assessment
An initial, high-level screening based on national datasets, intended to identify areas of potential rather than to assess feasibility.
Green Heat in Greenspaces (GHiGs)
An evaluation of low-carbon and renewable heat opportunities within parks and other green spaces, produced by Greenspace Scotland. The assessment considers land use, environmental constraints, and potential heat network integration.
Ground source heat pump
A type of heating system that uses electricity and the energy in the ground and/or groundwater to generate useable heat and/or hot water.
Home Analytics (HA)
A detailed analysis of residential building characteristics, energy consumption, and heat demand, produced by Energy Savings Trust to support heat decarbonisation and local energy planning.
Heat Demand Proximity Analysis
A process that identifies clusters of buildings that are potentially suitable for heat networks by calculating and applying maximum viable connection distances based on estimated heat demand.
High Property Count Area (HPCA)
A zone, defined by this research, which is home to more than 1,000 heat demands and within which there are likely to be many opportunities for both low and high temperature heat networks.
High temperature heat network
A system of water-filled pipes connecting two or more buildings to a shared thermal energy source and operating at a temperature suitable for providing space heating or hot water generation without further elevation. This research has defined high temperature heat networks as those operating above 65 degrees centigrade.
Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategy (LHEES)
Strategies developed by Scottish local authorities that support the local planning, coordination and delivery of the heat transition, including building energy efficiency.
Low temperature heat network
A system of water-filled pipes connecting two or more buildings to a shared thermal energy source and supplying heat pumps located at each property. This research has defined low temperature heat networks as those typically operating at a temperature below 35 degrees centigrade.
Multi-Building Opportunity
An area within which there is likely to be scope for one or more viable low temperature heat networks, each serving a cluster of separate buildings.
Non-Domestic Analytics (NDA)
An assessment of energy use, building typologies, and heat demand across commercial, industrial, and public-sector properties, produced by Energy Savings Trust to aid with strategic heat planning.
Open loop borehole system
A ground source heat system that extracts groundwater from one borehole and reinjects it into another.
Opportunity
A geographic grouping of properties identified through the national assessment as having potential suitability for a low temperature heat network. Opportunities are not assessed for feasibility and should be interpreted as areas for further investigation.
Property
A building or part of a building which is owned or leased as a unit and normally has its own, separately controllable heat distribution system.
Shared Ground Loop
A type of low temperature heat network in which the heat source is a ground source heat collector that is shared between multiple distributed heat pumps.
Scotland Heat Map (SHM)
A national dataset capturing characteristics of and estimated heat demand for the majority of buildings across Scotland, produced by the Scottish Government to support regional comparison and strategic heat planning.
Low temperature heat networks
Just as electricity networks use cables to transport electrical energy from one or more points of generation to multiple points of use, heat networks use fluid-filled pipes to carry thermal energy from one place to another. Heat networks can take different forms. An important distinction that can be made between two of the main types relates to the temperature at which they operate. The temperature of the pipe network relative to the temperatures required by the end users has a fundamental impact on what items of equipment are required where on the network.
(a)
(b)
Figure 2: Simplified diagram of a) low temperature heat network features and b) high temperature heat network features
Figure 2 a) shows a simplified depiction of the features of low temperature heat networks. In each of the two networks shown, water-filled pipes connect separately occupied properties to a shared source (or sources) of thermal energy. The left network accesses thermal energy from a waste heat source (a data centre) as well as the ground and distributes it to separate buildings. The right network accesses a single heat source (a body of water) and distributes it to flats within a single building. The temperature of the water in the network is likely to be between 0 and 35 degrees centigrade (although could be warmer). In both instances, heat pumps in individual properties upgrade the temperature of the thermal energy that they extract from the network to supply space heating and hot water to occupants. Some low temperature heat networks are able to supply cooling to buildings in addition to (and often at the same time as) supplying heating.
By contrast, the high temperature heat network shown in Figure 2 b) shows multiple properties being supplied from a central energy centre. The temperature of the water that circulates from the energy centre to the end users is likely to be above 55 degrees centigrade, possibly much hotter. Connected properties do not normally need their own heat pumps. Instead, heat exchangers transfer thermal energy from the network to properties’ internal heating systems without upgrading its temperature.
Aims of the research
Policy value of the research outputs/
This national assessment of low temperature heat network opportunities aims to support the Scottish Government’s priority to reduce greenhouse gas emissions in the building sector. More specifically, it aims to support national and local policies, strategies and delivery plans associated with the development of low carbon heat networks in Scotland. It does this by providing the results of the first national-scale assessment of a class of heat networks that has, to date, typically been underrepresented in local and national energy planning. The results of the assessment show where low temperature heat networks are most likely to be suitable and provides additional data for each identified location that further characterises the opportunity. Aggregating the individual opportunities identified gives an indication of the extent and distribution of the overall opportunity for this type of heat network in Scotland.
The approach developed to generate these results itself also has value for policymakers and Scottish local authorities. Future assessments will be able to repeat and/or build on a tested, refined and documented methodology that has been designed with replicability in mind.
In addition to a policy and local government audience, it is anticipated that this research will have value for the heat network and heat-in-buildings industry, the owners and occupants of buildings that require heat decarbonisation solutions, energy network planners and operators, potential investors in heat networks, community organisations and interested members of the public.
This report communicates some of the results of the national assessment in the form of summaries relating to the low temperature heat network opportunities identified. This assessment is intended to inform decision making and does not determine the feasibility of individual projects.
Another critical output of the research is several datasets which capture details about the opportunities identified. Different versions of these geospatial datasets enable sharing with different recipients, depending on their organisation’s status (public sector or not) and the licenses that they hold to certain data products. The different versions enable users to gain maximum value from the research within the constraints imposed by data restrictions.
Context for interpretation
The national assessment is a top-down, “first pass” assessment of locations likely to be suitable for low temperature heat networks in Scotland. The opportunities identified in the research outputs have not been subject to any individual assessments. The selection process made use of information from national-scale datasets only; more localised information was not taken into account. Assessment of the relative attractiveness of specific opportunities was not within our scope.
The identified opportunities are entirely independent of the LHEES developed for each of Scotland’s 32 local authority areas. Local authorities have not carried out any screening of low temperature heat network opportunities ahead of publication. However, the research outputs offer important value for future development and the delivery of actions that align with them, particularly where local authorities are able to screen and prioritise opportunities relevant to their geographic area. This national assessment supplements, but does not supersede LHEES, it is intended to complement, rather than replace, LHEES.
The level of detail with which low temperature heat network opportunities were assessed is very much less than would typically be involved in a feasibility study. In most cases, the level of detail falls short of that which would typically be used to justify carrying out a feasibility study. Organisations wishing to pursue the assessment and possible development of a low temperature heat network in a specific location are advised to use the results of the national assessment as a starting point for a further investigation that incorporates local information. Users will need to apply judgment to develop and refine the concept for the network beyond the initial spatial boundary and the associated group of properties that are defined through this research.
The results of the national assessment inevitably include as “opportunities” some areas which are not in practice good locations for low temperature heat networks. They also fail to include some locations which would, upon further investigation, prove to be good opportunities. The national assessment can only offer generalised justifications for why a location has been included and another location excluded.
It is frequently the case that a group of properties that has been designated as a low temperature heat network opportunity would also represent an opportunity for a small high temperature heat network. The advantages and disadvantages of low temperature systems are often place-specific, requiring an options assessment to be carried out to establish which is likely to be a better fit for the heat sources, buildings and intermediate spaces involved.
Research concept and technical focus
Low temperature heat networks use a system of fluid-filled pipes to connect two or more buildings or separately occupied properties to a shared source of thermal energy. Low temperature heat networks, in common with many higher temperature networks, harvest energy from sources that are cooler than the temperatures needed by the buildings and processes they serve. Examples of these cooler heat sources include the ground, water bodies, and many waste heat sources. In contrast to higher temperature heat networks, these low temperature systems do not upgrade the temperature centrally – instead, one or more dedicated heat pumps per property supply the heating and hot water that the connected buildings need. Some low temperature heat networks are able to supply cooling to buildings in addition to (and often at the same time as) supplying heating.
In theory, low temperature heat networks could be used to heat buildings almost anywhere; all it takes is two or more buildings or separately occupied properties to be close enough together for it to make sense to share a heat source. However, some places are better than other places. This research aims to identify locations across Scotland where low temperature heat networks are most likely to be suitable. It aims to make available information about these locations and the opportunities there to facilitate consideration of low temperature heat networks as an option for decarbonising heat in buildings. This information includes the possible presence of waste heat sources near to heat network opportunities.
The opportunities identified could each be developed as a potential low temperature heat network scheme. However, it could be the case that smaller schemes within the areas delineated are more viable in practice – or that upon further investigation it makes sense to extend networks to certain neighbouring buildings outwith the areas mapped or to interconnect opportunity areas. The opportunities mapped and listed in the national assessment should be interpreted as guides to areas of high potential rather than defined proposals for schemes. For example, neither indicative pipe network routing nor precise locations for connections to heat sources are produced.
Use cases
The intended audience for the research comprises numerous groups who have the potential to contribute to meeting Scotland’s targets for building decarbonisation and heat network deployment. The degree to which the needs of the intended audiences for the research outputs are met is key to its impact. Therefore, the anticipated use cases are central to the aims of the research. This report aims to present the research and its results in such a way that readers can easily understand its implications and the conclusions reached. The data outputs produced by the research can be used for purposes that include local and national energy planning, project identification and prioritisation, public engagement (including awareness-raising), business planning and strategy development, knowledge-building and as an input to future research.
Scottish local authorities are a particularly important audience for the research. Having developed their LHEES over the period 2022 – 2024, local authorities are now engaged in implementing the Delivery Plans associated with the Strategies. In general, low temperature heat networks were not considered in detail when most of the Strategies and Delivery Plans were written. This outcome results from the methodology that local authorities were encouraged to follow when developing their LHEES in 2022 – 2024, which centred on high temperature heat networks. However, they have the potential to make a significant contribution to the decarbonisation of heat in buildings, alongside the other leading solutions:
building energy efficiency;
high temperature heat networks;
individual, non-networked heat pumps; and
other important technologies which have less widespread applicability.
The national assessment raises the profile of low temperature heat networks as a means to achieve the objectives of LHEES, and delivers information that can help local authorities (and other users) to focus on priority areas and to rank the opportunities that have been identified. Local authorities and their partners will still need to consider what the best technology choice is for each type of building in each locality. The national assessment does not directly compare low temperature heat networks against other zero-emissions heating solutions or identify optimum solutions, and as such cannot be a direct input into Delivery Plans or derived activities.
Other audiences that we specifically considered included:
energy system planners;
enterprise development agencies;
heat network developers;
social landlords;
researchers; and
members of the public, including those who are active in community organisations.
Developers of small high temperature heat networks may find that the results of the national assessment of low temperature heat network opportunities offer information that is useful for the identification of opportunities for higher-temperature systems. This would especially be the case if the results were combined with information about buildings’ temperature requirements and the density of heat demand at street-by-street level.
Our aim has been for the outputs to correlate as well as possible with real-world opportunities, while avoiding modelling factors that influence viability in subjective rather than objective ways. The national assessment acknowledges, and allows space for the influence of, local complexity while delivering a single assessment for the whole of Scotland.
Non-technical objectives
Non-technical objectives for the national assessment included:
Geographic inclusivity – giving all areas of Scotland an equal ‘chance’ when it came to the identification of opportunities, after heat demand distribution is taken into account.
Technical inclusivity – representing a range of possible scales, heat sources and network archetypes that can form viable low temperature heat networks.
Replicability – developing a methodology that can be followed by others in the future to update results and further heat decarbonisation objectives.
Elements excluded from the national assessment
Table 1 lists the main types of low temperature heat network opportunity that are excluded from the national assessment for reasons of data unavailability, output useability, dependence on local energy planning outcomes and/or the need for focus on ‘mainstream’ and lower-risk opportunities.
Excluded type of opportunity
Justification of exclusion
Existing low temperature heat networks
Data unavailability
Isolated smaller-scale low temperature heat network schemes
Output useability – see Section 4.2 and Appendix A Section 4.2.3
Low temperature heat networks that could be installed to serve groups of new buildings
Data unavailability
Low temperature heat networks that would be made viable by the fact that they serve cooling customers as well as heating customers (“ambient loop heat networks”)
Data unavailability (although some potential cooling customers have been identified)
Low temperature heat networks involving inter-building distances of more than 1 km
Need for focus on ‘mainstream’ and lower-risk opportunities – see Sections 4.2 and Appendix A Section 4.2.1.4
Smaller-scale opportunity delineation within areas of very high heat demand or very high property counts
Dependence on local energy planning outcomes – see Section 4.3 and Appendix A Section 4.2.4
Table 1: Summary of elements known to be excluded from the national assessment
Summary of methodology
This section summarises how the assessment identifies and characterises potential opportunities for low temperature heat networks.
The methodology for the national assessment was not developed in isolation. Several opportunities were created for stakeholders to consider and provide feedback on the methodological approach and many of the most influential decisions that were made. Stakeholder engagement covered the ways that information is presented and concepts communicated, in addition to the analytical processes that produce information outputs.
This chapter summarises the methodology in non-technical language, focusing on the concepts used rather than the sequential actions performed. Limitations of the research are discussed at the end of this chapter. Fuller detail of the methodological approach, justification of the decisions made, and the steps executed is set out in Appendix A.
The key data sets used as inputs were the Scotland Heat Map 2022, Home Analytics v4.1, Non-Domestic Analytics v2.0 and Green Heat in Greenspaces, supported by various Ordnance Survey and open government datasets. Input datasets were assessed in terms of data quality and the risks associated with uncertainty and inaccurate data. Where required, mitigating actions were taken. Mitigating responses included imposing limits on the influence of outlier heat demands and grouping quantitative data into bands to address concerns regarding the data’s consistency between different parts of Scotland.
The key outputs are geospatial polygons and point data that represent low temperature heat network opportunity locations, as well as some other features that help to enrich the understanding of the opportunities. Values in the datasets produced were aggregated to produce national and local summary results. Visual presentations of the data outputs were developed to enrich their interpretation and make them accessible to a wider audience.
The main steps followed included:
Proximity analysis using a large dataset of potentially suitable heat demands and their relative locations – resulting in groupings of nearby heat demands;
Application of constraints such as physical barriers and the size of the opportunities identified – resulting in geospatial features that represent Communal Opportunities, Multi-Building Opportunities and High Property Count Areas;
Characterising opportunities via integrating additional datasets and performing calculations which aggregate information relating to all the heat demands within each opportunity – resulting in datasets that enrich the geospatial features.
The methodology aimed to identify clusters of heat demands that correlate reasonably well with real-world opportunities for low temperature heat network deployment but aimed to minimise the influence of more subjective assumptions. This means applying a relatively small number of selection criteria in the proximity analysis and constraints application stages but attaching a much wider range of informative attributes to the groupings once they had been created. Attributes selected included (among other parameters) property tenure, existing heating fuel usage and existing heating systems. The attribute selection responded to user needs as expressed in stakeholder consultations. The geospatial data presentations give users the ability to zoom in on specific places and see information that helps them to investigate which buildings are likely to be able to connect to a network and which ones aren’t. The appended information will help stakeholders to understand how good a particular opportunity is compared to all the others in their region or in the whole country, according to their own views on what makes an opportunity ‘good’. Users can also filter the long list of opportunities in order to only focus on those which possess certain characteristics, such as those located in regions of more constrained electrical grid capacity or those featuring a certain percentage of properties which are electrically heated.
Quality assurance of the methodology and the assumptions made was carried out by the researchers, and separately by Scottish Government representatives. A more detailed description of quality assurance checks is provided in Section 6 of Appendix A.
Heat demand proximity analysis
At a nationwide scale, three elements make more difference than anything else to the strength of an opportunity for low temperature heat networks:
how close buildings or properties are together;
whether buildings are divided into flats and other types of units like shops; and
how much heat is needed by the properties.
The Scotland Heat Map dataset provides information on the locations of almost every building in Scotland, along with an estimate of how much heat each property needs (or in some cases, the heat it actually uses). To identify places where these elements come together in promising ways, we converted each property’s heat demand into a spatial distance proxy, representing the distance over which it may be viable to connect to neighbouring properties. The proxy represents an estimate of the real-world distance over which it could be viable for that property to share heat network infrastructure with a neighbour or neighbours. We designed a process that identifies when two or more properties’ proxy distances overlap, a circumstance that indicates that they could be part of the same low temperature heat network opportunity. This process generates many groupings of heat demands, each of which is reasonably ‘heat dense’.
Building inclusion and exclusion
Estimates for the heat demand of almost every building in Scotland are contained in the Scotland Heat Map (SHM). We removed around 10% of the heat demands from the dataset because they are unlikely to be able to benefit from a low temperature heat network connection:
all heat demands less than 5,000 kWh per year (for which another zero-emissions heating system is likely to be lowest cost); and
non-domestic heat demands with building use classifications that indicate a high likelihood that their heat demand is dominated by temperature requirements that exceed those which can normally be produced through networked heat pumps, or that are likely to have minimal or no heat demand. The list of excluded use classes is reported in Table 16 in Appendix A, Section 4.3.1.
We also removed heat demands which had been marked as likely to have issues in the dataset (for example, if the creators of the dataset considered that a building’s use classification indicated that it would not be expected to have a heat demand). The remaining SHM heat demand estimates were used for the calculation of the maximum connection distance for each of around 2.5 million properties in Scotland.
Domestic buildings’ suitability for networked heat pumps was not used as a criterion for excluding any heat demands from the analysis. It was assumed that there is a route to heat pump suitability for almost all domestic buildings. Where modifications are required (and in many instances they are not) they can include energy efficiency improvements and/or the upgrading of radiators and other types of heat emitter. High temperature ground source heat pumps (those able to output heat at more than 65°C) are an alternative way to successfully heat more challenging dwellings via low temperature heat networks.
Similarly, it was assumed that non-domestic buildings using energy for space heating and hot water generation are also almost always potentially suitable for connection to a low temperature heat network.
No screening was carried out by local authorities or other project partners.
Constraints on opportunity size and network reach
Our process mapped certain features of the physical world which are difficult and expensive for heat networks to cross – things like rivers, railways and big roads – so that they can exert constraints on how heat demands are grouped together into ‘opportunities’.
We determined that the national assessment would only map and characterise opportunities where at least ten homes could be connected to a network, or five buildings or units that are not homes. If there is a combination of homes and other types of property, a formula that weighs them up:
However, it is important to understand that low temperature heat networks can still be a good idea for smaller groups of buildings. A review of 34 operational Shared Ground Loop schemes in the UK (Barns et al., 2026) found that 13 of 34 (38%) schemes connected fewer than 20 heat pumps, with the minimum number of heat pumps being two. The restriction on size adopted in this research ensured that the number of opportunities identified was large but reasonable but does not imply that smaller schemes do not represent opportunities.
When identifying spatially dispersed opportunities, we made sure that the distance between buildings within an opportunity area does not risk being unrealistically large (while recognising that in exceptional circumstances, connections exceeding the 1 km threshold adopted could be feasible).
Distinct types of opportunity
An important distinction between two types of low temperature heat network concerns the number of buildings which are served by the network. Our process separated ‘Communal Opportunities’ (blocks of flats, tall tenement buildings and large multi-occupancy commercial buildings) from opportunities that consist of clusters of separate buildings.
Some areas in Scotland are particularly ‘heat dense’ – either they have a great number of heat demands close together, or there are multiple buildings present that demand especially large quantities of heat. Often both of these circumstances are present. These areas cover many of Scotland’s city centres and the centres of larger towns; they are also sometimes found in industrial areas or around very large hospitals. These areas often have significant overlap with the areas that have previously been identified as promising for the development of high temperature heat networks. Many options are likely to exist regarding the types and sizes of low temperature scheme that could be built within heat-dense zones. For example, a single large scheme could be viable – but it may also be possible to develop multiple smaller schemes or to develop in phases.
The proliferation of options for both high and low temperature heat networks means that it is particularly important that strategic energy planning is carried out before decisions are made about what should be built where. To avoid implying that any one technological solution is best within the more heat dense zones, and to recognise the possibility that many separate schemes could be developed within those areas, we separated them from smaller Multi-Building Opportunities. This was done simply on the basis of the number of heat demands (above or below 1,000). These areas with over 1,000 heat demands were referred to as High Property Count Areas (HPCAs).
It was found that the total heat demand of all properties within some HCPAs exceeded 100,000 MWh per year. This sub-group was referred to as High Heat Demand Areas. No Multi-Building Opportunities had total heat demands exceeding 100,000 MWh per year. Therefore, all High Heat Demand Areas were also High Property Count Areas.
Characterising opportunities
The previously described process of heat demand proximity analysis, barrier mapping, and opportunity classification generates a list of places where there are likely to be good prospects for constructing a low temperature heat network. (Whether or not a low temperature heat network is the best solution to decarbonising heat in that place has not been assessed through this research.) These places can be depicted on a map of Scotland or of a smaller area within Scotland, showing them either as singular points, as spatial areas or as indicators of the number and/or density of opportunities within a larger area.
In addition to the locations of opportunities, stakeholders have interest in other aspects of the spatial areas that they represent, the buildings within them and the people that live and work there. We researched what is most important for stakeholders through information-gathering workshops and a questionnaire. Wherever possible the data that is expected to be most valuable has been appended to the spatial datasets of opportunities such that a specific opportunity in a specific place is richly characterised. We generated quantitative summaries of the characteristics of opportunities across different geographical groupings, including the whole country and each local authority area.
Much less detailed characterising information was calculated for High Property Count Areas and High Heat Demand Areas than was the case for Multi-Building Opportunities. This choice reflects the fundamental difference between how larger and smaller opportunity groups should be approached. For larger groupings, including High Property Count Areas and High Heat Demand Areas, detailed local energy planning is essential to establish which low temperature heat network options exist and how they compare to other options. Furthermore, the large number of demands present in these areas means that aggregated information is less relevant and meaningful as an indicator of the characteristics of potential low temperature heat network schemes than is the case for smaller groupings of properties.
Linking heat sources to opportunities
A viable heat source for low temperature heat networks is present in almost all locations in Scotland. Closed loop boreholes are near-universally feasible and can be considered to be the default heat source for any of the opportunities identified (while recognising that space constraints may limit the amount of heat that can be extracted and supplied to a network). Open loop boreholes are less widely feasible but can offer significant advantages over closed loop boreholes. Often ground heat collectors of either type can be installed in close proximity to the heat demands connected to the network. In some circumstances, it can be beneficial to construct them at some distance from the heat users in order to access larger open spaces or more favourable construction conditions.
Where they exist and are feasible, alternative heat sources may offer capital and/or operating cost advantages over ground heat collectors. It may be feasible to use a mix of heat sources to supply larger-scale networks. Alternative heat sources include water bodies (rivers, lochs, the sea) and waste heat that can be captured from various industrial, built environment and waste management sources.
The viability of using a particular heat source to serve a particular heat network depends on, among other factors, the amount of heat that can be transferred and the distance over which a connecting pipe route must be constructed. A proximity analysis process was carried out to match non-contiguous (e.g. located at a distance) heat sources to low temperature heat network opportunities. The heat sources included in this process were green spaces, water bodies and waste heat. Where a heat source was found to be closer than the calculated maximum distance (capped at 1 km), it was ‘linked’ to the heat network opportunity and a set of characteristics appended to the geospatial feature that represents the opportunity. Separately, the linked waste heat sources were assembled into a dedicated dataset of geospatial points with characterising attributes.
Low temperature heat network archetypes
To enable an intuitive understanding of the diverse types of low temperature heat networks and their prevalence within the opportunities identified by the national assessment, we classified the opportunities as belonging to one or more ‘archetypes’. We used the list of archetypes presented in the South of Scotland Heat Network Prospectus (with minor modifications), which group networks according to geographic context and/or the socio-technical drivers that justify their development. Our methodology developed new logical and quantitative criteria for archetype classification, allowing thousands of opportunities to be classified automatically rather than manually.
A brief description of each archetype and the criteria for classifying an opportunity are:
Communal Opportunity – A network that could serve multiple properties within the same building. Communal Opportunities include blocks of flats, tall tenements and taller multi-property commercial buildings. These are identified where multiple heat demand records occupy the same building footprint polygon, and where the majority of records have building height (to the top of the walls) greater than 7.5 metres.
Multi-Building Opportunity – The counterpoint to a Communal Opportunity, i.e. a group that includes heat demands spread across several spatially separated buildings. Multi-Building Opportunities were defined as containing fewer than 1,000 individual heat demands.
Anchor Load-Led – A Multi-Building Opportunity that features one or more anchor load heat demands within its boundaries. Anchor loads are large heat users that can provide a network with higher revenue certainty and/or introduce economies of scale that benefit the network as a whole. For the purposes of the national assessment, an anchor load has been defined as a non-domestic building with an estimated annual heat demand exceeding 200 MWh per year (or 100 MWh per year if it is a public sector building).
Heat Source-Led – A Communal Opportunity or Multi-Building Opportunity that has been linked to a nearby but non-contiguous heat source (waste heat, blue space or green space).
Street Scale – A Multi-Building Opportunity covering a total area of less than 3,000 square metres.
Urban Neighbourhood Scale – A Multi-Building Opportunity covering a total area of more than 3,000 square metres but less than 100,000 square metres. At least 80% of heat demands in the cluster must be classed as ‘urban’. Occasionally, this archetype covers entire settlements.
While High Property Count Areas and High Heat Demand Areas (introduced in Section 4.3) are not low temperature heat network archetypes as such, their definitions should be considered alongside the above archetypes. This is because they effectively place an upper limit on the scale of any of the above archetypes (as they have been defined by this research):
High Property Count Area – A grouping of more than 1,000 heat demands identified through the heat demand proximity analysis process.
High Heat Demand Area – A grouping of heat demands whose total heat demand exceeds 100,000 MWh per year. (This national assessment found that all High Heat Demand Areas were also High Property Count Areas.)
Other characteristics
In addition to the characterising information described earlier in this chapter, data concerning the following topics was added to the geospatial features that represented Communal Opportunities and Multi-Building Opportunities:
Information about the locality: local authority, Data Zone, urban or rural classification, on- or off-gas status, indicators of the status of the electricity grid
Information about buildings: counts of domestic and non-domestic properties, building age, heritage status, categorisations familiar to local authorities
Heat demand information: total heat demand, statistics about existing heating fuels and heating systems
Social information: measures of deprivation, information about social tenure versus other types, and estimates of the likelihood of fuel poverty
Information on heat sources: number of potentially suitable waste heat sources, green spaces and water bodies matched with the opportunity
Detailed data on geological favourability is available through the British Geological Survey’s online UK Geothermal Platform. Although integration with the national assessment was initially considered, data sharing limitations prevented the inclusion of UK Geothermal Platform data within the research’s data outputs. Users of the national assessment data outputs are encouraged to access the UK Geothermal Platform to obtain information about the estimated yield of closed loop and open loop boreholes within a geographic area of interest. The capacity of identically specified closed loop boreholes could vary by a factor of two between the opportunity locations identified through this research, although about around three quarters of opportunities lie within 10% of the mean capacity. Only a minority (less than 2%) of opportunities are located in areas where the dataset indicates that there is likely to be potential for open loop boreholes.
Limitations of the research
Input datasets
Three main datasets drive the identification of opportunity groupings and provide the majority of the characterising data that applies to them: Home Analytics, Non-Domestic Analytics and the Scotland Heat Map.
Other than its location relative to others, the estimated heat demand of a particular address is the main parameter that determines whether it is included in an opportunity grouping or not. The vast majority of the heat demand estimates in the dataset used are modelled values rather than measured values, although the type of modelling involved (and its inherent uncertainty) varies. Uncertainty in the heat demand estimates could lead to fewer (or more) opportunities being identified than would have been the case had more accurate data been available. The size of the opportunities identified would have also been affected. However, in our methodology an evidenced general trend for overestimated heat demands is counteracted by the selection of reasonably conservative assumptions for proximity analysis.
Heat demand estimates for non-domestic properties are much more likely to have been inferred from very basic information, and so lower confidence can be placed in their modelled heat demand estimates in general. The heterogeneity of non-domestic properties further reduces the confidence that can be placed in their heat demand estimates regardless of the type of modelling involved.
Misclassification of buildings in terms of use will have occasionally led to their exclusion from the dataset used to identify opportunities. This would have resulted in their exclusion from opportunity groupings and could have potentially (but infrequently) caused entire opportunities to be missed. Misclassification will have occasionally led to the erroneous inclusion of buildings that are not actually good candidates for connection to low temperature heat networks. Where this has occurred, identified opportunities will have been more numerous and/or larger than they should have been.
The datasets are unavoidably biased towards newer, urban properties that have recently been built, bought, sold or had significant retrofit work completed (thus triggering the requirement for an Energy Performance Certificate to be produced and lodged). This means that, in general, there is lower confidence in the data reported for rural areas.
A significant proportion (around half) of the other characteristics that derive from Home Analytics, Non-Domestic Analytics and the Scotland Heat Map and are calculated for or applied to opportunities are modelled data rather than measured data.
Occasional mismatches between how the three datasets represent (or do not represent) particular properties are infrequently responsible for proportions not summing to 100% or components not summing to the exact numerical total expected. These inaccuracies are generally negligible in scale in comparison to the values they affect.
Further comment on the accuracy of the Scotland Heat Map heat demand estimates, and the opportunity characteristics that derive from it and its related datasets, is made in Appendix A.
Assumptions
The assumptions for which uncertainty has the greatest impact on the results are those used in the proximity analysis to form groupings of buildings that represent low temperature heat network opportunity locations. These assumptions are explored in more detail in Section 4.2.1.1 of Appendix A.
Further influential assumptions concern the distances across which heat sources can be matched to opportunities, and the building use types that were assumed to be unsuitable for connection to a low temperature heat network. These topics are discussed respectively in Sections 4.2.7 and 4.3.1 of Appendix A.
Other limitations
The elements excluded from the national assessment are listed in Section 3.5, along with justification for their exclusion.
Findings from the research process
This chapter summarises key conceptual findings from the research process, including insights from previous work and stakeholder engagement.
We focus on the conceptual findings developed through a desk study of relevant past approaches (both research and policy implementation initiatives) and a series of stakeholder engagement activities. These findings informed both the development of the methodology and the formation of conclusions from the results of the assessment.
It complements the quantitative results to be presented in Chapter 6.
Relevant past approaches and ongoing initiatives
The First National Assessment of Potential Heat Network Zones (Zero Waste Scotland, 2022a) and the Methodology guidance documents produced to support the development of LHEES introduced a standardised methodology for identifying opportunities for high-temperature heat networks within local areas or at a national scale. The First National Assessment and the earlier stages of heat network zone identification in the LHEES development process both represent top-down, data-driven approaches. They used heat demand proximity analysis as a key tool for grouping individual heat-using properties into proto-networks or zones in which it was thought that high temperature heat networks had the potential to be viable.
In their work for the Argyll and Bute LHEES (Argyll and Bute Council, 2024), Zero Waste Scotland and Buro Happold applied a similar heat demand proximity analysis method to identify Shared Ground Loop heat network opportunities. Adapting it to low temperature heat networks, the researchers selected different assumptions regarding the relationship between a property’s heat demand and the maximum distance over which it could be linked to another within a grouping. The geographic focus – smaller towns and villages in Argyll and Bute – meant that physical barriers to heat network construction were not often present within the opportunity groupings that were identified, and that areas with very high property counts or very high total heat demands were not encountered. Heat sources other than nearby ground heat collectors were also not investigated.
In 2025, South of Scotland Enterprise, Scottish Borders Council and Dumfries and Galloway Council published the South of Scotland Heat Networks Prospectus (South of Scotland Enterprise, 2025). This work identified 12 low temperature heat network opportunities across the region, spanning a range of sizes, heat sources and built environment contexts. The Prospectus classified these 12 opportunities as belonging to one or more low temperature heat network archetypes. The list of 7 archetypes included settlement-wide, urban neighbourhood, new developments, anchor load-led, blocks of flats, street and heat source-led.
Nesta’s work on Clean Heat Neighbourhoods (ongoing at the time of publication) is exploring how open data can be used to develop neighbourhood-scale plans for transitioning to clean heat. Low temperature heat networks are one of the technologies assessed in Nesta’s work, which has also developed an approach which estimates which low-carbon heating technologies (also including high temperature heat networks and individual heat pumps) are suitable for each domestic address in Great Britain.
Stakeholder views
The development of the methodology for the national assessment was supported by a multi-stage programme of stakeholder engagement involving a broad range of organisations. A series of four stakeholder events were delivered during the research period, comprising two workshops in August 2025 and two workshops in November 2025. In addition, an online questionnaire and a series of one-to-one meetings supplemented the findings from the workshops. More detail is available in Section 4.1.1 of Appendix A.
Concepts presented
Stakeholders were given an overview of our proposals with respect to the research objectives. They heard our interpretation of who the users of the research outputs might be, and what specific needs they have. We introduced some relevant existing research approaches and policy implementation activities that offered lessons for our work.
The strategic approach taken: minimising the number of subjective factors that influence opportunity identification, but richly characterising the opportunities identified so that users can perform their own screening and prioritisation.
The proposed mechanics of the heat demand proximity analysis, and proposals for the key assumptions that underlie it (explored in Section 4.2.1 in Appendix A). These assumptions are among the most critical decisions made regarding the national assessment methodology because they determine the distance over which each heat demand is able to connect to neighbours. In turn, this influences which groupings are identified and where.
How we proposed to deal with taller, multi-occupancy buildings like flats.
The proposed method for matching low temperature heat network opportunities with potentially suitable heat sources that are located some distance away from them (explored in Section 4.2.7 in Appendix A).
The formats that the research outputs were envisaged to take.
Stakeholders were presented with some initial outputs from test runs of the opportunity identification and characterisation process. This allowed discussion of the degree to which the opportunities found matched with stakeholders’ expectations, and the development of ideas regarding visual presentation.
Outcomes
In the earlier of two stakeholder consultation exercises, stakeholders were able to confirm that the datasets that we proposed to use were fit for purpose. That said, some limitations of those datasets were identified. Additional data sources were suggested for consideration.
Stakeholders identified common traits of promising opportunities that included the presence of anchor loads (schools, NHS sites), off-gas areas, and potential for community ownership. Viability was stated to be influenced by grid capacity, geology, visual impact, and retrofit feasibility. High social impact and alignment with existing programmes (such as External Wall Insulation programmes) were also felt to be strongly beneficial.
Participants in workshops gave their view on terminology, leading to the adoption of terms like Communal Opportunity, Multi-Building Opportunity and High Property Count Areas in this report and the project’s data outputs.
Stakeholders stressed the importance of the outputs of the national assessment being tailored to different audiences. These include use cases such as feasibility funding, community awareness, and strategic planning. Stakeholders were able to suggest some of the evaluation metrics that they would use to assess low temperature heat network opportunities. Information has been provided as part of the project’s data outputs to enable some of these to be directly assessed. Others were not possible to include but have informed our conclusions regarding how users can improve upon our outputs with locally relevant information, or how further work at a national scale could enhance the aims of this research.
Overall, the stakeholder engagement activities have provided evidence that:
the methodology applied to deliver the national assessment is appropriate, and likely to achieve ‘buy-in’ from users of its results;
the major user groups and their needs have been considered when planning the research outputs;
the design of the main visualisations of output data is adequately clear, enabling address-level precision to users with access to the Scotland Heat Map dataset (and to all users, albeit with lower accuracy).
Factors influencing opportunity viability and benefits
Through desk research and stakeholder engagement we developed a list of the main factors that influence the viability of low temperature heat networks, based on available national-scale datasets. Some of the factors can have both positive and negative impacts on network viability, or will be assigned very different levels of importance to different stakeholders. The factors identified are listed in Table 2, which arranges them roughly in order of how objective or subjective their impact is. How the methodology approached each of these factors is discussed in Section 4.2 of Appendix A.
The potential for low temperature heat networks to benefit from electricity system flexibility (for example by the charging of thermal storage) was queried by stakeholders, but it was concluded that this was not of strong relevance to the national assessment.
More objective factors, clearer relationship with viability
Presence of grid or micro-grid electricity supplies[1]
Proximity of heat-using properties relative to their total annual heat demands
Presence of physical barriers to the installation of heat network infrastructure
Presence of anchor loads (properties that use large amounts of heat)
Geological favourability, where sub-ground conditions are known (for ground source systems)
Presence of potentially suitable waste heat sources
Presence of potentially suitable green space and/or water bodies
Number of connections within a low temperature heat network
More subjective factors, less clear relationship with viability (may be positive or negative)
Presence of cooling demand
Property tenure
Property age and heritage designations
Interaction with the planning of other local energy infrastructure, including high temperature heat networks
Current and future status of local and regional electricity grid infrastructure
Existing heating fuels and heating systems (including internal heat distribution systems and heat emitters like radiators)
Building energy efficiency
Presence and severity of fuel poverty
Table 2: Factors influencing low temperature heat network opportunity viability and benefits, loosely arranged from most objective to most subjective
Policy-relevant findings
Carbon emissions reduction potential
The national assessment aims to support the Scottish Government’s priority to reduce greenhouse gas emissions in the building sector. Low temperature heat networks in each of the opportunity locations identified in the national assessment have the potential to reduce greenhouse gas emissions, provided that the network is replacing polluting or less efficient heating systems. The calculation of greenhouse gas emissions reduction potential is straightforward but requires a timescale to be selected for the assessment. This is because the electricity grid is in the process of decarbonising, so the emissions associated with electricity used by heat pumps (and network circulation pumps, if present) depend on the point of assessment. Another necessary assumption is the average efficiency (or seasonal performance factor) of the heat pumps that would be connected to the network.
A further complication is presented by the fact that, on average, the real-world heat consumption of domestic properties is lower than the estimated heat demands present in the dataset used. If scaled up to a large group of buildings, a region, or the country, this could result in an overestimation of the carbon savings potential of low temperature heat networks. It is also reasonable to assume that not all properties within an area covered by a low temperature heat network opportunity will actually connect to a developed scheme.
The characterising attributes of the opportunities identified include calculated total heat demands within the opportunity disaggregated by current heating fuel (mains gas, electricity, other). Users can apply derating to these totals if desired before multiplying them by their chosen emissions factors to calculate the ‘business as usual’ emissions from heating against which heat network emissions can be compared.
Proximity to existing and planned high temperature heat networks
Low temperature heat network opportunities often have significant overlap with the areas previously identified as promising for the development of high temperature heat networks. Within any of the areas of opportunity for low temperature heat networks identified by our research, it is possible that high temperature heat networks already exist or may be planned to be built. However, this is more likely to be the case in urban centres. In these places, low temperature heat networks may still be viable around the ‘edges’ of the high temperature networks. This finding is supported by Barns et al. (2026), who mapped the city of Leeds’s indicative Heat Network Zone alongside its existing city centre heat network and 30 separate Shared Ground Loop schemes, observing the low temperature heat networks existing outside of or close to the periphery of a high temperature heat network zone.
Proximity to existing and/or planned high temperature heat networks was not used as a criterion for the identification of low temperature heat network opportunities, nor was it possible to incorporate information on potential overlaps when characterising opportunities. Readers and users of the project data outputs are encouraged to view them alongside the latest available information about high temperature heat network locations (existing and prospective) from sources such as LHEES, published information about schemes that are in development and Heat Network Zone designations.
Potential for community-led development or community ownership
Low temperature heat networks can be developed by communities, and it is also possible for communities to own and operate them in a similar way to other local energy infrastructure. The potential for community involvement in low temperature heat networks is difficult to assess through a data-driven approach. However, the results of the national assessment could be compared with maps of active community energy and local climate action organisations to identify locations where there might be potential.
Urban or rural geography
A typical feature of urban locations that makes low temperature heat networks more viable is higher heat demand density (more properties and more total heat consumption per metre of street or per square metre of neighbourhood). On the other hand, rural areas can offer lower costs for the installation of buried pipework. This is thanks to them typically having more unpaved public areas, and simpler layouts for existing buried services like water mains and electricity and communication cables. Where there is ample green space, ground source heat collectors located in trenches (rather than boreholes) are an option. Trenched solutions can reduce costs and increase viability.
Urban and rural communities experience different challenges for decarbonising which are of interest to policymakers. Firms involved in the construction of low temperature heat networks may view urban and rural locations differently in terms of the projects that they target. The national assessment results report the percentage of heat demands within an opportunity grouping that are classified as urban.
With some notable exceptions in the Highlands and Islands, urban areas in Scotland are normally served by gas networks. Many rural areas are not. Scottish Government policy and individual LHEES distinguish between ‘on gas’ and ‘off gas’ buildings. The percentage of heat demands that are ‘off gas’ within each opportunity grouping was calculated and reported as an opportunity characteristic.
Summary of results from the national assessment
This chapter summarises the key quantitative results of the national assessment, including the scale, distribution and characteristics of identified opportunities.
The national assessment has generated datasets which represent the low temperature heat network opportunities identified, as well as some features that further enrich the understanding of those opportunities. This chapter presents quantitative results that summarise the opportunities (and their characteristics) across different geographical groupings, including the whole country and each local authority area. It also presents a selection of charts that communicate the distributions of results across different parameters. The results presented in this chapter should be viewed with consideration of the caveats expressed in Section 3.1.1 and elsewhere in preceding chapters. Importantly, they represent a first-pass assessment of low temperature heat network opportunities rather than a definitive list. They derive from national-scale datasets only (not incorporating more localised information) and the assessment carried out is very much less detailed than a feasibility study. The low temperature heat network opportunities have not been compared against other zero-emissions heating solutions, and represent potential technological solutions rather than optimum solutions.
Opportunity numbers, heat demands and property counts
The national assessment identified a total of 11,109 Multi-Building Opportunities and 16,985 Communal Opportunities. These opportunity groupings represent around 500,000 and 400,000 dwellings respectively. There are around 50,000 non-domestic properties within each type of opportunity. The heat demand represented by these opportunities combined amounts to over 20 TWh/yr.
Table 3 summarises the number of opportunities identified in each local authority area.
Region
Local authority
Number of Multi-Building Opportunities
Number of Communal Opportunities
Total number of opportunities
Scotland
Dumfries and Galloway
475
158
633
South
Scottish Borders
399
238
637
Highland and
Argyll and Bute
416
298
714
Islands
Comhairle nan Eilean Siar
65
0
65
Highland
781
262
1,043
Orkney Islands
45
11
56
Shetland Islands
46
16
62
Glasgow and
East Ayrshire
339
138
477
Strathclyde
East Dunbartonshire
342
155
497
East Renfrewshire
223
191
414
Glasgow City
397
4223
4,620
Inverclyde
145
449
594
North Ayrshire
472
226
698
North Lanarkshire
678
556
1,234
Renfrewshire
264
722
986
South Ayrshire
292
210
502
South Lanarkshire
698
955
1,653
West Dunbartonshire
227
408
635
Aberdeen
Aberdeen City
198
1471
1,669
And North
Aberdeenshire
534
159
693
East
Moray
212
60
272
Edinburgh
City of Edinburgh
614
3066
3,680
and Lothians
East Lothian
238
175
413
Midlothian
180
71
251
West Lothian
352
254
606
Tayside,
Angus
322
207
529
Central and
Clackmannanshire
139
55
194
Fife
Dundee City
92
880
972
Falkirk
315
284
599
Fife
1,011
596
1,607
Perth and Kinross
331
330
661
Stirling
243
153
396
Opportunities
spanning multiple
24
8
32
Total
11,109
16,985
28,094
Table 3: Total numbers of Multi-Building and Communal Opportunities by local authority
Figure 3: Locations of potential opportunities (Multi-Building Opportunities and Communal Opportunities combined)
Region
Local authority
Total heat demand of Multi-Building Opportunities (MWh)
Total heat demand of Communal Opportunities (MWh)
Scotland
Dumfries and Galloway
709,377
51,143
South
Scottish Borders
472,610
102,274
Highland and
Argyll and Bute
503,311
84,467
Islands
Comhairle nan Eilean Siar
68,016
0
Highland
1,092,008
85,203
Orkney
108,410
3,644
Shetland
132,302
4,426
Glasgow and
East Ayrshire
321,202
38,852
Strathclyde
East Dunbartonshire
321,352
28,164
East Renfrewshire
150,170
42,159
Glasgow City
909,987
2,175,389
Inverclyde
223,439
126,560
North Ayrshire
432,086
81,850
North Lanarkshire
549,021
147,632
Renfrewshire
384,239
221,667
South Ayrshire
344,164
57,670
South Lanarkshire
662,284
191,348
West Dunbartonshire
269,856
85,847
Aberdeen
Aberdeen City
231,528
478,742
And North
Aberdeenshire
914,718
44,130
East
Moray
387,631
20,997
Edinburgh
City of Edinburgh
735,461
1,556,994
and Lothians
East Lothian
287,204
45,359
Midlothian
212,576
13,102
West Lothian
439,929
52,537
Tayside,
Angus
358,895
67,943
Central and
Clackmannanshire
132,185
11,297
Fife
Dundee City
128,287
299,722
Falkirk
321,237
73,368
Fife
1,060,077
218,985
Perth and Kinross
557,970
104,302
Stirling
363,906
60,861
Opportunities
spanning multiple
214,523
6,446
Total
13,999,962
6,583,080
Table 4: Total heat demand within Multi-Building and Communal Opportunities by local authority
Figure 4: Total heat demand of potential opportunities (Multi-Building Opportunities and Communal Opportunities combined) within local authority boundaries
Table 3 reports the number of opportunities of each type by the local authority within which they are located. Low temperature heat network opportunities can be found in each of Scotland’s 32 local authority areas. The more sparsely populated areas like the Orkney Islands, Shetland Islands and Comhairle nan Eilean Siar (Western Isles) still contain more than 50 opportunities each. The larger cities each contain several thousand opportunity groupings. The map in Figure 3 illustrates the geographic spread of the opportunities identified.
Table 4 presents the total heat demand of each type of opportunity in each local authority area. This data confirms that, while the greatest potential in terms of total heat demand can be found in the larger cities, there is potential for supplying very significant amounts of heat through low temperature heat networks elsewhere in the country. Highland, Fife and Aberdeenshire stand out as areas with large quantities of heat demand contained within Multi-Building Opportunities. Figure 4 presents the total heat demand within both types of opportunity by local authority, using colour coding to differentiate between the areas with the lowest, medium and highest totals.
Figure 5: Number of potential low temperature heat network opportunities, by scale of total heat demand within opportunity (within the range 0 – 1,000 MWh per year)
Figure 6: Number of potential low temperature heat network opportunities, by scale of total heat demand within opportunity (within the range 1,000 – 10,000+ MWh per year)
Figure 5 and Figure 6 show the distribution of the low temperature heat network opportunities by scale, grouping opportunities according to their total heat demand. Around a third of opportunities (around 10,000) have a total heat demand between 100 and 200 MWh per year each. This is roughly equivalent to the total heat demand of 10-20 typical 3-bedroom homes.
The majority (89%) of opportunities contain fewer than 100 dwellings and fewer than 10 non-domestic properties. These represent 38% of the heat demand of all opportunities combined.
The proportion containing fewer than 100 dwellings and fewer than 10 non-domestic properties is very similar for both Communal Opportunities and Multi-Building Opportunities (90% and 87% respectively). More than half contain less than 20 dwellings.
Table 5 presents the total number of properties located within each type of opportunity in each local authority area. It confirms that Glasgow and Edinburgh contain the greatest numbers of properties included within both types of opportunity combined (but dominated by Communal Opportunities). Highland and Fife have the largest number of properties contained within Multi-Building Opportunities.
Region
Local authority
Total number of properties within Multi-Building Opportunities
Total number of properties within Communal Opportunities
Scotland
Dumfries and Galloway
26,377
2,476
South
Scottish Borders
19,360
4,305
Highland and
Argyll and Bute
17,118
5,682
Islands
Comhairle nan Eilean Siar
2,111
0
Highland
36,765
4,139
Orkney
3,066
133
Shetland
3,516
212
Glasgow and
East Ayrshire
15,802
2,167
Strathclyde
East Dunbartonshire
13,328
2,735
East Renfrewshire
6,796
3,214
Glasgow City
24,542
146,839
Inverclyde
8,221
10,877
North Ayrshire
21,583
4,958
North Lanarkshire
29,882
11,967
Renfrewshire
12,065
16,493
South Ayrshire
13,339
3,722
South Lanarkshire
30,063
17,238
West Dunbartonshire
11,205
8,357
Aberdeen
Aberdeen City
9,026
38,683
And North
Aberdeenshire
33,679
2,352
East
Moray
14,106
823
Edinburgh
City of Edinburgh
25,341
111,513
and Lothians
East Lothian
12,930
3,675
Midlothian
8,881
1,038
West Lothian
17,604
3,690
Tayside,
Angus
13,293
3,585
Central and
Clackmannanshire
7,254
858
Fife
Dundee City
3,972
21,752
Falkirk
13,419
5,575
Fife
43,392
10,584
Perth and Kinross
20,385
6,994
Stirling
14,441
3,656
Opportunities
spanning multiple
4,945
121
Total
537,807
460,413
Table 5: Total number of properties within opportunities by local authority
High Property Count Areas and High Heat Demand Areas
High Property Count Areas (HPCAs) were found in all of Scotland’s 32 local authority areas. There are HPCAs in every ‘Large Urban Area’ (areas with more than 125,000 population[2]) and the majority of ‘Other Urban Areas’ (areas with 10,000 to 124,999 population). Some ‘Accessible Small Towns’ also have HPCAs.
The HCPAs with heat demands exceeding 100,000 MWh per year are also High Heat Demand Areas. Table 6 reports the number and characteristics of the High Property Count Areas and High Heat Demand Areas (the High Heat Demand Area results being a subset of the High Property Count Area results).
High Property Count Areas
High Heat Demand Areas
Number of areas identified
345
45
Total annual heat demand in MWh per year
20,486,063
7,126,080
Total number of properties within areas
1,024,374
324,911
of which domestic properties
926,210
294,237
of which non-domestic properties
98,164
30,674
Table 6: High Property Count Areas and High Heat Demand Areas results
Figure 7 shows the distribution of HPCAs according to their total annual heat demand.
Figure 7: Number of High Property Count and High Heat Demand Areas, by total heat demand
Low temperature heat network archetypes
Table 7 summarises the results of the national assessment, broken down according to the low temperature heat networks defined in Section 4.4.2. There is significant overlap between the groups belonging to each Multi-Building Opportunity archetype, which means that the disaggregated figures do not sum to the totals that apply to their parent category. This is because it is common for more than one archetype to apply to a Multi-Building Opportunity.
It can be seen that a little over a fifth of Multi-Building Opportunities include one or more anchor loads. Half of these include public sector anchor loads, while three-quarters include non-public sector anchor loads. The Anchor Load-Led archetype was not applicable to Communal Opportunities.
More than 85% of opportunities were matched with one or more nearby green spaces. 22,348 (80%) of opportunities had been matched with between 1 and 5 green spaces. A few were matched with a large number of green spaces, with two instances featuring 74 and 96 green spaces matches representing the extremes. In the locations with large numbers of matches, many of the green spaces involved had relatively small areas (although still larger than 1,000 square metres). They included areas of roadside grass, open areas within industrial estates and around public buildings, and patches of uncultivated grassland or scrubland. The number of green space matches is a guide to the diversity of possible places where ground heat collection infrastructure could be located. However, it is not indicative of the total heat generation potential associated with green space within or close to a low temperature heat network opportunity.
Overall, 3,668 opportunities (13%) were matched with one or more blue spaces. Most of these were matched with 1, 2 or 3 water bodies. A small number (52) of opportunities were matched with between 4 and 10 water bodies.
In total, 132 opportunities were matched with waste heat sources, with the majority of these being matched with one nearby site where waste heat is expected to be available. Most of these matched waste heat sources have estimated supply capacities of up to 1,000 MWh per year. However, a minority of the matched sources are estimated to be able to supply up to 10,000 MWh per year, and a few in excess of 30,000 MWh per year.
Number identified
Total heat demand within group (MWh per year)
Number of properties within group
All low temperature heat network opportunities
28,094
20,583,042
998,220
of which Multi Building Opportunities
11,109
13,999,962
537,807
of which Communal Opportunities
16,985
6,583,080
460,413
High Property Count Areas
345
20,486,063
1,024,374
High Heat Demand Areas
45
7,126,080
324,911
Multi Building Opportunities
11,109
13,999,962
537,807
of which Heat Source-Led archetype
9,670
13,309,834
514,337
of which Anchor Load-Led archetype
2,395
11,349,534
393,030
of which Street Scale archetype
5,149
913,243
65,006
of which Urban Neighbourhood Scale archetype
2,752
1,971,540
90,993
Communal Opportunities
16,985
6,583,080
460,413
of which Heat Source-Led archetype
15,501
5,915,943
420,343
Heat Source-Led archetype
25,171
19,225,776
934,680
of which matched with greenspace
24,504
18,450,639
916,717
of which matched with a water body
3,668
7,476,261
261,550
of which matched with a waste heat source
132
503,487
13,067
Table 7: Summary of national results broken down by archetypes
Characteristics of properties within opportunities
Socially rented properties can represent good opportunities for low temperature heat network development thanks to the prevalence of concentrated ownership by organisations with strong incentives to decarbonise their stock. Across the opportunities identified in the model, 40% contain no socially rented dwellings. Among those that do, Communal Opportunities are more likely to include socially rented homes, and for the proportion of homes that are socially rented to be higher. The socially rented proportion averages 36% of dwellings within Communal Opportunities, compared to 16% within Multi-Building Opportunities. 10% of Communal Opportunities (1,557) were found to be wholly socially rented compared to 1% of Multi-Building Opportunities (133).
Fuel poverty is a social dimension that is important to many organisations involved in energy planning and the development of low temperature heat networks. Estimates of the likelihood of domestic properties’ occupants experiencing fuel poverty are available in the Home Analytics dataset. However, the bases of these estimates are not nationally consistent. To reduce the impact of local variability, the datasets generated by the national assessment express fuel poverty prevalence in terms of Lower, Middle and Higher bands rather than quantitatively. These bands were designed to contain roughly equal numbers of low temperature heat network opportunities, such that the Lower band contains the third of opportunities that have the lowest overall fuel poverty prevalence (and so on).
Figure 8: Number of potential low temperature heat network opportunities within each fuel poverty band defined by the national assessment
Figure 8 shows the distribution of opportunities across the fuel poverty bands. The Lower, Middle and Higher bands account for around 303,000, 308,000 and 288,000 dwellings respectively. The relatively even distribution of dwellings across the three bands is a result of their definition: the Lower, Middle and Higher bands refer to the expected average rates of fuel poverty relative to all low temperature heat network opportunities. The bands allow those opportunities with the highest or lowest expected prevalence of fuel poverty to be identified. However, more granular fuel poverty data (such as that available through the Home Analytics dataset) is required to understand the probability of fuel poverty affecting dwellings within an opportunity grouping.
It is notable that Multi-Building Opportunities are over-represented in the Lower band (e.g. these opportunities tend to involve groupings with lower overall prevalence of fuel poverty). The estimated average fuel poverty prevalence within Communal Opportunities is more likely to place them in the Higher band (higher overall prevalence of fuel poverty). This finding conforms to expectations, given that many social homes (often occupied by people with low incomes) are located in blocks of flats.
Figure 9: Number of potential low temperature heat network opportunities, by the proportion of properties estimated to currently use gas for heating
Figure 9 illustrates the distribution of the identified opportunities according to the percentage of properties within them that are estimated to currently use mains gas for heating. Well over half of the opportunity groupings are dominated by gas as a heating fuel. However, a notable proportion comprises groups in which no properties use mains gas. Many of these are Multi-Building Opportunities in areas where there is no mains gas grid, or Communal Opportunities in blocks of flats that are electrically heated.
1,724 opportunities (1,461 Communal Opportunities and 263 Multi-Building Opportunities) consist of groupings in which 100% of properties are electrically heated. Electrically heated homes with high heat demands are of particular relevance to fuel poverty, since these homes tend to experience the highest heating costs (or to be underheated in response to high heating costs).
Potential uses of the results
The data outputs produced by the research can be used for purposes that include local and national energy planning, project identification and prioritisation, public engagement (including awareness-raising), business planning and strategy development, knowledge-building and as an input to future research.
Figure 10 depicts the typical development process for a low temperature heat network project, including some of the stages that may be undertaken. The process contains the same activities as are typically undertaken for high temperature heat network projects. This national assessment falls into the very first stage in the process, which is one of strategy development, mapping and masterplanning. Multiple options remain under consideration at this point, including different types, scales and configurations of heat network as well as other low-carbon heat technologies.
The process depicted in Figure 10 is not prescriptive. It is frequently the case – especially for smaller and simpler low temperature heat network projects – that many of the activities and stages shown in the diagram can be undertaken at low cost and with a light touch. Decision-making by private sector heat network developers or property owners engaged in decarbonising their stock might make reference to energy strategies and plans developed by others, and might combine feasibility work with business case development. Multiple stages of design may not be required for lower risk schemes.
Figure 10: Low temperature heat network project development process (adapted from Heat Network Support Unit materials)
The high-level statistics and charts presented in the previous section could be used to raise the profile of low temperature heat networks as building decarbonisation technology option, and therefore as a means to achieve the objectives of LHEES and national-scale targets. The information presented about opportunity characteristics only scratches the surface of the data that is available regarding each individual opportunity or the aggregated opportunities in an area. Users of the detailed data outputs can use this information to select priority opportunities for further development work. The detailed data may also serve as an input to energy planning processes that consider multiple technologies and energy vectors and the relationships between them. For some organisations, access to the datasets will require signing of and compliance with a data sharing agreement.
Data on the favourability of specific areas for shallow geothermal heat (closed loop and open loop boreholes) will be important for the further assessment of low temperature heat network opportunities in locations where other heat sources are not available. The British Geological Survey’s UK Geothermal Platform is a freely available web-based data resource that could be used to understand the potential yield from underground boreholes in the vicinity of an opportunity.
Characteristics generated by the national assessment that could be used to prioritise places for low temperature heat network development include (among many others):
The density of opportunities of any type, or of a particular type, could inform supply chain participants’ strategies with respect to geographic focus or types of environments that offer growth potential.
Social deprivation and fuel poverty probability indicators could enable the identification of places where low temperature heat networks might be able to have a positive impact on fuel poverty.
Opportunities with a high proportion of socially rented dwellings may represent favourable locations due to the likely concentration of property ownership among organisations with strong drivers to decarbonise heating systems.
The prevalence of polluting heating systems could enable prioritisation based on potential carbon savings.
Priorities for further work
The following list identifies priorities for further work that have been informed by desk research undertaken in support of the national assessment; stakeholder engagement; and analysis of the limitations of the national assessment methodology. More detailed potential improvements are explored in Section 7 of Appendix A.
Develop improved evidence regarding the relationship between properties’ heat demands and the maximum distances over which it is viable for them to connect to a low temperature heat network. Conduct sensitivity analysis on the assumptions that the national assessment used to understand the impact on the number and scale of opportunities identified.
Incorporate more recently-updated heat demand and opportunity characterisation data.
Expand and update the list of waste heat sources from which potential matches with low temperature heat networks are assessed. In particular, a larger number of wastewater treatment plants as well as recently-constructed and planned data centres could be added along with estimates of their heat supply potential.
Develop methodologies to analyse the likelihood of construction or relative attractiveness of specific opportunities.
Improve the evidence base around key topics identified by stakeholders:
The cost and affordability of heat from low temperature heat networks, and how it compares to alternatives (including business as usual);
Delivery vehicles appropriate to the development of low temperature heat networks;
Impacts on and interactions with nearby high temperature heat networks (both operational and planned);
Risks associated with the development of low temperature heat networks that differ from other heat infrastructure projects;
Timescales applicable to the project development process for low temperature heat networks;
Advantages offered by low temperature heat networks (relative to the alternatives) in specific geographical, built environment and social contexts.
Conclusions
Our work provides the first national-scale assessment of locations where there is strong potential for supplying heat through networks that are designed to operate at low temperatures (typically less than 35 degrees centigrade). The results of our assessment can be used for purposes that include local and national energy planning, project identification and prioritisation, public engagement (including awareness-raising), business planning and strategy development, knowledge-building and as an input to future research.
Our approach builds on those previously used in the assessment of high temperature heat network opportunities at national scale, and more localised work focusing on low temperature networks. Future assessments will be able to repeat and/or build on a tested, refined and documented methodology that has been designed with replicability in mind.
Our national assessment identified a total of 11,109 Multi-Building Opportunities and 16,985 Communal Opportunities across Scotland. These opportunity groupings collectively represent around 900,000 dwellings and 100,000 non-domestic properties. They include around a third of the country’s housing stock and around a third of Scotland’s non-domestic properties. In practice, not all properties within the identified opportunities are likely to choose to or be able to connect to a network. These totals represent an estimate of the potential, given the assumptions made and within the range delineated by the identification and classification criteria used (minimum and maximum property counts).
The majority of the opportunities identified involve relatively small numbers of heat-using properties. However, there are also a small number of opportunities with high significance in terms of their total heat demand. These include groupings with a large number of properties and those with one or more large anchor loads. Around 350 opportunities have total heat demands exceeding 10,000 MWh per year. High Property Count Areas represent a further approximately 350 groupings with total heat demands ranging from around 13,000 MWh to around 290,000 MWh.
The findings also support the idea that the future market for low temperature heat networks could potentially be much larger than it is at present. That said, this research has not compared low temperature heat networks against other zero-emissions heating solutions or sought to identify optimum solutions. The actual contribution that low temperature heat networks can make to net zero will depend on the number and characteristics of places in which they represent the ‘best’ solution. Small- and medium-scale high temperature networks may be more cost effective than low temperature heat networks in some of the contexts drawn out by this research.
Low temperature heat network opportunities can be found in each of Scotland’s 32 local authority areas. When depicted on a map, the concentrations of opportunities in the country’s more heavily populated regions (the Central Belt and the urban areas around Aberdeen and Dundee) are evident. However, it is also clear that opportunities can be found in the majority of Scotland’s towns, and in rural and coastal villages throughout the Scottish mainland and islands. Opportunities exist right up to the country’s extremities: from Unst to the Rhins of Galloway, and from Barra to the Berwickshire coast. This finding supports the conclusion that all Scottish local authorities should consider low temperature heat networks in future iterations of their LHEES. It could also support decision-making in the supply chain by organisations that may be planning entry into new geographic markets. Other possible uses of the findings regarding geographic distribution relate to electricity infrastructure planning and regional economic development activities.
The information generated about individual opportunities allows them to be ranked and prioritised relative to other opportunities, supporting project identification. This could be relevant for owners of property portfolios (including Registered Social Landlords) as well as heat network project developers. However, the data outputs associated with any one opportunity must be viewed as indicative, and suitable for justifying further project development work rather than supporting significant project-level decisions.
In conclusion, the national assessment provides important new information concerning the potential for supplying heat through low temperature heat networks in Scotland. Provided that the limitations associated with its ‘first pass’, top-down and experimental nature are appropriately recognised, the national assessment can immediately and meaningfully support energy planning initiatives and project identification. The approach developed is suitable for future replication, giving it the potential to contribute to the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions in the built environment over a longer timescale. It provides a national evidence base to support further investigation and informed decision making on low temperature heat networks.
Barns et al., 2026. Opportunities and costs for shared ground loops. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 228, 116490. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.rser.2025.116490.
Fernández et al., 2025. The integration of heat pumps into the thermal systems of hospital facilities to advance their transformation towards Zero-Emission Buildings. Journal of Building Engineering, 111, 113531. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jobe.2025.113531.
Few et al., 2023. The over-prediction of energy use by EPCs in Great Britain: A comparison of EPC-modelled and metered primary energy use intensity. Energy and Buildings, 288, 113024. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enbuild.2023.113024.
Kensa Group Response: Environmental Audit Committee Inquiry Heat resilience and sustainable cooling August 2023. Available at: committees.parliament.uk/writtenevidence/123197/pdf/ (Accessed: 21 January 2026).
Sinclair and Unkaya (BRE) for ClimateXChange, 2020. Potential sources of waste heat for heat networks in Scotland. Available at: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/730.
Zero Waste Scotland, 2024. Identifying opportunities for shared loop GSHP: Principles to indicate specific prospects (Confidential).
Appendices
Introduction
This Appendix begins by setting out the ‘model’ scope and specifications, where the ‘model’ is defined as the process for delivering the national assessment of low temperature heat network opportunities using input datasets, assumptions, calculations and geospatial processes. Chapter 4 of this Appendix sets out the key decisions that shaped the design of the model: the strategic approach; key concepts, assumptions and limitations; screening decisions; and data quality risk assessment and mitigation. Chapter 5 sequentially lists the steps followed to execute the model. The final sections discuss the quality assurance activities carried out by the researchers and Scottish Government representatives, and then go on to discuss potential improvements.
Model scope
Summary statement
The model delivers a national assessment of locations that are potentially suitable for low temperature heat networks in Scotland. The research supports the Scottish Government’s priority to reduce greenhouse gas emissions in the buildings sector.
Model details
Key outputs
The key outputs generated by the model are:
geospatial polygons representing Multi-Building Opportunities and High Property Count Areas (both defined later in this Appendix), with attribute data;
geospatial points representing Communal Opportunities, Public Sector Anchor Loads, Other Anchor Loads, Potential Heat Sources and Potential Cooling Customers (all defined later in this Appendix); and
geospatial data presentations (geopackages) which allow different elements of the polygons/points and their distributions to be viewed and interpreted.
Key inputs
The key data sets used by the model are the Scotland Heat Map 2022, Home Analytics v4.1, Non-Domestic Analytics v2.0, Green Heat in Greenspaces and the UK Geothermal Platform Summary Layers.
Boundaries and geographic scope limitations
The spatial extent of the model is the areas enclosed by (collectively) the boundaries of the 32 Scottish local authority areas, plus (where not already included) water bodies within 100 metres of local authority areas. The built environment modelled is limited to those properties which have demand for heat and feature in the 2022 Scotland Heat Map, which means it does not include recent new build or planned developments.
The low temperature heat network opportunities identified are not influenced by the presence of demand for cooling, which in practice could improve project viability. However, potential larger cooling customers within heat network opportunity groupings have been identified.
Model specifications
For the purposes of this section, the ‘model’ is defined as the process by which the national assessment has been delivered.
The model was required to identify locations likely to be suitable for low temperature heat networks in Scotland, and to generate data outputs that characterise the potential opportunity at each location. From these data outputs, national-level or regional-level numerical summary results were generated.
The model was also required to generate mapping visualisations that users could use to understand the distribution of opportunities across Scotland and at a more localised level, and to inspect individual opportunity locations. Geospatial data outputs were required in order that certain users could incorporate the results of the national assessment into their own geospatial information systems (GIS) environments, integrate with their own data and perform their own follow-on analysis.
The map visualisations and geospatial data outputs also illustrate the distribution of characteristics and conditions that tend to make a location suitable for low temperature heat networks. Users can use these characteristics to carry out their own prioritisation of opportunities.
The model comprises data inputs, calculations and processes and data outputs.
Data inputs
The datasets that provided inputs to the model are listed in Table 8.
Screening of heat demands and heat sources (see Section 4.3)
Editing of a small number of influential outliers (see Section 4.2.1.4)
Presence of influential heat demand outliers
General accuracy of heat demand estimates, building height estimates, building use classifications, heat source supply potential
Home Analytics Scotland v4.1
Comma separated values
Merging multiple files
Transformation into geospatial database format
Data minimisation (removal of unneeded fields)
General accuracy of fuel poverty probability estimates, heating fuel and heating system data
Relevance of LHEES Categories data for this national assessment
Non-Domestic Analytics v2.0
Geospatial database
Data minimisation (removal of unneeded fields)
General accuracy of heating fuel and heating system data
Accuracy of public building identification
Green Heat in Greenspaces
Geospatial database
Screening of smaller green spaces
Accuracy of spatial mapping of open green space
UK Geothermal Platform Summary Layers
Geospatial database
Data minimisation (clipping to study area)
Accuracy limitations stated by the creators
Ordnance Survey MasterMap
Geo-package
Data minimisation (clipping to study area)
Accuracy of representation of real-world buildings
Ordnance Survey Zoomstack
Geospatial database
Data minimisation (clipping to study area)
Gaps in mapped barrier features
Mapped barrier features relevance to real physical barriers
2022 Data Zone boundaries
Geospatial database
Not needed
2020 Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation
Geospatial database
Not needed
Scottish Government Urban Rural Classification 2022
Geospatial database
Not needed
Census 2022 Output Areas
Geospatial database
Not needed
Table 8: Data inputs, summary of pre-processing and summary of data quality assessment
An additional dataset has been compiled by the researchers from a web search for operational and planned data centres in Scotland.
User inputs
Users will only interact with the outputs of the model, which represent a single, static scenario. Users viewing the outputs through GIS software will be able to select different pre-defined views of the data, and to apply filters to create their own desired presentations. Users will not specify any parameters that influence the outputs, although they will be able to create modified versions of the outputs (including adding or deleting geospatial features and overwriting attributes). A master copy of the outputs will be held by Scottish Government and represents an unaltered ‘single source of truth’.
Model outputs
Table 9 lists the layers included in the geospatial data outputs.
Layer name
Description
Format
Communal Opportunities
Buildings featuring a large enough number of individual heat-using properties, for which a communal low temperature heat network solution is likely to be a viable option.
Point data
Multi-Building Opportunities
Groupings of buildings in which a number of individual heat-using properties have been linked to each other through proximity analysis to indicate an opportunity for one or more low temperature heat networks. Multi-Building Opportunities do not include any heat demands which are present within Communal Opportunities.
Polygons
High Property Count Areas
Groupings of buildings, linked to each other through proximity analysis, but featuring a large enough number of properties that there are likely to be many opportunities for low temperature heat networks. High Property Count Areas are defined as groupings containing more than 1,000 heat demands.
Polygons
Public Sector Anchor Loads
Individual properties within Multi-Building Opportunities that are designated as public buildings and have estimated annual heat demands exceeding 100 MWh per year.
Point data
Non- Public Sector Anchor Loads
Individual properties within Multi-Building Opportunities that are not designated as public buildings and have estimated annual heat demands exceeding 200 MWh per year.
Point data
Potential Waste Heat Sources
Buildings, utilities assets or industrial facilities that represent possible waste heat sources for low temperature heat networks and have been matched to Communal Opportunities or Multi-Building Opportunities through proximity analysis.
Point data
Potential Cooling Customers
Buildings or industrial facilities that represent possible cooling customers within Multi-Building Opportunities
Point data
Table 9: Data outputs
Table 10 lists the visualisations that were created and included in the geopackages for the purpose of assisting users to understand the spatial and statistical distributions of different parameters. Not all visualisations are made available to all users (as per data sharing arrangements).
View name
Description
Format
MBO Raster
A raster that displays the heat demand distribution within Multi-Building Opportunities, aggregated to 50 metre by 50 metre squares (Scale = 1:12,500 – 0)
Raster
Density
A large-scale view of part or all of Scotland, with the aggregated number of opportunities displayed for generalised areas
(Scale = 1:100,000,000 – 1:50,000)
Point cluster
SIMD
A localised view showing opportunities visually coded according to the majority value of the Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation decile for each grouping (Scale = 1:50,000 – 0)
Polygons
Grid Capacity
A localised view showing opportunities visually coded according to their electricity grid capacity band (see Section 4.2.11 of this Appendix) (Scale = 1:50,000 – 0)
Polygons
Social Tenure
A localised view showing opportunities visually coded according to the proportion of dwellings that are socially rented (three bands: Low, Medium and High Social Tenure)
(Scale = 1:50,000 – 0)
Polygons
Fuel Poverty
A localised view showing opportunities visually coded according to their fuel poverty band (see Section 4.2.12 of this Appendix) (Scale = 1:50,000 – 0)
Polygons
Fuel Type
A localised view showing opportunities visually coded according to the distribution of existing fuel types among included properties. Five bands:
100% gas
80-100% gas, diverse other fuels*
0-80% gas, diverse other fuels*
0% gas, diverse other fuels*
0% gas, 100% electricity
* diverse other fuels may include oil, LPG, electricity and other fuels
(Scale = 1:50,000 – 0)
Polygons
Heat Source Led
A localised view showing opportunities visually coded according to whether they belong to the Heat Source Led archetype (“YES”) or not (“NO”) (Scale = 1:50,000 – 0)
Polygons
Anchor Load Led
A localised view showing opportunities visually coded according to whether they belong to the Anchor Load Led archetype (“YES”) or not (“NO”) (Scale = 1:50,000 – 0)
Polygons
Table 10: Geospatial visualisations
Calculations and processes
Figure 11 summaries the logical steps that lead to the delivery of the spatial polygons and point data that comprise the model outputs.
Figure 12 summarises the high-level processes that match non-contiguous heat sources to opportunities for the purposes of opportunity characterisation.
Output: Multi-Building Opportunity and High Property Count Area datasets
Output: Communal Opportunity datasets
** The main working dataset is a data-minimised version of the ‘Heat demands’ layer of the Scotland Heat Map, with minor additions created in Step 2.
* The creation of a geospatial layer representing physical barriers was an activity carried out in parallel to Steps 1 to 4.
Figure 11: Flow chart summarising the high-level processes leading to the data outputs
Waste heat sources
Green spaces and water bodies
Figure 12: Flow chart summarising the high-level processes that match non-contiguous heat sources to opportunities for the purposes of opportunity characterisation
Software requirements
The geospatial outputs are provided in a format that can be opened by all major Geospatial Information Systems (GIS) software packages.
Model design
The model comprises data inputs, calculations and processes and data outputs. The data inputs and data outputs exist in static format, with their version indicated in filenames and accompanying documentation. The calculations and processes that generated the data outputs are documented in this section and Section 5 of this Appendix but are not otherwise retained. The model does not require maintenance.
An Assumptions Log accompanies the data outputs. All assumptions listed in the Log have been addressed in this Appendix.
Data quality impacts were assessed, and for the most part the response was to accept the impacts as a limitation of the methodology. In this chapter, data accuracy considerations are discussed alongside the concept to which they relate.
The input datasets used represent the most comprehensive datasets available that are fit for the purpose required. However, for a small number of issues, active responses were developed and are described in this chapter and Section 5.1.3.
Strategic approach
The model design aimed to identify clusters of heat demands that correlate reasonably well with real-world opportunities for low temperature heat network deployment, but aimed to minimise the influence of more subjective assumptions. By attaching informative attributes to the groupings, they become characterised opportunities. These attributes highlight those aspects that could significantly influence the attractiveness of the opportunity to certain stakeholders (who will bring their own implicit weightings to the different characteristics). The exception to this is a scale-based screening parameter that has been applied to ensure that outputs are manageable in number (preferring a large number of reasonably-sized opportunities over a very large number of opportunities dominated by very small schemes).
Stakeholder engagement
The development of the methodology for the national assessment was supported by a multi-stage programme of stakeholder engagement involving a broad range of organisations. This engagement ensured that the research approach, underlying assumptions and emerging findings were informed by the practical experience, operational knowledge and strategic priorities of organisations active in Scotland’s heat, energy and infrastructure sectors.
A series of four stakeholder events were delivered during the research period, comprising two workshops in August 2025 and two workshops in November 2025. These events brought together representatives from local authorities, network operators, public bodies, heat network developers, community energy groups, national agencies and academic or technical specialists. All 32 Scottish local authorities were invited to attend these events, ensuring that every council had the opportunity to contribute local knowledge and perspectives. The workshops enabled participants to:
review and discuss the emerging methodology for identifying low temperature heat network opportunities;
provide feedback on key modelling assumptions, including definitions of opportunity types, thresholds, and data inputs;
explore early spatial outputs and identify areas where local knowledge could complement national datasets;
highlight known constraints, operational considerations and integration challenges relevant to heat network deployment; and
share examples of ongoing or planned heat decarbonisation activity that could influence interpretation of the assessment outputs.
In addition to the group workshops, we held a series of one-to-one meetings with key stakeholders to gather deeper technical insights and address topic-specific considerations. Organisations engaged through these targeted discussions included Scottish Power Energy Networks (SPEN) and the British Geological Survey (BGS).
Collectively, the stakeholder engagement process strengthened the robustness of the national assessment, helping to validate the suitability of key assumptions, highlight limitations inherent in national scale datasets, and ensure that the final geospatial outputs are aligned with the needs and expectations of future users—including local authorities, public sector organisations and industry partners.
Model concepts, assumptions and limitations
Heat demands and distances between potential connections
Heat demand proximity analysis assumptions
The amount of heat needed by an individual property has a very strong influence on the distance over which it is viable to connect its heating system to a local heat network. The national assessment took an approach common to most other relevant past assessments: calculating an estimated maximum connection distance between heat demands that was directly proportional to the sum of the heat demands.
For almost all properties, the formula used to calculate the maximum connection distance was:
The divisor of 2,000 (units: kWh per year per metre) is a proxy for the Linear Heat Density that could be achieved by the relevant section of a low temperature heat network. The Linear Heat Density (LHD) is a measure of the amount of heat supplied through part or all of a heat network relative to the total length of pipe route in that (part-)network. For prospective heat network opportunities, the LHD is a relatively strong indicator of the likely financial viability of the network. A high LHD implies that more heat will be supplied (generating revenue and/or cost savings) through a shorter amount of pipework (costing less to install and maintain).
Stakeholders were consulted on the fundamentally influential LHD-proxy assumption of 2,000 kWh per year per metre, with general support expressed for this value. It also aligns with a value used in a previous assessment carried out by Zero Waste Scotland and Buro Happold for low temperature heat networks in Argyll and Bute, which was informed by engagement with an experienced low temperature heat network developer. This assumption was further justified through our development of prototype comparative cost models.
The Linear Heat Density of a theoretical pipe route that connects two individual buildings is conceptually different from the overall Linear Heat Density of a heat network. The latter measure takes into account the fact that pipe routes often deviate significantly from the shortest possible route between two points, and that not all buildings within a defined area will necessarily have connected to the network. The overall LHD of planned and operational low temperature heat networks can be less than 2,000 kWh per year per metre, often considerably so. Averfalk et al. for IEA (2021) assessed 37 heat networks across the world, most of them low temperature heat networks or operating at less than 65 degrees centigrade for most of the year. The authors found that almost half of these networks exhibited values below 1,000 kWh per year per metre including delivered cooling energy as well as heat (meaning that their heat-only LHD could be even lower).
It is possible that schemes exhibiting lower heat demand densities can be viable. A major developer of low temperature heat networks suggested in a submission to the UK Parliament Environmental Audit Committee (Kensa, 2023) that a heat demand density of 500 kWh per metre per year could indicate viability. However, the aim of this research to identify locations likely to be suitable for these types of heat networks (rather than only possibly suitable) justifies the selection of a higher number.
If the LHD-proxy value chosen had been higher, fewer opportunities would have been identified, and they would have tended to be smaller. If the LHD-proxy value had been lower, more opportunities would have been identified, and they would have tended to be larger.
It is recommended that any future studies that require an LHD-proxy value for the identification of low temperature heat network opportunities assess the evidence available at the time to select an appropriate assumption.
There is on average a difference between real-world heat consumption of a property (lower) and the estimated heat demand in the dataset used (higher) (Few et al., 2023, and discussed in more detail in Section 4.2.1.3). The selection of a 2,000 kWh per metre per year divisor, rather than a lower figure, offers the benefit of slightly compensating for the overestimation of heat consumption.
One group of properties for which a different divisor was used was public sector anchor loads. In recognition of the strong motivations that the owners of these properties have to decarbonise (among other factors), a divisor of 1,500 kWh per metre per year was used. This assumption was also tested and agreed with stakeholders.
When identifying spatially dispersed Multi-Building Opportunities, we applied a limit of 1 km to the maximum distance over which two buildings can be grouped into an opportunity (without there being additional buildings in between). This meant that the distance between buildings within an opportunity area did not risk being unrealistically large. However, in exceptional circumstances, connections exceeding the 1 km threshold adopted could be feasible. For example, a building with a very large heat demand, such as a hospital or higher education campus, may be separated from other buildings by open space through which it is reasonably cheap to construct a pipeline. The viability of a heat network involving this long connection could be further enhanced if an attractive heat source could be accessed by connecting across the space; if the land between is under single ownership or a small number of owners; or if the large heat user exhibited low seasonality in its heating demand or required cooling outside the heating season.
If the maximum connection distance had been higher, more opportunities would have been identified, and they would have tended to be larger (and vice versa).
Heat demand proximity analysis mechanics
An important distinction between two types of low temperature heat network concerns the number of buildings which are served by the network. Our process separated ‘Communal Opportunities’ (blocks of flats, tall tenement buildings and large multi-occupancy commercial buildings) from opportunities that consist of clusters of separate buildings. Communal Opportunities were identified by grouping heat demands that shared a building footprint in the Ordnance Survey MasterMap Buildings data layer, and where the majority of heat demand records infer that the estimated building height is at least 7.5 metres. Although not perfect, these criteria tend to include blocks of flats, tenements and taller mixed-use buildings while excluding houses.
Buildings whose height has been overestimated will have occasionally been misclassified as a Communal Opportunity. However, this categorisation is arbitrary – and despite the building’s height it is still possible that a communal system is appropriate. If a building’s height has been underestimated, a genuine opportunity for a communal system may have been missed – but the heat demands in that building will have had the chance to be picked up in a Multi-Building Opportunity.
Once the heat demands that had been grouped into Communal Opportunities had been identified, the master dataset of heat demands was separated into two parts: one containing the heat demands belonging to Communal Opportunities and one containing all other heat demands. The latter part-dataset went forward to the Multi-Building Opportunity identification process.
The Communal Opportunities did not form part of the Multi-Building Opportunity identification process. The approach taken ensures that Communal Opportunities are not double counted when low temperature heat network opportunities are considered as a whole. Communal Opportunities often represent locations where real schemes could be implemented relatively simply and potentially quickly.
A potential limitation of this approach is that some buildings near to Communal Opportunities, but which are not close enough to other individual or smaller multi-property buildings, may not be identified as belonging to any low temperature heat network opportunities. Rarely, a Communal Opportunity might form a ‘bridge’ between two small clusters of buildings that on their own fall short of being identified as Multi-Building Opportunities. These limitations are expected to have a relatively small impact on the overall results of the national assessment. If a particular Communal Opportunity is subject to further project development investigation, the potential to extend the network to nearby buildings should be considered. Similarly, the potential for the properties in the building to be served from a wider multi-building network (perhaps centred on an anchor load or accessing attractive heat sources) should be considered.
To identify sets of buildings that could be grouped together into Multi-Building Opportunities, spatial buffers were created around the point locations of heat demands. The radius of these circular buffers was calculated for each point using the estimated heat demand and the LHD-proxy values, enforcing the 1km maximum radius described in the previous section. Where the buffer circles overlap, heat demands have the potential to be linked to each other in a single grouping. If no overlap occurs, heat demands cannot be part of the same cluster. Various additional steps, described in subsequent sections, deal with the influence of physical barriers and inclusion/exclusion criteria for the groups that are generated.
The proposed proximity analysis methodology was explained to stakeholders in advance of its final selection and execution. Stakeholders expressed agreement with the suitability of this approach to the purpose of identifying low temperature heat network opportunities.
Heat demand accuracy
Other than its location relative to others, the estimated heat demand of a particular address is the main parameter that determines whether it is included in an opportunity grouping or not. The total heat demand of an opportunity group is also an important piece of characterising information. The dataset from which heat demand estimates were taken is the Scotland Heat Map 2022 (SHM). The vast majority of the heat demand estimates in the dataset used are modelled values rather than measured values.
Consideration was given to using the more recent heat demand estimates available in the Home Analytics and Non-Domestic Analytics datasets. However, it was determined that the advantages offered by the newer datasets were offset by the risk that errors would arise in the matching and merging processes that would be required to integrate datasets that each represent snapshots at different points in time. For example, the classification of residential institutions has changed in recent years.
The SHM heat demand estimates are derived from multiple sources. The highest-confidence values are collected from energy billing or procurement data or derived from metered energy consumption. Medium-confidence estimates are derived from Energy Performance Certificates (the production of which involves physical surveys and some building energy modelling) or Home Analytics modelling.
The lowest-confidence estimates derive from floor area, building age and property type or building use information (with some of these parameters inferred by modelling if they are not known[4]). The low-confidence estimates rely on benchmark heat demand figures according to building use (non-domestic properties) or property age and type (dwellings). The benchmarks are subject to adjustment where insulation is present, or to account for climatic variation across Scotland. Full detail on the derivation of heat demand estimates can be found in the Scotland Heat Map User Guide (Scottish Government, 2023).
The Home Analytics modelling that underlies almost half of domestic heat demand estimates in the SHM is generally representative of the Scottish housing stock. It is reasonably accurate in terms of its ability to replicate the heat demand estimates generated by the Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) production process (Energy Saving Trust, 2025a). However, the production of EPCs itself involves some simple modelling of a property’s heat requirements based on observations made during a physical survey. EPCs – and therefore any modelling that tries to achieve good correlation with EPC heat demand estimates – tend to overestimate heat demand relative to real-world consumption (Few et al., 2023). If heat demand estimates were more realistic (generally lower), fewer opportunities would have been identified through the national assessment, and they would have tended to be smaller.
The version of the Scotland Heat Map used for the national assessment did not incorporate heat demand estimates from the Non-Domestic Analytics dataset. Instead, heat demands are either estimated from building use classifications, floor areas and benchmarks; from EPCs; or from energy billing data collected from various public sector organisations. For non-domestic properties, the heat demands estimated using benchmarks (least confidence) vastly outnumber those derived from EPCs, which in turn outnumber those derived from billing data (best confidence). Furthermore, the heterogeneity of non-domestic properties further reduces the confidence that can be placed in modelled heat demand estimates, whether they were produced for the purposes of an EPC or calculated using benchmarks (Energy Saving Trust, 2025b).
For the national assessment, the impact of uncertainty in non-domestic heat demand estimates is likely to be greater than the impact of uncertainty in domestic heat demand estimates. This is because almost all of Scotland’s larger “anchor load” heat demands are non-domestic, and non-domestic heat demands are on average higher than domestic heat demands. These facts, combined with the level of uncertainty that applies to non-domestic heat demands, impact the results of the national assessment in the following ways:
Non-domestic properties’ proportionally larger contribution to opportunity groupings’ heat demand translates into amplified uncertainty on the total heat demand of an opportunity grouping that includes non-domestic properties (and any quantities or conditions derived from the heat demand, including the matching of heat sources to opportunity groupings).
Non-domestic properties tend to be possible to connect to other buildings over larger distances. These distances can be considerable (up to 1km). In proximity analysis, ‘anchor loads’ often enable the inclusion of many smaller heat demands that fall within their maximum connection radius. Overestimated anchor load heat demands will tend to result in anchor load-led opportunities that are larger in area, have higher property counts and have higher total heat demand than would otherwise be the case. Underestimated anchor load heat demands will have the inverse impact, with the additional result that in some instances opportunity groupings may be missed entirely if they fall below the property count thresholds chosen for the national assessment.
The SHM and Home Analytics datasets are unavoidably biased towards newer, urban properties that have recently been built, bought, sold or had significant retrofit work completed (thus triggering the requirement for an EPC to be produced and lodged). This means that, in general, there is lower confidence in the data reported for rural areas.
Heat demand outliers, unfeasible heat demands and distance constraints
The national assessment dealt with exceptionally large heat demands both through the imposition of limits within heat demand proximity analysis and through selected overwriting of heat demand data.
The maximum distance between potential connections was not allowed to exceed 1 km. This action reflects real-world constraints that are likely to apply, but also effectively places a cap on the influence of an individual property’s heat demand in terms of the formation of a cluster, thereby nullifying large outliers.
In general, as the distance in between two heat demands increases, the probability of encountering one or more obstacles that are very difficult or expensive to cross increases. The cost and/or difficulty of passing such obstacles may not be justified, rendering the connection unviable. Longer distances also tend to incur greater pumping costs and, where applicable, greater heat losses. It is therefore appropriate to set a threshold distance above which it is assumed that the likelihood of a connection being viable becomes low. One of the world’s largest low temperature heat networks in Heerlen, Netherlands, involves maximum inter-building distances of 800 to 1,000 metres as the crow flies (Brummer and Bongers, 2019).
The Scotland Heat Map contains a small number of erroneous outlier heat demands. We concluded that around 16 of the 41 largest heat demands (those estimated in the SHM to consume more than 20,000 MWh per year) were overestimated by a factor of 10 or more, based on consideration of the floor area and the most energy-intensive heat demand benchmark from CIBSE’s TM46 Energy Benchmarks publication (CIBSE, 2008). These 16 heat demands represent less than 0.01% of the non-domestic heat demands in the SHM, and less than 0.001% of all heat demands in the SHM. A further 12 of the largest heat demands were also determined to be likely to have been overestimated, but to a smaller degree.
These 28 outlier heat demands were edited for the purposes of calculating the total heat demand within an opportunity grouping, to improve the accuracy of opportunity characteristics and the statistics derived from them. This adjustment reduced the number and impact of unrealistic totals reported as characteristics of opportunities. Adjustments were only made to non-domestic properties with a heat demand exceeding 20,000 MWh per year, and a reported ‘confidence level’ which suggested that the heat demand had been modelled rather than being based on actual reported energy use. The heat demand was reduced to 20,000 MWh/year or 1 MWh/m2/year (whichever was lower). This does not represent a theoretical maximum demand that can be connected to a low temperature heat network, but rather an adjustment to reduce the impact of very large potentially erroneous heat demands.
Considering buildings that are typically space heated throughout (i.e. excluding industrial sites and distribution and logistics centres), many of Scotland’s largest properties by floor area are hospitals and higher education buildings. These large public buildings often have heat demand estimates that are derived from metered consumption data (hence have a high confidence level). Consideration of the metered heat demand figures for Scotland’s largest hospitals and higher education buildings leads to the conclusion that the country’s largest combined space heating and hot water loads are in the region of 20,000 MWh per year (only one hospital exceeds this value). The overwriting process described in the previous paragraph does not impact the heat demand estimates for hospitals or higher education facilities where their ‘confidence level’ is the highest value (5).
The second criterion for limiting heat demand estimates is justified by consideration of fuel demand benchmarks included in CIBSE’s TM46 Energy Benchmarks publication (CIBSE, 2008). Of the 29 categories of building for which energy benchmarks are stated, the most heat-intensive is “Swimming pool centre”, with a benchmark of 1,130 kWh per year per square metre of floor area. This benchmark is stated in terms of fossil fuels used for heating, meaning that it corresponds approximately to a heat demand of 1,000 kWh (or 1 MWh) per year per square metre. The researchers chose to use this value as representing the highest reasonable heat use intensity for the purposes of adjusting large outlier heat demands.
These 28 heat demand adjustments result in a reduction of between around 1,000 MWh/year (smallest adjustment) and 1,000,000 MWh/year (largest adjustment) in the heat demand of the opportunity groupings in which these properties lie. These adjustments affect the total heat demand of relevant opportunity groupings, but not the list of properties included in the groupings (because maximum connection distances were already capped at 1km, meaning that all heat demands above 2,000 MWh/year (or 1,500 MWh/year for public anchor loads) have the same maximum connection distance).
A further adjustment was made to hospitals with heat demands exceeding 10,000 MWh per year, regardless of the basis of the heat demand value. This adjustment sought to account for the fact that in medium-to-large-sized hospitals a significant proportion of the overall heat demand relates to uses that can be served only from high-temperature sources. An energy model of a medium-sized hospital in Spain was developed by Fernández et al. (2025). The researchers went expanded the simulation to additional locations, including London. The London results were used to estimate the proportion of heat demand that could be met from a low temperature heat network supplying heat into existing hot water distribution systems. (The heat demanded by existing steam-using systems was assumed to be not easily met from a low temperature heat network. Multi-stage steam-generating heat pump systems are technically feasible but offer minimal operational cost benefits relative to electric steam generators, which are cheaper to install.) The assumed proportion of hospital heat demand that was included in aggregated heat demand totals within opportunity groupings was 42.5%. An adjustment was applied to a total of 17 hospitals.
It was noted through work on this assessment, and our past experience working with the Scotland Heat Map, that one circumstance that can lead to outlier heat demands is a large supermarket with one or more concessions within it and/or an internal café restaurant. Anomalous heat demands occur when the large floor area of the supermarket is divided equally between several use classes (as per the methodology followed in the development of the SHM), rather than the actual floor areas being applied. The heat demand benchmark for the “Restaurant / Cafeteria” use class is more than 3 times higher than the benchmark for the “General Retail” use class. A high heat demand benchmark therefore gets applied to a falsely large floor area that has been assigned the “Restaurant / Cafeteria” use class.
The prevalence of this circumstance within West Lothian and an area of Glasgow peripheral to the city centre was investigated. While several instances were noted of “Restaurant / Cafeteria” UPRNs having high assigned floor areas, some of these shared a building with other heat-intensive use classes (e.g. Hotel). It was therefore decided that adjusting “Restaurant / Cafeteria” heat demands across the board was not appropriate.
Influence of physical barriers
The aim of the national assessment was to identify locations likely to be suitable for low temperature heat networks in Scotland. This meant that the identification process needed to take constraints into account, including physical barriers to construction.
Ordnance Survey mapping layers (from the OS Zoomstack product) were used to create a combined “Barriers” spatial dataset. This was then used to cut the heat demand buffer areas, effectively representing some of the physical features that often prove too costly or impossible for low temperature heat networks to cross. The barriers applied include major roadways (motorways and A-roads), railways, woodlands and waterways.
The application of these barriers in the analysis of spatially dispersed heat demand groupings had a direct impact on opportunity identification, preventing connectivity across features that pose a high likelihood of obstructing or increasing cost and complexity for a heat network. The resultant opportunities are therefore smaller, more realistic zones of demand.
However, the mapping of the physical features did not entirely meet the needs of this assessment. Sometimes gaps in the mapped ‘barrier’ features (such as bridges over watercourses) prevent clusters from being cut fully. This means that they remain as a single polygon and are treated as a single Multi-Building Opportunity. Consequently, a barrier with a gap in the wrong place does not have an impact on the final clusters. This is reasonable in the case where a real physical feature like a bridge happens to provide an opportunity for low temperature heat network pipe routing, but these circumstances are rare.
Another limitation of the method to account for physical barriers arises from the fact that elevated features such as viaducts, flyovers and aqueducts are mapped as barriers but do not impose constraints in the real world. These elevated features are not separately identifiable within the dataset. Consequently, some clusters are cut where they should logically be continuous.
Nevertheless, the application of mapped barriers normally improves the credibility of the opportunities identified by accounting for real world constraints and not treating heat demand proximity as the sole determining factor of viability. That said, the opportunity areas are indicative zones of interest rather than firm extents of possible schemes. Local knowledge and further analysis are required to develop the opportunity areas identified by the national assessment into defined potential schemes that respond to the barriers that exist in a particular location.
Number of potential connections
In order to constrain the number of opportunities identified to a manageable total, and focus attention on the opportunities with more significant potential decarbonisation impact, we determined that the national assessment would only map and characterise opportunities above a certain size threshold. We included opportunities where at least 10 homes could be connected to a network, or 5 properties that are not homes. If there was a combination of homes and other types of property, a formula weighed them up:
It must be emphasised that low temperature heat networks can still be a good idea for smaller groups of properties. A review of 34 operational Shared Ground Loop[5] schemes in the UK (Barns et al., 2026) found that 13 of 34 (38%) schemes connected fewer than 20 heat pumps, with the minimum number of heat pumps being 2. The restriction on size adopted in this research ensured that the number of opportunities identified was large but reasonable, but does not imply that smaller schemes do not represent opportunities.
We also applied upper limits to the number of potential connections that could exist within the main opportunity groupings. If potential Multi-Building Opportunities would have exceeded these thresholds, we classified them as High Property Count Areas (HPCA) and treated them separately from Multi-Building Opportunities. The maximum number of heat demands within a Multi-Building Opportunity was set at 999; groupings of 1,000 or more are High Property Count Areas. The significance of HPCAs is described in the following Section 4.2.4.
The accuracy of property counts for opportunities depends on the accuracy and completeness of the mapping of Scotland’s heat-using properties, and the correct classification of property types and uses. In the time period since the production of the Scotland Heat Map dataset, some properties will have changed their occupancy type from domestic to non-domestic (or vice versa), and some properties will have become vacant or been demolished while others have been built or brought back into occupation. It is possible that, despite local authorities and the Ordnance Survey’s quality assurance processes, a small minority of property addresses have been incorrectly classified as being either domestic or non-domestic. The more detailed use classifications may also occasionally be inaccurate.
Misclassification of buildings in terms of use will have occasionally led to their exclusion from the dataset used to identify opportunities. This would have resulted in their exclusion from opportunity groupings, and could have potentially (but infrequently) caused entire opportunities to be missed. Misclassification will have occasionally led to the erroneous inclusion of buildings that are not actually good candidates for connection to low temperature heat networks. Where this has occurred, identified opportunities will have been more numerous and/or larger than they should have been. Misclassification is also a root cause of heat demand inaccuracy as explored in Section 4.2.1.3.
Recent new build and planned future new build are known omissions/exclusions from the national assessment due to data unavailability.
High Property Count Areas and High Heat Demand Areas
Some areas in Scotland are particularly ‘heat dense’ – either they have a great number of heat demands close together, or there are multiple properties present that demand especially large quantities of heat. Often both of these circumstances are present. These areas cover many of Scotland’s city centres and the centres of larger towns; they are also sometimes found in industrial areas or around very large hospitals.
These areas often have significant overlap with the areas that have previously been identified as promising for the development of high temperature heat networks. Within any of the areas of opportunity for low temperature heat networks identified by our research, it is possible that high temperature heat networks already exist or may be planned to be built. However, this is more likely to be the case in urban centres. In these places, low temperature heat networks may still be viable around the ‘edges’ of the high temperature networks.
High temperature heat network development aside, it is also the case that many options are likely to exist regarding the types and sizes of low temperature scheme that could be built in the most heat dense areas. For example, a single large scheme could be viable – but it may also be possible to develop multiple smaller schemes or to develop a large scheme in phases.
The proliferation of options for both high and low temperature heat networks means that it is particularly important that strategic energy planning is carried out before decisions are made about what should be built where. Energy planning seeks to find the optimum combination of solutions for the locality as a whole, which often differs from the combination of solutions that would arise if schemes were developed in isolation according to their own individual drivers.
To avoid implying that any one technological solution is best within the more heat dense zones, and to recognise the possibility that many separate schemes could be developed within those areas, we separated them from smaller Multi-Building Opportunities. This was done simply on the basis of the number of heat demands. Those areas with more than 1,000 heat demands were referred to as High Property Count Areas (HPCAs). It was found that the total heat demand of all properties within some HPCAs exceeded 100,000 MWh per year. This sub-group was referred to as High Heat Demand Areas.
High Heat Demand Areas do not represent a theoretical upper bound for the demand that can be supplied through a single low temperature heat network scheme. Although schemes larger than this could be conceived, it is also possible (and for many locations, likely) that an opportunity area with tens or hundreds of megawatts of total heat demand could be home to multiple smaller low temperature heat networks rather than a single scheme.
No Multi-Building Opportunities had total heat demands exceeding 100,000 MWh per year. Therefore, all High Heat Demand Areas were also High Property Count Areas.
Much less detailed characterising information was calculated for High Property Count Areas and High Heat Demand Areas than was the case for Multi-Building Opportunities.
A review of 34 operational Shared Ground Loop schemes in the UK (Barns et al., 2026) found that these schemes connected an average of 84 heat pumps, with the maximum number of heat pumps being 770. This justifies the selection of the threshold of 1,000 for the number of heat demands.
Presence of anchor loads
An anchor load is a large, heat user with a consistent demand whose substantial annual heating requirement provides a stable base of consumption, improving revenue certainty and supporting the overall viability of a heat network. The presence of one or more anchor loads within a Multi-Building Opportunity would typically make a low temperature heat network more likely to be viable in that location. In this research, an anchor load is defined as a non-domestic property with an estimated annual heat demand exceeding 200 MWh per year (or 100 MWh per year if it is a public sector building). Although it is often stated that public anchor loads are beneficial for heat networks of all types (e.g. Scottish Futures Trust, 2024), some stakeholders who we consulted questioned the ability of public sector buildings to act as proactive earlier adopters of the technology or initiators of new schemes.
If lower thresholds had been set for the identification of anchor loads, more anchor loads would have been identified (and more Anchor Load-Led archetype networks would have been identified). If higher thresholds had been used, fewer anchor loads would have been identified.
The classification of non-domestic buildings as public sector or not public sector is a new and experimental aspect of the Non-Domestic Analytics dataset. As such, its accuracy is not yet well understood. The misclassification of buildings as “public” will have infrequently led to their being linked to groupings across distances that would not have been possible had they been classified as “non-public”. Vice versa, some public buildings will have infrequently been missed from opportunities due to misclassification.
Locations not on the electricity grid
The methodology does not specifically exclude heat-using properties that are not served by a mains grid electricity supply. In practice, the development of low temperature heat networks in off-grid locations is likely to be challenging due to high electricity costs and capacity constraints. However, there is precedent for the adoption of heat pumps in off-grid locations (for example, in Knoydart). Users viewing the outputs of the national assessment should consider the possibility that some island and remote rural opportunities (including clusters of buildings on upland estates) may include off-grid buildings.
Proximity of favourable non-contiguous heat sources
The research mapped three different heat sources that could be beneficial to connect to a low temperature heat network despite spatial separation between the heat source and the heat demands. These heat sources were green spaces, water bodies and sources of waste heat. Table 11 lists the sources of information, and which quantities were used. The screening of heat sources is described in Section 4.3.2 of this Appendix.
Heat source
Data source
Data item(s)
Waste heat sources
Scotland Heat Map 2022 ‘Potential Energy Supply’ layer[6]
Waste heat locations (point data)
Waste heat supply name and sector
Estimated annual heat supply potential
Estimated temperature range of heat supply
Seasonal variation category
Waste heat sources
Web search for operational and planned data centres in Scotland
Addresses or postcodes of operational or planned data centres
Green space hosting closed or open loop boreholes
Green Heat in Green Spaces (GHiGS) dataset
Green space locations and boundaries
Water bodies (static water bodies, rivers, sea)
Ordnance Survey Zoomstack
Water body locations and boundaries
Table 11: Data sources for non-contiguous heat source information
The main dataset used to map waste heat sources dates from 2020 and only identifies 9 data centres (although acknowledges that there was a higher number operating at that time). Since 2020, new data centres have been constructed and many more are planned, including some very large facilities. Data centres could be a key source of heat for low temperature heat networks, with very substantial total annual supply potential. Due to the potential importance of this class of waste heat source, we expanded the mapping of data centres through additional data gathering from publicly available online sources including Data Center Map (2025), cross-checked with other sources located through web searches. These extra data centre locations were not characterised with any estimates of heat supply potential. The additional data centre locations which were matched with opportunities are listed in Table 12.
Name
Location
Status
ATOS Livingston
Livingston, West Lothian
Operational
DataVita DV2
Glasgow City Centre
Operational
IFB Union Street
Aberdeen City Centre
Operational
brightsolid Aberdeen
Aberdeen
Operational
Apatura Coldstream
Coldstream, Scottish Borders
Planned, with operation expected circa 2030
Cato Data Centre
Auchtertool, Fife
Planned, with key agreements secured
Table 12: Additional data centre locations
The Scotland Heat Map ‘Potential Energy Supply’ layer contains modelled estimates of waste heat supply capacity, which are subject to limitations identified by the creators (Sinclair and Unkaya, 2020). Inaccurate waste heat supply capacity data is likely to have led to matches being made between waste heat sources and opportunities that do not represent real prospective relationships, and conversely to some real prospective relationships being missed. However, heat source matches have not influenced the identification of opportunities, and so these impacts affect opportunity characteristics only.
Several categories of waste heat sources have been noted as absent from the dataset used. Anaerobic digestion facilities, crematoria, incinerators and thermal power stations (including Energy from Waste facilities) represent possible sources of low temperature waste heat that were not included in the matching process. Many wastewater treatment plants have also been noted to be missing from the dataset.
The accuracy of the GHiGS dataset in terms of mapping open (non-wooded) green spaces was assessed by comparing it to alternative maps. It was concluded that urban green space (which is most likely to be linked to low temperature heat network opportunities) is mostly accurate, but there are conflicts between the classification of open green space and woodland between different maps. However, the identification of a particular green space through the proximity analysis does not mean that it is necessarily suitable for the construction of ground source heat collection infrastructure: usage, heritage protection, nature protection or aesthetic considerations as well as engineering factors like ground composition and access routes can all prevent a green space from being a viable heat source for a low temperature heat network.
There were no concerns regarding the accuracy of water body mapping, although the lack of data regarding the depth of water and flow rate of water courses means that a match between a low temperature heat network opportunity and a water body cannot be taken as firm indication of the viability of water source heat.
Waste heat source matching
The formulae used to calculate the maximum connection distance between waste heat sources and low temperature heat network opportunities was:
The divisor of 4,000 (units: kWh per year per metre) aligns with a value used in by AECOM (2025) in a review of opportunities and technical solutions for data centre waste heat reuse in London. AECOM’s modelling found that 4,000 kWh per metre per year (referring to the connection between data centre and heat network) was a strong indicator of viability.
If the LHD-proxy value had been higher, fewer matches between heat sources and opportunities would have been identified. If the LHD-proxy value had been lower, more matches between heat sources and opportunities would have been identified.
The maximum distance between heat sources and low temperature heat network opportunities was not allowed to exceed 1 km, reflecting real-world constraints that would often apply to such connections. However, it should be noted that there is an example in Scotland of a waste heat source being used to serve a low temperature heat network more than 1 km away (the AMIDS scheme in Renfrewshire, which connects heat users to a wastewater heat source more than 2 km away). If the maximum connection distance had been higher, more matches between heat sources and opportunities would have been identified (and vice versa).
For the purposes of proximity analysis, data centres that do not feature in the Scotland Heat Map dataset have been assumed to be connectable over a maximum distance of 1 km from heat demands (or a shorter distance, if limited by the opportunity’s total heat demand). This corresponds to the smallest size of data centre that we mapped (around 1 MW).
Waste heat sources that are within the calculated maximum distance of a Communal Opportunity were considered to be matched to that opportunity. Similarly, waste heat sources that are close enough to the geometric centroid of a Multi-Building Opportunity were matched to the opportunity. The centroid was used as a proxy for the average point of heat delivery; in practice, waste heat would need to be distributed to connected properties via an interface identified at the design stage.
Sinclair and Unkaya (BRE) for ClimateXChange (2020) estimated potential heat supply in MWh for each of the waste heat sources they identified. The limitation identified by the authors suggest that these values are subject to high uncertainty and require further research to improve heat supply capacity estimates. Furthermore, the national assessment heat source matching methodology does not make use of Sinclair and Unkaya’s assessment of the seasonality of waste heat sources. This could lead to an overestimation of heat supply potential due to the time-mismatching of supply and demand. The total capacity of matched waste heat sources is reported as a characteristic of opportunities, but users should exercise caution when using this data.
Matching green spaces and water bodies
A different approach was taken to matching green spaces and water bodies. The Green Heat in Green Spaces (GHiGS) project estimated the heat supply capacity of each relevant green space in Scotland, but no such estimates were available for water bodies[7]. Some water bodies mapped will have near-infinite heat supply capacity (e.g. the sea) whereas others will be relatively limited (canals with minimal flow rate).
Because of the range of spatial extents and geometric shapes that exist among green spaces, proximity analysis based on a site’s total estimated supply capacity risks identifying matches with low temperature heat network opportunities that are not realistic in practice. For example, a lollipop-shaped green space has greatest capacity to host boreholes in the wider part of its shape – but a simple matching process could link it to low temperature heat network opportunities that are only within reach of the ‘stick’. Instead, a simpler approach of searching for matches within 100 metres of a green space’s boundary was adopted.
If the maximum connection distance had been higher, more matches between heat sources and opportunities would have been identified (and vice versa).
Heat from green spaces will normally be available at a lower (environmental) temperature than waste heat from industrial, utility or waste management sources. Therefore, the distance over which interconnection can be justified is lower for green spaces, relative to the amount of heat supplied. It should be noted that a separation of 100 metres between a Multi-Building Opportunity’s boundary and a green space’s boundary does not represent the real distance over which heat must be transported. The distance to reach boreholes within the green space and to reach heat demands within the opportunity cluster add to the distance between the boundaries.
The lack of heat supply estimates for water bodies means that proximity analysis based on a site’s total estimated supply capacity is not possible. In order to avoid linking low-capacity water bodies to opportunities over unrealistic distances, a maximum distance of 100 metres was applied. This means that some very significant opportunities are missing from the assessment. However, easy access to mapping that includes large water bodies will allow any user to make their own assessment of which larger rivers, lochs and coastal waters might offer potential heat supplies for a particular low temperature heat network opportunity.
Existing heating fuels and heating systems
The cost and carbon impacts of switching to a heat pump depend on which alternative is being used for comparison. Data on the existing heating fuels used and heating systems present within each opportunity grouping were reported as counts of properties. Calculated total heat demands associated with different heating fuels (natural gas, electricity, other) were generated for each opportunity grouping. These totals could be used as inputs for calculating cost and carbon impacts.
The heating fuel and heating system categorical data have a high level of accuracy for domestic properties, but are among the least opportunity attribute accurate fields for non-domestic properties. 21% of properties’ heating fuels and heating systems in Non-Domestic Analytics 2.0 derive from Energy Performance Certificates, with the remainder modelled by Energy Saving Trust with a sample-tested accuracy of around 90%. According to the dataset’s Release Notes (Energy Saving Trust, 2025b), the modelling tends to overestimate the proportion of properties that use electricity and underestimate the number using gas boilers.
Property-level requirements for heat pump integration
A wide range of approaches and criteria have been applied in the past to the question of whether a property is ‘suitable’ for being heated with a heat pump. The concept is relevant for heat pumps connected to low temperature heat networks as well as standalone heat pumps. Some researchers (Energy Systems Catapult, 2021) have found that “there is no property type or architectural era that is unsuitable for a heat pump”. However, critics have suggested that these statements when viewed in isolation can be misleading, and that questions of suitability must be qualified with a definition of what suitability means. A literature review accompanied by expert interviews (Johnston et al., 2024) found a mixed picture in terms of the prevalence of heat pump suitability among Scottish homes, with gaps found in each of the four most relevant publications reviewed.
Suitability is usually judged on the basis of a combination factors, but the factors used differ significantly. The inclusion or exclusion of operating costs (and related affordability judgements) and the extent of upgrades required to insulation and/or heat distribution systems are among the most critical for determining the outcome of a suitability assessment.
This research has taken the most inclusive view regarding technical suitability, which is that there is a viable route to heat pump integration for the overwhelming majority of domestic properties and those non-domestic properties which need space heating and hot water. No domestic properties, and few non-domestic properties, were excluded from the analysis for technical suitability reasons.
However, heat pump operating costs relative to alternatives do vary significantly between individual properties. Likewise, required upgrades alongside heat pump installation can also range from none at all to highly disruptive and expensive work. An assessment of heat pump suitability that is familiar to Scottish local authorities and the readers of their Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategies (LHEES) is the four-fold “LHEES Categories” classification system. This system defines the categories slightly differently depending on whether a dwelling is on or off the gas grid, although the high level criteria are the same. Full detail of the classification process is available in the Detailed Practitioner Approach developed by Zero Waste Scotland (2022b, 2022c) as part of the LHEES Methodology guidance.
LHEES Category
High-level criteria
Category 0
Already utilise a communal heating system
Category 1
Are highly suited to a heat pump solution: minimal fabric upgrade required and already have a wet heating system.
Category 2
Already have a wet heating system but are likely to require[8] energy efficiency retrofit of moderate scope
Category 3
Dwellings that do not have a wet heating system or are likely to require energy efficiency retrofit exceeding moderate scope before heat pump integration; or
Dwellings that are not suited to heat pump technology.
Table 13: Summary of LHEES Category high-level criteria
For low temperature heat network opportunities in the national assessment that include adequate numbers of domestic properties (at least 5 in a category), the characterising dataset includes a count of the number of dwellings that have been assessed as falling into each LHEES Category. The address-level data underlying these totals comes from the Home Analytics dataset.
A limitation of the LHEES Categories arises from limitations in the data available at the time of their creation. For example, information on building energy efficiency did not incorporate floor construction or floor insulation, which is information that is now available through some datasets.
It should also be noted that LHEES Categories are derived based on parameters that do not fully align with a property’s prospects for connecting to a low temperature heat network. For example, heritage status can be a reason why a low temperature heat network connection is a better choice than an air source heat pump. Furthermore, an existing heat pump could be an enabler rather than barrier to joining a scheme with networked heat pumps.
Low temperature heat network archetypes
To enable an intuitive understanding of the diverse types of low temperature heat networks and their prevalence within the opportunities identified by the national assessment, we classified applicable opportunities as belonging to one or more ‘archetypes’. We used the list of archetypes presented in the South of Scotland Heat Network Prospectus (South of Scotland Enterprise, 2025), with minor modifications. The archetypes group networks according to geographic context and/or the socio-technical drivers that justify their development. Our methodology developed new logical and quantitative criteria for archetype classification, allowing thousands of opportunities to be classified automatically rather than manually. The quantitative criteria selected have a direct impact on the number of opportunities identified as belonging to the relevant archetype in logical ways.
Archetype
Identification Criteria
Sub-Archetypes
Communal Opportunity
Multiple heat demand records occupying the same building footprint polygon
Building height (to top of wall) >=7.5 metres for the majority of heat demands
Minimum property numbers as set out in Section 4.2.3 of this Appendix
Domestic
Non-domestic
Mixed use
Heat Source-Led
One or more non-contiguous heat sources have been linked to the opportunity
Waste heat source-led
Green space-led
Blue space-led
Anchor Load-Led
Applicable to Multi-Building Opportunities only
One or more public sector anchor loads or non-public sector anchors loads are present within the heat demands that constitute the opportunity
Public sector anchor load-led
Private/other anchor load-led
Street Scale
Applicable to Multi-Building Opportunities only
The area within the cluster boundary is less than or equal to 3,000 m2
Urban Neighbourhood Scale
Applicable to Multi-Building Opportunities only
The area within the cluster boundary is more than 3,000 m2 and less than or equal to 100,000 m2
At least 80% of heat demands are in locations classified as ‘urban’ by the Scottish 8-fold urban rural classification.
Table 14: Low temperature heat network archetypes
The archetypes and their classification criteria are listed in Table 14. Not all opportunities are assigned an archetype: for example, a Multi-Building Opportunity with an area of more than 100,000 m2 , which does not contain any anchor loads and has not been matched with any non-contiguous heat sources would not belong to any of the archetypes listed in the table.
Electricity grid capacity status
The capacity of the local electricity grid to accommodate new electrical loads is an important factor for the viability of low temperature heat networks. Over the coming decades, local electricity grids will be upgraded to enable buildings to adopt heat pumps in all locations where they represent the best solution for decarbonising heat. However, the status of the electricity grid also influences what the best heat decarbonisation solution is for a particular property. In the short term, grid constraints can prevent the mass adoption of heat pumps that would be involved in the establishment of a low temperature heat network. However, heat pumps connected to low temperature networks place less strain on electricity networks than air source heat pumps. This means that grid constraints can sometimes support the viability of low temperature heat networks rather than limit them.
Identified low temperature heat network opportunities were divided into three equal-sized groups according to the projected ‘headroom’ at the local primary substation as a proportion of its capacity. This value acts as a proxy for the degree of electricity grid constraints that are likely to apply to each opportunity.
Prevalence and severity of fuel poverty and multiple deprivation
Low temperature heat networks can sometimes offer lower heating costs than existing polluting heating systems[9], and are almost always cheaper than direct electric heating (UK Government, 2025). Heat networks’ potential contribution to fuel poverty reduction at the same time as decarbonising makes them interesting to a variety of stakeholders. On the other hand, if the cost of heat from a low temperature heat network is too high (driven by factors such as capital costs, operating model or electricity costs), the risk of exacerbating fuel poverty must be investigated and managed.
Accurate fuel poverty data at a local level is not available. However, estimates of the likelihood of domestic properties’ occupants experiencing fuel poverty are available in the Home Analytics dataset. Identified low temperature heat network opportunities across Scotland were divided into three groups according to the average estimated probability of fuel poverty among dwellings within the opportunity grouping. Higher, Middle and Lower fuel poverty probability bands were defined as greater than 31%, 22 to 31%, and less than 21% respectively. Because they are derived from estimated probabilities, these bands also represent the estimated (rather than actual) relative prevalence of fuel poverty within an opportunity grouping.
The Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation was also included as a characteristic of an opportunity.
Property tenure
Dwellings which are socially rented by Local Authorities or Registered Social Landlords can represent good opportunities for low temperature heat network development thanks to the prevalence of concentrated ownership by organisations with strong incentives to decarbonise their stock. Property tenure data (including modelled estimates) is available within the Home Analytics dataset, and was used to calculate the estimated percentage of dwellings within an opportunity grouping which are socially rented. Energy Saving Trust state that the modelled categorical data on tenure in Home Analytics is around 98% accurate, and better than this if only the distinction between socially rented and other properties is considered (Energy Saving Trust, 2025a).
Property age and heritage designations
The age of a building can pose challenges for the installation of low temperature heat network connections (Johnston et al., 2024 and Historic England, 2025). However, building age can also represent an opportunity where low temperature heat networks are possible but other zero-emissions heating systems are more difficult. The estimated age of Communal Opportunity buildings and anchor load buildings was included as characterising information.
Heritage designations – either buildings being Listed or properties being in Conservation Areas – are also potential barriers or opportunities. The Listed status and Conservation Area inclusion of anchor load properties were included as characterising data. For Multi-Building Opportunities and Communal Opportunity buildings, the percentage of properties within the grouping with either Listed Status or included in Conservation Areas was calculated.
Presence of cooling demand
If configured to do so, low temperature heat networks can supply cooling as well as heating. The presence of cooling customers can improve the viability of a network by injecting ‘free’ thermal energy into the network that can be used elsewhere by customers needing heating. No national-scale dataset of cooling demand exists. Where it is available, data on cooling demands is sparse and unreliable. It generally does not provide sufficient resolution regarding seasonal variation, which is critical for networks that seek to reap the benefits of simultaneous or near-simultaneous heating and cooling demands.
For these reasons, the national assessment does not incorporate demand for cooling into the process that identifies opportunities. However, heat rejected from some larger cooling processes (supermarket refrigeration, data centres, brewing) was modelled as waste heat sources linked to Multi-Building Opportunities. At the same time, a geospatial data layer of potential cooling customers was created so that their presence within Multi-Building Opportunities can be identified. The criteria used to identify these properties are set out in Table 15.
Data source
Criteria
Scotland Heat Map 2022 ‘Potential Energy Supply’ layer
Sector equals “Brewery”, “Cooling Towers”, “Data centre”, or “Supermarket”
Scotland Heat Map 2022 ‘Heat demands’ layer
Ordnance Survey Class Description (tertiary level) is “Hotel/Motel” (CH03), “Bingo Hall / Cinema / Conference / Exhibition Centre / Theatre / Concert Hall” (CL07) or “Hospital / Hospice” (CM03) – or secondary level description is “Office” (CO).
and
Heat demand > 100MWh/year.
Table 15: Criteria for the identification of potential cooling customers within Multi-Building Opportunities
Screening decisions
Heat demand screening (inputs)
We removed 67,297 heat demands which had been marked as likely to have issues in the input dataset. The Scotland Heat Map includes as a data field a flag indicating whether OS mapping data suggested that there may be a reason to doubt the heat demand estimate. We excluded all heat demands which had the values ‘Non-building – parent’, ‘Non-building – not parent’, ‘Building – parent’ and ‘Building – no demand’ from the main working dataset. We also excluded heat demands with a description of ‘unclassified’, as these tend to include new build with incomplete or placeholder data as well as other potentially problematic addresses.
We also removed 254,424 further heat demands from the dataset that are unlikely to be able to benefit from a low temperature heat network connection:
all properties with heat demands less than 5,000 kWh per year, for which another zero-emissions heating system is likely to be lowest cost[10] (237,448 heat demands, of which 199,928 domestic and 37,520 non-domestic); and
non-domestic heat demands with building use classifications that indicate a high likelihood that their heat demand is dominated by temperature requirements that exceed those which can normally be produced through networked heat pumps, or that are likely to have minimal or no heat demand (16,976 properties). The list of excluded use classes is reported in Table 16.
Changes to the list of excluded use classes could conceivably lead to some buildings being excluded (or re-included) from the dataset used to identify opportunities. The impact of exclusion would be that relevant opportunity groupings would be smaller. Potentially, but infrequently, the exclusion of heat demands would cause entire opportunities to be missed. Conversely, changes leading to some buildings being included could cause opportunities to be identified that otherwise would not be.
Class Code
Class Description
Class Code
Class Description
Likely to be dominated by very high temperature heat demands
CI01CW
Cement Works
CU08
Gas / Oil Storage / Distribution
CI07
Incinerator / Waste Transfer Station
OI09
Kiln / Oven / Smelter
Likely to have no or minimal heat demands
CA
Agricultural
CS01
General Storage Land
CA02FF
Fish Farming
CT01
Airfield / Airstrip / Airport / Air Transport Infrastructure Facility
CA03
Horticulture
CT02
Bus Shelter
CA03VY
Vineyard
CT03
Car / Coach / Commercial Vehicle / Taxi Parking / Park And Ride Site
CB
Ancillary Building
CT04CF
Container Freight
CC06
Cemetery / Crematorium / Graveyard. In Current Use.
Table 16: List of Ordnance Survey Class Descriptions removed from Scotland Heat Map dataset before starting heat demand proximity analysis
Properties already using a heat pump (most likely an air source heat pump) and those already served by electrically powered communal heating systems could, in some circumstances, still benefit from switching to a low temperature heat network connection. This is particularly true when the current heating system reaches its end-of-life.
In their work for the Argyll and Bute Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategy, Zero Waste Scotland and Buro Happold assessed domestic properties only and excluded those which:
were believed to use mains gas as their main heating fuel (or for which the main heating fuel was unknown);
were believed to have a communal heating system with electricity as its main fuel; and
were believed to already have a heat pump.
These screening decisions were driven by the objectives of the study and factors specific to Argyll and Bute, including the strategic approach taken to off-gas areas as opposed to on-gas areas. The same screening criteria were not used for this nationwide study because properties currently using mains gas can represent good candidates for low temperature heat network development. However, depending on geographic location, such development may or may not align with the objectives of local energy plans and strategies. Similarly,
Heat source screening (inputs)
Waste heat sources with estimated available waste heat temperatures exceeding 80°C were screened out from the dataset. Although it would be technically straightforward for these sources to supply heat into low temperature heat networks, it is likely that there are ‘better’ uses for high value, high temperature waste heat. Heat reuse and supply to high temperature heat networks are likely to be favoured over supply to low temperature heat networks.
The Green Heat in Green Spaces (GHiGS) dataset includes many green spaces (or parts of green spaces) that are long and narrow, such as roadside verges. These features may have large total areas and so have the potential to host a large capacity of ground source heat infrastructure. However, the connection of features like closed loop boreholes over long linear distances is unlikely to be feasible for capital cost reasons as well as the challenges posed by pumping fluid over large distances. The linear reach of these green spaces means that it is possible for proximity analysis to link them to low temperature heat network opportunities that are situated close to their extremities.
The mapped water bodies used for the assessment feature long, narrow elements. In addition to rivers, which can be viable for accessing water source heat, the mapped elements included drainage ditches and small, low flow rate water courses.
Green spaces that are narrower than 10 metres (and <10m wide sections of broader-shaped green spaces) were eliminated from the dataset of green spaces that could be linked to opportunities. The same action was taken to address narrow water bodies. In both instances, it was found through trial and error that a 10-metre exclusion criterion worked to eliminate most roadside verges and ‘tendrils’ of green spaces as well as most drainage ditches and small burns.
This was achieved by applying a ‘negative’ (inwards) buffer of 5m to green space and water body polygons to eliminate narrow features (followed by the application of a positive 5m buffer to restore the original dimensions of broader-shaped areas).
Finally, green spaces and water bodies that have areas less than 1,000 square metres (after the application of the negative buffer described in the previous paragraph) were screened out of the dataset of green spaces and water bodies that could be linked to opportunities.
Greenspace Scotland (2021) mapped green spaces greater than 100 square metres as potential heat sources for ground source heat pumps serving individual properties, with a 100 square metre space assumed to be able to host one borehole. A space of 900 square metres (30m x 30m) was assumed to be able to host up to 9 boreholes. The GHiGS researchers applied a multiplier of 0.4 to the total area of mapped green spaces to align with an assumption that 40% of any one green space might be available for borehole construction. We chose a minimum green space area of 1000 square metres to correspond with a realistic potential capacity for 4 boreholes and 50,000 kWh/year total heat supply to connected demands (equal to the minimum total heat demand of a cluster containing 10 dwellings).
The same area criterion was used for water bodies by considering the area of a small lake or pond that could – according to rules of thumb – supply 25,000 kWh/year. Non-static water bodies of the same “area” could supply more than this.
Multi-Building Opportunity screening (outputs)
Groupings created through proximity analysis that only featured a small number of buildings were screened out in order to generate the Multi-Building Opportunities dataset, according to the formula stated in Section 4.2.3 of this Appendix. Similarly, High Property Count Areas were separated from Multi-Building Opportunities according to the 1,000-property threshold explained in Section 4.2.3.
If the screening criteria had involved a higher threshold for Multi-Building Opportunities, fewer Multi-Building Opportunities would have been identified, and they would have been on average smaller. If the screening criteria had involved a higher threshold for High Property Count Areas, more Multi-Building Opportunities would have been identified but the HPCAs would have been less numerous. With lower thresholds, the opposite impacts would apply.
Trimming of Multi-Building Opportunity and High Property Count Area shapes
The process that creates Multi-Building Opportunity groupings sometimes resulted in polygons with highly irregular shapes. Some examples of irregular shapes that had the potential to be confusing to users were presented to stakeholders. In general, stakeholders felt that it was worthwhile improving the boundaries of Multi-Building Opportunities, but that irregularities could be tolerated provided that users were informed of the significance of the shapes presented.
Census Output Areas are a system of geographic division that often aligns with significant physical changes (such as transitions between built up areas and farmland). A trimming process was applied that removed parts of the polygons that belonged to different Census Output Areas to the rest of the opportunity area but contained no heat demands. The result was a set of ‘trimmed’ polygons which represented Multi-Building Opportunities. In general, this was a change that impacted the visual representation of the opportunities only (not the groupings of buildings or characterising data, other than the area of the opportunity polygon).
However, in a small number of cases (138, or 1% of the Multi-Building Opportunities), the trimming process resulted in one or more heat demands being isolated from the grouping that they belonged to and thus lost from the Multi-Building Opportunity dataset. This unwanted side effect was potentially justified by the improvements achieved in terms of the visual representation of opportunities. However, it did mean that the link between the opportunity identification process and the data outputs was slightly compromised. It was not possible within the programme for the research to consult stakeholders regarding this trade-off, nor to revert to a methodology that did not apply the trimming with Output Areas. Our recommendation is that future assessments do not include the ‘trimming’ process, but ideally stakeholders would be consulted (having been presented with information about the advantages and disadvantages) before a decision is made.
Data quality risk assessment and mitigation
Risk assessment focusing on data quality was carried out at the point of decision regarding input datasets and updated as the analysis progressed. Risks associated with systematic errors, outliers and datasets’ fitness for purpose were considered for all input datasets. Some data quality risks impact users’ likely interpretation of the results, requiring an active response.
Table 17 summarises the main data quality issues identified that are linked to input datasets, and the responses adopted.
Dataset
Issue
Response
Scotland Heat Map – Heat Demand layer
Inaccuracy (in general) of estimated heat demands due to reliance on modelling and benchmarks, underoccupancy and/or underheating
Accept as a limitation of the national assessment methodology
Scotland Heat Map – Heat Demand layer
Inaccuracy of a small number of properties for which extremely large heat demands are reported
Design proximity analysis methodology that neutralises outliers. Adjust individual heat demands for the purposes of summing heat demand within opportunity groupings
Scotland Heat Map – Heat Demand layer
Unrealistic assignment of heat demands within certain mixed-use buildings (see Section 4.2.1.4)
Accept as a limitation of the national assessment methodology
Scotland Heat Map – Heat Demand layer
Inaccuracy of building height estimates from which ‘floor proxy’ values are derived
Accept as a limitation of the national assessment methodology
Scotland Heat Map – Potential Energy Supply layer
Uncertainty and limitations of approach and input datasets as identified in the relevant project report
Accept as a limitation of the national assessment methodology
Home Analytics
Inconsistent basis for deriving fuel poverty probability estimates in different geographic areas
Accept as a limitation of the national assessment methodology. Mitigate impact on data user/audience understanding by expressing fuel poverty probability as 3-tiered categories rather than absolute numbers
Home Analytics
Limitations of data used to derive LHEES Categories for each dwelling, and applicability to low temperature heat networks as opposed to air source heat pumps
Accept as a limitation of the national assessment methodology
Ordnance Survey MasterMap
Fitness for purpose of mapped physical features as representing barriers to low temperature heat network construction and operation
Accept as a limitation of the national assessment methodology
Ordnance Survey ZoomStack
Fitness for purpose of mapped physical features as representing barriers to low temperature heat network construction and operation
Accept as a limitation of the national assessment methodology
Table 17: Input data quality issue summary
Table 18 summarises the main data quality issues identified that affect specific elements of output datasets, and the responses adopted. Some of these issues can be traced directly to input data quality issues listed in Table 17.
Element of output dataset(s)
Issue
Response
Multi-Building Opportunities
138 ‘fragment’ polygons, each containing a small number of heat demands, were created by the trimming process described in Section 5.6. These were disconnected from the groupings they should have been part of.
Accept as the ‘price’ of the Multi-Building Opportunity polygon shape improvements achieved by the trimming process. These fragments were deleted from the dataset.
Multi-Building Opportunities
Around 70 very small (<100m2) polygons are present. These are generally groupings that could have been Communal Opportunities, but either the building height has been recorded as being below 7.5 metres or the properties are located at a point or points where there is no building footprint in Ordnance Survey MasterMap.
Accept as a limitation of the national assessment methodology.
A minority of heat demands present in the Scotland Heat Map 2022 and included within opportunity groupings are not represented in Home Analytics or Non-Domestic Analytics[11]. Occasionally, the resulting data gap can lead to proportions not summing to 100% or to the correct numerical total.
Accept as a limitation of the national assessment methodology.
A minority of heat demands present in the Scotland Heat Map 2022 and included within opportunity groupings are represented in both Home Analytics and Non-Domestic Analytics11. Occasionally, the resulting data duplication can lead to proportions not summing to 100% or to the correct numerical total.
Accept as a limitation of the national assessment methodology.
Table 18: Output data quality issue summary
Model execution step-by-step
Initial dataset preparation
Transformation of data format
Datasets were transformed as required to allow for operation within the QGIS software that was used for all geospatial processing and analysis. For the provided datasets this included converting between tabular and spatial formats, combining the multiple Home Analytics CSV files into a single shapefile, and ensuring all files were loaded using the relevant project Coordinate Reference System (CRS) for the QGIS file (ESPG:3857). Field structures were standardised across the datasets, with particular effort required to standardise the Unique Property Reference Numbers (UPRNs) in order to support the dataset joins required for the execution of the methodology.
As noted in Section 4.5 of this Appendix, a minority of heat demands present in the Scotland Heat Map 2022 and included within opportunity groupings are not represented in Home Analytics or Non-Domestic Analytics. In these instances, specific UPRNs contained within the Scotland Heat Map were not present in the Home Analytics or Non-Domestic Analytics datasets. Around 7,000 heat demands within Multi-Building Opportunities (0.4%) had UPRNs that did not have matches in either the Home Analytics or Non-Domestic Analytics datasets. A similar fraction of heat demands within Communal Opportunities were affected. The impact of these non-matches is that, occasionally, the resulting data gap can lead to proportions not summing to 100% or to the correct numerical total.
Cleaning and minimising
The datasets were minimised by removing all attribute fields except those required for subsequent analytical steps.
Table 19 lists the conditions used to clean and further minimise Scotland Heat Map Heat Demand layer data in order to create a useable dataset that was fit for the purpose of the national assessment.
Scotland Heat Map Heat Demand layer field name
Conditions for inclusion or exclusion
base_issue_flag
INCLUDE if value is “Building – has demand”
Otherwise, EXCLUDE
DESCRIPTIV
EXCLUDE if value is “unclassified”
Otherwise, INCLUDE
heatdemand
INCLUDE if value >5,000 kWh/year
Otherwise, EXCLUDE
CLASS
EXCLUDE if value matches list in Table 16
Table 19: Conditions applied to clean Scotland Heat Map heat demand data
A cleaning process focused on removing features that were less relevant to low temperature heat network opportunities was carried out. Features that were labelled as “unclassified”, “no demand” or had an estimated demand under 5,000kWh per year were removed from the identification process. This was done to remove any demands unlikely to represent viable connections. Furthermore, the demand points were then refined using the building use classification codes provided through the SHM dataset. By screening out codes associated with heat demands which are minimal, likely overestimated or dominated by high temperature requirements (such as fish farms, petrol stations and timber mills respectively), we ensured that the remaining demand data points represent heat-consuming properties which could reasonably be potential off takers of heat from a low temperature heat network.
In rare instances (114 of several million), erroneous data was present in the ‘Building Age’ field of Home Analytics or Non-Domestic Analytics (either zero values or text that did not represent the building age). In these instances, data was replaced with ‘Unknown’, a valid value that was already present in other heat demand records.
The Scotland Heat Map Potential Energy Supply layer was screened by excluding all heat source records where the value of the field “Temperature_range” was ‘80-120’ or ‘>120’. Geometric processing of green space and water body polygons to remove ‘narrow’ features is further described in Sections 4.3.2 and 5.8.2. The resulting green space and water body polygons which had total areas of less than 1,000 m2 were screened out (excluded) from the respective datasets of potential heat sources.
Data quality risk mitigation
Identified issues that were accepted as limitations (rather than actively addressed) are listed in Section 4.5 and discussed in other relevant sections of this report.
One data quality issue that required action was large outlier heat demands. A small number of outlier heat demands were adjusted as per the conditions and calculations listed in Table 20. The reasons for these adjustments are stated in Sections 4.2.1.3 and 4.2.1.4.
Edited SHM Heat Demand layer field name
Conditions for editing values
Calculation of new value
heatdemand (28 values edited)
‘heatdemand’ value ≥ 20,000 MWh/year
AND
‘confidence’ value < 5
Lower of: 20,000 MWh/year, ‘floor_area’ value * 1 MWh/m2/year
heatdemand (17 values edited)
‘CLASS’ value = ‘CM03’
AND
‘heatdemand’ value ≥ 10,000 MWh/year
‘heatdemand’ value * 0.425
Table 20: Conditions for editing certain Scotland Heat Map heat demand data
Minor processing of main working dataset
Minor dataset joins
In order to support the identification of opportunities, minor datasets joins were carried out to join the “Public Building” field found within the Non-Domestic Analytics to the SHM dataset. This was done to support the identification of anchor loads in the later stages of the methodology. This join was validated to confirm match rates within expectations of the number of demands.
Minor interim field creation
A number of fields were created to support opportunity identification through filtering, weighting and classification operations. Some of these fields served purely as interim data fields and so do not feature in the final output datasets.
A unique identifier field was created for the points within the main working dataset to allow for consistent tracking of demands across multiple stages of the methodology execution. Indicator fields were also created to distinguish between (and separately weight) domestic and non-domestic demands, and to identify demands which were considered public sector anchor loads. These indicator fields were crucial for representing the scale of potential opportunities and in their classification according to low temperature heat network archetypes.
The methodology used the heat demand required by individual properties as the main determining factor of the distance over which it may be able to connect to others through a low temperature heat network. The estimated maximum connection distance of a demand was calculated in the QGIS Field Calculator using the formula:
In the formula, LHD (a proxy Linear Heat Demand – see Section 4.2.1.1) was 2,000 kWh/year/metre for almost all heat demands, reflecting the value applied in previous regional low temperature heat network assessments and supported by a comparative cost model completed as part of this research. However, public sector anchor load properties were treated differently in order to reflect the advantages they hold in terms of their ability to connect to potential future heat networks. (Public sector anchor loads were identified where the field “PUBLIC_BUILDING_FLAG” in the Non-Domestic Analytics dataset had a value of “Local Authority”, “Scottish Government”, “UK Government” or “Other”, and where the “heatdemand” field in the Scotland Heat Map was greater than 100 MWh per year.) A lower figure of 1,500 kWh/year/metre was used for these demands. This resulted in such public sector properties having an influence over a proportionally larger area than that of the other demands.
The “CLAMP(0,(X),1000)” function in the formula was used in order to prevent exceptionally large heat demands from being connected to other heat demands over unrealistically large distances (considering the increased risk, cost and delivery challenges associated with very long pipe runs) and to limit the impact of large heat demand outliers. The function limited the maximum buffer radius to 1 km.
Communal Opportunity identification
Utilising the OS Mastermap – Building Footprints shapefile, an initial spatial join step was undertaken to identify heat demands (point data) located within the same building footprint polygon. These co-located heat demands include those within buildings containing multiple units such as blocks of flats, tenements or their non-domestic equivalents. Using the “Join by Locations (Summary)” spatial join tool available within the QGIS software toolbox, the previously processed heat demand points were connected to the OS Building Footprints layer. This tool summarises all data points which relate to the selected geometry of the chosen layer and allows the calculation of property counts, sums of heat demand values, and other functions such as averages and majority values.
When executing the join of the heat demand points to the building polygons, two data fields were selected to be summarised in order to identify Communal Opportunities. For an opportunity to be considered as a Communal Opportunity it must meet both of the following criteria:
Grouping scale indicator is 10 or higher: The scale indicator is a sum of the values of one of the identifier fields discussed in the previous section, which weights domestic and non-domestic demands by assigning a value of 1 or 2 respectively. Groupings which have a scale indicator value of less than 10 (the threshold chosen by the researchers to include groupings as Opportunities) were removed from the Communal Opportunities dataset.
Majority “Floor_Proxy” is 3 or higher: In the SHM dataset, the “floor_proxy” field is a “proxy for the number of floors in a building. Calculated based on a building height divided by 3 i.e. assumes a floor height of 3m”. Once the rounding involved in the calculation of the “floor_proxy” field is taken into account, this criterion is equivalent to the requirement for Communal Opportunities to have a height of at least 7.5 metres. Although not perfect, this criterion tends to include blocks of flats, tenements and taller mixed-use buildings while excluding houses.
All buildings containing groupings of heat demands that did not meet both criteria were deleted from the layer, leaving only the buildings which were deemed to be Communal Opportunities. The calculation and appending of characterising data for these opportunities is discussed later in this chapter.
Separation of Communal Opportunities from main working dataset
Opportunity groupings that involved spatially dispersed heat demands were dealt with through a separate process to the Communal Opportunities. This is because the proximity analysis used for the identification of Multi-Building Opportunities is ineffective when properties are situated in vertically above one-another. To prepare the main working dataset for proximity analysis, a spatial selection tool was used to separate the heat demands that had been grouped into Communal Opportunities from all other heat demands. The “Select by Location” tool available within the QGIS software toolbox was used to perform this step. The main working dataset (the heat demand points layer which had been cleaned and minimised) was filtered with reference to the building polygon layer created in Section 5.3. The heat demands that spatially interact with these buildings were exported to create a new layer of address-level data dedicated to Communal Opportunities. This selection was then inverted with the remaining demands being exported to a new layer which would be subjected to the identification process for Multi-Building Opportunities described in the following section.
This activity created 2 distinct heat demand point layers (in addition to a master layer which contains all demand points post cleaning and minimising):
The heat demands which were co-located with the building polygons created in Section 5.3 (heat demands within Communal Opportunities).
The heat demands to be taken forward in the spatially dispersed section of the methodology.
Multi-Building Opportunity and High Property Count Area identification
Drawing buffers around heat demands
Utilising the buffer radius field created in the steps described in Section 5.2.2, circular buffers were drawn around the remaining heat demands within the geospatial environment. The radius of the circles represented the estimated distance within which connection to a low temperature heat network could be economically viable.
Subtracting barriers
To reflect physical and practical constraints that would be likely to influence a potential heat network, a dedicated “barriers” layer was created using Ordnance Survey map layers, including major roadways such as motorways and A-roads as well as other physical barriers such as railways, woodlands and waterways. This barrier shapefile was used to cut the previously-created buffer zones in an attempt for the generated opportunities to better represent deliverable conditions (rather than relying on heat density alone).
The buffers were cut utilising the “difference” tool available on QGIS, removing only the sections where the buffer zones intersect with barriers.
Deleting orphaned fragments and merging overlapping shapes
The use of barrier shapes to cut buffer zones resulted in fragments of buffer zone polygons that were no longer spatially connected to the heat demand point from which the buffer zones were originally generated, but retained a connection to each other in the data environment. In order to identify and remove these fragments, the resultant layer was first processed using the “Multipart to Singlepart” tool. This tool separates the fragments which had been cut from the same single original shape into fully-individual polygons.
A spatial check was then conducted to determine if any given fragment contained its source heat demand utilising the “ID” identifiers applied in an earlier process. This was done using the “Join by Location” tool in QGIS with the set up as shown in Figure 13.
Figure 13: “Join by Location” tool settings used for deleting orphaned polygon fragments
The result of this process is the creation of a new polygon for each interaction between a parent heat demand and a child fragment with which it intersects[12].
The buffer fragments that pass this check were then dissolved (using the QGIS tool of the same name) to merge overlapping buffer areas into combined proto-opportunity areas.
Joining attributes to polygons and screening by property count
A spatial summary join was performed between the proto-opportunity polygons created in the previous step and the heat demand point data from which they were created. This enabled the polygons to be categorised as ‘opportunities’ or non-opportunities. Summary statistics were calculated to determine the total heat demand for the opportunities, as well as creating a grouping scale indicator similar to that created for Communal Opportunities (the sum of the heat demands’ values if domestic = 1 and non-domestic = 2).
The proto-opportunity polygons were then filtered using a grouping scale indicator threshold of 10. Groupings which did not meet the threshold were deleted.
Trimming of Multi-Building Opportunity and High Property Count Area shapes
The process that creates Multi-Building Opportunity groupings, laid out in previous sections, sometimes results in polygons with highly irregular shapes. A trimming process was applied that cut opportunity areas along the boundaries of Census Output Areas, using the same tools as described in Section 5.5.2[13]. This action created fragments that belonged to different Output Areas to the rest of the opportunity area but contained no heat demands. These fragments were deleted and the remaining areas (all containing heat demands) were re-joined using the process described in Section 5.5.3. The result was a set of ‘trimmed’ polygons which represented Multi-Building Opportunities. In general, this was a change that impacted the visual representation of the opportunities only (not the groupings of buildings or characterising data, other than the area of the opportunity polygon).
In a small number of cases (138, or 1% of the Multi-Building Opportunities), the trimming process resulted in one or more heat demands being isolated from the grouping that they belonged to. These fragments were deleted from the Multi-Building Opportunity dataset.
Separation of Multi-Building Opportunities and High Property Count Areas
With the final Opportunity areas created and summary statistics joined, a further classification step was completed to differentiate between High Property Count Areas and the Multi-Building Opportunities which form the focus of the national assessment. Using the property count fields added in a previous step, High Property Count Areas were separated from the other polygons whenever the property count was greater than or equal to 1,000.
High Heat Demand Areas were identified within the High Property Count Areas dataset by selecting only those areas with total heat demands above 100,000 MWh per year.
Matching of non-contiguous heat sources to opportunities
Waste heat sources
13 new data centre locations were identified through a web search and added to the waste heat sources dataset from the Scotland Heat Map (without any of the characterising data that is present in the SHM).
Buffer radii were calculated for all waste heat sources using the process described in Section 5.2.2, but this time using a Linear Heat Density proxy of 4,000 kWh/metre/year multiplied by their estimated annual heat supply capacity. Data centres that do not feature in the Scotland Heat Map dataset were assigned a buffer radius of 1 km. Buffers were then drawn in the GIS environment using the process described in Section 5.5.1.
Maximum connection distances were calculated for Communal Opportunities and Multi-Building Opportunities, also using a Linear Heat Density proxy of 4,000 kWh/metre/year multiplied by their total estimated annual heat demand.
A proximity analysis considered the separation between a waste heat source’s point location and either the building footprint of a Communal Opportunity or the geometric centroid of a Multi-Building Opportunity. The centroid was chosen as the evaluation point to avoid instances where ‘limbs’ extending from Multi-Building Opportunity polygons were close to waste heat sources but the majority of the heat demands were not. The choice of the centroid also limited instances where large areas of open green space were within reach of the waste heat source, but heat demands were not.
Using spatial join operations in QGIS, any demand evaluation points (building footprints or opportunity centroids) located within the maximum supply-driven connection distance of each waste heat source were taken forward for further evaluation based on the demand-driven maximum connection distance.
For each waste heat source and opportunity pairing identified through a spatial intersection, lines were drawn between the waste heat locations and the point or polygon representing the opportunity. This was done using the “Shortest Line Between Points” tool in QGIS. Each line represented a potential match between supply and demand, with the line also facilitating the calculation of the distance between the two. These distances were compared against the corresponding demand-driven maximum connection distances previously calculated. Any lines that exceed the maximum distance for their matched demand group were removed from the analysis. Each remaining connection line therefore represented a viable spatial match between a waste heat source and an opportunity.
Waste heat sources that had been matched with low temperature heat network opportunities were processed into a dedicated output dataset which captures their locations and the relevant fields present in the original Scotland Heat Map layer such as the heat source sector and annual supply potential (where available).
Blue and green spaces
The blue space dataset was created by combining Ordnance Survey mapping of static water bodies, waterways and coasts into a single file. This included rivers, canals, lochs and other major surface water features.
The Green Heat in Green Spaces (GHiGs) dataset was produced by Greenspace Scotland specifically to support the identification of opportunities for hosting ground source heat infrastructure in public green spaces, including in connection with heat networks. The country’s mapped green spaces were already subjected to a degree of screening in the preparation of the dataset. An additional screening step removed blue and green space polygons with areas of less than 1,000 m2.
Both the blue space and GHiGs datasets were subject to a geoprocessing step that removed narrow parts of the polygons present. This enabled the subsequent process of matching green and blue space with opportunities to avoid creating unrealistic connections (as explained in Section 4.3.2). This was done by applying a negative (inwards) buffer of 5m to the shapefile which will remove any polygon (or part of a polygon) that is narrower than 10 metres. The resultant layer was then buffered again by 105m (positive, outwards) to counteract the initial negative buffer and implement a maximum matching search radius of 100 metres from the boundary of a green or blue space.
A spatial join was then conducted between the blue and green spaces’ buffers and the opportunities (both multi-building and communal) identified in previous steps. Intersections between these features represented matches between heat sources and opportunities.
Identification and characterisation of anchor loads and cooling customers
Public sector anchor loads were identified according to the criteria stated in Section 5.2.2. Non-public sector anchor loads were identified where the field “PUBLIC_BUILDING_FLAG” in the Non-Domestic Analytics dataset had a value of “Not applicable”, and where the “heatdemand” field in the Scotland Heat Map was greater than 200 MWh per year. Both types of anchor load were processed into dedicated output datasets which capture their locations and characteristics that are relevant to the viability of connecting them to a low temperature heat network. (Dataset joins using the anchor loads’ Unique Property Reference Numbers (UPRNs) enabled data from both Scotland Heat Map and Non-Domestic Analytics to be brought together.)
Potential cooling customers existing within Multi-Building Opportunity groupings were identified through application of the criteria set out in Table 21 to the relevant datasets and performing of a spatial join. The type of building, infrastructure or process was included in a dedicated output dataset which also captures the location of each potential cooling customer.
Data source
Criteria
Scotland Heat Map 2022 ‘Potential Energy Supply’ layer
Sector equals “Brewery”, “Cooling Towers”, “Data centre”, or “Supermarket”
Scotland Heat Map 2022 ‘Heat demands’ layer
Ordnance Survey Class Description (tertiary level) is “Hotel/Motel” (CH03), “Bingo Hall / Cinema / Conference / Exhibition Centre / Theatre / Concert Hall” (CL07) or “Hospital / Hospice” (CM03) – or secondary level description is “Office” (CO).
and
Heat demand > 100MWh/year.
Table 21: Criteria for the identification of potential cooling customers within Multi-Building Opportunities
Characterisation of Communal Opportunities and Multi-Building Opportunities
A range of characterising data fields were joined onto the Communal Opportunities and Multi-Building Opportunities spatial datasets. (Data fields integral to the opportunity identification process – namely, heat demands and domestic and non-domestic property counts – were already present for these layers as well as for High Property Count Areas.)
Characterising data mostly came from the three address-level datasets (Scotland Heat Map, Home Analytics and Non-Domestic Analytics), with some additional spatial data derived from open government sources (Local Authority and Data Zone boundaries, the Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation and the Scottish Government Urban Rural Classification). The source of each data field in the Communal Opportunities and Multi-Building Opportunities layers is listed in Table 24 and Table 22. Full details of input datasets are given in Section 3.1 of this Appendix.
The Unique Property Reference Number (UPRN) was the data field used to match values from Home Analytics and Non-Domestic Analytics with the heat demand points that derived from the Scotland Heat Map. The vast majority of SHM heat demand points were also present in the relevant other dataset. However, a total of 6,588 (0.4% of 1.5 million) SHM heat demand UPRNs which were part of Multi-Building Opportunities or High Property Count Areas were not present in Home Analytics or Non-Domestic Analytics. This could have been due to incompleteness of datasets, inconsistencies with UPRN assignment, changes of use, or building demolition. A similarly small fraction of heat demands in Communal Opportunities were affected.
Data from the aforementioned sources was summed, counted or formed the input to further calculations (such as percentages of overall totals). For some data fields, a majority (modal) value from the grouped heat demands was calculated. In some instances, the requirement for data to be aggregated to a certain level (to satisfy data protection and licensing requirements) meant that criteria had to be met for a value to be reported. The calculations applied to each field in the Communal Opportunities and Multi-Building Opportunities layers are set out in Table 23 and Table 25.
Where Scotland Heat Map UPRNs were absent from the other datasets, data relating to these heat demands was excluded from the calculations of group characteristics. This explains why occasionally some values do not sum to the totals that would otherwise we expected. Percentage results represent the distribution of characteristics across heat demands that had Home Analytics and/or Non-Domestic Analytics records only.
Some characterising data fields relate to low temperature heat network ‘archetypes’ that may or may not apply to a particular opportunity. These archetypes were defined by the researchers as set out in Table 14, Section 4.2.10. Archetype identification sometimes required spatial joins to be conducted with layers representing heat sources and anchor loads. Other archetypes are defined by opportunity characteristics like area and urban/rural classification.
SHM = Scotland Heat Map, HA = Home Analytics, NDA = Non-Domestic Analytics, GHiGS = Green Heat in Green Spaces. Table continues on subsequent pages.
Short Field Name
Full Field Description
Source
ID_2
Communal Opportunity identification number
None (original)
ParentUPRN
Communal Opportunity ‘Parent’ Unique Property Reference Number (UPRN)
SHM
Local_Aut2
Local Authority
data.gov.uk
Data_Zone2
2022 Data Zone
data.gov.uk
SIMD_Deci2
Data Zone Overall Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation (SIMD) Decile
data.gov.uk
UrbRur8_2
2022 Urban-Rural 8-fold classification
data.gov.uk
HeatDemnd2
Communal Opportunity estimated total annual heat demand in MWh
SHM
Dom_Count2
Communal Opportunity number of dwellings
SHM
ND_Count2
Communal Opportunity number of non-domestic heat demands
SHM
Soc_Ten%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of dwellings with social tenure
HA
FP_Band2
Communal Opportunity fuel poverty band
HA (banding is original)
Fuel_Gas%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with mains gas as the main fuel type
HA and NDA
Fuel_Ele%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with electricity as the main fuel type
Fuel_Oth%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with other as the main fuel type
Sys_Boil%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with boiler as the main heating system
HA and NDA
Sys_HP%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with heat pump as the main heating system
Sys_Comm%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with a communal system as the main heating system
Sys_Othr%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with other as the main heating system
LHEECt0%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of dwellings in LHEES Low Carbon Heat Category 0
HA
LHEECt1%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of dwellings in LHEES Low Carbon Heat Category 1
LHEECt2%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of dwellings in LHEES Low Carbon Heat Category 2
LHEECt3%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of dwellings in LHEES Low Carbon Heat Category 3
BLCon_Gas2
Communal Opportunity baseline total annual heat consumption from mains gas in MWh
SHM, HA and NDA
BLCon_Ele2
Communal Opportunity baseline total annual heat consumption from electricity in MWh
BLCon_Oth2
Communal Opportunity baseline total annual heat consumption from other fuel in MWh
Bldg_Age2
Communal Opportunity building age
SHM
Heritge%_2
Communal Opportunity percentage of properties with building heritage designation(s)
HA and NDA
Off_Gas%_2
Communal Opportunity percentage of properties estimated to be “off gas” [14]
SHM
EleGrdCap2
Communal Opportunity electricity grid capacity band
Communal Opportunity number of non-domestic heat demands
Count19
Soc_Ten%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of dwellings with social tenure
Count of dwellings with social tenure divided by count of dwellings19. Number of domestic properties in building must be at least 5, otherwise data point will be “NULL”
FP_Band2
Communal Opportunity fuel poverty band
Category assigned on the basis of average fuel poverty probability percentage for dwellings in group. Number of domestic properties in building and with a value in the relevant field must be at least 10, otherwise data point will be “NULL”
Fuel_Gas%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with mains gas as the main fuel type
Count of heat demands using the fuel divided by count of heat demands within the grouping19
Fuel_Ele%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with electricity as the main fuel type
Fuel_Oth%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with other as the main fuel type
Sys_Boil%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with boiler as the main heating system
Count of heat demands using the heating system divided by count of heat demands within the grouping19
Sys_HP%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with heat pump as the main heating system
Sys_Comm%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with a communal system as the main heating system
Sys_Othr%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of heat demands with other as the main heating system
LHEECt0%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of dwellings in LHEES Low Carbon Heat Category 0
Count of dwellings in the category divided by count of dwellings within the grouping19
LHEECt1%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of dwellings in LHEES Low Carbon Heat Category 1
Number of domestic properties in each count must be at least 5, otherwise data point will be “NULL”
LHEECt2%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of dwellings in LHEES Low Carbon Heat Category 2
LHEECt3%2
Communal Opportunity percentage of dwellings in LHEES Low Carbon Heat Category 3
BLCon_Gas2
Communal Opportunity baseline total annual heat consumption from mains gas in MWh
Sum of heat demands of all properties in grouping that use the fuel
BLCon_Ele2
Communal Opportunity baseline total annual heat consumption from electricity in MWh
BLCon_Oth2
Communal Opportunity baseline total annual heat consumption from other fuel in MWh
Bldg_Age2
Communal Opportunity building age
Majority (modal) value within grouped heat demands
PropTy_maj
Communal Opportunity majority domestic property type, if applicable
Majority (modal) value within grouped domestic heat demands
Heritge%_2
Communal Opportunity percentage of properties with building heritage designation(s)
Count of heat demands which are either in Conservation Areas or Listed divided by count of heat demands within the grouping19
Off_Gas%_2
Communal Opportunity percentage of properties estimated to be “off gas” [20]
Count19 of heat demands which are recorded as “off gas” divided by count of heat demands within the grouping
EleGrdCap2
Communal Opportunity electricity grid capacity band
Category assigned on the basis of the expected available headroom at the location’s primary substation as a proportion of expected primary substation capacity in 2030
Majority (modal) value within grouped domestic heat demands
HeatSrceW2
Number of heat sources of type Waste Heat matched to Communal Opportunity
Count
HeatSrceG2
Number of heat sources of type Greenspace matched to Communal Opportunity
Count
HeatSrceB2
Number of heat sources of type Blue Space (water bodies) matched to Communal Opportunity
Count
HeatScMWh2
Communal Opportunity matched waste heat sources total annual potential supply in MWh
Sum
Archtyp1_2
Type of Communal Opportunity (Domestic, Mixed Use, Non-domestic)
If grouping heat demands are all domestic, archetype is Domestic. If grouping heat demands are all non-domestic, archetype is Non-domestic. Otherwise, archetype is Mixed Use
Archtyp2_2
Heat Source Led archetype, if applicable
If at least one Waste Heat, Greenspace or Blue Space heat source is matched to the opportunity, archetype applies
Table 24: Sources of characterising data fields in the Communal Opportunities output layer
Table continues on subsequent pages
Short Field Name
Full Field Description
Calculation, if applicable
All applicable fields
Where a data field is a calculated majority (modal) value, the value will be “NULL” if there is no majority value (e.g. if there is a tie)
Cluster_ID
Multi-Building Opportunity identification number
Local_Aut1
Local Authority
Majority (modal) value within grouped heat demands
Data_Zone1
2022 Data Zone in which majority of heat demands lie
SIMD_Deci1
Overall Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation (SIMD) Decile of Data Zone in which majority of heat demands lie
Urb%_1
Percentage of heat demands in Urban areas (according to 2022 Urban-Rural 8-fold classification)
Count of heat demands in location classified as Urban divided by count of heat demands within the grouping[22]
HeatDemnd1
Cluster estimated total annual heat demand in MWh
Sum
Dom_Count1
Cluster number of dwellings
Count22
ND_Count1
Cluster number of non-domestic heat demands
Count22
Soc_Ten%1
Cluster percentage of dwellings with social tenure
Count of dwellings with social tenure divided by count of dwellings22. Number of domestic properties in cluster must be at least 5, otherwise data point will be “NULL”
FP_Band1
Cluster dwelling fuel poverty band
Category assigned on the basis of average fuel poverty probability percentage for dwellings in group. Number of domestic properties in cluster and with a value in the relevant field must be at least 10, otherwise data point will be “NULL”
Fuel_Gas%1
Cluster percentage of heat demands with mains gas as the main fuel type
Count22 of heat demands using the fuel divided by count of heat demands within the grouping
Fuel_Ele%1
Cluster percentage of heat demands with electricity as the main fuel type
Fuel_Oth%1
Cluster percentage of heat demands with other as the main fuel type
Sys_Boil%1
Cluster percentage of heat demands with boiler as the main heating system
Count22 of heat demands using the heating system divided by count of heat demands within the grouping
Sys_HP%1
Cluster percentage of heat demands with heat pump as the main heating system
Sys_Comm%1
Cluster percentage of heat demands with a communal system as the main heating system
Sys_Othr%1
Cluster percentage of heat demands with other as the main heating system
LHEESCt0%1
Cluster percentage of dwellings in LHEES Low Carbon Heat Category 0
Count of dwellings in the category divided by count of dwellings within the grouping22
LHEESCt1%1
Cluster percentage of dwellings in LHEES Low Carbon Heat Category 1
Number of domestic properties in each count must be at least 5, otherwise data point will be “NULL”
LHEESCt2%1
Cluster percentage of dwellings in LHEES Low Carbon Heat Category 2
LHEESCt3%1
Cluster percentage of dwellings in LHEES Low Carbon Heat Category 3
BLCon_Gas1
Cluster baseline total annual heat consumption from mains gas in MWh
Sum of heat demands of all properties in grouping that use the fuel
BLCon_Ele1
Cluster baseline total annual heat consumption from electricity in MWh
BLCon_Oth1
Cluster baseline total annual heat consumption from other fuel in MWh
Heritge%_1
Cluster percentage of properties with building heritage designation(s)
Count of heat demands which are either in Conservation Areas or Listed divided by count of heat demands within the grouping22
Off_Gas%_1
Cluster percentage of properties estimated to be “off gas” [23]
Count of heat demands which are recorded as “off gas” divided by count of heat demands within the grouping22
EleGrdCap1
Cluster electricity grid capacity band
Category assigned on the basis of the expected available headroom at the location’s primary substation as a proportion of expected primary substation capacity in 2030
HeatSrcW_1
Number of heat sources of type Waste Heat matched to cluster
Count
HeatSrcG_1
Number of heat sources of type Greenspace matched to cluster
Count
HeatSrcB_1
Number of heat sources of type Blue Space (water bodies) matched to cluster
Count
HeatScMWh1
Cluster matched waste heat sources total annual potential supply in MWh
Sum
ArctypAnc1
Anchor Load Led archetype, if applicable
If at least one anchor load is present within the grouped heat demands, archetype applies
ArctypHSL1
Heat Source Led archetype, if applicable
If at least one Waste Heat, Greenspace or Blue Space heat source is matched to the opportunity, archetype applies
ArctypNhd1
Urban Neighbourhood archetype, if applicable
If the area within the cluster boundary is more than 3,000 m2 and less than or equal to 100,000 m2 and at least 80% of heat demands are in locations classified as ‘urban’, archetype applies
ArctypStr1
Street Scale archetype, if applicable
If the area within the cluster boundary is less than or equal to 3,000 m2, archetype applies
Clust_Area
Area of Multi-Building Opportunity polygon in square metres
Pub_Anc_L1
Indicator of presence of public sector anchor loads
Oth_Anc_L1
Indicator of presence of non-public sector anchor loads
Table 25: Calculation of characterising data fields in the Multi-Building Opportunities output layer
Quality assurance
Stakeholder engagement provided some high-level quality assurance of elements of the model design, including key assumptions. Data quality risk assessment and responses are discussed in Section 4.5 of this Appendix. This chapter discusses dedicated quality assurance activities carried out in addition to stakeholder engagement and data quality risk assessment.
Researchers’ quality assurance
Quality assurance checks carried out on the model and its outputs included:
review of model scope, specification and model map;
review of methodology (this Appendix) for correctness and fitness-for-purpose;
review of data outputs User Guide for completeness and fitness-for-purpose;
maintenance of version control;
review of data outputs:
units, precision and data type (numbers, text)
field and layer labelling
empty data fields, extreme values and distributions within data layers
checksums
review of visualisations for readability and accuracy;
development of Assumptions Log and Quality Assurance Log, including Issues Log and Possible Improvements Log.
Issues noted were either resolved through adjustments to the model or accepted and discussed in the appropriate section of this Appendix.
Scottish Government quality assurance
A meeting was held with Scottish Government representatives during which elements of the model were demonstrated within the QGIS software environment. Questions were posed and answered on diverse aspects of the methodology. Scottish Government representatives also reviewed Sections 2 to 5 of this Appendix and the Assumptions Log.
Potential improvements
The following potential improvements have been identified while developing and implementing the methodology for the national assessment:
Conducting sensitivity analysis on the Linear Heat Density-proxy assumption to generate an understanding of how the number and scale of Multi-Building Opportunities varies. This could help practitioners decide which opportunities they should focus on, and would help researchers to build the evidence base regarding the contribution that low temperature heat networks could make to decarbonising heat in buildings.
Investigating the impact of using the same Linear Heat Density-proxy assumption for public sector anchor loads as for all other types of building. If the impact of treating public anchor loads differently is negligible, the methodology could be simplified.
Incorporating more recently updated heat demand data from Home Analytics, Non-Domestic Analytics or other sources (including the Scotland Heat Map should it be updated). Improving accuracy due to increasing Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) coverage, new data collection and the development of improved modelling methodologies will improve the ability of the national assessment methodology to identify locations likely to be suitable for low temperature heat networks.
Sub-archetypes (for example, types of Communal Opportunity based on occupancy or building form) could be developed.
Scottish Water information regarding the location and capacity of wastewater treatment plants would expand the number of potentially viable waste heat sources available to be matched with nearby low temperature heat network opportunities.
Ordnance Survey building use classes could be used to expand the list of important sources of waste heat beyond those included in the SHM “Potential Energy Supply” layer.
Research into the waste heat capacity of non-fossil fuelled thermal power stations (e.g. from condensers that form part of the steam cycle) and anaerobic digestion plants could support the expansion of potential sources of waste heat that could supply low temperature heat networks.
Improvements to the available data concerning green spaces and woodland could improve the accuracy of the matches identified between green spaces and low temperature heat network opportunities.
Information on the variation of waste heat availability with time (from daily profiles to seasonal fluctuations) would improve confidence in the degree to which demand from heat users on a network can be met from a waste heat source.
How to cite this publication:
Waters, L., Brown, B. and Brown, A. (2026) ‘National assessment of low temperature heat network opportunities’, ClimateXChange. https://doi.org/10.7488/era/7027
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
Grid electricity connections are near-universal in Scotland, with the notable exception of some islands, remote communities and very remote rural properties. The national assessment has not excluded known off-grid locations. We expect that, in the very rare cases that opportunities are identified in such places, most users will be aware of the constraints that apply. More information can be found in Section 4.2.6 of Appendix A. ↑
The categories used in this paragraph are those defined by the Scottish Government’s 6- and 8-fold urban-rural classifications. ↑
All geospatial data was reprojected to a common Coordinate Reference System (CRS). ↑
Where no EPC exists for an address, the developers of the dataset (and those that feed into it) inferred its heat demand by training statistical and geospatial models using the address-level information that is available, combined with local area statistics (such as from neighbours’ EPCs). The production of EPCs itself involves some simple modelling of a property’s heat requirements based on observations made during a physical survey. ↑
Shared Ground Loop schemes are a type of low temperature heat network in which the heat source is a ground source heat collector that is shared between multiple distributed heat pumps. ↑
The ‘Potential Energy Supply’ layer derives from an assessment of potential sources of waste heat for heat networks in Scotland carried out by Sinclair and Unkaya (BRE) for ClimateXChange (2020). ↑
The Green Heat in Green Spaces project was unable to calculate this quantity with sufficient confidence to publish results and was restricted in terms of the contributory data that was possible to share. ↑
The concept of what properties ‘require’ in order to enable heat pump installation is not explained. It is unclear whether operating costs, capital costs, space requirements, consumer acceptance or technology availability (among other possible factors) influence judgments of what is ‘required’. ↑
Feasibility studies and options appraisals provide evidence that low temperature heat networks can be, but are not always, cost-competitive with existing polluting heating systems. Comparisons of shared ground loop operating costs with individual air source heat pumps (Element Energy, 2023) can also be considered alongside comparisons of air source heat pumps against fossil heating systems such as those provided by Energy Saving Trust. ↑
Evidence could not be found in literature to support this quantitative assumption. Johnston et al. (2024) state that in small properties with low heat demands, the capital costs of an air-to-water heat pump may not be economic and alternative technologies should be considered. We infer that heat pumps connected to low temperature heat networks will similarly be uneconomic for properties with low heat demands. The value of 5,000 kWh per year was selected and justified through the development of a simple cost model comparing a Shared Ground Loop scheme connection with electric storage heaters. The model assumed a heat pump capacity of 3 kW (equal to the smallest ground source heat pumps currently on the market), typical per-property installation costs, heat pump grants available in early 2026 (and expected to continue), typical system efficiencies, long-term average electricity prices, maintenance costs and equipment replacement costs. For properties with low heat demands, air-to-air heat pumps can often outcompete electric storage heaters in terms of overall heating costs. ↑
Often this issue can be attributed to changes to buildings that took place between the creation of the datasets on which the Scotland Heat Map 2022 was built, and the creation of the versions of Home Analytics and Non-Domestic Analytics used in the National Assessment. Demolitions or changes of use are common changes that would cause this issue. ↑
The “Join by Location” tool effectively allows all demands that fall within the spatial boundary of a single parts polygon to share its ID with that polygon, creating a new polygon for each interaction (i.e if a buffer fragment contains 5 demand points within it, 5 polygons with one ID each is added to this new layer). A check is then done which matches the ID which was attached to each heat demand point with the ID attached to each new polygon created by the “Join by Location” process. Any polygon without a matching ID (including if there are no heat demand points within it) was considered an “orphaned” fragment. and deleted from the developing polygons layer. ↑
The output area polygons available from National Records of Scotland required to be converted into line data format and buffered by 1 metre to give them physical breadth that could interact with opportunity area polygons. Cut opportunity areas were then buffered by 1.1 metres to allow them to re-connect. ↑
‘Off gas’ refers to a property location being more than 63 metres from the nearest Scotia Gas Network gas distribution pipe. It is not related to the fuel used in that property. Independent gas networks are not included. ↑
Long Term Development Statements, Network Development Plans, Heat Maps and Primary Substation Polygons from the two Distribution Network Operators that serve Scotland. ↑
‘MoMu class’ is an archetype group developed by Energy Savings Trust that represents common types of blocks of flats in Scotland. ↑
‘Off gas’ refers to a property location being more than 63 metres from the nearest Scotia Gas Network gas distribution pipe. It is not related to the fuel used in that property. Independent gas networks are not included. ↑
Long Term Development Statements, Network Development Plans, Heat Maps and Primary Substation Polygons from the two Distribution Network Operators that serve Scotland. ↑
In QGIS, rather than performing a ‘Count’ calculation, it was necessary to sum a field that contained a ‘1’ for heat demands that were to be counted and a ‘0’ for all other heat demands. ↑
‘Off gas’ refers to a property location being more than 63 metres from the nearest Scotia Gas Network gas distribution pipe. It is not related to the fuel used in that property. Independent gas networks are not included. ↑
‘MoMu class’ is an archetype group developed by Energy Savings Trust that represents common types of blocks of flats in Scotland. ↑
In QGIS, rather than performing a ‘Count’ calculation, it was necessary to sum a field that contained a ‘1’ for heat demands that were to be counted and a ‘0’ for all other heat demands. ↑
‘Off gas’ refers to a property location being more than 63 metres from the nearest Scotia Gas Network gas distribution pipe. It is not related to the fuel used in that property. Independent gas networks are not included. ↑
Scotland’s peatlands store large amounts of carbon and play a key role in climate regulation and biodiversity conservation. However, extracting peat for use in horticultural growing media – materials used to grow plants in containers or controlled systems – damages these ecosystems and releases greenhouse gas emissions.
The Scottish Government has committed to ending the use of peat in horticulture, while recognising the sector’s economic importance. In 2024, potatoes, fruit and vegetables, and ornamental plants such as flowers and shrubs together contributed £831 million to Scottish crop output, representing over half of the total value.
This report assesses whether it is possible to move to peat-free growing materials in Scottish horticulture. It draws on published studies, industry reports and extensive engagement with the sector, including workshops and interviews with growers, growing media manufacturers, retailers and researchers. Stakeholders provided practical insight into how peat-free systems are working in practice, the challenges businesses face, and the solutions currently being trialled across the industry.
Key findings
Scotland can achieve peat-free horticulture. Businesses across the horticulture sector are already using a range of alternative growing materials.
The main challenge is system coordination. For a successful transition to peat free horticulture, infrastructure, standards, supply chains and technical growing practice are best aligned.
Parts of the sector have already made progress. Retail growing media are now largely peat-free, while some tree growers and producers of ornamental plants have significantly reduced their use of peat
Some growing approaches face greater challenges in a peat-free transition. Growers must test propagation systems and production of seed potatos and ericaceous crops – acid-loving plants such as blueberries – over a longer period to ensure peat-free methods work reliably.
Cost, supply chain capacity and consistency of materials remain key barriers.
With coordinated implementation and realistic timelines, Scotland has the resources and industry capability to support a peat-free transition.
Conclusions
This report finds that the principal challenge for Scotland’s peat-free transition is the coordination of infrastructure, standards, supply chains and technical growing practice – rather than a lack of alternatives or willingness in the sector.
Evidence from trials, real business use and stakeholder experience shows that growing without peat can be successful when materials are reliable, standards are clear, and the appropriate support is provided. Where these conditions are uncertain or developing, growers and manufacturers reported that technical uncertainty can translate into commercial risk.
The transition should therefore be understood as a process of system redesign rather than simple material substitution. With coordinated implementation and investment, and continued collaboration across the sector, Scotland can phase out horticultural peat while keeping plant growing productive and reliable.
Overall, the evidence indicates that Scotland can achieve transition to a peat-free horticulture sector. Scotland has the resources, industry capability and emerging technical knowledge needed to support this transition. The pace of this change will depend on clear policy direction, realistic timescales, and continued support for infrastructure, standards, and shared trials.
Glossary
Term
Definition
Air-filled porosity
A basic measure of how well soil or growing media allows air to reach plant roots. Refers to the proportion of the material’s volume that is filled with air after the growing medium has been fully watered and excess water has drained away. Expressed as a percentage, with higher values indicating more air space and lower bulk density.
Amateur grower
Individuals growing plants, typically in a home or community setting, for personal enjoyment. May sell plants face-to-face at local events for charitable purposes e.g. National Gardening Scheme. Not making a regular profit.
Bare-root plants
Plants that are sold with their roots exposed, without soil or growing medium.
Biochar
A highly porous, carbon-rich material produced by heating organic biomass (e.g. wood, crop residues or manure) in a low-oxygen environment through pyrolysis.
Biosecurity
Practices that prevent the introduction and spread of plant diseases and pests.
Black peat
Found in the lower, older layers of a peat bog. Composed of plant matter which is in more advanced stages of decomposition than in upper layers. Dark brown to black in colour, with dense, compacted structure.
Blonde peat
Sometimes referred to as white peat. Youngest form of peat, extracted from the uppermost layers of peat bogs. Less decomposed than black peat, with a more fibrous and open structure.
Bulk density
A measure of how heavy a growing medium is for a given volume. It reflects how compact the material is, with higher bulk density indicating a heavier, more compact medium with fewer air spaces, and lower bulk density indicating a lighter, more open structure. Bulk density affects handling, transport costs, plant stability, and root aeration, and is therefore an important factor when comparing peat-based and peat-free growing media.
Carbon sequestration
The process by which carbon dioxide is captured and stored in natural sinks such as peatlands, forests and soils.
Cation exchange capacity (CEC)
The ability of a growing media or soil to hold and exchange positively charged ions (cations), including key nutrients. High CEC media retains and supplies cations more effectively.
Circular economy
A circular economy is one that reduces demand for raw materials, designs products to last, and encourages reuse, repair, and recycling. It aims to keep materials in use for as long as possible, extract maximum value from them while in use, and recover and regenerate products and materials at the end of their service life.
Carbon dioxide equivalent (CO2e)
A standard metric for measuring the total climate change impact of different greenhouse gases (GHGs). It converts the emissions of various GHGs, such as methane and nitrous oxide, into a single unit representing the amount of CO2 that would cause the same amount of warming.
Coir
A natural fibre extracted from the outer layer of coconut husks, commonly used as a peat alternative in growing media.
Composted bark
The outermost part of woody plants (usually softwoods) which are crushed and screened before fermenting in heaps. Used in growing media chiefly to improve drainage and increase air capacity. May increase CEC and pH buffering of media.
Composted green waste (CGW)
Biodegradable organic waste, primarily composed of plant material, that has been decomposed and recycled as a soil amendment or growing media component. Production, quality control and lab testing for CGW is covered by The British Standard Institution PAS 100 across the UK.
Environmental horticulture
Defined by the Horticultural Trades Association (HTA) as encompassing ‘a wide range of activities—includingcompanies that cultivate ornamentalplants, manufacturers of gardenequipment, wholesalers and retailerssuch as garden centres, and specialistsin landscape and arboriculturewho maintain home gardens andexpansive parks.’
Ericaceous plants
Group of plants in the family Ericaceae, which thrive in acid (low pH) soil environments. Includes economically important genera such as Vaccinium (blueberry, cranberry), Rhododendron and Camellia.
Greenhouse Gas (GHG) emissions
GHG’s – including carbon dioxide, methane, nitrous oxide and fluorinated gases – which trap heat when released into the atmosphere, contributing to global warming and climate change.
Horticulture
The science and art of cultivating plants. The horticulture industry can broadly be broken down into two main sectors – environmental and production.
Hydroponics
A method of growing plants without soil or growing media, using nutrient-rich water solutions.
Life Cycle Assessment (LCA)
A method used to evaluate the environmental impact of a product, including carbon footprint, resource use and emissions.
Liner
Young plants grown individually from cuttings in modular trays ready to be potted-up or planted-out. The term ‘liner’ is often used interchangeably with ‘plug’.
Loam
A type of soil composed of roughly equal proportions of sand, silt and clay particles.
Microbial activity
The presence and function of microorganisms in soil or growing media, impacting plant health and nutrient availability.
Oomycetes
A group of fungus-like microorganisms, commonly known as ‘water-moulds’, which often act as decomposers. Thrive in moist environments and include damaging pathogens such as Phytophthora spp.
Plant pathogen
Biological agents which cause disease in plants, negatively impacting plant health, quality and crop yield. Includes microorganisms such as bacteria, fungi and viruses.
Pathogen screening
The process of testing growing media for harmful microorganisms.
Peat
Organic material formed when dead plant matter collects and breaks down slowly in cool, waterlogged, oxygen deficient conditions.
Introduced into UK horticultural use in the 1930’s and renowned for its water retentive properties and favourable structure.
Peat-free growing media
Growing media composed of non-peat components, including coir, wood fibre, composted bark and composted green waste. Peat-free media is typically made up of a combination of ingredients to achieve the desired growing properties.
Peat soils
Soil with a surface peat layer with more than 60% organic matter and of at least 50cm thickness.
Peaty soils
Soil with a shallower peat layer at the surface less than 50cm thickness over mineral layers.
Perlite
Formed from a naturally occurring volcanic glass, which is mined and heated to produce a lightweight, porous material. Commonly used to improve aeration and drainage in growing media.
pH buffering capacity
Describes how well a growing medium can resist changes in pH when fertilisers or other inputs are added. A medium with good buffering capacity maintains a more stable pH, helping to ensure nutrients remain available for healthy development.
Phytotoxicity
Adverse effects on plant growth and development caused by phytotoxins (substances which are toxic or poisonous to plants). In the context of growing media, excessive fertiliser may result in phytotoxicity.
Plug plants
Young plants grown individually from seed in modular trays ready to be potted-up or planted-out.
Professional grower
Individuals or groups regularly growing and selling plants with a view to making a profit.
Propagation
The process of growing new plants from seeds, cuttings, or tissue culture through both sexual and asexual means.
Responsible sourcing
The ethical procurement of raw materials that ensures environmental sustainability and fair labour practices.
Responsible Sourcing Scheme (RSS)
A framework that assesses the environmental, economic, and social sustainability of growing media components.
Soft fruit
Soft, juicy fruit borne on low growing plants (not trees) such as strawberries, raspberries and blueberries.
Sphagnum moss
A plant species that grows on peatlands and other wet habitats, often harvested for horticultural use as a water-retentive substrate.
Standardisation and quality Control
Efforts to ensure consistency, safety, and performance across the growing media production sector.
Supply chain reliability
The ability to ensure consistent availability and quality of growing media materials.
SWOT Analysis
A strategic planning tool that evaluates: Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, and Threats.
Vermiculite
A naturally occurring mineral, which is mined and heated to produce an expanded, lightweight material. Primarily used in horticulture to retain moisture and nutrients, can also improve aeration, although not to the same degree as perlite.
Wood fibre
Fibres extracted mechanically/thermally from wood and wood waste, used in peat-free growing media for high air capacity, good drainage and low bulk density.
Context for transition to peat-free horticulture
4.1 Research purpose
The Scottish Government has committed to phasing out the use of peat in horticulture. This commitment is reflected in policy measures including National Planning Framework 4 (NPF4) (Scottish Government, 2023a) and the consultation Ending the Sale of Peat in Scotland (Scottish Government, 2023b), which together restrict new commercial peat extraction licences and set out the basis for stakeholder engagement on the transition. Scottish Ministers have also written to UK counterparts to advocate for coordinated UK-wide legislation and a clear roadmap for ending horticultural peat use, underscoring inter-governmental support for a structured transition (Scottish Government, 2026).
This research (October 2024 to September 2025; Appendix A) examined the transition to peat-free growing media from a Scottish perspective and focussed on:
The level of confidence in available peat alternatives, including their performance, supply reliability, sustainability and cost.
The preparedness of the horticulture sector to reduce and eliminate peat use.
The main barriers to transition across Scottish horticulture.
Challenges associated with peat-dependent crops and growth stages, particularly ericaceous plants and propagation.
The scope for industry collaboration through coordinated grower trials.
The role and practicality of peat-free standards.
The overall feasibility of a sector-wide transition.
Background
Peat emerged as a key growing media component in UK horticulture in the 1970s, having first been commercialised as a constituent in loam-based media for container planting in the 1930s (Alexander et al., 2008; Prasad et al., 2024; Waller, 2012). Its combination of high water-holding capacity, good air porosity and structural stability ensures optimal conditions for healthy root development, while its low bulk density and friable texture make it easy to handle (Schmilewski, 2008). The inherently low nutrient content of peat allows growers to tailor treatments to suit specific crops, making it a versatile growing medium (National Institute of Agricultural Botany, 2024). Traditionally peat has been regarded as free from pathogens, pests, and weed seeds both at point of extraction and during controlled production. Its processing and grading are considered straightforward, and its pricing has historically been highly competitive (Barrett et al., 2016), making it a preferred choice in both professional and amateur horticulture.
Peatlands play a crucial role in carbon sequestration but, when degraded, become significant sources of greenhouse gas emissions (International Union for Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources, 2021). Analysis by The Wildlife Trusts (2022) estimates that up to 31 million tonnes of carbon dioxide have been released since 1990 as a result of peat extraction for UK horticulture. Although peatlands cover only about 3-4% of the Earth’s land surface, they store more carbon than any other terrestrial ecosystem, holding roughly twice as much as all the world’s forest biomass combined (United Nations Environment Programme, 2022).
Around 20% (c.1.8 million hectares) of Scotland’s land area is peatland (Bruneau and Johnson, 2014). Approximately 80% of UK peatlands are degraded, the majority located in Scotland, with 90% of raised bogs and 70% of blanket bogs in damaged condition (NatureScot, 2015). Although only around 1,000 hectares (0.05%) are harvested annually for horticulture – producing roughly 270,000 m³ of peat (Scottish Government, 2025, pers. comm.) – extraction disproportionately affects lowland raised bogs, one of the most threatened peatland habitats (UK Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, n.d.). Peat extracted in Scotland accounted for 18% of the total volume used in UK growing media in 2022 (Horticultural Trades Association, 2022a).
Concerns about the carbon emissions and biodiversity loss resulting from peat extraction were first raised in the 1980s and 1990s (Waller, 2012), prompting the formation of the Peat Working Group in 1992 and the introduction of stricter harvesting regulations. The UK Government’s first formal reduction goal appeared in Minerals Planning Guidance 13 (Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs, 1995), which aimed for 40% of growing media materials in England to be non-peat by 2005 (Alexander et al., 2008). This trajectory was reinforced in the 2011 Natural Environment White Paper (The Natural Choice), which set voluntary targets to phase out peat use in amateur gardening by 2020 and in professional horticulture by 2030 (HM Government, 2011).
Subsequent national and UK policy has sought to progress this transition. The phasing out of peat-based horticultural products is a devolved matter, with each nation developing its own approach within the context of an intended UK-wide ban. In England, the Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs (2023) previously set out a series of proposed phase-out dates under the former UK Government, including a statutory ban on the retail sale of peat-based products for amateur use by 2024, a phased reduction for professional growers by 2026, and a full prohibition by 2030. The current UK Government has reiterated its intention to legislate for a ban on the sale of peat and peat-containing products, although implementation remains contingent on parliamentary time and no specific timetable has yet been confirmed (Defra, 2025a). A Private Members’ Bill seeking to give legislative effect to a ban in England and Wales has been introduced to the UK Parliament and is awaiting a second reading (UK Parliament, 2025).
In Scotland, the Government has committed to ending the sale of peat-based horticultural products. The 2021–22 Programme for Government (Scottish Government, 2021) included a pledge to develop and consult on a ban as part of a wider strategy to transition away from peat. This commitment was progressed in February 2023 through a public consultation seeking stakeholder views on prohibiting sales, initially in the retail market and subsequently for professional growers (Scottish Government, 2023b).
Current use of peat in the horticulture industry
Figures released by the HTA (2022) and Defra (2025b) reveal that total peat use in UK horticulture declined slowly between 2011 and 2019, remaining close to 2 million m³ per year (Figure 1). In 2020, peat use increased temporarily, coinciding with a surge in home gardening and plant production during national COVID-19 lockdowns (White et al., 2021). From 2021 onwards, peat use fell rapidly; total volumes declined by around two-thirds between 2020 and 2023, associated with a sharp reduction in retail peat use; professional peat use also declined, but at a slower pace. By 2023, retail and professional use had converged at similar levels, each accounting for around half of remaining peat consumption.
Figure 1: Total peat usage across retail and professional sectors 2011-2023 (Defra, 2025b; HTA, 2022)
Between 2011 and 2023, the retail horticulture sector consistently used more growing media than the professional sector, typically between two and four times as much (Figure 2). Retail volumes fluctuated, but remained high overall, at 2.34 million m³ in 2023, compared with 0.81 million m³ used by professional growers. This reflects the much larger scale of the consumer growing-media market relative to commercial plant production. This highlights an important dynamic in the transition to peat-free media. Although the retail sector has reduced its peat use more rapidly, it remains the largest user of growing media overall. As a result, changes in the composition of retail products continue to exert a strong influence on total peat demand.
Figure 2: Total growing media usage across retail and professional sectors 2011-2023 (Defra, 2025b; HTA, 2022)
What are the alternatives to horticultural peat in growing media?
Current alternatives
Ongoing research and commercial trials have led to the development of several viable alternatives to peat, either individually or through the blending of more than one constituent material. Table 1 summarises a range of materials currently used, trialled, or proposed as alternatives to peat in horticultural growing media. It provides a high-level overview of each material’s origin, current level of commercial adoption, and primary functional role within growing-media blends.
The table is intended as an orientation tool for policymakers and practitioners, supported by full SWOT and detailed analyses of performance, constraints and sustainability considerations presented in Appendix F and Appendix G respectively. Currently, the most widely adopted materials across both professional and amateur horticultural sectors are wood fibre, coir and composted bark (Defra, 2025b; HTA, 2022).
Table 1: Overview of alternatives
Material
Source
Characteristics/uses
Anaerobic digestate (AD)
Limited/early commercial adoption
By-product of anaerobic digestion. Consists of nutrient-rich material remaining after organic waste is broken down in oxygen-free conditions during biogas production.
Supplies high levels of essential nutrients. Is used primarily to enhance the fertiliser value of growing-media blends, rather than as a structural base.
Composted bark
Widespread commercial adoption
By-product of forestry and wood-processing industries. Bark is composted through piling and turning, screened, and often nitrogen-treated prior to use.
Provides high air-holding capacity and structural openness (particle size dependent). Low inherent nutrient content allows fertilisation to be tailored to crop requirements.
Biochar
Limited/early commercial adoption
Carbon-rich, porous material produced by heating organic biomass (e.g. wood, crop residues or manure) under low-oxygen conditions (pyrolysis).
Contributes stable structure, porosity, nutrient retention and water-holding capacity when used as a blended additive.
Composted bracken
Limited/early commercial adoption
Harvested from natural/managed areas where bracken grows abundantly. Biomass is composted before use.
Improves structure and aeration, with potential nutrient contribution when composted. Can be suitable for ericaceous crops where composted material is acidic.
Coir and coir pith
Widespread commercial adoption
By-product of the coconut industry, consisting of fibres and fine pith derived from the outer husk of coconuts.
Provides a good balance of water retention and aeration, with high re-wetting capacity. Functionality varies depending on blend composition.
Composted green waste (CGW)
Widespread commercial adoption
Derived from commercial and public waste streams, including local authority green waste and agricultural residues.
Typically nutrient-rich. Used to enrich peat-free mixes and contribute organic matter.
Composted heather
No current commercial market
Upland biomass harvested as part of moorland vegetation management; chopped and composted to produce a fibrous material.
Early trials suggest potential for ericaceous growing media where an acidic product can be produced; evidence base remains under development.
Hemp fibre (Cannabis sativa)
No current commercial market
Fast-growing fibre crop that can be produced domestically; fibre derived from the woody core (hurds or shiv).
Lightweight material with good air-holding capacity and moderate water retention; may have nitrogen immobilisation effects due to high C:N ratio (similar consideration as wood fibre).
Loam
Widespread commercial adoption
Fertile mineral soil composed of a balanced mixture of sand, silt and clay.
Provides mineral content, structure and water-holding capacity; traditionally used as a base component in growing media.
Marine sediment
No current commercial market
Dredged material collected from coastal or marine environments and subjected to remediation prior to reuse.
Potential to contribute mineral fraction and influence water/nutrient dynamics when appropriately remediated; suitability is highly dependent on salinity/contaminant control and particle-size distribution.
Reclaimed peat
Limited/early commercial adoption
Peat recovered from previously disturbed sources (e.g. construction/dredging spoil, excavation arisings, or other waste streams) and processed for reuse.
Retains some of peat’s structural and water-holding properties; typically blended with composted or fibrous materials to improve performance.
Rice husk ash (RHA)
No current commercial market
By-product of rice milling, produced by controlled burning and processing of rice husks.
Enhances structure, aeration and water-holding capacity in growing-media blends.
Sheep wool
Limited/early commercial adoption
By-product of the wool industry, typically using low-grade fleece unsuitable for textile manufacture.
Retains water, supplies slow-release nitrogen and improves aeration.
Spent mushroom compost (SMC)
Limited/early commercial adoption
By-product of commercial mushroom production, following pasteurisation of spent growing substrate.
Nutrient-rich organic material used primarily as a conditioner or minor component in growing media to enhance fertility and structure.
Farmed Sphagnum
No current commercial market
Harvested from cultivated peatland systems using propagated Sphagnum moss, not wild-harvested.
Highly effective water retention and structure that improves aeration; particularly suited to propagation and sensitive crops.
Wood fibre
Widespread commercial adoption
Derived from primary and secondary wood-processing residues; fibres are processed under high temperature and pressure and often nitrogen-treated.
Enhances structure and air-holding capacity; commonly blended with other components in peat-free growing media.
Widespread commercial adoption
Across the UK and Scottish horticultural sectors, a range of peat alternatives are now in widespread commercial use, reflecting rapid diversification of the growing media market since the early 2010s. Wood fibre, composted bark, coir, composted green waste and loam form the core constituents of many current retail and professional blends, although their relative importance differs markedly between sectors. Wood fibre, composted bark and coir underpin both professional and retail formulations, whereas composted green waste is used predominantly in the retail market, with very limited penetration into professional growing systems. Each of these components contributes distinct physical and chemical properties, allowing manufacturers to engineer bespoke mixes tailored to specific crop needs and end markets. Most commercial products therefore rely on combinations of these materials, as no single component replicates the balance of air porosity, water-holding capacity and stability traditionally provided by peat (Gruda, 2019; Peano et al, 2012).
Limited or early commercial adoption
While a range of emerging or regionally available feedstocks (e.g. bracken, sheep wool, anaerobic digestate, biochar, spent mushroom compost and reclaimed peat) have been explored in peat-free media formulation, the published evidence base on their performance, quality variability and commercial feasibility remains relatively sparse. Many assessments are preliminary, often confined to small-scale trials or expert commentary rather than coordinated multi-site studies. Further research is therefore required to clarify where these materials may be deployed most effectively and at what scale (Calisti et al., 2023; Johnson and Di Gioia, 2023; Kennard, 2020; Medina et al., 2009; Pitman and Webber, 2013).
Although several of these materials demonstrate technical promise in specific contexts, uptake remains constrained by factors including supply consistency, variability in quality, sustainability considerations, regulatory requirements and the need for additional processing. In interviews, manufacturers of professional growing media consistently described these materials as “promising but peripheral”, noting that they are typically incorporated through pilot collaborations, niche retail products or experimental blends rather than forming part of core formulations.
No current commercial market in Scottish horticulture
A further group of materials is not yet established at commercial scale within UK professional growing media markets but is attracting interest in the context of longer-term peat-free strategies. These include composted heather, rice husk ash, marine sediment, hemp fibre and farmed Sphagnum. Rather than offering immediate substitutes, these materials represent prospective feedstocks that could contribute to future supply diversification and reduced dependence on imported substrates.
Several of these materials present theoretical or demonstrated advantages in specific contexts, including regional resource availability, circular-economy potential, carbon storage capacity and favourable structural properties. For example, cultivation of Sphagnum biomass through paludiculture systems has been investigated as a renewable peat substitute (Gaudig et al., 2017; Wichtmann et al., 2016), while rice husk ash and marine sediment have been assessed in blended substrates in controlled horticultural trials (Mattei et al., 2017; Omar et al., 2023). However, evidence of large-scale agronomic performance, supply-chain logistics and quality standardisation remains limited across most materials. Published studies are typically experimental, pilot-scale or regionally specific, and few materials have yet been widely validated under recognised horticultural quality standards such as PAS 100 or the Responsible Sourcing Scheme.
Stakeholder interviews characterised these options as high-potential but low-readiness, with further work required to clarify processing requirements, certification pathways, performance consistency and economic viability before widespread commercial uptake could occur. As Scotland progresses its transition away from peat, the future role of such materials will depend on continued research, market development and regulatory alignment rather than immediate substitution potential.
Mineral components and functional additives in peat-free media
The transition to peat-free growing media has prompted a more deliberate combination of organic and mineral components to maintain the structural and functional properties required for reliable plant growth. Mineral additives such as perlite, vermiculite and clay pumice are central to this task. Each offers specific physical benefits that provide structure and buffering capacity, and can be used to improve drainage, air holding capacity, nutrient retention and physical stability. These materials are increasingly important for standardising performance and reducing variability in peat-free formulations.
Alongside mineral additives, manufacturers and researchers have turned to supplements to strengthen the performance of peat-free media. These include biostimulants and wetting agents (surfactants). Biostimulants – including algae extracts, beneficial bacteria, fungal inoculants and mineral salts – are believed to enhance natural plant processes, promoting more efficient uptake of water and nutrients (Kisvarga et al., 2022). Wetting agents, available in liquid or granular form, improve water absorption and distribution within the media, helping to reduce runoff and water waste. Although many wetting agents are derived from synthetic chemicals, more sustainable alternatives are emerging. RHS peat-free trials have reported significant benefits from biostimulant use (RHS, 2025, pers. comm), and some growing media suppliers are now incorporating these into their professional peat-free formulations.
Media blending
It is widely recognised that there is no “silver bullet” replacement for peat (Koseoglu et al., 2021). Peat uniquely combines high porosity, water-holding capacity, structural stability and low inherent fertility, allowing growers to exercise precise control over nutrition and acidity (pH). Alternative constituents typically provide some, but not all, of these properties in isolation. As a result, the academic literature consistently emphasises that effective peat-free substrates must be formulated through blending multiple components, selected to balance water retention, drainage, nutrient availability and physical stability according to crop type and production system (Gruda and Bragg, 2020; Schmilewski, 2008). International reviews of growing-media systems note that blending is unavoidable, as no individual material replicates peat’s multifunctionality (Bragg and Alexander, 2019). This conclusion is reinforced by recent European analyses, which show that while bio-based resources such as wood fibre, composted bark, composted green waste and coir are available at scale, each presents technical or logistical limitations that must be addressed through careful combination and optimisation (Hirschler et al., 2022).
Tailoring mixes to specific crop needs
Evidence from stakeholder engagement across Scotland indicates that growers and growing media manufacturers who have successfully reduced peat typically rely on formulations combining wood fibre, composted bark, coir and – particularly for retail mixes – composted green waste. Manufacturers have refined these mixes through tailored approaches to wood fibre processing, coir buffering, and bark composting to improve consistency and performance.
European research identifies clear technical thresholds for peat-free material – typically up to 40% wood fibre, 50% composted bark, or 40% composted green waste – beyond which plant growth and substrate structure decline (Blok et al., 2021; Raviv, 2013). These findings underline that peat-free horticulture is not a simple substitution exercise, but one that depends on optimised blends informed by research, collaborative trials and coordinated supply-chain development. Diversification of materials improves performance and resilience, reducing exposure to single-stream supply risks and reflecting wider European recommendations to mobilise bio-based resources while maintaining quality and consistency (Gruda & Bragg, 2020; Hirschler et al., 2022; Schmilewski, 2014).
The transition to peat-free growing media frequently necessitates adjustments to irrigation and nutrient regimes, particularly in nurseries managing diverse crops under shared irrigation systems where substrate water and nutrient dynamics differ. Stakeholders emphasised the importance of tailoring media to specific crops and growth stages, with individual nurseries often requiring fine-textured propagation media alongside coarser, more water-retentive mixes for container-grown plants. As a result, growers commonly source multiple blends from different suppliers. This approach supports crop performance and operational flexibility, but has implications for procurement, consistency and supply-chain coordination.
While research demonstrates that peat-free growing media can support successful plant growth across a wide range of crops, outcomes are contingent on effective management of irrigation, nutrient supply and physical properties through optimised blending. Continued refinement, supported by targeted trials, collaboration and knowledge exchange, will be critical to broadening adoption and strengthening confidence in the performance of peat-free formulations (Bek et al., 2020; Hirschler et al., 2022; Koseoglu et al., 2021; Royal Horticultural Society, 2023; Sradnik et al., 2023). Appendix H presents an industry-led case study demonstrating how blended peat-free and peat-reduced growing media can be designed to meet crop performance requirements using widely available materials.
Sustainability of alternatives
It is essential that the sustainability of alternatives is clearly understood. This can be assessed through three complementary approaches:
Environmental assessment: This approach quantifies the environmental footprint of peat alternatives by analysing carbon emissions, energy use, water consumption and end-of-life impacts (Hospido et al., 2010). Studies assessing substitutes such as coir highlight that environmental outcomes vary depending on production methods, transport distances and assessment boundaries, underscoring the need for careful interpretation of life-cycle results (Peano et al., 2012; Toboso-Chavero et al., 2021).
Social sustainability: This dimension considers labour conditions, health implications and workplace safety within raw material supply chains. Sahu et al. (2019) identified significant health risks among workers involved in coir production, many of whom were women lacking adequate personal protective equipment (PPE), while Peano et al. (2012) highlighted occupational health risks associated with the processing of composted green waste.
Responsible Sourcing Scheme (RSS): The Responsible Sourcing Scheme for growing media is an industry-led framework that assesses the environmental and ethical performance of growing media products through a transparent scoring system covering energy use, water use, social compliance, habitat and biodiversity, pollution, renewability and resource-use efficiency. By providing clear ratings and independent auditing, the RSS supports informed decision-making by manufacturers, retailers and growers about the environmental impacts of growing media mixes and encourages continuous improvement in material sourcing (Responsible Sourcing Scheme, n.d.).
Environmental assessment
The assessment summarised in Table 2 provides a high-level overview of the environmental sustainability of sixteen potential alternatives to peat used in horticultural growing media. It draws on published life-cycle assessments (LCAs), industry reports, peer-reviewed literature and stakeholder interviews, supplemented with Scotland-specific evidence where available. Key sources include Gabryś and Fryczkowska (2022), Gruda (2019), Hashemi et al. (2024), Hirschler et al. (2022), Litterick et al. (2019), Peano et al. (2012), Stichnothe (2022), and Toboso-Chavero et al. (2021). Each material is assessed across four sustainability dimensions:
Emissions during production: Based on available LCAs, including direct fossil fuel use and indirect biogenic carbon release. Where quantitative data are reported, emissions are expressed as kg CO₂e per tonne (or per m³ for peat), with ranges reflecting methodological variation and uncertainty.
Transport emissions: Differentiating between locally sourced materials with short supply chains and imported feedstocks associated with long-haul transport.
Risk of offshoring impacts: A qualitative assessment of whether peat substitution may displace carbon or environmental burdens to other regions (e.g. imported coir or Baltic peat).
Scottish availability: The extent to which materials can realistically be sourced within Scotland, informing circular-economy potential, transport emissions and exposure to offshored impacts.
The qualitative ratings used in Table 2 (Low, Moderate and High) are intended to support comparative interpretation rather than provide precise measurements. Relative to other peat alternatives, a Low rating indicates lower production emissions, limited processing requirements and/or short supply chains based on available evidence. Moderate ratings reflect higher energy inputs, greater processing or transport requirements, or mixed evidence across impact categories. High ratings indicate materials that consistently show higher emissions, longer supply chains or greater risks of offshoring environmental impacts. Full quantitative data, assumptions and sources underpinning these classifications are provided in Appendix I. Table 2 should therefore be read as a comparative overview, highlighting broad patterns in environmental performance across material groups rather than precise rankings between individual material.
Table 2: Summary environmental assessment of peat alternatives used in horticultural growing media
Material group
Materials
Production emissions
Transport and offshoring
Scottish availability
Overall sustainability signal
Local woody materials
Composted bark
Low
Low-moderate
High
Favourable
Wood fibre
Low
Low
High
Favourable
Local organic wastes and by-products
Anaerobic digestate (AD)
Low
Low
High
Favourable
Biochar
Moderate
Moderate
Moderate
Mixed/context-dependent
Composted bracken
Low
Low
High
Promising but data-limited
Composted green waste
Low-moderate
Low
High
Favourable
Sheep wool
Low
Low
High
Promising but data-limited
Soils and sediments
Loam
Moderate
Low
Moderate
Mixed/context-dependent
Marine sediment
Moderate
Low
Moderate
Promising but data-limited
Imported agricultural by-products
Coir and coir pith
Moderate
High
Low
Higher environmental risk
Imported agricultural by-products
Rice husk ash (RHA)
Moderate-high
High
Low
Higher environmental risk
Novel or emerging materials
Composted heather
Low
Low
Moderate
Promising but data-limited
Hemp fibre (Cannabis sativa)
Moderate
Moderate
Moderate
Promising but data-limited
Farmed Sphagnum
Low-moderate
Low
Moderate
Promising but data-limited
Peat (domestic and imported)
Peat
High
Moderate-high
Declining/ constrained
Unfavourable
Reclaimed peat
Moderate-high
Low-moderate
Low-moderate
Mixed/context-dependent
Spent mushroom compost
Low-moderate
Low
Moderate
Mixed/context-dependent
Overall, the assessment indicates that environmental performance is strongly influenced by material provenance, processing intensity and supply-chain geography. Transport and offshoring ratings are based on indicative UK and European sourcing assumptions; however, actual impacts will vary depending on specific supply routes, processing locations and logistics. Across all assessed dimensions, locally sourced woody materials, particularly wood fibre and composted bark, consistently demonstrate more favourable environmental profiles than peat and imported alternatives, reflecting low production emissions, short supply chains and high Scottish availability.
Among waste-derived materials, anaerobic digestate performs favourably across all sustainability dimensions, reflecting its status as a locally available by-product with low marginal emissions and strong alignment with circular-economy objectives. Composted green waste similarly shows favourable environmental performance, with emissions largely confined to processing activities. Other locally available materials, including composted bracken and sheep’s wool, demonstrate promising circular-economy potential but remain constrained by limited life-cycle evidence and uncertainty around scalability. Biochar presents potential benefits as a carbon-stable amendment; however, its overall sustainability signal remains context-dependent, varying with feedstock type, energy inputs and the scale of domestic processing capacity.
Materials requiring primary extraction or intensive processing, such as loam and marine sediment, show more mixed environmental profiles. While both benefit from relatively short transport distances, their circular-economy potential is limited by extraction impacts, energy requirements and, in the case of marine sediment, contamination risks and evidence gaps around horticultural suitability at scale. In contrast, imported agricultural by-products, particularly coir and rice husk ash, consistently present higher transport emissions and greater risks of offshoring environmental impacts, limiting their sustainability within a Scottish context despite the widespread use of coir as a peat substitute.
Finally, materials that retain a direct link to peat extraction, including reclaimed peat and spent mushroom compost, offer only partial or transitional environmental benefits. While reclaimed peat avoids new extraction and spent mushroom compost is waste-derived with low additional emissions – and may become inherently peat-free as mushroom production transitions away from peat – both currently remain constrained in their ability to support long-term peatland protection and a fully peat-free growing-media transition (for full SWOT analysis please see Table 24 in Appendix F).
Social sustainability of alternatives
Social sustainability in peat-free growing media encompasses labour conditions, occupational health and safety, and the distribution of social impacts across domestic and international supply chains. While the environmental case for peat substitution is well established, the social implications of alternative materials are more variable and, in some cases, less visible. Addressing these issues is critical to ensuring that the transition to peat-free horticulture does not externalise social risks onto workers or communities elsewhere. Table 32 in Appendix J sets out key social sustainability considerations.
Social sustainability is highest where supply chains are domestic, formalised and regulated, with well-characterised and controllable occupational risks (e.g. anaerobic digestate (AD), wood fibre, loam, spent mushroom compost (SMC)). Moderate–high ratings reflect generally regulated contexts moderated by seasonal labour, dust or bioaerosol exposure, agrochemical inputs or emerging-sector uncertainty (e.g. wool, farmed Sphagnum, composted green waste (CGW)). Moderate ratings capture identifiable exposure risks or regulatory complexity (e.g. hemp, marine sediment). Lower ratings arise where informal labour structures, persistent health concerns or structural sustainability conflicts externalise social risk (e.g. coir, reclaimed peat, rice husk ash).
Responsible Sourcing Scheme (RSS) calculator
Published in August 2024, Guidance Notes: Responsible Sourcing Scheme for Growing Media established an industry-led framework for assessing the sustainability of growing media ingredients. The Responsible Sourcing Scheme (RSS) evaluates key input materials used in horticulture against multiple environmental and social criteria to support more informed decision-making by growers, retailers and consumers. Scores are based on manufacturer data that is subject to independent auditing to enhance transparency and credibility. A detailed summary of the RSS methodology and scoring system is provided in Appendix K.
While the scheme incorporates measures related to carbon and climate within criteria such as energy use and pollution, it does not directly quantify greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions or carbon sequestration in the manner of a full lifecycle assessment. Instead, climate-relevant impacts are inferred through proxy indicators such as fossil fuel consumption, transport inputs and other resource use measures. Methane and nitrous oxide are acknowledged within the broader framework but are not systematically modelled as discrete climate impact outputs.
As a result, the RSS provides a structured, transparent and multi-criteria tool for comparing the relative sustainability of growing media ingredients, but its treatment of carbon and climate impacts is indirect and not comprehensive. This has implications where peat-reduction policy is closely linked to quantified carbon outcomes, especially when comparing materials with differing biogenic carbon dynamics or soil carbon effects.
Positioning the RSS alongside more detailed climate-accounting approaches highlights the trade-offs between usability and precision: the scheme’s graded index supports practical sourcing decisions and market signalling, whereas lifecycle-based carbon inventories offer deeper quantification of climate footprints for research and policy evaluation.
Industry perspectives on environmental sustainability
Stakeholder engagement confirmed that environmental performance remains central to the rationale for peat reduction, though interpretations of “sustainability” varied considerably in practice. Manufacturers and growers emphasised carbon reduction, circular-economy principles and local sourcing as core sustainability strategies.
Several participants highlighted closed-loop systems and renewable energy use, including compost production powered by food-waste-derived biogas and investment in carbon-capture technologies. Others prioritised regional sourcing to reduce transport emissions, with some growers deliberately avoiding imported coir in favour of domestic forestry residues. Resource diversification was also identified as a key strategy, with interest in utilising biomass streams such as bracken and wool to support circular supply chains and reduce reliance on imports.
However, stakeholders also cautioned against environmental trade-offs and “hidden carbon costs,” particularly in relation to long-distance transport of coir and continued reliance on imported peat. Concerns were also raised about contamination in green-waste compost and the need for robust quality assurance to maintain product performance and consumer confidence.
Knowledge gaps in sustainability assessment of alternatives
Although multiple frameworks exist to assess the sustainability of peat-free growing media – including Life Cycle Assessment (LCA), social risk analysis and the Responsible Sourcing Scheme (RSS) – there remain significant methodological and evidential gaps. These gaps affect the comparability, transparency and policy relevance of sustainability claims associated with peat alternatives. More detailed explanation of these gaps is given in Appendix L.
Availability of alternatives
Overview
The transition to peat-free growing media depends on reliable access to alternative materials at sufficient scale and consistent quality. Availability is determined by domestic resource capacity, competition from other sectors, processing infrastructure, and the feasibility of imports. In Scotland, forestry and agricultural by-products provide a strong resource base, however, meeting national demand will require addressing technical, logistical and regulatory constraints.
Established inputs such as wood fibre, composted bark, green waste and imported coir already underpin much of the UK market. Alongside these, several materials remain at limited or developmental stages, including bracken, wool, heather residues, anaerobic digestate, biochar and farmed Sphagnum. Evaluating their role requires consideration of market scale, processing capacity and their contribution to displacing remaining peat use. At UK level, peat consumption has fallen substantially in recent years, however, further substitution depends on the reliable supply and optimisation of the principal alternative materials. Appendix M provides a quantitative comparison of the four most widely adopted alternatives relative to remaining UK peat demand, indicating their current market volumes and the constraints that may limit further expansion. In summary:
Wood fibre and composted bark represent the most significant near-term substitutes, constrained by bioenergy competition and processing capacity.
Composted green waste provides meaningful volume but depends on consistent quality assurance to manage contamination risks.
Bracken and low-grade sheep wool offer renewable, locally available feedstocks with potential for niche or supplementary use, though operational and regulatory barriers remain.
Loam, digestate fibre and biochar are unlikely to provide large-scale substitution, serving primarily additive or specialist functions.
Emerging materials – including farmed Sphagnum, heather residues, hemp and marine sediments – show longer-term or localised potential but are not currently scalable.
Imported materials such as coir and rice husk ash can supplement domestic supply but introduce carbon and supply-chain vulnerabilities.
Overall, achieving national peat replacement will require coordinated expansion of domestic processing capacity, improved resource recovery systems and targeted innovation to scale viable alternatives.
Global context of the supply chain of raw materials
The availability of alternative raw materials is shaped not only by technical suitability but by competing industrial demands and wider geopolitical dynamics. Supply-chain pressures are experienced differently across the sector: growers report direct exposure to trade, availability and logistical constraints, whereas manufacturers more commonly emphasise regulatory consistency, feedstock certification and contamination standards (Litterick et al., 2019).These structural dynamics influence the reliability, scalability and long-term resilience of Scotland’s peat-free transition.
Assessment of key alternatives indicates three broad patterns of exposure:
Domestic materials, including wood fibre, composted bark and composted green waste, are subject to limited geopolitical risk but face strong internal competition from bioenergy, construction and agricultural markets (Koseoglu and Roberts, 2025). Availability is therefore closely linked to forestry outputs, waste-management systems and energy policy.
Import-dependent materials, notably coir and rice husk ash, are exposed to global market volatility, shipping costs and potential export controls, increasing supply uncertainty for Scottish growers (Koseoglu and Roberts, 2025). These materials remain sensitive to geopolitical developments and international trade conditions.
Emerging or under-utilised Scottish resources, such as bracken, heather residues, anaerobic digestate fibre and sheep wool, carry minimal geopolitical exposure but depend on regulatory alignment, processing infrastructure and land-management incentives to become viable at commercial scale (Gaudig et al., 2017; Hill, 2022; Pitman and Webber, 2013).
Taken together, these findings indicate that material security depends less on absolute resource availability and more on cross-sector competition, infrastructure capacity and regulatory coherence within Scotland and the wider UK. A detailed material-by-material assessment of competing uses and geopolitical exposure is provided in Appendix N.
Biosecurity in peat-free growing media production
Biosecurity is a critical consideration in peat-free horticulture, as contaminated growing media can introduce plant pathogens and threaten crop health (Elliot et al., 2023; Frederickson-Matika et al., 2024; Litterick et al., 2025; Vandecasteele et al., 2018). Scotland’s transition away from peat brings renewed attention to these risks, particularly given the increased use of organic and recycled inputs. Key challenges are summarised in Appendix O and include:
Pathogen risk in organic substrates: Organic and recycled materials may harbour plant pathogens, underscoring the need for clearly defined sanitisation protocols and plant-health-specific quality standards (Elliot et al., 2023; Vandecasteele et al., 2018).
Limited plant-health coverage in certification schemes: Existing accreditation frameworks primarily address human-health and contamination thresholds, with limited explicit provision for plant-pathogen risk (Elliot et al., 2023).
Traceability and import assurance considerations: Effective risk management depends on consistent material tracking, proportionate import controls and clear guidance on waste reuse and disposal (Elliot et al., 2023; Litterick et al., 2025).
Variation in substrate risk profiles: Biosecurity risk differs between materials. Green waste composts certified under BSI PAS 100 are generally considered moderate risk, as the standard focuses on human-health criteria rather than plant-pathogen assurance. Heat-treated wood fibre and composted bark are typically regarded as lower risk. Virgin peat has historically been considered comparatively low risk due to limited microbial activity; however, detections of Fusarium oxysporum f. sp. melonis and Rhizoctonia spp. have been reported (Frederickson-Matika, 2024; Litterick et al., 2025).
Evidence indicates a lack of sector-wide standardisation in sanitisation regimes, particularly regarding time, temperature and moisture thresholds – an issue most pronounced among smaller producers (Litterick et al., 2025). While peat has often been regarded as comparatively low risk due to limited biological activity, studies have demonstrated that peat-based substrates can support the survival and proliferation of plant pathogens where contamination occurs (Benavent-Celma et al., 2023; James, 2005).
Systematic, comparative surveillance of baseline pathogen loads across peat and peat-free media however remains limited (Müller et al., 2025). Current evidence therefore does not support a definitive conclusion that peat-free substrates inherently present greater biosecurity risk than peat. Rather, risk appears to be influenced by processing controls, quality assurance systems and supply-chain management. Achieving equivalent assurance across materials depends on transparent quality control, consistent testing and clearly defined sanitisation standards (Elliot et al., 2023). Biosecurity considerations therefore form one component of the broader technical, environmental and supply-chain assessment required when evaluating peat alternatives and designing resilient media blends for Scottish horticulture (Müller et al., 2025).
The economics of peat-free growing media
Recent analysis (Koseoglu & Roberts, 2025) and stakeholder engagement indicate that cost remains a significant barrier to peat-free transition. Of the 18 grower interviews analysed in Phase 2 of this research, 16 (89%) reported increased growing media costs following transition to peat-free or peat-reduced mixes. Reported increases most commonly fell within a range of approximately 10-40% when comparing like-for-like volumes of peat-free media with previously purchased peat-based mixes. Some growers cited substantially higher differentials, including instances where price was reported to have doubled. These figures reflect grower-reported purchase prices rather than standardised per-unit market comparisons. These stakeholder-reported increases are broadly consistent with findings from a UK-wide Royal Horticultural Society (2023) survey, which identified a 15–25% higher average cost for peat-free compared with peat-reduced growing media among responding businesses (n=35).
Cost impacts appear to vary across sectors, with ornamental, forestry, fruit and vegetable, and potato mini-tuber growers all reporting upward pressure, though the magnitude differed according to crop type, blend formulation and procurement arrangements. In some cases, growers indicated that transition would not have been economically viable without external financial support. Despite the consistency of reported cost increases, there remains limited peer-reviewed research directly comparing peat and peat-free media under equivalent production conditions, highlighting a gap in systematically collected cost data.
Material cost differentials
Stakeholder interviews and recent supply-chain analysis identify relative cost differences between major peat-free constituents (Table 3). Manufacturers indicated that composted bark and wood fibre are currently among the more cost-competitive peat-free components. Stakeholder-reported pricing suggested composted bark was below some peat-blended media, while wood fibre was moderately higher. In contrast, coir-based mixes were consistently described as substantially more expensive, with reported cost increases of 30-50% attributed to washing, buffering and international freight. Hirschler and Osterburg (2025), and Koseoglu and Roberts (2025) similarly identify coir as among the more expensive peat-free constituents, reflecting its processing requirements and transport intensity.
Composted green waste feedstocks are often available at relatively low bulk prices within the recycling sector. However, higher bulk density and additional processing requirements (e.g. screening, drying and quality control) contribute to final blended media costs, making simple raw price comparisons with peat imprecise (Koseoglu and Roberts, 2025). Digestate-based composts were reported at intermediate price points, reflecting maturation and handling requirements despite waste-derived feedstocks. A comparative cost analysis in a commercial plant nursery context found that compost derived from anaerobic digestion could present cost advantages relative to peat when assessed on a lifecycle cost basis, including labour and handling impacts (Restrepo et al., 2013).
For materials that do not yet have an established place in the UK growing media market (e.g. hemp fibre, marine sediment, rice husk ash, farmed Sphagnum and composted heather), reliable cost data are largely unavailable. These materials are typically produced at pilot scale, are regionally specific, or are not yet integrated into established supply chains. As a result, pricing information is either unpublished, commercially confidential, or highly context-dependent. This makes direct comparison with peat or mainstream alternatives difficult at present.
Table 3: Relative cost differences and cost drivers for widely adopted peat-free constituents
Material
Indicative cost position (relative to peat) *
Key cost drivers
Composted bark
Comparable to or slightly above peat
Processing, screening
Coir and coir pith
Substantially above peat
Import, washing, buffering
Composted green waste (CGW)
Moderately above or competitive, depending on processing and blend context (no standardised pricing)
Processing, screening, drying
Wood fibre
Moderately above peat
Processing, screening
* Relative positions reflect stakeholder and literature evidence rather than fixed market pricing.
Independent market analysis in Germany found that peat-free growing media cost on average approximately 21% more than peat-containing products at retail, although prices for individual growing-media components did not differ consistently. This suggests that mix formulation, processing and market structure contribute to observed price differentials (Hirschler & Osterburg, 2025). It is important to note that growing media component prices are subject to fluctuation due to factors including energy costs, freight rates, exchange rates, seasonal demand and regulatory changes. For this reason, the table above presents relative cost positions and principal cost drivers rather than fixed price estimates.
Ancillary production costs
Growers emphasised that cost increases extend beyond media purchase prices. Transition to peat-free substrates often requires adjustments to irrigation regimes, fertiliser strategies and handling systems. Several growers reported increased labour inputs associated with altered media structure, including more frequent tray filling adjustments and manual interventions. One nursery estimated overall production costs increased by 25-30% following transition, reflecting nutrient and labour inputs rather than media costs alone. Larger producers reported that economies of scale, in-house blending and automation mitigated some cost increases. In contrast, smaller nurseries and independent growers, with lower purchasing power and limited mechanisation, reported sharper per-unit impacts.
Supply-chain and structural cost drivers
Analysis by Koseoglu and Roberts (2025) identifies several structural factors that influence the cost profile of peat-free growing media. These drivers extend beyond the headline price of individual constituents and reflect broader supply-chain characteristics.
Transport dynamics are a key consideration. Many peat alternatives differ from peat in bulk density and compressibility, affecting transport efficiency and haulage costs per usable volume. Modern supply-chain analyses and industry assessments identify transport configuration, logistics and processing requirements as significant structural contributors to cost outcomes (Hirschler and Osterburg, 2025; Koseoglu et al., 2021; Vandecasteele et al., 2018).
Processing requirements also contribute to overall cost. Producing horticulture-grade compost involves screening, grading and quality assurance steps that increase handling and infrastructure demands. Tightened contamination thresholds—particularly relating to plastics—require investment in improved screening systems and covered storage (Scottish Environment Protection Agency, 2025; Waste and Resources Action Programme, 2016). For imported materials such as coir, additional washing, buffering and long-distance freight introduce further logistical and processing inputs. In parallel, production systems historically designed for fine, flowable peat may require modification to accommodate more fibrous or structurally variable substrates, requiring operational adjustments and transitional capital investment.
Taken together, these system-level factors mean that cost outcomes are shaped not only by raw material choice but also by infrastructure capacity, logistics configuration and scale of operation. Larger manufacturers may absorb some pressures through in-house blending and automation, whereas smaller operators can experience proportionately higher impacts. Evidence suggests that some of these cost differences may reduce over time as domestic recycling and processing capacity expands and supply chains mature (Koseoglu & Roberts, 2025). However, in the short to medium term, these factors continue to influence the economic conditions under which peat-free media are produced and adopted.
Conclusions – alternative growing media
Section 5 demonstrates that peat-free growing media is now a technically viable but systemically complex transition. There is no single “drop-in” substitute for peat. Instead, successful peat-free production depends on carefully optimised blends that combine materials with complementary physical, chemical and biological properties. Wood fibre, composted bark, composted green waste (retail) and coir currently underpin most UK formulations, with other materials contributing additive, niche or developmental roles.
Evidence from stakeholder engagement and technical literature indicates that peat-free growing media must be formulated to achieve a reliable air–water balance, with crop and stage-specific adjustments driven primarily by particle-size distribution, container geometry and irrigation regime rather than a fixed recipe. Pore-size distribution governs performance: finer fractions increase water retention but may reduce aeration, while coarser fractions increase air-filled porosity and drainage. As crops move from propagation into larger containers, mixes are refined to reflect changing rooting volume and structural demand. In plugs and trays, short substrate columns retain proportionally more water and can limit air-filled porosity, while propagation substrates are typically maintained at low nutrient and soluble salt levels to avoid inhibiting germination or early root development. For ericaceous crops, maintaining a suitably low pH remains a critical constraint shaping constituent choice and limiting pH-raising inputs.
Across sustainability dimensions, performance varies primarily by provenance and processing intensity. Locally sourced woody materials and domestic organic by-products generally demonstrate more favourable environmental and social profiles, reflecting shorter supply chains, lower transport emissions and regulated labour conditions. Import-dependent materials, particularly coir and rice husk ash, remain technically effective but introduce higher transport emissions and greater risk of offshoring environmental and social impacts. Emerging materials – including farmed Sphagnum, bracken, wool and hemp – show promise in circular-economy terms but require further validation, scaling and certification before widespread deployment.
Availability is shaped less by theoretical resource abundance and more by infrastructure capacity, cross-sector competition and regulatory coherence. Forestry residues and organic waste streams provide Scotland with a strong domestic resource base, yet scaling substitution depends on investment in processing, contamination control, quality assurance and logistics. Biosecurity assurance, particularly for recycled and organic substrates, remains a critical component of system resilience.
Economic evidence confirms that cost remains a material barrier. Most growers report increased media expenditure following transition, typically in the range of 10-40%, with additional operational costs associated with irrigation, nutrition and handling adjustments. Structural supply-chain factors – including processing intensity, bulk density, transport efficiency and scale of operation – play a significant role in shaping final cost outcomes. While some cost differentials may reduce as supply chains mature, short-to medium-term pressures remain.
Taken together, the evidence indicates that Scotland’s peat-free transition will depend on coordinated expansion of domestic processing capacity, optimisation of blended formulations, strengthened quality and biosecurity standards, and continued innovation to diversify supply. Peat substitution is achievable, but it is best understood as a process of system redesign rather than simple material replacement. Table 4 summarises the relative performance of each component, drawing together the sustainability, supply, cost, and horticultural suitability metrics discussed in this section. Peat is included as a baseline for comparison; although technically reliable and historically cost-competitive, its extraction is incompatible with Scotland’s long-term peatland protection and climate objectives
Table 4: Overall summary of peat alternatives
Material
Sustainability
Availability
Relative cost signal
Technical suitability
Anaerobic digestate (AD)
Strong
Limited
Moderately higher
Functional
Composted bark
Strong
Established
Comparable/ lower
Reliable
Biochar
Mixed
Limited
Moderately higher
Functional
Composted bracken
Strong
Limited
Insufficient evidence
Functional
Coir and coir pith
Mixed
Established
Substantially higher
Reliable
Composted green waste (CGW)
Strong
Established
Moderately higher
Functional
Composted heather
Mixed
Not currently
Insufficient evidence
Functional
Hemp fibre (Cannabis sativa)
Mixed
Not currently
Insufficient evidence
Functional
Loam
Mixed
Limited
Moderately higher
Functional
Marine sediment
Mixed
Not currently
Insufficient evidence
Functional
Peat (baseline for comparison)
Significant conflict
Limited
Comparable/ lower
Reliable
Reclaimed peat
Significant conflict
Limited
Insufficient evidence
Reliable
Rice husk ash (RHA)
Mixed
Not currently
Insufficient evidence
Functional
Sheep wool
Mixed
Limited
Moderately higher
Functional
Spent mushroom compost
Mixed
Established
Moderately higher
Functional
Farmed Sphagnum
Mixed
Not currently
Insufficient evidence
Reliable
Wood fibre
Strong
Established
Moderately higher
Reliable
Table 5: Compact key for Table 4. Ratings reflect stakeholder evidence and published studies within a Scottish context.
Rating dimension
Green
Yellow
Red
White
Sustainability
Strong environmental and social alignment
Mixed/context dependent
Significant environmental or policy conflict
Availability
Established commercial supply (Scotland/UK)
Limited or emerging supply
Not currently scalable
Relative cost signal
Comparable to or lower than peat
Moderately higher*
Substantially higher
Insufficient evidence
Technical suitability
Reliable performance in peat-free blends
Functional but mainly additive/niche
Note: ‘Moderately higher’ costs typically fall within 10-40% above peat where evidence exists.
Feasibility of alternatives in Scotland
Sector context and current transition status
Horticulture in Scotland sits within the broader agricultural sector and, for the purposes of this research, encompasses ornamentals, trees for forestry and woodland creation, fruit and vegetables, and potato mini-tubers. The analysis also considers growing media manufacturers and retailers, reflecting the central role of substrate supply in peat reduction.
In 2024, potatoes, vegetables, fruit, and flowers and nursery stock together contributed an estimated £831.4 million to Scotland’s crop output, accounting for 54.5% of the total (Scottish Government, 2025b) (Figure 3). Nurseries producing plants for forestry and woodland creation generated approximately £19 million in turnover in the same year (Scottish Forestry, 2024). In the UK, household expenditure on growing media was estimated at £790 million in 2023 (Oxford Economics, 2024), underscoring the scale of the growing media market and its relevance to peat-free transition.
Figure 3: Output value Scottish potatoes and horticultural sectors, 2024 (Scottish Government, 2025b) Values represent farm output at current prices. Potatoes includes seed, ware and early potato production. Combined output from potatoes and horticultural crops accounted for approximately 54.5% of total Scottish crop output value in 2024 (Scottish Government, 2025b)
To complement published evidence, detailed interviews were conducted with 18 professional growers during Phase 2 of the research, with a further four growers engaged through stakeholder workshops in Phase 1 (total n = 22). Growers were selected to achieve broad representation across the sector, including variation in crop type, business size, and geographic location (including areas beyond the central belt (Appendix D)). This sampling approach aimed to capture a robust range of operational experiences and perspectives on peat-free feasibility.
Current transition status of Scottish growers
Across the professional growers interviewed, most remain in a peat-reduced phase rather than fully peat-free production. Peat continues to underpin commercial systems, although varying degrees of substitution with materials such as wood fibre, coir and composted bark were reported.
Ornamentals
All ornamental nurseries interviewed continue to use peat to some extent. Typical blends contain 50-70% peat for main crops, with wood fibre and coir serving as the principal alternatives. Propagation remains heavily reliant on peat-based media, often incorporating mineral components to modify drainage and structure. One micro-scale nursery reported fully peat-free production of herbaceous plants and grasses; however, they were unable to source trees, shrubs or aquatic plants that had not been propagated in peat, limiting their ability to eliminate peat entirely from their supply chain.
Trees for forestry and woodland
Among tree growers supplying forestry and woodland creation projects, two operate fully peat-free systems, while one uses a peat-reduced mix but could not specify the peat proportion at the time of interview. However, challenges remain: one peat-free grower was considering reverting to a 40% peat mix to mitigate crop losses, and another reintroduced a small proportion of peat in 2024 to address stalling growth in two species. In addition, externally sourced tree seed is sometimes stratified in peat prior to delivery, preventing complete removal of peat from the production chain.
Fruit
Fruit growers have made substantial progress toward peat-free production but expressed concern about reliance on coir as a primary substrate. Blueberries remain a notable exception due to their requirement for acidic growing conditions and are typically cultivated in a 50:50 peat-coir blend. Growers reported reluctance to reduce peat content further, citing potential risks to yield and fruit quality associated with substrate pH stability.
Mushrooms
Mushroom growers have also advanced toward peat-free production, with both businesses interviewed harvesting and marketing peat-free crops. However, transition remains at an early stage. Increased costs, reduced yields and smaller fruiting bodies were reported. As a result, both growers currently operate mixed production systems, combining peat-free and 100% peat-based substrates to maintain market supply while reducing overall peat use.
Potato mini-tubers
All surveyed potato mini-tuber growers have reduced peat use, operating at approximately 60–85% peat content. All three source media from the same manufacturer and supplement mixes with coir and wood fibre. Nevertheless, growers expressed caution about further reductions until high-performing alternative substrates are validated through trialling.
Scottish grower-led trials and experimentation
Despite continued reliance on peat overall, growers demonstrated a clear willingness to undertake on-site trials to advance peat-free production. These ranged from informal business-led experimentation to structured collaborations with researchers and growing-media manufacturers.
All eight interviewed ornamental growers had undertaken or were currently conducting trials, as were two of the three forestry tree producers. In the fruit sector, one large cooperative is trialling both novel materials and established peat substitutes as part of efforts to reduce reliance on coir as a primary substrate. All three mini-tuber producers reported engagement in internal or externally supported trials. Although both mushroom growers are already marketing peat-free crops, they described themselves as being in an ongoing learning phase, with further experimentation under way. Trial durations typically spanned one to three growing seasons, reflecting crop-specific requirements and the early stage of sector-wide transition. Trial length was frequently constrained by staff capacity and, in some cases, by cost.
Outcomes were mixed and highly crop-specific. Bedding plants, herbs, perennials and grasses generally performed well in peat-free blends incorporating wood fibre and coir. In contrast, ericaceous species and propagation-stage crops often exhibited reduced germination rates or weaker root establishment. Some growers reported that mixes containing more than 50% alternative materials were associated with reduced vigour or nutrient imbalance. Several also noted that successful transition required adjustments to irrigation and fertiliser regimes; however, these adaptations were not always implemented due to labour constraints and additional input costs. This suggests that performance outcomes depend as much on cultural and management adaptation as on substrate composition.
Despite variable results, growers consistently viewed trialling as essential to building technical confidence and practical experience. Smaller and more specialised nurseries reported greater flexibility in experimenting with new blends, whereas larger operations expressed caution due to the financial risk associated with large-scale crop loss. Encouragingly, a growing number of businesses have achieved marketable crops in fully peat-free media and continue to refine blends annually in collaboration with manufacturers. This iterative, grower-led experimentation reflects an emerging culture of innovation, even as challenges relating to media consistency, water management and cost remain.
Grower motivations for trialling and transition were shaped by a combination of anticipatory, market-driven and value-based factors. Many described experimentation as preparation for anticipated legislation, seeking to position themselves ahead of a potential peat ban. Others cited customer and supply-chain pressures, particularly from local authorities and retail groups requesting peat-free products. A smaller number framed transition as principle-led, aligned with internal sustainability commitments. Some growers also anticipated reputational or market advantages, although several reported that these had yet to translate into measurable commercial returns.
Current barriers
Barriers for professional growers
Stakeholder engagement identified a consistent set of barriers constraining professional growers’ transition to peat-free production. These span financial, technical, regulatory and structural dimensions and affect businesses across scales and sectors. A detailed account is provided in Appendix P. Overall, these findings align with published research highlighting the economic and technical complexity of peat substitution (Bek et al., 2020; Koseoglu and Roberts, 2025).
Cost and resource pressures were the most frequently cited constraint. Peat-free and peat-reduced media were cited as typically 30-40% more expensive than peat-based products, reflecting higher freight, processing and input costs. While local authorities and retailers increasingly request peat-free plants, growers reported limited willingness within the supply chain to absorb higher prices. Rising fertiliser costs and increased water demand further compound financial pressures. Transition may also require capital investment in storage, handling and irrigation systems, and in some cases new machinery to accommodate bulkier or less uniform substrates.
Technical compatibility and consistency present additional challenges. Peat-free blends, particularly those containing high proportions of wood fibre, were reported to clog or compact unevenly in automated filling and transplanting equipment. Variability between batches – linked to raw-material sourcing or processing – was frequently cited as undermining crop consistency and confidence in performance. Some growers also reported reduced structural stability in wood-based substrates over longer production cycles.
Labour and productivity impacts were widely noted. Peat-free mixes often require closer monitoring, more frequent irrigation and adjustments to nutrient regimes. In some cases, crops such as lavender required up to an additional month to reach marketable size. These factors increase labour inputs and extend production timelines, creating particular strain for smaller nurseries operating on narrow margins.
Skills and knowledge gaps continue to impede progress. Several growers reported limited understanding of substrate composition and management requirements, contributing to inconsistent irrigation and feeding practices. Training provision in production horticulture was described as limited within Scotland, restricting access to specialist technical support.
Representation and communication barriers were also identified. Some participants felt underrepresented within existing trade bodies and disconnected from UK-wide initiatives. Membership costs, limited regional engagement and a perceived emphasis on retail rather than commercial production were cited as factors limiting participation.
Business scale and geography shape adaptive capacity. Smaller and more remote nurseries face higher transport costs, minimum-order constraints and restricted supplier choice. Without the purchasing power to commission bespoke blends, many rely on generic formulations that may not be optimised for their crop range or local climatic conditions.
Finally, biosecurity and regulatory requirements introduce additional complexity. Plant-health rules governing cross-border trade and the use of certain organic materials can limit access to suitable peat-free substrates. For example, UK-Northern Ireland trade arrangements restrict the re-entry of certain wood-fibre media, while PAS 100-certified composts are considered unsuitable for some crops, such as raspberries, due to pathogen risk. In contrast, some growers rely on alternative assurance schemes, such as Dutch RHP certification, which apply more specific controls for horticultural growing media.
Barriers for media manufacturers
Published evidence on barriers specific to manufacturers remains limited. However, stakeholder engagement and sector reports consistently identify material supply, infrastructure capacity, input quality, economic viability, and policy clarity as key constraints to scaling peat-free growing media production in Scotland and the wider UK. While demand for alternatives such as wood fibre, bark, coir, and composted green waste continues to increase, feedstock reliability, processing capacity, and regulatory certainty have not developed at the same pace. A detailed account of these barriers is provided in Appendix Q.
Material supply constraints were identified as a primary challenge. Although domestic bark arisings from UK forestry and sawmilling are substantial in aggregate volume, only a proportion consistently meets the quality, particle size, and phytosanitary standards required for professional growing media. Competition for suitable bark from other sectors e.g. bioenergy, further limits availability and contributes to price volatility. Wood fibre supply is subject to similar pressures, with processing capacity constrained and feedstocks dependent on forestry outputs and wider industrial market cycles. As a result, reliance on imported alternatives – particularly coir – reflects both quality specifications and cross-sector competition, rather than absolute domestic scarcity. Tightening biosecurity requirements for bark imports add further cost and logistical complexity.
Infrastructure and logistics limitations compound these constraints. Stakeholders highlighted that even where raw materials are available, UK capacity for grading, maturation, blending, and quality control remains insufficient to ensure consistent, high-quality substrates at scale. Materials such as digestate fibre require specialised processing and extended stabilisation periods, while the bulk density and storage requirements of wood fibre and composted materials increase capital and transport costs. Both the Growing Media Taskforce (2022) and Office for the Internal Market (2023) identify infrastructure investment as critical to achieving reliable, scalable peat-free production.
Input quality and standards were also cited as significant barriers. Manufacturers report variability in wood fibre and composted materials arising from differences in source material, processing methods, and contamination levels. Green waste contamination – including plastics and persistent herbicide residues – continues to undermine confidence in recycled inputs. The absence of harmonised grading systems and clearly defined technical standards was described as a structural gap in the sector. The reformed Growing Media Association (Bragg, N., 2025, pers. comm.; HortWeek, 2025a) is developing new technical frameworks; however, stakeholders emphasised that coordinated research, independent trials, and transparent performance data are required to validate materials and support wider adoption.
Economic constraints further limit supply chain resilience. Transitioning away from peat has increased production costs, driven by new machinery requirements, higher storage needs, and increased transport expenditure. Wood fibre processing may require capital investment of £500k–£2 million per facility (Growing Media Taskforce, 2022), while expanding processing capacity for peat-free inputs such as coir may require investment of approximately £0.8–£1.2 million per plant (Office for the Internal Market, 2023). Heavier alternatives such as composted green waste incur substantially higher transport costs because of their greater bulk density, historically estimated at up to around 90% higher than peat on a per-volume basis (English Nature and the Royal Society for the Protection of Birds, 2002).
Policy uncertainty was identified as a cross-cutting barrier. Manufacturers reported that the absence of clear, harmonised timelines for peat restrictions across UK nations constrains long-term planning and discourages capital investment in infrastructure and equipment.
Barriers for plant retailers
Plant retailers play a key intermediary role in the transition to peat-free horticulture, linking consumers, growers, wholesalers and manufacturers. However, they face intersecting supply chain, economic, behavioural and policy barriers that constrain both the availability and uptake of peat-free products. Around half of retail plant businesses surveyed by the Scottish Government (2023b) expected to be negatively affected by a peat ban, underscoring the sector’s exposure to transition risks. Appendix R provides further detail.
Supply chain and infrastructure constraints were identified as a primary concern. Limited domestic processing capacity and inconsistent availability of peat-free growing media restrict the ability of some retailers to offer a fully peat-free product range. Larger businesses reported that shortages during peak trading periods could intensify competition for available volumes, potentially disadvantaging smaller outlets with less purchasing power (Office for the Internal Market, 2023). Storage and handling requirements present additional pressures. Peat-free media performance in storage varies by formulation, and trade guidance indicates that prolonged storage of bagged peat-free compost can lead to quality deterioration. Dry, covered storage and faster stock turnover are therefore recommended, potentially increasing space, handling and cost demands – particularly for smaller retailers.
Economic pressures further constrain progress. Peat-free growing media were reported by stakeholders to be approximately 30-40% more expensive than peat-based equivalents, with several retailers indicating that they absorb part of this differential to maintain competitive pricing. Smaller independent businesses, lacking the purchasing leverage of national chains, may be particularly exposed to input price volatility. Consumer price sensitivity reinforces these pressures: affordability remains a primary reason cited for continued peat use (Koseoglu and Roberts, 2025). In some cases, imported peat-based products remain cheaper than domestically produced peat-free alternatives, creating competitive imbalance within the retail market.
Quality and consistency concerns were also raised. Retailers reported variability in nutrient balance, pH, moisture retention and contamination within peat-free products. Trials conducted by the Stockbridge Technology Centre (HortWeek, 2025b) identified variability in the performance of retail media samples. Inconsistent product performance can generate negative customer feedback, reduce repeat purchases and undermine confidence. Retailers also noted that some peat-free plants may require more attentive irrigation management, increasing display maintenance demands.
Cultural and consumer barriers compound these practical challenges. Although surveys indicate that many consumers express a preference for peat-free options, this is not consistently reflected in purchasing behaviour (Dahlin et al., 2019; Office for the Internal Market, 2023). Retailers described a gap between environmental intention and consumer action, with some customers remaining sceptical regarding peat-free compost performance or perceiving it as less reliable. While experienced or sustainability-motivated gardeners often adapt successfully to peat-free systems, general awareness of best practice remains limited. Time constraints during peak seasonal trading reduce opportunities for customer education, though collaborative initiatives involving retailers, growers and manufacturers seek to address this through outreach and guidance materials (Horticultural Trades Association, n.d.).
Policy and standards gaps were identified as an additional barrier. Retailers reported that the absence of a unified certification or labelling framework for peat-free media allows wide variation in quality and environmental claims, complicating procurement decisions and consumer communication. Regulatory divergence between domestic and international markets was also highlighted: imported plants grown in peat are not currently subject to equivalent restrictions, potentially creating competitive imbalance. Clearer labelling, consistent enforcement and harmonised standards were identified as measures that could strengthen market confidence and support transition.
Sector and crop specific barriers
The transition to peat-free production is not uniform across horticulture; certain crop groups and production systems present distinct and heightened barriers, examined in greater detail in Appendix S.
Ericaceous crops – including rhododendrons, heathers and blueberries – are technically challenging to produce without peat due to their adaptation to acidic, low-nutrient soil conditions. Commercial grower monitoring in the UK identifies acid-loving ericaceous crops among those most difficult to transition away from peat (Koseoglu and Roberts, 2025). Growers cautioned that a rapid or inflexible ban could reduce plant diversity and limit the availability of specialist cultivars. These concerns are economically significant: Scotland is a major contributor to the UK berry sector, which generated an estimated £624 million in Gross Value Added (GVA) in 2023, with blueberries one of the four principal berry crops alongside strawberries, raspberries and blackberries (HortiDaily, 2025).
Experimental evidence in ericaceous systems indicates that peat-free components such as coir can support plant growth in bark-based substrates, although performance, nutrient dynamics and pH stability remain highly formulation- and management-dependent and must be considered alongside wider sustainability considerations (Kingston et al., 2020; Scagel, 2003). Industry trials have also reported encouraging results: a recent commercial peat-free trial of Inkarho rhododendrons demonstrated that well-formulated peat-free mixes can achieve satisfactory growth and quality under nursery conditions (HortWeek, 2025d).
Potato mini-tuber production – a foundational stage of the UK seed potato industry – presents distinct structural and biosecurity constraints. Scotland accounts for approximately 75% of Great Britain’s certified seed potato area, positioning it as a cornerstone of the UK seed potato supply chain (Thomson, 2024).The sector contributes substantially to the rural economy and underpins both domestic ware production and export markets. Production operates under stringent certification and plant health regimes, overseen by statutory authorities, to maintain Scotland’s high-health status and minimise the risk of pathogen introduction and spread (Scottish Government, n.d.). Within this tightly regulated context, growers are highly risk-averse to changes that could compromise crop uniformity, traceability or disease status.
Research demonstrates that substrate physical properties are critical determinants of tuber number, size uniformity and overall crop performance in controlled mini-tuber systems (McGrann et al., 2020). Variability in alternative substrates can therefore affect operational reliability in a production model where consistency is paramount. Growers reported concerns regarding handling characteristics and perceived biosecurity risks associated with unfamiliar peat-free media. While definitive evidence linking peat-free substrates to increased pathogen transmission remains limited, recent analysis highlights uncertainty around the provenance, processing and sanitisation of some peat-free constituents, reinforcing caution in high-value seed systems (Litterick et al., 2025). Higher substrate costs and limited downstream market demand for peat-free seed production were also cited as barriers, particularly within a specialised sector with limited leverage over input suppliers.
Propagation represents one of the most technically sensitive stages in peat-free cultivation across multiple crop types. Successful germination and early root development depend on tightly controlled substrate physical properties, including moisture retention, aeration, structural stability and nutrient buffering (Gruda, 2019; Schmilewski, 2008). Evidence from both academic studies and industry trials indicates that variability in peat-free constituents – particularly wood fibre and compost-based materials – can affect water dynamics and nutrient availability during early growth stages, increasing management sensitivity (Koseoglu and Roberts, 2025; Litterick et al., 2025). These challenges are especially pronounced in fine-seeded crops and pressed block systems, where structural cohesion and uniform moisture distribution are critical.
Peat-based plugs and liners remain widely used within UK propagation supply chains, and a substantial proportion of young plants are sourced from overseas production systems that continue to rely on peat-containing media (Office for the Internal Market, 2023). This constrains short-term full substitution at nursery level, even where domestic growers are transitioning. Targeted research into peat-free blocking systems highlights the technical complexity involved: trials in vegetable propagation have demonstrated that achieving sufficient block strength, stability during handling and consistent water distribution requires careful optimisation of fibre composition and processing (Eyre et al., 2022). Practical on-farm evaluations similarly report variability in cohesion and transplant performance in peat-free blocks, reinforcing the need for further refinement (Walker and Litterick, 2024). Ongoing research programmes, including work led by Coventry University (2023) aim to address these structural and performance constraints; however, growers emphasise the need for coordinated commercial-scale trials, clearer regulatory alignment and targeted investment to reduce technical and financial risk.
Evidence of viability in peat-free systems
Although significant technical and structural barriers persist in certain sectors, evidence from both stakeholder experience and published research indicates that peat-free production is already functioning effectively across a range of horticultural systems.
Peer-reviewed studies demonstrate that well-formulated peat-free substrates can achieve plant growth and quality comparable to peat-based media in ornamental and edible crops, provided irrigation and nutrient regimes are appropriately adapted (Gruda, 2019; Maher et al., 2008; Schmilewski, 2008). Recent UK-based trials similarly report satisfactory performance in container-grown systems following refinement of fertilisation and water management practices (Litterick et al., 2025; Royal Horticultural Society, 2024).
Performance outcomes appear to vary by crop type and production duration. Short-cycle crops, including bedding plants, grasses and herbaceous perennials, were widely regarded by stakeholders as comparatively lower-risk during transition, although successful establishment following planting may depend on appropriate irrigation management. Limited growing time in the substrate reduces exposure to longer-term structural degradation or pH drift, and rapid turnover minimises financial risk associated with media experimentation. Substrates incorporating bark or wood fibre typically exhibit higher air-filled porosity and improved drainage relative to peat (Gruda, 2019); for species adapted to well-drained conditions, including alpines and certain Mediterranean-origin plants, growers reported equivalent or improved performance under peat-free regimes.
Beyond agronomic outcomes, several businesses identified reputational and market alignment benefits. Growing public concern regarding peatland degradation and climate impacts has increased scrutiny of peat use in horticulture (Scottish Government, 2023b). Early adoption of peat-free systems was described by some growers as strengthening environmental credentials and supporting brand differentiation.
These findings indicate that transition feasibility is uneven across crop types and production systems. While long-cycle and mechanically intensive systems face greater constraints, many ornamental and short-cycle crops are already being produced successfully without peat. This heterogeneity reinforces the need for proportionate, sector-specific transition strategies.
What might support a successful transition for the horticultural industry in Scotland?
Standards for growing media
Evidence of need: confidence, consistency and risk
Stakeholder engagement, consultation responses and published research identify variability in peat-free growing media as a structural barrier to transition. Across professional horticulture, retail and supply chains, there was broad agreement that legislative restriction alone is unlikely to deliver reliable substitution without strengthened quality assurance (see Appendix T for more detail).
Responses to the “Ending the sale of peat in Scotland” consultation (Scottish Government, 2023b) linked inconsistent crop performance to variability in raw materials, processing standards and quality control; similar concerns were raised in England and Wales (Department for Environment, Food & Rural Affairs, 2022). One growing media organisation reported mortality rates of up to 30% in lime-sensitive species when raised on poorly buffered substrates, illustrating the commercial consequences of inadequate formulation or testing.
Published literature supports these findings. Alternative materials such as wood fibre, composted bark and coir can perform comparably to peat but require careful processing and formulation to ensure consistent physical and chemical properties (Gruda, 2019; Schmilewski, 2008). Variability in particle size distribution, salinity, pH buffering capacity and biological activity is particularly consequential in propagation systems, where tolerance for error is low (Gruda, 2019). Recent UK research has further highlighted calls for clearer national sanitisation standards and routine pathogen testing within a formal quality framework (Litterick et al., 2025).
While PAS 100 provides quality benchmarks for composted materials (Waste and Resources Action Programme, 2016), no harmonised UK-wide standard governs the full range of peat-free constituents or finished-product performance.
Sector specific requirements
Although support for strengthened standards was consistent, stakeholder requirements vary according to crop sensitivity, production system and biosecurity exposure. Table 6 summarises sector-specific risk profiles and corresponding standardisation needs.
Table 6: Sector-specific standardisation requirements to support peat-free transition
Sector/system
Primary risks
What is going wrong?
What kind of standard would help?
Professional growers (all)
Reduced efficiency and increased production risk
Inconsistent crop performance, machinery compatibility issues, greater sensitivity to irrigation and nutrient management.
Clear minimum performance standards for finished growing media (e.g. physical structure, stability, nutrient buffering and water-holding capacity).
Defined processing standards, contamination limits, input traceability requirements.
Plant retailers
Customer complaints and loss of trust leading to loss of income
Inconsistent product performance and differences between retail and professional grades.
Clear labelling and certification to distinguish tested, quality-assured products.
Ericaceous crops
Crop failure over long growing cycles
pH drift and nutrient instability affecting plant health over time.
Crop-specific performance thresholds (pH buffering capacity and low-salinity limits).
Potato mini-tuber systems
Biosecurity and yield loss
Uncertainty over pathogen status and inconsistent moisture retention affecting tuber development.
Mandatory sanitisation and pathogen testing, alongside defined water-holding performance benchmarks.
Propagation (seed systems)
Poor germination and early losses
Rapid surface drying and uneven moisture in fine-seeded trays.
Defined moisture retention and particle size standards for propagation media.
Plug plant supply chains
Limited control over substrate used in young plants
Many plugs are sourced from external or overseas propagators using peat-based media, with restricted choice due to licensing and supply arrangements.
Traceability and disclosure requirements for plug media composition, alongside incentives for peat-free propagation capacity.
Pressed growing block systems
Incompatibility with mechanised production systems
Peat-free blocks may lack strength and moisture stability for reliable mechanical transplanting, requiring more frequent irrigation and increasing nutrient loss.
Defined performance standards for block strength, cohesion and moisture retention under mechanised handling conditions.
Ornamental nurseries emphasised reliability in propagation and plug production. As one large tree and shrub nursery stated, “One bad load of compost can set you back a season – if the roots don’t take, you’ve lost that crop window.” Participants called for defined thresholds relating to particle size distribution, structural stability and microbiological status.
Soft fruit producers, many of whom have adopted coir-based systems, expressed concern regarding variability in buffering and salinity management. “Coir works for us, but only if it’s treated right,” noted one grower. Standards ensuring consistent processing and transparent sourcing were viewed as essential.
Potato mini-tuber systems adopted a more precautionary position, emphasising biosecurity and sterility as non-negotiable. Stakeholders questioned whether a single generic standard would adequately reflect pathogen sensitivity thresholds in high-risk systems.
Growing media manufacturers advocated segmentation between amateur and professional markets, reflecting tighter performance tolerances in commercial propagation and mechanised systems.
These perspectives indicate that any standards framework must accommodate differentiated performance thresholds rather than assume uniform risk tolerance across sectors.
Implementation models and pathways
Stakeholders identified both international reference models and emerging UK initiatives that could inform implementation. Several participants pointed to the Dutch RHP certification scheme as an example of structured quality assurance. RHP certifies raw materials and finished growing media products against defined and regularly updated quality standards covering physical, chemical and biological parameterrs – including water uptake, air content, pH, electrical conductivity and nutrient status – applied across the production chain. Stakeholders emphasised that the scheme’s value lies in its combination of technical thresholds, traceability and independent verification. As one ornamental grower observed, certification provides “a baseline – if it’s certified, you know what you’re working with.”
Workshop discussions outlined practical components of a potential UK-aligned pathway:
Establish defined parameter bands for key constituents and finished products, including contaminant and microbiological thresholds.
Require batch-level testing and documented growth trials, subject to third-party audit.
Differentiate standards between amateur and professional markets.
Introduce a recognisable certification mark linked to transparent compliance criteria.
Implement structured monitoring to assess the impact of standards on peat reduction rates.
Industry coordination is advancing. The regrouped Growing Media Association has initiated development of a PAS-style specification drawing on PAS 100 and PAS 110 (HortWeek, 2025a). According to stakeholders, the draft includes chemical, physical and microbiological testing parameters, defined target ranges and documented growth testing, with independent audit and corrective timelines.
Governance implications
Interview evidence indicates that stakeholder confidence is closely linked to the credibility and coordination of any standards framework. Voluntary guidance alone was widely viewed as insufficient; independent oversight and transparent verification were considered central to supporting trust in peat-free media.
Participants stressed the importance of UK-wide alignment to avoid market fragmentation, while ensuring Scottish priorities are reflected in emerging PAS-style developments. Structured knowledge exchange – including dissemination of certified product data and crop-specific guidance for high-risk systems – was identified as an important complementary measure.
Overall, stakeholder evidence suggests that effective standards will depend not only on technical specification, but on governance clarity, coordination across administrations and credible independent verification. Standards were therefore framed as an enabling mechanism within the wider peat-free transition, rather than an end point in themselves.
Growing trials
In this context, a horticultural growing trial refers to a structured comparison of alternative growing media under commercial production conditions, typically assessing crop performance, physical and chemical substrate properties, and operational compatibility over defined crop cycles.
National trial activity and capacity constraints
Evidence from stakeholder engagement and national initiatives indicates broad recognition that structured trials are essential to reducing technical risk in peat-free transition. However, commercial growers reported significant constraints in conducting robust trials independently, citing limitations in time, staffing and data-logging capacity. Several interviewees described running meaningful comparative trials as “almost a full-time job,” noting reliance on in-house agronomy rather than external research support.
The need for structured trial support has been shaped in part by the long-standing policy trajectory toward peat reduction. In 2011, the UK Government set a voluntary target to phase out peat use in professional horticulture by 2030 (HM Government, 2011). Stakeholders emphasised that pursuing this transition without coordinated trial programmes increases commercial exposure. Participants expressed willingness to trial alternative media where external agronomic expertise, supervision and data analysis were available, highlighting the importance of partnership models rather than isolated experimentation.
Views differed regarding optimal trial design. Some growers favoured on-site trials, arguing that microclimatic conditions, irrigation systems and machinery compatibility are highly site-specific. Others supported centralised research-led trials, citing benefits such as biosecurity control and methodological consistency. Across sectors, however, there was agreement that trials must be conducted at commercially meaningful scale; small-plot experiments were widely considered insufficient to influence decision-making.
Several UK initiatives provide relevant models. The AHDB-ADAS CP138 project combined predictive modelling with on-site grower demonstrations, identifying both opportunities and constraints in peat substitution (Agriculture and Horticulture Development Board, 2019). More recently, the Royal Horticultural Society’s Transition to Peat-Free Fellowship (launched in 2022) represents the largest coordinated UK trial programme to date. The five-year project partners the RHS, Defra and commercial media suppliers with multiple nurseries to test peat-free formulations across diverse crop groups, including ericaceous and other traditionally sensitive plants. Interim findings indicate that peat-free media can perform comparably to peat under standard irrigation regimes in several nursery settings, with final results expected in 2027 (Royal Horticultural Society, 2024; n.d.).
Priority crops and technical evidence gaps
Stakeholder engagement identified specific crop categories where technical uncertainty remains high and where targeted, crop-specific trials were viewed as a priority.
Ericaceous ornamentals (including rhododendrons, azaleas and heathers) were frequently cited. While short-term trials have demonstrated encouraging performance in peat-free systems (HortWeek, 2025d), growers expressed uncertainty regarding long-term pH stability and nutrient buffering over extended production cycles.
Propagation systems emerged as a consistent priority. Stakeholders emphasised the need for focused trials on plug plants and growing blocks, where physical cohesion and moisture stability are critical to mechanical transplanting and uniform root development. As one specialist noted, peat substitutes must be sufficiently cohesive to support blocking systems without crumbling during handling.
Potato mini-tuber production, however, was identified as a distinct and higher-risk category requiring targeted investigation. Given Scotland’s central role in certified seed potato production and the sector’s stringent biosecurity and traceability requirements, growers described substrate reliability and pathogen control as non-negotiable. Research demonstrates that substrate physical properties directly influence tuber number, size uniformity and crop performance in controlled systems (McGrann et al., 2020). Stakeholders therefore emphasised the need for dedicated commercial-scale trials to evaluate peat-free media under certified mini-tuber production conditions.
Several niche crops adapted to Scottish conditions – including short-lived perennials such as Meconopsis – were also flagged as requiring bespoke trial design, particularly where moisture sensitivity is pronounced. More broadly, stakeholders emphasised that priority should be given to crop systems that remain dependent on specific physical and chemical properties traditionally provided by peat. Ongoing national initiatives are testing a number of these sensitive groups, including carnivorous plants.
Support mechanisms and coordination considerations
Stakeholder engagement highlighted that future Scottish trial activity should build on existing UK initiatives rather than duplicate them. Several participants suggested formal Scottish participation within established programmes – for example, extending the Royal Horticultural Society’s peat-free trial network to include Scottish-coordinated sites – to ensure representation of local climatic and production conditions.
Interviewees emphasised that trial participation requires structured support. Suggested mechanisms included financial assistance for host nurseries, provision of agronomic expertise to design and monitor experiments, and training in data collection and analysis. Some growers proposed a “trial facilitator” model, whereby an industry-funded agronomist supports multiple nurseries with experimental setup and data logging, reducing individual administrative burden.
Clear dissemination of findings was repeatedly identified as essential. While national initiatives have produced reports and resources, stakeholders expressed concern that results are not always easily comparable across crop types and systems. Participants suggested that a coordinated Scottish knowledge platform could consolidate certified trial data, case studies and technical guidance.
Key stakeholder-identified actions include:
Embed commercial-scale trials within existing UK frameworks, ensuring Scottish sites are included where relevant to capture regional conditions.
Provide technical and financial support for host nurseries, including access to agronomic expertise and structured data collection.
Prioritise crop systems identified as high risk, including ericaceous species, propagation and potato mini-tubers.
Facilitate peer-to-peer learning, through field demonstrations, workshops and structured mentoring between early adopters and other growers.
Across interviews, stakeholders characterised the current constraint less as unwillingness to transition, and more as residual uncertainty in specific systems. Structured, collaborative trials were viewed as mechanisms to generate transferable evidence under commercial conditions. Trial outcomes were also viewed as providing an empirical foundation for the refinement of future growing media standards.
Enabling conditions for industry transition
While standards (Section 7.1) and structured trials (Section 7.2) address technical uncertainty and product consistency, stakeholder engagement identified a broader set of enabling conditions that influence the pace and stability of peat-free transition. These relate to financial exposure, feedstock availability, regulatory frameworks and knowledge infrastructure. Progress in these areas was viewed as necessary to enable sustained commercial uptake.
Financial and infrastructure considerations
Stakeholders emphasised that transition carries both capital and operational cost implications. Survey evidence from UK growers suggests that fully peat-free growing media may cost approximately 15-25% more per cubic metre than peat-reduced alternatives (Royal Horticultural Society, 2023), although reported differentials vary by crop type and contract structure. Additional costs may arise from equipment modification, irrigation adjustments, storage infrastructure and staff training. Several participants indicated that targeted, time-limited financial mechanisms – including capital grants, transitional funding or co-funded research participation – could reduce early-adopter risk in sectors operating under tight margins (Royal Horticultural Society, 2023). These suggestions were framed as short-term adjustment support during market transition rather than long-term subsidy dependence.
Feedstock competition was identified as a structural consideration. Participants noted increasing demand for wood-based materials across sectors, particularly between growing media manufacturers and biomass energy producers. Formal analysis of peat-policy impacts has similarly reported cross-sector competition for wood residues used in biomass fuel production (Office for the Internal Market, 2023). UK biomass market data indicate that the country is a major importer and consumer of wood pellets for electricity and renewable heat generation (Department for Energy Security and Net Zero, 2023), indicating that demand from the energy sector may influence the availability and pricing of wood residues and by-products used in peat-free growing media formulations.
Regulatory and supply chain constraints
Access to suitable alternative feedstocks is influenced by waste classification systems, contamination thresholds and approval processes. Stakeholders reported that regulatory complexity can delay or deter the use of secondary materials, including anaerobic digestate and recycled wood products, limiting domestic diversification of inputs.
In parallel, concerns were raised regarding contamination in green waste streams, particularly where contractual clauses permit low levels of non-organic material. Variability in compost quality affects manufacturer confidence and restricts its suitability for sensitive applications. Stakeholders suggested that clearer guidance, proportionate review of waste classifications and strengthened enforcement of contamination standards could improve supply reliability, subject to environmental safeguards.
These issues highlight that peat-free transition is not solely a matter of product reformulation, but also of regulatory coherence and supply chain infrastructure.
Limited long-term, Scotland-specific performance data across diverse crop systems.
Incomplete quantification of transition costs across different production scales.
Insufficient applied guidance on irrigation, fertiliser regimes and storage management for peat-free media.
Uneven access to structured training and peer-to-peer knowledge exchange.
While research is ongoing at UK level, participants emphasised the importance of accessible, crop-specific best-practice guidance and coordinated dissemination mechanisms. Structured knowledge exchange was viewed as complementary to standards and trials, enabling technical learning to translate into operational confidence.
Coordination and policy coherence
Across interviews and survey evidence, stakeholders framed peat-free transition as a system-level adjustment rather than a single technical substitution. Standards, trials, feedstock supply, infrastructure investment and training were described as interdependent components of a stable transition pathway.
Effective coordination across administrations and sectors was therefore viewed as important not only for regulatory clarity, but for maintaining supply-chain confidence and market competitiveness during adjustment. Stakeholders did not characterise the primary constraint as unwillingness to transition, but rather as exposure to uneven implementation conditions across crops and supply chains.
In this context, government’s role was framed as enabling coherence across these domains – ensuring that technical progress, market signals and regulatory frameworks operate in alignment. Stakeholders therefore characterised successful transition not as a question of technical feasibility, but of coordinated implementation across the wider horticultural system.
Feasibility and sequencing of transition in Scotland
The evidence presented in Sections 5-7 shows that peat-free growing media are already working in parts of Scottish horticulture. Many ornamental crops, short-cycle plants and some forestry systems are being produced successfully in peat-free or significantly peat-reduced substrates. However, full removal of peat across all sectors will take time and will not progress at the same pace in every crop group. Feasibility is therefore not a single question. It depends on three main factors:
Time needed for manufacturers to expand reliable supply of alternatives.
Time needed for growers to test and validate new mixes under commercial conditions.
Degree of policy alignment across the UK.
Taken together, these factors suggest that transition is achievable, but that sequencing and coordination will be critical.
Infrastructure and validation lead time
Media manufacturers require time to increase processing capacity for key materials such as wood fibre and composted bark. Installing new refiners, dryers and screening equipment can take two to three years. Expanding production of high-quality compost with consistently low contamination may take three to five years, particularly where additional quality controls are needed. Emerging materials, such as farmed Sphagnum, are likely to require longer development periods before they can contribute at commercial scale (c.5-10 years).
Growers also need time. Most businesses test new growing media over several seasons before adopting them fully. This reflects biological cycles rather than reluctance to change. Crops must be assessed for germination, root development, growth rate, yield and long-term health. For short-cycle ornamental crops, two to three growing seasons may be sufficient. For longer-cycle crops such as shrubs, trees, blueberries and some fruit crops, growers commonly require five years or more to confirm reliable performance.
High-biosecurity systems, particularly potato mini-tuber production, present the longest adaptation horizon. These systems operate under strict certification requirements and low tolerance for variation in substrate performance. Growers reported that multi-year validation would be essential before complete peat removal could be considered. In these sectors, shorter timelines were viewed as commercially high risk.
These lead times are therefore driven by infrastructure investment cycles and biological validation requirements, rather than by lack of technical potential.
Variation across crop systems
The transition does not affect all sectors equally. Retail growing media is already largely peat-free, and many ornamental producers have significantly reduced peat use. In the soft fruit sector, most Scottish berry production (with the exception of blueberries) is already peat-free, typically using coir-based systems. This shows that peat-free production can work at commercial scale. However, coir is imported and associated with transport emissions and wider environmental impacts. It is a functional alternative to peat, but not an environmentally neutral one.
In contrast, ericaceous crops, blueberries and other acid-demanding species remain more dependent on peat due to pH stability and nutrient-buffering requirements. While peat-free systems are being trialled, long-term performance under commercial conditions requires further validation.
Propagation systems, including plugs and pressed growing blocks also present technical sensitivity. These systems depend on precise moisture retention, particle size and structural cohesion. Although progress is being made, growers emphasised the need for continued trialling and refinement.
This unevenness suggests that a single, uniform timetable may not reflect sector realities. A phased approach that recognises crop-specific constraints would better align with the evidence presented in earlier sections.
UK alignment and competitive considerations
Several stakeholders raised concerns about moving significantly ahead of the rest of the UK. If peat-grown plants or peat-based growing media remain available in other nations, Scottish producers could face higher production costs while competing in shared markets. In addition, young plants and plugs are often sourced from outside Scotland, and in some cases from overseas production systems that continue to use peat. Without UK-wide alignment, full removal of peat at nursery level may be constrained by upstream supply chains. These issues do not undermine the case for transition. However, they highlight the importance of policy coordination and clarity to avoid unintended competitive disadvantage or carbon displacement.
Indicative phasing
Based on stakeholder evidence and the technical analysis presented earlier in this report, a broadly phased pattern of transition can be identified:
Retail and amateur markets are closest to full peat removal.
Mainstream professional crops, including many ornamentals and forestry plants, are capable of substantial further reduction in the medium term, subject to continued infrastructure expansion and trial validation.
High-sensitivity systems, including potato mini-tubers, certain propagation systems and ericaceous crops, are likely to require longer validation periods before complete peat substitution is commercially secure.
These phases are indicative rather than prescriptive. The precise pace of change will depend on infrastructure investment, research outcomes, standards development and UK policy alignment.
Indicative time horizons by sector
Stakeholder evidence provides a clearer picture of the likely time required for different parts of the industry to transition fully away from peat. Figure 4 illustrates how these sector-specific timelines translate into indicative transition windows from 2026 onwards. These estimates reflect infrastructure lead times, crop testing cycles and normal equipment replacement schedules. They are indicative and based on reported industry experience rather than fixed commitments.
Growing media manufacturers
Manufacturers highlighted that expansion of domestic processing capacity cannot occur immediately. The following timelines reflect capital investment cycles and regulatory approval processes. They relate only to those materials for which stakeholders provided specific evidence on infrastructure lead times during engagement. Not all alternative materials assessed elsewhere in this report were discussed in comparable detail in relation to scaling timelines.
Wood fibre and composted bark: typically 2-3 years to install additional refining, drying and screening equipment. Availability of horticultural-grade fine bark remains a constraint.
Composted green waste: 3-5 years to establish consistently low-contamination, PAS-100 compliant production lines at scale.
Digestate-derived materials: 3-4 years of further research, pilot work and process refinement to manage ammonium levels and ensure consistent product quality.
Coir: supply chains are established but remain import-dependent and subject to quality variability.
Farmed Sphagnum: stakeholders suggested 5-10 years before commercial-scale volumes could realistically be available in Scotland, subject to cost, sterilisation and land-use considerations.
Grower sub-sectors
Time needed for adoption varies significantly by crop type and production system.
Retail and amateur markets: largely peat-free already; remaining transition expected within 1-2 years based on current trends.
Ornamental growers: small growers reported that 2-3 growing seasons may suffice. Larger operations anticipate 5-10 years where machinery modification or infrastructure redesign is required.
Tree growers for forestry and woodland: smaller producers indicated rapid adaptation is possible if suitable substrates are available; larger nurseries suggested 3–5 years to trial mixes under site-specific conditions.
Fruit and vegetable growers: Strawberries and raspberries are largely peat-free already (coir-based systems). Blueberries and other longer-cycle fruit crops require extended validation, often beyond 5 years. Vegetable growers commonly cited around 5 years as a realistic planning horizon, subject to secure material supply.
Potato mini-tuber growers: the most cautious sector. Stakeholders suggested that full conversion of facilities could require up to 10 years, reflecting biosecurity requirements, multi-season validation and certification constraints.
Ericaceous crops: stakeholders indicated that longer timelines are likely, potentially within the 5–10 year horizon identified for high-sensitivity systems, reflecting ongoing challenges in achieving stable low-pH, peat-free systems at scale.
Overall pattern
Taken together, stakeholder evidence suggests a broadly phased trajectory beginning around 2026:
Short term (1-2 years): Retail markets and low-risk systems complete transition.
Medium term (3-5 years): Mainstream professional crops achieve substantial reduction, supported by expanded processing capacity and validated blends.
Longer term (5-10 years): High-sensitivity and high-biosecurity systems transition once multi-year evidence confirms performance and reliability.
These time horizons are contingent on infrastructure expansion, standards development, coordinated trials and UK policy alignment. Timeframes are indicative and assume transition commencing in 2026.
Figure 4: Indicative stakeholder-informed timelines for peat-free transition across grower sub-sectors. Teal bars indicate the earliest feasible transition window reported by stakeholders. Grey extensions show potential additional time required where technical or infrastructure constraints persist. Timelines are illustrative planning horizons rather than forecasts of when peat use will cease.
Conditions for effective transition
Across all sectors, stakeholders consistently emphasised that successful transition depends on coordinated implementation rather than isolated action.
Key enabling conditions include:
Clear and consistent quality standards for peat-free media;
Access to technical guidance and workforce training;
Clarity and alignment of policy across the UK.
Where these conditions are in place, evidence suggests that peat-free production can operate effectively. Where they are absent, technical uncertainty and commercial risk increase.
Overall, the feasibility of transition in Scotland is therefore best understood as a question of sequencing and coordination rather than of technical possibility. The industry has demonstrated willingness to adapt. The remaining challenge lies in aligning infrastructure, standards, research and policy to support consistent and economically stable implementation.
Conclusions
This research examined the technical, environmental, social and economic evidence on alternatives to horticultural peat in Scotlandthrough a literature review, workshops and 46 stakeholder interviews.
No single material fully replicates peat, which has a unique mix of physical, chemical and biological properties. However, stakeholder evidence consistently shows that well formulated blends – notably those based on wood fibre, composted bark and coir – already support commercial production, while others show strong development potential.
Some types of growing, particularly soft fruit production, rely on imported materials. This increases transport emissions and can create supply-chain risks, which may affect long-term environmental and economic resilience. The main challenge is therefore not a lack of alternatives, but ensuring consistent performance through effective blending of materials, suitable infrastructure, clear quality standards and adapted crop management. Across the UK, the supply of leading alternatives exceeds remaining peat use. Wood fibre alone could replace current peat use. However, a reliable supply depends on having enough processing capacity, clear grading standards and the ability to manage competition from other sectors for raw materials, as well as effective transport systems. Supply therefore depends less on whether raw materials exist, and more on investment, quality control, and coordination across the market. In the longer term, Scotland could improve environmental performance and strengthen supply security by reducing its reliance on imported materials.Different parts of the sector can move away from peat at different speeds. Retail growing media and many ornamental growers have made substantial progress in reducing peat use. Soft fruit growers operate successfully using coir-based systems for most crops, with the exception of blueberries. In contrast, some systems are more difficult to change, including ericaceous (acid-loving) crops, potato mini-tubers, and certain propagation systems. These systems face distinct challenges. Potato mini-tuber production operates under strict biosecurity (plant health) and certification requirements. Ericaceous crops require stable low-pH conditions across growing cycles. Propagation systems depend on highly controlled moisture balance and media structure during early growth stages. These differences reflect that the transition involves adapting production systems, not simply replacing one material with another. Stakeholders did not indicate resistance to change, but highlighted commercial risks where performance is uncertain.
The success of a peat-free transition depends on careful planning and realistic timing. It takes time to develop infrastructure– typically 2-5 years for core materials and longer for emerging alternatives such as farmed Sphagnum. Crop production cycles and the need to test over several seasons can take additional time – up to 5–10 years for large or sensitive systems. A single timeline for the whole sector would not reflect these differences, so a phased approach based on evidence and experience is more practical.
Overall, the evidence indicates that Scotland can move to peat-free growing. The speed of change will depend not on technical limits but on strong coordination, clear policy direction and building confidence through standards and collaboration. With the right planning, investment and alignment across the sector, Scotland can phase out peat while maintaining production and a reliable supply. The transition also offers an opportunity to protect peatlands, strengthen local recycling and reuse of materials, and support a more resilient and sustainable horticulture sector.
Next Steps
Stakeholder feedback highlights several key factors that will affect the pace and success of a peat-free transition across the Scottish horticulture sector.Clear transition planning: The sector requires a phased transition timeline based on evidence. Different parts of the industry need different amounts of time to adapt. Policy coherence across UK administrations would help reduce competitive distortion and investment uncertainty.
Domestic processing capacity: The UK needs more investment in facilities to process alternative materials, including bark grading, compost quality assurance, and blending infrastructure. Increasing domestic capacity may help ensure steady supply and reduce price volatility.
Quality assurance and biosecurity standards: The UK could develop consistent frameworks for peat-free growing media, similar to PAS 100 – the UK quality standard for compost. Frameworks should cover how materials are processed, limits on contaminants, tracking of sources, and plant-health safeguards. Clear standards could improve consistency and build trust among growers.
Coordinated commercial-scale trials: The industry requires multi-season trials to test peat-free materials in high-sensitivity sectors such as ericaceous crops, propagation systems and potato mini-tuber production. This will help generate reliable evidence of performance.
Market signals and procurement: Stronger demand signals will encourage businesses to invest. This could include public-sector procurement and sustainability-linked sourcing approaches. Visible, long-term demand could help companies plan and expand production.
Technical guidance and workforce support: Growers would benefit from better access to training and practical advice. This includes support on adapting irrigation, nutrition, and handling techniques suited to peat-free systems.
References
Abad, M., Fornes, F., Carrión, C., and Noguera, V. (2005) Physical Properties of Various Coconut Coir Dusts Compared to Peat, HortScience, 40(7), DOI: 10.21273/HORTSCI.40.7.2138
Anbarasu, M., Gurusamy, A., and Saravanan, S. (2024) Properties of different graded coir pith by Keen-Raczkowski box and Brunauer-Emmett-Teller analysis, Journal of Environmental Biology, 45(3), pp. 357-362.
Ahmad, M., Upamali Rajapaksha, A., Lim, J.E., Zhang, M., Bolan, N., Mohan, D., Vithanage, M., Lee, S.S., Sik Ok, Y. (2014) Biochar as a sorbent for contaminant management in soil and water: A review, Chemosphere, 99, pp. 19-33.
Alexander, P.D., Bragg, N.C., Meade, R., Padelopoulos, G. and Watts, O. (2008) Peat in horticulture and conservation: the UK response to a changing world, Mires and Peat, 3, article 8. DOI: 10.19189/001c.128260.
Alburquerque, J.A., de la Fuente, C., Ferrer-Costa, A., Carrasco, L., Cegarra, J., Abad, M. and Bernal, M.P. (2012) Assessment of the fertiliser potential of digestates from farm and agroindustrial residues, Biomass and Bioenergy, 40, pp. 181-189.
Ali, S.N., Aziz, A.A., Kasim, N.N., Tajuddin, S.A., Omar, N.F., and Nasirun, N. (2023) Assessing the effect of biochar addition in growing medium on plant growth performance of Bok Choy (Brassica rappa subsp. Chinensis) using sustainable soilless agriculture system, International Journal of Innovation and Industrial Revolution, 5(13), pp. 104-118.
Amaducci, S., Scordia, D., Liu, F.H., Zhang, Q., Guo, H., Testa, G. and Cosentino, S.L. (2015) Key cultivation techniques for hemp in Europe and China, Industrial Crops and Products, 68, pp. 2–16.
Baran, A., Tarnawski, M. and Urbaniak, M (2019) As assessment of bottom sediment as a source of plant nutrients and an agent for improving soil properties, Environmental Engineering and Management Journal, 18 (8), pp. 1647-1656.
Barrett, G.E., Alexander, P.D., Robinson, J.S. and Bragg, N.C. (2016) Achieving environmentally sustainable growing media for soilless plant cultivation – A review, Scientia Horticulturae, 212, pp. 220-234.
Benavent-Celma, C., McLaggan, D., van West, P., and Woodward, S. (2023) Survival of Phytophthora cryptogea and Phytophthora cactorum in Commercial Potting Substrates for Eucalyptus globulus Plants, Agriculture, 13(3), 581. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3390/agriculture13030581
Beretta, D. and Ripamonti, M. (2021) Evaluation of wood fibre as component of substrates for container nursery crops, Acta Horticulturae, 1305, pp. 77-82.
Blok, C., Eveleens, B. and van Winkel, A. (2021) Growing media for food and quality of life in the period 2020–2050, Acta Horticulturae, 1305, pp. 341-355.
Bragg, N. and Alexander, P. (2019) A review of the challenges facing horticultural researchers as they move toward sustainable growing media, Acta Horticulturae, 1266, pp. 7-14.
Caballero Mejia, C.C., Brand, M.H. and Lubell-Brand, J.D. (2025) Hemp hurd fiber as a substitute for peat in container production of petunia and geranium, HortScience, 60(8), pp. 1251-1259.
Carlile, W.R., Cattivello, C. and Zaccheo, P. (2015) Organic growing media: constituents and properties, Vadose Zone Journal, 14(6), pp. 1-13.
Carus, M. (2017) The European Hemp Industry: Cultivation, processing and applications for fibres, shivs, seeds and flowers, European Industrial Hemp Association. Available at: https://eiha.org/media/2017/12/17-03_European_Hemp_Industry.pdf (Accessed: 24 January 2026).
Calisti, R., Regni, L., Pezzolla, D., Cucina, M., Gigliotti, G., and Proietti, P. (2023) Evaluating Compost from Digestate as a Peat Substitute in Nursery for Olive and Hazelnut Trees, Sustainability, 15(1), 282. DOI: https://www.mdpi.com/2071-1050/15/1/282?
Chambers, J. (1996) Peat for purists, The Horticulturist, 5(3), pp. 11-12.
Chen, J., Jin, C., Sun, S., Yang, D., He, Y., Gan, P., Gerald Nalume, W., Ma, Y., He, W. and Li, G. (2023) Recognising the challenges of composting: critical strategies for control, recycling, and valorisation of nitrogen loss, Resources, Conservation and Recycling, 198, 107172. DOI: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.resconrec.2023.107172 (Accessed: 16 February 2026).
Chrysargyris, A., Tzortzakis, N., Prasad, M. and Menexes, G. (2020) Biochar type, ratio and nutrient levels in growing media affect seedling production and plant performance, Agronomy, 10(9), 1421. DOI: 10.3390/agronomy10091421
Dahlin, J., Beuthner, C., Halbherr, V., Kurz, P., Nelles, M. and Herbes, C. (2019) Sustainable compost and potting soil marketing: private gardener preferences, Journal of Cleaner Production, 208, pp. 1603-1612.
da Silva Alves, L., Tolardo, G., Caitano, C.E.C., Vieira Júnior, W.G., Gomes Freitas, P.N. and Cunha Zied, D. (2024) Use of spent mushroom substrate for cherry tomato seedlings; a potential alternative to peat in horticulture, Biological Agriculture & Horticulture, 40(2), pp. 127-140.
Dias, G.C., Machado, R.M., Alves-Pereira, I., Ferreira, R.A. and Gruda, N.S. (2025) Potential of Pine Bark to Replace Perlite in Coir-Based Substrates: Effects on Nutrient Uptake, Growth and Phytochemicals in Lettuce Under Two Salinity Levels, Plants, 14(16), 2577. DOI: 10.3390/plants14162577
Domeño, I., Irigoyen, I. and Muro, J. (2009) Evolution of organic matter and drainages in wood fibre and coconut fibre substrates, Scientia Horticulturae, 122(2) pp. 269-274.
Evans, M.R., Konduru, S. and Stamps, R.H. (1996) Source variation in physical and chemical properties of coconut coir dust, HortScience, 31, pp. 965-967.
Ferrans, L., Schmieder, F., Mugwira, R., Marques, M. and Hogland, W. (2022) Dredged sediments as a plant-growing substrate: estimation of health risk index, Science of the Total Environment, 846, 157463. DOI: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.scitotenv.2022.157463
Fielding,D., Pakeman, R.J., Newey, S., and Smith, S.W. (2025) The impact of moorland cutting and prescribed burning on early changes in above-ground carbon stocks, plant litter decomposition and soil properties, British Ecological Society: Ecological Solutions and Evidence, 6(3), 70112. DOI: https://doi.org/10.1002/2688-8319.70112.
Fratini, C., Anselmi, S., and Renzi, M. (2025) Dredge Sediment as an Opportunity: A Comprehensive and Updated Review of Beneficial Uses in Marine, River, and Lagoon Eco-Systems, Environments, 12(6), 200. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3390/environments12060200
Frederickson-Matika, D., Schiffer-Forsyth, K., Hedley, P.E., Cock, P.J.A. and Green, S. (2024) Detection of oomycete pathogens in UK peat-free growing media and implications for plant health, Journal of Horticultural Science and Biotechnology, 100(2), pp. 272-283.
Gabryś, T. and Fryczkowska, B. (2022) Using Sheep’s Wool as an Additive to the Growing Medium and its Impact on Plant Development on the Example of Chlorophytum comosum, Journal of Ecological Engineering, 23(6), pp. 205-212.
Gardner, M., Reed, S., and Davidson, M. (2020) Assessment of Worker Exposure to Occupational Organic Dust in a Hemp Processing Facility, Annals of Work Exposures and Health, 64(7), pp. 745-753.
Ganesan, K., Rajagopal, K., and Thangavel, R. (2008) Rice husk ash blended cement: Assessment of optimal level of replacement for strength and permeability properties of concrete, Construction and Building Materials, 22(8), pp. 1675-1683.
Gaudig, G., Fengler, F., Krebs, M., Prager, A., Schulz, J., Wichmann, S., & Joosten, H. (2014) Sphagnum Farming in Germany – a Review of Progress, Mires and Peat, 13, 08. DOI: https://doi.org/10.19189/001c.129422
Gaudig, G., Krebs, M., Prager, A., and Wichmann, S. (2017) Sphagnum farming From Species Selection to the Production of Growing Media: A Review, Mires and Peat, 20, Article 13. DOI: https://doi.org/10.19189/MaP.2018.OMB.340
Gitea, M.A., Borza, I.M., Domuta, C.G., Gitea, D., Rosan, C.A., Vicas, S.I. and Pasca, M.B. (2024) A Sustainable Approach Based on Sheep Wool Mulch and soil Conditioner for Prunus domestica (Stanley Variety) Trees Aimed at Increasing Fruit Quality and Productivity in Drought Conditions, Sustainability, 16(17), 7287. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3390/su16177287
Godwin, R.J., White, D.R., Dickin, E.T., Kaczorowska-Dolowy, M., Millington, W.A., Pope, E.K. and Misiewicz, P.A. (2022) The effects of traffic management systems on the yield and economics of crops grown in deep, shallow and zero tilled sandy loam soil over eight years, Soil and Tillage Research, 223, 105465. DOI: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.still.2022.105465
Growing Kent and Medway (2025) Mushroom Crop Waste and Valorisation: The potential of mushrooms by-products for a biobased circular economy. Available at: https://www.growingkentandmedway.com/reports/ (Accessed: 31 January 2026).
Gruda, N. and Schnitzler, W.H. (2004) Suitability of wood fiber substrate for production of vegetable transplants: I. Physical properties of wood fiber substrates, Scientia Horticulturae, 100 (1-4), pp. 309-322.
Gruda, N.S. (2019) Increasing sustainability of growing media constituents, Agronomy, 9(6), 298. DOI: 0.3390/agronomy9060298
Gruda, N. and Bragg, N. (2020) Developments in alternative organic materials for growing media in soilless culture systems, in Gruda, N.S. (ed.) Advances in horticultural soilless culture. London: Burleigh Dodds/Taylor & Francis.
Gwenzi, W. (2025) Potential environmental and human health risks of biochar systems: a call for comprehensive health risk assessments, Biochar for Environmental Remediation, pp. 433-445.
Habeeb, G.A., and Mahmud, H. (2010) Study on properties of rice husk ash and its use as cement replacement material, Materials Research, 13(2), pp. 185-190.
Hashemi, F., Mogensen, L., van der Werf, H.M., Cederberg, C. and Knudsen, M.T. (2024) Organic food has lower environmental impacts per area unit and similar climate impacts per mass unit compared to conventional, Communications Earth & Environment, 5, 250. DOI: https://doi.org/10.1038/s43247-024-01415-6
Herfort, S., Pflanz, K., Larsen, M-S., Mertscgun, T. and Grüneberg, H. (2023) Influence of Sheep’s Wool Vegetation Mats on the Plant Growth of Perennials, Horticulturae, 9(3), 384. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3390/horticulturae9030384
Hill, J. (2022) Wool you look at that? Sheep wool pellets as fertilizer in container-grown crops. MSc thesis, Swedish University of Agricultural Sciences. Available at: https://stud.epsilon.slu.se/17669/3/hill-j-20220413.pdf (Accessed: 8 October 2025).
Hirschler, O. and Osterburg, B. (2025) Achieving peat-free hobby gardening for climate mitigation in Germany: Insights into prices of growing media constituents, potting soils and policy options, Resources, Conservation and Recycling, 220, 108330. DOI: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.resconrec.2025.108330
Horticultural Trades Association (2022a) Growing Media Monitor Report: Trends in the composition of UK growing media supplied 2011-2022. Available at: https://hta.org.uk/growingmediamonitor (Accessed: 9 October 2025).
Hospido, A., Carballa, M., Moreira, M., Omil, F., Lema, J.M. and Feijoo, G. (2010) Environmental assessment of anaerobically digested sludge reuse in agriculture: potential impacts of emerging micropollutants, Water Research, 44(10), pp. 3225–3233.
Hossain, M.T., Zaman, M., Sakib, S., and Ikhtiar Mahmud, S.M. (2024) Hazard Assessment of Rice Husk Ash Generated from Rice Mills in Bangladesh and Way Forward to Overcome or Adopt the Hazards, IOP Science, 1305, 012016. DOI: 10.1088/1757-899X/1305/1/012016
International Renewable Energy Agency (2024) Renewable Energy and Jobs Annual Review 2024, International Renewable Energy Agency, Abu Dhabi, and International Labour Organization, Geneva.
Jobin, P., Caron, J. and Rochefort, L. (2014) Developing new potting mixes with Sphagnum fibers, Canadian Journal of Soil Science, 94(5), pp. 585-593.
Johnson, T. and Di Gioia, F. (2023) Spent mushroom compost as an alternative to peat-based soilless media for greenhouse potted basil production, Acta Horticulturae, 1426, pp. 317-324.
Kaur, G. and Kander, R. (2023) The Sustainability of Industrial Hemp: A Literature Review of Its Economic, Environmental, and Social Sustainability, Sustainability, 15(8), 6457. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3390/su15086457
Kennard, B. (2020) Sustainable Uses of Bracken & Wool in the Black Mountains Area: Feasibility Study. Black Mountains Land Use Partnership: Managing Resources Sustainably in the Black Mountains Sustainable Management Scheme Project. Available at: https://www.blackmountains.wales/wp-content/uploads/2021/03/Sustainable-Use-Report.pdf (Accessed: 15 February 2026).
Kingston, P., Scagel, C., Bryla, D., and Strik, B. (2020) Influence of perlite in peat- and coir-based media on vegetative growth and mineral nutrition of highbush blueberry, HortScience, 55(5), pp. 658-663.
Kisvarga, S., Farkas, D., Boronkay, G., Neményi, A. and Orlóci, L. (2022) Effects of Biostimulants in Horticulture, with Emphasis on Ornamental Plant Production, Agronomy, 12(5), 1043. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3390/agronomy12051043
Komorowska, M., Niemiec, M., Sikora, J., Gródek-Szostak, Z., Gurgulu, H., Chowaniak, M., Atilgan, A. and Neuberger, P. (2023) Evaluation of Sheep Wool as a Substrate for Hydroponic Cucumber Cultivation, Agriculture, 13(3), 554. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3390/agriculture13030554
Koseoglu, N. and Roberts, M. (2025) Supply Chain Dynamics of Moving from Peat-Based to Peat-Free Horticulture, Sustainability, 17(13), 6159. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3390/su17136159
Lavoie, J., Dunkerley, C.J., Kosatsky, T., and Dufresne, A. (2006) Exposure to aerosolized bacteria and fungi among collectors of commercial, mixed residential, recyclable and compostable waste, Science of the Total Environment, 370(1), pp. 23-28.
Lehmann, J. and Joseph, S. (2015) Biochar for Environmental Management: Science, Technology and Implementation. Second Edition. London, Routledge.
Leiber-Sauheitl, K., Bohne, H. and Böttcher, J. (2021) First Steps toward a Test Procedure to Identify Peat Substitutes for Growing Media by Means of Chemical, Physical, and Biological Material Characteristics, Horticulturae, 7, 164. DOI: 10.3390/horticulturae7070164
Li, M., Ning, W-P., Gao, T-T., Fazry, S., Othman, B.A., Najm, A.A.K., and Law, D. (2024) Rice husk ash based growing media impact on cucumber and melon growth and quality, Scientific Reports, 14, 5147. DOI: 10.1038/s41598-024-55622-4.
Litterick, A.M., Holmes, S., Frederickson-Matika, D.E. and Green, S. (2025) How safe are peat-free growing media?, Plants, People, Planet, 7(6), pp. 1684-1699.
Lu, W., Sibley, J.L., Gilliam, C.H., Bannon, J.S. and Zhang, Y. (2006) Estimation of U.S. bark generation and implications for horticultural industries, Journal of Environmental Horticulture, 24, pp. 29-34.
Macci, C., Vannucchi, F., Peruzzi, E., Doni, S., Lucchetti, S., Waska, K., Heřmánková, M., Scodellini, R., Cincinelli, A., Nicese, F.P. and Azzini, L. (2025) A low impact sediment and green waste co-compost: can it replace peat in the nursery sector?, Environment, Development and Sustainability, 27(5), pp. 10761-10788.
Macdonald, R. (2024) Site visit notes: Beadamoss, Wright Farm Produce, 19th November 2024.
Maher, M., Prasad, M. and Raviv, M. (2008) Organic soilless media components, in Raviv, M. and Lieth, J.H. (Eds.) Soilless Culture: Theory and Practice. Amsterdam: Elsevier, pp. 459–504.
Mansour, E., Loxton, C., Elias, R.M., and Ormondroyd, G.A. (2014) Assessment of health implications related to processing and use of natural wool insulation products, Environment International, 73, pp. 402-412.
Marrs, R.H. and Watt, A.S. (2006) Biological flora of the British Isles: Pteridium aquilinum (Bracken), Journal of Ecology, 94(6), pp. 1179-1206.
Marrs, R.H. and Watt, A.S. (2006) Biological Flora of the British Isles: Pteridium aquilinum (L.) Kuhn, Journal of Ecology, 94(6), pp. 1272-1321.
Mattei, P., D’Acqui, L.P., Nicese, F.P., Lazzerini, G., Masciandaro, G., Macci, C., Doni, S., Sarteschi, F., Giagnoni, L., and Renella, G. (2017) Use of phytoremediated sediments dredged in maritime port as plant nursery growing media, Journal of Environmental Management, 186, pp. 225–232.
Medina, E., Paredes, C., Pérez-Murcia, M.D., Bustamante, M.A. and Moral, R. (2009) Spent mushroom substrates as component of growing media for germination and growth of horticultural plants, Bioresource Technology, 100(18), pp. 4227–4232.
Miserez, A., Pauwels, E., Schamp, B., Reubens, B., De Nolf, W., De Nolf, L., Nelissen, V., Grunert, O., Ceusters, J., and Vancampenhout, K. (2019) The potential of management residues from heathland and forest as a growing medium constituent and possible peat alternative for containerized ornamentals, Acta Horticulturae, 1266, DOI: 10.17660/ActaHortic.2019.1266.55
Müller, A., Schmidt, J., Maiberg, V., Gehring, O., and Schikora, A. (2025) Microbial communities and substrate properties influence the fate of a human pathogen in horticultural substrates with different peat content, Frontiers in Horticulture, 4. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3389/fhort.2025.1568055
Mwangi, R.W., Mustafa, M., Kappel, N., Csambalik, L., Szabó, A. (2024) Practical applications of spent mushroom compost in cultivation and disease control of selected vegetables species, Journal of Material Cycles and Waste Management, 26, pp. 1918-1933.
Negrini, G., Ferrante, A. and Pagano, M. (2020) Performance of greenhouse tomatoes in coir-based substrates compared with peat, Acta Horticulturae, 1273, pp. 87-94.
Nemati, M.R., Fortin, J.-P., Beaulieu, C., Lemke, R., Thériault, G. and Simard, R.R. (2014) Potential use of biochar in growing media, Vadose Zone Journal, 13(10). DOI: 10.2136/vzj2014.06.0074
Nerlich, A., Karlowsky, S., Schwarz, D., Förster, N. and Dannehl, D. (2022) Soilless Tomato Production: Effects of Hemp Fiber and Rock Wool Growing Media on Yield, Secondary Metabolites, Substrate Characteristics and Greenhouse Gas Emissions Horticulturae, 8, 272. DOI: 10.3390/horticulturae8030272
Nicese, F.P., Azzini, L., Lucchetti, S., Macci, C., Vannucchi, F., Masciandari, G., Luca Pantani, O., Arfaioli, P., Imran Pathan, S., Pietramellara, G. and Manzini, J. (2024), Co-Composting of Green Waste and Dredged Sediments Can Reduce the Environmental Impact of Potted Nursery without Affecting Plant Growth, Applied Sciences, 14(4), 1538. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3390/app14041538
Nilsson, M. (2022) Biochar and hemp as peat substitutes in organic growing media: effects on nutrient availability and uptake. MSc thesis, Swedish University of Agricultural Sciences. Available at: http://urn.kb.se/resolve?urn=urn:nbn:se:slu:epsilon-s-18348 (Accessed: 24 January 2026).
Noble, R. and Roberts, S.J. (2003) A Review of the literature on eradication of plant pathogens and nematodes during composting, disease suppression and detection of plant pathogens in compost. Banbury, UK, The Waste and Resources Action Plan. Available at: https://www.r-e-a.net/wp-content/uploads/2023/05/LitReviewPlantPathogensNematodes.pdf (Accessed: 16 February 2026).
Noble, R. and Roberts, S.J. (2004) Eradication of plant pathogens and nematodes during composting: a review, Plant Pathology, 53(5), pp. 548–568.
Omar, N.F., Kasim, N.N., Zainal Abidin, S.Z., Ali, S.N., and Abdul, A. (2023) The impact of rice husk ash (RHA) as soilless growing medium on Sawi Caixin Giant (Brassica parachinensis) growth performance, International Journal of Innovation and Industrial Revolution, 5(13), pp. 49-64.
Othman, N.Z., Sarjuni, M.N.H., Rosli, M.A., Nadri, M.H., Yeng, L.H., Ying, O.P., and Sarmidi, M.R. (2020) Spent Mushroom Substrate as Biofertilizer for Agriculture Application, Valorisation of Agro-industrial Residues – Volume I: Biological Approaches, pp. 37-57.
Pakeman, R.J. (2023) A Rapid Evidence Review of the Implications of Not Controlling Bracken with Asulam in Scotland. Aberdeen: James Hutton Institute. DOI: 10.5281/zenodo.8011214
Pathmeswaran, P., Lokupitiya, E., Waidyarathne, K.P., and Lokupitiya, R.S. (2018) Impact of extreme weather events on coconut productivity in three climatic zones of Sri Lanka, European Journal of Agronomy, 96, pp. 47-53.
Peano, L., Loerincik, Y., Margni, M., and Rossi, V. (2012) Comparative life cycle assessment of horticultural growing media based on peat and other growing media constituents: Final report. Quantis, Switzerland.
Pearson, C., Littlewood, E., Douglas, P., Robertson, S., Gant, T.W., and Hansell, A.L. (2015) Exposures and health outcomes in relation to bioaerosol emissions from composting facilities: a systematic review of occupational and community studies, Journal of Toxicology and Environmental Health, Part B, 18(1), pp. 43-69.
Pitman, R.M. and Webber, J. (2013) The character of composted bracken and its potential as a peat replacement medium, European Journal of Horticultural Science, 78(4), pp. 145-152.
Poudel, P., Duenas, A.E.K. and Di Gioia, F. (2023) Organic waste compost and spent mushroom compost as potential growing media, Frontiers in Plant Science, 14, 1229157. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3389/fpls.2023.1229157
Prasad, R., Redmile-Gordon, M., Gush, M.B. and Griffiths, A. (2024) Characterisation of peat-free growing media, Acta Horticulturae, 1389, pp. 153-162.
Prasara-A, J., and Gheewala, S.H. (2017) Sustainable utilization of rice husk ash from power plants: A review, Journal of Cleaner Production, 167, pp. 1020-1028.
Rangel-Buitrago, N., Rizzo, A., Neal, W.J., and Mastronuzzi, G. (2023) Sediment pollution in coastal and marine environments, Marine Pollution Bulletin, 192. DOI: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.marpolbul.2023.115023
Raviv, M. (2013) Composts in Growing Media: What’s New and What’s Next? Acta Horticulturae, 982, pp. 39-52.
Renella, G. (2021) Recycling and Reuse of Sediments in Agriculture: Where Is the Problem? Sustainability, 13(4), 1648. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3390/su13041648
Renewable Energy Association (2021). A future built on renewable energy and clean technology. London: Renewable Energy Association. Available at: https://www.r-e-a.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/02/REA_Strategy_Exec_Summary_February_2021.pdf (Accessed: 7 October 2025).
Responsible Sourcing Scheme (n.d.) Responsible Sourcing Criteria. Available at: https://responsiblesourcing.org.uk/responsible-sourcing-criteria/ (Accessed: 7 February 2026).
Restrepo, A.P., García, J.G., Moral, R., Vidal, F., Pérez-Murcia, M.D., Bustamante, M.A., and Paredes, C. (2013) A comparative cost analysis for using compost derived from anaerobic digestion as a peat substitute in a commercial plant nursery, Ciencia e Investigacion Agraria, 40(2), pp. 253-264.
Robertson, S., Douglas, P., Jarvis, D., and Marczylo, E. (2019) Bioaerosol exposure from composting facilities and health outcomes in workers and in the community: A systematic review update, International Journal of Hygiene and Environmental Health, 222(3), pp. 364-386.
Robroek, B.J.M., Jassey, V.E.J., Payne, R.J., MartÍ, M., Bragazza, L., Bleeker, A., Buttler, A., Caporn, S.J.M., Dise, N.B., Kattage, J., Zajac, K., Svensson, B.H., van Ruijven, J. and Verhoeven, J.T.A. (2017) Taxonomic and functional turnover are decoupled in European peat bogs, Nature Communications, 8, 1161. DOI: https://doi.org/10.1038/s41467-017-01350-5.
Sahu, N., Parida, C. and Mishra, J. (2019) Study on health hazards of workers in coir industry, The Pharma Innovation Journal, 8(6), pp. 28-30.
Sax, M.S., and Scharenbroch, B. (2017) Assessing Alternative Organic Amendments as Horticultural Substrates for Growing Trees in Containers, Journal of Environmental Horticulture, 35 (2), pp. 66-78.
Scagel, C.F. (2003) Growth and Nutrient Use of Ericaceous Plants Grown in Media Amended with Sphagnum Moss Peat or Coir Dust, HortScience, 38(1), pp. 46-54.
Scarlat, N., Dallemand, J.-F. and Fahl, F. (2018) Biogas: Developments and perspectives in Europe, Renewable Energy: An International Journal, 129, pp. 457-472.
Schmilewski, G. (2008) The role of peat in assuring the quality of growing media, Mires and Peat, 3(2), pp. 1-8.
Schmilewski, G. (2014) Producing growing media responsibly to help sustain horticulture, Acta Horticulturae, 1034, pp. 299-306.
Schmilewski, G. and Nordzieke, B. (2019) Researched, developed and commercialized: GreenFiber, Acta Horticulturae, 1266, pp. 361-368.
Scottish Environment Protection Agency (2025b) Waste from all sources generated and managed 2023: An Official Statistics Publication for Scotland. Available at: https://data.gov.scot/sepa/waste/wfas.html (Accessed: 11 February 2026).
Sdao, A.E., Gruda, N.S. and De Lucia, B. (2025) Beyond Peat: Wood Fiber and Two Novel Organic Byproducts as Growing Media – A Systematic Review, Plants, 14(13), 1945. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3390/plants14131945
Shackley, S., Hammond, J., Gaunt, J. and Ibarrola, R. (2014) The feasibility and costs of biochar deployment in the UK, Carbon Management, 2(3), pp. 335-356.
Smith, J.L., and Lee, K. (2003) Soil as a Source of Dust and Implications for Human Health, Advances in Agronomy, 80, pp. 1-32.
Solbraa, K. (1979) Composting of bark: Different bark qualities and their uses in plant production, Meddeleser fra Norsk Institutt for Skogforskning, 34 (13), pp. 281-333.
Sonneveld, C. and Voogt, W. (2009) Plant nutrition of greenhouse crops. First edition. Dordrecht: Springer.
Snellings, R., Cizer, O., Horckmans, L., Durdziński, P.T., Dierckx, P., Neilson, P., Van Balen, K. and Vandewalle, L. (2016) Properties and pozzolanic reactivity of flash calcined dredging sediments, Applied Clay Science, 129, pp. 35-39.
Sradnick, A., Werner, M. and Körner, O. (2023) Make a choice: A rapid strategy for minimizing peat in horticultural press pots substrates using a constrained mixture design and surface response approach, PLOS ONE, 18(7), e0289320. DOI: https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0289320.
Steiner, C. and Harttung, T. (2014) Biochar as growing media additive and peat substitute, Solid Earth, 5, pp. 995-999.
Stelte, W., Reddy, N., Barsberg, S., and Sanadi, A. (2022) Coir from coconut processing waste as a raw material for applications beyond traditional uses, BioResources, 18(1), pp. 2187-2212.
Stichnothe, H. (2022) Life cycle assessment of peat for growing media and evaluation of the suitability of using the Product Environmental Footprint methodology for peat, The International Journal of Life Cycle Assessment, 27(12), pp. 1270-1282.
Sulaiman (2025) ‘Rice Husk, Rice Husk Ash, and Their Applications’, in Jawaid, M., and Parmar, B. (Eds.) Rice Husk Biomass: Processing, Properties and Applications. Singapore, Springer, pp. 43-54.
Tambone, F., Scaglia, B., D’Imporzano, G., Schievano, A., Genevini, P. and Adani, F. (2010) Assessing amendment and fertilizing properties of digestates from anaerobic digestion through a comparative study with digested sludge and compost, Chemosphere, 81(5), pp. 577-583.
Toboso-Chavero, S., Madrid-López, C., Villalba, G., Gabarrell Durany, X., Hückstädt, A.B., Finkbeiner, M. and Lehmann, A. (2021) Environmental and social life cycle assessment of growing media for urban rooftop farming, The International Journal of Life Cycle Assessment, 26(10), pp. 2085-2102.
Tozzi, F., Del Bubba, M., Petrucci, W.A., Pecchioli, S., Macci, C., Hernández García, F., Martínez Nicolás, J.J. and Giordani, E. (2020) Use of a remediated dredged marine sediment as a substrate for food crop cultivation: Sediment characterization and assessment of fruit safety and quality using strawberry as a model species of contamination transfer, Chemosphere, 238, 124651. DOI: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chemosphere.2019.124651
Vandecasteele, B., Muylle, H., De Windt, I., Van Acker, J., Ameloot, N., Moreaux, K. and Debode, J. (2018) Plant fibres for renewable growing media: reducing N drawdown and pathogens via defibration, acidification or biocontrol fungi, Journal of Cleaner Production, 203, pp. 1143–1154.
Vandecasteele, B., Hofkens, M., De Zaeytijd, J. and Melis, P. (2023) Towards environmentally sustainable growing media for strawberry cultivation: Effect of biochar and fertigation on circular use of nutrients, Agricultural Water Management, 284. DOI: 10.1016/j.agwat.2023.108361
Viancelli, A., Comelli, C., Maria Nogara, C., De Araujo, V., and Michelon, W. (2024) The impact of pesticides: Assessing residue persistence, environmental contamination, and human health risks, Journal of Toxicological Studies, 2(2), 1667. DOI: https://doi.org/10.59400/jts.v2i2.1667
Waller, P. (2012) The rise and fall of peat in UK horticulture. In: Peatlands in Balance – Proceedings of the 14th International Peat Congress, 2012, Stockholm, Sweden. International Peatland Society. Available at: https://peatlands.org/document/the-rise-and-fall-of-peat-in-uk-horticulture/ (Accessed 9 October 2025).
White, E. V., Gatersleben, B., Wyles, K. J., Murrell, G., Golding, S. E., Scarles, C., and Xu, S. (2021) Gardens and wellbeing during the first UK Covid-19 lockdown (Research Report No. 1). Available at: https://www.surrey.ac.uk/sites/default/files/2021-07/garden-report.pdf (Accessed: 8 October 2025).
Wichtmann, W., Schröder, C., and Joosten, H. (Eds.) (2016) Paludiculture – productive use of wet peatlands: Climate protection – biodiversity – regional economic benefits. Stuttgart, Germany, Schweizerbart Science Publishers.
Wissner, P., Bohne, H., Heumann, S., and Emmel, M. (2017) Plant biomass from heathland management: a possible peat substitute? Acta Horticulturae, 1168, DOI: 10.17660/ActaHortic.2017.1168.4
Woznicki, T., Kusnierek, K., Vandecasteele, B. and Sønsteby, A. (2024) Reuse of coir, peat and wood fibre in strawberry production, Frontiers in Plant Science, 14, 1307240. DOI: https://doi.org/10.3389/fpls.2023.1307240
Yadav, T.C., Singh, Y.P., Yadav, S., Singh, A. and Patle, T. (2023) Spatial variability in soil properties and site-specific management delineation using fuzzy clustering, International Journal of Plant & Soil Science, 35(6), pp. 49-78.
Yin, M., Li, X., Liu, Q. and Tang, F. (2022) Rice husk ash addition to acid red soil improves the soil property and cotton seedling growth, Scientific Reports, 12, 1704. DOI: 10.1038/s41598-022-05199-7
How to cite this publication:
Macdonald, R, Hinchcliffe, W, Elliot, M, Everett, R, Hinchcliffe, E (2025) ‘ Transition to peat-free horticulture in Scotland’, ClimateXChange. DOI https://doi.org/10.7488/era/7009
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
The appendices of this report are available in PDF from the link below. If you require them in an alternative format, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Research shows the majority of people agree that climate action is urgent and important, but few are taking the action required to meaningfully reduce their emissions (Scottish Government, 2025). ClimateXChange, on behalf of the Scottish Government, commissioned this research to better understand how communications and marketing can either support or hinder the translation of climate concern into climate action.
The research examined three target behaviours: installing a heat pump, switching to an electric vehicle (EV), and using public transport more instead of driving. This research focused on citizens who are concerned about climate change, but had not engaged in one of these three target behaviours. In order to focus on the motivational and behavioural impact of communications, participants were recruited on the basis that they reported no major economic or practical barriers to engaging with the target behaviour.
The aim was to explore how target audiences respond to different types of communication and messages prompting people to take ‘warm-up’ behaviours. Warm up behaviours are the first steps toward larger changes in how they heat their homes and travel.
Findings will be used to inform the Scottish Government’s climate communication plans, policy levers to drive behavioural change, and public engagement on climate change more broadly.
Key Findings
Moments of change drive action, not communications alone
Across all three behaviour sets, changes in personal circumstances – such as the need to replace a gas boiler or buy a new car – as well as external factors – such as a change in public transport policy – are the primary drivers of action. Communications alone are insufficient to bridge the gap between intention and meaningful contemplation or warm-up actions. The strategic role of communications should be to prime the audience to consider the overarching behaviour ahead of the next crucial moment. They can build positive attitudes and beliefs that support these behaviours as sensible, practical, and financially viable.
Social norms are critical for heat pumps and electric vehicles
For both EVs and heat pumps, shifting the audience’s perception from seeing these as potential future norms to viewing them as part of the current norm is essential. Communications should focus on driving social norms and positioning these behaviours as desirable, everyday options being chosen by people across different segments of society. Using ‘real people’ as messengers, featuring heat pumps and EVs in everyday domestic settings, and highlighting increasing popularity proved most effective. For EVs, this includes avoiding luxury framing.
Financial and practical concerns outweigh climate benefits
Although the sample participants reported a desire to do more for the climate, taking action to reduce carbon emissions was not a strong motivator of warm-up behaviours. Participants were aware that gas and oil heating and driving internal combustion engine (ICE) vehicles were significant sources of emissions, but practical and financial considerations, along with social norms, were much more effective in prompting consideration. Communicating about climate benefits works best when mentioned as co-benefits alongside more practical arguments. For EVs, avoiding overly moral climate messaging is important.
Heat pumps require education and myth-busting
Low baseline awareness and knowledge among many participants highlighted the need for communications to educate the public about heat pumps. Key messages should focus on:
Financial benefits including government grants and running cost savings such as exclusive energy tariffs for heat pump customers
Installers offering to handle retrofitting work and grant applications, reducing non-financial costs
Credibility of messenger is critical due to high levels of cynicism around government grants and the energy sector. Consistent messaging across government sources, trusted brands, consumer advice brands, and industry voices is essential. Adopting a factual, confident tone is most effective and communications should avoid futuristic framing or qualifying statements like ‘up to’.
Electric vehicles need range and infrastructure messaging
Myth-busting and prompting re-consideration of current attitudes is important for building interest in EVs. Many participants held outdated views. Key message themes to highlight included:
Improved range of current-generation EVs compared with earlier models
Increased availability of EV charging infrastructure across Scotland
Reduced up-front costs of some newer EV models
Lower running and maintenance costs versus ICE vehicles
Authentic, everyday framing using real customers as spokespeople and Scottish examples proved particularly effective. Providing interactive tools such as route planners and charging maps helps people visualise EV ownership.
Public transport requires challenging entrenched attitudes
For driving less and using public transport more, attitudes were more entrenched. Participants viewed driving as the norm and usually drove as a default action. Coordination between public transport operators and government will amplify positive stories. Communications should focus on:
Taking advantage of policy, service or infrastructure improvements to challenge negative beliefs
For more entrenched car users who seldom used public transport, promoting one-off leisure journeys as a more achievable ask than changing commuting habits
Using influencers and social media to present relatable, human examples and highlight benefits
Adopt a straightforward, factual tone; avoid over-confidence or idealised depictions
Who is this relevant for?
The actionable insights contained in this report are relevant for the Scottish Government’s climate communications teams, policy makers developing behaviour change strategies, public engagement professionals, and partner organisations including energy providers, transport operators, consumer advice bodies, and local authorities involved in delivering Scotland’s net zero ambitions.
Introduction and approach
Introduction
Quantitative survey data demonstrates an intention-action gap among the public. The majority of people agree that climate action is urgent and important, but few are taking the action required to meaningfully reduce their emissions (Scottish Climate Survey 2024). Understanding what can drive people’s transition from latent climate concern to climate action is important for informing Scottish Government climate communications and public engagement.
There is a significant evidence base on the barriers and motivators to taking climate action. However, there is a lack of in-depth research on the role of communications and marketing in influencing people to act on their latent climate concern. In particular, there is a need for actionable insight around the role of communications in relation to “moments of change” where motivation and opportunity to act are higher than usual.
ClimateXChange, on behalf of the Scottish Government, commissioned this research to better understand how communications and marketing can either support or hinder the translation of climate concern into climate action. In this context, action refers to the immediate steps, or warm-up behaviours, someone might take after seeing a climate campaign – for example, visiting a campaign website, researching renewable heating systems, or booking a test drive for an electric vehicle. The research focused on citizens who are concerned about climate change and face no major socio-economic barriers to taking meaningful action yet are not currently doing so. These warm-up behaviours were grouped according to three overarching target behaviours – installing a heat pump, switching to an EV, and using public transport more instead of driving.
The aim was to explore how target audiences respond to different types of climate communication and message framing that prompt people to take warm-up behaviours that can serve as the first steps toward larger changes in how they heat their homes and travel. Framing refers to how a particular message is presented in order to influence how it is perceived by the audience, such as by choosing which additional information is included or omitted, or by presenting the message within a narrative.
Findings from this research will be used to inform the Scottish Government’s climate communication plans, policy levers to drive behavioural change to reach mitigation and adaptation goals, and public engagement on climate change more broadly.
Approach
Our research was split into four sequential phases:
A review of existing literature and evidence to identify:
Key barriers and motivating factors related to the overarching behaviours identified.
Behavioural theories that help us to explain inaction on climate change and how these can be used to prompt change
The effect of different communications, i.e. what works and doesn’t work to motivate overarching behaviours which reduce emissions, looking at message framing and content
The findings were used to develop and refine a set of hypotheses – see Appendix A – about the potential effects of a range of message themes associated with the core behavioural areas of focus. These hypotheses were then tested with research participants.
Six online focus groups were held with 30 participants who: agreed that it is important to take climate action; are willing to take more action than they currently do; and stated that money or other practical barriers do not prevent them from taking more action.
A two-part homework task where the research participants from phase 2 were asked to:
Reflect and think about what they’d seen and discussed in the focus groups and consider how that made them feel and think about the overarching and associated warm-up behaviours
Then, a week after the first task, consider taking a warm-up action(s) – recording their experience and thoughts on what they might/would do as a result of their chosen warm-up action, and add their thoughts on a variety of communication examples.
In depth interviews with each of the research participants to probe in detail their reflections on the whole research process – on what works and what does not work by way of climate communications and other relevant marketing-related interventions in connection with each overarching behaviour and associated warm-up actions.
For full details of the methodology please see Appendix B.
Throughout the research process we used behavioural theory to help us reflect on and analyse our findings. We used the:
Stages of change model (Prochaska & DiClemente, 1983) to help us think about where participants were on their journey to adopt a behaviour / undertake a warm-up action. The stages in the model are pre-contemplation (not ready to change), contemplation (considering change), preparation (planning to change), action (making changes), maintenance (sustaining change), and termination (no longer tempted).
Theory of Planned Behaviour (Ajzen, I., 1991) to understand how different potential communications and messaging would affect participant attitudes, subjective norms and perceived behavioural norms and therefore their intention / likelihood to adopt a behaviour / undertake a warm-up action.
See Appendix D for detail on both theories.
This report sets out the findings from the primary research, informed by learnings from the literature review. Fieldwork was conducted between July and November 2025. The main research findings are presented for each set of behaviours separately – that lead to installing a heat pump, switching to an EV and using public transport more instead of driving.
Behaviour set 1: Heat pumps
Context
Product/offer
For participants, the decision to replace a heating system is generally driven by necessity rather than aspiration, with typical moments of change being the end of the current system’s lifespan, moving home to a property with an older system installed, or renovating a current property. The infrequency of deciding on a new heating system often meant that participants’ attitudes were formed based on information gathered some years ago. Typically, they had little motivation to research the topic until they approached a moment of change. In this context, a moment of change refers to an instance where a combination of external and internal factors align, making a person more receptive to marketing and communications on a particular topic. This in turn meant that some participants had last looked at home heating in-depth at a time when heat pumps were far less widely available.
Choosing a heating system is a high-involvement decision. Participants were keenly aware of the potential negative consequences of making a poor choice to replace their current system, such as higher day-to-day running costs, or greater need for maintenance and the associated cost of this. This meant that a period of information gathering and comparison was the norm in the lead-up to the final choice of heating system. In the context of looking to change behavioural norms around heat pumps, this provides a useful opportunity – if heat pumps were established as a credible option, many participants would be motivated to include them in this information search.
Viewed as a product, heat pumps were considered costly in purely financial terms, particularly in comparison to equivalent gas/oil systems. In addition, heat pumps were associated with non-financial costs which are not required for replacing a gas boiler. These were typically linked to the additional work needed to retrofit a home to a standard suitable for a heat pump. Participants who were aware of the need to retrofit tended to anticipate having to plan and research multiple tradespeople, along with general disruption to the home as a result of plumbing, heating and insulation work.
Market considerations
At present, the market for heat pumps in Scotland is at a relatively early stage. Larger brands in the energy/home heating sector (e.g. Octopus, OVO) are beginning to focus more on heat pumps in their commercial and marketing strategies. Heat pumps themselves were still considered to be a relatively niche choice, even by participants who had greater background knowledge around them.
Consumer trust in the market was an important factor, and the choice of messenger had a pronounced impact on how communications were received. Due to the recent energy pricing increases across Scotland and the wider UK, participants indicated mistrust towards the utility sector, but certain trusted brands could be an exception to this view. Similarly, some participants were wary of messaging around grants and incentives for heat pumps due to high-profile scams linked to cavity wall insulation, double glazing or solar panels which were reported widely in national UK media, for example on BBC Morning Live (2025)[1].
Social norms
With low levels of awareness and background knowledge among most of the participants, there was not a strong sense of social norm or “norm in waiting” around heat pumps. Gas boilers are a very well-established heating norm. Participants with greater knowledge tended to view heat pumps as a niche product which may suit people with sufficient financial means and a specific type of home. Meanwhile, those with lower knowledge were most likely to default to gas boilers without actively researching heat pumps if triggered to look into a new heating system.
Moments of change: where the audience was most receptive to intervention
Participants highlighted several opportunities or changes of circumstance which played an important role in prompting contemplation and action. These moments were capable of shifting participants from a pre-contemplation state where a new heating system was not being considered at all, through to contemplation and ultimately preparation.
Moments of change broadly fit into two categories: moments arising from personal changes in circumstance, and those associated with wider external factors affecting the home energy or heating markets in Scotland.
Knowledge/awareness
Across the sample, levels of self-reported understanding and knowledge of heat pumps tended to be low. Participants who had some awareness tended to lack more specific knowledge around how heat pumps worked or the benefits of having one over a gas/oil system. Participants who reported greater background knowledge on heat pumps were often people who had looked into a heating system more recently. Those with the lowest reported knowledge of heat pumps had often been using the same gas-powered heating setup for longer periods of time without seeing a need to change.
A contributing factor to this low level of background knowledge was a perceived lack of visibility and interest in both the product category in general, and heat pumps as a specific product. Few participants expected to be frequently having organic discussions about heating systems with peers, outwith the preparation/information gathering phase of making a purchase decision. Some participants were unsure whether they had seen a heat pump before, as they lacked sufficient familiarity to identify a heat pump outside a building.
“I think just lack of knowledge, like I didn’t even know it [Heat Pumps] was out there to… I just thought you got a boiler and that was it. Do you know what mean? I didn’t really think much into it until this research. So [now], it’s kind of on my radar a little bit more than it was before.” (F, 30-39, C1)
Behaviour change starting point for heat pumps
Taking the contextual information into account, most participants were at the pre-contemplation stage of the stages of change model, and had not seriously considered a heat pump. A few had reached a moment of change more recently having moved towards contemplation but ruled themselves out of further action.
At the outset of the project, pre-contemplation participants tended to feel that if they had reached a moment of change such as a boiler breakdown, they would most likely to go through the steps of researching and choosing a new gas heating system. They would not consider heat pumps as an option. This has implications for any potential communications strategy, as education and building familiarity are likely to be an important first step in driving greater uptake.
Within the pre-contemplation audience, the overall lack of knowledge around how heat pumps work meant that many had not yet formed attitudes and beliefs about their effectiveness beyond very top-level information. This means that there is an opportunity to shape attitudes towards heat pumps while also building familiarity and knowledge.
Key milestones and opportunities at a national or market level, such as more widespread adoption of heat pumps, can play a role in establishing heat pumps as an option to be considered. Participants felt that as consumers become more aware of increased heat pump uptake in their local area, this could potentially turn pre-contemplation into contemplation. Personal moments of change tended to create a greater sense of urgency than changes at a national or market level, and therefore had greater potential to motivate warm-up action, moving people from contemplation to preparation in the Stages of Change model.
Personal moments of change
Given the expense and upheaval of replacing heating systems, these personal moments of change tended to occur either at the end of an existing heating system’s lifespan, or at moments where the friction and upheaval of a large home improvement would be lessened. Examples from participants included:
Breakdown of the currently used heating system, which necessitates a replacement.
Buying a new home (particularly one with a heating system nearing the end of its lifespan or warranty) was seen as an opportune moment to upgrade a heating system, as a period of upheaval and redecorating is expected and can be planned around fitting a new system.
Deciding to renovate or significantly modify a property was also seen as a good time to consider heating upgrades and other disruptive work.
A secondary personal crucial moment, which was less likely to inspire warm-up behaviours but had a social norming effect, was seeing friends, family or neighbours getting a heat pump installed. Seeing peers modelling the overarching behaviour and potentially hearing positive word-of-mouth was mentioned by some participants, who felt this would make them more likely to consider a heat pump alongside the more familiar heating options.
External/market moments of change
Cost was one of the most important factors participants considered when making a decision to purchase a new heating system. The upfront cost of the system and associated work to install it were often compared with any potential running cost savings over the lifespan of the system. Participants tended to be keen to explore any potential cost savings. This means that any changes to government policy, utilities pricing or the pricing of heat pumps themselves would present communications opportunities to establish heat pumps as a cost-effective option:
Any improvements or changes to government financial incentives/grants (e.g. broader eligibility criteria, increased grant amount)
Any reduction in up-front heat pump costs (e.g. due to market competition)
Any changes to energy pricing which favour electricity over gas
Another set of potential future communications opportunities emerged around milestones in uptake. Publicising the increasing popularity of heat pumps in Scotland or at a more local or regional level had the potential to build a credible social norm around heat pumps, as well as countering concerns about their ability to handle colder weather. Milestones of uptake around the associated financial incentives could offer similar opportunities to present heat pumps as a popular choice, as well as creating interest for consumers wishing to avoid missing out on incentives.
Lastly, with some participants holding the view that heat pumps were a new technology which was still developing, any improvements to heat pump technology which challenge some of the negative attitudes and beliefs around them could help establish them as an option worth considering. Examples of this type of improvement in the discussions included heat pump units becoming smaller, becoming easier to install or retrofit, or becoming even more energy efficient.
Associated warm-up behaviours
In the research discussions and homework tasks, participants identified a range of warm-up behaviours which they associated with researching/deciding on a new heating system. This insight gives an indication of the target behaviours which could be modelled or encouraged in communications to encourage heat pump uptake alongside the primary call to action of switching away from gas or oil heating:
Information searching online via search engines, or increasingly via AI//Large Language Model assistants
Reading consumer advice articles or product reviews to help weigh up pros and cons
Reading news articles linked to energy prices or heating systems
Figure 1: Home Energy Scotland educational web content (participant submission)
Speaking to friends and family, especially those with a heat pump
Seeking advice from tradespeople
Engaging with other online content, such as short-form social media videos, was also mentioned by some
Message themes which had the potential to move participants towards action
The following themes were most likely to prompt participants to consider or engage in warm-up behaviours. With most participants’ starting point being pre-contemplation, the most effective messages tended to be ones which focused on building awareness of key benefits or incentives, and/or contributed to establishing heat pumps as part of the norm for home heating. We have used the Theory of Planned Behaviour (Ajzen, I., 1991) to underpin analysis and identify messages which could build intention to act through subjective norms, attitudes and perceived behavioural control.
Presenting heat pumps as an increasingly popular choice
This emerged as a key messaging theme which could underpin a successful communications strategy on heat pumps. The lack of a strong subjective norm around heat pumps presented a barrier for most participants. Findings indicated that shifting the public’s perception of heat pumps from a relatively niche solution to an option which is already popular across Scotland would be essential if greater uptake is to be achieved.
This core communications proposition was relevant at both the pre-contemplation and contemplation stages. Perceiving heat pumps as an increasingly popular choice among “people like me” made pre-contemplation participants want to learn more. Contemplation stage participants who saw heat pumps as one of the default choices tended to be motivated to seek information in more depth, comparing the benefits of heat pumps to gas or other alternatives.
Often, participants’ views on the positives of gas central heating systems were strengthened by the perception that they are effective in providing the desired level of warmth in the majority of Scottish homes. If communications can help to establish a similar level of norm around heat pumps, it may add to the credibility of other messaging around the benefits of installing one.
Communications examples which were linked to this messaging theme included:
Communications from messengers with both trust and brand recognition in the sector (such as energy providers, manufacturers of gas boilers, or local installers)
Communications which used real heat pump owners as messengers, especially when supported by images of heat pumps in everyday domestic settings
Visual depictions of heat pump uptake (such as NESTA’s “Visit a heat pump” website, which included an interactive map showing where their heat pump champions were based) helped to build a sense of local norm.
Communications example in focus: Local manufacturers
In the homework tasks, participants often gravitated towards advertising (Fig.1) from trusted local installers or prominent names in manufacturing (e.g. Worcester). These brands are associated with the current norm of gas central heating, which meant that participants who saw them appearing to embrace heat pumps as part of their offer were more receptive to the idea that heat pumps are part of a current norm. Additionally, the trust felt towards these brands was important in avoiding cynicism about the other co-benefits such as running costs or financial incentives.
Running costs were an important factor in choosing a new heating system
Figure 2: Local boiler and heat pump installer (The Edinburgh Boiler Company, 2025)
Participants were generally price sensitive when making decisions about home heating, with discussions often returning to energy costs. Cost efficiency is an important factor in forming positive or negative attitudes about heating systems, with almost all participants holding the view that a “good” heating system is one which offers value for money. This aligned with the desk review insight around the importance of pricing to both barriers and motivators (see Appendix A). The potential to save money was therefore a strong motivator for consideration, and even participants who harboured some doubts over the effectiveness of heat pumps tended to be motivated enough by potential cost savings to at least conduct some further research. A key example of this from the stimulus materials used in group discussions was Octopus Energy’s heat pump campaign, which highlighted an exclusive energy tariff for heat pump customers.
Conversely, group discussions and interviews found that financial barriers are key in determining perceived behavioural control over the decision to invest in a heat pump. Even with a positive overall attitude to heat pumps, people are unlikely to engage further if they believe they are not affordable to run day-to-day. This finding highlights a major challenge for communications around heat pumps. Current energy pricing in Scotland means that running cost savings are not guaranteed by switching to a heat pump. However, any future change in energy pricing which would enable a claim around cost savings to be made would present a significant opportunity to increase the appeal of heat pumps versus gas boilers.
Credibility of messenger was an important factor in messaging on this topic. Claims from less trusted sources, such as unfamiliar installers or energy firms with perceived low customer satisfaction, were much more likely to be met with cynicism. Many participants had a favourable view of the utility firm Octopus, which lent credibility to their claims about heat pumps and their running costs. Alternatively, trusted brands in the consumer or financial advice space such as Which? or Martin Lewis played a valuable role in shaping attitudes for those beginning to seek out information on heat pumps.
Communications examples in focus: “Real people” case studies and champions
Examples from NESTA and Home Energy Scotland, both of which opted to present real-life owners of heat pumps as their spokespeople, had the advantage of contributing to building the norm around heat pumps and also offered credible claims about running costs. They combined an approachable, confident tone with realistic imagery depicting heat pumps in domestic settings (in the case of NESTA these were often supplied by the homeowners themselves, which added to the sense of authenticity).
Figure 4: Home Energy Scotland heat pump case study / hero (Home Energy Scotland, 2025)
Figure 3: NESTA’s visit a heat pump info page & visit a heat pump online portal (Nesta, 2025)
Highlighting financial incentives and grants which subsidise up-front costs
As with the theme of lower running costs, the price-sensitive nature of home heating decisions meant that financial incentives had strong motivational potential for participants. Highlighting the availability of financial support for heat pump installations was a prevalent theme in the media reviewed during the desk review (see Appendix A). Given the higher up-front cost of heat pumps in comparison to gas boiler systems, offering to subsidise this tended to positively influence attitudes towards heat pumps, and increased participants’ perceived behavioural control by making them feel more affordable. For many participants, the potential savings offered by incentive schemes would be enough to prompt some warm-up action, even if some cynicism about other benefits of heat pumps persisted.
A related sub-theme around financial incentives was identified. Some installers at both local and national level offered to support clients with the grant process, which further reduced the non-financial cost of installing a heat pump.
This messaging theme generated a degree of cynicism, particularly around the prevalence of scams linked to government grant schemes. In interviews and group discussions, anxiety or concern about scams tended to be triggered by the tone or word choice. Participants were alert to the use of phrasing associated with a sales pitch, or the use of qualifying phrases in claims, and typically reported that this type of phrasing damaged overall trust in the message.
The credibility of the messenger themselves also had an impact on the effectiveness of grant and incentive messaging. Government agencies were trusted to be factual about the terms and conditions, although some participants had a degree of wariness about the use of qualifying phrases in some messaging. In particular, some participants felt that the prominent use of the phrase “up to” in communications about grants led to the assumption that the quoted maximum grant amount would be difficult to qualify for.
In addition, some participants found the grant amount itself to be demotivating, as they assumed that the government would not sanction a large incentive unless the overall cost of installing a heat pump was sufficiently expensive to deter consumers.
To avoid the cynical response which some communications received here, there is a need to be up-front and honest about eligibility and avoid over-use of qualifying phrases like “up to £X” or “you could save”. Findings indicated that the most effective communications approach would be to leverage credible messengers such as government agencies, consumer advice brands and trusted suppliers where possible.
“I’m not so sure about the ones that talked about grants. Now, does everybody qualify for that grant? Because often when you click on these things you’re not eligible and next minute you’ve got 40,000 emails and phone calls from companies wanting to sign you up to their solar panels and everything, so I’m always very wary of these kind of things.” (M, C1, 50-75yrs)[2]
Installers offering to take care of preparatory work
This messaging theme tended to be less effective for the pre-consideration audience. However, for participants who were at the consideration stage, it did have some potential to move them closer to warm-up action.
This theme is linked to the non-financial costs associated with heat pump installation, for example additional research and information gathering, planning retrofitting works and applying for financial support. Participants who had considered heat pumps in more depth than the pre-considerers tended to view these additional tasks as adding significant friction to the process of switching to a heat pump. Conversely, replacing their gas boiler like-for-like with another boiler was anticipated to involve less additional effort on the part of the consumer. As with the purely financial incentives, warm-up behaviours were motivated by a perceived opportunity to avoid cost, and the additional effort and time required to retrofit a property.
Challenging the existing belief that heat pumps are disruptive or difficult to install proved to be an effective message, especially when paired with a credible messenger with a link to the energy or heating industries. For some participants, the idea that a trusted organisation was willing to handle some of the administrative burden of planning and securing financial support increased their perceived behavioural control.
“I quite like the first one [Octopus] because it did everything for you. You don’t need to go in and source it. You don’t need a separate company to come in and do the electrics. Everything is done for you from start to finish.” (M, C1, 50-75yrs)
Again, trust in the messenger is an important factor in ensuring messaging was received without cynicism, as the offer had some similarities with scams (e.g. around insulation or solar panels). Having a trusted brand to underpin messaging and providing a rough figure for the overall cost of retrofitting helped reassure participants.
Communications example in focus: Octopus Cozy Heat Pump
Reducing non-financial cost was a core message and part of the communications mix used by the UK energy firm Octopus to launch their heat pump offer. The credibility of their brand was high for many participants, which contributed to an overall positive reception for their communications when tested in the group discussions. The communications mix for this effective campaign featured messages which did more of an educational job about heat pumps and their benefits in comparison to gas boilers. It also included an offer to support with grant applications and retrofitting works alongside financial savings messaging.
Figure 5: Octopus Energy heat pump ad (Octopus Energy, 2025)
“I really like the Octopus one, purely because I am an Octopus customer. I think they’re really good at what they do. And I think for the last few years, energy companies in general have got so much bad press. I would be a bit nervous about going somewhere else for a heat pump and dealing with somebody that I didn’t know.” (F, AB, 50-75yrs)
Message themes which did not move participants towards action
The following message themes were not found to be effective in prompting participants to consider heat pumps and also did not help to motivate warm-up action. In some cases, these themes have potential as supporting or educational messages, either to increase the public’s familiarity with heat pumps or to reinforce the idea that those who have made the switch made the right choice.
Highlighting the potential to increase property values by installing heat pumps
While this was considered to be a potential benefit of heat pumps by some participants, the primary issue was simply lack of awareness of this as a reason to switch to a heat pump. There was not a perceived social norm around installing heat pumps as an investment to increase property value, as no participants in group discussions had heard of people switching to a heat pump for this reason. Similarly, none of the participants were aware of any media featuring messaging which framed heat pumps as a means of increasing property value. Participants understood that in a scenario where gas heating was close to being phased out as a viable option this message would be more motivational.
These findings are enough to suggest that this message theme could be tested for motivational value again in future if heat pumps become part of the norm, but at present the benefit was too hypothetical to have a significant impact on participants’ intention and action. In some discussions, this message theme had a demotivating effect, as it prompted participants to consider other home improvements they could make for a similar outlay, and often with less disruption to the home.
Highlighting heat pumps’ greater energy efficiency in comparison to gas boilers
The key issue undermining this message theme was around the audience’s understanding of what “efficiency” meant in a home heating context. For most participants, an “energy efficient” heating system was synonymous with cost efficiency, as they think of heating their home primarily as a household utility. For those who understood the difference more clearly, energy efficiency was simply far less relevant to their day-to-day lives unless it also translated to a reduction in household bills.
Further complicating the use of this theme is the fact that many participants noted that modern gas boilers are frequently advertised as being highly “efficient”, which led them to question whether this was a unique benefit of heat pumps.
Presenting gas boilers as a technology which is being phased out
While most participants agreed with the basic premise of this message theme, they tended to deflect the need for action due to an expectation that this would take place over a long timescale. The long lifespan of the average gas boiler meant that a “wait and see” attitude was prevalent among participants who were more aware of heat pumps.
Instead of motivating action at the next crucial moment, the response in discussions was often around the idea that consumers would be sensible to make their next heating system a modern gas boiler and consider making the switch at the next moment of change after that, in the hope that technology had improved further and the up-front and daily running costs had improved by this point.
As with messaging around increasing property values, there is some value in the idea of re-testing this message in future if a larger proportion of Scottish homes have switched away from gas central heating.
Having a heat pump instead of fossil fuelled heating improves air quality at home
This message theme lacked motivational value for almost all participants due to a lack of recognition of any air quality problems caused by gas boilers. Participants were unaware of any health issues as a result of gas or oil systems. Although coal fires were occasionally mentioned as an antiquated fuel source which was associated with poor air quality, participants did not link these issues to gas heating.
Highlighting the climate benefits of heat pumps
Desk insight showed that this type of messaging was prevalent in media promoting heat pumps (see Appendix A), however the primary insight did not indicate a positive impact on intentions or action. Although a reduction in carbon emissions was seen as a positive benefit of heat pumps by most participants, it was not sufficiently motivational to serve as a core message for communications aimed at increasing heat pump uptake. Given the current context of the home heating market and wider concerns about the cost of living, price sensitivity and worries about running costs were prioritised over climate change goals.
For some participants, typically those with lower background knowledge about heat pumps, there could be a demotivating effect if climate benefits are presented as a core benefit for switching. This was because climate-friendly behaviours (e.g. electric vehicles or recycling) were associated with making sacrifices, both financially and in terms of convenience. Presenting heat pumps as primarily a choice made for climate reasons had negative connotations for these participants, who assumed that heat pumps would be a more expensive and/or less convenient product compared to gas heating.
Presenting heat pumps as “cosier” or providing more consistent warmth than gas boilers
Many participants did not fully understand this messaging theme. Similarly to messaging on air quality, the promise of “cosier” or more consistent warmth did not cut through as a strong benefit of heat pumps. This was because few participants had issues with the performance of their existing gas system in terms of providing warmth. The idea of providing affordable heat was far more salient and motivational than the idea of consistency for most participants.
Figure 6: UK Government Heat Pump Campaign (Group discussion stimulus)
How choice of messenger impacted on heat pump communications
The ideal communications approach would employ consistent messaging from a wide variety of sources with some credible connection to the home heating or home energy sectors. With levels of trust and credibility varying from one participant to the next, consistency and breadth of sources will be important if cynicism is to be avoided.
Industry sources
Credible industry sources are important, but not only for practical information on cost, performance or installation. Seeing prominent brands in the gas heating industry offering heat pumps also contributes to the sense that the norm is shifting towards heat pumps. Energy providers are an important voice in the sector, although consumer trust is highly variable between brands. They play a key role in speaking about cost and affordability, which are important factors in the decision-making process for heating systems. Heating system manufacturers were similarly credible here, as their communications were seen as an endorsement of the viability of heat pumps, helping to position them as a choice alongside gas boilers.
“It’s from Octopus Energy, isn’t it? So, it’s from a reliable energy company. It’s not from some third-party kind of thing.” (M, C1, 50-75yrs)
Government
The Scottish/UK governments, and their associated brands (e.g. Home Energy Scotland), can play a key role in educating the public about heat pumps, and especially in promoting financial support. Government communications will also have opportunities to help build the norm around heat pumps, by highlighting anywhere that they are being adopted in the public sector.
Given the need for consistent messaging across sources, there is a potential strategic communications role behind the scenes for government, in helping to coordinate and support/incentivise industry sources to promote heat pumps.
Word-of-mouth
Word of mouth recommendations are important drivers of social norms and can be deemed more trustworthy than messaging from commercial or government sources. Friends, family and tradespeople were all mentioned as key in shaping attitudes and beliefs. However, most participants would only be likely to spontaneously discuss heat pumps if they were already in the process of weighing up a decision.
News sources
Trusted news sources varied from one participant to the next, but stories highlighting benefits of heat pumps and milestones in uptake helped to build the norm. Positive media coverage is also important to counter other stories which highlight the drawbacks of heat pumps in favour of gas and other fossil fuelled systems.
Consumer organisations/influencers
Consumer organisations and influencers (such as Which? or Martin Lewis) are important sources due to their perceived impartiality and expertise. Most participants associated these channels with unbiased information and tended to consult their reviews and other content when deciding on large purchases. Homework discussions indicated that smaller micro-influencers in the home improvement space could also play a role in driving norms by modelling the overarching target behaviour and presenting heat pumps in a favourable light.
How tone impacted on heat pump communications
Participants consider buying a heat pump to be an important decision requiring careful consideration of pros and cons. Therefore, participants responded best to a factual, confident tone in communications.
Tones which were effective in promoting heat pumps
A confident tone was common throughout the commercial and government communications which were received positively. This tone tended to speak positively and authoritatively about the benefits of heat pumps, while avoiding over-promising. Celebrating and highlighting the benefits of heat pumps was not associated with cynicism, as long as a “sales pitch” tone is avoided.
Adopting a tone which presented heat pumps as established, every day or normal was also effective, especially when looking to build the norm around them or challenge the existing norm around gas heating. The more heat pumps are framed as a popular choice, or as one of the default options available to consumers, the more likely they are to be considered when a moment of change occurs.
A factual, honest and unbiased tone is also essential when making claims about heat pumps. Many participants were wary of over-promising and scams. Communications which aim to build awareness for the pre-consideration audience should aim to strike a balance between acknowledging barriers such as up-front cost and being confident about benefits.
Tones to avoid when promoting heat pumps
Due to the prevalence of mistrust and cynicism, particularly around grants and financial support, communications should avoid the use of “sales pitch” phrasing or any terms which could be associated with clickbait or misleading advertising. Participants were very alert to the use of qualifying phrases in headlines and written content, and tended to react negatively to these. Examples of this type of phrasing included terms such as “up to” or “you could save”.
“Oh, I don’t like that bit where it says, “up to £7,500”. It would put me off applying. You just know it’ll be almost impossible to actually get the full amount. It makes me wonder if I’d get anything at all!” (F, AB, 30-39yrs)
With some participants adopting a “wait and see” attitude around heat pumps, which was in effect a soft rejection of the call to action, communications should avoid an overly futuristic tone. Positioning heat pumps as new or advanced technology risks reinforcing this attitude and reducing motivation to act at the next crucial moment.
Behaviour set 2: Electric vehicles
Context
Product/offer
Participants viewed the decision to buy or lease a new car as a high-involvement decision. As with a change of home heating system, participants expected to engage in extensive information gathering as part of the process. The potential to avoid unnecessary costs or inconvenience associated with purchasing an unreliable or unsuitable car offered a significant incentive to research a purchase. This was not a decision which participants expected to make frequently, which meant that knowledge and attitudes were not always updated without reaching a moment of change and beginning the process of contemplation and preparation. This factor became apparent in initial group discussions, with some participants surprised to learn about technological improvements made to EVs in recent years. Improvements to range and battery performance were particularly effective in prompting a change of attitude.
Cars were viewed as a relatively high interest, aspirational product. Some participants drew a comparison with heat pumps to illustrate that cars, and by extension EVs, possessed a greater degree of social value. Although practical concerns remained the critical deciding factors in choosing a car, participants reported that aspiration played a role in the decision. Participants reported that they were more likely to notice and/or comment on friends, family or neighbours getting a new car. There was a sense in group discussions and interviews that the aspirational value attached to new cars could be a useful tool in promoting EVs.
Despite the aspirational and social dimensions of the decision, getting a new car was still a decision which was typically driven by necessity, with events such as breakdowns or reaching the end of a lease agreement identified as typical moments of change.
Perceptions of infrastructure also played an important role in shaping participants’ attitudes to EVs as a product. With ICE vehicles still considered the norm, perceived lack of access to charging infrastructure was an important consideration, although participants often had not researched this in depth to confirm their suspicions.
Market considerations
The market for EVs was viewed by participants as established, but still growing. ICE vehicles are still perceived as being the norm in Scotland, but EVs are not considered to be an unusual choice. In part, this was due to the increasing visibility of EVs in public and in the media.
The initial group discussions revealed that industry communications had shaped participants’ views on EVs. In particular, the prominence of luxury or higher-end brands such as Tesla in the EV sector led some participants to view EVs as a luxury/premium product, reinforcing assumptions about their higher up-front cost. Some of the stimulus materials included promotional media from EV manufacturers at a lower price point to facilitate probing around this assumption.
“I’ve always had the impression they were more expensive cars in general. Some of them look brilliant but I sort of assumed they would be too dear for our budget.” (M, C1, 40-49)
Social norms
EVs were viewed by most participants as a future norm and as a choice which was becoming increasingly popular as a replacement for ICE vehicles. While ICE remains the default choice, most participants expected these vehicles to reduce in popularity in the coming years. While this lent itself to a positive view of EVs, this belief was also associated with the idea that EVs are still technology in an early development phase. Participants tended to expect the performance of EVs to improve further in the future, as well as hoping for their price relative to ICE vehicles to reduce. These attitudes lent themselves to a “wait and see” attitude among participants, which encouraged deflection or dismissal in favour of delaying a switch to EVs.
Moments of change: where the audience was most receptive to intervention
Knowledge/awareness
At a basic level, self-reported awareness of EVs was high across the sample. As such, participants tended to have formed attitudes and beliefs about EVs based on what they had seen and experienced themselves. As cars were typically an infrequent purchase, this meant that some cynicism or negative attitudes and beliefs were linked to information gathered some years ago. Beyond having a basic understanding that they were battery-powered and had to be recharged by plugging into the electricity grid, participants tended to report less detailed knowledge around EVs. Questions tended to focus on:
Range limitations
Running costs relative to ICE vehicles
Suitability for different lifestyles and driving needs, such as those who frequently drove longer distances
Suitability for different geographic locations, especially parts of Scotland where poor driving conditions and lower temperatures are likely
Rather than being linked to battery performance in colder temperatures, this concern was often voiced by more rural participants who had experienced road closures due to snow. This led to potential “range anxiety” if the overall travel distance was increased without warning.
Behaviour change starting point for EVs
With awareness of EVs high across the sample, participants at the pre-contemplation phase of the Stages of Change model were primarily those who had ruled out the idea of buying an EV at an early stage of decision-making, rather than being simply unaware of EVs as an option. Typically, their reasons for doing so centred on either financial costs or perceived practical unsuitability. Attitudes about key barriers were often based on older information and could be out-of-date in the context of contemporary EVs. A “wait and see” attitude also often came through, as pre-contemplation audiences defaulted to petrol cars while not outwardly rejecting the idea of owning an EV in future.
The overall impact of this among pre-contemplation participants was that compared to ICE vehicles, EVs were more likely to be ruled out of the decision-making process at an earlier stage based on assumptions about their relative expense or inconvenience. Communications can potentially play an educational role in updating knowledge and challenging negative attitudes, as well as in positioning EVs as part of the current norm.
Participants who were at the contemplation stage were not likely to outright dismiss the idea of making their next car an EV. Often, these were people who had historically reached the contemplation or preparation phase before deciding against an EV. As with the pre-contemplation audience, this group may hold views about cost and performance based on outdated information which necessitates a myth-busting approach in communications. As they were more likely to have conducted some research in the past, this group tended to be more knowledgeable about EVs and were therefore more receptive to communications which highlighted the benefits of EVs in more detail.
Personal moments of change
Personal moments of change for a new car tended to be linked either to the lifespan of the current car or changes in life circumstance. For participants who preferred to finance their car through hire purchase or similar, reaching the end of a payment plan or lease agreement often triggered consideration of a new car. For those who owned a car outright, noticing more frequent or more expensive maintenance needs was often the cue to begin researching a replacement.
Some participants highlighted changes to work or life stages as moments of change. For example, having a baby or having children leave the family home could be a prompt to consider upsizing or downsizing the family car. A change in working requirements was also mentioned, with people who expected to drive more or less frequently in a new job, or who expected to be driving in different conditions were often prompted to consider a replacement.
External/market moments of change
At market/society level, key moments in the development of EV technology, uptake of EVs, and changes to pricing and financial incentives all factored in the decision-making process. Changing social norms were also a notable moment of change for attitudes and beliefs. While they were less likely than personal moments of change to prompt immediate action, participants often spoke about the positive impact of seeing more EVs and EV infrastructure in their local area. Similarly, friends and family swapping an ICE vehicle for an EV was mentioned in some discussions as a trigger for contemplation.
With perceived lack of charging infrastructure often mentioned as a barrier, becoming aware of the increasing number of charge points across Scotland had the potential to prompt contemplation. Similarly, any reduction in the up-front cost of EVs, or improvements to the various financial incentives offered by government and manufacturers had the potential to nudge participants towards finding out more.
Milestones of uptake could also serve as moments of change if highlighted in communications. Being presented with evidence that EVs are increasingly being chosen over their ICE equivalents helped to challenge the “wait and see” attitude. This also helped to position EVs as part of the current norm rather than an incoming one. A similar effect was also observed around milestones in uptake for grants and incentives by creating a “fear of missing out”.
Associated warm-up behaviours
Participants highlighted a range of warm-up behaviours which would form part of their typical preparation for buying a new car. For the most part, these did not differ significantly from what they would expect to do if researching a new ICE vehicle:
Online information searches (primarily through search engines)
Reading consumer advice and reviews (including those from specialist motorist-focused publications, e.g. Autotrader)
Word of mouth, including speaking with friends or family who own an EV, but also in some cases seeking advice from professionals (such as mechanics)
Booking a test drive was associated with being further downstream in the decision-making process as it involved more effort and therefore was typically reserved for deciding between individual models of car.
Figure 7: Arnold Clark search result page for EVs (Participant submission)
Message themes which had the potential to move participants towards action
Presenting EVs as part of the norm in Scotland
This core communications proposition was important for pre-contemplation and contemplation audiences. Challenging the perception that ICE vehicles were the norm and positioning EVs as part of this norm had a strong effect on their likelihood to engage in warm-up behaviours. The idea that “people like me” were already making the switch away from ICE vehicles played an important role in priming participants to engage in warm-up behaviours when they next reached a crucial moment. Participants who reported taking warm-up action over the course of the research often mentioned seeing more EVs in their local area or engaging with friends and family who owned one when asked about factors which influenced their action.
Communications example in focus: Volkswagen Stories
One of the most effective stimulus materials in prompting consideration and increasing the likelihood of action, was this video series produced by Volkswagen UK to promote their ID range of EVs. The videos feature real customers who made the switch to an EV and tend to focus on the benefits of EVs in everyday driving. Using the drivers themselves as spokespeople and avoiding a heavily stylised depiction of the car helped to ground the messages. One particularly impactful example featured a Scottish couple who regularly travelled between Oban and Glasgow. Participants praised the authenticity of this approach, and the use of a recognisably Scottish example of a long journey felt more memorable than simply quoting a figure to illustrate the car’s range.
Figure 8: Tom’s VW story (Volkswagen UK, 2025)
“I really liked the one that explained about the chaps that were taking people from the hospital. I just liked that it sort of gave that confidence that it could be used. It’s giving you actual real-life scenarios from a real-life situation that’s happening…the importance of their journeys as well, and they trust that car to be reliable enough to do that.” (M, C1, 25-49yrs)
If this sense of norm can be created and reinforced, it is likely to boost the credibility of other messaging as well as prompting re-consideration of previously held beliefs. For example, those in rural or semi-rural locations may be prompted to reconsider their views on range and charging infrastructure if they begin to perceive the local norm shifting towards EVs. To achieve this, communications which presented EVs in normal everyday situations, and that spotlighted people with lifestyles that did not fit with the negative view of EVs, were particularly useful.
Raising awareness of improvements to EV range
This messaging theme evidenced the importance of communications in a myth-busting role for both the pre-contemplation and contemplation audiences. One of the most frequent reasons participants gave for not choosing an EV was the belief that they would require frequent recharging in order to cover the distances the participant expected to cover. This was usually contrasted with the ability of ICE vehicles to cover large distances on a single tank of fuel. Messaging from car manufacturers included in the desk review often highlighted range as a key feature for current-generation EVs (see Appendix A).
As cars were an infrequent purchase, discussions often revealed that participants had based this view on information which had been available the last time they reached a crucial moment. Frequently, this meant that participants were surprised to learn how far contemporary EVs are able to travel on a single battery charge.
“I didn’t realise you could probably get to Glasgow and maybe back on some of the newer ones. For me that’s something I’d be interested in finding out a bit more about.” (F, 50-59, AB)
Communications example in focus: Which? online EV quiz
This interactive advice resource from the consumer advice brand Which? was presented as a quiz. Users answered a short series of questions about their living circumstances and driving habits and received tailored advice on whether an EV would be a viable choice for them. This medium was useful in prompting participants to revisit assumptions about the range of EVs, as well as prompting some contemplation about the change of habit required to keep an EV charged up in contrast to their existing habits around filling up at a petrol station. The brand credibility of Which? as a perceived neutral party helped to foster trust in the advice given. It was possible for users to receive advice that recommended against buying an EV, which could be demotivational. However, some participants noted that the fact this was a possible outcome added to the sense of impartiality.
Figure 9: Which? EV feature and quiz (Which?, 2025)
Successfully challenging the perception of low range reduced the impact of other barriers. Based on this message, participants reported that the perceived lack of charging infrastructure, and the “hassle” associated with expecting to re-charge an EV more often than an ICE vehicle would need refuelled, were less of a concern. Likewise, as low range was associated with the belief EVs were a technology that was still in development, myth-busting on range helped to dispel the “wait and see” attitude.
Linked to this wider theme, some communications examples which encouraged participants to think about the distance required to cover a single week of average driving helped to re-position the range of EVs as sufficient for everyday needs.
Highlighting EVs with lower up-front costs
This messaging theme was effective at both the pre-contemplation and contemplation stages, as it challenged the belief that EVs were a premium product with a high up-front price. Challenging this view was essential to moving the pre-contemplation audience towards contemplation, as perceived high up-front costs tended to encourage dismissal early in the decision-making journey. For those who were contemplating an EV, being made aware of the options at lower price points increased their perceived behavioural control and encouraged further research to explore their options further.
This core communications proposition also has the potential to increase the sense of EVs as the incoming norm. The perception of EVs as a high-end product was in part linked to the strong impact of brands such as Tesla in popularising earlier generations of EVs. In contrast, promotional communications for more affordable EV models often focus significantly on price. For participants, seeing a wider variety of manufacturers, including mid-market or cheaper brands, helps to drive the idea that EVs are becoming increasingly popular across society rather than just for an affluent subset of the population.
Raising awareness of improvements to charging infrastructure and performance
This theme focuses on drawing attention to the increasing proliferation of public EV charging across Scotland. A sub-theme is around raising awareness of the increased availability of rapid charging. The impact of this was similar to messaging around range, prompting participants to revisit their beliefs about whether owning an EV would be a practical choice over an ICE vehicle.
For the pre-contemplation audience, the benefits of this messaging theme lie in reducing the risk of rejecting EVs as an option altogether. Participants who felt that public chargers were easily available locally tended to be more receptive to the idea of considering an EV for their next car. Additionally, some of the follow-up interviews indicated that discussions on the topic had primed participants to notice charging infrastructure in their local area, reinforcing the idea that EVs were part of the wider norm.Interactive online tools proved to be an impactful way to communicate this message to the contemplation audience, largely because they encouraged participants to reconsider beliefs about local infrastructure. Urban residents assume public chargers will be busy, while rural residents assume there will be few chargers nearby. Visually showing the number of available chargers on a map often prompted participants to change their view. Likewise, case studies and/or “real people” as spokespeople in communications added a sense of local authenticity to messaging which highlighted access to charge points.
“I imagine peak time in the Highlands it would be tough to get a space to charge. If you’re on the North Coast 500 basically any time between March and October, it’s just going to be constant [public chargers in use].” (F, 40-49, C1)
An important sub-theme linked to this topic was the need to explain how EV charging works to an audience who are familiar with petrol infrastructure and its associated habits. Participants tended to assume that public chargers would be a significant part of meeting their charging needs. Explaining that for many EV owners, home charging is the primary source of energy, with public chargers acting as a top-up for longer journeys or busy moments will be important to reduce concern about access to infrastructure.
Communications example in focus: ChargePlace Scotland
This interactive route planner allows users to plan journeys and check the availability of public chargers across Scotland. It shows the location of charging points and also uses a traffic light system to indicate which chargers are in use in real time. For participants who had reached the contemplation stage, this tool helped to build their sense of familiarity with local infrastructure, reducing “range anxiety” and also prompting them to plan out the journeys they might expect to make.
Figure 11: ChargePlace Scotland map
Highlighting financial incentives/grants
Although less impactful than range, infrastructure and cost, the availability of financial incentives was often sufficient to generate some interest among participants. This was associated with a specific warm-up behaviour. Rather than being linked directly with intention to purchase an EV, participants often reported that, as a result of communications focused on grants, their warm-up behaviour began and ended with a quick check of eligibility.
Similarly to messaging about lower than expected retail prices, there is potential for this message theme to increase perceived behavioural control by lowering the expected up-front cost of an EV.
Figure 12: BBC News article highlighting EV grant scheme (Group discussion stimulus)
There was a potential drawback to this core communications proposition linked to participants’ assumptions about why a government incentive would be deemed necessary. As with similar messaging on heat pumps, some participants took the presence of a financial incentive as confirmation that the up-front cost of an EV would be off-putting, reinforcing one of the main barriers to adoption.
“My first thought there is, if they’re offering you something like three grand off the price of a new electric car, how much is it in the first place?” (M, 50-59, C1)
As a sub-theme, some communications around EVs specifically highlighted grants or other incentives towards installing home charge points. Incentives focused on home charging tended to be received more positively than larger incentives which subsidised the cost of the car itself. This was due to participants who were sceptical about a larger incentive believing that that they were more likely to qualify for a smaller incentive.
Messaging which highlights growing uptake of financial incentives to buy an EV can also help to build the overall sense of social norm around EV ownership.
One further risk of this core communications proposition was linked to eligibility. Some participants who took action during the research project were disheartened to learn that they did not meet the criteria for a grant. This tended to reduce their motivation to pursue further information-gathering on EVs. Effective targeting and clear communication on criteria will be required to mitigate this.
Highlighting lower running/maintenance costs versus ICE vehicles
This message was more relevant to those at the contemplation stage, as maintenance and running costs tended not to be an important issue in comparison to range, infrastructure and cost. The theme still had some value as a sub-message for pre-contemplation participants, as it helped to position EVs as an advantageous choice and added to the list of potential benefits. As with other financial message themes, the potential to save money was often enough to merit a quick initial search, even for those who were still unconvinced by other benefits.
For those actively comparing ICE to EVs, reduced running costs presented an attractive proposition which felt worth looking into. Participants tended to associate the idea of running costs with potentially paying less tax, spending less on maintenance, or paying less per mile travelled in comparison to an ICE vehicle. Where EVs feel like the more affordable choice day-to-day, perceived behavioural control was likely to increase. Participants who felt EVs might offer lower day-to-day costs often felt that this could justify spending more up front. For participants with negative experiences around reliability in an ICE car, this was a strong argument to consider an EV.
The most effective media for this message tended to be more long-form and written content, including articles from consumer organisations or reviews from car magazines/sites. Word of mouth was also highly valuable here, and participants reported that the experiences and views of other EV drivers or mechanics were potentially influential.
“I was doing a bit of reading, and it seems that you can get a tariff for your energy bills that makes it cheaper to charge your car up overnight. I still don’t know if that would actually add up for me, but it’s food for thought.” (M, C1, 30-39yrs)
Message themes which did not move participants towards action
Presenting EVs as advanced/superior technology in comparison to ICE vehicles
While the idea of a better driving experience and owning the latest technology was positive for participants, it did not tend to prompt changes to attitudes or behaviour. The key flaw in this core communications proposition was its lack of specificity. Without specifically addressing their negative attitudes and beliefs around cost, range and infrastructure, there was not enough to convince participants to re-evaluate their existing views.
Focusing on climate benefits of EV ownership
Participants reported that this message theme alone was not enough to overcome their reservations about financial and practical factors. While most participants did not reject the idea entirely, climate benefits fit best as a co-benefit which could help reinforce the decision to buy an EV once it had already been made.
In some discussions, there was a degree of cynicism around the environmental credentials of EVs, for example about the climate impacts of the wider EV supply chain.
“We’d all love to have an electric car and do our bit for the climate, but when there’s expenses elsewhere maybe a big cost on a car isn’t top priority.” (M, C1, 30-39yrs)
Highlighting potential improved local air quality from EV ownership
This messaging theme lacked perceived relevance for most participants. There was a tendency not to recognise air quality in Scotland as an issue requiring significant action. This was particularly true for participants living in rural or semi-rural areas. As participants’ main front-of-mind concerns around EV ownership were financial and practical, improved air quality was perceived as a minor co-benefit at best.
“It’s like when they started adding Low Emission Zones in Edinburgh. I had to change my car as well, but I don’t see the effect that it’s actually had on the air, it still seems the same to me!” (M, C2, 30-39yrs)
Presenting ICE cars as likely to be phased out in the coming years
While this message generally felt credible to participants, it was not sufficient to prompt contemplation or warm-up action. The credibility of the messaging was reinforced by recent policy changes, such as the introduction of low emission zones in large cities. However, participants did not anticipate ICE vehicles to become significantly less viable in the short-term. Coupled with the long period expected between car purchases, this theme was associated with the “wait and see” attitude for most participants, reinforcing the idea that delaying the switch to an EV was the best course of action.
It’s fair to say [petrol] is on the way out. As it stands though, I think it’s not likely my next car will be electric. Maybe the one after that? (M, C2, 30-39yrs)
How choice of messenger impacted on EV communications
Given the importance of establishing a social norm around EVs, consistent messaging across a diverse mix of sources will be required. Additionally, the need for education or myth-busting to update and challenge existing attitudes around EVs means that messengers with a reputation for fairness and balance will be particularly useful.
Industry sources
One of the most important factors in driving the perceived social norm around EVs at a national level will be the visibility and credibility of recognised brands in the automobile industry. Seeing major manufacturers promoting EV models alongside or instead of ICE models was interpreted by participants as a strong signal that EVs are a popular and viable choice. Messaging from car manufacturers increasingly frames EVs as an option rather than a special category. In addition, the increased presence of mid-market and more affordable brands in the EV market is likely to help challenge the perception of EVs as a luxury item.
Consumer organisations/influencers
Both general (e.g. Which?) and specialist car review brands (e.g. Autotrader, What Car) were frequently mentioned in discussions and interviews. For many participants, they are an essential part of the information search for those considering a new car. This gives them an important role in shaping opinion, driving norms, and educating their audience.
Online social media influencers can play a similar role. Some participants highlighted this in the homework tasks. In particular, content which emphasised the normality of EV ownership or offered insight on the day-to-day running of an EV helped to prompt deeper consideration and normalise the idea of owning an EV.
Word of mouth
Participants highlighted the importance of personal networks in shaping their decision on which car to buy. Some participants reported a positive recommendation from a friend or relative as having had a strong motivational effect, as they felt they could be trusted to honestly report on the advantages and drawbacks of owning an EV. Similarly, some participants mentioned asking mechanics, taxi drivers or other professionals about the reliability and costs of EVs as a way of tapping into their greater experience.
Government
Government communications around EVs can play a key role in education, myth-busting and in drawing attention to policy changes or milestones of uptake that can serve as a crucial moment. Government also has a potential role in amplifying any positive stories about grants/incentives, or improvements to infrastructure which reduce the friction of EV ownership.
News sources/PR
Mainstream news media was highlighted as a useful channel for reinforcing norms or introducing narratives which counter negative attitudes around EVs. For example, articles which highlight milestones of uptake or improvements to EV technology were potentially useful in shaping a more positive view of EVs in the general public.
How tone impacted on EV communications
Tones which were effective in promoting EVs
Many of the advertising and promotional materials from EV manufacturers which were well received adopted a confident tone, presenting their product as stylish and effective. For participants, this matched their expectations from car advertising in general, which contributed to the sense that EVs are part of the norm. Likewise, an aspirational tone which depicts EVs as a desirable product with social as well as practical value could be similarly effective in the specific context of advertising, especially when coupled with messaging which highlights affordability.
Adopting a more overtly “everyday” tone was also an effective choice. Putting the spotlight on real people or presenting EVs in straightforward, relatable situations was a useful way to reinforce the norm. Visually depicting how EVs can fit into a typical person’s life helped to prime participants to consider their own driving habits and whether they would be compatible. Communications which included a recognisably Scottish example were particularly effective.
For communications focusing more on an educational or myth-busting role, participants reacted positively to a reassuring tone, which felt like a good fit for the content.
Tones which were less effective in promoting EVs
Although higher end car manufacturers often emphasise luxury and advanced technology, this tone did not suit a wider audience. It risks reinforcing the belief that EVs are prohibitively expensive or only suitable for an affluent subset of the population.
Tones which focused more on the morality or ethics of EVs using a climate change framing were less effective in prompting action or encouraging participants to re-think their existing views. Participants were all aware that fossil fuels are detrimental to the environment, and that EVs are a way to reduce emissions. This led to communications being perceived as “preachy” or patronising by some participants.
Behaviour set 3: Drive less/use public transport
Context
Product/offer
In contrast to the previous two overarching behaviours considered as part of this research, reducing private car use and making more extensive use of public transport requires a change in everyday habit as opposed to an infrequent, one-off decision. For participants, this tended to seem like a larger, more complex call to action, as they had to consider how to adapt to and maintain the new behaviour.
Broadly, participants outlined two main contexts for driving less and using public transport more: commuting and leisure travel. For both, participants tended to favour reliability, convenience and value for money. Commuting tended to be viewed as more stressful, with greater time pressure than leisure travel. The decision here was often dominated by participants’ attitudes and beliefs towards the public transport offer in their immediate area. The perceived quality and value for money of public transport varied considerably between areas. Levels of service provision and infrastructure also significantly differ depending on area of residence, so these attitudinal barriers were often linked to practical barriers.
The key benefits highlighted in the communications promoting public transport which were used in the research stimulus include:
Additional free time gained versus having to concentrate on driving
Avoiding the inconveniences of driving such as parking and heavy traffic
The environmental benefits of choosing public transport
Most participants tended to have already considered the public transport offer and had formed a preference for travelling by car instead. Often, this meant their driving habits were engrained, and they tended to have a positive view of driving, perceiving it to offer a greater level of door-to-door convenience and better value for money than public transport.
Knowledge/awareness
Knowledge and lived experience of using public transport was ubiquitous across the sample. This meant that participants tended to hold well-established attitudes and beliefs, which were often based on their personal experiences of using local bus or train services. Communications promoting public transport use instead of driving face a considerable challenge in shifting these attitudes without being able to evidence material change or improvements to the services themselves.
Market considerations
The public transport sector in Scotland is highly developed. Participants had high awareness of both nationally and locally relevant providers. Often, public transport operators have an effective monopoly on particular routes or areas. This in turn means that their reputation and credibility have a strong influence on local people’s attitudes towards reliability, convenience and value for money.
Overall, participants tended to report low levels of trust in public transport providers and often had an unfavourable opinion of their services. The recruitment criteria for this research offers a potential explanation for the high degree of reported cynicism around public transport. Participants were recruited on the basis that there were no significant practical or financial barriers to using public transport more than they already did. This likely led to a sample who opted not to use public transport based on attitudes and beliefs. As a sub-audience, their views pose a challenge for communications promoting the benefits of public transport.
Social norms
While use of public transport is already part of the social norm across Scotland, private car travel is more prevalent and normalised. The degree to which public transport is part of the norm varies regionally, with reliance on public transport often considered less normal in rural or semi-rural areas. In some cases, participants who had moved between rural and urban environments identified a link between the perceived level of availability and service coverage and the prevailing social norm of using public transport.
“When I used to stay in Glasgow as a student, I would use the bus all the time, but now I’m back up in Inverness I don’t think they’re nearly as good, so most people I know don’t bother.” (M, C2, 30-39)
Behaviour change starting point for driving less and using public transport more.
Participants who were at the pre-contemplation stage for driving less tended to be people who held well-established negative attitudes about the quality and value of their local public transport offer, while also having a positive view on the relative convenience and value for money of travelling by car. This meant they defaulted to driving when planning a journey and were likely to dismiss the idea of travelling by public transport without much consideration. Consequently, the communications focus for this audience has to be on challenging existing attitudes and beliefs in order to prompt a re-evaluation of the benefits of public transport. Policy or infrastructure changes often provided the best opportunities to do this.
For participants who do contemplate reducing their driving in favour of public transport, the challenge is more around supporting the change of habit. Often, participants in this group believed that they already used public transport as often as it makes sense for them to do. Highlighting new ways to use public transport, especially for leisure journeys, offered a potential route to move them from contemplation to preparation.
Moments of change: where the audience was most receptive to intervention
Knowledge/awareness
Knowledge and lived experience of using public transport was ubiquitous across the sample. This meant that participants tended to hold well-established attitudes and beliefs, which were often based on their personal experiences of using local bus or train services. Communications promoting public transport use instead of driving face a considerable challenge in shifting these attitudes without being able to evidence material change or improvements to the services themselves.
Behaviour change starting point for driving less and using public transport more.
Participants who were at the pre-contemplation stage for driving less tended to be people who held well-established negative attitudes about the quality and value of their local public transport offer, while also having a positive view on the relative convenience and value for money of travelling by car. This meant they defaulted to driving when planning a journey and were more likely to dismiss the idea of travelling by public transport without much consideration. Consequently, the communications focus for this audience has to be on challenging existing attitudes and beliefs in order to prompt a re-evaluation of the benefits of public transport. Policy or infrastructure changes often provided the best opportunities to do this.
For participants who do contemplate reducing their driving in favour of public transport, the challenge is more around supporting the change of habit. Often, participants in this group believed that they already used public transport as often as it makes sense for them to do. Highlighting new ways to use public transport, especially for one-off leisure journeys, offered a potential route to move them from contemplation to preparation.
Personal moments of change
At a personal level, opportunities to swap driving for public transport were often prompted by changing work or study requirements. As a change of job/study location means having to plan out a new commute and a potential change of daily routine, it offers a moment where existing habits must change regardless of the mode of transport chosen. Moving house offered a similar moment of upheaval where new habits are required. For both of these examples, the potential to motivate action on driving less was increased if the new location was perceived as having better public transport links than the old location.
Another key moment of change for participants was linked to eligibility for discounts. Reaching milestones associated with national or local discount schemes (e.g. an older person’s bus pass, or student discounts) typically prompted participants to engage in warm-up behaviours to explore the potential savings.
“I’ve been thinking about my daughter’s situation, going to university, and rather than taking the car, because she’s under 22, they get, like, free buses. So that’s a massive encouragement for her. And if she misses the bus, she’ll often get the train, and them cutting the peak fares, that’s made a big difference to the cost as well.” (F, 50-59, C1)
External/market moments of change
Negative attitudes about public transport among participants were typically based on perceptions of poor reliability, lack of service in the local area, or low value for money. This meant that any improvements to infrastructure or service, and any changes to policy which made pricing more affordable, afforded crucial opportunities to challenge these attitudes. Where communications were able to frame their messaging around a significant change like this, even the more cynical participants were likely to engage in some warm-up behaviours.
Associated warm-up behaviours
Participants reported a range of warm-up behaviours associated with journey planning, which were essential to use of public transport regardless of whether they were planning a one-off leisure journey or considering a change of commute. These included:
Online information searches using search engines and increasingly the use of AI assistants
Route planning through map applications on smartphones or websites
Route planning through public transport operators’ apps or websites
Message themes which had the potential to move participants towards action
Challenging existing beliefs about public transport services
As participants at both the pre-contemplation and contemplation stages held at least some negative attitudes and beliefs towards public transport, communications which were able to prompt a re-evaluation of views were crucial. Perceived behavioural control was often low, especially for participants living in places that they believed to be poorly served by public transport. These participants reported that becoming aware of service improvements, such as additional routes or more frequent services, could prompt them to re-consider.
Public transport was widely believed to offer worse value for money than private car travel, meaning it is necessary to challenge this belief by highlighting value for money wherever possible e.g. through discount cards, price promotions, changes to fare policy. Participants tended to assume they were aware of the current options for discounts and savings, which meant that they were unlikely to engage in warm-up actions linked to researching pricing without becoming aware of new discounts or changes to existing pricing structure. An example of this type of messaging which proved effective was ScotRail’s announcement of the removal of peak time rail fares.
Without material changes or improvements to frame messaging, public transport brands may struggle to challenge negative attitudes directly due to trust issues, with bus services in particular tending to have a low level of public trust. Some of the more human-focused social media content which was used as stimulus proved to be more effective at softening negative views on public transport than direct communications from public transport operators.
In contrast, participants tended to reject or dismiss claims which were not backed by a policy change (e.g. simply stating that public transport offered good value rather than highlighting a discount or price change). For many participants, the ScotRail example was one of the few communications pieces which was sufficient to prompt warm-up action by itself, although there remained some cynicism around other factors such as reliability and convenience.
“[ScotRail] actually have a calculator that I used to see how much I could potentially save by taking the train, so yeah, I did take action when I saw this” (F, 30-39, C1)
Communications example in focus: ScotRail peak fares announcements
Participants were shown several pieces of communication promoting ScotRail’s pricing changes at peak times, including promotional videos and PR/news headlines. The effectiveness of these communications lay in offering a straightforward, factual piece of information which challenged an existing negative attitude about value for money. Communications included examples of the money which could be saved travelling on some of Scotland’s busiest routes at peak times, which generated interest among participants. The ScotRail website featured a price calculator tool which was used by some participants in the homework tasks to explore the potential cost of commuting by rail.
Figure 14: ScotRail price change (ScotRail, 2025)
Highlighting improvements to public transport policy, infrastructure, or service
This messaging theme was closely related to the previous theme around challenging existing beliefs. With participants’ views often deeply entrenched and based on prior experience, they were most receptive when confronted with a clear positive change to the public transport offer.
From a communications strategy perspective, the drawback to this theme is the fact that it requires a change to occur in order to provide a compelling reason to engage with the message. Improvements which have the potential to prompt re-consideration for people who have negative views about value for money, reliability or service coverage should be treated as a major opportunity. Coordination with public transport operators and colleagues in local or national government will be important to ensure these opportunities are used to their fullest advantage.
The type of changes or improvements which participants identified as likely to prompt a re-think of their current views included:
The announcement of new bus, train or cycle routes in their local area
A change of bus operator in contexts where participants held a strongly negative view of the current operator
Changes to timetables or schedules which allowed for more frequent journeys, faster journey times, or extended operating hours
The announcement of new discount schemes, price promotions or similar
“I kind of have to drive to work, where I work in an industrial estate. I think it’s about two buses to get there, so it’s obviously less convenient. So really the push for myself to get to work via public transport is obviously less. But I think with the peak fares going, it’d be nice to go down to Edinburgh or Glasgow via the train. I always end up driving because the cost of the train tickets, it’s just really so expensive. So, yeah, peak fares going would really appeal to me” (F, 30-39, C1)
Focusing on leisure travel and “one journey at a time”
The effectiveness of this messaging theme lay in avoiding the deflection and dismissal associated with changing daily driving habits and instead focusing on encouraging participants to choose alternatives to private car travel when planning one-off journeys, especially leisure trips. For an entrenched driving audience, the idea of taking occasional leisure trips by train was a much smaller ask in comparison to replacing daily journeys to and from work, and was also something many participants had not considered doing for some time.
Communications which featured this theme tended to meet with less resistance than those proposing a change of habit. Participants were more likely to report warm-up behaviours as a result, helping to normalise greater use of the public transport. For those with entrenched negative views based on past experiences of public transport, this approach offered an opportunity to challenge these beliefs through new experiences.
One-off leisure travel was a more accessible call-to-action than commuting, as participants felt that the more infrequent occasional nature and lack of time pressure reduced the impact of barriers like perceived low reliability or cost. Some participants also engaged positively with the added value offered by using public transport to get to and from social or cultural events. For example, not having to drive home at night, or being able to drink alcohol at a concert.
Communications example in focus: Instagram influencer @thechaoticscot
This example highlighted the potential of travel influencers to encourage their audience to use public transport more and drive less. The example tested with participants featured a leisure trip to Rosslyn Chapel which involved multiple journey legs. Presented in a personable, relatable vlog style, the influencer highlighted the value for money and convenience of public transport and combined travel advice with recommendations for food, drink and attractions. The inclusion of recognisable Scottish landmarks and public transport brands often prompted consideration of similar leisure trips among participants.
Figure 15: The Chaotic Scot, 2025
Highlighting the additional free time gained by using public transport instead of driving
This messaging theme was less effective for the pre-contemplation audience, but participants who were already at the point of contemplating more use of public transport found it to be encouraging. It was prevalent in messaging aimed at commuters by rail and bus operators in the desk insight (see Appendix A). For many participants, framing the journey itself as free time was a novel benefit which they had not considered before.
The main flaw in this messaging theme was that while it had the potential to build positive attitudes towards public transport, it did not directly address the major barriers of perceived low value for money, reliability and convenience. This meant those with low perceived behavioural control (e.g. people who believed they could not realistically make more use of public transport) were likely to reject messaging along this theme.
In addition, participants tended to associate the benefit of free time more with rail travel than bus travel, as buses tended to be perceived as more crowded and less relaxing than rail.
“I do sort of like the idea of getting time back to do your own thing, you could check a few emails in the morning and stuff like that.” (M, AB, 25-49yrs)
Message themes which did not move participants towards action
Re-framing the costs of car ownership to include maintenance and other bills
Some communications examples sought to prompt re-evaluation of the perceived value for money offered by private car travel (see Appendix A). When comparing costs between driving and public transport, participants tended to focus on fuel costs for their car, which often compared unfavourably with the price of an equivalent bus or train ticket. This messaging theme aimed to re-frame the price comparison so that it accounted for a wider range of costs associated with owning and running a private car, such as insurance, tax, maintenance and parking.
While participants acknowledged the idea that there were other costs beyond fuel, this core communications proposition was not particularly motivating. This was linked to the perceived sunk costs of car ownership, as participants who were very unlikely to give up owning a car would still have to pay road tax, monthly car payments and maintenance costs even if they decided to make greater use of public transport.
Some participants also brought up the idea of car sharing in response to this, as multiple people sharing the fuel cost of a single journey often represented a considerable cost saving, further increasing the perceived value of driving versus buying individual tickets on public transport.
Highlighting the drawbacks of private car use
This messaging theme focused on highlighting some of the inconvenient or stressful aspects of private car travel, which have often become normalised and accepted among habitual drivers. While this type of messaging was relatable and prompted some discussion among participants, it was not strongly motivational. This was due to the lack of a positive case for public transport as an alternative.
The overall effect of highlighting the drawbacks of car use was to prompt reflection on the stresses and problems of travel in general, especially in a commuting context. Some participants felt that this messaging theme had greater potential as a supporting message or sub-theme paired with messaging which highlighted the benefits of public transport.
There was also some outright rejection of messaging which presented public transport as inherently less stressful than travelling by car. Participants who had negative views of the reliability of public transport often highlighted the stress of late or cancelled services. Buses were also specifically mentioned by participants who associated them with stressful or negative experiences, typically the behaviour of fellow passengers.
“[The FirstBus ad] is quite fun and I like that. But if you’ve ever been on a FirstBus in Glasgow when it’s full of school kids I don’t think you’d say that’s less stressful than driving! (F, 50-59, C1)
Highlighting climate change benefits of reducing car use
While the basic premise behind this core communications proposition was not rejected outright, participants tended to report little motivation to engage in warm-up actions based on communicating climate benefits alone. There was also little impact on attitudes, due to a perceived lack of new information. Participants generally felt that they were already aware of the emissions they were generating by driving, but without a compelling case for the practical and financial advantages of public transport, this knowledge was not sufficient to prompt a change in behaviour.
Figure 16: FirstBus campaign in Glasgow which focused on emissions (Participant submission)
A few participants in the group discussions were defensive on this issue and tended to point out the use of “dirty” fuels in public transport, especially diesel for trains or buses. Highlighting the increasing prevalence of electric buses and trains could help to minimise deflection based on this point.
Highlighting the ease of journey planning using digital tools
This was a proposition which was tested as a way to highlight the convenience of modern public transport. Some of the desk review media examples focused on the ease of use of booking and planning software as a core part of their proposition (see Appendix A). Participants agreed that the widespread adoption of map and journey planning applications on smartphones had made planning easier. However, with almost all participants reporting a high level of familiarity with digital journey planning tools, messaging which focused on this did not present a new, compelling argument to revisit public transport.
Given the familiarity of map and journey planning applications, this was highlighted as one of the easiest and most accessible warm-up actions for public transport use. Participants therefore tended to feel this theme was better suited to being framed as a call to action, rather than a benefit of public transport.
How choice of messenger impacted on communications promoting driving less and using public transport
Industry sources
Although participants often reported low levels of trust towards prominent public transport brands, they remain a key messenger for information about the services they provide. In particular, there was appetite from participants to learn about any improvements to services, which would enable public transport brands to challenge the perception of unreliability, inconvenience and/or poor value for money.
Given the importance of leisure travel as a more achievable call to action for participants, there is also a role here for messengers from linked industries (e.g. hospitality, entertainment). These messengers can help to frame public transport as a default way to get to and from events, reinforcing the idea of leisure travel as a “soft launch” for driving less overall.
Influencers/social media
This type of messenger stood out in the research as a particularly effective option for highlighting the benefits of public transport in a relatable way. The ability of influencers to add a human face and story as a framing device allowed them to circumvent cynicism about public transport. The use of vlogs and similar “real life” techniques helped to model the overarching target behaviour and allowed benefits to be highlighted as part of a lifestyle, with public transport framed as a positive choice.
Government
As material improvements to services and pricing were the most effective framing for a challenge to negative attitudes, government sources are likely to play an important role in communications to encourage more use of public transport. Government messengers were credible sources of information and can help to amplify and highlight any positive stories which have the potential to prompt a re-evaluation of the benefits of public transport.
News sources/PR
Trusted news sources can play a similar role to government, as a channel which allows people to be made aware of positive changes to the public transport offer. Given some participants’ cynicism towards messages which came directly from public transport brands, using media outlets to amplify messaging also has the advantage of presenting information from a neutral third party.
How tone impacted on communications promoting driving less and using public transport
Tones which were effective in promoting driving less and using public transport
Communications seeking to take advantage of improvements to policy or infrastructure to challenge attitudes on public transport were best suited to a factual, straightforward tone. While projecting confidence was important, it was equally important to avoid relying on unqualified claims to minimise cynicism.
For less factual communications, such as social media influencer content, the most effective tone was approachable, confident and inspiring. The idea of trying something new with public transport was one of the most compelling ways to introduce leisure travel to participants. The approachable style used by travel vloggers helped to model the overarching target behaviour and associated warm-ups for the audience while also highlighting key benefits.
Tones which were less effective in promoting driving less and using public transport
Some of the communications examples used humour to highlight the drawbacks of private car travel or the benefits of public transport. The response to this was mixed, and often the most cynical participants were the most dismissive of humour being used in this context. Overall findings indicated that a more matter-of-fact tone offered a less risky approach.
Another tone to avoid was over-confidence, especially when the messenger is a public transport provider. Given the tendency of participants to hold entrenched negative views, there was often a negative response to communications which represented the public transport experience in an idealised or unrealistically positive way.
Conclusions and actionable insights
The role of communications in prompting action across the three behaviour sets
Moments of change are key drivers of action, rather than communications
Across all three behaviour sets, the key finding which could underpin an effective communications strategy is that moments of change and other external factors are the primary drivers of action. Often, communications alone were not sufficient to “bridge the gap” between intention and meaningful contemplation or warm-up actions for people who are concerned about the climate and have the means to take action. Insights showed that communications can play a key role in driving warm-up behaviours by priming the audience to contemplate the overarching behaviour ahead of the next crucial moment. Communications can also be employed to build positive attitudes and beliefs to support the idea that the overarching behaviours are sensible and practically and financially viable.
Communications should look to prime the audience ahead of moments of change, and support this by building positive attitudes
In order to prime the audience ahead of moments of change, our findings indicate that communications should focus on driving social norms. Messaging should position the overarching behaviour as a desirable, everyday option that is being chosen by people across different segments of society. For both EVs and heat pumps, this means shifting the audience’s perception from seeing the overarching behaviour as a potential future norm, towards viewing it as part of the current norm. For the third behaviour set, negative attitudes towards public transport tend to be more entrenched. Communications encouraging driving less and using public transport more need to prompt the audience to re-evaluate their views. Findings indicated that the most effective ways to do this were to take advantage of positive changes to policy and infrastructure, and to encourage the audience to try swapping their car for public transport for one-off leisure journeys.
Reducing emissions was not motivating enough to present as a primary benefit in communications
Although the sample reported a desire to do more for the climate, taking action to reduce carbon emissions was not a strong motivator of warm-up behaviours for these three big changes. Participants were all aware that gas or oil central heating and driving ICE vehicles were significant sources of carbon emissions. They also tended to be positive about the idea of doing more to reduce their emissions. However, practical and financial considerations, along with social norms, were much more effective in prompting consideration of the three behaviour sets.
There was some evidence from the group discussions and interviews that suggested climate benefits could serve as a co-benefit alongside more practical arguments. Messaging on climate benefits could also potentially reinforce the decision to switch to an EV, heat pump or public transport once it is already being strongly considered.
For heat pumps and EVs, the communications should focus on driving social norms and build positive attitudes towards the overarching target behaviours
Both EVs and heat pumps represent infrequent, expensive purchases, which participants associated with the need for extensive personal research to avoid the consequences of making the wrong choice. With an audience who have a strong incentive to engage in warm-up behaviours ahead of their decision, the strategic goal should be to prime the audience, establish the warm-up behaviour as a valid option in each category in advance of the moments of change that prompt action.
The trigger for these warm-up behaviours tends to be a change in circumstance or other event which means the existing product or habit needs to be replaced, or which means that some of the major barriers to adoption are negated. Examples included reaching the end of a car lease agreement for EVs, or the breakdown of a current heating system for heat pumps.
Another important area of focus for communications on EVs or heat pumps should be around building positive attitudes and beliefs and increasing perceived behavioural control of the decision to purchase. This can be achieved primarily by focusing on financial and practical concerns, as these tended to be the strongest barriers to action. Heat pumps in particular were still not fully understood by many participants, which means educational or awareness-building communications will still be required. Similarly, effective communications should look to play a myth-busting role, as the infrequent nature of car and heating system purchases offers opportunities to challenge negative beliefs by highlighting where the offer has improved since the audience last researched the overarching behaviour.
For driving less and using public transport more, communications should focus on challenging existing negative attitudes to prompt a re-think
Because the audience’s attitudes towards public transport were more entrenched, findings indicated that communications to encourage the public to swap driving for public transport should focus on taking opportunities to challenge these attitudes. The most important opportunities to do so are presented by changes to the public transport offer which increase its appeal or contradict beliefs about low value for money, inconvenience or lack of service. In addition to a lack of positive attitudes, perceived behavioural control was often low for this audience, especially among those who believed public transport to be unaffordable or felt their area was under-served.
Participants tended to view driving as the norm and usually drove as a default way to travel for both commuting and leisure. As commuting habits were viewed by participants as much harder to change, supporting communications should look at focusing on leisure travel and one-off journeys. This presents a more achievable call to action and had the potential to encourage infrequent users of public transport to re-familiarise themselves, possibly reducing negative attitudes based on past experience in the process.
Gatersleben, B. & Uzzell, D. (2007). Affective Appraisals of the Daily Commute Comparing Perceptions of Drivers, Cyclists, Walkers, and Users of Public Transport. Available at 10.1177/0013916506294032
Krishna, G. (2021). Understanding and identifying barriers to electric vehicle adoption through thematic analysis. Available at https://doi.org/10.1016/j.trip.2021.100364
Prochaska, J. O., & DiClemente, C. C. (1983). Stages and processes of self-change of smoking: Toward an integrative model of change. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 51(3), 390-395. http://doi.org/10.1037/0022-006X.51.3.390
Pamidimukkala, A., Solovyev, V., Prabhakar, A., Kermanshachi, S., & Ghosh, S. (2024). Barriers and motivators to the adoption of electric vehicles. Available at https://doi.org/10.1016/j.geits.2024.100153
Ramos, É. M. S., Bergstad, C. J., & Nässén, J. (2020). Understanding daily car use: Driving habits, motives, attitudes, and norms across trip purposes. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.trf.2019.11.013 1369-8478/
Rasca, S., & Saeed, N. (2022). Exploring the factors influencing the use of public transport by commuters living in small cities and towns. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.tbs.2022.03.004
Saleh, H. N., Maupa, H., Cokki, Sadat, A. M. (2025) Factors Affecting the Intention to Buy Electric Vehicles Through Integration of Technology Acceptance Model and Prior Experience. Available at https://doi.org/10.47738/jads.v6i2.730
Xue, Y., Zhang, X., Zhang, Y., & Luo, E. (2024). Understanding the barriers to consumer purchasing of electric vehicles: The innovation resistance theory. Available at https://doi.org/10.3390/su16062420
Barriers and Motivators to the target climate behaviours
Tackling climate change depends heavily on changing human behaviour, as positive individual and collective action plays a major role in reducing harm to the environment. However, driving meaningful behaviour change in the context of climate change can be challenging. Climate-related actions can require immediate effort for long-term benefits, can feel overwhelming due to the vast scale of the crisis, and often involve changing longstanding habits/routines and social norms. Meanwhile, the negative impacts of climate change can feel distant and are easy to ignore – making it easy to postpone behaviour change. Understanding the underlying attitudes and social factors towards climate behaviours can help to bridge the gap between climate communication and climate action.
Below are the barriers and motivators found within the literature for the three separate target behaviours – installing a heat pump, buying an electric vehicle, and driving less and using public transport. Understanding the behavioural, psychological and emotional factors that drive and prohibit these climate behaviours will help us to develop communications to encourage people to take positive steps towards action.
Installing a heat pump
Barriers
Money and cost are the key barriers to retrofitting a home
Generally, it was found that many are worried about the upfront costs of making changes to their homes, while others believe that the running costs of an electric heating system will be too great (Department for BEIS, 2022; Chapman, O., Kapetaniou, C. and Gabriel, M., 2021). In a survey conducted by Nesta (2021), 52% are worried about the upfront costs and just under half of respondents (45%) said that upfront costs are more important than the running costs when considering making changes to their home (Chapman, O., Kapetaniou, C. and Gabriel, M., 2021). However, the recent rise in electricity costs compared to gas does cast some doubt for some, as to whether moving from gas to electric heat pumps would reduce bills (Chitchyan, R., 2025).
Level of hassle/disruption of building work puts people off upgrading their heating system
If people are thinking about upgrading their property, they expect it to be time-consuming and disruptive, as such the ‘hassle-factor’ and inconvenience play a significant role in the low uptake of low-carbon heating technologies (LGA & The Behaviouralist, 2022 & IPPO, 2024). The hassle-factor of installing low-carbon heating is reduced at moments of disruption, such as renovations/refurbishments in the home and moving home (Behavioural Insights Team, 2012). These moments of change have been identified as ideal opportunities to encourage heat transition (The Behavioural Insights Team, 2023).
Individuals can be put off looking into the home heating due to the hassle of having to do the research and make decisions
The effort required to research energy efficiency and green heating measures can put people off seriously thinking about upgrading their heating system (Chapman, O., Kapetaniou, C. and Gabriel, M., 2021). Additionally, a large proportion of people don’t know where to start looking into energy efficiency measures and 34% of people surveyed strongly agreed that it would take a lot of effort to research and manage the installation of new energy efficiency measures (Chapman, O., Kapetaniou, C. and Gabriel, M., 2021). As such, this can be an obstacle to making decisions about installing new heating systems (Chapman, O., Kapetaniou, C. and Gabriel, M., 2021). With this in mind, several research reports have found that most people say they would only replace their heating system when their current one breaks down or becomes difficult to maintain (Caiger-Smith, D. and Amal, A., 2020 & Department for BEIS, 2022). This poses a potential opportunity to encourage a heating change, as an individual will be primed to carry out research and look into replacing their heating system. For those who are considering installing a heat pump, a simple research process is preferred such as a website with a list of links and grant information, a ‘one stop shop’, and a checklist of key points to consider for specific improvements (Chitchyan, R., 2025).
Uncertainty whether some types of homes are suitable for a heat pump
For some, there is a general perception that it may not be possible to install a heat pump in their home (Department for BEIS, 2022; IPPO, 2024). This is a particular obstacle for flat owners, in which people in Scotland are significantly more likely to live in compared to the rest of the UK (Caiger-Smith, D. and Amal, A., 2020). In addition, a common reason cited for not installing a low-carbon heating system is a lack of space for a heat pump/water tank (Caiger-Smith, D. and Amal, A., 2020).
The familiarity of gas boilers deters some from switching to more unfamiliar technologies
The perceived benefits of gas heating, such as reliability, convenience, and ease of use, are a deterrent for switching to low-carbon heating (Chapman, O., Kapetaniou, C. and Gabriel, M., 2021). Those without low-carbon heating systems are generally concerned about the cost and performance of these unfamiliar technologies and would prefer to opt for the familiarity and convenience of a gas boiler (Caiger-Smith, D. and Amal, A., 2020).
There is some scepticism about adopting new technology and a lack of knowledge about heat pumps
Generally, recent evidence has shown that there remains a lack of knowledge and trust in heat pump technology, the installation process, and proposed benefits (E.ON, 2024). People lack understanding about how heat pumps work and some common misconceptions remain. Namely, that they take a long time to heat a home, they can only provide heating, not hot water, and cost more to run (E.ON, 2024). The importance of longevity and whether new heating systems will be ‘fit for the future’ and able to keep up and adapt to new technologies is also a concern for some (Beaglehole, J. and Patel, R., 2016). As such, there is a preference to wait and see how the technology develops over time (Beaglehole, J. and Patel, R., 2016). Additionally, there is scepticism about the supply chain being sufficiently advanced to enable installation, maintenance, and general support to consumers (ARUP & Imperial College London, 2022).
Some consider heat pumps noisy and ugly to live with
A common concern with heat pumps is around noise, including concerns about noise within the home and whether the wider community could be affected by noise pollution (Beaglehole, J. and Patel, R., 2016). It is a common perception that heat pumps are noisy and due to their size, also not that attractive to look at (The Behavioural Insights Team, 2023; Caiger-Smith, D. and Amal, A., 2020).
There is a lack of trust in reliability and independence of advice and providers
When it comes to heat pump installation, a barrier cited frequently within the literature is the inconsistent or overly complex advice, along with low trust in information sources (IPPO, 2024). A consumer survey in Scotland conducted by the Energy Saving Trust suggests that the majority of Scots (65%) do not fully trust the UK Government, Scottish Government or local councils to give impartial advice, often believing that these institutions have hidden or mixed motives (Colley, K. & Craig, T. P., 2014). Furthermore, research conducted by The Energy Saving Trust (2010), found that energy suppliers are amongst the least trusted by the Scottish public, with less than 10% of Scottish households saying they trust energy suppliers.
Motivators
Saving money is a primary motivator
Concerns about energy bills rising are a motivator for people to switch to a more energy efficient and cost-saving heating system (LGA & The Behaviouralist, 2022). Marketing efforts should focus on emphasising any economic savings, comfort benefits and environmental benefits of heat pumps, in that order (Sustainable Energy Authority of Ireland, 2020).
Financial incentives may encourage a switch to low-carbon heating
It was very apparent within much of the literature that money and cost are the main barriers for consumers to install low-carbon heating systems (Chapman, O., Kapetaniou, C. and Gabriel, M., 2021; Beaglehole, J. and Patel, R., 2016 & Colley, K. & Craig, T. P., 2014). Furthermore, upfront costs appear to be considered more important than running costs for the majority of people (Sustainable Energy Authority of Ireland, 2020). As such, incentives for people to switch to green energy (receiving subsidies and grants) can be motivating (Chapman, O., Kapetaniou, C. and Gabriel, M., 2021; Behavioural Insights Team, 2012).
Warmth and comfort are key factors when considering heating systems
Research has shown that, when choosing a heating system, people are less concerned about the long-term running costs and prioritise comfort, familiarity, and reliability (Sustainable Energy Authority of Ireland, 2020). Most consumers focus on the outcomes of a system rather than the system itself, i.e. a warm and comfortable home heated by a system that is easy to run and use (ARUP & Imperial College London, 2022). Additionally, flexibility has been cited as a key characteristic of a heating system; consumers say they want the ability to control the temperature (Beaglehole, J. and Patel, R., 2016; Energy Saving Trust, 2022; & Furtado, J., 2019).
A desire to be energy efficient/protect the environment is a driver for low-carbon heating
Many of those who have installed low-carbon heating already, have been motivated by environmental benefits in an attempt to make their home more environmentally friendly (Energy Saving Trust, 2022 & ARUP & Imperial College London, 2022). Consequently, the top motivators to install a low-carbon heating system relate to energy efficiency and the environment (Chapman, O., Kapetaniou, C. and Gabriel, M., 2021).
Low-carbon technology can improve the value of homes
Research conducted by Savills (2022) (the property firm) found that 59% said they would be willing to pay more for a home if at least 75% of a property’s energy as powered by renewable sources. Further, analysis of average values of homes transacted between 2019 and 2021 shows that newer, cleaner methods of energy have a higher price tag. The same research found that properties utilising community heating schemes demand the highest average prices, followed by homes supplied by heat pumps, and homes that use oil. Property value has been found as a motivator for switching, where 58% of landlords and 36% of homeowners would invest in a heating system that would increase the house price (Sanders, J., 2025)
Visibility of others adopting the technology can be a motivator
The uptake of unfamiliar technologies is usually relatively slow as they are perceived as complex. Carmichael (2019) suggests that peer effects and observing others using this technology or being able to test the technology before investing in it could improve public uncertainty and increase adoption (Carmichael, R., 2019). This allows for better visibility of the costs, benefits, and relative advantages for the consumers’ own home. As such, evidence has shown that peer influence in local communities can encourage more homeowners to retrofit their homes (SEAI Behavioural Economics Unit, 2020).
Buying an electric vehicle
Barriers
Expensive upfront costs make purchasing an electric vehicle unrealistic for some
EVs often have a higher purchase price than ICE vehicles, making purchasing an EV financially challenging for many. These financial barriers are felt more acutely in lower-income households (Pamidimukkala, A., et al., 2024). Interestingly, a YouGov poll found that EV hesitant high-income British consumers are even more likely than average to see the high upfront cost as a deterrent (60%) (YouGov, 2024).
The perceived lack of public charging availability and infrastructure can be a barrier
One of the most frequently cites barriers globally is the lack of, or perceived lack of, sufficiently available public charging stations for electric vehicles (EVs) (Pamidimukkala, A., Solovyev, V., Prabhakar, A., Kermanshachi, S., & Ghosh, S., 2024; Consumer Scotland., 2024). Evidence shows that this is especially apparent in less affluent areas, where infrastructure for electric vehicles is disproportionately unavailable to those living in these areas (Pamidimukkala, A., et al., 2024). Limited access to charging stations reduces public confidence in their ability to use an electric vehicle as flexibility and easily as a non-electric vehicle.
Domestic charging points are often not an option leading to higher charging expenses
The above point, re public charging points, is compounded by the fact that a large proportion of the population would theoretically have to rely on public charging points as domestic charging points are simply not an option for many. It is illegal to run a charging cable along a pavement, meaning only those with driveways or other off-street parking can use domestic charging (Stonehaven, 2025). Additionally, public charging points tend to be significantly more expensive than charging an electric car at home, making electric vehicles less feasible for those in lower socioeconomic groups. Many believe it only makes sense to own an electric car if they had access to cheaper at-home charging stations (Krishna, G., 2021; Consumer Scotland., 2024).
The perceived hassle of owning an EV – driving distance and charging times – compared to a standard petrol car
The limited driving distance of EVs is a common barrier to adoption. Compared to ICE vehicles, most EVs have a shorter driving range, which can lead to concerns or anxiety among potential consumers about the impact on their flexibility and the need to plan ahead for driving longer distances, at risk of being stranded somewhere without charge (Pamidimukkala, A., et al., 2024). In addition to this, many are put off the idea of an EV due to the length of time it takes to charge. As the process of charging an EV is more time-consuming compared to refuelling a more conventional vehicle, the hassle-factor associated with this can be a barrier to adoption (Krishna, G., 2021; Pamidimukkala, A., et al., 2024).
Some experience resistance to adopting new/unfamiliar technology or innovations
There continues to be a reliance on ICE vehicles and the familiarity with the technology. Innovation resistance theory explains the resistance some people feel around adopting new innovative products, services, and technology. People can intentionally refrain from adopting new technologies or products in order to maintain familiarity (Xue, Y., Zhang, X., Zhang, Y., & Luo, E., 2024; Saleh, H. N., Maupa, H., Cokki, Sadat, A. M., 2025). In the context of EV adoption, some of the barriers discussed above, such as concerns over driving range and charging infrastructure contribute to this feeling of discomfort around adopting the new technology.
Motivators
The availability of financial incentives and support can motivate an EV purchase
Financial incentives are one of the key motivators for EV adoption. Purchase subsidies have been found to be one of the most motivating factors for EV adoption among consumers across numerous countries. Similarly, tax reductions, such as road tax exemptions can also be a motivating factor (Pamidimukkala, A., et al., 2024; Consumer Scotland., 2024).
Many are motivated by the lower running costs of EVs
Despite the higher purchase rate, the costs of running an EV are cheaper than that of ICE vehicles. Subsequently, the lower running costs have been found to be the most popular reason for going electric, according to a YouGov poll (YouGov, 2025). The same poll also found the cost of fuel to be highly impactful in people’s decision to purchase an EV.
The reduction in air pollution by purchasing an EV is a motivator
One of the most frequently cited motivators for purchasing an EV is the environmental benefits, and reduced local emissions compared to petrol/diesel cars (Pamidimukkala, A., et al., 2024; YouGov, 2025). Consumers concerned about climate change and motivated by environmental values are more inclined to choose EVs over more conventional vehicles (Naseri, H., Waygood, E.O.D., Patterson, Z., & Wang, B. 2024).
Having access to the infrastructure needed for an EV makes the decision to purchase one more straightforward
For those with the appropriate means, situational factors such as the availability of home charging stations, off-street parking, or nearby public charging infrastructure can act as motivators (Consumer Scotland., 2024). While stability and ease of use in every-day environments increases adoption likelihood (Pamidimukkala, A., et al., 2024).
Social norms and exposure effects of knowing people with an EV can increase familiarity and normality
To overcome resistance to the unfamiliar technology, or those who are more hesitant to switch to an EV, increasing visibility or familiarity with EVs through community charging hubs or car-sharing programmes have been found to foster normalisation and uptake (Pamidimukkala, A., et al., 2024). Previous experience of driving an EV increases the likelihood of preferences for EVs (Naseri, H. et al., 2024; Saleh, H. N., Maupa, H., Cokki, Sadat, A. M., 2025). Furthermore, knowing someone with an EV, e.g. friends or family, can be a motivating factor as it increases the familiarity with the new technology. This can reduce apprehensions around some of the barriers identified such as driving range and charging time.
Driving less and switching to public transport
Barriers
Driving can be a largely habitual behaviour for some that can be challenging to break
Due to its convenience, driving can be a habitual behaviour. Using the car for routine journeys tends to be an ingrained habit that can be difficult to change, as people don’t tend to think about their routine/partly sub-conscious behaviours. Additionally, research has shown that people who use the car frequently tend to neglect alternatives modes of travel (Ramos, É. M. S., Bergstad, C. J., & Nässén, J., 2020).
The perceived low cost of a car day-to-day can be a motivator to use compared to public transport
Although people are aware that owning a vehicle is expensive, the day-to-day costs of running a car are usually absorbed into regular outgoings. As such, some feel that using a car on a daily basis feels free, especially when travelling short distances where a tank of petrol can last for a long time (Possible, 2022). The rising cost of public transport on the other hand, can be a deterrent. Research commissioned by Campaign for Better Transport found that 97% of drivers want cheaper rail fares (Campaign for Better Transport, 2023) and in a separate survey, that 71% of people said cheaper train fares would make them more likely to travel by train Campaign for Better Transport, 2025).
Public transport can be unreliable and more of a hassle to use compared to cars
Public transport can be much more unreliable, compared to other methods of transport, making using public transport less convenient and harder to rely on for many (Scottish Centre for Social Research, 2010). For example, many have experienced delays and cancellations when using the train and the timings not always convenient (Possible, 2022). Other hassle-factors involved in using public transport such as route planning where individuals need to know the stop to get off at and the timing of either the bus/train, and can also put people off, opting for the ease and familiarity of the car.
Cars can feel safer, comfortable and more convenient than public or other modes of transport
Although people are aware of the risks of driving a car, the safety of a car was especially felt after dark by women and for those with children, where public transport can feel less safe (Possible, 2022). Research has shown that women often list safety concerns as a barrier using public transport (Consumer Scotland, 2024). The convenience of a car is also a strong barrier to switching to public transport for some journeys – as distances increase, public transport becomes less convenient and more time-consuming (Rasca, S. & Saeed, N., 2022). The perceived reliability and convenience of being able to use a car whenever necessary, with little thought is a key reason people use a car over other means of travel (Possible, 2022). Overall, many feel that having a car saves them time and makes life generally easier as it allows people to predict journey times more accurately and travel whenever needed. For those with babies or young children, a car is a safe space which can be used for napping, breastfeed, and managing the logistics of travel with essential items such as prams, and changing bags (Possible, 2022). The refuge of a car can feel important, compared to busy buses or trains.
Motivators
Taking public transport can make commuting less stressful and more relaxing
For many, experiences of unsafe driving from other drivers, congestion, and unexpected diversions can make travelling by car a stressful experience (Possible, 2022). Studies have found that car commuters find their journey more stressful than any other mode of transport (Gatersleben, B. & Uzzell, D., 2007). Evidence shows that taking public transport is significantly less stressful, second only to active modes of travel (Gatersleben, B. & Uzzell, D., 2007). Taking public transport frees up time for other activities such as reading a book, working, or just relaxing. In addition, in many areas, public transport can also be the quicker option with fast-track lanes for buses and quick trains, avoiding traffic and congestion.
Owning a vehicle is more expensive overall than travelling by public transport regularly
Ultimately, owning a vehicle is expensive, and although driving can feel free on a day-to-day basis, the cost of owning a car does add up when including petrol, insurance, tax, monthly payments, parking etc. Public transport costs significantly less than owning and operating a car. Going Car Free (Possible, 2022) is a study which followed ten people who trialled going car free for three weeks without significantly changing their routine and everyday commitments. The findings suggest that public awareness needs to be raised on how comparatively expensive car ownership is, alongside societal and environmental costs of private car ownership.
People can be motivated for environmental reasons to reduce their car use and opt for public transport
Environmental concerns were not found to be a key motivator for switching to public transport. However, protecting the environment has been cited as a co-benefit to reducing car use and using public transport more frequently (Consumer Scotland, 2024). Evidence shows that the majority of Scottish consumers would like to reduce their carbon emissions by using more environmentally sustainable public transport methods, however face significant barriers to doing so, are unsure of how to do so, or are unconvinces that their behaviour changes could have an impact (Consumer Scotland, 2024).
Framing of target associated warm-up behaviours in public communications
The below observations are taken from a selection of recent public-facing communications about each of the three target behaviours. Key messages are set out for each target behaviour alongside an analysis of the tone, call to action and choice of messenger.
Themes across all three behaviours
The urgency of earlier comms has been replaced by a lighter persuasive tone that emphasises personal choice
In our 2020 analysis of communications on climate change, a major theme in the messaging from government, media and academic sources was urgency. Climate change was often framed as a “climate emergency” and parallels to the Covid-19 pandemic were used to advocate for immediate action to cut carbon emissions at scale (ClimateXChange, 2020).
The overall tone of the more recent communications reviewed as part of this paper contrasted with this. The reviewed communications typically present the benefits of target behaviours in a more neutral, factual tone. This less emotive tone lends itself to a more rational framing of choices, encouraging consumers to weigh up their options and make the right choice for them. While climate benefits are still very much part of the messaging toolkit, they are presented as one of many reasons to engage in target behaviours rather than an overriding urgent concern.
Climate benefits are often presented as a co-benefit, as communications focus on the practical or financial benefits of target behaviours at a personal level
While the reviewed communications often included messaging on climate benefits, these were not typically presented as a primary reason to engage in a target behaviour. Instead, financial and practical benefits such as cost savings, convenience, and health benefits.
Comms often seek to create a sense of changing social norms, with high emission options being “phased out” and low emission technology growing in popularity
A prevalent theme across communications for all three target behaviours was around changing social norms, with the target behaviour positioned as a future norm, in opposition to the outgoing high-emission option. This enables communications to frame behaviours which are currently the norm, such as buying an ICE vehicle ownership or gas boiler, as outdated in comparison. This tends to be supported by messaging around legislation, messaging which highlights new or improved technology associated with low-emission options, or messaging which points to increasing demand for low-emission options.
Messaging is often framed around prompting reconsideration, tackling pre-existing beliefs about the drawbacks of low carbon options, and/or highlighting the pain points associated with high emission choices
Another common communication theme across each of the target behaviours was around prompting the audience to reconsider low-emission choices. Often, this took the form of myth-busting, with messages focusing on challenging beliefs about target behaviours which could pose a barrier (such as the belief that of EVs or heat pumps were more expensive to run than fossil-fuelled equivalents). There were also some communications which focused on emphasising the pain points and disadvantages of higher-emission choices, especially private ICE vehicle ownership.
Communications observations: Installing a heat pump
Communications around heat pumps tended to include basic educational information in order to improve awareness and understanding of how the systems work. The messaging tended to be focused on mitigating financial and practical barriers, and on enhancing the appeal of motivators such as financial support and reliable performance.
Barriers addressed by communications
Lack of consumer understanding about heat pumps (e.g. air source vs ground source, suitability for climate)
Up-front cost of installation is high
Gas boilers may still be cheaper to run due to electricity prices
Process (determining whether a heat pump is the right option, applying for grants, additional home upgrades may be needed) seems long and complex
Motivators addressed by communications
Financial support is available from the government to help with installation costs
Heat pumps have very high rates of customer satisfaction
With the right tariff, heat pumps can be cheaper to run than fossil-fuelled systems
Some heat pump manufacturers can handle the whole process from start to finish
Heat pumps are very energy-efficient, and have no direct carbon emissions
Communications on heat pumps are still looking to educate the public on the basics of the technology
Communications from government (UK Government, 2025), manufacturers (Octopus Energy, 2025) and consumer advice organisations (Money Saving Expert, 2025) were often presented as a primer or beginner’s guide. In addition to highlighting the benefits, information online often opened by offering a basic explanation of the technology, including types of heat pump system, how they work, and why they are considered to be a more climate-friendly option. An element of myth-busting is often present, challenging misinformation which makes heat pumps seem less attractive. For example, the belief that they are unsuitable for winter weather in Scotland.
In comparison to communications about electric vehicles, which tended to assume more knowledge on the part of the audience, this indicates that educating potential owners is still a priority for these information sources. Often, interactive tools were presented as part of this, as a way to simplify the process of learning whether a heat pump would be suitable for the audience’s home.
Financial support from government remains a key message to promote heat pumps
One of the core messages which was used to promote heat pumps across all reviewed sources was the availability of significant support from the UK and/or Scottish government, in the form of grants or interest-free loans. Eligibility for these financial incentives is often presented as a key factor to consider when exploring whether to install a heat pump at home, and as a major benefit to acting on an intention to install. This messaging is often framed as a counter to the high up-front costs of installation, which can otherwise be a barrier to further action.
A recent national news article from the BBC explicitly linked the UK Boiler Upgrade Scheme (BUS) to a large increase in demand for heat pumps nationwide (BBC, 2025). This also enabled the story to present heat pumps as a potential future norm, with demand increasing year on year.
Figure 17: BBC News article headline highlighting high uptake of the UK Government heat pump grant
Messaging around cost savings is prevalent, with pro-heat pump sources re-framing this as including maintenance
The other main financial incentive presented in communications is around running costs. While some sources acknowledge that current energy prices mean utility savings potential may be limited, messaging on the benefits of heat pumps often highlights potential for savings versus older and less efficient systems.
Consumer information provider Money Saving Expert created web content encouraging readers to compare the cost of running a heat pump against a range of other options, highlighting that older models of boiler and other heat sources like electric storage heaters, LPG and oil boilers may be more expensive to run (Money Saving Expert, 2025).
Switching to a heat pump is often presented as a high involvement decision in communications
Communications on heat pumps tend to present the decision to switch to a heat pump as a highly involved process which requires multiple factors to be weighed up. The key factors mentioned are typically suitability of the building itself, the type of heating system currently installed, age and specifications of radiators and water tanks, and eligibility for funding support.
Online content often features quizzes, checklists or interactive tools intended to streamline this process. These online tools are a warm-up behaviour which features frequently as a call to action. (UK Government, 2025)
Figure 18: gov.uk heat pump suitability checker
One large UK manufacturer has made reducing the administrative burden of heat transition a key part of their messaging.
The energy supplier Octopus has recently entered the heat pump market with an “all in one” product/service offer (Octopus Energy, 2025). A prominent message in their promotional communications has been around the lack of third-party involvement in the process, with the manufacturer providing survey, design, installation and also offering to apply for funding support on behalf of the customer. This core communications proposition may be worth exploring further with research participants as the time cost of the decision-making and administrative process involved in getting a heat pump has been identified as a potential barrier.
Some communications are making use of “real people” as messengers, inviting their audience to hear from lived experience
Figure 19: Octopus Energy promotional communications
Both the UK government and Nesta have opted to use people who already own a heat pump as messengers for some of their communications. The UK Government’s energy efficient home campaign features video and text-based testimonials from heat pump owners with different housing types and lifestyles speaking about how they made their decision and speaking positively about the installation process and experience of living with the new system (UK Government 2025a). Nesta have taken a more grassroots approach to peer messengers, setting up a service which connects people considering a heat pump with nearby people who already have one (Nesta 2025). This enables local people to act as champions for heat pump systems.
Figure 20: Nesta heat pump visit process
Both of these approaches help to build a sense of social norm, by making the behaviour more visible to those who are considering it. Visiting in person, or seeing video content of homes with heat pumps, is aimed at boosting familiarity with the technology to enhance motivation.
Narratives around consumer satisfaction are being highlighted to emphasise the positives
Data from heat pump owners has suggested higher rates of consumer satisfaction in comparison to gas boilers (MCS Foundation, 2025). This has enabled a narrative around consumer satisfaction to be presented in communications, such as the UK Government’s “Warm and fuzzy” campaign (UK Government, 2025). This narrative combines benefits such as reliability, cost savings and low emissions to present heat pumps as an attractive option.
Climate benefits of heat pumps are often de-emphasised in communications
While reduced emissions versus older fossil-fuelled systems are still frequently mentioned across reviewed sources, this is seldom presented as the core benefit of installing a heat pump. Instead, more practical, individual benefits such as cost savings, financial support, and reliable heat generation tend to be highlighted as key messages. Overall, this feeds into the wider framing of heat pump installation as an involved, rational decision which requires a range of factors to be considered, rather than a more emotional choice based on the urgent need for climate action.
Calls to action
The calls to action for heat pump communications tended to focus on warm-up behaviours, typically those linked to information gathering rather than more practical actions such as booking a survey visit.
Explore financial incentives like grants and interest-free loans from the government
Use an online quiz to find out how much it could cost to install a heat pump in your home
Find a local tradesperson who can give you an installation quote
Find out if your home is ready for a heat pump, or if other steps (like insulation or radiator upgrades) need to be taken first
Use a service that lets you arrange a visit with someone near you who has a heat pump to ask questions first-hand
Compare energy tariffs to see whether switching away from gas could save you money
Watch video content of people who own a heat pump to see what their experience was like
Communications observations: Buying an electric vehicle
Electric vehicle communications tended to position EVs as modern and innovative. Messaging often sought to address barriers which were linked to the performance of older models (such as the perception of limited range), and to present EVs as a “norm in waiting” that was rapidly replacing ICE vehicles.
Barriers addressed by communications
EVs still perceived as an expensive luxury item
Range of EVs can be seen as too short for people who drive longer distances, or who commute every day
Charging infrastructure for EVs is still developing
Motivators addressed by communications
EVs are quiet and offer a great driving experience
EVs are modern and innovative
Many EVs come with extra entertainment and safety features
With the right electricity tariff, home charging can be cheaper than running a petrol/diesel car
Financial support is available from the government and industry to subsidise home charging
Some makes and models of EVs are now available at similar prices to a new ICE car
Some manufacturers are re-framing EVs as an affordable choice, rather than a luxury product
While luxury is still a prevalent theme in some promotional campaigns for EVs, it is typically associated with products at a higher price point, such as Tesla. However, some manufacturers who are more recent entries to the UK market appear keen to make value for money a key part of their proposition. MG launched a mid-sized fully electric SUV in 2022 with a campaign which presented their product as affordable and accessible, while still emphasising modern technology and features (M3 Agency, 2022). The campaign was built around the idea that “Electric is for everyone” with messaging which highlighted the price point, range, and features such as wireless phone charging. Similarly, Dacia’s communications promoting the Dacia Spring describe it as “Europe’s most affordable new electric car” (Dacia UK, 2024)
Figure 21: Advert for a new MG Electric Vehicle
Figure 22: Which? EV quiz results (2025)
Pro-EV sources are keen to challenge the belief that limited range is still a problem
The improved range of current-generation EVs is a prevalent theme in promotional communications from manufacturers and consumer organisations. Communications tend to mention the range a car can cover on a single charge. Often, prospective buyers are encouraged to consider their daily or weekly driving habits, with the message that an EV will often be able to cover a typical week of driving with a single battery charge.
An example from Energy Saving Trust, an organisation focused on supporting energy efficient decisions to reduce emissions, uses an interactive online quiz to help potential EV owners to consider key factors before making a purchase. The quiz offers tailored messaging to users. Even if the largest possible values for weekday (over 25 miles per day) and weekend (over 200 miles) driving distance are input, the message is still that modern EVs have sufficient range to be a good fit (Energy Saving Trust, 2025)
Framing EVs as an incoming norm is a common promotional message
Manufacturer communications often frame EVs as being innovative and technologically advanced. Often, this is part of a wider framing which positions EVs as a new norm which is replacing the existing norm of ICE vehicles. Online promotional communications from the EV manufacturer Cupra frequently emphasise the growth of the electric car sector (Cupra UK 2025). The technology behind the vehicles is described as constantly improving, alongside the associated infrastructure.
Comparing maintenance costs between ICE and EVs is often positioned as a factor in decision-making
Pro-EV sources often make the claim that due to the reduced number of moving parts, EVs are often cheaper to maintain and repair than their ICE counterparts (Volkswagen Ireland 2025). While more neutral sources such as consumer organisations have questioned this claim, the overall effect is to encourage potential EV owners to consider the difference in maintenance needs versus an ICE car (Which?, 2025).
Communication on EVs often focuses on availability of charging infrastructure as key to making a purchase decision
Another key factor which is commonly presented as an essential part of the decision between EVs, and other options is access to charging infrastructure. Consumer guide Which? published an FAQ-style online guide for people who were considering purchasing an EV. The guide recommends charging at home or at work, if possible, due to the convenience and potential cost savings, and points out that relying on public charging points may be costlier than refuelling a petrol-powered car.
EV manufacturers such as Volkswagen also tend to present charging infrastructure as an important consideration. The landing page for EVs made by Volkswagen in Ireland offers a digital route planner tool which allows potential customers to visualise the availability of charging points on familiar journeys (Volkswagen Ireland, 2025). This tool helps to increase perceived behavioural control by enabling users to plan out how an EV would fit into their lifestyle before committing further.
Quiet/smooth running is positioned as a key advantage over ICE vehicles
EV manufacturers often highlight the fact EVs offer a less noisy or “smoother” driving experience in comparison to ICE vehicles, due to the lack of engine noise and automatic transmission (Cupra UK, 2025) (Tesla, 2025).
Figure 23: Description of EVs being smoother and quieter than traditional vehicles
Some communications are making use of “real people” as messengers, inviting their audience to hear from lived experience
Some EV manufacturers make use of a more authentic messenger by using real customers as spokespeople. Volkswagen UK’s “Your Volkswagen Stories” is an interactive online promotional campaign which features 14 video case studies from UK customers who chose an EV (Volkswagen UK, 2025). The choice of messenger reflects a diverse mix of lifestyles and stages (such as families with multiple children or a retired couple).
The campaign often includes a narrative of sceptical people being pleasantly surprised by the performance and overall driving experience of owning an EV. One example features an older couple based in Argyll and focuses on reliability and range as key selling points, for people travelling to and from rural areas. This framing enables EVs to be presented as a credible solution for a variety of audience segments who may be less likely to consider one.
Figure 24: An example of Volkswagen UK’s “Your Volkswagen Stories”
Climate benefits of EV ownership are often de-emphasised in communications
While communications about EVs frequently mention climate benefits such as zero direct carbon emissions, these are typically presented as a co-benefit, with performance, range, running costs, reliability and extra features more likely to be the primary focus of persuasive messaging. Often “above the line” communications such as advertising omit climate change messaging altogether. TV/digital advertising for Tesla (2025) and MG (2022) neglected to mention emissions or climate benefits entirely, positioning their products as a sensible choice for consumers rather than an environmental necessity.
Calls to action
EV manufacturers tended to focus on booking test drives or planning behaviours (such as interactive maps of charging stations). Consumer information sources were more likely to signpost to further information instead, or to direct the audience to interactive tools to guide them through the decision-making process.
Book a test drive of an EV
Take an interactive quiz to see if an EV is right for you
Use an online route planner to explore charging stations along your typical driving routes
Explore different models and specifications of EV to see which works best for you
Use a calculator tool to see whether an EV would be cheaper to run than an ICE vehicle
Explore financial incentives, like salary sacrifice schemes or grants to install home charging
Watch video content of people who own an EV to see what their experience was like
Communications observations: driving less and using public transport
Communications looking to encourage less driving and greater uptake of alternatives like public transport often focused on re-framing driving. Existing beliefs about the convenience and freedom of private car use are challenged, while communications also highlight practical advantages of alternatives.
Barriers addressed by communications
Private car use is perceived as offering personal freedom compared to sharing space on public transport
Private car use can be convenient as it enables door-to-door travel
Some people may not be able to access public transport easily
Driving may be quicker than alternatives
Public transport may be seen as cheaper than fuel costs for driving, especially on a journey-by-journey basis
Motivators addressed by communications
When maintenance, parking and fuel are factored in, public transport is often cheaper than driving over a longer period of time
As a passenger on public transport, you have free time to do whatever you like, instead of focusing on driving
Public transport can get passengers straight into town and city centres quickly and efficiently
Using public transport avoids the stresses associated with driving, like aggressive drivers and traffic jams
Multi-modal transport can help reduce the amount you drive and reduce geographic barriers
Active travel instead of driving has health and wellbeing benefits
Messaging often sought to challenge the belief that private car travel offers more personal freedom than public transport
A common theme in public transport promotional communications is around deconstructing the belief that travelling in a private car allows more personal freedom than shared travel options. Messaging may point out how certain aspects of private car travel which can limit personal freedom (such as having to concentrate on driving for the entire journey or having to find and pay for parking) have been normalised. The audience is prompted to consider whether an option such as bus or train travel could give them more control over how they choose to spend their journey.
Rail operators such as ScotRail (2025) and LNER (2024) have both focused on “freedom” as a theme in recent advertising campaigns targeting both commuters and leisure travellers. Both campaigns highlight the ways rail travellers can choose to use their journey time for work or leisure.
Figure 25: FirstBus #CarFree campaign materials
FirstBus (2024) ran a multimedia campaign in Glasgow which challenged the normalisation of private car travel with a creative concept based on a support group for “car addicts”. The campaign used humour to highlight the normalisation of negative aspects of driving, including expensive parking, road rage and high carbon emissions.
Messaging on cost encouraged drivers to consider wider costs of car ownership and longer periods of time
Public transport campaigns encouraged consumers to consider the savings offered by public transport over multiple journeys. ScotRail (2025) highlighted multi-journey savings, while FirstBus (2024) encouraged their audience to factor in other costs of driving, such as repairs, maintenance and parking, when comparing with public transport.
Figure 26: LNER promotional comms to choose the train
Public transport was often presented as a convenient option with direct access to city centres
Another frequent core communications proposition which enables public transport to be compared favourably to private car travel was convenience. Rail and bus operators highlight the frequency of services on major routes and the option to travel directly to town centres as an advantage (LNER, 2024) over both private car travel and flying.
Highlighting the stress of driving was a common message aimed at commuters
Related to the idea of challenging the perceived freedom of private car travel, this core communications proposition was focused more on the stresses of modern driving. Traffic delays and stressful encounters with other motorists are highlighted, with public transport presented as an alternative free from these issues. It encourages reflection on the stresses of driving and potentially primes the audience to consider a switch away from private car travel in future moments of stress. This core communications proposition featured in the ScotRail (2025), LNER (2024) and FirstBus (2024) campaigns.
Active travel is promoted as an alternative to driving with additional health and wellbeing benefits
Choosing to walk, wheel or cycle instead of driving is frequently promoted using a health and wellbeing framing. Messaging focuses on the benefits of fitting in more physical activity to overall health as well as mood and mental health. Campaigns such as Transform Scotland’s “A Wee Walk Works Wonders” (Transform Scotland, 2024) often incorporate this type of health and wellbeing framing, alongside messaging around saving money and reducing emissions.
Evaluation of the campaign found that the messages which highlighted health benefits and the fact that only a brief walk can make an impact were more memorable to audiences. Just over 6 in 10 (63%) of evaluation respondents spontaneously remembered the health and wellbeing message, whereas around 1 in 10 (11%) remembered the messaging around benefits to the climate (JRS, 2024)
Digital meetings are sometimes framed as an alternative to driving, which could prompt resistance to other target behaviours
Communications created by the Energy Saving Trust presents public transport and active travel as part of a hierarchy, with air travel and ICE vehicle travel as the most environmentally harmful (Energy Saving Trust, 2024). This notably includes digital communication (e.g. video calling) and presents this as being the least impactful option on the climate.
Figure 27: Active travel hierarchy from the Energy Savings Trust
While the overall narrative supports public transport and active travel as sustainable choices, and their online content highlights benefits of both, the idea that digital communication is also an alternative to travelling in person could potentially lead to online meetings or similar being viewed as competition to the target behaviour.
Multi-modal transport is presented as a way to reduce emissions, save money and fit in additional exercise
Another messaging theme which can reduce perceived barriers to driving less is multi-modal transport (such as park and ride schemes). Messaging encourages people who usually drive to explore ways to combine public transport, active travel and private car travel in order to reduce the amount of time they spend driving in favour of other options (Energy Saving Trust, 2024). This is presented as a way to mitigate geographic barriers (e.g. lack of access to public transport) as well as an option for those looking to try active travel without committing to long distances walking, wheeling or cycling.
Calls to action
Communications promoting public transport as an alternative to private car travel were often more direct in their calls to action than EV or heat pump communications. Frequently the main call to action was simply to try using public transport.
Try taking the train for leisure travel as well as commuting (or vice versa)
Use a route planner to find out how easy it could be to get to work with alternate transport
Compare pricing to find out whether public transport would be cheaper than driving (and parking) every day in a private car
Consider what you might be able to do with the free time on your commute if you went by public transport instead
– Hypotheses – message themes/territories
The following tables contain the list of hypotheses associated with each of the three behaviour sets. Each theme represents a particular message or idea intended to prompt consideration or warm-up action on the overarching target behaviour. These were developed from the desk research findings (see Appendix A). They served as a checklist to ensure media examples being considered for use in stimulus covered a broad range of themes and messages, and were also used to underpin development of the discussion guides and homework tasks.
Heat Pump
Messages /comms themes FOR Getting a Heat Pump
Saving money on heating bills
Financial incentives/ grants to switch to low-carbon heating
Quality of warmth and comfort from a heat pump
Reliability of heat pumps
Energy efficiency- protecting the environment through low-carbon heating
Low-carbon technology can improve the value of homes
Seeing that heat pumps are becoming more popular
Expecting gas heating to be phased out over the next few years
Installers can take care of all necessary work- making it easy to get a heat pump
There are benefits for the environment
Messages /comms themes AGAINST Getting a Heat Pump
Money and cost of the installation and retrofitting a home
Hassle/disruption of building work required
The hassle of having to do the research and make decisions
Being unsure if your home would be suitable for a heat pump
The familiarity of gas boilers over unfamiliar heat pumps- just don’t know enough about heat pumps
Scepticism about adopting new technology and whether it will work as advertised
Concerns about heat pumps being noisy and ugly
Lack of trust in reliability and independence of advice and providers
Concerns about the running costs compared to gas boilers
Electric vehicles
Messages /comms themes FOR Getting an Electric Vehicle
Financial incentives and support to buy an EV
The lower running and maintenance costs of EVs
Costs of EVs are coming down
The reduction in air pollution and helps the environment
Having clear access to the infrastructure needed for an EV
The range of EVs has improved a lot in recent years
Seeing that more and more people are getting EVs
Expecting petrol and diesel cars to be phased out over the next few years
Messages /comms themes AGAINST Getting an Electric vehicle
Expensive upfront costs
Lack of public charging availability
Domestic charging points are often not an option leading to higher charging expenses
Hassle of owning an EV – driving distance and charging times – compared to a standard petrol car
Nervousness about unfamiliar technology
Public Transport More Car Less
Messages /comms themes FOR Using Public Transport more and Your Car Less
Taking public transport can make travel (esp. in busy times) less stressful and more relaxing
Being able to make use of your journey time instead of having to concentrate on driving
With modern apps it is easier to plan journeys through public transport than ever
Scrapping of peak fares making rail travel cheaper at key times for commuting
Owning a vehicle is more expensive overall than travelling by public transport regularly
Environmental reasons to reduce car use
Messages /comms themes AGAINST Using Public Transport more and Your Car Less
Difficulty of breaking the habit of using the car- as car is part of daily routine
Low cost of a car day-to-day
Justifying the upfront cost of a car by using it
Unreliability of public transport
Hassle of using public transport compared to cars
Cars feel more comfortable and more convenient than public transport
– Methodology
ClimateXChange commissioned JRS to undertake this research. The work was split into four sequential phases:
Desk Research – reviewing existing evidence and communications encouraging people to take steps towards installing a heat pump, buying an EV, and/or using public transport more and driving less. This phase of the research was not conducted as a full academic literature review. It was a rapid evidence review that served to identify existing literature, evidence, and media and communications examples which could form the basis of the primary research. Particular focus was placed on:
Key barriers and motivating factors related to the key climate actions identified to prompt positive climate behaviours within similar audiences
Behavioural theories that help us to explain inaction to climate change and how these can be used to prompt change
The effect of different communications, i.e. what works and does not work to motivate positive climate action, looking at message framing and content
The resources were identified through discussion with the steering group and independent online searches. Online searches utilised Google Scholar for academic literature, and Google Search for media and messaging examples. The research team also had access to an existing bank of background materials accumulated over prior projects relating to communicating on climate change, and selected some sources for review directly from this. Scholar searches employed a range of climate change focussed search keywords/phrases including: ‘climate communications’, ‘climate action’, ‘intention-action gap’, ‘pluralistic ignorance’, ‘climate behaviours’, ‘climate action communication campaigns’, ‘climate action tipping points / moments of change’. Resources were drawn from current and recent (mostly from 2020 onwards) national and local Government publications and communications, research from academia, communications from third sector organisations, UK media articles, and communications / promotional material from organisations within the energy, car and transport industries.
An analysis framework was drawn up to identify key insights in relation to climate communication, messaging and framing and its impact on prompting people to take warm-up behaviours as the first steps toward larger changes in how they heat their homes and travel. The framework was populated using the following process:
Search conducted Google Scholar using selected keywords for academic sources. Compiled initial long list of media and communications examples using Google Search.
Supplementary sources were added from the research team’s existing bank of literature
Abstract and conclusions from each academic source were reviewed to filter out less relevant sources
Remaining academic sources were reviewed in depth to produce the final selection of 21
Final media and communications examples were selected based on relevance to insight from the selected academic sources
The findings were used to develop and refine a set of hypotheses about the potential effect of a range of message territories associated with of the core behavioural areas of focus. These provided a foundation for testing with research participants in the primary research (see Appendix A)
Qualitative research – to better understand consumer attitudes, beliefs and behaviours around the three target area behaviours and how communications can help encourage people to undertake warm-up actions / steps towards these target behaviours. A total of 6 online 90-minute group discussions took place, attended by 30 participants.
In the discussion groups, participants were asked to reflect on a range of past and current communications related to the three target behaviours, their attitudes towards these actions, what and where their moments of change would be for undertaking next steps/warm-up behaviours and the potential impact/efficacy of the hypotheses/ message territories developed from the desk research.
Sample
The sample focussed on people who agree that it is important to take climate action; are willing to take more action than they currently do; and state that money or other practical barriers do not present a meaningful barrier to them taking more action.
Specifically, the groups were set up to ensure that all respondents:
Had not seriously undertaken any of the core warm up behaviours in relation to one of the three core behaviours (installing a heat pump, buying an EV, and/or using public transport more and driving less)
In each group, had not seriously undertaken any of the core warm up behaviours in relation to at least one of the other two core behaviours
In this context, warm-up behaviours include:
Talking to friends/family/colleagues about the behaviour and or campaigns in relation to the relevant behaviour
Visiting relevant websites or comparison tools – either to take the relevant action or to determine if there is financial support available through government schemes in relation to the relevant behaviour
Doing further research on the topic of the relevant behaviour
Taking any other concrete steps towards the shift in behaviour
In addition to these behavioural aspects, the sample considered a mix of age, ethnicity, lifestage and urban versus rural living.
Group 1 – Heat pump
male/female mix
younger- 25-49yrs (pre kids/pre-teen kids only)
all to qualify for heat pump discussion
and to qualify for at least one of EV or drive less discussions
Group 2 – Heat pump
male/female mix
older- 50-75yrs (teen or older kids/no kids/empty nester)
all to qualify for heat pump discussion
and to qualify for at least one of EV or drive less discussions
Group 3 – EV
male/female mix
younger- 25-49yrs (pre kids/pre-teen kids only)
all to qualify for EV discussion
and to qualify for at least one of heat pump or drive less discussions
Group 4 – EV
male/female mix
older- 50-75yrs (teen or older kids/no kids/empty nester)
all to qualify for EV discussion
and to qualify for at least one of heat pump or drive less discussions
Group 5 – Drive less/public transport more
male/female mix
younger- 25-49yrs (pre kids/pre-teen kids only)
all to qualify for drive less/pt more discussion
and to qualify for at least one of heat pump or EV discussions
Group 6 – Drive less/public transport more
male/female mix
older- 50-75yrs (teen or older kids/no kids/empty nester)
all to qualify for drive less/pt more discussion
and to qualify for at least one of heat pump or EV discussions
Inclusiveness across sample:
recruited from across Scotland- urban and rural (note- it is unlikely that the very rural parts of Scotland will be represented much)
include target 5 me respondents
A two-part homework task
Research participants from phase 2 were asked to:
Reflect and think about what they’d been shown and discussed in the focus groups and how that made them think about the target and warm-up behaviours
Each group of participants were asked via an online survey -to reflect over a three-day period about the core behaviour sets/behaviours they had been discussing in their focus groups then fill out questions to probe their subsequent interest, desire, and motivation towards undertaking any next steps / warm up behaviours. The idea was that this would encourage respondents to stay at the moments of change created within the group discussions and to deeply consider relevant motivations and barriers at societal/collective; practical/rational; and individual emotional levels.
Then, a week after the first task, respondents were asked to consider taking warm-up actions for two behaviour sets – again via an online survey – and record their experience and thoughts on:
what they might/would do as a result of these actions
the associated communications and information encountered as part of the warm up actions
other communication examples encouraging warm up/key behaviour actions.
This homework task was designed to probe the role and potential impact/ efficacy of communications / communication elements.
In depth – 60 minute online – interviews with each of the research participants
These probed in detail their reflections on the whole research process – on what works and what does not work in climate communications and other relevant marketing in connection with each behaviour and associated warm-up actions. The discussions looked specifically at messaging content and framing; tone, style, and imagery; and who are relevant, credible and trusted messengers.
There were 27 people who participated in the homework and depth interviews:
Analysis
Client discussion and the findings from the desk review were used to develop:
A set of hypotheses for each of the three core behavioural areas of focus. Each hypothesis consisted of a statement about the potential for a particular message or proposition to prompt contemplation or action
The required discussion/topic guides, homework tasks and supporting stimulus material.
As each research phase progressed and moved to the next, the JRS research team followed a staged approach to analysis, with each moderator reviewing and analysing their own groups before coming together to discuss and synthesise findings.
How was ‘data’ gathered from participant reflections analysed?
At both stages of homework, participants’ notes were returned to JRS via an online survey platform, using WhatsApp or email
These were then distributed to the relevant researcher who undertook the final stage depth interview with the participant
From this, the individual JRS researchers supplemented their version of the hypotheses grid with insights gathered through the homework.
The JRS research team then came together to share their learnings from the initial group discussions and the homework exercise. The central hypotheses grid was then updated by the project lead, with all insights gathered.
This updated hypotheses grid was shared with the client team to provide the starting point for development of the topic guide and stimulus materials for use in the final stage of the primary research (depth interviews).
Use of Behavioural Theory
Throughout the research process we used behavioural theory to help us reflect on and analyse our findings. We used the:
Stages of Change Model (Prochaska & DiClemente, 1983) to help us think about where participants were on their journey to adopt a behaviour / undertake a warm-up action.
Theory of Planned Behaviour (Ajzen, I., 1991) to understand how different potential communications and messaging would affect participant attitudes, subjective norm and perceived behavioural norms and therefore their intention / likelihood to adopt a behaviour / undertake a warm-up action.
See Appendix D for a full explanation.
Research limitations
In the desk review, observations and insight were drawn from 21 resources. This was a short exercise to find and review relevant communications encouraging people to take steps towards installing a heat pump, buying an EV, and/or using public transport more and driving less. It was not a full literature review on the topic in question.
The qualitative methods delivered in the primary research offered in-depth insight into how individuals think and feel climate change actions and the role/impact of messaging and communications but with a sample of 30 participants it cannot tell us how many other people in the population feel or think in these ways.
Also, we were aware and recognised in running the follow-up depths and subsequent analysis that for the homework tasks the fact that the whole research exercise was about considering a range of warm-up behaviours will have influenced participant behaviours to a degree i.e. encountered the Hawthorne effect.
All the research adhered to UK GDPR legislation and the Market Research Society Code of Conduct.
– Use of behavioural theory
Stage of Change Model – A model for mapping behaviour change as a process
The Stages of Change Model (Prochaska & DiClemente, 1983), also known as the Transtheoretical Model, describes stages of behaviour change including: Pre-contemplation (not ready to change), Contemplation (considering change), Preparation (planning to change), Action (making changes), Maintenance (sustaining change), and Termination (no longer tempted). This model recognises that change is a process, not an event, and different strategies are effective at each stage.
In our research:
This proved to be useful in thinking about where people were at in terms of adopting a behaviour / undertaking warm up actions
Often, respondents were at the pre-contemplation stage, where they don’t see a need to do anything differently
The Action stage would be getting a heat pump, EV or changing your travel habits to drive less
Figure 28: The Stages of Change Model (Prochaska & DiClemente, 1983)
Preparation is where the warm-up behaviours take place
For the purposes of this project, we focussed on the first three stages in particular.
Theory of Planned behaviour – How we unpicked the impact of communications on intention and action
The theory of planned behaviour (Ajzen, I., 1991), outlines three key variables that affect people’s attitude-behaviour relationship:
The attitude toward the behaviour (the stronger the better)
Subjective norms (the support of those we value)
Perceived behavioural control (the extent to which we believe we can actually perform the behaviour).
These three factors jointly predict our intention to perform the behaviour, which in turn predicts our actual behaviour.
In our research:
For each communications hypothesis/theme, we looked at how these affected:
Attitudes and beliefs about the primary behaviour (Heat pumps/EVs/drive less)
Subjective norms associated with the primary behaviour
Perceived behavioural control
Challenging negative attitudes and building positive ones was a recurring theme throughout
Subjective norms are crucial. This was where pluralistic ignorance applied – where people believe others not to be taking action at scale
Notably, although we recruited participants based on the absence of practical/financial barriers, perceived behavioural control was often lower.
Figure 29: The theory of planned behaviour (Ajzen, I., 1991)
How to cite this publication:
Morton, C; Cuthbert, M; Fraser, L; Howick, M; Mowat, C. (2025) ‘Bridging the gap between climate concern and climate action’, ClimateXChange. DOI https://doi.org/10.7488/era/6842
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
This source was not specifically referred to by participants. It has been selected as an illustrative example of the type of media coverage which was discussed by focus group participants. ↑
Quote labels reference participant gender, socio economic classification and age bracket. ↑
Community benefits are additional benefits offered by renewable energy developers to support communities. Examples include community benefit funds and in-kind benefits provided by developers such as investment in local infrastructure improvements or funding for education programmes. Community benefits currently operate on a voluntary basis in Scotland. The Scottish Government has published Good Practice Principles for onshore and offshore energy in Scotland, which are currently under review.
Within the context of that overarching review, the primary aims of this research were:
To understand how different renewable energy technologies affect the provision of community benefits. This included developing and testing a socio-economic analysis framework to understand the factors that influence the nature and level of community benefits associated with different renewable energy technologies.
To understand how mandating community benefits could work in practice for onshore renewable energy technologies.
To help identify any necessary adjustments to Scotland’s current voluntary community benefits approach for onshore and offshore to better support communities and industry as part of a just transition.
The study methodology incorporated an evidence review, qualitative interviews, and the design and testing of a socio-economic analysis framework. This research focused on the factors influencing how different renewable energy technologies affect developers’ provision of community benefits, rather than on the experiences and perspectives of recipient communities. Interviews were therefore conducted with renewable energy developers.
The Scottish Government is gathering other non-industry perspectives on community benefits, including the views of community members, through a public consultation on the Good Practice Principles.
Understanding the ability of different technologies to offer community benefits
One of the ways this research explored how renewable energy technologies affected developers’ ability to offer community benefits was to develop and test a socio-economic analysis framework. This framework set out the parameters assumed to influence the level and nature of community benefits. An initial set of seven draft parameters were developed by the Scottish Government and the research team. Following an assessment of the feasibility of measurement and feedback from renewable energy developers, four parameters were recommended for further consideration (and which are subsequently referred to as “the framework”). These were:
Technology maturity (i.e. more mature technologies, with well-established supply chains and business models, may better allow developers to build community benefit provision into their project plans compared to newer technologies).
Market maturity (i.e. maturity may influence investor confidence, competition between developers, and certainty in supply chains which may in turn determine predictability of financial plans and therefore ability to deliver community benefits).
Deployment and operating costs (i.e. the costs associated with developing and operating different renewable energy technologies may impact the financial capacity to provide community benefits).
Revenue and profit (i.e. a project’s revenue and profit will impact on its overall financial viability which may impact on its ability to delivery community benefits).
This study identified significant challenges in developing a single framework to assess how different technologies affect developers’ provision of community benefit. For such a framework to work as a practical, decision-making tool, quantitative data on the economics of different renewable energy technology projects would be required. However, existing public data is sparse and of inadequate quality and many developers were unable or unwilling to share commercially sensitive data about their projects. A further limitation was that existing data (e.g. on the value of community benefits from individual renewable energy projects) is based on actual provision rather than an assessment of potential. Additionally, data available is largely historical and therefore challenging to use when anticipating new technologies and emerging economic and regulatory models.
However, it was clear from interviews with developers that the financial aspects of a renewable energy project (costs, revenue and financial viability) were key factors impacting community benefit levels. They noted that projects with higher amounts of revenue, and more robust and predictable financial returns are better positioned to offer significant community benefits. Conversely, if the financial viability of a development is low, then it is unlikely it can offer monetary community benefits without the project becoming non-viable. Developers noted that both technology maturity and market maturity can have an impact on a project’s financial viability and are therefore, indirectly, also linked to a project’s ability to deliver community benefits. However, this was based on qualitative interviews and was not possible to measure using quantitative data.
Developers also reported that it is easier to offer community benefits for projects involving more established technologies like onshore wind, compared to newer technologies, due to the latter’s comparatively lower profit margins. Less mature technologies (e.g., floating offshore wind, hydrogen) can have higher risks, higher delivery costs, less predictability in cost and performance, and lower investor confidence which can impact on their ability to offer benefits.
Although not necessarily directly impacting the level of benefit offered, developers identified community engagement as key factor for effective delivery. Developers emphasised the importance of levels of community engagement and capacity to effectively manage and deliver benefit funds. Interviewees highlighted the importance of community engagement, consultation and feedback in moulding community benefit initiatives, ensuring more meaningful and tailored contributions. This is difficult to quantify and would therefore be challenging to include in a socio-economic analysis framework.
How mandating community benefits could work in practice (for onshore renewable technologies)
The available literature does not enable a comparison of the real-world impacts of mandatory, as opposed to voluntary, provision of community benefits. Mandatory community benefits as part of renewable energy infrastructure development exist in Denmark and Ireland, specifically for wind projects. However, the literature reviewed does not allow for a satisfactory comparative analysis of the in-practice impacts of mandatory versus voluntary approaches.
Existing onshore developers felt that the following factors should be considered:
clear guidance on what the financial expectation attached to mandating is to avoid any potential for confusion;
allowing for the differences between individual onshore technologies to be taken into account;
retaining a degree of flexibility, particularly in terms of allowing for community benefits to be designed around the needs of communities;
avoiding overly burdensome processes. For example, in relation to restrictions on how communities should spend the money.
The power to mandate community benefits is reserved to the UK Government. In May 2025, the UK Government published a working paper seeking views on a mandatory community benefits scheme for low carbon energy and mechanisms for shared ownership of onshore renewables[1]. This includes the option to utilise existing powers to mandate offering shared ownership.
Any necessary adjustments to Scotland’s current voluntary community benefits approach for onshore and offshore
This research has not identified any obvious adjustments that need to be made to Scotland’s current community benefit approach.
The literature highlights that the Scottish Government is leading the way across the UK in highlighting the role of communities in the development of renewable projects. While there are examples in the literature of other approaches to community benefit provision outside of Scotland (e.g. in Ireland and Denmark), there is limited evidence directly comparing how different approaches have impacted the level of community benefits delivered. Therefore, there are no clear lessons from these international approaches suggesting a need to change the current approach in Scotland.
Guidance from the Scottish Government, in the form of Good Practice Principles and a recommended community benefit contribution of £5,000 per installed MW per year for onshore projects, was highlighted in interviews with developers as being a strength of the current process. They felt it provided a degree of predictability while also allowing for flexibility in application. However, for projects of emerging and/or non-generative technologies, developers noted that more targeted guidelines would be beneficial, noting that there is no established industry standard approach.
Conclusion and recommendations
The intention was that the framework examined in this study could inform policy decisions on the appropriate levels of community benefit for different renewable energy technologies. However, further development and more complete data is needed to be functional for this purpose. Collating the required data would need considerable resources and rely on information that developers perceive to be commercially sensitive. Considering data gaps, collection challenges, the difficulty in sourcing data specifically focused on future ability to offer benefits (rather than actual performance), further research and/or alternative approaches would be required. For these reasons, the approach explored here does not provide a robust enough evidence base to underpin a framework for use as a decision-making tool.
The report highlights existing measurement tools and guidance that can be used to understand where a project sits in relation to certain parameters, such as technology and market maturity. Further data collection work would be needed to make the most of these tools for robust socio-economic analysis. This would involve collecting relevant data for a large number of projects across metrics with established measurement tools. This would require a significant time and resource commitment and may not be a practical option.
To better understand how different renewable energy technologies affect developers’ provision of community benefits further research, beyond the financial indicators highlighted, would be needed. Considering the challenge of sourcing quantitative data on project economics, further qualitative research may be the most feasible option. Ideally this would be with a larger selection of developers across the full technology spectrum (including those that had not been able to deliver community benefits), direct engagement with communities, and wider stakeholder engagement (e.g. project investors, funders and other partners that have assisted in project development). This type of engagement would add to and build on the insights from developers gathered in this study.
Introduction
This report presents findings from research exploring opportunities for providing community benefits from renewable energy projects using different technologies in way that is fair and consistent. The research was carried out by Ipsos on behalf of ClimateXChange and the Scottish Government.
Background to the project
The Scottish Government has set ambitious targets for achieving net zero emissions by 2045, emphasising the importance of renewable energy technologies in this transition. The Climate Change Plan update (2020)[2] sets out Scotland’s ambition of a transformed energy system, which supports sustainable economic growth across all regions of Scotland.
Communities are at the heart of the energy transition in Scotland. Community benefits are additional benefits offered by renewable energy developers to support communities, offering them an opportunity to work with renewable energy businesses to secure long-term benefits. They provide an opportunity to share in the benefits of the energy resource and can have lasting social and economic impacts[3].
The Scottish Government published Good Practice Principles for the onshore[4] and offshore[5] energy sectors to outline how they can achieve a positive legacy for local communities. The approach and nature of community benefits operates on a voluntary basis in Scotland, with the guidelines allowing for flexibility in benefits arrangements offered by industry. Decisions on mandating community benefits are reserved to the UK Government. In May 2025, the UK Government published a Working Paper on community benefits and shared ownership for low carbon energy infrastructure, seeking views on whether mandating is the right approach and if so, to inform the design of future policy proposals.
Good Practice Principles have been widely adopted, but the approach to community benefits has not been wholly consistent across developments. In recognition of this, and of the rapidly changing sectoral and policy landscape, the Scottish Government is undertaking a review of the Good Practice Principles to ensure that guidance continues to help communities and developers get the best from community benefits.
This research sits within that overarching review. It was designed to help the Scottish Government understand more about different approaches to providing community benefits and to explore the opportunities for providing community benefits in future in a way that is fair and consistent for industry and communities. The findings from this research will help to inform a refresh of the Good Practice Principles.
Aims and objectives
The primary aims of this research were:
To understand how different renewable energy technologies affect developers’ provision of community benefits. This included developing and testing a socio-economic analysis framework to understand the factors that influence the nature and level of community benefits associated with different renewable energy technologies.
To understand how mandating community benefits could work in practice for onshore renewable energy technologies.
To help identify any necessary adjustments to the Scottish Government’s current voluntary community benefits approach for onshore and offshore to better support communities and industry as part of a just transition.
The findings aimed to support policy development and further refinement of guidelines and frameworks to help ensure that community benefits are effectively and fairly integrated into Scotland’s net zero energy system and strategy.
Methodology
The research involved a mix of desk research, qualitative interviews with developers and data analysis, as outlined below (detailed methodology is in Appendix A):
A desk-based evidence review that explored examples of community benefits from onshore and offshore renewable energy technologies in the UK and other countries. Literature sources reviewed included 12 peer reviewed academic papers, 20 reports, 2 guidance documents from grey literature (e.g., renewable energy developers, private consultancies) and 1 policy document. These were all published between 2011 and 2024, with 22 documents from the last 5 years.
Initial scoping interviews with four industry representative bodies to understand their views on current community benefit approaches and to explore options for sourcing data that could support socio-economic analysis on community benefits.
Design of a socio-economic analysis framework to help understand the factors which are likely to affect the level and nature of community benefits.
In-depth interviews with 21 industry developers from a range of renewable energy technologies (see Appendix A). As the focus was on how different renewable energy technologies affect provision of community benefits, qualitative research with developers was carried out to help understand the views of those with direct experience of working with projects and benefits. Interviews helped to understand industry perceptions towards community benefits arrangements, collect feedback on the proposed analytical framework, and to understand availability of relevant data for socio-economic analysis.
Assessment of the suitability of a framework to act as a tool for the Scottish Government to understand what type and level of community benefit may be suitable for different renewable energy technologies, based on data availability and feedback from interviews.
Definitions
Community benefits are defined in this research in line with the Scottish Government’s Good Practice Principles:
Community benefits are additional benefits, that are currently voluntary, which developers provide to the community. The Scottish Government does not currently have the power to legislate for community benefits, which lies with the UK Government. A community benefit fund is considered to be a fundamental component of a community benefit package, though other measures may be considered such as in-kind works, direct funding of projects, or any other voluntary site-specific benefits. Community benefits are not compensation for impacts on communities or other interests, including commercial interests, arising from renewable installations and they are not taken into account in a decision over whether a consent for a development is granted.
Community benefit in Scotland is distinct from shared ownership. Shared ownership provides community groups or members of a community the opportunity to make an investment in a commercially owned renewable energy project. This includes any structure which involves a community group as a financial partner benefitting over the lifetime of a renewable energy project. As shared ownership is not considered a form of community benefit in Scotland, it has not been included within this research.
In this report renewable energy technologies have been interpreted as the range of technologies outlined in the Scottish Government’s draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan[6]. This includes onshore wind, offshore wind (both floating and fixed), solar, hydro, pumped hydro storage, battery energy storage system (BESS), hydrogen, and carbon capture, utilisation and storage (CCUS).
Limitations
This study was limited by data availability. Existing public data (for example on community benefit values, project costs and revenue) is sparse and of inadequate quality to effectively measure the parameters within a socio-economic analysis framework. Many developers were unable or unwilling to share commercially sensitive data about their projects. A further limitation was that existing data (e.g. on the value of community benefits from individual renewable energy projects) is based on actual provision rather than an assessment of project’s potential capability. Additionally, existing data are largely historical and therefore challenging to use when anticipating new technologies and emerging economic and regulatory models. Consequently, data gaps mean it was not possible to develop a fully functioning socio-economic analysis framework as part of this study.
A further limitation is that this research draws on the views of a relatively small sample of developers. These represent one group of perspectives on community benefits, albeit from different organisations, working with different technologies. Non-industry perspectives, including those of community members themselves, were not included in the remit of this study and would not be expected to fill the data gaps highlighted above.
Current community benefit arrangements
This chapter details the current arrangements for delivering community benefits, based on findings from the literature and from the qualitative interviews with renewable energy technology developers. At various points, examples of community benefit projects identified in the literature are shown to help illustrate the findings.
Key findings
The literature highlights that the Scottish Government is leading the way across the UK in highlighting the role of communities in the development of renewable projects and in providing good practice guidelines.
Community benefits from renewable energy projects in the UK mainly involve community benefit funds[7], but there are also examples of in-kind benefits such as investment in education and infrastructure programmes. Community benefit funds are not as extensively adopted outside of the UK.
Onshore wind has more established community benefit practices than other onshore and offshore technologies. However, a key similarity is that all projects, regardless of technology, tended to adopt both community benefits funds and in-kind contributions.
There is limited evidence directly comparing how different approaches in the UK and in other countries have impacted the level of community benefits delivered.
Guidelines for community benefits
According to the reviewed literature, the Scottish Government is leading the way across the UK in highlighting the role of communities in the development of renewable projects. The Good Practice Principles for Community Benefits from Onshore Renewable Energy Developments (updated in 2019) and the draft Good Practice Principles for Community Benefits from Offshore Renewable Energy Developments (2018) outline how the energy sector can achieve a positive, lasting legacy for local communities, and a range of successful community benefit projects have been implemented to date.[8] These guidelines have been widely adopted across the renewables industry, providing best practice for the sector.[9]
The voluntary guidelines suggest practices like conducting impact studies to identify affected communities, engaging in consultations, and tailoring benefits to local context and needs. These principles aim to ensure benefits are well-targeted and meet community expectations, which could be seen as markers of a well-designed scheme.[10]
Example 1.
Beatrice Offshore Windfarm’s Community Benefits Fund used the Scottish Government’s Good Practice Principles to guide the development of the fund. The Beatrice Community Benefits Fund also undertook innovative analysis of the potential wider impacts of the community benefits funding, using a Social Return on Investment methodology.[11] This illustrates the ability of the Good Practice Principles to be applied alongside other models and approaches.
In Scotland, the Scottish Government also established the Community Benefits Register,[12] managed by Local Energy Scotland. It can be viewed online and offers a form of third-party reporting and public recognition.[13] Best practice guidance also exists in England, Ireland, the Netherlands and Germany (see Table 2 in Appendix B).
Approaches used in the UK and elsewhere
The literature provided examples of different approaches to designing and implementing community benefits schemes. However, most examples are from onshore wind farms, with some examples given from offshore wind technologies. There is very little to no reference to other renewable technologies such as hydrogen, hydro, solar, wave, thermal, or BESS.
Community benefit mechanisms referred to in the literature included[14]:
Financial contributions to a community benefit fund, to be used as directed by the community to invest in local initiatives[15];
In-kind contributions to local infrastructure, facilities, or services[16];
Grants, scholarships, or donations to support community initiatives[17];
Electricity discounts or subsidies for local residents[18];
Provision of environmental or recreational amenities.[19]
While these approaches share many similarities, there are some notable differences and ambiguities. These include varying interpretations of what constitutes the “local community” (especially for offshore projects)[20] and differing emphasis on the rationale for providing benefits (e.g., impact mitigation).
This section describes the different approaches to community benefits in more detail. Differences between the UK and other countries are noted, where available.
Community benefit funds
Community benefits from renewable energy projects in the UK are primarily delivered through community benefit funds. The UK onshore wind industry, in particular, has well established approaches for this.[21] Through this mechanism, developers voluntarily contribute a certain amount of funding to local communities. In some cases, the level of funding is linked to the amount of installed capacity of the project or the amount of energy produced. For example, in Scotland, it is the industry norm for onshore wind projects to typically deliver £5,000 per megawatt (MW) of installed capacity per year in alignment with the Good Practice Principles for Onshore Renewable Energy Developments.[22] However, the per MW model is not the only approach used and the total amount provided is based on the agreement between the developers and the community.
Example 2.
Crossdykes Wind Farm near Lockerbie, Scotland (developed by Muirhall Energy) offered an industry-leading £7,000 per MW per year for a community benefit fund, well above the industry standard of £5,000 per MW per year. The project provided an Initial Investment Fund of £100,000 to support community projects during the wind farm’s construction phase, showing a proactive effort to deliver early benefits.
Example 3.
Brechfa Forest West Wind Farm in Wales (owned by RWE Renewables), is an example of a community-administered community benefit fund which is expected to provide £11 million in community benefit funding, administered by the local enterprise agency and a volunteer panel of residents.[23]
Regarding offshore wind, the concept of community benefits in the UK is relatively newer and more flexible than for onshore, reflecting the evolving nature of the industry.[24] Some, predominantly near-shore English and Welsh wind farms (e.g. North Hoyle and Rhyll Flats off the North Wales coast) have followed the pattern of the onshore wind farms, with benefits pro rata to MW size, although at a much lower rate.[25] However, in many cases, and for some of the large North Sea distant offshore wind farms, the benefits packages have been more ad hoc and much smaller (pro rata) than for onshore projects.[26] Several challenges have been identified with providing community benefits funds for offshore wind projects, including defining the relevant community to be targeted.[27]
Example 4.
The Hornsea/Race Bank East Coast Community Fund, off the Norfolk coast, is managed independently by a specialist grant-making charity, GrantScape, on behalf of the developer Orsted. This enables an arms-length, transparent allocation process.[28]
According to a number of the literature sources, allocation and spending of community benefit funds are usually determined by developers, in collaboration with the local communities, often through local trusts or organisations. Developers often strive to tailor the benefits based on local priorities identified through community engagement.[29] Community benefit funds can take different forms, ranging from local funds – investments in communities nearest to developments to enhance services, assets and activities of residents – to regional funds – investment in transformational projects to provide socio-economic growth for wider communities.[30]
The evidence reviewed suggests that community benefit funds are not as extensively adopted outside of the UK. There are some instances of community benefit funds in Europe. Notably, in Denmark, from 2008-2018, the state-run “Green Scheme” mandated payments per kilowatt per hour of production to host communities. As of 2020, Danish developers must pay fixed amounts per MW installed into green funds for affected municipalities under the “Green Pool” scheme and make annual payments to neighbouring residents under the “VE-Bonus” scheme, with amounts determined by the Danish Energy Agency.[31] In Ireland, renewable energy auctions require developers to contribute €2 per MW hour to a community benefit fund, with defined spending allocations.[32]
Among the developers interviewed for this research, flexible community benefit funds were the most common approach being taken to community benefits in Scotland. The exact sum delivered through these funds varies project-by-project. Onshore wind developers said that they follow, and often exceed, the Good Practice Principles guidelines of £5,000 per MW per year. For other technologies, which developers said often have greater financial uncertainty and/or smaller margins than onshore wind, the levels of community benefit are less predictable. Developers said that the level of benefit is often closely linked to the project’s costs and financial returns, which varies.
“We typically work backwards from what we think the returns in the scheme are going to look like. And that’s very site specific, dependent on abnormal costs, grid costs, land rights costs…Depending on what that looks like, we’ll then generate a number to determine what we can reasonably offer local communities.” – BESS developer
In a number of cases, these funds are administered by Foundation Scotland, a charitable organisation that helps to support communities to set up, manage and distribute their funding. This has particularly been the case where local communities may lack the capacity to manage significant financial resources independently. Some projects also have established their own governance arrangements, involving boards constituted of local community members to determine the allocation of these funds.
Other community benefit mechanisms
Other examples of community benefits mechanisms that appeared in the literature include tax revenues or fiscal contributions from wind farm developers, which go directly into funding local infrastructure and community services. From the documents reviewed, this is common practice in Germany, Poland, Croatia, France and Italy. [33]
Example 5.
The Block Island offshore wind farm development in Rhode Island, USA, is an example of fiscal contributions being made to support local infrastructure. In this case, a formal Community Benefit Agreement was developed in which the wind farm company pays for improvements to town infrastructure where the cable comes ashore. This project was also highlighted in the literature as an example of community engagement resulting in locally appropriate community benefits and high levels of support for the development from the local community. As part of the public consultation on the project proposals, the developer, Deepwater Wind, collaborated with the town council to invite stakeholders and hired consultants from the local community to represent local interests. This helped establish trust and perceptions of fairness in the process.[34]
The literature also identified Australian examples of neighbourhood benefit programmes.[35] These programmes aim to address concerns around fairness that can arise when local residents receive no direct benefits from a renewable energy project which affects their experience of their place and community.[36] Examples of the types of benefits provided via these neighbourhood benefit programmes include support towards home energy efficiency measures, the installation of residential solar PV, and contributions to electricity bills for neighbours or neighbourhood community facilities (e.g. local hall, local fire-fighting facilities).
The reviewed literature suggests that the involvement of local authorities in the delivery of community benefits varies by country. In some European countries (including Denmark, Germany, France, Italy and Spain), the local municipality plays a significant role and often decides funding priorities of community benefits. In the UK and Ireland, local authorities generally decline involvement to avoid conflicts of interest in the planning process. However, Highland Council recently set out plans for a different approach to community benefit decision making and fund distribution and Shetland Council approved a new set of principles around community benefit.
Developers interviewed also described the types of in-kind benefits they offer communities. Examples included:
Employment and education programmes. This includes providing funding towards training in green technologies, especially in areas that are reliant on traditional energy industries rather than renewable energy.
Electricity discount schemes, with money coming off local residents’ bills.
Investment in environmental and net zero initiatives, including activities designed to reduce carbon footprint and support biodiversity in communities, along with awareness-raising around these issues.
Infrastructure improvements such as broadband access, roads and pathways, and community recreational facilities.
Impact of different approaches on the level of community benefits delivered
Based on the literature reviewed, there is limited evidence directly comparing how the different approaches in the UK and in other countries have impacted the level of community benefits delivered.
Among the documents reviewed, the only source that explicitly offers comparative analysis between approaches in the UK and European countries was the Department of Trade and Industry report conducted by the Centre for Sustainable Energy, which involved detailed case studies of major wind farms in the UK, Germany, Denmark, Ireland and Spain. The following points are drawn exclusively from this report:
The overall levels of benefits accruing to communities from wind projects in Denmark, Spain and Germany tend to be higher than in the UK. However, it is important to note that in such countries, community benefits are mostly associated with shared ownership practices, and therefore economic and financial benefits are linked to those practices. Shared ownership is not included in the Scottish Government definition of community benefits and it is also worth noting that developments outside of the UK will have different policy contexts and market conditions to those in the UK, making it difficult to directly compare.
While the authors do not find robust evidence that higher benefits directly lead to higher levels of support for developments, they suggest that they are likely an important factor in sustaining long-term acceptance of projects.
Lessons from community benefits projects
Common themes emerged from the literature and interviews around what constitutes good practice in community benefit:
Early community engagement. Establishing trust, building relationships with local residents and identifying concerns and priorities early on can lead to smoother running of the project and help dispel fears of community members early on.[37]
Ensuringcommunity representation in the co-design and administration of community benefits[38] as this can help establish trust and lead to higher levels of sustained support for the project.[39]
Providing broad and flexible community benefit. Literature and interviews highlighted the value of funds being used to support a wide range of community priorities like infrastructure, schools, housing, elderly care, environment, etc. that improve quality of life for residents.[40]
Community capacity was noted by developers as a factor that can impact on their ability to deliver community benefits. Not all communities were seen to have the resources or expertise needed to administer funds efficiently. They noted that the existence of strong community councils or Community Development Officers to help generate ideas have helped contribute to successful community benefit funds.
Ensuring transparency of communication and providing full information to communities through trusted messengers is seen in the literature as a crucial step in securing support from communities.[41]
The reviewed literature also suggests that formalising benefit commitments and monitoringprogress can promote accountability and sustainability over the long-term. It helps ensure developers deliver on promises made to communities.[42]
There is also evidence that partnering and aligning with local government, NGOs and other companies allows projects to leverage additional resources and maximise the scale and impact of their community investments.[43]
Understanding how different renewable energy technologies affect the ability to offer community benefits
One of the ways this research explored how renewable energy technologies affect the level of community benefits offered by developers was to develop and test a socio-economic analysis framework. This framework set out the parameters assumed to influence the level and nature of community benefits provided. This chapter outlines the steps taken to develop and test a framework and the extent to which this tool could help to understand how different renewable energy technologies affect the level community benefits provided by developers.
Key findings
Within the scope of this study, the available evidence did not support a single framework to robustly determine how different technologies affect the provision of community benefits. For such a framework to work as a practical, decision-making tool, quantitative data on the economics of different renewable energy technology projects would be required. However, existing public data is insufficient to effectively measure the parameters in the framework, and it was not possible within this study to gather the level of quantitative data that would be needed for robust socio-economic analysis.
However, it was clear from the interviews with developers that the financial aspects of a renewable energy project (costs, revenue and financial viability) were key factors impacting community benefit levels.
Developers’ feedback also highlighted that it is easier to offer community benefits for projects involving more established technologies like onshore wind, compared to other technologies (e.g. offshore wind, solar and battery storage) due to the latter’s comparatively low profit margins.
Original framework parameters
The initial parameters identified at the scoping phase of the project are outlined in Table 1. The following section sets out the feedback received from developers in response to this framework, and the extent to which these parameters are measurable within a framework.
Table 1 Initial list of identified parameters affecting provision of community benefits
Parameter
Justification for inclusion
Technology maturity
More mature technologies like onshore wind and solar PV have well-established supply chains and business models, allowing for community benefit provision to be built in to project plans. The more mature technologies are also more reliable in terms of return on investment (ROI), than less mature technologies. Emerging technologies have less predictability in costs and revenues, affecting community benefit schemes and their provision.
Market maturity
The level of market maturity can determine the provision of community benefits by influencing investor confidence, increased competition between developers, robust supply chains and solidified regulatory frameworks. These all determine predictable project economics and financial plans, increasing the likelihood and scale of community benefits being provided.
Project size/energy yield
The energy yield of a project is a critical factor that can influence the revenue and, consequently, the level of community benefits provided. Smaller projects may have small absolute margins and so may be less able to provide the same level of community benefits as larger projects.
Deployment and operating costs
The costs associated with developing and operating different renewable energy technologies can impact the financial capacity to provide community benefits. If one technology has higher upfront costs or operating expenses, this might reduce the scope of benefits a developer can offer, as well as the timing of delivering these benefits.
Revenue and profit
The amount of revenue generated by a project, or the profits it generates, could also have an impact on a project’s ability to deliver community benefit and on the level and nature of community benefits that can be delivered.
Land use, visual, environmental and social impacts
Wind farms, especially onshore ones, can have a significant visual impact and may occupy large areas of land which can influence the local community’s perception, and the level of benefits expected. This may differ for offshore wind. It may also influence the type of community benefit provided (environmental, social, economic). In contrast, solar PV installations typically are less sensitive to visual impacts than wind turbines but could be associated with higher land use impacts.
Wider economic impact of the project and its distribution
The economic returns from projects may also influence the level of benefits provided through community benefit schemes. Projects which require a large workforce for ongoing maintenance and operation will provide economic benefits to the local area through jobs and investment which is multiplied through other sectors and amenities required by residents. It can be theorised that a developer’s contribution to the wider economy may reduce their overall willingness to community benefit commitments, though it is unlikely that this contribution would affect their ability to provide monetary commitments.
Community benefit value
There is a lack of data on the level of community benefits offered by renewable energy projects. The Local Energy Scotland Community Benefits Register is currently the most comprehensive data source for capturing the community benefits monetary measures. However, this is not exhaustive and does not cover the full range of renewable energy technologies.
Further steps were therefore taken to identify additional and more up-to-date data for this research. Firstly, data was requested from developers taking part in interviews, but not all were willing or able to share this (either because they could not access the data, or due to commercial sensitivities). Secondly, online searching for publicly available information on monetary values of community benefits was carried out. While data for some projects is available publicly, this requires a significant time commitment to source since it is not held in a central source nor in a consistent format. Therefore, data gaps remained after taking these steps. For the framework to be robust, a more complete set of data on community benefit value is required.
Technology maturity
Technological maturity is a widely used metric for gauging a technology’s development and readiness for deployment.
Developers generally felt that this could have an impact on the viability of a project, and as a result affect the level of community benefits. Some agreed that, compared to mature technologies (e.g., onshore wind), technologies such as floating offshore wind, BESS and hydrogen can have higher risks, higher delivery costs, less predictability in cost and performance and lower investor confidence. However, some onshore wind developers argued that more mature technologies do not always have more secure financial models because recent cost increases in their supply chains have made viability harder to predict.
Technology maturity is suitable for quantitative measurement using the NASA Technology Readiness Level (TRL) scale (see Appendix E for details). To accurately assess a technology’s TRL, it is recommended that individual projects are approached directly for scoring, as they may employ different versions of the technology. If direct assessment is not possible, it would be possible to utilise the International Energy Agency’s ETP Clean Energy Technology Guide, which evaluates and provides comprehensive information on each technology’s current development stage across the energy system.
This parameter could be included in a socio-economic analysis framework, provided there was sufficient data available or one of the existing guides outlined above could be used.
Market maturity
Factors influencing market maturity include established supply chains, business models and supporting physical and regulatory infrastructure (ports for deployment of offshore wind, standards for solar farms, etc.).
Developers felt that emerging technologies and immature markets face difficulties determining an appropriate level of community benefits because of uncertainty around securing investment and finances. However, some onshore wind developers also noted that their more mature market can still experience challenges with supply chains, especially in relation to costs of deployment (e.g. turbine costs have increased).
Market maturity could be measured using existing tools. The Adoption Readiness Level (ARL) framework, developed by the U.S. Department of Energy, is a tool for assessing the commercialisation risks of new technologies. It helps identify potential roadblocks to market adoption, such as cost-competitiveness, regulatory landscape, public perception and infrastructure availability. It also helps evaluate market demand by identifying the target market, understanding customer needs, and assessing the competitive landscape.
The ideal approach to understanding this parameter would involve project-level assessments via direct engagement with project owners, using the scoring framework available online[44]. However, given the large number of projects, this endeavour would be challenging. The decision to pursue this should weigh the uncertainties about the parameter’s significance in determining community benefits, with the time commitment needed to collect this information.
This parameter would be suitable to include in a socio-economic analysis framework, but the ability to source the level of data required is challenging.
Project size or energy yield
This measure is quantifiable, based on the level of energy capacity installed for each project expressed in MW. This data is available on the Local Energy Scotland’s Community Benefit Register and the Renewable Energy Planning Database (REPD). To enable a comparison between different technologies, it is important to convert installed capacity to expected energy yield as each technology has different levels of efficiency.
Capacity and energy yield are both inputs in the estimation of gross revenue. Therefore, inclusion of these metrics as stand-alone parameters in the framework would be duplicative and would correlate very highly with any revenue estimations. For this reason, these metrics would not need to act as stand-alone parameters in an analysis framework but could be used as inputs to the revenue estimation.
Deployment and operating costs
The total costs of developing and operating a renewable energy project captures an important financial aspect assumed to influence the level of community benefit commitment.
Developers noted that the developmental and operating costs impact the financial capacity for a project to provide community benefit. As with revenue, obtaining precise cost figures would involve direct input from project owners. Again, due to commercial sensitivities and challenges in accessing this data, estimating total cost of production might need to rely on publicly available sources. This can be done for a selection of technologies using the Department for Energy Security and Net Zero’s Levelised Cost of Electricity (LCOE) estimates.[45] It is worth noting that not all REPD project technologies are included in this resource, and hence, some projects will require mapping to the closest matching technology category. Despite this challenge, a basic methodology for estimating LCOE from generation technologies is outlined in Appendix D.
When looking at non-generation projects, i.e. storage projects, it is important to reflect the differences to generation projects in the calculation of costs. An analogous version of the LCOE is the Levelised Cost of Storage (LCOS), which uses charging cost as fuel cost and uses the discharged electricity instead of generated electricity. Given the lack of access to the necessary data it is not possible to accurately estimate LCOS for storage projects.
Given that project costs provide a direct link to the financial aspects that are assumed to influence community benefits, it is recommended to include this parameter in a socio-economic analysis framework.
Revenue and profit
Developers agreed that the amount of revenue generated by a project has an impact on their ability to deliver community benefits and the level of community benefits that can be offered.
Ideally, obtaining precise revenue figures would involve direct input from project owners. However, due to commercial sensitivities and challenges in accessing data, estimating revenue might need to rely on publicly available sources. It is important to note that this approach is based on significant assumptions that might not hold true over time. Estimating future revenues is particularly challenging because it depends on projected electricity prices, which are notoriously difficult to predict with accuracy or extend into the future. Despite these challenges, a basic methodology for estimating revenues from generation technologies is outlined in Appendix D.
When it comes to non-generation projects, revenue estimation becomes even more complex and uncertain. These types of projects may involve diverse sources of income and variables, requiring a more nuanced approach to estimation. Battery storage projects generate revenue through a variety of mechanisms, often stacked together to maximise returns. Key revenue streams include arbitrage (buying electricity when prices are low and selling it back to the grid when prices are high), grid services (e.g. frequency regulation, voltage support), capacity market participation and ancillary services (e.g. black start capability). The lack of publicly available data for each of these revenue streams make it challenging to estimate revenue for non-generation projects.
Given that revenue estimation provides a direct link to the financial aspects that are assumed to influence community benefits, it is recommended that consideration is given to including this parameter in a socio-economic analysis framework.
Land use, visual and environmental impacts
There are several challenges associated with quantitatively measuring land use, visual, environmental and social impacts:
Quantifying land use involves assessing the physical footprint of a project, which can vary significantly based on the type and scale of the renewable technology employed. Further challenges arise in comparing land use impacts across different technologies, such as wind farms versus solar arrays, as each may occupy land differently (e.g., spacing between wind turbines versus solar panel coverage). These differences between technologies were also noted by developers.
Visual impact assessments are inherently subjective and can vary depending on individual perspectives and local landscape characteristics. Moreover, accurately quantifying visual impacts requires sophisticated modelling tools and surveys that consider factors like visibility range, landscape context, and viewer sensitivity.
Comprehensive environmental impacts involve a multitude of factors, including potential effects on local wildlife, ecosystems, water resources, and biodiversity. Data collection for environmental impacts may be inconsistent and require long-term monitoring to capture seasonal or cumulative effects accurately.
Social impacts can include effects on local communities, employment opportunities, and cultural shifts, which are difficult to measure quantitatively and may require qualitative research approaches. In addition, assessing social impacts often involves engaging with communities and stakeholders, which can introduce variability and complexity in data collection and interpretation.
Each of these aspects often interacts with others, making it challenging to isolate and assess impacts individually without considering cumulative or synergistic effects. Variability in methodologies and data availability can also lead to inconsistent measurements and comparisons.
For these reasons, this parameter is not suitable for a socio-economic analysis framework.
Wider economic impact of the project and its distribution
Renewable energy projects, especially large-scale ones, often generate significant economic benefits. For example, they may create high-value jobs through operation and maintenance, enhance the local supply chain and attract inward investments. These contributions can lead to substantial regional development and improved economic resilience.
However, there are notable challenges in confining these benefits strictly to the local communities most directly impacted by the projects. Economic effects often extend beyond the immediate vicinity. Moreover, quantifying these impacts presents difficulties, often necessitating self-reported data from projects. Such data can be subject to bias and may not fully capture the comprehensive economic changes occurring in the region. These challenges were reflected in interviews with developers. They noted that projects can add a lot of value to an area through high-value jobs, contribution to the supply chain and driving inward investment. However, they noted that it would be difficult to define this parameter, since the economic impacts may not be contained to the specific community in question. Projects can also incur wider costs, such as seabed option fees and rental fees for offshore wind renewable energy developments and these funds can have a wider economic impact.
Additionally, this metric’s applicability varies with different project types. For instance, projects involving CCUS often repurpose existing infrastructure, without necessitating a new workforce. As a result, the direct local economic impacts of such projects might be limited, underscoring the need for careful consideration when using this metric to assess community benefit commitments.
Wider economic impact provides a valuable lens for understanding potential benefits. However, the challenges and variability associated with measuring and applying this parameter across project types should be carefully evaluated to ensure fair, accurate and consistent community benefit determinations. For these reasons, this parameter is not suitable for a socio-economic analysis framework.
Community involvement and capacity
During interviews, developers suggested that community involvement and capacity influence the ability to provide community benefits and should be considered as part of a framework. This parameter focuses on the role of communities in both shaping and managing the benefits derived from renewable energy projects. Interviewees highlighted that placing community needs at the core is essential for ensuring that the type and level of benefits align with local priorities. They emphasised the importance of community engagement, consultation, and feedback in moulding these initiatives, arguing that this involvement leads to more meaningful and tailored contributions.
Additionally, while not directly impacting a developer’s ability to offer community benefit, the capacity of communities to effectively manage and deliver agreed benefits was seen as important. Interviewees pointed out that variations in the size and organisation of community councils or other community groups can significantly impact their ability to administer benefits. Hence, recognising these differences allows developers to support and enhance the local capacity, fostering increased participation and benefit realisation from the projects.
However, there are several challenges to quantitatively measuring these aspects. Quantifying community engagement and feedback is subjective, as perceptions of effective engagement vary among stakeholders. Communities often have diverse and evolving needs, making standardisation difficult. Additionally, while the number of consultations can be counted, assessing their quality requires qualitative data, which is harder to quantify. Asking the community to accurately capture and record this data would put significant burden on individuals who quite often are volunteers in the community. Moreover, community needs can change over time, necessitating ongoing updates and flexible metrics.
Due to these challenges, it is not recommended to include this parameter as a stand-alone element in a socio-economic analysis framework.
Conclusion
Following the assessment outlined above, four parameters were deemed suitable to be considered in a socio-economic analysis framework. These were:
Technology maturity
Market maturity
Deployment and operating costs
Revenue and profit.
To demonstrate how a framework could be used in future, socio-economic analysis has been carried out based on a sample of data on renewable energy projects (see Appendix C). The parameters in scope of this analysis are restricted to those which have been deemed feasible to measure and for which a suitable method to measure them has been identified. This analysis is based on data available from the Community Benefits Register Database, supplemented with additional data sourced through desk research. Due to the data sources available, it only includes onshore wind, offshore wind and hydro technologies.
Key findings from that analysis are:
Industry alignment and policy influence: While many onshore wind and hydro projects in Scotland are clustering around the recommended annual £5,000 per MW capacity for community benefits for onshore technologies, more than half of the onshore wind and hydro projects analysed in the available data set commit less than the recommended amount.
Revenue-benefit correlation: A positive correlation exists between gross project revenue and total community benefit commitments, with larger projects providing bigger packages. However, this relationship weakens for high-revenue projects, suggesting a potential plateau effect.
Costs and benefit packages: There is a positive correlation between total cost of production and total community benefit packages across all project sizes, suggesting that as total costs increase, so does the size of the overall commitment to community benefits. While this may appear contrary to the views of developers shown earlier (i.e. those who said that high costs can impact on financial viability and therefore their ability to offer community benefits) it should be noted that this data analysis is based only on projects already providing monetary benefits. It excludes those that had not yet provided any community benefits. It can therefore be assumed that the dataset excludes those projects that were deemed not financially viable enough to enable community benefit provision.
In interpreting these findings and considering next steps it is important to acknowledge the distinction between the willingness of projects (measured by actual provision) to provide community benefits and their ability to provide community benefits. The analysis above is based on actual provision of community benefits. It could be assumed that these commitments are indicative of both willingness and some inferred level of ability, but the data does not allow for an assessment of the capability of projects (and different technologies) to offer these benefits. The UK Government’s Contracts for Difference (CfD) scheme is the main support mechanism for renewable energy projects. It is important to acknowledge that although community benefit funds are not recognised costs in the CfD framework, they are often treated as part of a project’s overall cost base and priced in to CfD bids.
Robust analysis of the capability to provide community benefits would require detailed project-level data. To collate the data needed will require considerable resources and will also require renewable energy technology developers to share data they perceive as commercially sensitive, which may be unrealistic. This work has highlighted considerable data gaps, challenges collecting data in the future and difficulty in sourcing data specifically focused on future ability to offer community benefits rather than actual performance. Therefore, the approach explored here does not provide a robust enough evidence base to underpin a framework for use as a decision-making tool.
To better understand the capacity for projects to provide community benefits, it is suggested that further research and / or alternative approaches may be needed. This could take the form of qualitative research with a larger selection of projects across the full technology spectrum, to understand perceived barriers or enablers of moving from willingness to ability. This should offer insights into the practical challenges faced by projects. Longitudinal case studies may prove beneficial to understand how changes in policy, economic conditions or market incentives could have influenced both the willingness and perceived capacity to make these commitments.
Exploring mandatory community benefit arrangements
This chapter looks at current approaches to mandating found in the evidence review and the views of the industry on how mandating community benefits for onshore technologies could work in practice, based on qualitative research with developers.
Key findings
Mandatory community benefits approaches exist in Denmark and Ireland, as part of renewable energy infrastructure development for wind projects. However, the literature reviewed does not allow for a satisfactory comparative analysis of the in-practice impacts of mandatory versus voluntary approaches.
Existing onshore developers felt that the following factors would need to be considered for mandating to work in practice:
clear guidance on the financial expectation attached to mandating
accounting for differences between individual onshore technologies
retaining a degree of flexibility, particularly in terms of the ability for community benefits to be designed around the needs of communities
avoiding overly burdensome processes.
Current approaches to mandating community benefits
Mandatory community benefits as part of net zero energy infrastructure development exist in Denmark and Ireland, specifically for onshore and offshore wind projects. Other countries have mandated approaches for shared ownership, special taxes, energy subsidies, or monetary compensations, but not community benefits as defined here. This includes Germany, France, Taiwan, and the Philippines [46].
Denmark has a history of various mandates relating to community benefits. For example, until 2018, the “Green Scheme” required the Danish state to pay hosting communities a fixed amount per kWh of production from new turbines. This applied to offshore wind farms built outside the tender process and within 8km of shore.[47] More recently, as of June 2020, regulations require offshore wind developers to pay fixed amounts per MW installed into green funds for affected municipalities. The payment is DKK 115,000 per MW (around €15,500).[48] Additionally, in Ireland, renewable energy auctions mandate that developers contribute €2/MWh to a community benefit fund, with defined criteria for how the funds must be spent.[49]
Other mandated approaches similar to community benefits include special taxes imposed on developers, that are distributed to local authorities, and electricity subsidies for “host communities”. The former approach has been implemented in France and Germany. The French Maritime Wind Turbine Tax is imposed on offshore wind farms, and is allocated to local authorities to finance local projects, per a defined formula. Germany requires that tax revenue generated from offshore wind farms in the Exclusive Economic Zone is distributed to coastal states. Energy subsidies for host communities have been implemented in the Philippines and Taiwan. Since 2008, the Philippines has required that 80% of money generated from royalties, or government shares in renewable projects, must be used to subsidise the electricity costs of communities affected by these projects.[50] In Taiwan, the Electricity Assistance Fund (EAF) is distributed to communities affected by power plant projects (including, but not limited to renewable energy) according to a pre-defined formula. For example, in the case of offshore wind, 30% of EAF funds are provided to “local project fund pools” for the benefit of residents, community groups, and civil society organisations, and 70% is provided for councils and fishery associations.[51]
Although shared ownership is seen distinct from community benefits in Scotland, some other countries have mandated shared ownership or compensation payments. For example, in Denmark, the 2008 Renewable Energy Act mandated developers to offer at least 20% of shares in wind projects for sale to local households within 4.5km of a turbine.[52] Similarly, in Germany, several states have required that between 10% and 25% of wind farm shares be offered to local residents and municipalities. Mandated compensation payments to nearby residents and community funds have been implemented in Denmark and Ireland. Since 2020, Irish legislation obliges wind farm developments to provide an annual contribution to nearby households and communities.
While some of the literature reviewed implies that mandated approaches are more robust,[53] no clear evidence is provided of their outcomes and impact compared to voluntary approaches. The literature does not allow for a satisfactory comparative analysis of the in-practice impacts of mandatory versus voluntary approaches.
Developers’ perspectives on how mandating community benefits could work in practice
Industry stakeholders shared their views on the potential for mandating community benefits for onshore technologies. Mandating was explored in both the scoping interviews with representative bodies and in the main interviews with developers. Developers highlighted some key considerations that they felt should be borne in mind for how mandating could work in practice.
For mandatory community benefits to work in practice, developers felt that there would need to be clear guidelines on what the financial expectation is to avoid any potential for confusion. It was suggested that the community benefit value attached to any mandated approach should be realistic and determined in collaboration with industry to help clarify what the expectations are for developers and for communities.
To work in practice, it was felt that mandatory community benefits would need to take into account the differences between different technologies. For example, by having different levels of benefits that technologies are expected to contribute. Specifically, some interviewees highlighted the different operating contexts and economies (e.g. different capital costs) between some technologies. Further, it was suggested that hydrogen and CCUS should be treated differently because they are designed to complement renewable technologies by operating only when needed. Therefore, it was argued that it is difficult to tie community benefits to specific metrics for these.
“[If] it would be used to set an X amount per megawatt, [then] that would need to be split into different technologies because it’s not a clear cut case for all technologies. It has to show this is what it is for BESS, what is for wind, what is for solar. Because if you get that number wrong, you can make the scheme unviable or unattractive and therefore it will not come forward.” – BESS stakeholder
It was also felt that for mandating to be practical, the approach to community benefits should retain some degree of flexibility and the ability to be designed around the needs of individual communities. For example, one onshore and offshore wind developer said if mandating were to happen it should be around the amount of funding that should be provided and not how communities spend the money. This view echoes findings of a report by BiGGAR Economics (2023) that states that the current voluntary system has allowed communities and developers to be flexible in their arrangements, and has enabled the “formation of mature, collaborative relationships” between parties. [54]
Related to the point above, some developers felt that, in practice, mandates could mean a more bureaucratic process which could slow things down, in turn impacting developers’ ability to deliver benefits. Stakeholders made contrasts with the current system, which was perceived as “fairly simple” and “flexible”. Therefore, it was suggested that approaches to mandates should avoid overly burdensome processes and bureaucracy. For example, it was suggested that it should avoid having too many restrictions around timescales or conditions on how communities should spend the funding.
Another view from developers was mandating might impact on the existing relationships between developers and communities, as it could move away from a collaborative process to one where there is a firmer expectation around what developers are required to give. Therefore, the approach would need to consider the relationships between developers and communities. Developers particularly felt it important to avoid community benefits appearing like compensation. For example, it was felt that creating a mandated system through which a certain amount is paid made directly to homeowners could lead to the system feeling like a form of compensation.
“If it’s mandated, it absolutely can’t be attributed as compensation to the community. If money had to be paid to compensate people for the effects of a wind farm, then the wind farm shouldn’t be being built.” – Multi-technology stakeholder
Aside from practicalities, a key concern raised was that mandating community benefit provision could risk investor confidence. Some developers felt that mandatory community benefits would have an impact on financial viability of projects, which could make investors less confident to invest. It was suggested that they may choose to invest in projects in other countries that do not have a community benefit mandate or in which they feel the approach is more straightforward.
“The danger with [mandating] is that it creates investor concerns. There’s a lot of competing geographies around the world that want money for renewable energy projects…If one country becomes difficult or the risks are harder to understand, they’ll move that investment to another country where they understand it. And the UK, and especially Scotland, runs a real risk of upsetting investor confidence, which is already very delicate because of the situations with the grid at the moment.” – Solar PV stakeholder
As the scope of this research was focused on understanding how different renewable technologies influence the level of community benefits offered by developers, interviews were conducted with a sample of renewable energy developers. A wide range of other stakeholders will have views.
Adjustments needed to Scotland’s current voluntary community benefits approach
This chapter sets out the extent to which any adjustments are required to the current voluntary community benefits approach based on findings from the literature review, interviews with developers and the design and testing of a socio-economic analysis framework.
Key findings
This research has not identified any obvious adjustments that need to be made to Scotland’s current community benefit approach. Developers felt that the current system could better acknowledge the different realities of different technologies, but they were not specific about what the best future approach should be.
Developers felt that guidance from the Scottish Government, in the form of Good Practice Principles and a recommended level of community benefit for onshore projects was a strength of the current process. However, for projects of emerging and/or non-generative technologies, developers noted that more targeted guidelines would be beneficial, noting that there is no established industry standard approach.
The intention was that the framework in this study could be used by Scottish Government to determine an appropriate expectation of the level and types of community benefit required for different renewable energy technologies. This work identified significant data gaps, challenges collecting data in the future, and the difficulty in sourcing data specifically focused on future ability to offer community benefits rather than actual performance. For these reasons, the framework explored here is not robust enough to use as a decision-making tool.
Lessons from literature and developers’ views
Based on the literature reviewed, there is limited evidence directly comparing how the different community benefit approaches in the UK and in other countries have impacted the level of community benefits delivered. Similarly, there is limited evidence to compare the impacts of mandated and voluntary approaches. International examples do not therefore provide any obvious lessons for the current approach in Scotland.
Onshore wind developers interviewed as part of this study were largely satisfied with the current arrangements. They felt that having a recommended standard (of £5,000 per MW per year for onshore) works well, helping them to predict what the cost associated with each project will be. Since it is a recommended, rather than compulsory standard, they also felt that it also allows for a degree of flexibility, meaning that the community benefit contribution can be responsive to both project and local community needs.
“That financial outlay [£5,000 per MW per year] is much more predictable in our models that we bake in during development…we actually really try to make sure that we can deliver it and protect it.” – Multi-technology developer
Developers of some less well-established technologies (e.g. hydrogen and pumped hydro storage) expressed a desire for clearer guidance from government on the appropriate levels of community benefit for these technologies. They suggested that new guidelines around levels of community benefit should take into consideration the differences in scale and impact between projects like pumped storage and hydrogen generation, which can be more expensive and less visible than wind projects. Those from non-generative technologies (e.g. BESS) felt that it is more difficult to determine the amount of community benefits (funds) that can be delivered from these projects because they have lower level of return (they do not yield energy) and serve a different function in the energy market than generation projects.
Developers also suggested that further structure and support for communities could help them to manage funds more effectively. They felt that community-led decision-making was vital for ensuring the funds meet local needs, but that this should be balanced with adequate administrative support to prevent the misuse or underutilisation of funds.
“There is also a misconception that communities are underspending this funding. Our analysis shows that if we invest and empower communities, then they are very capable of delivering impactful projects.” – Multi-technology developer
Lessons from testing a framework approach
As noted earlier, to effectively measure parameters identified in the proposed framework, project-level data would be required on costs, revenue, technology readiness levels and market maturity. Data on these metrics is not currently available and collecting this data would be a significant task.
Developers felt that certain parameters (see chapter 4) were considered suitable for a socio-economic analysis framework. However, their limited testing means that the framework would need more comprehensive data to fully model these parameters’ effects on community benefits. This is especially true for community benefit commitment data (£/MW/yr) which currently is only reported in the Community Benefits Register Database for onshore wind and hydro projects.
When discussing the idea of such a framework, developers noted that community benefits should not have a one-size-fits-all approach and should be reflective of specific circumstances of each technology and each project. Concerns were raised by some interviewees that a framework might lead to overly prescriptive approaches which could risk stifling development and deterring investment.
“Each [parameter] is relevant and I can see why they have been captured as things that would influence the value and viability of community benefits […] It all depends on an individual project basis, depends on what else is happening in terms of landscape and development.” – Multi-technology developer
Interviewees also questioned whether sufficient data would be available to support the framework and there was some concern about using historic data to understand future community benefit levels. A few interviewees also highlighted concerns about data sensitivity and need for any information to be carefully handled.
Considering the data gaps, challenges collecting data in the future, and the difficulty in sourcing data specifically focused on future ability to offer community benefits rather than actual performance, a single framework may not be the most appropriate approach.
Conclusions
This research looked at current and future approaches to community benefits to help inform decisions around future provision of community benefits in a way that is fair and consistent. This chapter draws conclusions around the three broad research aims:
To understand how different renewable energy technologies affect the capacity of developers to provide community benefits, including developing and testing a socio-economic analysis framework.
To understand how mandating community benefits could work in practice for onshore renewable energy technologies.
To help identify any necessary adjustments to the Scottish Government’s current voluntary community benefits approach for onshore and offshore to better support communities and industry as part of a just transition.
Understanding how different renewable energy technologies affect community benefits
Within the scope of this study, the available evidence did not support a single framework to robustly determine how different technologies affect community benefits. For such a framework to work as a practical, decision-making tool, quantitative data on the economics of different renewable energy technology projects would be required. However, existing public data is sparse and of inadequate quality to effectively measure the parameters within a framework and many developers were unable or unwilling to share commercially sensitive data about their projects. A further limitation was that existing data (e.g. on the value of community benefits from individual renewable energy projects) is based on actual provision rather than an assessment of project’s potential ability. Additionally, data available is largely historical and challenging to use when anticipating new technologies and emerging economic and regulatory models.
However, from data that was available, it was clear that the financial aspects of a renewable energy project (costs, revenue and financial viability) were key factors impacting the developers’ offer of community benefits. Projects with higher amounts of revenue and more robust and predictable financial returns are better positioned to offer significant community benefits. Conversely, if the financial viability of a development is low, then it is unlikely developers can offer community benefits without the project becoming non-viable. Developers noted that both technology maturity and market maturity can have an impact on a project’s financial viability and are therefore, indirectly, also linked to a project’s suitability to deliver community benefits. As discussed above, while there are existing tools for measuring technology and market maturity, data gathering is challenging.
Developers’ feedback also highlighted that it is easier to offer community benefits for more established technologies like onshore wind, compared to other technologies (e.g. solar and battery storage) due to the latter’s comparatively low profit margins. Less mature technologies (e.g., floating offshore wind, hydrogen) can have higher risks, higher delivery costs, less predictability in cost and performance, and lower investor confidence which can impact on their ability to offer benefits.
While not directly impacting on the level of community benefits offered, developers noted the importance of community engagement and capacity to effectively manage and deliver benefit funds. Interviewees highlighted the importance of community engagement, consultation and feedback in moulding community benefit initiatives, ensuring more meaningful and tailored contributions. However, this is difficult to quantify and would therefore be challenging to include in a socio-economic analysis framework.
How mandating community benefits could work in practice (for onshore renewable technologies)
The literature reviewed does not allow for a satisfactory comparative analysis of the in-practice impacts of mandatory versus voluntary approaches. Mandatory community benefits approaches exist in Denmark and Ireland, as part of net zero energy infrastructure development for wind projects. While the literature provides examples of where this was happening outside of the UK, it was less clear on the extent to which mandating had an impact on the level and nature of community benefits when compared with voluntary approaches.
Developers felt that for mandating to work in practice, a number of factors would need to be taken into consideration. It was felt that any future mandating approach should allow for the differences between technologies to be accounted for by setting, for example, different recommended levels of community benefit fund value. For mandating to work in practice, it was also felt that flexibility was key, particularly in terms of how communities could make use of the funding provided. Practicalities aside, there was some concern that mandating could potentially pose a risk to projects, by placing a financial burden on some projects (particularly those with smaller financial returns such as solar and BESS technologies) which could pose a risk to investors.
Any necessary adjustments to Scotland’s current voluntary community benefits framework for onshore and offshore
This research has not identified any obvious adjustments that need to be made to Scotland’s current community benefit approach.
Guidance from the Scottish Government, in the form of best practice principles and a recommended level of community benefit for onshore projects was highlighted in interviews with developers as being a strength of the current process. However, developers’ feedback suggests the current system needs to better acknowledge the different realities of different technologies. Developers of emerging and non-generative technologies suggested that more targeted guidelines for these newer technologies would be beneficial, noting that there is no established industry standard approach. However, while they suggested some areas for consideration, they were not specific about what the best future approach should be.
The intention was that the framework in this study could be used by the Scottish Government to determine an appropriate expectation of the level and types of community benefit required for different renewable energy technologies. The parameters that were considered suitable for the framework could provide a useful understanding of the factors that influence ability to offer community benefits. However, this would be dependent on data gaps being addressed. Ideally, it would have up-to-date data on community benefit value covering the full range of renewable energy technologies, with at least 50 projects for each technology.
This study has identified data gaps, challenges collecting data in the future and the difficulty in sourcing data specifically focused on future ability to offer community benefits rather than actual performance. The approach explored here does not provide a robust enough evidence base to underpin a framework for use as a decision-making tool.
Recommendations and next steps
The report highlights existing measurement tools and guidance that can be used to understand where a project sits in relation to certain parameters, such as technology and market maturity. To make the most of these tools, further data collection work would be needed before they could be used for robust socio-economic analysis. This would involve collecting relevant data for a representative sample of projects across the metrics that have already established measurement tools. This would require a significant time and resource commitment and may not, therefore, be a practical option.
To better understand the factors influencing the level of community benefit, beyond the financial indicators highlighted in this study, further research would be needed. Considering the challenge of sourcing quantitative data on project economics, further qualitative research may be the most feasible option. Ideally this would be with a larger selection of developers across the full technology spectrum (including those that had not been able to deliver community benefits), direct engagement with communities, and wider stakeholder engagement (e.g. project investors, funders and other partners that have assisted in project development). This type of engagement would add to and build on the insights gathered from developers in this study.
Glossary / abbreviations table
Acronym/Abbreviation
Definition
ARL
Adoption Readiness Level
BESS
Battery energy storage system
BWE
German Wind Energy Association
CCUS
Carbon capture utilisation and storage
EAF
Electricity Assistance Fund
ESG
Environmental, Social, and Governance
GW
Gigawatt
IEA ETP guide
International Energy Agency’s Energy Technology Perspectives guide
LCLO
Local Community Liaison Officer
LCOE
Levelised Cost of Electricity
LCOS
Levelised Cost of Storage
MW
Megawatt
NASA
National Aeronautics and Space Administration of the United States
REPD
Renewable Energy Project Database
SROI
Social Return on Investment
TRL
Technology Readiness Level
References
Anchustegui, I. H. (2021). Distributive justice, community benefits and renewable energy: The case of offshore wind projects.
Arsenova, M., & Wlokas, H. L. (2019). Local Benefit Sharing in Large-Scale Wind and Solar Projects. IFC.
Arsenova, M., Skyt, P., & Qadeer, A. (2024). The Strategic Value of Community Benefits in Offshore Wind Development. IFC.
BiGGAR Economics. (2023). Baseline report on Community benefit and shared revenue from onshore wind projects to communities in the south of Scotland.
BiGGAR Economics. (2024). Developing a new model to maximise local economic benefits from development in Moray and Highland. Report to Moray Council and Highland Council.
BiGGAR Economics. (2024). Impact Assessment of the Rosehall and Achany Wind Farm Community Benefit Funds.
Centre for Sustainable Energy (CSE), & Garrad Hassan. (2005). Community Benefits from Wind Power: A Study of UK Practice and Comparison with Leading European Countries.
Chen, H., Esram, N. W., Johnson, A., Harmon, D., Phelan, P., & Fraser, A. (2024). Aligning Community Benefits with Decarbonization Goals: Lessons Learned from Development of Community Benefit Plans for IRA Funds. American Council for an Energy-Efficient Economy.
Cowell, R., Bristow G., Munday, M. (2011) Acceptance, acceptability and environmental justice: the role of community benefits in wind energy development, Journal of Environmental Planning and Management.
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023) Electricity Generation Costs (2023)
Devine-Wright, P., Devine-Wright, H., & Cowell, R. (2015). What do we know about overcoming barriers to siting energy infrastructure in local areas?
Ejdemo, T., Söderholm, P. (2015). Wind power, regional development and benefit-sharing: The case of Northern Sweden., Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews.
Égré, D., Roquet, V., & Durocher, C. (2007). Monetary benefit sharing from dams: A few examples of financial partnerships with Indigenous communities in Québec (Canada).
Energy UK. 2024). Energy in Action: Community benefits from local infrastructure.
Glasson, J. (2020). Community Benefits and UK Offshore Wind Farms: Evolving Convergence in a Divergent Practice.
Klain, S.C., Satterfield, T., MacDonald, S., Battista, N., Chan, K.M.A. (2017). Will communities “open-up” to offshore wind? Lessons learned from New England islands in the United States.
Kerr, S. (2018). Community benefits schemes – Fair shares or token gestures?
Kerr, S., Johnson, K., & Weir, S. (2017). Understanding community benefit payments from renewable energy development. International Centre for Island Technology, Heriot Watt University.
Lane, T., & Hicks, J. (2019). A Guide to benefit sharing options for renewable energy projects. Akin Consulting; Community Power Agency.
le Maitre, J. (2024). Price or public participation? Community benefits for onshore wind in Ireland, Denmark, Germany and the United Kingdom.
Manitius. (2023). Community Benefits Programs & Clean Energy.
Munday, M., Bristow, G., & Cowell, R. (2011). Wind farms in rural areas: How far do community benefits from wind farms represent a local economic development opportunity?
San Martin, O., Morales, E., Antas, J., Seumas, S., & Wallace, J. (2022). The winds of change: The role of community engagement and benefit-sharing in wind farm developments. Statkraft.
Scottish Government (2018). Scottish Government Good Practice Principles for Community Benefits from Offshore Renewable Energy Developments.
Scottish Government. (2019). Scottish Government Good Practice Principles for Community Benefits from Onshore Renewable Energy Developments (updated).
Toledano, P., Albin-Lackey, C., Andres, M. D., & Brauch, M. D. (2023). Community Benefit Sharing and Renewable Energy and Green Hydrogen Projects: Policy Guidance for Governments. Columbia Center on Sustainable Investment.
Van den Berg, K., & Tempels, B. (2022). The role of community benefits in community acceptance of multifunctional solar farms in the Netherlands.
Van der Waal, E. C. (2020). Local impact of community renewable energy: A case study of an Orcadian community-led wind scheme.
Walker, C. (2013). Towards Greater Acceptance of Wind Energy: A Review of Community Benefits Models.
Welsh Government (2022) Guidance for developers, local communities & decision-makers: Local and shared ownership of energy projects in Wales.
Wind Europe. (n.d.). Compendium of wind success.
Appendices
Appendix A – Methodology
Evidence review
Aims and objectives
The aims of the evidence review were to:
Explore best practice on community benefits in the UK and internationally in relation to renewable energy technologies.
Explore how community benefit schemes operate and examine their funding arrangements in the UK and internationally.
Provide examples of where community benefits have been mandated and what impact this has had on industry, communities and the delivery of renewable energy technologies.
Inform the socio-economic analysis in terms of identifying key parameters and contexts that impact the propensity to supply community benefits at varying scales.
Identify data sources for the socio-economic analysis.
Defining the research questions
To ensure the evidence review is useful in summarising best practises and informing the socio-economic analysis the following research questions were defined:
Research Question 1 – What is the best practice on community benefits from onshore and offshore renewable energy technologies internationally?
Research Question 2 – How does the UK differ from international counterparts on the processes on the provision of community benefits? How does this impact the level of community benefits?
Research Question 3 – Which (if any) countries mandate community benefits as part of net zero energy infrastructure construction? What impact has this had on the provision of community benefits? What impact has this had on communities and the delivery of net zero energy policies?
Additional Scoping – What data is available on the levels of community benefits, and their corresponding technologies/market maturities/technology maturity and other hypothesised parameters which influence the provision of community benefits?
Scope of the literature search
The literature search included the identification of relevant sources from:
Existing research into/evaluations of community benefit schemes
Academic literature
Grey literature
Policy documents
Media publications
The search for literature was primarily done through using Google and Google Scholar but also used sources such as JSTOR, Scopus, and organisational websites where necessary. Whilst we did not take a strict view on the geographical scope of our search, we favoured countries which are contextually similar to the UK (European countries, US, Australia) as it is likely these findings will be more relevant to the UK.
We explored literature relevant to onshore and offshore renewable energy technologies. This included, but was not limited to, wind, solar, hydro, wave, thermal, pumped hydro storage, bioenergy, battery storage, hydrogen, Negative Emission Technologies (NETs) and transmission infrastructure. The ability to look at these internationally was dependent on the context and energy mix of the countries in question. It was decided that it would also be useful to assess levels of community benefits for technologies which may be emerging in the UK but are more established elsewhere, bringing in the Three Horizons approach featured in the proposal.
Search Terms
Some initial search terms for covering the aforementioned specifications and research questions were developed and are presented in the table below:
Search Term (Google/Google Scholar)
Relevance/comments
“[insert technology] community benefits best practice [international/UK/insert country]”
All technologies and internationally. This will support answering RQ1 and part of RQ2 by allowing for a comparison between countries.
“[insert technology] community benefits monitoring [international/UK/insert country]”
All technologies and internationally. This will support answering RQ1 and part of RQ2 by allowing for a comparison between countries.
“[insert technology] community benefits evaluation [international/UK/insert country]”
All technologies and internationally. This will support answering RQ1 and part of RQ2 by allowing for a comparison between countries.
“[insert technology] community benefits lessons [international/UK/insert country]”
All technologies and internationally. This will support answering RQ1 and part of RQ2 by allowing for a comparison between countries.
“[insert technology] community benefits impacts [international/UK/insert country]”
All technologies and internationally. This will support answering RQ1 and part of RQ2 by allowing for a comparison between countries.
“[insert technology] community benefits funding arrangements [international/UK/insert country]”
All technologies and internationally. This will allow us to understand the structure of community benefit funds, supporting RQ1 and RQ2
“[insert technology] community benefits management arrangements [international/UK/insert country]”
All technologies and internationally. This will allow us to understand the structure of community benefit funds, supporting RQ1 and RQ2
“[insert technology] mandate/mandated/mandating community benefits [international/UK/insert country]””
All technologies and internationally. This will provide an answer to RQ3, where we can begin to assess the impact of mandating community benefits and what this looks like in practise
“[insert technology] community benefits press release”
This search supports the scoping of what is feasible for the socio-economic analysis. At this stage, a high-level search will be conducted, with more in depth web scraping for data (if possible) to be completed as part of the socio-economic analysis.
Prioritisation approach
A long list of 86 sources were initially identified which were then prioritised using the prioritisation criteria set out below:
Based on existing evidence: Does the document focus on existing practice/examples of renewable projects/developments?
Focus on community benefits: Is the main focus of the document around the provision of community benefits (as opposed to for e.g. broader discussions of social acceptability of renewable energy developments OR community engagement)?
Policy guidance: Does the document include policy recommendations/best practice guidance/reflections on lessons learned?
Geographical scope: Does the geographical scope of the document include Europe, the UK or US?
Peer reviewed / grey literature: Peer reviewed sources were prioritised over grey literature sources.
Additional considerations:
Ensuring the inclusion of evidence on a wide spread of renewable technologies.
Ensuring the inclusion of evidence from both voluntary and mandatory community benefits schemes.
Ensuring the inclusion of evidence from a wide spread of types of community benefits.
Additional sources were added to the short-list of literature as suggested by Scottish Government and stakeholders in the scoping interviews. A total of 35 sources were reviewed in-depth. The final list of literature sources reviewed included 12 peer reviewed academic papers, 20 reports, 2 guidance documents from grey literature (e.g., renewable energy developers, private consultancies) and 1 policy document. The publication years of the reviewed documents ranges from 2011 to 2024, with 22 documents from the last 5 years.
Evidence extraction
The prioritised literature sources were then reviewed and findings relevant to the research questions were extracted into an excel sheet. Ipsos Facto, a Large Language Model, was used to assist with identifying and summarising relevant data.
Scoping interviews
In parallel to the evidence, we conducted four in-depth scoping interviews with industry bodies, trade associations, and members of developer groups to enhance the findings from the evidence review.
The aim of these interviews was twofold:
to understand their views on different types of community benefits and their perceptions of current / best practice arrangements related to community benefits;
to explore options for sourcing data from the industry, including the types of information they think businesses will / will not be prepared to share with us.
Learnings from the scoping interviews were used specifically to inform the design of the subsequent stakeholder engagement and framework development.
Developer interviews
In-depth interviews were conducted with 21 industry developers. Interviewees covered a range of technologies including onshore wind (7), offshore wind (7), solar PV (5), battery storage (6), grid stability (1), hydro (3), pumped hydro storage (3), hydrogen (6 including 2 green hydrogen) and carbon capture, utilisation and storage (2). Among interviewees, 11 were mostly multi-technologies developers and 10 were single-technology developers.
The objectives of the interviews were threefold:
To gather qualitative data on the types of community benefits they have delivered/plan to deliver, views on current arrangement for community benefits and potential different approaches (including mandating for onshore), and what factors have contributed to the provision/ success of their community benefits (i.e. to help inform what parameters are most important in informing potential future community benefits). This will help contextualise the socio-economic analysis and the findings in the report.
To gather quantitative data that we will then use in our analysis, using the parameters set out in the framework (these will be developed further based on CXC/SG feedback). This will include information such as the cost of developing the project(s), value of community benefits, proportion of those values in comparison with turnover/profit, employment impacts etc.
To help reframe/revise the socio-economic analysis framework as required, based on their views on what parameters/variables are important
Ahead of the interview, stakeholders were also requested to complete a ‘Data request sheet’ that aimed to gather data for the socio-economic analysis (see below).
Framework development
The development of the framework to assess the influence of various parameters on community benefits involved a systematic approach following stakeholder interviews. Each initial parameter underwent a comprehensive evaluation to determine the feasibility of its measurement and potential impact on community benefit commitments.
Assessment of measurement challenges. Initially, each parameter was scrutinised to identify any inherent challenges or limitations in its measurement. This involved examining the complexity, availability of data, and any factors that could hinder accurate quantification.
Identification of pre-existing measures. For parameters where it was determined that measurement challenges were minimal or non-existent, existing methodologies and measures were sought. This step involved a thorough review of established metrics and tools already in use.
Development of proxy measures. In cases where no established measures were applicable, proxy measures were devised. This involved identifying the closest available data that could serve as a stand-in to approximate the parameter’s influence on community benefits. These proxies were selected based on their relevance and potential to offer meaningful insights.
Throughout this process, each parameter’s potential to influence community benefits was evaluated. This iterative methodology ensured a robust and nuanced framework, capable of effectively guiding future assessments and decisions concerning community benefit commitments.
Socio-economic analysis
To illustrate the application of the framework, a socio-economic analysis was conducted using a sample dataset of renewable energy projects. This analysis examined the relationship between the parameters detailed in Section 5 and the levels of community benefits, employing the methodologies outlined in the framework.
The analysis focuses on parameters deemed feasible to measure with available methods, specifically revenue and costs, along with technology type. Technology type was used as a proxy for technology maturity, given the current uniformity of maturity levels within each technology. The analysis relied on data from the Community Benefits Register Database, supplemented by additional information obtained through desk research.
For this analysis, the scope included onshore wind, offshore wind, and hydro technologies. These were chosen based on their data availability and relevance to the parameters evaluated.
Appendix B Examples of community benefit-sharing initiatives
Table 2 Examples of community benefit-sharing initiatives and related guidance for renewable technologies in selected European countries (from O San Martin et al. (2022)
Country
Guidance document
Scope of initiative
Scotland
Scottish Government: Onshore Wind Policy Statement (2017); Scottish Government: Good Practice Principles for Community Benefits from Onshore Renewable Energy Developments (2019 Update); and Good Practice Principles for Community Benefits from Offshore Renewable Energy Developments (2018)
Wind farm operators currently utilise both community funding options and shared ownership, both are seen as good practices and responsive to the local community’s specific wishes.
England
Community Benefits from Onshore Wind Developments: Best Practice Guidance for England (2021)
Both a community benefit fund and community shared ownership are recommended. Noted that many developers are providing funds significantly below the recommended amount.
Ireland
Code of Practice for Wind Energy Development in Ireland Guidelines for Community Engagement; and Best Practice Guidelines for the Irish Wind Energy Industry (2012)
ORESS 1 Community Benefit Fund – Rulebook for Generators and Fund Administrators (2023)
Irish wind farm operators currently offer both community funding options and shared ownership; both are seen as good practices.
Netherlands
Dutch Wind Energy Association (NWEA): Code of Conduct for Acceptance & Participation of Onshore Wind Energy (2016)
Both a community benefit fund and community shared ownership are acceptable, but shared ownership is generally preferred and expected by local communities.
Germany
German Wind Energy Association (BWE):
“Collectively Winning – Local Wind Energy”: Framework Paper for the topics added value, public participation, and acceptance (2018);
“Citizen-owned Wind Energy” – Energy from the region for the region (2013)
Best practice in Germany heavily tends towards community stakes/shared ownership in wind farms as the main model of how communities benefit. In contrast, the community funding model is less well-received in Germany.
Appendix C Socio-economic analysis results
To demonstrate how the framework could be used in future, socio-economic analysis was carried out based on a sample of data from net zero energy projects. This analysis explores the relationship between the parameters outlined in chapter 4 and the levels of community benefits, using the methods outlined in the framework.
The parameters in scope of this analysis are restricted to those which have been deemed feasible to measure and for which a suitable method to measure them has been identified These include revenue and costs, as well as technology type (which serves as a proxy for technology maturity, as maturity levels do not vary within technologies currently). It should be noted that this analysis is based on data available from the Community Benefits Register Database, supplemented with additional data sourced through desk research. Due to the data sources available, it only includes onshore wind, offshore wind and hydro technologies.
The subsequent analysis in this chapter presents the relationships between the measurable parameters for which data is available and the level of community benefits.
Key findings
Industry alignment and policy influence. Many onshore wind and hydro projects in Scotland are clustering around the recommended annual £5,000 per MW capacity for community benefits for onshore technologies. However, a significant number of onshore wind and hydro projects (more than half of those analysed in the available dataset) commit less than the recommended amount.
Revenue-benefit correlation. A positive correlation exists between gross project revenue and total community benefit commitments, with larger projects providing bigger packages. However, this relationship weakens for high-revenue projects, suggesting a potential plateau effect.
Costs and benefit packages. There is a positive correlation between total costs and total community benefit packages. For projects costing less than £25 million, when comparing onshore wind and hydropower projects of the same energy capacity and with equivalent community benefit budgets (£5,000 per MW annually), onshore wind offers greater community benefits per pound spent on energy production.
Analysis of community benefit commitments
Many onshore wind and hydro projects in Scotland are aligning with the recommended community benefits package of £5,000 per MW capacity. The clustering of commitments around the recommended amount suggests that policy guidelines are influencing industry behaviour, but full compliance among onshore projects has not yet been achieved. This is observed in Figure 1 by the number of projects committing less than the recommended amount. Of the 282 onshore wind and hydro projects analysed, 177 were committing less than the recommend amount.
There exists a small but notable group of projects that have committed to providing community benefits from onshore renewable energy developments above the recommended £5,000 per MW capacity. These projects may be setting new benchmarks for corporate social responsibility. The strong concentration around the £5,000 figure could indicate an opportunity for standardising community benefit packages across the industry, potentially simplifying expectations for both developers and communities.
Figure 1 Distribution of Annual Community Benefit Commitments per MW – Onshore Projects
Source: Community Benefits Register Database
Figure 2 below illustrates where most of the data points are concentrated and the variation in the data. There are distinct patterns in community benefit commitments across the two different onshore renewable technologies shown. Figure 2 shows that hydro projects commitments range between £456 and £5,000 per MW per year, while onshore wind commitments range between £60-£20,000 (the upper end of this range is not visible in Figure 2 below as this distorted the shape and scales of the figure).
There is a concentration of commitments around the £5,000 figure for both hydro and onshore wind which aligns with the recommended amount (as demonstrated by the width of the violin plot), indicating a level of industry-wide acceptance of this guideline for land-based projects.
Figure 2 Distribution of Annual Community Benefit Commitments per MW by Onshore Technology
Source: Community Benefits Register Database
Figure 3 below shows the distribution of community benefit commitments among offshore projects. It should be noted that there was very low coverage of offshore wind projects captured in the register, and hence efforts were made to manually collect benefits data through desk-based research. This may have resulted in some discrepancies in actual provision versus what projects would have reported through the register. Figure 3 shows offshore wind projects notably committing lower amounts compared to onshore wind and hydro projects, with a range between c.£20-£2,000 per MW per year. It is acknowledged here that this analysis is based on 21 projects out of a possible 47 operational offshore wind projects in the UK[55] and therefore figures should be treated with caution.
Figure 3 Distribution of Annual Community Benefit Commitments per MW – Offshore Projects
Source: desk research
There are several reasons why offshore wind projects might be committing lower amounts than their onshore counterparts. Most importantly, onshore renewable energy projects in Scotland are encouraged to offer community benefits, typically around £5,000 per megawatt of installed capacity annually. This is a voluntary guideline, not a requirement, specifically for onshore projects, and does not apply to offshore projects. Beyond this, offshore wind farms, being located further from communities, might be perceived as having less direct impact on local populations, potentially justifying lower community benefit packages. The offshore wind sector in Scotland is also at an earlier stage of development compared to onshore technologies, with community benefit standards still being defined. This technological and market immaturity means standards for community benefits are still evolving within this sector. In contrast, onshore wind technologies are more established and benefit from years of development and market experience. The advanced state of onshore wind technology may allow for greater efficiency and cost reduction, enabling more substantial community support relative to their offshore counterparts. Moreover, the scale of offshore wind projects may mean that while there are lower per-MW commitments, the overall total community benefits package may still be substantial.
Analysis of community benefit parameters and their impact
Revenue and profit
Figure 4 below illustrates the relationship between estimated gross revenue and total community benefit commitments over the project lifetime. The relationship is split and visualised by revenue levels due to the variation in the strength of the relationship as revenue changes. Blue dots represent projects that have committed £5,000 per MW per year, while red dots represent any figure other than the recommended £5,000 per MW. There is a clear positive correlation between gross project revenue and total community benefit commitments across all renewable energy projects in Scotland. This suggests that as projects become more financially substantial, they tend to provide larger community benefit packages. As project size increases in revenue terms, there is a widening range of community benefit amounts. This indicates that larger projects have more diverse approaches to community support. The relationship between gross revenue and community benefits appears to weaken for larger revenue projects. This suggests a potential plateau effect where community benefit increases do not keep pace proportionally with revenue growth beyond a certain point.
Small (under £35m gross revenue) and medium-sized (£25-250m gross revenue) projects frequently demonstrate commitment to the recommended £5,000 per MW amount, suggesting strong guideline adherence among projects of these scales. Across these sized projects, there are few instances of commitments exceeding the recommended amount relative to their revenue, suggesting a general reluctance to exceed standard guidelines.
Figure 4 Community Benefits Package by Gross Revenue Bucket (Under £25M, £25M-£250M and £250M+ Gross Revenue)
Source: See appendix F (Recommended data sources)
Deployment and Operating Costs
Figure 5 below shows the relationship between estimated total cost of production, expressed as the average cost of producing one unit of energy (LCOE – £/MWh) multiplied by total expected production over the project lifetime, and total community benefit commitments over the project lifetime. As above, the relationship is split and visualised by total cost of production levels due to the variation in the strength of the relationship as total cost changes. There is a positive correlation between total cost of production and total community benefit packages across all project sizes, suggesting that as total costs increase, as does the size of the overall commitment to community benefits. The correlation between total cost and total community benefit are relatively strong (Pearson correlation coefficient[56] = 0.56) at lower total cost levels (under £25M total cost). This increases to 0.62 for mid-sized projects (£25-250M total cost). However above £250M total costs, there is no correlation (Pearson correlation coefficient=-0.002), indicating that total cost plays less of a role in determining community benefits at large cost levels.
While this may appear contrary to the views of developers shown earlier (i.e. those who said that high costs can impact on financial viability and therefore their ability to offer community benefits) it should be noted that this data analysis is based only on projects that were already providing monetary community benefits. It excludes those that had not provided any benefits. It can therefore be assumed that the dataset excludes those projects that were deemed not financially viable enough to enable community benefit provision.
This analysis goes further to explore whether there are any differences by technology class within onshore projects only (offshore projects have been removed at this stage as the recommended £5,000/MW applies only to onshore technologies). In order to do so, it is important to control for project size (as measured by MW capacity), so as not to produce spurious results. Figure 6 illustrates how many pounds (£) are allocated to community benefits for every pound (£) spent producing energy, categorised by the project’s size in capacity (MW). Blue dots represent projects that have committed less than the recommended £5,000 per MW per year, while green dots represent projects that have committed more than the recommended amount and red dots represent project that have committed the recommended £5,000 per MW. For projects with total production costs under £25 million, when comparing hydro and onshore wind projects of the same capacity that both allocate £5,000 per MW annually to community benefits, onshore wind projects are actually providing more community benefits per pound (£) spent on energy production than hydro projects.
Figure 5 Community Benefits Package by Total Cost of Production Bucket (Under £25M, £25M-£250M and £250M+ Total Cost)
Source: See appendix F (Recommended data sources)
Figure 6 Community Benefits Package by Total Cost of Production Bucket (Under £25M, £25M-£250M and £250M+ Total Cost)
Source: See appendix F (Recommended data sources)
Appendix D Methodologies for estimating revenue and costs
Expected Generation (MWh) = Capacity (MW) * Capacity Factor* Hours in a year
Breaking down these components:
Installed Capacity (MW): This represents the maximum power output of the project under ideal conditions. This data is readily available from the Renewable Energy Planning Database (REPD).
Capacity Factor: This represents the actual output of a project as a percentage of its maximum potential output over a specific period. Historical capacity factors for certain technologies (onshore wind, offshore wind, hydro, landfill gas, and sewage sludge digestion) in Scotland can be found in the Energy Trends: UK Renewables publications[57].
Addressing Missing Capacity Factors: For technologies where Scotland-specific capacity factors are unavailable (e.g., solar PV, tidal, wave, biomass), several approaches can be used:
UK-wide Proxies: Use UK average capacity factors as a starting point, acknowledging this as a limitation and potential source of error.
Technology-Specific Adjustments: Adjust UK proxies based on technology and location characteristics. For example, solar PV capacity factors are influenced by latitude and solar irradiance. Tools like PVGIS can provide location-specific solar irradiance data to refine estimates (this approach is out of scope for the analysis in this study).
Average Annual Electricity Price (£/MWh): This represents the average price received for each MWh of electricity generated over a year. Given the difficulty of obtaining project-specific PPA data, the wholesale market price serves as a practical proxy.
Wholesale Price Data Sources: While real-time wholesale price data requires plugging into Elexon’s BMRS API, a simplified approach for this framework should entail using Ofgem’s published weekly wholesale day-ahead price data[58] to calculate annual averages. These are GB-wide averages, and hence regional variations should be recognised as a limitation.
Simplified CfD Approach (for CfD-supported projects): For projects under a Contract for Difference (CfD) the strike price is a guaranteed price. This figure is a conservative estimate of returns, as actual revenue could be higher if market prices exceed the strike price. CfD data is available from the Low Carbon Contracts Company (LCCC).
Estimating Future Revenue (also applicable for projects not yet operational) – Generation Projects
For revenue in future years, or for projects under development or construction, estimating future revenue requires additional considerations:
Project Lifetime Assumption: Specify a reasonable assumed operational lifetime for the technology (e.g., 25 years for offshore wind, 20-25 years for solar PV). This assumption directly impacts total revenue calculations.
Future Capacity Factor Estimation: Project future capacity factors based on recent trends and technological advancements. If historical capacity factor data for the specific technology in Scotland (or a similar region) is available, this trend should be analysed over the past years.[59] This trend should be extrapolated outward to estimate future capacity factors. For less established technologies with limited historical data, the technology’s maturity should be considered. Rapidly evolving technologies may see more significant performance improvements expected while more mature technologies might expect to see more stable future performance anticipated. For example, floating offshore wind might be expected to see larger capacity factor gains in the coming years compared to a more established technology like onshore wind.
Future Electricity Price Estimation: Given the volatility of electricity markets, projecting future prices is challenging. For projects supported by a Contract for Difference (CfD), the strike price offers a guaranteed future revenue stream and can be used as a conservative estimate. For non-CfD projects, where future revenue is directly exposed to market price fluctuations, a simplified approach involves using the average annual CfD strike price for the corresponding technology in each future year. However, it’s essential to acknowledge that:
CfD strike prices are influenced by auction dynamics and may not perfectly represent the market value of electricity from non-CfD projects.
Not all technologies are represented in CfD auctions.
Using CfD strike prices as proxies across all non-CfD projects might result in a somewhat conservative revenue estimate, as market prices could exceed the strike price in some years.
Prices beyond the latest future year reported in the CfD auction reports are set at the price in the latest year for the respective technology. For example, if CfD auction strike prices are set for the year 2027, the strike price in all future years will be set at the prices in 2027 for that technology. It is acknowledged these prices are unrealistic, however, they serve as the most appropriate benchmark against which to extrapolate.
Discounting Future Cash Flows: To compare projects and scenarios, discount future revenue streams to their present value using an appropriate discount rate that reflects project risk. We propose using the technology-specific discount rate of 10% used by DESNZ in their Levelised Cost of Electricity (LCOE) methodology documents.
Total Cost of Production Calculation
Total Cost of Production Calculation – Generation Projects
Estimating the total lifetime cost of production across the range of projects in scope requires a consistent and transparent method to apply cost assumptions across different generation technologies. To support this, we use benchmark Levelised Cost of Electricity (LCOE) estimates published by DESNZ.
DESNZ’s LCOE values represent the average lifetime cost (£/MWh) of generating electricity for each technology type. These figures include all relevant capital, operational, fuel, and decommissioning costs, spread over the expected lifetime electricity output of a project. As such, LCOE is a useful and well-recognised benchmark for comparing the cost-effectiveness of electricity generation technologies in the UK.
Importantly, we are not re-estimating or recalculating LCOE. Instead, we are using DESNZ’s published LCOE values as input parameters in our framework to estimate total cost of production across different project configurations. Specifically, we apply the LCOE estimates to the expected energy output of each project to calculate a total cost figure. This calculation can be expressed as:
Total Cost of Production (£) = LCOE (£/MWh) x (Installed Capacity (MW) x Load Factor x Annual Operating Hours x Project Lifetime (years))
This approach allows us to derive a consistent estimate of total production cost, using technology-specific LCOE values as cost rates, scaled by the expected energy output of each project over its lifetime.
The process for estimating total cost of production is as follows:
Technology categorisation: Categorise REPD projects to align with the technology categories used in the UK Government’s LCOE estimates file. This may involve mapping project types to the closest matching category in the government data.
Energy Output Calculation: Estimate the annual energy output (MWh) for each project based on its capacity and typical capacity factors for the relevant technology.
Total calculation: Using the scaled cost components and estimated energy output, we will calculate the total cost for each project using the formula. It’s important to note that the UK Government’s LCOE estimates are provided for projects with commissioning dates in 2025, 2030, 2035, and 2040. Therefore, our total cost calculations will need to be based on the estimate that most closely matches each project’s expected commissioning date. We will assign each project to the nearest available estimate year based on its planned commissioning date.
Inflation-adjustment: Furthermore, all costs in the UK Government’s estimates are reported in 2021 prices. To ensure consistency and accurate comparisons across projects with varying commissioning dates, we adjust these figures to a common base year using HM Treasury GDP deflators. These temporal adjustments will help ensure that our total cost calculations accurately reflect the economic conditions and technological advancements expected at the time of each project’s commissioning, within the constraints of the available data.
Appendix E Socio-economic scoring mechanisms
Table 3 NASA Technology Readiness Levels
TRL
TRL Summary
1
Basic principles have been observed and/or formulated: Lowest level of technology readiness. Scientific research begins to be translated into applied research and development (R&D). Examples might include paper studies of a technology’s basic properties.
2
Developing hypothesis and experimental designs: Invention begins. Once basic principles are observed, practical applications can be invented. Applications are speculative, and there may be no proof or detailed analysis to support the assumptions. Examples are limited to analytic studies.
3
Specifying and developing an experimental Proof of Concept (PoC): Active R&D is initiated. This includes analytical studies and laboratory studies to physically validate the analytical predictions of separate elements of the technology. Examples include components that are not yet integrated or representative.
4
PoC demonstrated in test site/initial evaluation of costs and efficiency produced: Basic technological components are integrated to establish that they will work together. This is relatively “low fidelity” compared with the eventual system. Examples include integration of “ad hoc” hardware in the laboratory.
5
Technology/process validated in relevant environment: Fidelity of breadboard technology increases significantly. The basic technological components are integrated with reasonably realistic supporting elements so they can be tested in a simulated environment. Examples include “high-fidelity” laboratory integration of components.
6
Technology/process validated in operational environment: Representative model or prototype system, which is well beyond that of TRL 5, is tested in a relevant environment. Represents a major step up in a technology’s demonstrated readiness. Examples include testing a prototype in a high-fidelity laboratory environment or in a simulated operational environment.
7
System complete and qualified: Prototype near or at planned operational system. Represents a major step up from TRL 6 by requiring demonstration of an actual system prototype in an operational environment (e.g., in an aircraft, in a vehicle, or in space).
8
Product/technology in manufacture/process being implemented: Technology has been proven to work in its final form and under expected conditions. In almost all cases, this TRL represents the end of true system development. Examples include developmental test and evaluation (DT&E) of the system in its intended weapon system to determine if it meets design specifications.
9
Product/service on commercial release/process deployed: Actual application of the technology in its final form and under mission conditions, such as those encountered in operational test and evaluation (OT&E). Examples include using the system under operational mission conditions.
Fully Mature Market: A fully mature market is characterized by high levels of competition, well-established regulatory and policy frameworks, and a global supply chain. The technology is fully integrated into the energy system, and investment is based on market forces rather than policy incentives. The market operates efficiently with clear pricing signals. Hydropower, especially conventional dam-based installations, has a fully mature market with a global presence and long history of integration into energy systems.
4
Established Market: Established markets have a stable and supportive regulatory environment, a robust and competitive supply chain, and a broad base of stakeholders. Investment is seen as lower risk, and financing models are well understood. There is strong competition, and the technology is a significant part of the energy mix. Onshore wind and solar PV have both reached this level of market maturity, with widespread adoption and a solid market presence.
3
Growing Market: At this stage, markets are experiencing noticeable growth in demand and investment. The regulatory environment is becoming more supportive, with clearer policies and standards. The supply chain is expanding, and costs start to decrease as economies of scale are realized. There is a healthy level of competition with several established players. Fixed-bottom offshore wind is at this stage, with a growing number of projects and increasing investor confidence.
2
Emerging Market: Markets at this stage have begun to establish some regulatory frameworks and attract early adopters. The supply chain is forming but may not be fully reliable or cost-effective. There is a growing interest from investors, but financing often depends on policy incentives. Competition is limited, but there are signs of market growth. Floating offshore wind, which is beginning to see commercial interest and investment, but lacks the extensive market presence of fixed-bottom offshore wind, would fall into this category.
1
Nascent Market: The market at this stage is in its infancy. There are few, if any, regulatory standards or guidelines, and the supply chain is undeveloped. Investment is highly speculative, and there are very few players in the market. The technology may still be reliant on grants or government support with no established commercial financing models.
Appendix F Recommended data sources
The following below provides a summary of the key data sources currently available to measure framework parameters. However, these are not complete and additional work is required to fill gaps.
Parameter
Measurement item
Recommended data source
Community Benefit
Community benefits monetary value (£)
Community Benefit Register Database. Since the database does not cover all technologies, this would need to be supplement with data from individual developers, either through requesting this directly or sourcing it from company reports (where available).
Technical maturity
Technology maturity scoring
NASA TRL Scale
IEA ETP Clean Energy Technology Guide. While the database is comprehensive in its technology classification, there is likely to be some mis-classification of REPD projects to specific IEA ETP technologies. Ideally, project TRLs should be sourced directly from project owners.
Project revenue
Installed capacity
Community Benefit Register Database and REPD
Capacity factor
Energy Trends: UK Renewables publications. Historical capacity factors are only available for certain technologies. Newer technologies are therefore not captured and will need to be sourced directly from projects.
Electricity price
Elexon
Ofgem wholesale day-ahead price
CfD strike price
Low Carbon Contracts Company
Capital and operating costs
Technology categorisation
UK Government’s LCOE estimates. This data source captures LCOE for a selection of common technologies. More niche/newer technologies are not captured within this data source and therefore should be collected directly through projects.
Energy output
REPD
Energy Trends: UK Renewables publications
How to cite this publication:
Mulholland, C., Jones, R., Tapie, N. and Stow, C. ‘Renewable energy technologies and community benefits’, ClimateXChange. http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/6396
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
Community benefit funds typically mean that developers will voluntarily contribute a certain amount of funding to local communities. In some cases, the level of funding is linked to the amount of installed capacity of the project or the amount of energy produced. ↑
Kerr et al (2017), Anchustegui (2021), Kerr & Weir (2018), O San Martin et al (2022), Scottish Government (2022), Scottish Government (2019), Scottish Government (2018) ↑
In the reviewed literature, shared ownership was a common practice in countries outside the UK, notably in Germany and Denmark. However, this is not outlined here as shared ownership is not part of the Scottish Government’s definition of community benefits. ↑
le Maitre, 2024; Toledano, et al., 2023; O San Martin, et al., 2022; ↑
Four operational offshore wind projects were in Scotland, two in Wales and fifteen in England. ↑
The Pearson correlation coefficient measures how strongly two variables are linearly related, ranging from -1 (perfect negative correlation) to 1 (perfect positive correlation), with 0 indicating no linear relationship. ↑
It is recommended to aim for a minimum of 5 years of historical data. This provides a reasonable basis for identifying trends and patterns, while also smoothing out short-term fluctuations or anomalies. ↑
Minimising peat excavation is crucial in order to avoid carbon emissions, protect biodiversity and ensure downstream water quality. Built development on peatlands results in the excavation and disturbance of peat. In order to ensure evidence-based planning and consenting decisions there is a need to gather evidence on the impacts and opportunities regarding the reuse of excavated peat. This will help to inform how best to balance the benefits of renewable energy with the need to protect and restore peatland habitats, ensuring sustainable development practices.
This project investigates the opportunities, impacts, and challenges associated with the reuse of excavated peat from windfarm construction sites. It provides a greater understanding of the current knowledge concerning wind farm development on peatland, peat and peaty soils across Scotland. We propose a hierarchy of peat reuse options based on environmental impact and offer recommendations for data collection and monitoring to enhance the evidence base.
The research combined a review of published evidence with stakeholder engagement and site visits.
Findings
We found very little academic research specifically investigating best practice for the reuse of peat on windfarms. We therefore used stakeholder discussions and site visits to understand the current situation, what is occurring at different sites within Scotland, and likely environmental costs and benefits of different reuse options.
Key issues
Avoidance of peat excavation: Minimising peat excavation is crucial. As a critical first step of the mitigation hierarchy, different stakeholders agree the need to limit volumes to protect peatland, biodiversity, and maintain hydrological connectivity.
Preparation and planning issues: Site surveys often lack the requisite detail to effectively avoid deep peat areas during construction. It also leads to problems with planning how to reuse greater volumes of peat than expected. Additional training for construction operatives would enable them to minimise peat disturbance and maintain the excavated peat’s structure.
Carbon storage: Accurate carbon calculations are needed to fully understand the impact of the wind farm. However, this study found that more peat is often excavated than planned, highlighting the need for greater accuracy in carbon excavation measurements. Monitoring the condition of reused peat is also necessary to enable better understanding of carbon storage and other ecosystem services.
There are a range of construction activities that result in the excavation of peat, such as the construction and maintenance of roads and tracks, compounds and substations, crane pads and turbine blade laydown areas, cabling, drainage ditches and borrow pits. The main reuse methods include borrowpit reinstatement, restoration activities and landscaping. These reuse options may have varying environmental outcomes (Table 1), consideration for which needs to be part of the planning process when constructing a wind farm and planning the reuse of excavated peat within the project.
Recommendations
Recommendation 1: Guidance on excavation peat reuse
Because detailed evidence to confirm the different environmental outcomes is not available, we recommend a simple hierarchy of peat reuse options accompanied by additional guidance and requirements, which are essential for maximising environmental outcomes. We recommend this comprises:
Recommendation 1a: Preparation and planning steps:
Avoid / minimise peat excavation wherever possible and
Appraise site circumstances and locally relevant potential reuse options
Recommendation 1b: Hierarchy of peat reuse
Recommendation 1c: Peat reuse implementation principles: to guide the site-specific choice of methods and implementation to maximise environmental outcomes.
The hierarchy is not useable as a standalone guide – it must be accompanied by the additional components – as shown in Figure 1 below.
To ensure the multiple potential environmental benefits of peat reuse are considered, avoiding a single-issue focus.
To ensure a balanced approach to peat reuse, we recommend targeting the following environmental outcomes:
Minimising carbon loss: Reducing carbon emissions from excavated peat.
Positive biodiversity outcomes: Achieving biodiversity goals at both local and national levels.
Ensuring downstream water quality: Minimising sediment and nutrient load in water bodies.
Recommendation 3: Enhanced monitoring of environmental outcomes from reuse of peat
Enhanced research and monitoring are required to improve and inform the reuse hierarchy and implementation of best practice techniques going forward:
Post-construction assessment: Providing accurate peat excavation volumes at the end of construction to build a dataset to be used within the sector for more accurate carbon calculations and reuse planning.
Post-construction monitoring: Regular monitoring of wetness of the peat, carbon fluxes and vegetation surveys to understand the broader environmental impact of peat reuse.
Data sharing and collaboration: Encouraging greater data sharing and collaboration between energy companies and the academic community to refine the reuse hierarchy and best practice in the field.
Next steps and future research
These results highlight our current understanding of peat reuse methods occurring in wind farm construction in Scotland. We have highlighted which environmental issues are critical and how the reuse of peat can maintain the habitat, allowing for environmentally conscious construction techniques to take precedence.
However, a clear conclusion from the information gained during this process is that planning prior to construction is key, as well as ensuring that stakeholders work together to achieve best practice.
After these main outcomes from the hierarchy, the attention needs to focus on delivering site specific reuse. It also became apparent that although there is a lot of knowledge within the peatland and wind farm sectors, there have been limited studies collecting data to inform best practice. This needs to be encouraged to understand current research gaps and advise on the right management methods to reduce peatland degradation in the long term.
Table 1: Synthesis of reuse options and simplified overview of potential environmental outcomes (Note: this table summarises potential outcomes indicated by research during this study, but evidence is limited and site-by-site circumstances vary significantly so currently this differentiation on environmental grounds cannot be fully reflected in the recommended ‘hierarchy of peat reuse’.)
Method of reuse
Carbon store
Hydrology connectivity
Availability
Comment
Borrow pit reinstatement
++
Low risk of carbon loss
Low chance of carbon sequestration (carbon increase) in the long term
+
Only if well planned, with impermeable layers and outflows built in
+++
Large storage potential, should have capacity for all excavated peat, however where there is more (or less) peat than planned may lead to issues
Borrow pits have potential to provide an environmentally robust reuse option, however only if best practice is followed and there are contingencies in place if changes in planned volumes occur
Around turbine foundations and crane pad verges
—
High risk of carbon loss through peat drying out and erosion
–
When constructed these areas will automatically have drainage channels cut. The reuse of peat here will likely be impacted by this drainage
+
Small volume
Use to encourage vegetation re-growth around construction areas. Often used as a way of merging the built infrastructure with the surrounding landscape
Side of road/ track or “landscaping”
–
Risk of carbon loss through peat drying out and erosion, however if vegetation regrowth occurs this is less likely
–
Addition of peat should connect the reused peat with wider environment to maintain hydrology, however this depends on flow patterns and drainage channels across roads
+
Small volume
If vegetation regrowth occurs and there is limited bare peat this has potential to become part of the wider landscape
Incorporation of peat in restoration / reinstatement projects
+++
Low risk of carbon loss, has potential to build carbon (dependent on restoration / reuse project)
+++
If well planned, should have hydrological connectivity with landscape
+
Small volume
Usually these projects are highly monitored to assess progress – useful for data gathering in the short term alongside the benefits of using excavated peat in areas that may have been degraded previously
Glossary
Acrotelm
The upper of two layers in peatland system. Acrotelmic peat consist of fresh or newly decomposed peat forming vegetation and is generally quite fibrous This layer possesses some tensile strength and depending on the height of the water table can be anoxic.
Arisings
Excavated material that is created during excavation and construction activities.
Blanket Bog
A type of peatland that is relatively rare globally, however, commonly found in Scotland, due to its cool, wet climate. Blanket bogs are characterised by a peat depth of 0.5 to 3m, situated on flat or gentle slopes and have poor drainage (see ‘Raised Bog’ below as alternative type).
Borrow pit
In windfarm development, an excavation site (or quarry) where materials like soil, gravel, or rock are dug up for use in the construction. These materials are typically used for building access roads, turbine foundations, and other infrastructure.
Catotelm
The lower of two layers in a peatland system. Catotelmic peat consist of waterlogged, highly decomposed dense organic material with low tensile strength. This layer is highly amorphous and tends to disrupt completely on excavation causing difficulty with handling and storage.
Dissolved organic carbon
Organic carbon compounds that can pass through a filter with a maximum pore size of 0.7 micrometres.
EU Habitats Directive (92/43/EEC)
A European directive for the protection and conservation of natural habitats and of wild fauna and flora which has been transposed into Scottish legislation through the Habitats regulations, amended in 2021 post EU exit. https://eur-lex.europa.eu/eli/dir/1992/43/oj/eng
Peat
Peat is an organic material that forms in cool, waterlogged conditions. It consists of partially decomposed organic matter, primarily plant material and no mineral fraction. Over time, the accumulation of this organic material creates a peat and peaty soil that are rich in carbon.
Peat soil
Also referred as organic soil, in Scotland it is defined as soil with a surface peat layer with more than 60% organic matter and of at least 50cm thickness.
Peaty soil
Organo-mineral soil which have a shallow peat layer at the surface (less than 50cm thickness) over mineral layers.
Peatland
Peatland is defined by the presence of peat soil or peaty soil types. This means that “peat-forming” vegetation is growing and actively forming peat, or it has been grown and formed peat at some point in the past. It is a type of wetland ecosystem where peat material accumulates. These areas are characterized by waterlogged conditions that slow down the decomposition of organic matter, leading to the formation of peat. Peatlands have a specific type of vegetation, are rich in biodiversity and play a crucial role in carbon storage. Peatlands can include blanket bog, upland raised bog, lowland raised bog and fens.
Peatland Management Plan
A Peatland Management Plan used in development projects on peat typically includes several key components to ensure the sustainable use and conservation of peatland ecosystems. The plan describes baseline peat conditions, detail on excavation and reuse volumes and potential impact, how the peat will be handled, stored, or reused once extracted. This is an integral part of consent conditions.
Piled foundations
Deep foundations that use long, thin columns (piles) driven or drilled into the ground to support wind turbine structures. These foundations are essential for ensuring stability, especially in areas with weak or variable soil conditions and high-water tables. Also reduce the volume of peat needed to be excavated.
Priority peatland habitat
Peatland habitats can be divided into four broad classes (blanket bog, upland raised bog, lowland raised bog and fen), depending on the types of plants that formed the peat. Priority peatland habitats are sub-sets of these broad habitats which have been recognised under the Scottish Biodiversity Framework as being important to protect for their conservation and biodiversity value.
Raised Bog
A type of wetland characterized by a dome-shaped surface of peat, formed by the accumulation of partially decayed plant matter, which rises above the surrounding groundwater levels and is primarily fed by rainfall rather than groundwater.
Reinstatement
Using peat and/or peatland vegetation that has been removed or excavated during the construction of a development, often surrounding infrastructure. This form of peat use involves protecting excavated peat, and returning it to where it was taken from, in its original order (acrotelm overlying catotelm). This should aim to reinstate the hydrology of the returned material to support peatland function following best practice, although full return of function is very difficult to achieve.
Restoration
Carrying out interventions which in combination with natural processes restores the hydrological function, coverage and condition of peatland habitat vegetation, resulting in a peatland that is actively forming peat and hence sequestering carbon. Further detail will be stated in the forthcoming Scotland’s Peatland Standard.
Revegetation
Using excavated peat and/or vegetation in the surrounding construction infrastructure or for landscaping. This form of peat use will often result in revegetation but may not result in functioning peatland. Nevertheless, it can have a role in protecting the surrounding peatland conserving carbon and biodiversity providing that best practice is followed.
Abbreviations
CO2
Carbon dioxide
DOC
Dissolved organic carbon
ECoW
Ecological Clerk of Works
GHG
Greenhouse Gas
IUCN
The International Union for Conservation of Nature
ha
Hectares
HRA
Habitats Regulations Appraisal
km
Kilometres
kWh
Kilowatt-hour
m
meters
MW
Megawatt
NPF4
National Planning Framework
PEAG
The Scottish Government’s Peatland Expert Advisory Group
PMP
Peatland Management Plan
POC
Particulate organic carbon
REA
Rapid evidence assessment
SEPA
Scottish Environment Protection Agency
WMLR
Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations
Introduction
Aims and scope
This project explored opportunities, impacts and challenges for the reuse of excavated peat from windfarm development sites. It is intended to inform application of National Planning Framework 4 (NPF4), regarding the development of wind farms on peatland, peat and peaty soils. It aimed to provide recommendations for a hierarchy of peat reuse options based on environmental impact along with recommendations for data collection and monitoring to continually improve and update the evidence base.
The project focused on gathering evidence of impacts and opportunities for excavated peat reuse on-site but also considered potential for positive off-site opportunities. Evidence of environmental costs and benefits in terms of emissions, peatland function, habitat, biodiversity, hydrology, stability and structure in relation to reuse practices was evaluated.
Defining ‘reuse of peat’ for this report
This report was commissioned to understand the reuse of peat on wind farm sites during the construction process. We recognise there are differing definitions of “reuse”.
Throughout the study we adopted the definition of “reuse” of peat as:
the use of peat and/or peatland vegetation that has been excavated during the construction of a wind farm.
In this context, the “reuse” of peat can involve reinstatement, revegetation or restoration processes both onsite and offsite, during the construction of a wind farm.
Research methods
A combination of research methods were used:
A Rapid Evidence Assessment to gather and evaluate the academic literature and other relevant studies.
Desk-based evaluation of existing wind farm developments on peatland in Scotland to understand current practices.
Site visits to active and completed wind farm developments on peatland to observe examples of reuse practices in situ.
Stakeholder engagement, via discussions during site visits, individual research interviews and a workshop to complement desk-research.
It was anticipated that there was limited literature available – in the absence of this, the site visits and stakeholder engagement were critical to the project. Full details of methods are provided in the Appendices.
Background
Scotland is committed to reaching net zero by 2045, how we use and manage our land is vital to achieving this, including the use of land to produce renewable energy. Balancing the benefits from renewable energy with land-based emissions and nature and biodiversity goals is vital, particularly where wind farms intersect with sensitive habitats, like peatland and on carbon-rich soils.
Globally, peatlands are the largest terrestrial carbon store estimated to hold 660 gigatonnes of carbon and 10% of non-glacial freshwater, however, only 17% of these ecosystems are protected (Austin et al., 2025). Globally, 20% of all blanket bogs are located within the UK and Ireland[1]. In Scotland alone, blanket bogs cover around 1.8 million hectares, which is 23% of the land area (Ferretto et al., 2019). Situating new wind farms in the right location is crucial. Although wind farm developments are expected to save carbon emissions by offsetting fossil energy sources (Renou-Wilson and Farrell, 2009), where wind farms are situated on peatlands, there is a risk of land-based carbon emissions, negating the reduction associated with offsetting fossil energy sources. The quality of the peatland habitat is an important factor, as areas that are already degraded and emitting carbon, could be improved through restoration of the whole environment. When applications are made for wind farm construction there are often enhancement conditions attached to these new developments leading to restoration, but some restoration may have been necessary without the wind farm construction occurring. Peatland condition categories[2] range from pristine, near natural, modified, drained and actively eroding in relation to GHG emissions and restoration potential. Historically, Scotland’s peatlands have not been protected across the whole habitat, with afforestation being prioritised up until recently. Wind farm construction in these areas, is likely to lead to environmental improvements, with stakeholders working together to reduce peatland degradation and ambitious programmes of peatland restoration being undertaken.
Overall, the literature searches presented over fifty academic studies and governmental reports, which provided useful information related to the impact of landscape management on peatland as well as some interactions between peatland and wind farm developments. However, there were no empirical studies monitoring changes in reused peat on windfarm developments over time. This is a major research gap. Understanding how the reuse of peat may change the peat itself had to be extrapolated from studies measuring changes within laboratories or evaluations of the landscape scale after a number of years since wind farm construction had occurred. Studies did consider the impact of peat excavation on the environment, hydrology and risks of erosion or the degradation of the peatland habitat. The literature did present a large number of studies focusing on the restoration of peatland habitats, however, these were not readily extrapolatable to the current study on reuse of peat, as the parameters related to restoration are substantially different. A large number of the papers and reports were focused on the Scottish environment which suggests that Scotland is leading the way in this area of research.
Summary of stakeholder engagement achieved
We obtained contributions from 31 individuals during our stakeholder engagement (for a more in-depth synopsis of stakeholder engagement findings see Appendix). Stakeholders highlighted what they viewed as the positive features of some reuse options, such as where the water flows in borrow pits (one method of peat reuse) have been managed to keep the water table near the surface. Stakeholders we spoke to were aware of the gaps in evidence and lack of specific studies and so based their views on their own observations or monitoring on sites they were involved with. Overall stakeholders agreed that a number of factors need to be considered carefully to have any chance of achieving optimal environmental outcomes from reuse of peat on windfarm sites – simply putting peat in a convenient location on site would not be beneficial as peat would dry out, erode or lose its structure and functioning. Key considerations were – what was the condition of peat prior to excavation, the need to plan how to minimise disturbance, handling, drying and transport of peat after excavation, consideration of the water levels and flows, vegetation cover and the stability of reused peat in situ.
Summary of site research conducted
During five site visits across varied locations in Scotland, a range of different peat reuse practices were observed including:
different approaches to infilling borrow pits,
use in landscaping (for example alongside tracks or to cover cables),
infill of other site features including historical peat cuttings,
incorporation of peat into peatland restoration.
Across sites the condition of peat prior to excavation and reuse varied, as did the nature of reuse even where the same general type of reuse was used, for example borrow pit size, shape, fill level, structure, hydrology and vegetation varied across sites where this practice was used. For more information related to site visits see the Appendix.
Summary of literature and stakeholder research findings
In Scotland, peatlands store over 2,735 million tonnes of carbon covering approximately two million hectares (Smith et al., 2007), equating to around 25% of Scotland’s land area. These peatlands are often considered good candidates for onshore wind farms due to the windy and exposed environments they are located in and because they are often considered poor (or unprofitable) for other land uses, like forestry and farming activities.
The main construction activities which result in substantial disturbance for a wind farm development are track construction for maintenance and access roads, trenches for cabling, quarried aggregate extraction (borrow pits) and turbine foundation excavation. This large-scale disturbance can affect peat stability, degradation (such as habitat condition, plant assemblages, carbon storage, etc), as well as the hydrology of the habitat. Other disturbances are related to building infrastructure to support the wind farm development like crane pad constructions, temporary and permanent compounds, as well as substations to join the electricity generated to the grid. Estimates of the direct disturbance to the peatland habitat per wind turbine vary greatly but have been reported to be between 0.2 to 1 hectare per turbine, with the turbines within a wind farm usually taking up less than 10% of the wind farm area (Sander et al., 2024). However, if this area is on deep peatland, there will be greater environmental impact, than on shallow peat or mineral soils.
Larger turbines, which are more widely spaced (typically on a 300-500 m grid, with the distance between turbines around five times rotor diameter), capture energy on a much smaller spatial ‘footprint’ than smaller ones on wind farms (Renou-Wilson and Farrell, 2009). However, this is also site-dependent and varies if repowering occurs, as repowering may use the same footprint as the previous turbines, or it could locate the turbines at a new area within the development, thus increasing the environmental impact.
Construction of a wind farm requires a significant array of associated infrastructure to be installed, this infrastructure may have impacts on the surrounding peatland either through the removal of peat from that habitat, removal and replacement of peat in less suitable locations or reducing the quality of the environment within the area the peat was moved to, compression, flooding, drainage, erosion or mass movement of the peat (Lindsay, 2018). Active peatlands are hydrologically linked and naturally stabilised therefore if hydrologically disrupted, the stability can be lost (Wawrzyczek et al., 2018). An unstable habitat can lead to wider environmental problems, with issues greater than just carbon loss, for example peat slides.
Peat and windfarms in Scotland
Peat is an amorphous organic deposit, considered to be the largest terrestrial carbon store. Peat is highly compressible and porous consisting of up to 90% water by volume. Active peat-forming mire has also been found to be effective in delaying storm run-off, reducing soil erosion and retaining inorganic nutrients when it is undrained (Bragg, 2002).
Across Europe it has been calculated that 25% of peatlands are degraded (Tanneberger et al., 2021). Under the EU Habitats Directive (92/43/EEC), there are 36 European regions with designated blanket bogs and of these, 12 have wind farm developments, including 644 wind turbines, 253 km of vehicular access tracks and an affected area of ~208 hectares, mainly in Ireland and Scotland where the extent of peatland is also higher (Chico et al., 2023). However, when this is compared to the Scottish soil maps, the extent of wind farm developments in Scotland on peatland is even higher, with 1,063 wind turbines and 635 km of vehicular access tracks on peatland in Scotland alone according to national inventory data (Chico et al., 2023).
Currently, 48% of wind farms in Scotland have already been built on peat[1] with this number likely to increase in the future. Wind farm developments can have an impact on the peatland habitats and emissions, during construction, operation, and decommissioning stages. This reduces the wind farms’ ability to reach the goal of net zero. Using a carbon calculator[2] to assess the carbon saving of wind farm developments compared to carbon lost through construction on Scottish peatland provides guidance on a wind farm’s carbon footprint. However, due to the heterogeneity of peatlands and the lack of detail at the required scale when completing peatland surveys pre-planning, it has been found that the amount of peat excavated is often more than the amounts used within the carbon calculations.
Both in discussion with stakeholders and within the literature, the instability of peat deposits was highlighted, with small movements leading to slope terracing, slumps or the collapse of peat banks – these events are relatively common. Furthermore, disturbed peat can lose more than 50% of its strength compared to undisturbed peat and, in many cases, behaves as a viscous material that will readily flow, particularly when affected by high rainfall (Jennings and Kane, 2015). These inherent properties of peat carry risk and need to be considered during the wind farm construction process as the destabilisation of peat mass through drainage or excavation operations could lead to an increase in landslides / bog flow events (Dykes, 2022).
From discussions with stakeholders, it is clear that the exact volume of peat to be excavated can differ from estimates calculated in the EIA at application stage. This is usually due to a combination of initially unknown factors prior to the construction process – the exact depth, viscosity and bulk density of the peat material that needs to be excavated. Calculations are usually based on predefined excavation requirements for the size of the turbine alongside average peat depths for the area provided by preliminary site surveys, using an interpolated model of a peat depth probe survey. However, the depth of peat can also vary significantly over time, with changes in the peatland hydrology, leading to peat shrinkage occurring during drought conditions (Morton and Heinemeyer, 2019). Thus the timing of peat surveys may affect peat excavation calculations, as well as the scale of the survey and heterogeneity of the habitat. Table 2 describes common reasons for excavation as part of the construction process and how they differ in approach.
Table 2. Common reasons for excavation on site and how they differ in approach when applied to peat and peatland.
Excavation types
Approach
Construction and maintenance of roads and tracks
Significant lengths of tracks need to be created linking wind turbines and wind farm infrastructure. The main methods that can be implemented are either cut and fill or to introduce floating roads. These roads will impact the drainage of the surrounding peatland by blocking or modifying flow and if floating the peat below can also be compressed, exacerbating drainage issues.
Construction of crane pads
Crane Pads are usually located adjacent to the turbine foundations to facilitate turbine components being lifted during turbine erection and future maintenance or repairs. Depending on the load, crane pads are usually unpaved, however, compacted with layers of gravel. For some installations, the turbine foundation is used as a crane pad after initial construction.
Turbine blade laydown areas
A designated space near the turbine foundation where large components are stored before installation. These are often temporary excavations and reinstated after construction.
Cabling
Usually installed along tracks so typically does not require additional excavation, although may require a small amount of disturbance and/or influence the scheduling of any reinstatement following tracks.
Turbine base
The digging of the foundations of turbine bases generates large volumes of peat that need to be reused. They also introduce alkaline concrete into the environment which may impact the pH of the surrounding habitat and may require drainage installation to protect the foundation and avoid uplift.
Compounds and substations
Temporary compounds provide facilities for workers and equipment. Substations are usually permanent installations, often with steel frames and cladding, crucial for power collection and transmission. The peat needs to be removed, before a hardstanding area is laid, using gravel. These areas also need to be linked to the access roads early in the construction process.
Drainage ditches
Drainage is necessary around wind turbine foundations and wind farm infrastructure to maintain integrity and is usually a permanent feature of the windfarm. Often this leads to a lowering of water levels associated with drainage around infrastructure. Drainage may impact a much wider area than the drain margin and as well as lowering water levels surface subsidence may also occur.
Borrow pit
The volume of peat excavated depends on the depth at which usable aggregate materials are found. The quantity and quality of aggregate in the borrow pit can be hard to judge before the pit is opened so the volume of excavated peat may be higher or lower than anticipated.
Roads and tracks
Construction and maintenance roads and tracks are the most extensive direct impact of a wind farm on peatland as the roads need to allow access to every turbine, plus all the other infrastructure buildings but could also provide access to areas for restoration and enhancement activities. Initially, roads were just cuttings made on shallower peat down to the mineral base. However, this meant that the roads were lower than the surrounding peatland and frequently led to drainage issues.
Construction methods have adapted from just cuttings to the ‘cut and fill’ method (where the peat is dug out until the mineral subsoil is reached and backfilling the trench with aggregate until the road is around the same level as the surrounding bog surface (Lindsay, 2018)) or the preferred method of floating roads (using a geotextile mesh on top of deep peat). Floating roads have limited peat removal as a geotextile mesh is laid on top of the peat, with aggregate poured on top. Another geogrid may then be added with more aggregate before the final ‘running surface’ is laid (Lindsay, 2018).
Stakeholders described how the design of the road network through a wind farm is largely driven by the placement of the turbines (often on ridges which may be where the deepest peat is located) and following the contours of slope (increasing the distances of the road network within the peatland habitat). Tracks also need to bear large weights, for example, the cranes used for wind turbine construction can weigh up to 200 tonnes (this also has implications for the construction of crane pads). A study showed the orientation of the road in relation to the flow of water within a peatland had a large impact (Elmes et al., 2022) and led to flow obstruction and changes to the overall hydrology when running perpendicular to the flow in comparison to parallel. However, this sort of nuanced planning is rarely discussed as part of the construction process. Infrastructure like work compounds and substations also require access roads (with drainage). Thus, the size of the area of peat that is disturbed by the development may be greater than first considered.
Drainage
It was highlighted by stakeholders – and during the site visits – that drainage is usually the first construction activity occurring when developing wind farm infrastructure and is often necessary around the turbine bases and accompanying roads and tracks to reduce the risk of surface flooding. Drainage ditches are also excavated around wind farm foundations to improve the stabilisation of the turbine foundations and to protect machinery. This process of draining peatlands is known to be detrimental, causing subsidence through oxidation of the peat (Williams-Mounsey et al., 2021) and carbon loss. However, peat further away from the drainage ditch (> 1m) will only lose 20% of its previous moisture content, with the main effect of peatland drainage leading to removal of surface water rather than deep water-table drawdown (Lindsay, 2014). Drying of the peat may also lead to cracking, which may lead to rainwater penetrating the base of the peat and lubricate the interface between the peat and the mineral subbase (Lindsay, 2018).
Excavation works
Other large-scale disturbances of the peat are through excavation works. This can be for granular material used during construction (taken from borrow pits); excavation of the wind turbine foundations (although piled foundations can reduce the overall negative impact); and trenches for laying cabling/pipework, leading to substantial quantities of peat that may need to be stored prior to reuse. Piled foundations are usually built over deep peat, rather than excavating large quantities of peat; long, thin columns (piles) are driven or drilled into the ground to support wind turbine structures. These foundations reduce the volume of peat needed to be excavated whilst ensuring stability of the structure. Turbine towers experience large forces and must be placed on a solid foundation embedded within the underlying mineral subsoil or bedrock (Lindsay, 2018). Stakeholders said that often large quantities of peat may be deposited on nearby surfaces temporarily, if trucks aren’t continuously available to receive the excavated material, or dependent on the stage of the construction process. However, it is best practice to only move the peat once (to maintain structure and water content) thus, if the requisite planning is in place, a reuse strategy can be implemented where excavated material is moved to its final location in one step.
Stockpiling peat occurs where peat has been excavated and may need to be temporarily stored prior to reuse due to logistical constraints. As well as becoming a potential source of GHG emissions due to its exposure to aerobic conditions, when peat is stored, changes have been observed within its hydrochemistry, leading to it becoming less acidic and less nutrient-rich (Detrey, 2022). Over time, dewatering also occurs, which alters the hydrophysical properties (porosity) of the peat, these are key for sustaining critical peatland ecohydrological functionality (Lehan et al., 2022).
Ground preparation for stablishing crane pads and turbine blade laydown areas often requires excavating peat to create a stable foundation, leading to the removal of substantial peat volumes, with similar issues as discussed related to other excavation works. This will expand the area of impact further away from the turbine, with underlying changes to the hydrology, potential for release of GHG emissions, vegetation changes and degradation of peatland (Wawrzyczek et al., 2018). Some of these areas are temporary. For example, at some sites visited, areas which had previously been turbine blade laydown areas had peat reinstated and vegetation was able to naturally regenerate. However, this only occurs if it is part of the plan created by the developers, as some laydown areas will remain as areas with stable foundations which are available for future use.
Current practices: use of excavated peat – reuse practices
Excavated peat needs to be moved from the excavation site and is often initially stockpiled until an appropriate time for reuse. The time peat is stockpiled can vary substantially and will be impacted by where it was excavated from, the volume, and timing of the excavation related to overall construction of wind farm site. Lehan, et al., (2022) undertook a restoration study, to assess the impact of time on the hydrophysical properties of peat blocks that were stockpiled for 3, 7, 11, and 14 months. In this study, stockpiling peat was differentially impacted dependent on whether it was shallower or deeper peats, where limited impact from stockpiling was observed in the shallower peats, regardless of stockpiling time; however, in the deeper peats as stockpiling time increased there was a decrease in microporosity as well as mobile porosity (drainable porosity) (Lehan et al., 2022). It may be necessary to rewet the peat or aim to keep it wet whilst stockpiled.
Peat that has started to dry out will be less likely to function when reused. When the surface of the peat starts to dry out development of a hydrophobic layer may occur which causes irreversible changes to the ability of peat to be fully rewetted and reduces the infiltration capacity of the peat (Evans et al., 1999), increasing the desiccation of the peat overall and exacerbating the issue over time. There could also be a similar issue occurring around drainage channels, changing the overall hydrology of the habitat. There are a number of different potential reuse practices that occur on site, with varying quantities of peat, depth of peat and aims (Table 3).
Table 3. Generalised overview of current and potential future reuse practices for excavated peat
Reuse practice – onsite
Approach
Borrow pit reinstatement
Borrow pit reinstatement is one of the main sites for the reuse of peat. Guidance from SEPA highlights the WMLR[1] paragraph 9(1)b restriction that spreading on land subject to man-made development including quarry restoration should not exceed up to a maximum of 2 metres depth of material.
Use to reinstate the natural habitat and to encourage vegetation re-growth. Often used as a way of merging the built infrastructure with the surrounding landscape.
Side of road/ track or “landscaping”
This often occurs as a way of managing levels within the wind farm area, particularly where tracks have been constructed as floating and sometimes will become higher than the surrounding peatland. Vegetation at the side of the road and in the deposited material is not often considered and it is assumed natural regeneration will occur.
Incorporation of peat in restoration / reinstatement projects
This is not standard practice and has to date only occurred as part of research trials in areas directly adjacent to wind farm construction sites, where peat is used as a substrate for other restoration work. Often these sites are already partially disturbed due to the construction process or historically (through forestry, man-made drainage or cuttings).
Examples from stakeholder discussions:
used as a substrate to fill drainage ditches as part of wider restoration efforts within previously forested sites
used as a substrate in the construction of dams to slow water down and hold within the landscape
used to infill sites of historical peat cuttings (between turbines)
hag infill in small areas within a degraded peat landscape
Incorporating a layer of excavated peat in formerly forested sites undergoing restoration
Offsite use
Literature review referred to some potential ways to reuse peat off-site, but we found no evidence these are practiced in Scotland. All stakeholders stated that offsite reuse of peat does not occur. Suggestions have been made that peat could be used offsite, but these are largely hypothetical.
When excavating peat, it is imperative that the different layers are kept separate (acrotelm, catotelm) and not mixed with the underlying mineral substrate. This is because of the different properties of these layers and mixing will degrade the peat and reduce its function. Although peat excavation during wind farm construction is likely to occur, large excavations of peat should be avoided. Peatland management plans are mandatory when submitting planning applications for wind farm developments on peaty soils (as part of Policy 5 of the NPF4 framework). These plans provide a draft outline of the volume of peat to be excavated and the reuse activities that will be performed as part of the development. The reuse of peat is unlikely to have wider environmental benefits in areas that are not already disturbed by the wind farm construction or considered degraded; depositing excavated peat on undisturbed vegetation is likely to be detrimental.
To prevent the loss of carbon and the increase in GHG emissions which would occur from the degrading peat, it is essential that a considerable time is spent planning prior to the excavation process – reducing the distance the peat is moved, keeping the times the peat is moved to a minimum and understanding the volumes of peat involved. From discussions with a number of stakeholders it was suggested that, although the level of planning and motivations of the energy companies to reuse peat without degrading it is high, it is often dependent on the capabilities and understanding of the operators doing the work. A number of training courses have been organised for the construction sector specifically to improve this. However, these courses are voluntary. Training the construction sector in the importance of peatlands, restoration techniques and sensitivity during construction, will enable greater preservation of this valuable resource. In almost all discussions with stakeholders the reuse of peat occurred onsite, there were discussions regarding offsite use, but these were more abstract in terms of what was possible, rather than what was occurring. The reasoning given that the majority of reuse is on site is because the SEPA guidance[1] states that unless the excavated peat is used for construction purposes in its natural state on the site from where it is excavated, it will be subject to regulatory control and considered waste.
Overall, although the terminology is the same between different wind farm construction sites – the reuse of peat within borrowpits, landscaping or restoration, it is always site specific. There may be commonalities between the sites, for example, the need to maintain hydrological connectivity, and the importance of peatland vegetation. There will also be significant differences related to volume of peat excavated, previous habitat conditions and use, weather conditions and water table level, knowledge and preparedness of the contractors. Within 3.5.2, 3.5.3 and 3.5.4 we present case studies representing recent site visits.
Quantities of peat excavated during wind farm construction
Reviewing a number of reports, for example the “Good Practice during Wind Farm Construction” (NatureScot), “Research and guidance on restoration and decommissioning of onshore wind farms” (NatureScot), “Developments on peatland: guidance on the assessment of peat volumes, reuse of excavated peat and the minimisation of waste” (SEPA[1]), “Developments on Peat and Off-site uses of waste peat” (SEPA), as well as habitat management plans for specific wind farms, all state the importance of collecting relevant and detailed site investigation data at an early stage of the application process to enable a full understanding of the site character and to inform a more accurate design process. This is in full agreement with the academic literature (e.g. Jorat et al., 2024) and discussions with stakeholders. During the planning process the amount of peat that needs to be excavated and how it will be reused is identified (see Table 3 for an example of the average areas involved in excavations). However, due to the heterogeneity of the environment and the lack of granularity of peat depth survey’s there is some ambiguity related to total peat volumes until excavation has started.
[1] Scottish Renewables, Scottish Environment Protection Agency. 2012. Guidance on the Assessment of Peat Volumes, Reuse of Excavated Peat and the Minimisation of Waste
Table 4. Area of turbines adapted from Albanito et al., 2022, also includes calculation of the average volume of peat per turbine taken from reviewed peatland management plans of operational wind farms in Scotland
Wind farm capacity (megawatts, MW)
Input
<10 MW
>10 to <50 MW
>50 MW
Average length of turbine foundations (m)
10
15
22.18
Average width of turbine foundations (m)
10
15
22.18
Average surface area of turbine foundation (m2)
100
225
492
Average depth of excavated peat (m)
1.455
1.365
1.350
Average volume of turbine foundations (m3)
145.5
307.13
664.14
Length of access track (or floating road) (m)
418
6513
32490
Width of access track (or floating road) (m)
5.66
5.66
5.66
Average surface area of access track (m2)
2366
36,864
183,893
Floating road depth (m)*
0.53
Average volume of floating road (m3)*
1254
Length of hard standing (m)*
37.99
Width of hard standing (m)*
32.29
Average surface area of hard standing (m2)*
1226.7
Extend to drainage around drainage features at site (m)*
60
Average volume** of peat per turbine (m3) anticipated to be excavated (includes road network and cabling linking turbines to grid)
8060 (± 1464)
Average volume* per wind farm (m3)
328,446 (± 59,650)
*Independent of wind farm capacity (MW)
**Average taken from reviewed peatland management plans of operational wind farms in Scotland.
Case studies – Borrow pit reinstatement
To successfully reinstate peat within borrow pit excavations, it is important to consider the borrow pit location, hydrological connectivity, depth, vegetation cover, and to preserve the layering of the peat (Figure 2). It is best practice to reinstate the borrow pit profile to a comparative level to the surrounding landscape, with gentle slopes that blend into the landscape, it’s design should maintain hydrological connectivity with the wider environment whilst also holding water within the peat soil. Often “cells” are created within the borrow pit to enable easier reinstatement, these cells are sometimes lined with clay to reduce the permeability through to the underlying parent material. This is to enhance the hydrological connectivity of the reinstated borrow pit and aims to keep the area wet. However, an outflow is also needed so that the area doesn’t become permanently waterlogged (Figure d). It is assumed that natural regeneration of peatland vegetation will occur, therefore seeding is not usually part of the PMP, however if seeding were to occur this would usually be two years after construction as part of the planning conditions process.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Figure 2. Examples of borrow pits a) newly completed (< 1 year); b) in the process of being in-filled, one cell completed – cell wall construction (light coloured) and peat infill (dark coloured); c) 15-year old borrow pit with examples of functional peatland vegetation (from natural revegetation); d) 15-year old borrow pit that was not designed with drainage, has led to waterlogging (arrow indicates ponding); e) 10-year old borrow pit, quite dry, with more of an acidic grassland habitat; f) newly completed (< 1 year) situated on a slope, quite shallow peat.
Case studies – roadside verges / landscaping
Peat deposited alongside roadside verges often occurs more in terms of landscaping rather than for preservation of the peat (and carbon within it) (Figure 3). However, the volumes are relatively small compared to borrow pit reinstatement. If the peat does not become integrated with the surrounding hydrology, it will likely dry out and decompose over time, releasing CO2 into the environment and possibly erode away.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Figure 3. Example of peat reused along roadside as part of landscaping process, a) drainage and indication of below ground cabling visible, vegetated peat reused for this infill; b) drainage channels and depth of floating road visible (newly constructed < 1 year), c) newly constructed (<1 year) landscaping, mixing of peat and mineral soil visible; d) Established peat at edge of floating road (15 years after construction), has maintained level and has peatland vegetation growing on it through natural revegetation. (Photographic permissions granted)
Case studies – incorporation within restoration projects
The reuse of peat is not considered for peatland restoration in the majority of cases. However, there are some examples where excavated peat has been used as part of the restoration process but this has only been permitted as an experimental approach. This is because once the peat is excavated (in the quantities it is being removed for wind farm construction), it has often lost structure and hydrological connectivity, and left as a stockpile until reinstatement begins (which varies from site to site).
Thus, the excavated peat has likely started to degrade, using this for restoration is unlikely to improve the habitat to the same level restoration with non-degraded peat would do. However, on some sites there are opportunities for reuse that could enable restoration if the appropriate planning and coordination between experts occurs. An example can be seen in Figure 4 (a and b). Key to the success of this kind of trial is planning how to implement it, for example a) efforts were made to move the peat only once – from excavation to reuse site; b) the layers of peat were kept separate and maintained across translocation; c) training was provided to the contractors involved in this reuse and restoration project. At a different site, excavated peat was used to infill peat cuttings that had occurred previously, however this infill can still be seen 10 years later (Figure 44c – differences in vegetation).
Although there are differences still visible in vegetation, the process for infilling used in situ vegetation. When reinstating the peat within the cuttings, the existing vegetation was stripped off and placed aside, the cuttings were then filled with acrotelmic peat generated from the excavation of nearby turbine bases. The vegetation was then replaced to reinstate the area and stabilise the peat. Although this may not have restored the peatland habitat to equivalent to undisturbed areas, as differences in vegetation are still visible. As the degradation was separate to wind farm construction, comparisons need to be made with how the environment was prior to wind farm construction, rather than comparison to pristine peatlands. Understanding whether the reuse of peat has been successful in maintaining a functioning peatland or at least preventing the loss of peat (and carbon) is very important, vegetation and water table monitoring occurs on some sites regularly to assess this (Figure 44d).
a)
b)
c)
d)
Figure 4. Examples of incorporation in restoration projects – a) Restoration trial (as part of the forest to bog project), where excavated peat was deposited at the side of a constructed track. However, to enhance restoration, prior to peat addition, vegetation was removed and the site ‘smoothed’, before the excavated peat was layered on top (to a depth of 150 mm or 300 mm dependent on trial site), after which the vegetation was put back on top of the reused peat. B) Zoomed in photo of trial site in a) peat vegetation covering trial site, with very little bare peat. C) Landscape restoration through the infill of furrows – here infill is within peat cuttings (but similar infill also occurs within the furrows of former forested sites). D) Dip well monitoring of water levels to assess success of peat reuse. (Photographic permissions granted)
Offsite use of excavated peat
Throughout this research it was discussed with stakeholders whether excavated peat could be used offsite from the wind farm construction; as to date only one paper was found. Balode et al., (2024) discussed various off-site novel uses for peat within the energy sector, building materials and additives, as well as agriculture and the wider environment (Figure 5); however, the paper does not focus solely on reuse and hence these uses are unlikely to occur within wind farm construction industry as the quantities involved in reuse are not going to warrant the creation of a comprehensive supply chain.
It is important to note that throughout the stakeholder consultation, it was repeatedly stated that reuse of peat off-site did not generally occur. Mainly this is due to two reasons, firstly classification – if the peat was taken off-site, it would be categorised as waste, which would likely entail a cost; secondly the necessary volumes of peat and the logistics of transportation would make it too costly to the project. If the reuse of peat offsite from wind farm construction was to be encouraged than new SEPA guidance and recommendations would need to be developed.
Figure 5. Novel applications of peat from Balode et al., (2024).
Environmental outcomes of peat reuse
The results of the literature review indicates that all anthropogenic activities within a peatland will impact the fate of nutrients. The fluctuating water table, local geochemistry and hydrology are the main drivers of a peatlands’ groundwater chemistry and discharge (Monteverde et al., 2022). Wind farm construction can increase the fluvial macronutrient loading of catchment streams (Heal et al., 2020), however, forest felling has been shown to lead to greater dissolved organic carbon (DOC) within felled areas compared to wind farm catchments (Zheng et al., 2018). It is important to note that often wind farms are developed on felled forest sites that were previously peatland, e.g. Whitelees and Camster, however it has been calculated that nearly 14 million trees have been cut down as part of wind farm construction projects over the last 20 years (2000 – 2020)[1]. Thus, academic studies comparing habitats as if they are discrete categories like a felled forest compared to a wind farm development need to include previous land use as part of their analysis. In other words, undisturbed peatland to forestry to felled forest and windfarm may produce different results compared to an undisturbed peatland to wind farm, but if only considering the final use they would be classed as having the same management factors influencing them. It is also unclear whether the environmental perturbations are additive and would likely occur if the area hadn’t previously been changed? Also the timing of monitoring is important, for example a newly constructed wind farm showed 5 g m2 losses in dissolved organic carbon (compared to control samples) over an 18-month period (Grieve and Gilvear, 2008) but it is unclear if losses reduce over time – this is a research gap. Is there an initial flush that quickly dissipates? Or are those losses continuous without signs of improvement. Grieve and Gilvear (2008) believe this 5 g m2 loss represents between 25% and 50% of annual carbon sequestration in peatlands in central Scotland, so it is quite substantial.
The structure and hydrology of removed and replaced peat will not resemble that of the undisturbed peat and likely undergo further degradation through settlement and oxidation (Lindsay, 2018). Excavated peat is often used to blend the transition from undisturbed areas to those which are part of the construction. The disturbance to the peat results in negative impact to the habitat (Jorat et al., 2024), however using excavated peat to link undisturbed areas with disturbed areas will encourage vegetation regrowth in keeping with the surrounding landscape and may stablise the disturbed peat. Error! Reference source not found. provides an overview of the potential environmental outcomes for some of these reuse options.
Understanding how each reuse option impacts the wider environment will inform the hierarchy. Repowering of wind farms, upgrading the turbines and technology used within a wind farm site once it has reached the end of use-limit, is one method of reducing disturbance on peatland. However, this still requires extensive planning, as the newer turbines are often larger, needing different spacing between turbines and larger foundations. Approximately 30% more land surface area will be disturbed for repowering using a new rather than reengineered foundation (Waldron et al., 2018). If the surrounding peatland has not recovered from the previous development, this could lead to greater degradation than using new locations.
It is unsurprising that wind farm construction leads to wide-scale changes to the peatland habitat, which are known to be sensitive habitats with unique attributes related to their hydrology and carbon richness. Within this report we have been focused solely on the impact of wind farms on the excavation of peat and its reuse, however once in situ wind farms may still have an impact on the surrounding peatland. For example, a study by Moravec et al., (2018) showed that wind turbines can affect ground surface temperatures (which has the potential to change soil hydrology); and these changes varied with proximity to wind turbine (Armstrong et al., 2016). These impacts may also last for the lifetime of the wind farm, a large-scale review of the impacts of pipeline construction on soil and crops found that pipelines caused soil degradation for years and decades following installation and that soil compaction and soil horizon mixing detrimentally impacted soil function (Brehm and Culman, 2022).
Table 5: Synthesis of reuse options and simplified overview of potential environmental outcomes (Note: this table summarises potential outcomes indicated by research during this study, but evidence is limited and site-by-site circumstances vary significantly so currently this differentiation on environmental grounds cannot be fully reflected in the recommended ‘hierarchy of peat reuse’.)
Method of reuse
Carbon store
Hydrology connectivity
Availability
Comment
Borrow pit reinstatement
++
Low risk of carbon loss
Low chance of carbon sequestration (carbon increase) in the long term
+
Only if well planned, with impermeable layers and outflows built in
+++
Large storage potential, should have capacity for all excavated peat, however where there is more (or less) peat than planned may lead to issues
Borrow pits have potential to provide an environmentally robust reuse option, however only if best practice is followed and there are contingencies in place if changes in planned volumes occur
Around turbine foundations and crane pad verges
—
High risk of carbon loss through peat drying out and erosion
–
When constructed these areas will automatically have drainage channels cut. The reuse of peat here will likely be impacted by this drainage
+
Small volume
Use to encourage vegetation re-growth around construction areas. Often used as a way of merging the built infrastructure with the surrounding landscape
Side of road/ track or “landscaping”
–
Risk of carbon loss through peat drying out and erosion, however if vegetation regrowth occurs this is less likely
–
Addition of peat should connect the reused peat with the wider environment to maintain hydrology, however, depends on flow patterns and drainage channels across roads
+
Small volume
If vegetation regrowth occurs and there is limited bare peat this has potential to become part of wider landscape
Incorporation of peat in restoration / reinstatement projects
+++
Low risk of carbon loss, has potential to build carbon (dependent on restoration / reuse project)
+++
If well planned, should have hydrological connectivity with landscape
+
Small volume
Usually these projects are highly monitored to assess progress – useful for data gathering in the short term alongside the benefits of using excavated peat in areas that may have been degraded previously
Limitations of data
Through the rapid evidence assessment (REA) we did not consider peatland restoration methods as part of the scope, however there are some strategies that go beyond restoration practices and should be a consideration as part of the reuse of peat. For example, rewetting peatland, drain blocking, revegetation, and fire management (Balode et al., 2024). Although there is academic research on the impact of peatland degradation, how wind farms can reduce reliance on fossil fuels and the social acceptance of wind farms within the environment, there is a lack of published research directly quantifying the impact of wind farms on peatlands, or providing evidence of best practice. Reliance on grey literature and stakeholder discussions is necessary to cover this research gap. For example, where novel reuse methods have been used, the industry has led monitoring of those sites, collected data and written these up as internal reports, which are not obviously available for the wider industry and academia to use. However, “standard practice” is rarely reviewed in academia nor comprehensive data collected, thus it is very difficult to make recommendations on what works best through standard literature reviews. Grey literature may be written with bias, there may be a lack of replication within the data, and it will not have been peer reviewed and is thus less reliable as a data source.
Often there is limited detail within peat management plans and planning applications for wind farms. For example, it is assumed that all excavated material will be peat; differences between peat layers (acrotelm and catotelm) are not distinguished and there is no reference to the vegetation layer. Depending on volumes, the only indication of reuse is stated as backfilling around turbine bases and landscaping around access tracks. As well as the aforementioned issues with the reuse of excavated peat, one important consideration that is often not discussed is that the different layers of peat excavated (acrotelm and catotelm) have different physical properties. Whilst the reuse options discussed above may be appropriate for acrotelm peat, they are unlikely to be suitable for catotelmic peat (generally below 1m depth peat)[1].
There is a lack of understanding related to the outcome of peat reuse – is it to restore peatland bog function, or is it to try to reduce losses of carbon from the excavated peat? Or is it to do something with the excavated peat that will minimally impact the wider environment? The likelihood is that the overall outcome will be somewhere between these points.
Although there is a significant amount of academic research on the impact of wind farms on peatland, there were clear gaps related to what should be deemed ‘best practice’. For example, there is no published work on the measurement of peatland parameters as part of the reinstatement of borrow pits on wind farms – how can best practice be defined when there is no indication of something working in practice, or a clear understanding of what ‘success’ looks like in this context? There have also not been any in-depth assessments of carbon loss after excavation and reuse – discussions were held in relation to loss of carbon as the peat dried out, but there is a lack of direct studies focusing on this over time. This information is also absent from the grey literature. There was a lot of discussion with stakeholders regarding what they believe works best from a real-world perspective (rather than lab based academic studies), but this still lacked underlying reported evidence, and was only discussed in terms of past experience of what worked (to reuse the peat available, and perceived that it remained within the field rather than eroding) and what hasn’t worked, remaining largely unmeasured and therefore unproven. Interestingly, where a wind farm had used a novel method of reuse, there was a monitoring plan set up by the energy company and evidence was gathered to justify this method. Highlighting how energy companies can lead the way in providing evidence of good practice.
Generally, there was a lack of monitoring occurring, both in terms of whether the construction process adheres to what has been set out in the PMPs but also to ascertain whether the approach has worked (and thus could be referred back to and repeated elsewhere). There is also a disconnect between the desired outcomes compared to the aims of the wind farm operators. For the wind farm developers, there is a need to balance aspects such as effectiveness and safety within the construction process (i.e. the need for drainage), with restoration, when that part of the construction process is complete. Removing drainage if it is no longer necessary within the wind farm infrastructure would enable an area to return to a more natural peatland habitat, although dialogue is required to ensure a shared understanding of how this might be defined.
Legislation and advisory documents change over time, for example “Scotland’s Peatland Standard”[1] (SPS) is currently being developed. This document will provide technical information and guidance to promote peatland protection. It will define the minimum for sustainable management and restoration requirements that Scottish Government expects all peatland owners, managers and contactors to follow. Thus, in future could potentially fill some of these knowledge gaps discussed.
We have developed the hierarchy below for reuse of peat through the literature review, stakeholder discussions and site visits presented within this report. We considered the role and nature of a potential hierarchy for peat reuse methods during this project, considering:
What needs to be included in a hierarchy and in which order.
What additional guidance or principles would help guide an environmentally beneficial approach to peat reuse.
Highlighting the research gaps at this time that need to be addressed to better inform a hierarchy of peat reuse methods.
Based on the findings of this study we have three recommendations:
Recommendation 1: Guidance on excavation peat reuse
1a: Planning and preparation steps 1b: A draft hierarchy of reuse methods 1c: Peat reuse and implementation principles
Recommendation 2: Environmental outcomes framework to ensure the multiple potential environmental benefits of peat reuse are considered, avoiding a single-issue focus.
Recommendation 3: Enhanced monitoring of environmental outcomes from reuse of peat – these investigations need to be targeted to address the specific research gaps highlighted in our study, and also better routine monitoring of site reuse implementation and environmental outcomes.
Our recommendations come from learnings acquired during this study. Through a rapid evidence assessment, an understanding was gained of the current research occurring on peatlands and wind farm developments, alongside site visits to see what was occurring in the field and a series of stakeholder discussions and workshops to fill in the gaps where reports or data were lacking. An area of clear agreement across stakeholders, both in terms of construction and also the conservation sector, is to minimise the amount of peat excavated. Avoidance of peat excavation can mean different things to different stakeholders, for example:
Is avoidance about minimising the volume of peat excavated? (reduction of waste and minimising cost) – Yes
Is avoidance about minimising the areas of carbon-rich soil impacted by excavation? (limited footprint of impact) – Yes
Is avoidance about minimising the loss of area of peatland in pristine / good conditions? (protected biodiversity) – Yes
Is avoidance about minimising loss of hydrological connectivity across on-site/off-site peatland and the wider functions of larger peat bodies? (ecosystem services) – Yes
Depending on the perspective of the stakeholder they may agree or disagree with some of the above statements, however they are overlapping in terms of reducing the impact of wind farm construction across peatlands. Avoidance is the essential first step in the hierarchy of reuse.
At times the timeline between site acquirement, site surveys, planning approval, and construction company deployment, leads to issues related to preparation and planning. Discussion with stakeholders highlighted that often the site surveys presented as part of the planning applications may not be at the detailed scale necessary to identify areas with the deepest peat (that should be avoided) at the construction stage. The construction contractors would like to avoid the areas with the deepest peat (due to costs and time, as well as to minimise the amount of peat disturbed) but are limited by what has previously been set out within the planning application. The condition of the existing peatland across the landscape prior to wind farm construction may not have been fully assessed, thus if the peat is already degraded the starting point for the reuse of peat will be lower and has the potential to degrade faster when disturbed.
Understanding the hydrological connectivity of the landscape will enable appropriate placement of drainage, this links closely to site condition – if there are already drier areas within the peatland, they may become drier over time with increased drainage. In some instances it is possible to reduce drainage after construction, if the areas being drained are reinstated with peat, however this is a consideration that should be made at the planning stage. Greater training needs to be provided for the construction operatives, both in terms of implementation of activities, but also to understand why it is important; as key to maintaining the quality of the peat during reuse, is minimising disturbance and maintaining the peat structure from the outset.
The importance of peatland for carbon storage is widely discussed both within the literature and by stakeholders, however, a key disconnection between the planning process and the completion of windfarm construction is the accuracy of the carbon calculations – it was widely discussed that in the majority of developments more peat is excavated than was planned. The actual amount of excavated peat is not used to recalculate the carbon loss and thus the overall impact of the wind farm development is not fully assessed. It also means the contractors inevitably have more peat excavated than was planned for reuse, thus the options for reuse of this peat may lack adequate planning for how to reuse appropriately. It is a pity contractors aren’t required to report how much peat has been excavated during the construction process, as this could improve the accuracy of estimates over time, but currently this data is not available or monitored. The condition of the peat that is reused is rarely monitored (at excavation or afterwards), therefore it is unclear whether this peat will continue storing the carbon it contains or whether carbon will be released into the atmosphere. Academic studies collecting empirical data on the release of carbon from disturbed peat are rare, and do not occur at a field scale or if they do these assessments usually occur in relation to agricultural disturbance rather than windfarm construction and are not wholly applicable. Where the peat was excavated from is also an important consideration for reuse – if it is taken from a borrow pit excavation this lends itself to borrow pit reinstatement, however if it is removed for cabling and road installation than returning the peat to this area (referred to as landscaping) may be a better option.
Recommendation 1: Guidance for Peat Reuse Options
Because detailed evidence to confirm the different environmental outcomes is not available, our recommendation is for a simple hierarchy of peat reuse options accompanied by some additional guidance and requirements which are essential for maximising environmental outcomes:
Recommendation 1a: Preparation and Planning Steps:
Avoiding / minimising peat excavation and
Appraise site circumstances and locally relevant potential reuse options
Recommendation 1b: Hierarchy of Peat Reuse
Recommendation 1c: Peat Reuse Implementation Principles: to guide the site-specific choice of methods and implementation to maximise environmental outcomes.
The hierarchy is not useable as a standalone guide – it must be accompanied by the additional components – as shown in
.
Figure 6: Guidance for Excavated Peat Reuse
Recommendation 1a: Preparation and planning steps
Is critical to conduct investigations to inform preparation and planning in order to maximise environmental outcomes – including first taking action to avoid peat extraction. Our recommended preparation and planning steps are set out in Table 6.
Table 6: Preparation and planning steps to accompany the hierarchy of peat reuse
Step 1: Avoidance
As per NPF4, avoidance of peat excavation is always the priority, in agreement with the NPF4 mitigation hierarchy. As part of the avoidance strategy, a “restorability assessment” should also be included – this should determine the condition of any peat that is due to be excavated and makes an assessment of the potential for reinstating the peat in that location. Taking into account the peatland condition, where it is located within the wider landscape, accessibility and how easy it may be to restore degradation in the future. As part of the avoidance strategy, as well as macro-level site decisions (e.g. develop on peat or not), micro-level decisions on site and in project designing and contracting should be considered to reduce the volume of peat excavated and/or impacted. For example, ensuring peat depth assessments are accurate and are used to guide any micro-siting[1] decisions.
[1] Micro-siting is where small adjustments to the wind farm lay out are made to avoid / minimise damage to peat (or other sensitive environments) on site.
Step 2: Preparation and planning: Appraise site and potential reuse outcomes
Preparation is critical for identifying the most beneficial options available on site and their feasibility. What is the depth of peat across the site? What has the peat been categorised as? If it is not in good condition, does it have potential for restoration? Has it been modified? Or drained? Aligning the details submitted within the application process (EIA) with further surveys, identifying depth and condition of peat at the exact locations for the tracks, turbines, general infrastructure and proposed reuse locations.
Planning, with the desired outcome in mind, is crucial to the successful reuse of peat. Knowing the volumes of peat to be excavated and from where on the site. Knowing the depth of peat and the thickness of each layer (acrotelm and catotelm). Planning where the borrow pit and stockpile need to be located. Planning peat movements to minimise disturbance. Contacting other stakeholders that may be able to enhance reuse of peat activities.
Prior land use:
Understanding what the starting land condition is. Has the land been used for other activities prior to wind farm planning? For example, many wind farms are being built on previous forest sites; some may have been used for grazing or are semi-natural habitats? These previous activities will impact drainage across the site, some areas may be drier or need to have the drained area restored, stump flipping may need to occur, and also natural regeneration of forest may affect the vegetative composition.
Peat condition and depth:
If the peat is in “good” condition prior to wind farm construction, this may negate some of the energy savings of renewable energy generation, as some studies have suggested that the carbon saved from the wind farm development won’t offset the damage to the environment. However, there are very few areas of pristine peatland in Scotland, and it is more likely to be a mosaic of conditions across the landscape – which may need to be considered regarding the progress of construction. The depth of peat in the area is also important, as deeper peats have different properties in terms of acrotelm, catotelm and underlying parent material. Very shallow peats are also a concern as they are more liable to mixing of soil and peat layers.
Reusability of peat at start of construction
The condition of peat prior to excavation will have an impact on its reusability. If the surrounding peatland is degraded, reused peat is unlikely to improve the conditions in the surrounding area (unlike peat extracted for restoration purposes). Inevitably, there will always be some degradation as peat is excavated (whether that’s through a loss of carbon or changes in porosity, hydrology, or vegetation coverage); thus minimising the amount of peat excavated will protect the environment. However, the counter point is that if the peat excavated is in very poor condition to begin with, it may not be able to be reused, and perhaps should not be excavated?
Site specific opportunities for reuse:
For all wind farms (and construction sites), the geographic limits for development activities are set (the development envelope). If there are areas where the reuse of peat would be more appropriate that is outside this area, than the reuse cannot occur there. Consideration should also be given to the site layout and options for reuse destinations – what is being constructed first and where. For example, the floating roads are often the first part of the infrastructure constructed to allow access to all areas. Where are the water courses and flows within the site, what is the connectivity with the wider landscape and habitats e.g. Is there an overlap with prior landuse or adjacent restoration work? Is the order of excavation and reuse appropriate to minimise carbon loss?
Agree desired outcome for use of excavated peat:
Setting a feasible intention (e.g. habitat to aim for) considering the site conditions and opportunities at the outset.
Recommendation 1b: Hierarchy of reuse
The rational for the hierarchy of reuse set out in Table 7 reflects the available evidence for environmental outcomes of peat reuse. The main options all have potential to deliver positive environmental outcomes in comparison to the secondary options or landfilling but there is insufficient evidence to rank the main options further. Their feasibility and environmental outcomes will depend upon the site context and the way they are implemented.
The table provides a supplement to the available information on good practices for use and handling of soil and peat. The evidence of environmental outcomes of reuse options has many gaps currently. Where there is evidence, it cannot always be confidently applied to specific sites and circumstances. Therefore, these principles / considerations are taking the precautionary principal approach and should be used as stepping stones reflecting the consensus amongst technical experts about things which are important to consider in the absence of a complete evidence base.
Table 7: Underlying rationale and details related to hierarchy of reuse of peat
(1) Main re-use options
Borrow pit reinstatement or infill
Borrow pit reinstatement involves putting excavated peat into a borrow pit at the end of the period of use. Potential desired outcomes can vary and should be informed by the planning steps.
Key priorities: Aim for a functioning bog, then consider other locally valuable habitats. Management / design needs to prioritise setting up the reinstated borrow pit appropriately for desired outcomes e.g. including an impermeable layer at the bottom of the pit; water outlet to hydrologically link the borrow pit to the rest of the peatland habitat; layered in a similar way to how it was excavated (including a vegetation layer). Aim to only move peat once if possible. Otherwise, if the peat that is removed from the borrow pit will be returned to the borrow pit it will need to be stockpiled prior to reuse. Reinstating the surface vegetation appropriately should enable recolonisation of the surface layer which will aid the development of a functioning bog habitat and increase biodiversity.
Rationale:
Capable of taking high volume, of which a significant portion may be from the original site as a result of the borrow pit excavation.
Whilst our study did not find peer reviewed studies that confirmed the environmental outcomes of borrow pit reinstatement, observations and comments from stakeholders, and their in-progress monitoring suggests some good environmental outcomes (including maintaining water levels and peatland vegetation), when borrow pit reinstatement is completed properly following the above key priorities.
Further research is needed to confirm these environmental outcomes – we have seen this is occurring at some sites, it would be beneficial to the sector if these results were published.
Other reinstatement
There are other areas impacted by wind farm developments that could be consider for reinstatement – for example areas that have been used for building compounds, crane pads, temporary access tracks etc
Reinstatement involves the reuse of peat to blend the natural habitat with the infrastructure disturbance as a way to encourage vegetation re-growth.
Key priorities: Maintaining hydrological connectivity between the reuse of peat and the landscape in situ. High risk of the peat drying out leading to erosion. To reduce this risk it is important to follow the peatland restoration technical compendium and future requirements of the forthcoming Scotland Peatland Standard.
Restoration
Restoration involves the reuse of excavated peat by incorporating it into areas of peatland on site that have previously been degraded through anthropogenic activities – for example forestry or peat-cuttings directly accessible from the development site. This can offset (compensate) for some of the residual impact of the development or for enhancing peatland conditions in support of the reinstatement of functional peatland. A number of discussions with stakeholders presented examples of this type of restoration occurring on wind farm developments. Although the results are unpublished, the results show promise as a way of delivering enhanced environmental benefits as part of the construction process.
Key priorities: Design must be site specific aiming for functioning peatland or other locally valuable habitat. After a thorough site survey, areas that are degraded peat should be identified and considered part of the reuse process. For long term success of this reuse method there needs to be collaboration between peatland restoration experts alongside the construction sector and use of the peatland restoration technical compendium alongside the Scotland Peatland Standard.
Rationale:
If this method of reuse of excavated peat was to occur, it would initially only be in areas within the wind farm development site identified as potential areas for restoration.
Reusing peat in these areas, although takes more planning and time (including assessing peat slide risks), is likely to be beneficial, particularly if it enables restoration which would not be possible in the absence of available peat.
Reinstating peat where peat has been historically located has a greater likelihood of returning peat to a functioning level than reusing peat in areas that were not peatland previously.
Peer reviewed studies were not available to confirm environmental outcomes of peat in restoration but observations and comments from stakeholders, and their in-progress monitoring suggests potential for good environmental outcomes, although only if well designed – more research is needed to understand effective methods and environmental outcomes.
Landscaping (road verges, embankment slopes etc)
Landscaping involves reinstatement of peat above cabling and alongside floating roads and embankments. Often the excavated peat is from where the cable is to be laid and will be returned to where it was extracted from, however alongside roads and embankments may be from other areas.
Key priorities: Care needs to be taken to maintain peat layering and planning related to hydrology needs to occur (as the peat above the cable risks being hydrologically isolated if situated between the floating road and drainage channels). Floating roads are often higher than the surrounding habitat, as aggregate and geotextile mesh has been put down as part of the construction process, this creates an island effect. It is important to consider the vegetation when reusing peat as part of the landscaping process. It is crucial to not reinstate peat on top of vegetation, this may mean that vegetation needs to be lifted away to reuse peat prior to returning the vegetation to the area.
Rationale:
Reusing peat along these road verges can improve the landscape, by changing the levels between the road and the wider landscape reducing the risk of island effects, but only if the hydrology and placement is considered, will it have the potential to reduce degradation.
It may be the only practical option in some circumstances as blending the zones between the infrastructure and wider environment may reduce the degradation spreading into the undisturbed peatland (through reducing the risk of the peat drying out and erosion occurring).
Reinstating excavated peat along the roadside will stabilise the surface and reduce the sediment runoff which could damage the wider environment.
Reusing excavated peat along roadsides gives the natural vegetation a chance to recolonise and restore these areas close to the wind farm development. Vegetation reduces the risk of erosion and further degradation.
Secondary options (2,3)
There is limited interest in reusing peat offsite and for the majority of construction projects it does not appear to occur. Questions were asked of stakeholders to assess if excavated peat could be reused within the horticulture sector, whisky industry or other aspects of the construction or energy sector. In all instances the answer was a definitive no, there is no evidence for the reuse of peat offsite in these sectors as part of wind farm construction, it does not occur. This is likely due to the volumes of peat involved and the sporadic nature of the supply chain, also as the Scottish Government has committed to phasing out the use of peat in horticulture this is unlikely to gain momentum as a viable option.
There are instances where an area has lost peat previously due to land use activities and offers an opportunity for excavated peat to be reused as part of restoration. An example from the stakeholder consultation was where the reuse of peat from a wind farm construction was used to reinstate an area of mining that had occurred nearby. It is important to note that if onsite reuse cannot occur all endeavours should be made to undertake these secondary options prior to the last option of landfill which should be avoided.
(2) Offsite
(known use)
This reuse occurs on a case-by-case basis and usually occurs where the land ownership or construction operators are linked. For it to occur more frequently, greater planning and preparation needs to be implemented prior to excavation and transport.
(3) Offsite
(unknown use)
Where peat has been extracted and there was no reuse plan in place for it, this could lead to unknown use offsite. This reuse is very unlikely to occur but when it does it is usually in small quantities e.g. for novel trials of reuse options. This is because once peat leaves the site it will be considered waste and is also costly to transport.
(4) Last resort option
Landfill
This should be considered a “last resort” option, and all other options should be prioritised before this.
The effectiveness and likely outcomes of different methods of peat reuse is heavily dependent on-site specific context, feasibility of achieving the desired outcome, and the detailed design of the method (such as borrow pit infill design). Thus, any hierarchy needs to be flexible, but decisions should be guided by a set of principles to maximise environmental outcomes. These include:
Aiming for functioning peatland (as close to natural functioning as possible because full natural functioning is likely to be unachievable in most cases), or other valuable habitat if not possible.
Maintaining / reinstating vegetation
Maintaining / reinstating water flows / hydrological functioning, whilst ensuring site stability and safety.
Minimising peat movement
Maintain peat structure (layers) where possible.
See Table 8 below for more detail.
Putting these into practice is facilitated by the preparation steps set out in Recommendation 1a above. For example greater detail could be requested prior to planning consent, because most peatland management plans lack depth and site-specific details. Requiring this information prior to the start of the construction process will increase the likelihood that planning, and preparation will be undertaken to the necessary extent to improve the outcomes of peat reuse. This would move the onus from contractor and place it with the energy company / landowner that ‘owns’ the consent and is responsible for full legal compliance. Greater detail within the PMPs would also provide a more accurate understanding of the true quantities of peat to be excavated, by including a requirement under the consent for accurate recording and in turn enhance the reuse strategy to be implemented. This could also provide future developments with more accurate calculations to use within their planning applications and PMPs. However, it is beyond the scope of this research to identify where responsibility lies for receiving and reviewing such additional material.
It was clear through the stakeholder consultation that there are a number of very knowledgeable groups working within the sector (Appendix B, including environmental government organisations, wind farm contractors, energy companies, environmental consultants from the private sector, as well as academics and conservation organisations). Capturing this knowledge to ensure recommendations for best practice are supported by what is practical will improve the wind farm construction process in the future.
Table 8: Peat reuse implementation principles – further explanation
Peat reuse implementation principles
Hydrological connectivity
Mapping out the connectivity of the site, will enable better drainage planning, targeted to ensure site stability / safety and support the desired peat reuse goal e.g., desired habitat. It will also enable more successful reuse of the peat if it is kept wet and can connect into the hydrology of the surrounding land at the location of reuse.
Minimise peat handling and disturbance
If enough planning has occurred, it may be possible to only need to move the peat once – from where it is excavated to the site of reuse. This also avoids storage of excavated peat, which generally leads to undesirable changes in peat properties, e.g. loss of water, bulk density increase, carbon loss, damage to microbial populations
Separation of peat layers
When excavating peat, the success of reuse will be increased if the different peat layers are kept separate (acrotelm, catotelm, and underlying mineral soil) as they have very different properties.
Maintain wetness of stockpiles
Stockpiling of excavated peat should be avoided where possible. If necessary to stockpile peat, stockpiles should be watered when necessary to maintain wetness. If the surface of peat dries out, a hydrophobic layer may form. This reduces the overall infiltration rate of the peat blocks and may lead to further desiccation and other negative impacts, as noted above under ‘Minimise disturbance and avoid storage/stockpiling’.
Multiple environmental outcomes should be targeted through peat reuse. To avoid excessive focus on one environmental measure of success, we recommend the following environmental outcomes should be considered when deciding on which peat reuse option to implement on site. These environmental outcomes should be monitored to assess success (see Table 9 for rationale):
Minimising carbon loss from excavated peat
Positive biodiversity outcomes reflecting local and national goals
Ensuring downstream water quality (sediment / nutrient load)
Following on from Recommendation 1 and the hierarchy of reuse options, environmental outcomes framework indicates the priority environmental outcomes for peat reuse. These should be considered by the consenting authority as part of the planning process, in conjunction with the EIA process and developers should be considering these in their development plans. We recommend the consenting authority to check that the applicant has fully considered these areas within the planning proposal as part of their strategy for reuse. The environmental outcomes framework should also guide subsequent monitoring and evaluation, during and after construction. Clarity on what environmental outcomes could potentially be achieved from peat reuse can support all parties to deliver better environmental outcomes.
Table 9: Rationale for Environmental Outcomes Framework for Peat Reuse
Outcome
Rationale for inclusion in the Framework
Minimising carbon loss from excavated peat
Carbon can be lost as the peat is disturbed primarily through hydrological changes and erosion – these two processes are interlinked, as erosion is more likely when peat starts to dry out. Leading to the loss of particulate organic carbon (POC) which is more easily transported by wind or water erosion. As the peat dries out and is exposed to oxygen, aerobic decomposition of the organic matter starts to occur, releasing the stored carbon as CO2. As carbon is lost subsidence of the peatland may also occur, this has knock-on concerns for the wider environment and safety and stability of the wind farm. Where the excavated peat has been left bare of vegetation carbon loss and erosion are also a greater risk.
Positive biodiversity outcomes reflecting local and national goals
Enabling the regrowth of peatland vegetation (particularly indicative peatland species like sphagnum mosses) helps rebuild peat structure and enhances carbon sequestration potential, but it also improves the wider biodiversity within the environment. However, studies focusing on peatland restoration have shown that vegetation is slow to recover and even ten years after restoration the vegetation present can still be dissimilar to pristine peatlands (Kareksela et al., 2015). Thus greater consideration is necessary related to vegetation regrowth to maximise its potential. Within our recommendations we have advised on best practice for the reuse of peat, however action should also be taken to maintain vegetative cover alongside this reuse. Whether this is through moving the vegetation layer as part of the reinstatement of reused peat, seeding the reused peat, or if there is existing vegetation in the area planned for peat reuse, stripping this off and placing aside, so that the vegetation can be replaced once the reused peat is reinstated in the area and stabilise the peat.
Ensuring downstream water quality (sediment / nutrient load)
Excavated peat can lead to increases in dissolved organic carbon (DOC) within water systems leading to changes in downstream water quality, as well as increased sediment loads. This can be through the physical disturbance of the construction process increasing water erosion and DOC leaching. Drainage can cause hydrological alterations and redirect water flows, mobilising sediments (POC) and DOC leading to increased carbon losses and peatland erosion (Grieve & Gilvear, 2008).
Recommendation 3: Improved research and monitoring
In discussion with stakeholders, some monitoring is occurring post wind farm construction for peat reuse, usually by the landowner or energy company, however as discussed previously this monitoring is not mandatory and usually focuses on novel uses, or where the reuse appears to have been successful. We recommend:
Monitoring of environmental outcomes of peat reuse for the life of the windfarm, EIAs often require follow up monitoring in relation to biodiversity post-construction, however Peatland Management Plans (PMPs) do not. We recommend greater considerations is given to PMPs as part of follow up monitoring to include:
Monitoring of peat levels, and wetness around the wind farm, irrespective of reuse option, this should occur to identify areas that may be drying out due to drainage, or where too much waterlogging may be occurring because of the changes in hydrology caused by the construction process.
Monitoring of vegetation cover and types, for example through vegetation surveys are used as indications of functioning peatlands, but other measures (like DOC within the water catchment or carbon fluxes) could provide a more nuanced understanding of the impact reuse is having on the wider environment.
Greater sharing of this data and collaboration with the academic community, would also enable further distinctions of best practice to occur. We recommend a formal advisory relationship to form between developers and the research community facilitated by Scottish Government, so that data sharing can occur and consenting authorities have access to better knowledge of effective peat reuse being undertaken. Data that has historically been collected but has not been reported on could be shared initially to assess how a collaborative data sharing process may work. The current lack of data sharing and credible longitudinal studies was noticeable at the site visits for wind farms that had been commissioned 10+ years previously – key details had been lost with job changes / retirement that could have benefitted the wind farm sector as a whole, with improved understanding of what is now visibly working and what hasn’t worked so well.
Research gaps
There are many research gaps that have been highlighted throughout this study. These could be addressed through the following actions:
The exact volume of peat excavated across a wind farm development is not known at completion of construction → We recommend asking the contractors to update records at the end of construction. Building on this we recommend a study to assess the differences between the amount of peat stated to be extracted prior to the wind farm development commencing compared to the wind farm after construction has finished. This could also be used to improve the accuracy of the carbon calculator providing a more accurate picture of the true carbon losses after completion of construction.
Understanding how the carbon content changes within the peat volume over time for all reuse options → We recommend monitoring projects focusing on carbon loss and GHG emissions
Seeing how the full GHG balance for infilled borrow pits changes dependent on size and age of the borrowpit → We recommend that monitoring of infilled borrow pits including size and volume, and hydro connectivity needs to occur at regular intervals
The environmental outcomes of borrow pits have not been fully assessed → We recommend collecting monitoring data of the regeneration of plants and biodiversity over time will enable this.
Reviewing available printed information on best practice (and standard practice) → Likely this is very limited and may involve contacting energy companies to access internal data and reports. We recommend greater collaboration between the energy companies and academia, with a greater amount of data sharing. Funding opportunities are usually the best way to encourage engagement between different stakeholders.
The level of revegetation on peat that had previously been excavated appears to be reliant on natural recolonisation, how well this occurs is not thoroughly understood. → We recommend monitoring how plants recolonise the excavated peat that has been reused which would enable a better understanding of best practice. From discussions with stakeholders there is limited reseeding occurring and it is largely left to natural revegetation. However, this is more likely to occur if the surface plants are maintained (removing the in situ plants, redistributing the reused peat and returning the plants on top should enhance recolonisation rates).
Conclusions
These results highlight our current understanding of peat reuse methods occurring in wind farm construction in Scotland. We have identified the critical environmental issues and how the reuse of peat can maintain the habitat, allowing for environmentally conscious construction techniques to take precedence.
However, the overriding synthesis of the information gained during this process is that planning prior to construction is key, as well as ensuring that stakeholders work together to achieve best practice. Avoidance of excavation of deep peat is the first priority. Next, acknowledging that once peat is excavated full consideration of how best to reuse it (ideally only moving it once and keeping the different layers separate, while aiming to keep the peat wet and/or maintaining hydrological connectivity) are crucial.
After these main outcomes from the hierarchy, attention needs to focus on delivering site specific reuse. It also became apparent that although there is a lot of knowledge within the peatland and wind farm sector, there has been limited studies collecting data to inform best practice. This needs to be encouraged to understand current research gaps and advise on the right management methods to reduce peatland degradation in the long term.
References
Albanito, F., Roberts, S., Shepherd, A., Hastings, A., 2022. Quantifying the land-based opportunity carbon costs of onshore wind farms. Journal of Cleaner Production 363, 132480.
Armstrong, A., Burton, R.R., Lee, S.E., Mobbs, S., Ostle, N., Smith, V., Waldron, S., Whitaker, J., 2016. Ground-level climate at a peatland wind farm in Scotland is affected by wind turbine operation. Environmental Research Letters 11, 044024.
Austin, K.G., Elsen, P.R., Coronado, E.N.H., DeGemmis, A., Gallego-Sala, A.V., Harris, L., Kretser, H.E., Melton, J.R., Murdiyarso, D., Sasmito, S.D., Swails, E., Wijaya, A., Winton, R.S., Zarin, D., 2025. Mismatch Between Global Importance of Peatlands and the Extent of Their Protection. Conservation Letters 18, e13080.
Balode, L., Bumbiere, K., Sosars, V., Valters, K., Blumberga, D., 2024. Pros and Cons of Strategies to Reduce Greenhouse Gas Emissions from Peatlands: Review of Possibilities, Applied Sciences.
Bragg, O.M., 2002. Hydrology of peat-forming wetlands in Scotland. Science of the Total Environment 294, 111-129.
Brehm, T., Culman, S., 2022. Pipeline installation effects on soils and plants: A review and quantitative synthesis. Agrosystems, Geosciences & Environment 5, e20312.
Chico, G., Clewer, T., Midgley, N.G., Gallego-Anex, P., Ramil-Rego, P., Ferreiro, J., Whayman, E., Goeckeritz, S., Stanton, T., 2023. The extent of wind farm infrastructures on recognised European blanket bogs. Scientific Reports 13, 3919.
Detrey, I., 2022. Bog in a Box: Is long term peat storage for future restoration viable? University of the Highlands and Islands, UHI.
Dykes, A.P., 2022. Landslide investigations during pandemic restrictions: initial assessment of recent peat landslides in Ireland. Landslides 19, 515-525.
Elmes, M.C., Petrone, R.M., Volik, O., Price, J.S., 2022. Changes to the hydrology of a boreal fen following the placement of an access road and below ground pipeline. Journal of Hydrology: Regional Studies 40, 101031.
Evans, M.G., Burt, T.P., Holden, J., Adamson, J.K., 1999. Runoff generation and water table fluctuations in blanket peat: evidence from UK data spanning the dry summer of 1995. Journal of Hydrology 221, 141-160.
Ferretto, A., Brooker, R., Aitkenhead, M., Matthews, R., Smith, P., 2019. Potential carbon loss from Scottish peatlands under climate change. Regional Environmental Change 19, 2101-2111.
Grieve, I.C., Gilvear, D., 2008. Effects of wind farm construction on concentrations and fluxes of dissolved organic carbon and suspended sediment from peat catchments at Braes of Doune, central Scotland. Mires and Peat 4.
Heal, K., Phin, A., Waldron, S., Flowers, H., Bruneau, P., Coupar, A., Cundill, A., 2020. Wind farm development on peatlands increases fluvial macronutrient loading. Ambio 49, 442-459.
Jennings, P., Kane, G., 2015. Geotechnical engineering for wind farms on peatland sites, Geotechnical Engineering for Infrastructure and Development, pp. 595-600.
Jorat, M.E., Minto, A., Tierney, I., Gilmour, D., 2024. Future Carbon-Neutral Societies: Minimising Construction Impact on Groundwater-Dependent Wetlands and Peatlands, Sustainability.
Kareksela, S., Haapalehto, T., Juutinen, R., Matilainen, R., Tahvanainen, T., Kotiaho, J.S., 2015. Fighting carbon loss of degraded peatlands by jump-starting ecosystem functioning with ecological restoration. Science of the Total Environment 537, 268-276.
Lehan, K., McCarter, C.P.R., Moore, P.A., Waddington, J.M., 2022. Effect of stockpiling time on donor-peat hydrophysical properties: Implications for peatland restoration. Ecological Engineering 182, 106701.
Lindsay, R., 2014. Impacts of artifical drainage on peatlands. IUCN UK Committee Peatland Programme. Briefing Note Number 3.
Lindsay, R., 2018. Peatlands and Wind farms: Conflicting Carbon Targets and Environmental Impacts, In: Finlayson, C.M., Milton, G.R., Prentice, R.C., Davidson, N.C. (Eds.), The Wetland Book: II: Distribution, Description, and Conservation. Springer Netherlands, Dordrecht, pp. 413-425.
Monteverde, S., Healy, M.G., O’Leary, D., Daly, E., Callery, O., 2022. Management and rehabilitation of peatlands: The role of water chemistry, hydrology, policy, and emerging monitoring methods to ensure informed decision making. Ecological Informatics 69, 101638.
Moravec, D., Barták, V., Puš, V., Wild, J., 2018. Wind turbine impact on near-ground air temperature. Renewable Energy 123, 627-633.
Morton, P.A., Heinemeyer, A., 2019. Bog breathing: the extent of peat shrinkage and expansion on blanket bogs in relation to water table, heather management and dominant vegetation and its implications for carbon stock assessments. Wetlands Ecology and Management 27, 467-482.
Natural England, 2013. Natural England Evidence Reviews: guidance on the development process and methods (NEER001). Natural England.
Renou-Wilson, F., Farrell, C., 2009. Peatland vulnerability to energy-related developments from climate change policy in Ireland: the case of wind farms. Mires and Peat 4.
Sander, L., Jung, C., Schindler, D., 2024. Global Review on Environmental Impacts of Onshore Wind Energy in the Field of Tension between Human Societies and Natural Systems, Energies.
Scottish Renewables, Scottish Natural Heritage, Scottish Environment Protection Agency, Forestry Commission Scotland and Historic Environment Scotland, 2015. Good Practice during Wind Farm Construction, version 3, available from https://www.nature.scot/doc/good-practice-during-wind-farm-construction
Smith, J., Nayak, D.R., Smith, P., 2014. Wind farms on undegraded peatlands are unlikely to reduce future carbon emissions. Energy Policy 66, 585-591.
Smith, P., Smith, J., Flynn, H., Killham, K., Rangel-Castro, I., Foereid, B., Aitkenhead, M., Chapman, S., Towers, W., Bell, J., Lumsdon, D., Milne, R., Thomson, A., Simmons, I., Skiba, U., Reynolds, B., Evans, C., Frogbrook, Z., Bradley, I., Whitmore, A., Falloon, P., Scottish Executive, Welsh Assembly Government, 2007. ECOSSE: Estimating Carbon in Organic Soils – Sequestration and Emissions: Final Report, Web only.
Tanneberger, F., Moen, A., Barthelmes, A., Lewis, E., Miles, L., Sirin, A., Tegetmeyer, C., Joosten, H., 2021. Mires in Europe—Regional Diversity, Condition and Protection, Diversity.
Waldron, S., Smith, J., Taylor, K., McGinnes, C., Roberts, N., McCallum, D., 2018. Repowering onshore wind farms: a technical and environmental exploration of foundation reuse. Carbon Landscapes and Drainage KE Network-led report. DOI 10.17605/OSF.IO/SCZDE
Wawrzyczek, J., Lindsay, R., Metzger, M.J., Quétier, F., 2018. The ecosystem approach in ecological impact assessment: Lessons learned from wind farm developments on peatlands in Scotland. Environmental Impact Assessment Review 72, 157-165.
Williams-Mounsey, J., Grayson, R., Crowle, A., Holden, J., 2021. A review of the effects of vehicular access roads on peatland ecohydrological processes. Earth-Science Reviews 214, 103528.
Zheng, Y., Waldron, S., Flowers, H., 2018. Fluvial dissolved organic carbon composition varies spatially and seasonally in a small catchment draining a wind farm and felled forestry. Science of the Total Environment 626, 785-794.
Appendix A – Research scope, questions and methods
Research Scope and Questions
To provide a comprehensive overview of the current state of knowledge, identify key knowledge gaps, and highlight areas for future research and policy development in sustainable peatland management within the context of renewable energy infrastructure, particularly in Scotland, this review has centred on the below questions:
Current practices:
How are excavated peat management and reuse practices being employed (of relevance for Scottish wind farm developments) both on-site and off-site?
Environmental impacts of current methods:
What are the impacts and/or benefits of current peat reuse practices in relation to hydrology and water quality, carbon emissions and storage, biodiversity and habitats?
Are there any environmental risks associated with current peat reuse practices, such as increased sediment load, erosion or landscape instability?
How do impacts change over time – what timeframes are relevant and are there long-term impacts of peatland disturbance and reuse practices?
Limitations and challenges:
What are the technical limitations of using excavated peat on-site?
How do regulatory frameworks impact the options for peat reuse?
Best practices:
From current available evidence, what peat reuse practices are preferable for minimising GHG emissions and wider negative environmental impacts?
How can peat management plans be optimised to maximise environmental benefits and minimise carbon losses?
Development of a reuse hierarchy
Hierarchy of Peat Reuse
Preparation and Planning Steps
Peat Reuse Implementation Principles
Research Methods
The following sections describe the information collation methods and data sources used in this study, these methods have been kept purposefully brief here, for more detail please see the appendices. A project database was compiled in Excel and is supplied separately to this project report.
Rapid Evidence Assessment
The method used for performing the evidence review was based on the Natural England (2013) evidence review methodology to ensure that the approach was transparent, objective and rigorous, allowing for robust evidential conclusions to be drawn from the available information for a full description see Appendix A.
Rapid Evidence Assessment methodology
The method used for performing the evidence review was based on the Natural England (2013) evidence review methodology to ensure that the approach was transparent, objective and rigorous, allowing for robust evidential conclusions to be drawn from the available information.
Scope
This rapid evidence assessment (REA) focused on synthesizing current evidence related to peatland excavation and reuse within the context of wind farm construction and similar large-scale developments. The assessment covered:
Current standard practices of peatland excavation and management in development projects.
Environmental impacts of peatland disturbance.
Opportunities for reuse of excavated peat on-site and off-site, including their environmental benefits and limitations over different timescales
Best practices for minimizing peatland disturbance and optimizing peat management plans.
Evidence search approach
The methodology comprises five main steps:
Define search strategy including keyword list compilation and define inclusion/exclusion criteria.
Searching for evidence and record findings.
Title and abstract screen.
Evidence extraction.
Evidence synthesis and evidence gap identification.
Step 1: Keyword list compilation
To establish a systematic search strategy, a list of key search words, search terms and suitable combinations were developed (included in separately shared document). These search terms were recorded for systematic use by the review team to reduce bias.
Step 2: Identification of information sources
In order to develop a comprehensive and relevant evidence base, appropriate information sources were identified. To reduce the risk of publication bias on the evidence base a range of information sources were used, which enabled access to peer-reviewed literature, grey-literature, and unpublished sources.
For this review Science Direct and Scopus were used to identify peer-reviewed information. Google Scholar and Research Gate provided further access to peer-reviewed information to enhance the literature search. Grey literature was also identified in the search and included industry reports and relevant committee proceedings.
Step 3: Evidence search
To facilitate the repeatability and transparency of the search process evidence searches were carried out as Boolean searches (AND, OR, NOT, etc). For example, using Boolean operators we searched (“excavated peat” OR “peatlands” OR “peat bogs” OR “carbon rich soils”) AND (“reuse” OR “recycling” OR “repurposing” OR “reclamation” OR “displaced” OR “borrow pits”) AND (“wind farms” OR “wind turbines” OR “wind energy” OR “onshore wind” OR “renewable energy”) AND (“sustainability” OR “environmental impact” OR “eco-friendly” OR “carbon footprint” OR “climate change” OR “carbon flux” OR “soil restoration” OR “land rehabilitation” OR “habitat restoration” OR “conservation”). The results of each search were recorded, including the number of search hits and number of relevant records returned, date of search and database used. Any other sources, such as evidence provided by stakeholders or generated through stakeholder engagement meetings were also documented similarly.
Developing and establishing search strings was treated as an iterative process and, as such, search strings were amended or adapted to optimise search relevance particularly where the number of search hits or relevance of records retrieved are excessively large or small.
Step 4: Title and abstract screen
In order to allow for a systematic and repeatable approach to screening whilst minimising individual subjectivity and bias, results of the evidence search were screened by title and abstract against pre-established inclusion and exclusion criteria for the review question(s). Evidence that did not satisfy the inclusion criteria were not taken forward for further analysis. References and key details (search date, search terms, publication name, database source and a DOI) were captured for all selected literature. Duplicates are also removed at this stage.
Step 5: Evidence extraction
To allow for interpretation and evaluation of the available literature evidence. A consistent, systematic approach to extracting evidence was taken for each item in the evidence item. Information was extracted on the basis of the review questions. Collated information included details of the type of study, the situation studied, key outcomes, endpoints and geographical extent (reported in separately shared excel document).
Step 6: Evidence synthesis and evidence gap identification
The compilation of evidence allowed for the type and amount of evidence obtained to be scrutinised and for any key evidence gaps or conversely areas of extensive evidence to be highlighted. This allowed for conclusions to be drawn based on the findings review and further enabled the appraisal of whether the collated evidence was adequate and suitable for addressing the review question. The collated information from the review of the literature is detailed in Supplementary Document 1 (finalisation in process).
Availability of the literature
The Rapid Evidence Assessment methodology used (Appendix A) obtained over 250 articles and reports through a range of keyword searches, in Science Direct and Google Scholar as described above. These were screened based on their title and abstract to identify relevant articles. This resulted in 50 articles and reports that were flagged as relevant for further scrutiny. These articles were then reviewed, and key information was extracted and is included within this report.
Desk-based research into current practices
A list of current wind farms in Scotland was obtained from the renewable energy planning database[12] (October 2024, quarter 3) sorted by energy type, location and whether they were currently operational (Figure 7). A sample of wind farms were chosen (as examples of a range of sizes of wind farms and locations across Scotland), to review the information provided within the peatland management plans, amount of peat to be excavated (if stated within application) and other related environmental planning information where obtained.
Figure 7. The distribution of wind farms across Scotland with peatland also highlighted. A list of current wind farms in Scotland was obtained from the renewable energy planning database[13] (October 2024, quarter 3) sorted by energy type, location and whether they were currently operational these were plotted on to a map of Scotland along with the distribution of peatland taken from Carbon and Peatland 2016 map[14].
Site visits
Five wind farm site visits were undertaken in November 2024 (Figure 3), these included three wind farms in the North-east of Scotland and two wind farms in the South-west of Scotland. These sites were chosen to cover a broad geographic distribution, a range of ages (different amounts of time since construction), and variation in peat depth. Visiting these sites provided a greater understanding of what was happening as part of the wind farm construction process, alongside providing context as to how peatland management plans are implemented and the many possible variations which can occur due to the amount of peat extracted, weather conditions and the inherent habitat quality prior to wind farm construction. These site visits also provided ‘real world’ examples of management practices in use, including (a) borrow pit reinstatement (over varying time periods – currently under construction, recent construction (< 5 years), 5-10 years since reinstatement, 10+ years since reinstatement), and (b) the replacement of peat at the side of the constructed roads (as part of the landscaping process and/or to maintain peat levels across the habitat).
Stakeholder Engagement Methods
During the study stakeholders were engaged for the following reasons:
To gain insights into current practices for reuse of peat excavated on wind farms in Scotland.
To gather views on the strengths, weaknesses, applicability and environmental outcomes of different reuse methods.
To gather suggestions for examples and sites which could provide learning about the two points above.
To gain input into the development of recommendations for reuse of excavated peat.
Appendix B Stakeholder engagement
Summary stakeholder engagement approach
Methods of stakeholder engagement:
Several different types of stakeholder engagement were employed in the study to gain further insights into relevant issues, current and potential future peat reuse methods, related considerations and impacts and to help identify sites to visit, get sign-posted to relevant documentation and research resources, and to understand considerations which are being or could be taken into account when decisions about reuse of excavated peat are made. Table 10 provides a brief overview of methods.
Table 10. Overview of stakeholder engagement methods
Dates
Activities
Purpose
Oct-Dec
2025
Research interviews with stakeholders / technical specialists.
Supplement desk-research.
Nov 2025
Site visits to wind farms incorporating local / other stakeholder engagement.
Gain insights into reuse activities on site, local context, site characteristics and how decisions were made.
Dec
2025
Academic / technical specialist online workshop
Supplement desk research, sense-check and refine draft recommendations.
Approach to identifying and selecting stakeholders to engage:
The project sought engagement with a range of different types of stakeholders academics and experts, such as those with a track record of relevant publications (i.e. on topics linked to the use of peat on wind farms in Scotland); practitioners from the energy sector (e.g. Ecological Clark of Works (ECoW) / Ecology officers) with wind farm sites in Scotland and from the construction sector that have been involved in building wind farms in Scotland; Civil Servants (Forestry and Land Scotland, PEAG); and conservation organisations (IUCN UK Peatland Programme). A selection of stakeholders were invited to attend the academic workshop, as well as a series of one-to-one discussions.
This approach to stakeholder engagement enabled the facilitation of site visits along with group discussions.
We identified stakeholders via:
Introduction / recommendations from the project steering group – a group of specialists from across relevant Scottish Government Agencies (see Section 8.1.7.3)
Desk research / REA – to identify relevant academics
‘Snowballing’ – asking our contacts and contacts via the steering group or other interviewees to recommend relevant technical experts or industry contacts who could provide access or insights about wind farm sites.
We have sought a diversity of sites, with reasonable access – but to include a site further North if possible due to variation in vegetation colonisation rates for reuse on site.
When selecting wind farm sites to visit we aimed to achieve a diverse range of sites with reasonable access where we would be able to observe a range of different types and ages of reuse of excavated peat. We chose to include sites in different locations, including some further North due to variation in vegetation colonisation rates which we were advised in earlier stakeholder interviews could likely influence the outcome / progression of reuse methods. We contacted several wind farmer developers / operators – some via introduction and some via publically available contact details and also landowners such as Forestry and Land Scotland. The final selection of sites for visit was based on who was willing to host a visit and practical feasibility in the project timescale and available resources (see Section 9.4). During the visits our hosts often shared wider insights about considerations for reuse of peat and examples from other sites which had worked well or less well – these insights are included in the summary findings here.
When selecting stakeholders to interview we tried to ensure a diverse range of perspectives, but we did not set out to achieve a rigorous sampling approach – we had to take a more pragmatic approach to gather insights from willing participants. The snow-balling approach was valuable in helping us identify people to speak to with relevant scientific and technical knowledge and who could provide insights into what had happened on specific sites. We made a deliberate effort to speak to some stakeholders from outside industry organisations, including academics, non-profit organisations and contractors/technical consultants to achieve some balance in our research. A full list of interviews is in Section 8.1.7.1.
Stakeholder workshop
We held an online workshop for academics and technical specialists on 16th December 2025 from 14:00 to 16:30. In total, 23 people attended (in addition to the Ricardo project team) including academic researchers, non-profit organisations, government agencies, energy company peatland specialists, see Section 8.1.7.2 for the list of attendees.
Workshop aims and objectives:
Gather insights from previous research and ongoing studies which may not yet be published, to fill research gaps.
Get insights into challenges / complexities which may need to be taken into account as we develop recommendations e.g. considerations for applying research results to different contexts / climates.
Discuss, test and refine initial ideas for a hierarchy of excavated peat reuse (or similar simple structured approach which could help guide decisions on peat reuse, depending on what has come from our earlier research.
Whilst the focus of the workshop was to engage academic researchers and technical experts, we also had attendees from industry who were technical specialists with relevant insights to share about their experiences with peat reuse in practice and the day-to-day challenges associated with planning, implementation and evaluation of peat reuse.
Workshop agenda:
Table 11. Workshop agenda
Time
Session
14:00
Introduction: project framing, context and scope; participant introductions.
14:20
Project literature review overview & stakeholder feedback
14:55
Examples of current practices drawn from sites visits / stakeholder interviews: comments, questions, sharing other examples.
Stakeholder feedback on recommendations / hierarchy
16:10
Final Polls: Feedback on options for recommendations
16:20
WRAP up and next steps
Findings from the workshop are incorporated into the stakeholder research results below (Section 8.1.6) and results of polls in Figure 8.
Figure 8: Results of word cloud (a) and other polls (b and c) undertaken during stakeholder workshop
a)
b)
c)
Method of analysis of stakeholder engagement findings:
Recording: Interviews
Transcripts and detailed notes of each stakeholder interview were recorded during the interviews and edited afterwards as needed to create an accurate record.
Recording: Site visits
During site visits photos and notes were taken relating to the site-specific context, practices and decisions. General learning was also noted, where for example the site host had experience across other sites or reuse practices.
Recording: Workshop
Transcripts and detailed notes were recorded during the workshop, as well as the results of polls and participation in interactive aspects of the workshop.
Analysis
Our project team systematically reviewed notes recorded from each element of the stakeholder engagement to identify comments related to the questions:
Current reuse practices
Potential future reuse practices
Insights about environmental outcomes from peat reuse
Other considerations
Evidence gaps
Priorities and recommendations.
Key findings from stakeholder engagement
Current peat reuse practices
During the workshop and stakeholder interviews a variety of practices were explained, along with associated issues, challenges and likely environmental outcomes or state of knowledge about the outcomes. The approaches are summarised in Table
Table 12. Current peat reuse practices
Current practice
Detail, benefits and issues
Borrow pit reinstatement, revegetation and habitat creation.
During site visits and interviews many examples of peat being put into disused borrow pits were shared. Common practices include:
Reinstatement / infill with the layer of peat which was previously on top of the borrow pit – often only part filled and then landscaped on one side to create gentler slope. Depth of infill varies.
Additional infill with peat excavated from elsewhere on site, sometimes designed with water outflow to mimic natural water flow.
Creating structured cells within borrow pits to maintain structure / control water flows with the aim of keeping peat wet / creating functioning peat bog or similar habitat.
Other practice examples included:
Allowing peatland heath type vegetation to develop in borrow pits without infilling any excavated peat (presumably when there was not excess peat).
Piping out peaty slurry from turbine bases into borrow pits.
Issues flagged included:
Water flows after infill – best practice is unclear, and design is unclear.
Peat depth – variable depths were filled, unclear whether all comply with current guidance[15].
Expense of constructing cells.
Insights shared about environmental outcomes:
Some examples seemed to have peatland vegetation indicator species and high-water tables
Often on slopes in landscaped borrow pits drier habitats develop.
Mixed success in maintaining / re-establishing vegetation cover meaning peat is sometimes left bare. More pronounce in northerly locations with slower vegetation colonisation.
Roadside verge reinstatement or revegetation.
A very common practice – excavated peat is stored alongside the road after construction, typically until after cables have also been laid, and then peat is reinstated. Sometimes:
Efforts are made to maintain structure and place turves on top for later reuse.
Wider verges are created / landscaped to hold more excavated peat from elsewhere on site.
Reseed to improve vegetation cover – although not common practice.
Issues flagged included:
Likelihood of peat drying out whilst store on roadside.
Significant risk of mixing soils and changing nutrient balance.
Significant risk of wind / water erosion during storage.
Convenience prioritised over effectiveness
Insights shared about environmental outcomes:
Mostly viewed as something unlikely to return to functioning peat bog due to peat storage, handling, contamination and proximity to road which will affect drainage.
Carbon may be lost during storage.
Revegetation, including wet heath type vegetation, was feasible or they knew of examples.
When vegetated can be beneficial to prevent silt / clay fines washing off into the wider landscape.
Infill historical peat cuttings
Not common but is used sometimes where peat cuttings are on site. Limited information was provided – unclear whether turves were placed on top or natural revegetation happened.
Example of storage in peat cuttings before use in incorporation into a restoration project was also cited.
Issues flagged included:
Only possible where peat cuttings exist – declining availability.
Insights into environmental outcomes:
Wet heath / acid grassland appeared to have developed on one site – although no vegetation survey data was available to confirm this.
Hydrological functioning / GHG emissions unclear – not data / other insights shared.
Reuse of peat where it had historically been located
Incorporate excavated peat into peatland restoration projects (pilot projects)
During two site visits and in other conversations examples of pilot projects to incorporate excavated peat into peatland restoration. Methods included:
Adding a layer of peat under existing turves / filling landscape furrows on former forested site.
Infilling bare sections of peat between hags, on degraded / eroded natural peatland areas.
Issues flagged included:
This is an experimental practice and not routinely permitted.
Access to suitable sites: access for earth works vehicles is difficult, making it hard to do larger areas away from tracks, without creating new access tracks.
Soil mixing is hard to avoid which can change nutrient balance in the peat and influence end result.
Designs aim to manage water to support peat formation whilst also ensuring safety / stability – different views were shared about how this should be done and appropriateness of approaches on site.
Insights shared about environmental outcomes:
Success of vegetation recovery/formation of active peat bog appears mixed so far, although long term observations and measurements are not available to enable evaluation.
GHG emissions fluxes are unclear – no monitoring data available.
Drainage related practices
Multiple stakeholders shared views and experiences on the role of drainage on site currently and typical practices. Current practices vary:
Infilling: some drainage ditches created during construction are infilled, and some aren’t. Those which are, are filled with arisings from the ditch creation, which would have been stored alongside for the duration of construction, mostly likely with limited management e.g. wetting.
Construction methods:
‘rock-filling’ above ground level in road construction to maintain water flows (floating road example)[16];
Angled flumes and other practices to separate silty or polluted drainage water to avoid wider pollution / silt spreading.
Issues flagged included:
Possible excessive / unnecessary drainage on some sites, having a detrimental effect on peatland habitats on site.
The importance of maintaining some ditches / drainage to ensure site stability and safety.
Insights shared about environmental outcomes:
Stakeholders felt that excessive drainage may hinder chances of successful recovery / recreation of peatland habitat re
Drainage important to maintain integrity of construction process – do not want to risk a peat slide
Scope for some of the temporary works drains to be infilled (usually with the arisings from the ditch itself) – however this is often not done (and doesn’t provide scope for vast quantities of peat reuse).
Peat handling & storage practices
Typical practice examples:
Roadside piles – various heights, various levels of attention to maintaining structure and wetness, varied timescales.
Efforts to minimise handling / transport often cited.
Insights shared about environmental outcomes:
Carbon lost when peat oxidises – often results when it dries out or is subject to erosion.
Carbon emissions from fuel use for transport around site (or off-site if that were to happen).
Off-site reuse of peat
No stakeholders cited any examples of peat being reused off-site – many had years of experience in the sector and had never known this to happen.
Other feedback provided by stakeholders on current practices included:
Variable ‘aims’ of reuse currently – ranging from developers who are trying to create functioning peatland on previously degraded land through to examples where people suggested there was no clear intention beyond finding a place to put the excess peat.
Compliance with guidance: multiple stakeholders shared a view / example that guidance is not always followed particularly in relation to peat infill depths and handling practices – reasons were unclear, although separately a skills gap was mentioned.
Quality of PMPs: varied – some followed fairly standard practice without consideration of the uniqueness of the site, whilst some were more nuanced / based on more detailed analysis of possibilities and potential outcomes
Enforcement / monitoring of PMPs: enforcement / monitoring during constructure can be inconsistent – sometimes very good collaboration and active consideration of effective approaches to achieve good environmental outcomes and sometimes poor / ineffective. Monitoring after construction and commissioning is not common practice, except were linked to habitat management plans which have a formal requirement for monitoring over the life of the site.
Influence of contracting process and responsibilities: separate contracts for different parts of the windfarm design and construction are commonly let which can make it difficult to develop and maintain a coherent plan for peat management through from planning permission through to final build and ongoing management. The wind turbine specification can also dictate excavation e.g. to achieve desired gradient for installation, but with more site surveys and consideration between developer, turbine supplier and site works contractor there may be potential to develop techniques which require less excavation.
Important of site selection / micro-siting: the flexibility to move turbines, based on more detailed site surveys of peat is important to reduce peat excavation.
Reuse of peat is well policed – must be in line with SEPA Reuse Guidance and therefore industry stakeholders follow this approach without feeling able to vary from this.
Potential future reuse practices
Practice
Details, benefits and issues
Deliberately targeting specific end habitat e.g. in borrow pits
Stakeholders suggested that it may be feasible to design reuse more intentionally with target end-habitat in mind e.g. designing the borrow-pit structure and planning peat excavation and handling specifically with the aim of targeting a valuable habitat – peat bog recreation if feasible or if not, another locally suitable and ideally wet habitat type. There was uncertainty about how to ensure success and what outcome was feasible on a site-by-site basis given the variability between sites in terms of prior land condition, surrounding context and land scape and land ‘capability’ for habitats.
Further use in restoration
Some stakeholders felt the incorporation of excavated peat into restoration projects had potential to achieve good environmental outcomes – examples highlighted were infill in degraded and eroded peatlands including hag infill, incorporation in former forested / forest bog landscapes – various methods being piloted.
Some apparent success of vegetation recovery on pilot examples was flagged, but stakeholders acknowledged that the environmental outcome were unclear.
Some stakeholder flagged potential concerns about the effectiveness of this approach due to:
Difficulty establishing vegetation on slopes
Potential challenges with water flows, depending on locations and hydrology.
Impact of damage during the restoration process and skills needed in planning, preparation and handling to achieve a good outcome.
Site stability / drainage – general agreement on its importance but different views on how to achieve / balance with other priorities leading to some concern about how to approach more experimental methods.
Infill of drainage ditches (where safety/stability allows)
Stakeholders flagged that, whilst it is important for site safety and stability to ensure suitable drainage is maintained, there could be opportunities to infil more drainage ditches or increase overall wetness on site to benefit existing peatland habitats on site or increase the likelihood of successful peatland habitat forming where peat reuse has aimed for this outcome.
Off-site uses
We asked whether uses such as agriculture/horticulture whiskey industry use would be feasible or environmentally beneficial in any circumstance or whether they knew of any other examples.
No stakeholders felt that off-site use was a good idea due to:
Costs
likely loss of peat structure / liquification during transport
environmental impacts of transport
likelihood that carbon would be lost from peat in the new use – lack of control over this.
Insights about environmental outcomes from peat reuse
Examples and comments on positive environmental outcomes:
Peat / vegetation recovery in restoration / hag infill – appears successful (in short-term) on flatter ground.
Softer trackside verges – vegetation and less slope – can prevent silt migrating into bogs.
Typical vegetation recovery: acid grassland mix initially, then (5-10yrs later) heathers / heath, and then hopefully wetter ones will progress to bog.
Examples and comments on negative environmental outcomes:
Most peat reused on wind farms turns into non-peatland habitat – it doesn’t function as peatland because hydrological conductivity is lost. At best going to form an upland wet heath, more likely to be an acid grassland.
If non-functioning peatland carbon will not be saved within the system Need to keep the carbon gaining and building within the system.
With poor water management silt is migrating into wet bogs.
Contamination of nutrient poor peatbog with mineral sources changes nutrient balance and therefore makes peatbog hard to achieve in reuse/restoration – flushed peat or fen more likely. Several stakeholders flagged that it can be challenging to prevent mineral contamination – storage and handling care is needed, and isn’t always feasible in practice.
Other comments on environmental outcomes:
Potential measurement approaches:
GI stage, peat probing / wetness, catchment mapping, qualitative sample (no one does this despite guidance), Van Post Scale (peat character).
Dip wells – across sites.
Water index via satellite imagery linked to Sentinal programme.
Pressure loggers – data recording for three months.
Options for assessing carbon; current government calculator, in house planning tools; revised carbon calculated – potential for different assumptions about loss of carbon on excavated peat.
Important to balance carbon / biodiversity outcomes. Some stakeholders flagged this in general and also one highlighted the challenge of balancing this in the context of deciding whether to rewet peat during storage – if abstraction from river is required this could have negative consequences for river habitat.
Several flagged nervousness about assuming reused and restored peat delivers the same environmental outcomes as natural peatlands.
Other considerations for excavated peat reuse
Drainage installation, maintenance and infill: stakeholders agreed that ensuring the right amount of drainage during construction and afterwards is important, but did not all agree on how well this is currently being achieved and whether it is possible provide clearer guidance on this.
Peat handling & storage: many stakeholders flagged the need to minimise movement and handling of peat, aim to keep peat local, minimise handling / travel distance. Use of large diggers and trucks makes this hard. Issues included:
Need to keep the peat moist: actively or passively
Need to maintain layers / structure and avoid contamination with mineral soils / aggregate as this will change the nutrient profile and functional structure of the peat.
Peat can liquify in trucks if handled.
Cost for moving peat
Some flagged that temporary storage in ‘groins’ between road junctions is often preferred as there is more space to work there, whilst other advocated designated storage areas. What is practical will vary site to site.
‘Land-made-available’ limitation: land envelope can restrict end destination of any peat reuse ‘on site’ – instances where sensible areas for ‘peat reuse’ are outside the envelope.
Site data availability: planning the peat re-use in advance would be good but often don’t get chance to plan until actually on site and work starts – trees often obscure lidar data.
Excavation timing: contractors don’t get much choice/penalties for delays – timing will influence ability to keep peat wet, keep structure etc.
Evidence gaps
Stakeholders flagged the following issues and gaps in evidence:
Limited monitoring of implementation and outcomes of Peatland Management Plans (PMPs). Monitoring isn’t required for PMPs in the same way as for Habitat Management Plans (which are monitored for the life of the wind farm), and therefore limited data is available on prior land condition, peat reuse/management methods, and environmental outcomes.
Approach and quality of assessments and monitoring could be better. Current over reliance on the presence or absence of specific vegetation as an indicator was highlighted – finding a species at a specific location in a large site doesn’t represent the entire site. Better quality peatland condition assessments are needed, ideally landscape based incorporating species, hydrology and other factors rather than quadrat based. This would provide better data for planning reuse / management and a better baseline for impact monitoring, particularly important as construction is often on degraded peat.
Lack of longitudinal studies into environmental outcomes of peat reuse/management approaches. People cited specific gaps such as study of behaviour and environmental outcomes of peat drying at the side of the road after reinstatement; impacts of storage techniques such as surface roughing to help water infiltration vs allowing crust to form; GHG emissions following disturbance and reinstatement.
General gap in terms of the understanding of peatland and peat behaviour in the context of wind farm construction. This includes peatland hydrology and how this is affected by disruption, how peat behaves in storage, the impact of movement on peat quality and potential for reestablishment in new destination
Evidence of the validity of measures such as water table and indicator species as indictors of GHG emissions / ‘functioning peat bog’ for reinstated / restored peatlands. Stakeholders flagged there is no research on peatland excavation and then reuse, hence need to establish the relationship with vegetation, hydrology.
Limited literature on remote sensing for wind farm monitoring.
Lack of clear guidance on some aspects of engineering and site management e.g. balancing drainage and wetness, storage practices.
Lack of research to show whether implementation of best practice is feasible. NPF4 Policy 5 states that ideally carbon rich soils are actively sequestering carbon, and this should be the aim of the PMP. There is a need for research to show if this is possible – this relates to points above about behaviour of peat after disturbance / validity of indicators.
Priorities and recommendations
In general stakeholders were reluctant to give detailed feedback on which methods of peat reuse on site should be a priority because of variability of site circumstances (e.g. land capability, condition) and the lack of concrete research to provide evidence of the environment outcomes which could be anticipated.
Some key comments and points on priorities were:
Revegetation and minimising bare peat is key to avoid negative cycle of drying and/or erosion: to help success it is important to have follow up surveys and action if issues are identified.
Need to minimise extraction of peat.
Advice must allow for flexibility and be nuanced due to the diversity of peatlands.
Suggested hierarchy:
Avoid;
Reinstate in location contiguous to other peatland where carbon can be retained and retain hydrology and long-term species composition will be at least consistent with species within the species disturbed.
Re-use off site to the same effect.
Alternative suggestion: two different hierarchies, one with the aim of functioning peatland, and one for the aim of using peat in a way that would result it being used for another purpose e.g. wet heath, dry heath.
Essential component is maintaining connectivity of the re-use areas with the hydrology and its immediate area, but also looking further at the wider hydrological unit. This also includes connectivity with the peatland restoration areas that will be undertaken on the site.
Guidance documents can be perfect, however, on the ground can be challenging e.g. to ensure hydrological connectivity – potential need for incentive to go for the best outcome and need to involve different parties to achieve this.
List of stakeholder discussion interviews and workshop attendees
Interviewees
Susan Nicol
Forestry and Land Scotland
Andy Gillan
RJ Mcleod
Mark Mulqueeny
SSE
Derek Healy
Duncan Mackay and Sons
James Allison
Scottish Power
Emma Taylor
SEPA
Roxane Anderson
University of Highlands and Islands
Gill Steel
Ironside Farrar
Siue Allen
Ironside Farrar
Malcolm Crosby
Forestry and Land Scotland
Richard Clarke
Forestry and Land Scotland
Sue White
Shetland Community Trust
David McGinty
SSE Renewables
Workshop attendees
Name
Organisation
Role
Andy Mills
OWC Ltd
Geomorphologist writing many PMP’s
Andy Gillan
RJ McLeod Contractors
Construction projects on peatlands
Irene Tierney
IMTECO Ltd
Ecologist writing many PMP’s
Emma Hinchliffe
IUCN UK Peatland Programme
Director
Cerian Baldwin
PeatlandACTION
Technical director involved in development, Scottish Peatland Standard and reviewing PMPs and EIAs in relation to peat
Alan Cundill
SEPA
Senior Specialist Scientist interested in reuse/management of peat
Claire Campbell
SEPA
Senior Specialist Scientist and reviewing PMP’s
Jessica Fìor-Berry
IUCN UK Peatland Programme
Peatland Programme policy lead
Karen Rentoul
NatureScot
Policy advice manager for uplands and also peatlands
Rachel Short
ScottishPower Renewables
Senior ecology manager responsible for design, construction and operation of wind farms, many on peatlands
Fiona Donaldson
SEPA
Waste policy unit interested in management of excavated peat
Grace Gubbins
NatureScot
Involved in the development of the biodiversity metric for the planning system, also supporting peatland expert advisory group
Roxane Andersen
University of Highlands and Islands
Peatland scientist, also sit on peatland expert advisory group
Chris Marshall
SLR Consulting
Peatland lead dealing with many PMP’s
Susan Nicol
Forestry and Land Scotland
Land managers leasing land for wind farms
Kirsten Lees
University of Derby
Peatland restoration with focus on carbon
Ainoa Pravia
Forest Research
Ecologist (for peatlands)
Iain Detrey
EA
Peatland adviser (for England)
Nicholle Bell
University of Edinburgh
Peatland restoration, and alternative reuse options
Kerry Dinsmore
SG
Principal science advisor on peatlands, also on steering committee
Project steering group
Ben Dipper (Scottish Government)
Kerry Dinsmore (Scottish Government)
Patricia Bruneau (Nature Scot)
Scottish Government policy team representatives
Appendix C Wind Farm Site Research (site visits & desk research)
Wind farm planning document review
This section reviews the desk-based research describing existing wind farms management plans including data on numbers of wind farms across Scotland on peat soils.
Wind farm site visit summary
This section combines the results of the desk-based research describing existing wind farm management plans alongside the information gathered during the site visits. We aimed to visit a diverse range of sites with reasonable access where we would be able to observe a range of different types and ages of reuse of excavated peat. We chose to include sites in different locations, the north-east and south-west of Scotland. In both areas we visited a newly constructed wind farm, alongside older wind farms within the same locality. This provided examples with different vegetation colonisation rates which could influence the success of reuse methods. We contacted several wind farmer developers / operators, the final selection of sites for visit was based on who was willing to host a visit and practical feasibility in the project timescale and available resources.
Desk-based findings
We reviewed the planning information prior to site visits. This included information on when the work was completed / site commissioned to generate energy, the number of turbines that had been built (both initially and in phased extensions), land ownership and whether other stakeholder were involved in the process (e.g. wildlife rangers based on site, ECoW’s).
Sample site selection
Site selection was undertaken taking into account key variables to ensure that a representative sample of wind farms across Scotland was obtained. Primarily, this included considering a range of development site sizes and locations across Scotland, while ensuring that wind farms were both operational and included relevant Peat Management Plans (PMPs). To note, the number of wind turbines was used as a proxy for development size, while the requirement for developments to have PMPs significantly reduced availability of case studies (even though this is an NPF4 requirement).
Peatland management plans
The key limitations in the approach concerned the accuracy of the data held within the PMPs, for which accessing documents with the requisite information (peat depths and volumes) was the first challenge. In those PMPs that were available, the peat volumes were based on peat survey depths, which are extrapolated across sites via peat probe information, meaning that there is a degree of uncertainty between distinct probe points. There is therefore a high degree of mathematical assumption based on converting peat depth extrapolations to volumes via combining this data with site stripping boundaries. Utilising survey information also assumes competence of all surveyors, despite peat surveys (and peat identification more generally) being a highly specialist skill that geo-environmentalists, geotechnical specialists and even soil scientists would not necessarily have experience of. In addition, peat volumes included in PMPs can change during the construction phase, such as where design is updated, or due to poor implementation of PMP measures. This means that volumes at project inception are often unlikely to be the same once wind farms are conducted, given the dynamic nature of the construction phase and typically iterative design approaches.
Overview of key finding from site visits
Key highlights are included in the main section 3.5.2, 3.5.3 and 3.5.4. A number of borrow pits were visited at each of the sites – these varied in effectivity, levels of monitoring and time since reinstatement. Landscaping examples where peat had been put down along the roadside were clearly visible in the newly constructed wind farms, in the older wind farms this was less obvious, in some cases the peat had become part of the surrounding peatland, however the likelihood was that in some areas it had been lost to the wider environment through erosion. Novel restoration reuse was seen, this was experimental and not common practice. No peat was taken off-site for reuse elsewhere.
Limitations of site visits
Although we were very grateful to the stakeholders for taking the time to show us the wind farms and distil their knowledge of the process, it was clear that this view was only able to provide a snapshot in time analysis of what had occurred at that site. Also depending on time from commissioning, some key details related to the reuse of peat were lost (e.g. exact volumes of peat used within infill of peat excavations, how borrow pit reinstatements were originally designed). Thus, it is harder to identify best practice and what has worked and what hasn’t if the methodology is unreported. The site visits could have been impacted by the weather conditions on the day (e.g. low cloud and drizzle for the final site visit), this made note taking and photographing examples harder and some of the finer details may not be visible in the photographs.
How to cite this publication:
Crotty, F., Dowson, F., Schofield, K., Barker, M., Ginns, B., David, T., Herold, L. (2025) ‘Reuse of excavated peat on wind farm development sites’, ClimateXChange. DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/6333
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
Scottish Renewables, Scottish Environment Protection Agency. 2012. Guidance on the Assessment of Peat Volumes, Reuse of Excavated Peat and the Minimisation of Waste ↑
Micro-siting is where small adjustments to the wind farm lay out are made to avoid / minimise damage to peat (or other sensitive environments) on site. ↑
The Climate Change Committee’s 2023 Report to the Scottish Parliament called for stronger action on food system emissions. Policy interventions need to address the environmental impacts of food production and consumption while ensuring dietary improvements and economic sustainability.
This report assesses Scotland’s diet and climate policy landscape, identifying areas for policy development and providing recommendations to support the Scottish Government’s climate, public health and food security goals going forward.
The study combined desk-based research, stakeholder engagement and categorisation using a PESTLE (Political, Economic, Social, Technological, Legal, and Environmental) framework.
Key findings
Scotland’s complex diet and climate policy landscape includes several emerging developments and opportunities, yet challenges persist. These challenges typically reflect areas that would benefit from policy coordination and development.
Political alignment and coordination: Scottish Government has taken steps to articulate sustainable food ambitions through legislation such as the Good Food Nation Act. Fragmentation across different policy fields (health, agriculture, environment, economy) limits integrated food system transformation. Coordination between local, devolved, and UK governments remains limited, leading to conflicting priorities. The absence of clear emissions targets for food production constrains alignment with net-zero ambitions.
Economic levers and constraints: Investments in local food initiatives and growing interest in sustainable supply chains signal progress. Fiscal policies have the effect of benefiting high-emission food production over sustainable alternatives. Financial barriers constrain local authorities, small producers, and community groups in adopting agroecological approaches. The cost of sustainable food options continues to limit access and dietary change.
Social attitudes and engagement: Public interest in sustainable diets is increasing, and some awareness campaigns have gained traction. Cultural traditions, cost concerns, and inconsistent messaging shape public resistance to reducing red meat consumption. Food insecurity remains a barrier to sustainable diet access for lower-income households. Greater public engagement is needed to build trust and understanding of dietary policy aims.
Technological tools and innovation: Advances in precision agriculture and digital tools offer potential for more sustainable production. Lack of a standardised food emissions-tracking system limits evidence-based policymaking for reducing environmental impact. Rural areas often lack the digital infrastructure to adopt new technologies. Inadequate sustainability labelling limits informed consumer choice.
Legal frameworks: The Good Food Nation Act provides a foundation for coordinated food policy development. The evidence suggests a lack of strong enforcement mechanisms to drive change. Regulation of food marketing, labelling, and ultra-processed foods is limited. Devolved and UK-wide inconsistencies create legal misalignment across food, health, and trade policy.
Environmental integration: Scotland has made progress in climate policy and land stewardship through initiatives like the Land Use Strategy. There are challenges in balancing different land use functions such as forestry, agriculture, and biodiversity protection. Climate adaptation strategies for agriculture need to be better developed, due to increasing climate risks. The ecological role of grazing land in biodiversity and carbon sequestration is underutilised in policy planning.
Opportunities for action and policy implications
A summary of key opportunities for action is presented in the table below. A fuller articulation of these opportunities, with supporting detail, is included in Section 6, Conclusions and policy implications.
Building a resilient and sustainable Scottish food system
Key insights and policy pathways
Political
Promote more coordinated governance approaches to food policy.
Enhance cross-sector collaboration to support integrated food system policy.
Consider mechanisms to improve accountability across the food system.
Economic
Align agricultural support with sustainability goals.
Explore ways to enhance financial support for sustainable food systems.
Explore the effectiveness of fiscal policies for dietary shifts.
Social
Address food affordability and accessibility.
Foster inclusive public engagement and food education.
Support culturally sensitive dietary transitions.
Technological
Promote development of standardised emissions data for food products.
Enhance digital food labelling to support sustainability and consumer awareness.
Legal
Review opportunities to strengthen food regulations.
Support better alignment between devolved and UK-wide food policies.
Support increased transparency in food supply chains.
Environmental
Promote climate adaptation planning within food and land-use policy.
Balance food security with biodiversity needs.
Explore opportunities to align land-use policies with sustainability objectives.
Glossary and abbreviations table
Agroecology
A sustainable farming approach that applies ecological principles to agriculture and prioritises local knowledge, biodiversity, and low-input systems.
Carbon sequestration
The process of capturing and storing atmospheric carbon dioxide, often through natural systems like forests and soils.
Climate Change Committee (CCC)
The Climate Change Committee is an independent, statutory body established under the UK’s Climate Change Act 2008. Its primary role is to advise the UK Government and devolved administrations on emissions targets and to report to Parliament on progress in reducing greenhouse gas emissions and preparing for climate change.
Food for Life (Scotland)
Food for Life Scotland is a programme operated by the Soil Association, funded by the Scottish Government, with the mission to make good food the easy choice for all. The initiative focuses on harnessing the power of public food to positively impact health, the environment, and the local economy.
Food sovereignty
The right of people, communities, and countries to define their own food systems, including the production, distribution, and consumption of food.
Food system transformation
A fundamental shift in the way food is produced, distributed, and consumed to improve sustainability, health, and equity.
Fortification
The process of adding essential vitamins and minerals (such as iron, iodine, vitamin D, or folic acid) to food to improve its nutritional quality and prevent or correct dietary deficiencies in a population. Common examples include the fortification of flour with folic acid or milk with vitamin D.
Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act
The Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act 2022 establishes a framework for Scotland mandating the creation of national and local Good Food Nation Plans, aiming to ensure that food-related policies contribute to various aspects of well-being, including health, economic development, and environmental sustainability.
Just Transition
A policy framework to ensure that the shift to a low-carbon economy is fair and inclusive, protecting workers and communities.
Net-zero
Achieving a balance between greenhouse gas emissions produced and those removed from the atmosphere.
PESTLE analysis
A strategic framework used to identify and analyse Political, Economic, Social, Technological, Legal, and Environmental factors for understanding the broader context for decision-making.
Precision Livestock Farming (PLF)
Precision Livestock Farming refers to the application of advanced technologies and data-driven methods to monitor and manage individual animals within a herd. PLF aims to enhance animal health, welfare, productivity, and environmental sustainability.
Plant based
A diet or product primarily made from plants (e.g., vegetables, fruits, grains, legumes, nuts, and seeds). While not always strictly vegan or vegetarian, plant-based diets typically minimise or avoid animal products.
Plant based meat alternatives (PBMAs)
Food products designed to mimic the taste, texture, and appearance of conventional meat but are made from plant-based ingredients.
Procurement
The strategic process by which organisations acquire goods, services, or works from external sources to fulfil their operational needs. This process encompasses a series of steps designed to ensure that acquisitions are made in a timely, cost-effective, and quality-assured manner.
Reformulation
The process of altering the ingredients of food or drink products to improve their nutritional profile; for example, by reducing salt, sugar, or saturated fat, while maintaining taste and consumer acceptability.
Regenerative agriculture
A system of farming practices that aims to restore and enhance soil health, biodiversity, water cycles, and ecosystem resilience while producing food.
Scope 3 emissions
Refers to accounting for the indirect greenhouse gas emissions that occur across a retailer’s value chain, such as those from the production of goods they sell, transportation, packaging, and consumer use and disposal. Including Scope 3 emissions provides a more comprehensive picture of a retailer’s wider environmental impact beyond their direct operations.
Scottish Dietary Goals (SDGs)
A set of nutritional targets established by the Scottish Government to improve the overall health of the population by promoting healthier eating habits. These goals outline the recommended intake levels for various nutrients and food groups, aiming to reduce the prevalence of diet-related conditions such as obesity, heart disease, and type 2 diabetes.
Scottish National Adaptation Plan 2024-2029 (SNAP3)
The Scottish National Adaptation Plan 2024-2029 (SNAP3) is Scotland’s strategic framework aimed at enhancing the nation’s resilience to the impacts of climate change over a five-year period. SNAP3 outlines a comprehensive approach to adaptation, ensuring that Scotland’s communities, economy, and environment are prepared for current and future climate challenges.
Semi-structured interview
A qualitative data collection method that uses a flexible interview guide with open-ended questions. It allows the interviewer to explore specific topics in depth while also adapting questions based on participants’ responses.
Stakeholder mapping
A strategic process used to identify, analyse, and visualise individuals or groups (stakeholders) who have an interest in or are affected by a project, organisation, or policy. This technique helps to understand stakeholders’ influence, interests, and relationships, facilitating effective communication and engagement strategies.
Supply chain
The network of organisations, people, activities, information, and resources involved in the creation and delivery of a product or service from the supplier to the end customer.
Sustainable diet
A diet that promotes health and well-being while reducing environmental impact and supporting food system resilience.
Systematic literature review
A structured and comprehensive method for identifying, evaluating, and synthesising all relevant research on a specific topic using transparent and replicable procedures.
Third Sector
The part of an economy or society comprising non-governmental and non-profit organisations, such as charities, community groups, voluntary organisations, social enterprises, and cooperatives.
Ultra-processed food
Industrially formulated foods that typically contain additives and minimal whole ingredients; often linked to poor health outcomes.
Urban agriculture
The practice of growing, processing, and distributing food within or around cities and towns (e.g., community gardens, rooftop farms, vertical farming, backyard gardening, and small-scale livestock or aquaculture). It can support local food systems, access to fresh produce, and community engagement, climate resilience, and urban greening.
Vertical farming
A method of growing crops in vertically stacked layers, often in controlled indoor environments. This allows year-round production and is commonly used in urban areas to reduce food miles and increase local food resilience.
Zoonotic disease
A disease that can be transmitted between animals and humans. These diseases can be caused by viruses, bacteria, parasites, or fungi, and can spread through direct contact, food, water, or vectors like mosquitoes. Zoonotic diseases are a key concern in public health, agriculture, and environmental management due to their potential for outbreaks and global spread.
Table 1: Glossary and abbreviations used in the report
Introduction
How can Scotland balance climate goals, public health, and economic resilience in food policy?
Scotland’s diet and climate policy landscape is shaped by multiple, often competing priorities, making policy development and implementation particularly complex. Scotland’s net-zero ambitions don’t sit in isolation and delivery is influenced by UK Government food policy and wider cross-border complexities. Any approach must align with, Scotland-specific advice such as Recommendation R2024-003 from the Climate Change Committee’s (CCC) 2023 Report to the Scottish Parliament, which calls for stronger action on food system emissions (CCC, 2023). The CCC’s carbon budget for Scotland is due to be published in May 2025, and the CCC has highlighted that agriculture is projected to become the second-highest emitting sector by 2040. Efforts to reduce the environmental impact of food consumption need to be balanced with public health goals, economic considerations, and social acceptability. While the Scottish Government plans to introduce measures such as restricting unhealthy food promotion and encouraging sustainable agricultural practices, significant barriers remain. Public resistance to dietary change, particularly reductions in red meat consumption, reflects deep-seated cultural attitudes and concerns about choice, affordability and accessibility. Furthermore, promoting lower meat diets could lead to economic contraction in agriculture-related sectors, especially the red meat sector (Allan, Comerford & McGregor, 2019). If food system transitions are to be just, they must ensure that rural economies and farming communities remain viable while meeting climate targets, requiring sensitive and adaptive policy solutions.
Another layer of complexity arises from policy fragmentation and governance challenges. Responsibilities for food, health, environment, and agriculture are divided across multiple sectors and levels of government, including devolved and UK-wide authorities, leading to inconsistencies in strategy and implementation. Furthermore, the socio-economic impacts of dietary policy shifts, including how changes affect low-income households or food supply chains, are not yet fully understood due to limited data and evaluation frameworks. Addressing these challenges will require a holistic approach that integrates cross-sectoral collaboration, rigorous evidence, and stakeholder engagement to navigate trade-offs and identify the most feasible pathways for change.
Aims of the project
This report addresses two primary aims:
Analysis of a mixed-method evidence base for diet and climate policy in Scotland using a structured PESTLE framework.
Identification of evidence gaps and the proposal of actionable recommendations to inform future policy development.
These two aims seek to support the Scottish Government in developing policies aligned with climate targets, while also advancing a just transition that considers the nutritional needs of communities, and the livelihoods of people employed in the food system.
Methodology
Research design
This research adopted a mixed-method design to analyse the intersection of diet and climate policy in Scotland. It combined desk-based research, stakeholder engagement, and thematic categorisation using a PESTLE framework (Political, Economic, Social, Technological, Legal, and Environmental dimensions).
Research approach and evidence sources
The study integrated three core sources of evidence:
Literature review: A systematic review of academic, grey, and policy literature, including documents from the Scottish Government, Climate Change Committee, Food Standards Scotland, and international case studies. Further detail on the literature review method can be found in Appendices C and D.
Stakeholder engagement: 14 semi-structured interviews with stakeholders from government, academia, and civil society provided insight into governance challenges, socio-economic impacts, and practical barriers to policy implementation. Further detail on the method can be found in Appendix E.
Workshops: Three stakeholder workshops (one in-person, two online)[1] were conducted to validate findings, prioritise areas for further policy development, and co-develop recommendations. These involved scenario planning and structured group discussion. Workshop protocols and details of participating stakeholders are displayed in Appendix F.
Ethics and data management
The research followed ethical guidelines from the University of Bath and ClimateXChange. All participants gave informed consent and were offered anonymity. Data handling adhered to the Scottish Government’s “open as possible, closed as necessary” principle. Triangulation across data sources helped ensure reliability and consistency.
Stakeholder mapping
Stakeholders were identified through desk research and consultations (see Appendix A) and classified into categories including government, academia, third sector, public health, industry, and community groups. A database of 447 stakeholders was compiled (Appendix B).
PESTLE framework
The PESTLE framework guided the thematic analysis of areas for policy development and opportunities, ensuring comprehensive coverage of structural, social, and environmental dimensions. It helped surface interdependencies and evidence gaps across policy domains.
Limitations and future research
Due to time constraints, the analysis could not include quantitative modelling or longitudinal data. While the research drew from diverse sectors, representation from the food industry was more limited. Further research should explore economic modelling of dietary transitions, consumer behaviour dynamics, and legal feasibility of regulatory measures.
Further methodological detail, including workshop protocols and stakeholder lists, is available in the Appendices.
Analysis of diet and climate policy evidence
While the literature, stakeholder meetings, and workshops all highlighted the need for more integrated, cross-sectoral approaches to diet and climate policy, each source also highlighted distinct emphases.
The literature focused on systemic analysis and policy gaps, often referring to structural barriers, need for further regulation, and the dominance of voluntary policy mechanisms.
The stakeholder meetings added a degree of nuance on political sensitivities, informal policymaking, and institutional fragmentation, often surfacing insights that were missing from the literature, such as the influence of farming identities, lobbying, and inter-departmental misalignment (i.e. the lack of coordination between government departments, such as health, agriculture, and climate, which can lead to contradictory or disconnected policies).
The stakeholder workshops, by contrast, reflected the practical and lived experience of policy implementation, giving voice to tensions related to affordability, cultural norms, and supply chain dynamics, and offering grounded ideas for cross-sector collaboration.
Taken together, these sources converged on key challenges but revealed gaps in empirical evidence on effective interventions and highlighted the need for more inclusive, community-informed policy processes.
The following sections present an analysis of the issues shaping diet and climate policy, drawing on insights from the literature review, stakeholder meetings, and workshops.
We begin by outlining key areas for policy development, offering a comprehensive view of the diverse factors influencing policy in Scotland. For clarity, each PESTLE dimension is analysed separately, although we recognise that many issues cut across multiple dimensions. In addition to the summaries in Sections 5.1–5.6 of the report, extended analyses and illustrative examples are provided in Appendices G–L.
PESTLE Political dimension
The PESTLE Political dimension highlights key political drivers and barriers shaping Scotland’s food system, focusing on governance, policy coherence, and regulatory alignment. Despite ambitious climate and health goals, food policy remains fragmented; characterised by siloed strategies, short-term political cycles, and limited public engagement.
There are clear opportunities to improve alignment between national and local policies, embed measurable targets under the Good Food Nation Act, and integrate food more fully into net-zero strategies. Policy coherence is particularly lacking in areas such as dietary change, where targets, especially for meat reduction, are absent or politically sensitive.
Public procurement and food supply chain resilience require stronger alignment with sustainability priorities. Resistance to livestock reduction, driven by cultural, economic, and political factors, continues to constrain progress. Meanwhile, policy support for plant-based foods, oversight of emissions-intensive agriculture, and trade resilience post-Brexit, remain underdeveloped.
Improving citizen participation and learning from international best practice are also essential to ensure legitimacy and policy effectiveness. Overall, stronger strategic leadership and more integrated, inclusive policymaking are critical to enable a just transition in Scotland’s food system.
For further detail and illustrative examples, see Appendix G.
PESTLE Economic dimension
This section outlines key economic enablers and constraints in Scotland’s transition to a more sustainable and just food system. While the need for climate-compatible diets and resilient supply chains is increasingly recognised, economic policy and market structures remain poorly aligned with sustainability goals.
The analysis highlights persistent gaps in financial incentives for low-carbon agriculture, agroecology, and alternative proteins. Current financial support regimes continue to favour high-emission livestock production, while support for biodiversity and ecosystem services is limited. High upfront costs and infrastructure barriers also constrain farmers’ ability to adopt sustainable practices.
Trade and supply chains add further complexity to the landscape. Import/Export policies risk carbon leakage and should go further to reflect Scotland’s net-zero ambitions. Small producers face limited access to public procurement and mainstream markets, which are dominated by large retailers and multinationals.
A lack of stable, long-term funding also undermines urban agriculture, community food initiatives, and public food provision. Consumer incentives are misaligned; VAT law and pricing structures serve to limit the uptake of plant-based foods, while environmental and health costs remain externalised. Without targeted interventions, dietary shifts might also result in greater reliance on ultra-processed food or alternative animal products, with implications for health.
A clear transition strategy is needed to support rural economies, address workforce shortages, and align financial incentives, trade policies, and consumer support with Scotland’s net-zero goals.
For further evidence and examples, see Appendix H.
PESTLE Social dimension
The next section explores the social factors that influence dietary behaviours, food access, cultural norms, and public engagement with food system sustainability in Scotland. While awareness of sustainable diets is growing, economic inequality, cultural barriers, and information gaps continue to limit equitable access to healthier and more climate-compatible food choices.
The analysis shows that low-income, rural, and marginalised groups face structural challenges to adopting sustainable diets, including affordability, limited access to healthy food options, and digital exclusion. Taxation policies, such as levies on red meat, may also disproportionately affect households with limited economic flexibility unless protections are in place. High energy costs, limited cooking facilities, and restricted access to healthy food outside the home reduce the feasibility of dietary shifts for many communities.
Consumer environments and behaviours present further challenges. Ultra-processed foods dominate many retail and foodservice settings, while alternative proteins remain scarce or poorly understood. Misperceptions, unclear labelling, and cultural or sensory barriers to meat alternatives reduce consumer confidence in plant-based foods. Public institutions, such as schools and hospitals, have been slow to integrate sustainability into procurement and meal provision, missing valuable opportunities to shape norms and access around sustainable food.
Cultural identity, health concerns, and trust also play a critical role in shaping diet. Intergenerational tensions, media confusion, and stigma around plant-based eating reinforce resistance to change. The term “sustainable diet” is understood in multiple ways, and guidance on nutritional adequacy, especially for meat reduction, remains limited. There is also a need to strengthen support for regenerative and culturally inclusive farming practices.
Crucially, the evidence highlights an over-reliance on individual responsibility for dietary change, which overlooks the need for supportive food environments and system-level shifts. Policies that reshape food environments, through procurement, pricing, education, and public messaging, are likely to be more effective and equitable in the longer term. More specifically, focusing on health-based messaging, trusted community voices, and social norm–based approaches would help build broader public support.
In summary, socially informed policies must address structural inequalities, cultural diversity, and behavioural dynamics to ensure a just transition toward sustainable diets. This includes improving affordability and access, embedding sustainability in public food settings, and aligning dietary policies with both climate and public health goals.
Further detail and evidence examples are available in Appendix I.
PESTLE Technological dimension
Technology plays a critical role in shaping the sustainability, efficiency, and resilience of Scotland’s food system. The analysis highlights the lack of a comprehensive monitoring framework to evaluate the impact of dietary shifts on emissions, public health, food security, and biodiversity. Without clear indicators and centralised data systems, it is difficult to assess progress toward climate and health goals or ensure that dietary policies are evidence driven. Metrics for agroecological practices and sustainable diet transitions remain underdeveloped, impeding efforts to support and scale lower-impact farming approaches.
Digital infrastructure limitations, particularly poor rural broadband, continue to restrict the uptake of precision livestock farming and climate-smart technologies. Awareness of these tools remains low among producers, while Government support for adoption is often fragmented. Similarly, industry accountability is weakened by the absence of transparent data reporting and standardised carbon footprinting systems. Inconsistent greenhouse gas accounting methods, a lack of methane tracking at farm level, and the need for sector-specific targets for beef production further undermine emissions mitigation efforts.
Food system resilience also depends on improved technological capacity in supply chains. Current systems do not adequately support food origin tracking, nor do they account for high-emission foods in dietary data, weakening emissions attribution and policy precision. The sustainability impacts of emerging plant-based products remain poorly assessed, and infrastructure gaps limit the scaling of regional food systems and local supply chain technologies.
Digital tools could be used more effectively to promote sustainable consumer choices and increase transparency in food sourcing, animal welfare, and product quality. However, greater investment in infrastructure, digital literacy, and data coordination is required to unlock this potential.
In summary, a more technologically enabled food policy landscape in Scotland will require investment in data infrastructure, tailored emissions metrics, precision agriculture, and digital tools to support both consumer engagement and policy accountability. Doing so will help ensure that Scotland’s net-zero, biodiversity, and health ambitions are underpinned by robust evidence and smart, scalable solutions.
Further detail and evidence examples are available in Appendix J.
PESTLE Legal dimension
With reference to the role of legal and regulatory frameworks, the PESTLE analysis reveals that Scotland currently lacks targeted legal mechanisms to incentivise low-carbon food production. Regulatory gaps and weak enforcement of environmental standards limit the transition to sustainable agriculture, while power imbalances in the supply chain, favouring large corporations over smaller producers, remain largely unaddressed. The Good Food Nation Act, though an important step forward, does not extend regulatory authority over retailers, large-scale producers, or food manufacturers, limiting its system-wide impact.
Other issues requiring attention exist in consumer protection and information. Weak regulation of unhealthy food marketing, especially in out-of-home settings, undermines public health efforts. The continued reliance on voluntary reformulation agreements with industry, combined with the lack of mandatory carbon footprint labelling, limits consumers’ ability to make informed dietary choices aligned with Scotland’s climate and health goals. Meanwhile, the absence of mandatory nutritional fortification, such as for non-dairy milk products, can impede public health initiatives aimed at addressing nutritional deficiencies.
Legal and governance barriers also slow policy implementation. Complexities in devolved and UK-level responsibilities contribute to policy inconsistency, particularly on dietary and emissions targets. Additionally, legal risks around nutrient adequacy in meat and dairy reduction strategies may discourage more ambitious dietary guidance.
Within agriculture, current carbon audit schemes lack sufficient enforceable emissions targets and are perceived as bureaucratic, offering limited incentives for change. Unclear guidance on carbon markets and inconsistent rules on emissions reporting (including Scope 3 emissions from retailers) reduce transparency and slow investment in climate-smart farming.
In summary, legal reform is needed to strengthen regulatory levers across the food system, extending beyond the public sector to include retailers and industry, enforcing sustainability and nutrition standards, and improving consumer protections. Aligning governance frameworks, reducing administrative burdens, and embedding human rights principles into dietary policy are therefore needed to enable effective system-wide change.
Further detail and evidence examples are available in Appendix K.
PESTLE Environmental dimension
This final section examines the environmental factors affecting Scotland’s transition to a sustainable food system. The evidence highlights that many community food initiatives and new entrants to agroecological farming face significant barriers, particularly in accessing secure land and financial support. Temporary land use agreements and bureaucratic processes can limit the growth of community food systems, despite existing policy. In some cases, unregulated forestry expansion can risk displacing agricultural land, with limited assessment of net carbon impacts or broader public interest outcomes.
Scotland’s climate mitigation policies in agriculture remain focused on food-based emissions without addressing the wider transformation needed across the food system. Adaptation strategies for extreme weather, water resource management, and soil health are underdeveloped, leaving farmers vulnerable to increasingly unpredictable conditions. Localised environmental impacts of emissions-intensive farming are often overlooked in national-level emissions data, reducing policy responsiveness to regional ecological pressures.
The analysis also highlights the need for a more strategic approach to land use. With the majority of Scottish farmland classed as “Less Favoured”[2] and unsuitable for plant protein production, blanket approaches to livestock reduction may generate trade-offs for biodiversity, carbon sequestration, and rural livelihoods. Well-managed grazing land has shown potential to support biodiversity and store more carbon than forestry in some contexts, yet these contributions are not widely acknowledged in land-use planning.
From a consumption perspective, the environmental footprint of ultra-processed and highly standardised food products remains a concern, as do the resilience risks associated with crop monocultures and supply chain vulnerabilities. There is growing recognition that agricultural technologies, diversification, and the promotion of locally adapted crop varieties can play a role in building resilience, but these approaches require greater policy support and coordination.
In summary, delivering a climate-resilient and environmentally sustainable food system in Scotland will require integrated land-use and adaptation planning, support for agroecological transitions, and a shift toward more diverse and regionally appropriate production systems. Environmental priorities must be balanced with social and economic sustainability to secure long-term food system resilience.
Further detail and evidence examples are available in Appendix L.
Analysis of areas for policy development
We next move on to consider evidence linked to the foregoing PESTLE analysis. The PESTLE analysis of diet and climate areas for policy development in Scotland has revealed several critical evidence gaps that limit progress towards a sustainable, resilient, and equitable food system. This section summarises areas for development, evaluates the feasibility of addressing them through targeted initiatives, and prioritises areas for immediate and long-term action. A summary of identified areas for further policy development, feasibility of addressing issues, scope for collaboration, and suggested priority levels for each PESTLE dimension are set out in Table 4.1.1.1.
Disclaimer: While this report identifies multiple areas for policy development, it is acknowledged that various initiatives and programmes may already be addressing some of these areas to differing extents. The intention is not to overlook ongoing efforts, but to highlight where further action, coordination, or scaling may still be required.
1. Areas for further policy development: Political
A. Key areas:
Fragmentation of food policy across government sectors, limiting alignment between climate, health, and agricultural goals.
There is scope to improve coordination mechanisms between local, devolved, and UK-wide levels of government.
Absence of measurable targets for food-related emissions reductions, including dietary change.
There remains scope to strengthen public engagement and participation in the development of food and climate policy.
Lack of robust mechanisms to evaluate the effectiveness of food policy interventions.
Embed cross-sectoral policy alignment within Scotland’s legislative framework through new statutory obligations.
C. Areas for collaboration:
Government: Lead policy development and regulatory reform.
Third Sector and Academia: Provide research insights and advocate for evidence-based policymaking.
Private Sector: Engage in the development of sustainable business practices and supply chain transparency.
D. Priority level:
Addressing governance and coordination gaps will be foundational to all other policy reforms.
2. Areas for further policy development: Economic
A. Key areas for development:
Limited evidence on the economic viability and scalability of regenerative and agroecological farming systems in Scotland.
Misaligned or insufficient financial incentives to support sustainable production, strengthen local food supply chains, and scale community-led food initiatives.[6]
Lack of robust analysis on the potential impacts of fiscal measures—such as red meat taxation or incentives for plant-based foods—on consumer behaviour, equity, and health outcomes.
B. Feasibility options for development:
Phase 1: Foundations:
Conduct an economic feasibility study on regenerative farming models and their potential integration into Scotland’s agricultural sector.
Strengthen public procurement policies to better support local and sustainable food sourcing.
Phase 2: Scaling and alignment:
Explore targeted financial incentives to support low-emission and nature-friendly farming approaches.
Launch pilot projects to evaluate the impact of sustainable farming financial incentives.
Develop fiscal policies (e.g., targeted payments, taxation, or incentives) to shift consumption toward sustainable diets.
Support supply chain infrastructure investments to improve local food distribution and processing.
Phase 3: Structural reform:
Develop a comprehensive fiscal policy review to assess the potential impacts of taxation, support, and incentives.
Align agricultural support payment structures with climate and health objectives.
Establish a long-term funding strategy for sustainable food system transformation.
C. Areas for collaboration:
Government: Develop fiscal incentives and financial mechanisms to support health and sustainability goals.
Third sector and Academia: Assess economic impacts of taxation and financial reforms.
Private Sector: Adapt business models to align with financial incentives for sustainability.
D. Priority level:
Economic barriers need to be addressed to facilitate sustainable production shifts.
3. Areas for further policy development: Social
A. Key areas for development:
Limited data on food affordability and access among low-income and rural communities.
Need for more meaningful engagement with diverse communities in shaping food policy and dietary guidance.
B. Feasibility options for development
Phase 1: Foundations:
Expand public engagement initiatives, including community-led research into dietary transitions.
Expand public engagement initiatives to address affordability and accessibility barriers.
Pilot community-led food initiatives targeting low-income areas.
Phase 2: Scaling and alignment:
Conduct a national food accessibility and affordability survey.
Develop participatory policy design mechanisms to enhance local food governance.
Strengthen food education campaigns to promote healthier, more sustainable diets.
Phase 3: Structural reform:
Embed participatory policy design mechanisms within Scotland’s food governance structures.
Ensure that sustainable diets are embedded in national health and education policies.
C. Areas for collaboration:
Government: Develop and fund inclusive food policies.
Third Sector and Academia: Engage in community outreach and public health research.
Private sector: Improve food affordability through fair pricing strategies.
D. Priority level:
Important for equity and public buy-in but will require gradual integration.
4. Areas for further policy development: Technological
A. Key areas for development:
Absence of standardised methods for tracking food system emissions and sustainability impacts.
Limited integration of digital food labelling and consumer-facing sustainability information.
B. Feasibility options for development:
Phase 1: Foundations:
Support and shape the UK-wide Food Data Transparency Partnership to ensure Scotland’s dietary and sustainability priorities are reflected.[7]
Phase 2: Scaling and alignment:
Develop a digital food labelling initiative to improve transparency.
Expand precision agriculture technologies to improve farm efficiency.
Long-term:
Develop a data-driven food system policy framework that integrates real-time monitoring and reporting tools.
C. Areas for collaboration:
Government: Implement data standardisation policies and invest in rural technology.
Third Sector and Academia: Conduct research on food system emissions and digital innovations.
Private Sector: Drive technological advancements in food production and retail.
C. Priority level:
Essential for evidence-based policymaking and consumer engagement.
5. Areas for further policy development: Legal
A. Key areas for development:
Limited enforcement of supply chain transparency and sustainability regulations.
Gaps in legal frameworks for food labelling, marketing, and consumer information rights.
Uncertainty around the legal and nutritional implications of dietary transition policies.
B. Feasibility options for development:
Phase 1: Foundations:
Work with UK regulators[8] to strengthen food labelling frameworks, including clear nutritional and environmental indicators, while exploring Scotland-specific improvements in public-facing food information.
Implement supply chain due diligence requirements for major food retailers.
Phase 2: Scaling and alignment:
Expand mandatory sustainability reporting for businesses in the food sector.
Align food regulations to reduce policy inconsistencies.
Phase 3: Structural reform:
Establish legal safeguards around dietary policy shifts, ensuring public health is protected.
Embed right-to-food principles in Scotland’s food governance framework.
C. Areas for collaboration:
Government: Strengthen regulatory frameworks and enforcement mechanisms.
Third Sector and Academia: Advocate for consumer protections and legal reforms.
Private Sector: Ensure compliance with evolving regulations.
D. Priority level:
Important for transparency but requires multi-stakeholder cooperation.
6. Areas for further policy development: Environmental
A. Key areas for development:
Limited data on the environmental impacts of different livestock systems and land management approaches.
Lack of integrated policy guidance to balance food production, biodiversity, and climate priorities.
Under-developed integration of climate adaptation planning in agricultural policy and land use decisions.
B. Feasibility options for development:
Phase 1: Foundations:
Conduct a livestock emissions and sequestration study to refine policy targets.
Phase 2: Scaling and alignment:
Develop a national food system biodiversity framework to guide sustainable land-use decisions.
Support the delivery of Scottish National Adaptation Plan (SNAP3)[9] commitments on agricultural adaptation, with a focus on extreme weather resilience, soil health, and sustainable land use.
Invest in local and diversified crop production to enhance resilience.
Phase 3: Structural reform:
Embed climate resilience planning into Scotland’s agricultural and food policies.
Establish long-term land use strategies balancing food security and biodiversity conservation.
Third Sector and Academia: Oversee biodiversity and climate impact research.
Private Sector: Support sustainable farming practices and emissions reduction initiatives.
D. Priority level:
Important for aligning food production with Scotland’s climate targets.
PESTLE evidence analysis of areas for further policy development
In summary, addressing areas for policy development identified through the evidence review would require a combination of more immediate actions, pilot initiatives, and longer-term policy reforms. Targeting governance and coordination should be prioritised as a foundation upon which to develop emissions tracking, economic incentives for sustainability, and environmental resilience strategies. Based on the analysis of evidence, addressing these areas through targeted research, cross-sector collaboration, and data standardisation would be essential for leveraging meaningful progress on sustainable diet transitions.
Conclusions and policy implications
Diet, climate, and public health intersect in complex ways with food systems, shaping both environmental sustainability and human well-being. Dietary patterns influence greenhouse gas emissions, biodiversity, and resource use, whilst also influencing non-communicable diseases and health risks. A transition to sustainable diets presents an opportunity to improve public health and reduce environmental impact, though significant barriers including affordability and accessibility must be tackled. In Scotland, the transition to sustainable diets is complicated by cultural and economic reliance on established food industries, particularly livestock farming. Whilst high red and processed meat consumption poses health and environmental concerns, economic dependencies, consumer habits, and social norms around food identity and tradition all contribute to resistance to change.
Crucially, policymakers must navigate inevitable trade-offs between economic stability and sustainability. The Scottish red meat sector supports jobs and rural economies, making policies to reduce meat consumption economically sensitive. Furthermore, plant-based diets remain costly due to supply chain and financial support structures, with change carrying the risk of exacerbating social inequalities. Balancing voluntary industry commitments with regulatory measures and fiscal policies is needed to drive change whilst minimising economic disruption.
This report has highlighted the complex connections between diet, climate, and public health in food systems, and the urgent need for integrated policy responses for sustainable diet transitions. The UK’s 7th Carbon Budget (CB7) (Climate Change Committee, 2025) reinforces this urgency, proposing a substantial reduction in livestock numbers and a shift towards more sustainable dietary patterns. Scotland’s food system has the potential to reduce greenhouse gas emissions while improving public health, yet fragmented policies, gaps in governance, and limited economic incentives inhibit meaningful progress. In line with CB7, this report underscores the importance of policy coherence, aligned with public engagement, agricultural and industry support, fiscal measures, and public health initiatives.
Informing next steps for policy development
Whilst significant strides have been made with policies like the Good Food Nation Act (Scottish Government, 2022a), further action is needed to strengthen accountability, set clear sustainability targets, and improve cross-sectoral collaboration. Managing the economic implications of dietary transitions is also crucial to ensuring a just transition—without targeted support, rural inequalities may deepen, and resistance to change may grow. Lessons from other countries have shown that a mix of financial incentives, public procurement reforms, and consumer engagement strategies can drive sustainable dietary shifts while maintaining economic stability.
Such goals require coordinated action across government, agriculture, the food industry, public health, and civil society. A whole-systems approach must ensure sustainability policies are both equitable and inclusive. Priorities could therefore include:
Strengthening governance and policy coordination: Develop a cross-sectoral food policy framework aligning climate, health, and agricultural objectives. Enhance local-national coordination for food system implementation. Establish clear emissions reduction targets for food production and dietary transitions and clarify the role of dietary transitions in meeting this target.
Improving economic incentives for sustainable food systems: Redirect agricultural support payments towards sustainable and regenerative farming. Explore the role for fiscal policies (e.g. e.g. support payments or taxation) to make sustainable food choices more affordable. Invest in local food infrastructure and supply chains to reduce dependence on imports.
Addressing social and cultural barriers to dietary change: Expand public, agricultural, and food system engagement and participation and leverage procurement opportunities to increase awareness and availability of climate-friendly diets. Improve policies regarding food affordability to ensure sustainable diets are accessible to all income groups. Develop culturally sensitive strategies for dietary shifts, considering food traditions.
Investing in technology and data monitoring for food system resilience: Support the development of a UK-wide standard for emissions tracking in food production and consumption, recognising the complexity of this task and the need for cross-jurisdictional coordination. Introduce digital food labelling to increase consumer awareness of sustainability impacts.
Supporting legal and regulatory measures: Enforce sustainability standards in food production and marketing. Align devolved and UK-wide dietary policies for consistency. Improve public procurement regulations to prioritise sustainable food sourcing.
Integrating environmental considerations into food policy: Develop land-use policies balancing food security, biodiversity, and climate goals. Strengthen climate adaptation strategies for Scottish agriculture. Explore the potential role of well-managed grazing land in supporting biodiversity and contributing to carbon sequestration, while recognising that evidence on sequestration benefits remains contested.
Scotland has an opportunity to lead in sustainable food policy by embedding climate and health goals into food system governance. A cross-sectoral, just transition approach is essential to creating a food system that protects the environment, supports local economies, and enhances public health to secure long-term benefits for both people and the planet.
References
Allan, G., Comerford, D. and McGregor, P., 2019. The system-wide impact of healthy eating: Assessing emissions and economic impacts at the regional level. Food Policy, 86, p.101725. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodpol.2019.05.008
Ambler-Edwards, S., Bailey, K.S., Kiff, A., Lang, T., Lee, R., Marsden, T.K., Simons, D.W. and Tibbs, H., 2009. Food futures: Rethinking UK strategy. London: Chatham House. [online] Available at: Food futures: rethinking UK strategy. A Chatham House report -ORCA (Accessed: 25/11/24).
Attorp, A. and Hubbard, C., 2022. Governing the UK agri-food system post-Brexit, in Shucksmith, M. and Bosworth, G. (eds.) Rural governance in the UK. Abingdon: Routledge, pp. 78–98.
Bauer, J.M., Aarestrup, S.C., Hansen, P.G. and Reisch, L.A., 2022. Nudging more sustainable grocery purchases: Behavioural innovations in a supermarket setting. Technological Forecasting and Social Change, 179, p.121605. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.techfore.2022.121605
Beckert, M., Smith, P. and Chapman, S., 2016. Of trees and sheep: Trade-offs and synergies in farmland afforestation in the Scottish uplands. In: S. Kratzer and M. Schönhart, eds. Land use competition: Ecological, economic and social perspectives. Cham: Springer, pp.183–192. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-33628-2_11
Bellamy, A.S., Furness, E., Mills, S., Clear, A., Finnigan, S.M., Meador, E., Milne, A.E. and Sharp, R.T., 2023. ‘Promoting dietary changes for achieving health and sustainability targets’, Frontiers in Sustainable Food Systems, 7, 1160627. https://doi.org/10.3389/fsufs.2023.1160627.
Bhunnoo, R. and Poppy, G.M., 2020. A national approach for transformation of the UK food system. Nature Food, 1(1), pp.6–8. https://doi.org/10.1038/s43016-019-0003-3
Billen, G., Aguilera, E., Einarsson, R., Garnier, J., Gingrich, S., Grizzetti, B., Lassaletta, L., Le Noë, J. and Sanz-Cobena, A., 2021. Reshaping the European agro-food system and closing its nitrogen cycle: The potential of combining dietary change, agroecology, and circularity. One Earth, 4(6), pp.839–850. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.oneear.2021.05.011
Booth, A., 2006. Clear and present questions: Formulating questions for evidence based practice. Library Hi Tech, 24(3), 355-368. https://doi.org/10.1108/07378830610692127
Boyle, N.B., Jenneson, V., Okeke-Ogbuafor, N., Morris, M.A., Stead, S.M., Dye, L., Halford, J.C. and Banwart, S.A., 2024. ‘Connected Food: First steps for an ambitious national food strategy’, Nutrients, 16(19), p. 3371. https://doi.org/10.3390/nu16193371.
Brennan, M., 2023. Food systems transformation in Scotland—The journey to, vision of, and challenges facing the new Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act. Sustainability, 15(19), p.14579. https://doi.org/10.3390/su151914579
Briggs, H.R., Tallontire, A.M. and Dougill, A.J., 2019. Exploring the contribution of vertical farming to sustainable intensification from the point of view of the innovator and the farmer. Sustainability Research Institute, University of Leeds. [online] Available at: https://sri.leeds.ac.uk/publications/vertical-farming-sustainability (Accessed: 25/1/25).
Bryant, C., Couture, A., Ross, E., Clark, A. and Chapman, T., 2024. A review of policy levers to reduce meat production and consumption. Appetite, p.107684. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.appet.2024.107684.
Cleland, E., McBey, D., Darlene, V., McCormick, B.J. and Macdiarmid, J.I., 2025. Still eating like there’s no tomorrow? A qualitative study to revisit attitudes and awareness around sustainable diets after 10 years. Appetite, 206, p.107799. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.appet.2024.107799.
Culliford, A.E., Bradbury, J. and Medici, E.B., 2023. Improving communication of the UK sustainable healthy dietary guidelines—the Eatwell Guide: A rapid review. Sustainability, 15(7), p.6149. https://doi.org/10.3390/su15076149
Department for Environment, Food & Rural Affairs (Defra), 2024. Assessing carbon displacement risk in the agri-food sector: The development and application of a carbon displacement and wider impacts framework. October 2024. Defra. [online] Available at: ADAS Collaborate on Project Investigating Carbon Displacement (Accessed: 25/11/25).
Dogbe, W., Revoredo-Giha, C. and Russell, W., 2024. An analysis of the current and potential market opportunities for hempseed and fibre: the case of Scotland? Agriculture & Food Security, 13(1), p.57. https://doi.org/10.1186/s40066-024-00388-6.
Dogbe, W., Wang, Y. and Revoredo-Giha, C., 2024. Nutritional implications of substituting plant-based proteins for meat: Evidence from home scan data. Agricultural and Food Economics, 12(1), p.30. https://doi.org/10.1186/s40100-024-00272-2.
Edwards-Jones, G., 2010. Does eating local food reduce the environmental impact of food production and enhance consumer health? Proceedings of the Nutrition Society, 69(4), pp.582–591. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0029665110002004
Eory, V., Topp, K., Rees, B., Jones, S., Waxenberg, K., Barnes, A., Smith, P., MacLeod, M. and Wall, E., 2023. A scenario-based approach to emissions reduction targets in Scottish agriculture. ClimateXChange (CXC). [online] Available at: A scenario-based approach to emissions reduction targets in Scottish agriculture (Accessed 14/1/25).
Fardet, A. and Rock, E., 2020. Ultra-processed foods and food system sustainability: What are the links? Sustainability, 12(15), p.6280. https://doi.org/10.3390/su12156280
Ferguson, H.J., Bowen, J.M., McNicol, L.C., Bell, J., Duthie, C.A. and Dewhurst, R.J., 2024. The impacts of precision livestock farming tools on the greenhouse gas emissions of an average Scottish dairy farm. Frontiers in Sustainable Food Systems, 8, p.1385672. https://doi.org/10.3389/fsufs.2024.1385672
Follett, E., Davis, L., Wilson, C. and Cable, J., 2024. Working for the environment: farmer attitudes towards sustainable farming actions in rural Wales, UK, Environment, Development and Sustainability, pp. 1–20. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10668-024-03764-7.
Foster, J.A. and Poston, A., 2024. Occupant experience of domestic kitchen environments in low-energy social and affordable housing in Scotland. Building Research & Information, 52(7), pp.799–816. https://doi.org/10.1080/09613218.2024.2312504.
Gargano, G., 2021. The bottom-up development model as a governance instrument for the rural areas: The cases of four Local Action Groups (LAGs) in the United Kingdom and in Italy. Sustainability, 13(16), p.9123. https://doi.org/10.3390/su13169123.
Gill, M., Fowler, K. and Scott, E.M., 2024. ‘Bridging the gap between science and food policy: nutrition as a driver of policy drawing on Scotland as a case study’, Proceedings of the Nutrition Society, pp. 1–15. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0029665124000267.
Hasnain, S., Green, R., Williams, A., Dangour, A.D., Smith, P. and Hillier, J., 2020. Mapping the UK food system – a report for the UKRI Transforming UK Food Systems Programme. University of Oxford. [online] Available at: https://www.foodsystemresearch.org.uk/publications/mapping-the-uk-food-system (Accessed: 3/11/24).
Hielkema, M.H. and Lund, T.B., 2021. ‘Reducing meat consumption in meat-loving Denmark: Exploring willingness, behavior, barriers and drivers’, Food Quality and Preference, 93, 104257. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodqual.2021.104257.
Holmes, E.J., 2018. Brexit, beef, and beans: a sustainable food-system approach for the UK. Master’s thesis, Norwegian University of Life Sciences, Ås. [online] Available at: 249964646.pdf (Accessed: 18/2/25).
Hunt, L., Pettinger, C. and Wagstaff, C., 2023. A critical exploration of the diets of UK disadvantaged communities to inform food systems transformation: A scoping review of qualitative literature using a social practice theory lens. BMC Public Health, 23(1), p.1970. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-023-16775-3.
Jenkins, B., Herold, L., de Mendonça, M., Loughnan, H., Willcocks, J., David, T., Ginns, B., Rock, L., Wilshire, J., Avis, K., 2024. Breeding for reduced methane emissions in livestock. ClimateXChange. [online] Available at: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5569 (Accessed: 3/11/24).
Kemper, J.A., 2020. ‘Motivations, barriers, and strategies for meat reduction at different family lifecycle stages’, Appetite, 150, 104644. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.appet.2020.104644.
Kmetkova, D., Zverinova, I., Scasny, M. and Máca, V., 2024. Acceptability of meat tax and subsidy removal by meat-eaters: insights from five European countries (No. 2024/42). Charles University Prague, Faculty of Social Sciences, Institute of Economic Studies. [online] Available at: https://ies.fsv.cuni.cz (Accessed: 14/1/25).
Kwasny, T., Dobernig, K. and Riefler, P., 2022. ‘Towards reduced meat consumption: A systematic literature review of intervention effectiveness, 2001–2019’, Appetite, 168, 105739. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.appet.2021.105739.
Lambe, F., Weitz, N., Hilgert, A., Kemp-Benedict, E. and Carlsen, H., 2025. Applying the Unlocking a Better Future framework for a just transition in Scotland: Opportunities for the Scottish Government to promote socio-economic transformations needed to help tackle the climate and nature emergencies. Stockholm Environment Institute. [online] Available at: https://www.sei.org/publications/just-transition-scotland-unlocking-a-better-future/ (Accessed: 17/1/25.
Lampkin, N., Shrestha, S., Sellars, A., Baldock, D., Smith, J., Mullender, S., Keenleyside, C., Pearce, B. and Watson, C.A., 2021. Preparing the evidence base for post-Brexit agriculture in Scotland – case studies on alternative payments. Scotland’s Rural College (SRUC) and Institute for European Environmental Policy (IEEP). [online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/preparing-the-evidence-base-for-post-brexit-agriculture-in-scotland/ (Accessed: 3/2/25).
Leat, P., Revoredo-Giha, C. and Lamprinopoulou, C., 2011. ‘Scotland’s food and drink policy discussion: Sustainability issues in the food supply chain’, Sustainability, 3(4), pp. 605–631. https://doi.org/10.3390/su3040605.
Lee, A.J., Cullerton, K. and Herron, L.M., 2020. ‘Achieving food system transformation: Insights from a retrospective review of nutrition policy (in) action in high-income countries’, International Journal of Health Policy and Management, 10(12), pp. 766–776. https://doi.org/10.34172/ijhpm.2020.69.
Lozada, L.M. and Karley, A., 2022. The adoption of agroecological principles in Scottish farming and their contribution towards agricultural sustainability and resilience. The James Hutton Institute. [online] Available at: https://www.hutton.ac.uk/research/projects/agroecology-scotland (Accessed: 1/11/24).
Malone, T. and Lusk, J.L., 2017. Taste trumps health and safety: Incorporating consumer perceptions into a discrete choice experiment for meat. Journal of Agricultural and Applied Economics, 49(1), pp.139–157. https://doi.org/10.1017/aae.2016.39.
McBey, D., McCormick, B.J.J., Hussain, M. and Macdiarmid, J.I., 2024. ‘Does sociodemographic strata determine local access to plant-based meat alternatives?’, Proceedings of the Nutrition Society, 83(OCE4), p. E350. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0029665124003723.
McBey, D., Sánchez, G.M., McCormick, B.J.J., Horgan, G.W. and MacDiarmid, J.I., 2024. Consumer ranked likely effectiveness of interventions to reduce meat consumption, Proceedings of the Nutrition Society, 83(OCE4), p. E296. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0029665124002963.
McBey, D., Watts, D. and Johnstone, A.M., 2019. Nudging, formulating new products, and the lifecourse: A qualitative assessment of the viability of three methods for reducing Scottish meat consumption for health, ethical, and environmental reasons, Appetite, 142, 104349. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.appet.2019.104349.
McNicol, L.C., Bowen, J.M., Ferguson, H.J., Bell, J., Dewhurst, R.J. and Duthie, C.A., 2024. Adoption of precision livestock farming technologies has the potential to mitigate greenhouse gas emissions from beef production, Frontiers in Sustainable Food Systems, 8, 1414858. https://doi.org/10.3389/fsufs.2024.1414858.
Meyerricks, S. and White, R.M., 2021. Communities on a threshold: Climate action and wellbeing potentialities in Scotland, Sustainability, 13(13), 7357. https://doi.org/10.3390/su13137357.
Milner, J., Green, R., Dangour, A.D., Haines, A. and Wilkinson, P., 2015. Health effects of adopting low greenhouse gas emission diets in the UK, BMJ Open, 5(4), e007364. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2014-007364.
Mitev, A., Portes, J., Osman, M., Codur, A.M., Abraham, C. and Kroll, L., 2023. The implications of behavioural science for effective climate policy: Output 1: Literature review and background report. Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST) and The Behavioural Insights Team. [online] Available at: https://cast.ac.uk/resources/reports/the-implications-of-behavioural-science-for-effective-climate-policy/ (Accessed: 15/10/24).
Myrgiotis, V., Williams, M., Rees, R.M. and Topp, C.F., 2019. Estimating the soil N₂O emission intensity of croplands in northwest Europe. Biogeosciences, 16(8), pp.1641–1655. https://doi.org/10.5194/bg-16-1641-2019.
Nneli, A., Revoredo-Giha, C. and Dogbe, W., 2023. ‘Could taxes on foods high in fat, sugar and salt (HFSS) improve climate health and nutrition in Scotland?’, Journal of Cleaner Production, 421, 138564. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2023.138564.
Pechey, R., Reynolds, J.P., Cook, B., Marteau, T.M. and Jebb, S.A., 2022. Acceptability of policies to reduce consumption of red and processed meat: A population-based survey experiment, Journal of Environmental Psychology, 81, 101817. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jenvp.2022.101817.
Rathnayaka, S.D., Revoredo-Giha, C. and de Roos, B., 2024. Assessing Scotland’s self-sufficiency of major food commodities, Agriculture & Food Security, 13(1), p. 34. https://doi.org/10.1186/s40066-024-00452-3.
Reay, D.S., Warnatzsch, E.A., Craig, E., Dawson, L., George, S., Norman, R. and Ritchie, P., 2020. ‘From farm to fork: growing a Scottish food system that doesn’t cost the planet’, Frontiers in Sustainable Food Systems, 4, 72. https://doi.org/10.3389/fsufs.2020.00072.
Ruani, M.A., Reiss, M.J. and Kalea, A.Z., 2023. Diet-nutrition information seeking, source trustworthiness, and eating behavior changes: An international web-based survey. Nutrients, 15(21), p.4515. https://doi.org/10.3390/nu15214515.
Rubio Ramon, G., 2024. Building animal nations: industrial animal agriculture in the making of Catalonia and Scotland. ERA [online] Available at: https://era.ed.ac.uk/handle/1842/41639 (Accessed: 26/1/25).
Scottish Parliament, n.d.(b). Briefing for the Citizen Participation and Public Petitions Committee on Petition PE1963: Phase in meat production ban by 2040. [online] Available at: Briefing for petition PE1963: Phase in meat production ban by 2040 (Accessed 23/1/25).
Shortland, F., Hall, J., Hurley, P., Little, R., Nye, C., Lobley, M. and Rose, D.C., 2023. Landscapes of support for farming mental health: Adaptability in the face of crisis. Sociologia Ruralis, 63, pp.116–140. https://doi.org/10.1111/soru.12399.
Smith, A.M., Duncan, P., Edgar, D. and McColl, J., 2021. Responsible and sustainable farm business: Contextual duality as the moderating influence on entrepreneurial orientation. The International Journal of Entrepreneurship and Innovation, 22(2), pp.88–99. https://doi.org/10.1177/1465750320939779.
Sovacool, B.K., Bazilian, M., Griffiths, S., Kim, J., Foley, A. and Rooney, D., 2021. ‘Decarbonizing the food and beverages industry: A critical and systematic review of developments, sociotechnical systems and policy options’, Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 143, 110856. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.rser.2021.110856.
Spiro, A., Hill, Z. and Stanner, S., 2024. Meat and the future of sustainable diets—Challenges and opportunities’, Nutrition Bulletin, 49(4), pp. 572–598. https://doi.org/10.1111/nbu.12685.
Sutherland, L.A. and Burton, R.J., 2011. Good farmers, good neighbours? The role of cultural capital in social capital development in a Scottish farming community. Sociologia Ruralis, 51(3), pp.238–255. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9523.2011.00536.x.
Vittersø, G., Torjusen, H., Laitala, K., Tocco, B., Biasini, B., Csillag, P., de Labarre, M.D., Lecoeur, J.L., Maj, A., Majewski, E. and Malak-Rawlikowska, A., 2019. Short food supply chains and their contributions to sustainability: Participants’ views and perceptions from 12 European cases’, Sustainability, 11(17), p. 4800. https://doi.org/10.3390/su11174800.
White, J.T. and Bunn, C., 2017. Growing in Glasgow: Innovative practices and emerging policy pathways for urban agriculture, Land Use Policy, 68, pp. 334–344. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.landusepol.2017.07.052.
Wiltshire, J., Freeman, D., Willcocks, J. and Wood, C., 2021. The potential for leguminous crops in Scotland. Ricardo Energy & Environment. [online] Available at: The potential for leguminous crops in Scotland (Accessed: 23/1/25).
Witheridge, J. and Morris, N.J., 2016. An analysis of the effect of public policy on community garden organisations in Edinburgh, Local Environment, 21(2), pp. 202–218. https://doi.org/10.1080/13549839.2014.940357.
The stakeholder mapping exercise aimed to identify and understand the individuals and organisations who influence or are affected by climate and diet policies in Scotland. It was designed to support inclusive, evidence-informed policy review by incorporating a broad range of perspectives.
The mapping focused on ten key policy areas:
Agriculture
Food systems
Public health
Carbon emissions
Land use and forestry
Water use and pollution
Economic and social impacts
Food security
Consumer behaviour and education
Urban planning and food infrastructure
Stakeholders were assessed for their relevance to these areas and the potential for involvement in the policy process.
Methods
Desk research: Systematic searches of government documents, NGO and advocacy websites, academic literature, and media reports to compile a draft list of stakeholders.
Expert consultation: Meetings with policymakers, researchers, and advisors to validate the list and identify additional stakeholders.
Categorisation: Stakeholders were grouped by type (e.g., government, academia, NGOs, industry, health, community, media, public).
Influence–Interest Mapping: Stakeholders were classified based on their level of influence over, and interest in, diet and climate policy. A rubric guided the assignment of High, Medium, or Low categories for each.
Stakeholder Categories
Stakeholders were grouped into eight high-level categories:
Government bodies and regulators (e.g., Scottish Government, SEPA, Food Standards Scotland)
Research and academia (e.g., University research centres, think tanks)
NGOs and advocacy groups (e.g., Nourish Scotland, Friends of the Earth Scotland)
Agriculture and food industry (e.g., NFU Scotland, food producers, retailers)
Public health bodies (e.g., NHS Scotland, Public Health Scotland)
Community organisations (e.g., local sustainability hubs, rural associations)
Media and influencers (e.g., journalists, campaigners)
General public and citizen groups (e.g., low-income groups, consumer organisations)
Ongoing Adaptation
Stakeholder positions and influence are dynamic. The mapping process includes continuous review to respond to evolving policy priorities and to adapt engagement strategies accordingly.
Appendix B: Findings from the stakeholder identification and mapping analysis
#
Stakeholder name
Stakeholder primary category
Stakeholder sub-category
1
Defra
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1a) UK Government bodies
2
UK Government
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1a) UK Government bodies
3
UK Parliament
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1a) UK Government bodies
4
HM Revenue and Customs
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1a) UK Government bodies
5
Marine Scotland Directorate
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
6
Agriculture and Rural Economy Directorate
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
7
Diet and Healthy Weight Team
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
8
Good Food Nation Working Group
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
9
Health & Social Care Directorate
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
10
Population Health Directorate
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
11
Scottish Government
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
12
Food Security Unit
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
13
Future Environment Division
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
14
Energy and Climate Change Directorate
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
15
Scottish Government (SGRPID, Animal health) (dairy production)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
16
Environment and Forestry Directorate
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
17
Learning Directorate Support & Wellbeing Unit
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
18
Scottish Labour Party
(1f) Scottish political parties
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
19
Food Standards Agency Scotland (FSAS)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
20
Decoupling Advisory Group
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
21
Resource Efficient Scotland
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
22
Scotland’s Climate Assembly
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
23
Scotland’s Futures Forum
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
24
Just Transition Commission
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
25
Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
26
NatureScot (SNH)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
27
Environmental Standards Scotland (ESS)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
28
Environment and Forestry Directorate
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
29
Scottish Forestry
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
30
Energy and Climate Change Directorate
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
31
Scottish Climate Intelligence Service
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
32
Scotland Farm Advisory Service (FAS)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
33
Adaptation Scotland
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
34
Agriculture and Rural Economy Directorate
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
35
Scottish Food Commission
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
36
Ministerial Working Group on Food
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
37
Good Food Nation Working Group
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
38
Environment, Climate Change and Land Reform
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
39
Economic Development and Fair Work
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
40
Agriculture and Horticulture Development Board
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
41
Scottish Government Rural Payments and Inspections Division
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
42
Scottish Natural Heritage
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
43
Scottish Water
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
44
Scottish Enterprise
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
45
Crown Estate
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
46
European Union Network for the Implementation and Enforcement of Environmental Law (IMPEL) (dairy production)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
47
Committee on Climate Change (CCC)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
48
Forestry Commission (FC)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
49
Scottish Science Advisory Council (SSAC)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
50
Science and Advice for Scottish Agriculture (SASA)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
51
Sustainable Development Commission
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
52
Climate Adaptation Team
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
53
SEA Gateway
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
54
Scottish Land Commission
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
55
Health Protection Scotland
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
56
Retail Industry Leadership Group (ILG)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
57
Agri-tourism Monitor Farm Programme
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
58
Education and Skills
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
59
Business Gateway
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
60
Highland and Islands Enterprise
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
61
Transport Authority
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
62
Revenue Scotland (leather sector)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
63
Forestry and Land Scotland
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
64
Historic Environment Scotland
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
65
Crofting Commission
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
66
Scottish Law Commission
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
67
Scottish Fiscal Commission
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
68
Scottish Funding Council (SFC)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
69
Scottish Human Rights Commission (SHRC)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
70
Scottish Council on Global Affairs (SCGA)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
71
Policy Connect
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
72
Advisory Group on Economic Recovery
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators
73
City of Edinburgh Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
74
Highland Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
75
Scottish Borders Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
76
West Lothian Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
77
Angus Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
78
South Lanarkshire Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
79
East Ayrshire Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
80
Argyll and Bute Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
81
Convention of Scottish Local Authorities (CoSLA)
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
82
East Dunbartonshire Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
83
South Ayrshire Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
84
Aberdeen City Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
85
Dundee City Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
86
Inverclyde Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
87
East Lothian Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
88
East Renfrewshire Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
89
Glasgow City Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
90
Orkney Islands Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
91
Shetland Islands Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
92
Stirling Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
93
West Dunbartonshire Council
(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators
(1d) Local councils
94
Scottish National Party
(1) Scottish political parties
(1e) Scottish Government bodies
95
Scottish Conservative Party
(1) Scottish political parties
(1e) Scottish political parties
96
Scottish Green Party
(1b) Scottish Government bodies
(1f) Scottish political parties
97
University of Edinburgh
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
98
University of Glasgow
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
99
University of Stirling
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
100
University of Dundee
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
101
University of Strathclyde
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
102
University of Aberdeen
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
103
Scotland’s Rural College (SRUC)
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
104
Scottish School of Forestry
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
105
St Andrew’s University
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
106
Royal Veterinary College
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
107
UHI Inverness
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
108
Glasgow Caledonian University
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
109
The Queen’s Nursing Institute Scotland
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
110
Heriot-Watt University
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
111
Royal College of Nursing
(2) Research & academia
(2b) Academic institutions
112
Scottish Environment, Food and Agriculture Research Institutions (SEFARI)
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
113
James Hutton Institute
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
114
Sustainability Exchange
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
115
Centre for Ecology and Hydrology (NERC)
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
116
University of Edinburgh Climate Change Institute (ECCI)
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
117
Forest Research (FC)
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
118
Scottish Environment, Food and Agriculture Research Institutions (SEFARI)
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
119
Scotland Beyond Net Zero
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
120
Scottish Alliance for Food (SCAF)
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
121
Global Academy of Agriculture and Food Security, University of Edinburgh
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
122
Sea Mammal Research Unit (SMRU)
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
123
Biomathematics and Statistics Scotland (BioSS)
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
124
Centre for Climate Justice, Glasgow Caledonian University
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
125
Rowett Institute
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
126
British Geological Survey
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
127
British Geological Society (BGS)
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
128
University of Strathclyde Fraser of Allander Institute (FAI)
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
129
Nesta
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
130
Research Innovation Scotland
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
131
David Hume Institute
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
132
What Works Scotland
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
133
Research establishments
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
134
ScotCen Social Research
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
135
Pareto Consulting
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
136
Food Researchers in Edinburgh (FRIED)
(2) Research & academia
(2c) Research centres
137
Royal Society of Edinburgh
(2) Research & academia
(2d) Policy think tanks
138
Institute for Public Policy Research (IPPR) Scotland
(2) Research & academia
(2d) Policy think tanks
139
Green Alliance
(2) Research & academia
(2d) Policy think tanks
140
Reform Scotland
(2) Research & academia
(2d) Policy think tanks
141
Chatham House
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(2d) Policy think tanks
142
Common Weal
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(2d) Policy think tanks
143
Future Economy Scotland
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(2d) Policy think tanks
144
Common Wealth
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(2d) Policy think tanks
145
Food Ethics Council
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(2d) Policy think tanks
146
Policy Exchange
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(2d) Policy think tanks
147
Centre Think Tank
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(2d) Policy think tanks
148
Conservative Environment Network
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(2d) Policy think tanks
149
Capita
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(2d) Policy think tanks
150
THEOS
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(2d) Policy think tanks
151
The Badenoch and Strathspey Conservation Group (BSCG)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
152
Friends of the Earth Scotland
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
153
Stop Climate Chaos Scotland
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
154
Keep Scotland Beautiful
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
155
Creative Carbon Scotland
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
156
Scottish Environment LINK
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
157
Scottish Wildlife Trust
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
158
Scottish Wild Land Group
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
159
Trees for Life
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
160
RSPB Scotland
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
161
Environmental Rights Centre for Scotland (ERCS)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
162
Scottish Countryside Rangers’ Associations
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
163
Action to Protect Rural Scotland (APRS)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
164
The Cairngorms Campaign
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
165
British Trust for Conservation Volunteers (BTCV)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
166
British Trust for Ornithology
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
167
The Scottish Conservation Projects Trust (SCPT)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
168
Plantlife International
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
169
The Wildfowl & Wetlands Trust
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
170
The British Trust for Ornithology (BTO)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
171
Zero Waste Scotland
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
172
Zero Waste Scotland
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
173
Groundwork Trusts
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
174
The National Biodiversity Network (NBN) Trust
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
175
The Botanical Society of the British Isles (BSBI)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
176
The Conservation Volunteers
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
177
Greenspace Scotland
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
178
Net Zero Nation
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
179
Green Action Trust
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
180
Environmental Protection Scotland (EPS)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
181
Uplift UK
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
182
Labour Climate and Environment Forum (LCEF)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
183
Climate Emergency UK
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
184
Tipping Point UK
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
185
Royal Scottish Geographical Society
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
186
Scotland The Big Picture
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
187
Sustainable Thinking Scotland (STS)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
188
Fishery Trusts
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
189
Greener Kirkcaldy
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
190
Sustainable Cupar
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
191
Energy Saving Trust
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
192
Esmee Fairbairn Foundation
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
193
Linlithgow Climate Challenge
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
194
Changeworks
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
195
Scottish Policy Group British Ecological Society
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
196
National Trust for Scotland
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups
197
Scottish Farming and Wildlife Advisory Group (SCOTFWAG)
Scottish Council for Voluntary Organisations (SCVO)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
277
Transform Community Development
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
278
Community Development Lens (CoDeL)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
279
Cyrenians
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
280
Eco Congregation Scotland
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
281
Environmental Rights Centre for Scotland (ERC)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
282
Federation of City Farms and Community Gardens Scotland (FEL Scotland)
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
283
Get Growing Scotland
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
284
Worker Support Centre
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
285
Unite Scotland
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
286
UK Health Alliance on Climate Change
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
287
Social Farms & Gardens
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
288
Global Justice Now
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
289
Scottish Trade Union Congress
(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups
(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups
290
Compassion in World Farming (CIWIF)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
291
Community Land Scotland
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
292
Nature Friendly Farming Network (NFFN)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
293
Landworkers’ Alliance
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
294
Rare Breeds Survival Trust (RBST) Scotland
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
295
Mossgiel Organic Farm
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
296
Association of Independent Crop Consultants
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
297
Basis Registration Ltd (BASIS
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
298
Scottish Quality Crops
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
299
Tenant Farming Association
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
300
Scottish Dairy Growth Board
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
301
Scottish DairyHub
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
302
Bovine genetics and reproductive services
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
303
The Scottish Dairy Cattle Association
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
304
Young Farmers
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
305
Scottish Organic Producers Association (SOPA)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
306
National Farmers Union Scotland (NFUS)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
307
The Country Landowners’ Association
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
308
Scottish Water
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
309
Food, Farming and Countryside Commission (FFCC)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
310
Crown Estate Scotland
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
311
Royal Highland and Agricultural Society of Scotland
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
312
Agricultural Industries Confederation
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
313
Advanced Plant Growth Centre (James Hutton Institute)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
314
Scottish Agricultural Organisation Society (SAOS)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
315
ADAS
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
316
Agricultural Industries Confederation
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
317
Agricultural Industries Confederation Scotland
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
318
Crop Protection Association
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
319
Linking Environment and Farming (LEAF)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
320
National Farmers Union Scotland (NFUS)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
321
Red Tractor
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
322
Ricardo (Future Farming Resilience Fund)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
323
SRUC/SAC Consulting
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
324
Scottish Land and Estates
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
325
Scottish Rural College
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
326
Agriculture and Horticulture Development Board
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
327
DairyUK
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
328
Farm Quality Assurance Schemes
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
329
Assured Integrated Milk Supplier (AIMS)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
330
Scottish Agricultural Organisation Society
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
331
Organic Soil Association
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
332
Dourie Farming Company Ltd
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
333
Scottish Land & Estates
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
334
Scottish Gamekeepers’ Association
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
335
South of Scotland Regional Economic Partnership
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
336
Scottish Crofting Federation
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
337
National Association of Agricultural Contractors
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
338
UK Irrigation Association
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
339
Scottish Tenant Farmers Association
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
340
Bank of Scotland Business
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
341
Royal Bank of Scotland
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
342
Pasture for Life
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4a) Agricultural organisations
343
Scottish Association of Meat Wholesalers
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
344
Scottish Ecological Design Association (SEDA)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
345
Milk Supply Association (MSA)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
346
Social Enterprise Scotland
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
347
Scotland Loves Local Campaign
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
348
Scotland the Bread
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
349
Circular Communities Scotland
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
350
Campbells Prime Meat
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
351
Packaging Recycling Group Scotland
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
352
Scotch Beef
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
353
Food and Drink Federation Scotland (FDF Scotland)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
354
Scotland Food and Drink
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
355
British Meat Processors’ Association
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
356
Quality Meat Scotland (QMS)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
357
Food and Agriculture Organisation (FAO)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
358
Marine Stewardship Council (MSC)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
359
RSPCA
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
360
Scotch Whisky Association (SWA)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
361
FoodDrinkEurope
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
362
Food and Drink Leadership Forum
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
363
Scotlean
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
364
UNISON Scotland
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
365
Scottish Wholesale Association
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
366
British Contract Manufacturers and Packers Association
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
367
The Packaging Federation
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
368
Scottish Fair Trade Forum
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
369
Resource Management Association Scotland (RMAS)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4b) Food production organisations
370
Consumer Scotland
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
371
Bute Produce
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
372
Remake Scotland
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
373
Scottish Grocers’ Federation’s Go Local programme
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
374
European Trade Union Federation of Textiles, Clothing and Leather (leather sector)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
375
Product accreditation (leather sector)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
376
Association of Convenience Stores (ACS)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
377
British Retail Consortium (BRC)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
378
Scottish Retail Consortium
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
379
Global markets (leather sector)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
380
Scottish Grocers’ Federation
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
381
Scottish Trades Union Congress (STUC)
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
382
ASDA Supermarket
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
383
Tesco
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
384
Morrison’s
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
385
Sainsbury’s
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
386
The Refillery Edinburgh
(4) Agriculture & food industry
(4c) Supermarkets and retailers
387
NHS Scotland
(5) Public health bodies
(5a) Public health bodies
388
Public Health Scotland
(5) Public health bodies
(5a) Public health bodies
389
NHS Borders
(5) Public health bodies
(5a) Public health bodies
390
NHS Lothian
(5) Public health bodies
(5a) Public health bodies
391
NHS Grampian
(5) Public health bodies
(5a) Public health bodies
392
NHS Forth Valley
(5) Public health bodies
(5a) Public health bodies
393
Directorate of Health and Social Care
(5) Public health bodies
(5a) Public health bodies
394
Ministry of Public Health and Social Care
(5) Public health bodies
(5a) Public health bodies
395
Highlands and Islands Climate Hub
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
396
Fife Communities Climate Action Network (FCCAN)
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
397
North East Scotland Climate Action Resource Hub (NESCAN)
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
398
Transition Black Isle
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
399
Edinburgh Food Social
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
400
Forth Valley Food Futures
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
401
Highland Good Food Partnership
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
402
Climate Hebrides
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
403
Appetite for Angus Food & Drink Network
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
404
Arran’s Food Journey
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
405
Ayrshire Food an’ a that
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
406
Bute Kitchen
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
407
East Lothian Food and Drink
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
408
Eat Drink Hebrides
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
409
Eat SW Scotland
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
410
Food from Argyll
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
411
Food from Fife
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
412
Forth Valley Food and Drink Network
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
413
Great Perthshire
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
414
Lanarkshire Larder
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
415
North East Scotland Food & Drink Network
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
416
Orkney Food and Drink
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
417
A Taste of Shetland
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
418
Glasgow Allotments Forum
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
419
Abundant Borders
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
420
Transition Edinburgh
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
421
Edible Edinburgh
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
422
Transition Stirling
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
423
Moray Food Network
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
424
Falkirk Food Futures
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
425
Dundee Urban Orchard
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
426
Fair Food Aberdeenshire
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
427
Wester Hailes Growing Communities
(6) Community organisations
(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs
428
Scottish Rural Action
(6) Community organisations
(6b) Rural community associations
429
Countryside Alliance
(6) Community organisations
(6b) Rural community associations
430
Carbon Brief
(7) Media & influencers
(7a) Journalists and media outlets
431
The Grocer
(7) Media & influencers
(7a) Journalists and media outlets
432
The Scottish Farmer
(7) Media & influencers
(7a) Journalists and media outlets
433
The Scotsman
(7) Media & influencers
(7a) Journalists and media outlets
434
The Highland Times
(7) Media & influencers
(7a) Journalists and media outlets
435
The National
(7) Media & influencers
(7a) Journalists and media outlets
436
Health Food Business Magazine
(7) Media & influencers
(7a) Journalists and media outlets
437
Meat Management Magazine
(7) Media & influencers
(7a) Journalists and media outlets
438
HealthandCare.Scot
(7) Media & influencers
(7a) Journalists and media outlets
439
Laura Young (‘Less Waste Laura’
(7) Media & influencers
(7b) Influencers & activists
440
Students Organising for Sustainability (SOS-UK)
(8) General public & citizens’ groups
(8a) Vulnerable populations
441
Inclusion Scotland
(8) General public & citizens’ groups
(8a) Vulnerable populations
442
People and Planet
(8) General public & citizens’ groups
(8a) Vulnerable populations
443
The Commitment
(8) General public & citizens’ groups
(8a) Vulnerable populations
444
Scotland’s Regeneration Forum (SURF)
(8) General public & citizens’ groups
(8a) Vulnerable populations
445
Just Fair
(8) General public & citizens’ groups
(8a) Vulnerable populations
446
Poverty Alliance
(8) General public & citizens’ groups
(8a) Vulnerable populations
447
Citizens Advice Scotland
(8) General public and citizen groups
(8b) Consumer rights organisations
Appendix C: Systematic literature review methodology
Two main citation indexes were used to systematically search for articles: Scopus (for published academic literature); and Publish or Perish (for unpublished ‘grey’ literature).
In addition, a set of non-systematically derived articles supplemented the main systematic literature review protocol and more detail can be found below.
For the systematic search protocol, search parameters comprised Title-Abstract-Keyword searches of articles published in English since 2015. Because of the breadth of the topic, no categories were excluded from the search parameters. As Publish or Perish searches Google Scholar records, articles were limited to the first 200 returns by relevance.
The SPICE framework (Booth, 2006) was used to configure the systematic review search string and incorporated the following framework:
Setting: E.g. Scotland’s policy environment and the social, economic, and environmental factors specific to Scotland.
Perspective: E.g. policymakers, public groups, industry stakeholders, and other groups affected by diet and climate policies.
Intervention: E.g. climate-related dietary policy actions, public health initiatives, economic incentives, or educational campaigns.
Comparison: E.g. other regional or international diet and climate policies or scenarios where similar policy interventions are absent.
Evaluation: E.g. outcomes in terms of emissions reductions, public health improvements, economic impacts, or stakeholder engagement effectiveness.
The Title-Abstract-Keyword citation indexes were searched using the following strings, which were adapted during pilot searches because of limitations to search capabilities across each index and to optimise returns:
Scopus: TITLE-ABS-KEY ((“scot*” OR “united kingdom” OR “wales” OR “england” OR “northern ireland”) AND (“diet*” OR “food”) AND (“climate” OR “carbon” OR “emissions” OR “environment*”) AND (“policy*” OR “regulat*” OR “strateg*” OR “lever*” OR “mechanism*”) AND (“behaviour*” OR “percept*” OR “attitud*” OR “consum*” OR “meat” OR “dairy” OR “vegan” OR “vegetarian” OR “plant-based” OR “nutrition” OR “health” OR “wellbeing” OR “equit*” OR “sustainab*” OR “adaptation” OR “mitigation” OR “resilien*” OR “biodiver*” OR “econom*” OR “cost” OR “agricultur*” OR “produc*” OR “process*” OR “retail*” OR “trade*” OR “import*” OR “export*”))
Publish or Perish: scot* AND diet* OR food AND climate OR carbon OR emissions OR environment* AND policy* OR regulat* OR strateg* OR lever OR mechanism* AND behaviour*
Search results from each index were imported into Zotero where duplicates were removed.
Titles/abstracts were screened for eligibility based on the following criteria:
Inclusion criteria:
Publication language English
Published since 2020
Scotland, UK or other devolved policy contexts
Relevant to one or more of the five PESTLE dimensions
Availability of full text by 31/1/25
Exclusion criteria:
Publication language not English
Published before 2020 or focused on policy contexts prior to 2015
Without direct or indirect relevance to Scottish, UK or other devolved policy contexts
Without relevance to at least one of the five PESTLE dimensions
Conference proceedings
Methodological papers and study protocols
Each article was screened and assigned to one of three Zotero folders: Include; Exclude; Unsure. With reference to the latter, at the end of the initial screening these articles were re-examined and re-categorised to the Include or Exclude folder.
The following data were extracted from all included articles:
Article title
Last name of first author
Year of publication
Article URL
Article type (e.g., empirical study, policy document)
Study context and Aims/Objectives
Results:
Key findings
Conclusions
Areas for policy development
In addition to the systematic literature review, relevant articles from a variety of other sources supplemented the review to ensure a comprehensive and contextually relevant analysis. Articles were identified through:
Stakeholder Contributions – During stakeholder one-to-one discussions, participants suggested key reports, policy documents, and research papers that they considered highly relevant to the topic.
Citation Searches – Both forward citation searches (identifying newer papers that cited key sources) and reverse citation searches (reviewing references cited within important papers) were conducted to expand the review.
General Web Searches – Broader searches using Google were performed to capture relevant grey literature, media reports, and other non-peer-reviewed sources that may not be included in academic databases.
Targeted Website Searches – Specific searches were conducted on Scottish Government, NGO, and stakeholder websites to access reports, policy briefings, and unpublished data relevant to the research focus.
Appendix D: Systematic literature review flowchart
Appendix E: Stakeholder meeting methodology
Purpose and Overview:
The one-to-one stakeholder meetings[10] were conducted to gather qualitative insights into Scotland’s complex diet and climate policy landscape. These conversations were intended to complement the literature review and stakeholder workshops by eliciting the perspectives of individuals with practical experience and policy insight across relevant sectors of Government (supplemented by Third Sector and Academia).
Stakeholder Identification and Selection
Stakeholders were purposively selected based on their relevance to the intersecting themes of diet and climate policy, including specific expertise or engagement in areas such as emissions reduction, food security, policy development and advocacy, rural and environmental science, public health, environmental policy, agriculture, food production, and food insecurity. The selection process drew on:
Expert recommendations from Scottish Government contacts and members of the research steering group.
A stakeholder mapping exercise (see Appendices A and B).
Format and Approach
A total of 14 semi-structured informal online meetings were conducted.
Meetings followed a tailored topic guide to allow flexibility while covering core themes such as governance, policy coherence, barriers to implementation, and perceived gaps in evidence or support.
Discussions typically lasted 30–60 minutes and were designed to be conversational, allowing participants to reflect on both strategic and operational aspects of policy and practice.
Meetings were not recorded, but the researcher took detailed notes throughout.
Ethical Considerations and Data Management
Ethical approval was obtained through the University of Bath.
All participants were provided with information on the project and gave informed verbal consent.
Analytical Use
Insights from the stakeholder meeting notes were synthesised alongside the literature review and workshop outputs. They fed directly into the PESTLE analysis, helping to identify areas for policy development, clarify governance issues, and shape recommendations across the political, economic, social, technological, legal, and environmental dimensions.
Semi-structured meeting protocol
The following questions guided the meetings:
1. Understanding their role and work
Can you tell me about your current role and your team’s focus within the Scottish Government?
Does your work intersect with diet policy in Scotland, and what are the key objectives your team is working towards in this area?
2. Stakeholder relationships and collaboration
Who are the key stakeholders you collaborate with (e.g., other government departments, industry, civil society)?
Are there any stakeholders or groups whose influence or involvement you feel is missing or underrepresented in this policy area?
How would you describe the strength of your collaboration with other key stakeholders? Are there any gaps or challenges in communication or partnership?
3. Policy levers for diet change
What policy levers do you believe are most effective for promoting dietary changes that would both improve public health and reduce environmental impact?
In your view, are there particular dietary behaviours or food systems that should be prioritised for change in order to meet Scotland’s climate and health goals?
What challenges do you see in implementing these policies, either from a political, social, or logistical standpoint?
4. Identifying gaps in existing policy
Do you think there are any gaps in current diet-related policies that hinder progress towards climate goals or healthier diets?
Are there areas where more integration or alignment between climate and health policies could be beneficial?
Where do you see the biggest opportunities for new or improved policies in this space?
5. Future policy directions and needs
What emerging trends or issues do you think will have the biggest influence on future diet, and climate or health policy in Scotland?
In what ways do you think Scottish diet policy could evolve to address both climate change and public health more effectively?
Meeting participants
The following table summarises details of meeting participants
#
Organisation
Policy Area
1
Academia
Diet & Climate
2
Third-Sector (Environment)
Emissions
3
Scottish Government
Food Security
4
Scottish Government
Diet
5
Scottish Government
Policy engagement
6
Scottish Government
Rural and environmental science
7
Academia
Diet policy perceptions
8
UK Government
Diet policy
9
Scottish Government
Health
10
Scottish Government
Environment
11
UK Government
Agriculture & Environment
12
Scottish Government
Food insecurity
13
Third Sector (Health)
Diet & Health
14
Scottish Government
Climate and Diet
Appendix F: Stakeholder workshop protocols
Workshop Purpose
The workshops aimed to explore stakeholder perspectives on Scotland’s diet and climate policy landscape, identify priority issues and gaps, and generate ideas for practical cross-sector solutions. These sessions supported the development of policy-relevant insights through collaborative, activity-based engagement. Stakeholders were identified based on the mapping exercise and consultations with Scottish Government colleagues to identify a range of interests and influence (including Government, third sector organisations, academics, agriculture and food producers, health, community, and environmental groups).
Workshop Formats
Three stakeholder workshops were delivered:
One in-person workshop (full protocol detailed below)
Two online workshops, which followed a shortened format with similar core activities
Participant Recruitment Stakeholders were purposively recruited based on a preceding stakeholder mapping exercise. This mapping exercise identified relevant individuals and organisations across key sectors including Scottish Government, public health, agriculture, environment, food industry, third sector, and academia. The rationale for recruitment was guided by the segmentation of stakeholders within the mapping process, ensuring representation across high-interest and high-influence categories, as well as those with complementary or contrasting perspectives. All workshops included a cross-sector mix to support inclusive dialogue and the development of well-rounded policy insights.
Facilitation and Materials Workshops were facilitated by a research team using a structured agenda and visual/interactive materials. In-person materials included A0 wall charts, colour-coded sticky notes, printed worksheets, and feedback forms. Online workshops used virtual whiteboards, editable templates, and polling tools to replicate similar participatory methods in a digital environment.
Core Activities (all formats)
Activity 1: Priority Mapping Stakeholders identified sector-specific priorities, areas for policy development, and coordination needs using a structured mapping exercise. These inputs were categorised visually (in-person) or on a shared document (online) and discussed in plenary.
Activity 2: Policy Challenge Brainstorm Mixed-sector groups tackled pre-defined policy challenges (e.g., reducing meat consumption, supporting farmers, addressing inequalities). Each group identified key barriers and proposed short-term policy solutions, then shared findings with the wider group.
Activity 3: Prioritisation and Feedback Stakeholders reviewed the workshop’s emerging priorities and selected the most important using voting dots (in-person) or virtual polling (online). This was followed by group discussion and final reflections.
Additional In-Person Activity
Future Diet Scenarios Small groups considered hypothetical future policy scenarios for 2040 (e.g., localisation of food systems, technological innovation, policy-led dietary shifts). Discussions explored sector-specific impacts, challenges, opportunities, and future policy needs.
Data Collection and Follow-Up
Participant contributions were captured via workshop artefacts (e.g., sticky notes, templates, whiteboards), discussion summaries, and anonymised feedback forms. An optional follow-up survey was distributed by email. Thematic analysis of all outputs informed policy insights and recommendations.
To support co-production and refine the emerging findings, we incorporated iteration loops for feedback. Formative workshop outputs were shared with participants and relevant stakeholders following the sessions, and feedback was actively invited to validate interpretations, identify omissions, and strengthen final conclusions.
Participating stakeholders
Workshop
Format
Stakeholders
1
In-person
Food Standards Scotland.
Nourish Scotland
Public Health Scotland
Soil Association Scotland
Nature Friendly Farming Network
Rowett Institute, University of Aberdeen.
University of Edinburgh
Scottish Government (Tobacco, Gambling, Diet and Healthy Weight Unit).
Appendix G: Extended Political analysis: Areas for further policy development and supporting evidence
Key theme
Area For Policy Development
1. Governance and Structural Issues in Food Policy Coordination
Establish a coordinated and coherent food policy framework
Food policies operate in silos, with opportunities to strengthen cross-sectoral collaboration. Informal policy structures can limit transparency and efficiency.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Effective policy implementation requires cross-departmental collaboration and a holistic approach, addressing both supply and demand aspects of the food system. Currently, policies in Scotland are fragmented, with limited integration across health, agriculture, and environmental sectors.
(Tregear, Morgan, Spence et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Fragmented governance across Government divisions, leading to disjointed approaches to diet, climate, and health policies
(Stakeholder Meeting 3).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Greater cross ministry coordination between environment, net zero, health and housing needed to all recognise the link between industrial livestock production and emissions.”
(Workshop 4).
Align food policy with national climate targets
Food system policies should better align with net-zero targets by integrating climate action and dietary change into Scotland’s Good Food Nation objectives.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Integrating national food strategies with climate change mitigation is crucial. Highlight Scotland’s leadership in establishing sustainable food policies aligned with net-zero.
(Boyle, Jenneson, Okeke-Ogbuafor et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
The focus on reducing meat and dairy emissions creates political sensitivities, with sustainable diets seen as contentious.
(Stakeholder Meeting 14).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Within Scottish Government: Make climate & diet part of a Good Food Nation objective. Include dietary change as one of Scotland’s climate goals. Work for better join up across policy areas, work against narrowness. Make this a priority for multiple departments.”
(Workshop 4).
Promote long-term, systemic approaches in food policy
Short-term political cycles and reactive policymaking impact long-term food system transformation.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Short term thinking- panic politics!
Prevents reliable engagement and constant churn
Just in time production and unequal power balance between food producers, wholesalers, and retailers
Framework contracts for catering are constantly tightened while tied into commercial”
(Workshop 1).
Enhance strategic leadership to drive dietary change
A clearer strategic vision could support sustainable dietary change. Industry influence (e.g., food advertising) shapes food choices, and Government could play a stronger role.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
A lack of visible, strategic political leadership to unify and implement health, environment, and food equity changes was highlighted as a major deficit.
(Food Farming & Countryside Commission, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Absence of formal leadership and cross-departmental coordination, leading to fragmented efforts
(Stakeholder Meeting 14).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“A lack of political will and leadership from politicians and the leaders of the wider food movement to take on the opportunities of dietary change, with an over-reliance on the free market to fix food.”
(Workshop 1).
Develop and implement a comprehensive national food strategy
A more holistic, integrated and strategic approach to food and diet across climate, health, and agriculture would strengthen policy coherence.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Food system governance in the UK is multi-layered, involving numerous regulatory bodies and policies across sectors. This fragmentation complicates efforts to address system-wide issues like environmental sustainability and public health
(Hasnain, Green, Williams et al., 2020).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Misalignment between climate, health, and food policies. Current policy frameworks lack coherence, creating conflicting objectives
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“There is a tendency to think about different aspects of food systems links to health, missing thinking about the totality of the links between food and health- through benefits of health from employment, improved air quality, reduced pollution, better nutrition, visibility and access to green spaces, encouragement of physical activity etc. understanding food system the complexities and feedback loops of a complex system ( also consideration of impact of climate change effects locally and globally on food security).”
(Workshop 1).
Improve alignment of food policy across governance levels
Ensuring national and local policies work in tandem would improve implementation and outcomes.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
National food policies tend to prioritise large-scale, industrial supply chains, often at the expense of supporting local and regional food systems. This emphasis can marginalise smaller producers, reduce community resilience, and limit opportunities for sustainable, place-based approaches to food production and distribution. Strengthening policy support for local food networks could enhance food security, shorten supply chains, and contribute to environmental and public health goals.
(Witheridge & Morris, 2016).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Local & national level joining up of food policies.”
(Workshop 3).
Strengthen policy coherence between national and local food initiatives
National dietary targets could better account for local food sovereignty and self-sufficiency, ensuring global dietary goals align with Scotland’s food systems.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Insufficient consideration of how global dietary targets may intersect with local food sovereignty and autonomy.
(EAT, n.d.).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Define clear and measurable targets under the Good Food Nation Act
Establishing measurable goals for emissions, biodiversity, and dietary shifts would provide greater long-term direction.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
No specific targets or indicators. The Act does not set clear, measurable targets for emissions reduction, biodiversity conservation, or dietary shifts. Leaves flexibility to future governments, which may slow progress.
(Brennan, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
2. Just Transition and Resilient Food Systems
Ensure a just transition in the food system
Stronger policy support is needed to help farmers, food workers, and consumers transition to sustainable practices while ensuring fairness and inclusivity.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Weak link between food production and Just Transition principles. The document emphasises a Just Transition for farmers and crofters but does not sufficiently address how food system workers, small-scale producers, and consumers will be supported in adapting to more sustainable food systems.
(Scottish Government, 2022b).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Just transition.”
(Workshop 1).
Align public procurement with sustainability and dietary targets
Align procurement policies with environmental and dietary goals across public institutions (e.g. schools, hospitals). Improve coordination between health boards and local authorities. Strengthen oversight and accountability to ensure sustainability outcomes.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Public Sector Procurement Oversight. The document does not discuss whether public sector food procurement (e.g., schools, hospitals, government catering) will align with these dietary goals. A mandatory framework for institutional food policies (e.g., requiring plant-forward meals in public settings) is missing.
(Scottish Government, 2013).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Public procurement policies have untapped potential to support local, sustainable food systems while stimulating the green economy.
(Stakeholder Meeting 8).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“There is a gap in current public procurement accessing enough sustainable products.”
(Workshop 1).
Strengthen resilience in food supply chains
Increased investment in infrastructure, including capital support and processing facilities, would improve food system resilience.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
No Specific Strategy for Food System Resilience. The Act does not address supply chain vulnerabilities (e.g., extreme weather events, trade disruptions).
(Brennan, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Supply chains-capital support-processing.”
(Workshop 3).
Enhance policy support for local and regional food systems
Policies could better integrate local food production into supply chains, enhancing resilience to global disruptions. Small-scale initiatives play a key role but require stronger policy backing. Strengthening regional coordination between producers, supply chains, and consumers, especially in remote areas, could enhance resilience and sustainability.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Barriers to Local Food Growth: Access to land for community growing remains an issue despite policies like the Community Empowerment (Scotland) Act 2015. Infrastructure gaps: Rural and island areas face transport and distribution challenges, making it harder to get food to markets.
(Scottish Government, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“There is a gap of a localised/regional joined up application of sustainable food systems encompassing primary food production, supply chain and consumer. Scottish islands and some other areas around Scotland’s coast are very vulnerable to e.g. food access and affordability. Applying a bespoke sustainable food system would tick a lot of boxes and offer research opportunities and questions still to be asked.”
(Workshop 3).
Invest in infrastructure for sustainable and local meat processing
Expanding access to slaughter facilities, particularly in remote areas, would support local farmers and streamline processing.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Processing capacity is limited: Lack of small abattoirs and local processing facilities hinders small farmers from scaling up.
Scottish Government, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Need to support slaughterhouses due to lack of availability for farmers, especially in remote areas, and issues with accessing facilities, especially on the West Coast. Having slaughter hubs rather than individuals accessing/identifying farms (do paperwork before lorries enter premises.”
(Workshop 3).
Develop a food systems approach tailored to Scotland’s context
Policies should reflect Scotland’s unique rural and cultural contexts, including land-use trade-offs and food traditions.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Advocates for transforming the UK food system using a systems-based approach to address interconnected challenges such as unhealthy diets, environmental degradation, and food system inefficiencies. However, it is UK-wide and lacks Scotland-specific insights, such as its distinct agricultural systems (e.g., crofting) or cultural preferences in food. Fails to account for Scotland’s devolved responsibilities in areas like agriculture and environment, which require more tailored solutions.
(Bhunnoo, & Poppy, 2020).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Address urban-rural inequities in food security and access
A more integrated approach is needed to address food security challenges in urban areas while supporting rural agricultural priorities.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Urban-Rural Divide: Highlights Scotland’s diversity in land use but does not fully address the challenges of urban food security in comparison to rural production priorities.
(Gill, Fowler & Scott, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Advance implementation of the 10-minute neighbourhood model
Improve planning and spatial access. Connecting communities with local producers and using technology to improve food accessibility could support stronger local food systems.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Exploratory study on the feasibility of 10-minute neighbourhoods in Edinburgh, noting that food accessibility is a key factor in their successful implementation. The research suggests utilising technology (such as online food hubs and delivery platforms) to connect consumers with local producers.
(van der Horst, Lane, Creasy et al., 2021).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“10 minute neighbourhood-bringing the local food system to see where it’s needed and linking it to local producers.
Creating greater closeness to system
Opportunities for technologies to help with that.”
(Workshop 1).
Integrate urban agriculture into food policy and planning
Urban agriculture could play a greater role in production methods supporting plant-based diets and lowering carbon footprints.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Analysis of the climate impact of food consumed in Scotland, identifying urban agriculture as a crucial strategy for lowering carbon emissions and promoting plant-based diets. The research suggests that increasing urban food production can offset some of Scotland’s imported food emissions, which currently contribute significantly to the nation’s carbon footprint.
(Jaacks, Frank, Vonderschmidt et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Develop a national strategy for climate-compatible red meat supply
A clearer plan is needed to ensure red meat supply security amid potential future shortages.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Impact of labour shortages on food availability and safety in the UK, with a focus on Scotland’s red meat sector. The study finds that geographical challenges and post-Brexit labour shortages increase supply risks. The paper calls for contingency planning in Scotland’s red meat processing sector to ensure long-term supply security.
McAreavey, Choudhary, Obayi et al., (2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
3. Aligning Food Policy with Climate, Health, and Nutrition Goals
Align production and consumption policies for a sustainable food system
Current policies emphasise food production over dietary behaviour, missing opportunities to address both sustainability and consumer choices.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Food supply chain sustainability is prioritized over dietary sustainability in Scottish policy discussions. They advocate for more emphasis on consumer choices, food accessibility, and reducing food waste.
(Leat, Revoredo-Giha, & Lamprinopoulou, 2011).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Production vs. diet change focus: Policy emphasis on production over dietary behaviour misses opportunities for integrated approaches.
(Stakeholder Meeting 6).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Strengthen national nutrition strategies to support dietary change
Policies lack structured plans for ensuring nutritional adequacy in plant-based diets, including fortification of alternatives to meat and dairy.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
The report points out that many plant-based alternatives lack fortification with essential nutrients like calcium, vitamin B12, and iodine, identifying a gap in nutritional standards for these substitutes.
Comrie, Wilson, Nneli, et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Poor health outcomes and dietary patterns in Scotland may worsen if red meat reduction strategies do not account for suitable nutritional replacements.
(Stakeholder Meeting 11).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Establish clear and measurable targets for reducing meat consumption
No official population targets exist for reducing meat consumption (e.g., 20% by 2030), limiting policy integration with sustainability and health goals.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Discussion of future food policy challenges in Scotland, emphasizing that the country still does not have official set targets for reducing red meat consumption. The study suggests that integrating dietary changes into net-zero policies could improve policy coherence and sustainability outcomes.
Lambe, Weitz, Hilgert, et al., (2025).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Absence of government policy: Scottish Government doesn’t currently aim to reduce meat by 20% by 2030. Government has cross-cutting national food policy and food plans, but this goal isn’t embedded within these plans. A big missed opportunity – perhaps because diets are perceived as too personal”.
(Workshop 4).
Integrate methane reduction measures into food and agricultural policy
There are no specific methane reduction targets for livestock, creating gaps in investment and emission mitigation strategies. Policies could balance methane reduction with food security and rural livelihoods.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Setting clear methane reduction targets
Scotland currently lacks a specific methane reduction target for livestock, unlike New Zealand, which aims for a 10% reduction by 2030 and 24-47% by 2050.
A formal methane target could drive investment and farmer participation.
(Jenkins, Herold, de Mendonça et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Develop policies to reduce emissions across the entire food supply chain
Greater attention is needed on emissions from food transportation and storage, with investment in supply chain infrastructure.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Highlights the need for investment in Scotland’s supply chain infrastructure to reduce emissions from food transportation and storage. The study suggests that targeted investments in cold chain logistics and sustainable transport can significantly lower carbon footprints in the Scottish food system.
Pultar & Ferrier, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
The industry favours low-volume, high-value, resource-intensive convenience foods, and inefficient transportation, reducing sustainability.
(Stakeholder Meeting 11).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Bridge gaps between diet-related and public health policy frameworks
Policies could better integrate dietary guidance with efforts to reduce health inequalities and poverty.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Poor diet as both a cause and consequence of poverty in Scotland, stressing the need for more proactive policy interventions to integrate nutritional guidance with poverty reduction strategies.
Hunt, Pettinger & Wagstaff, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
There remains a disconnect between health inequality and poverty-related dietary issues, highlighting the need for more nuanced and targeted policy interventions.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Update dietary guidance to reflect both health and climate priorities
While CCC carbon budgets support the transition to more sustainable and healthier diets in Scotland, they often lack specific guidance on reducing consumption of high-emission foods such as red and processed meats.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
A scenario-based approach to emissions reduction targets in Scottish agriculture emphasises that dietary changes could significantly contribute to emissions reductions, but Scotland lacks specific food-related emissions policies targeting red and processed meats.
Eory, Topp, Rees et al., 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Diet is about balance (rather than individual products being high/low) Climate impact.”
(Workshop 1).
Embed animal welfare considerations within public health and food policy
Animal welfare could be recognised within a sustainable welfare framework, linking it to zoonotic disease risks and food system sustainability.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Examines Scotland’s Good Food Nation Act, noting that animal welfare policies remain part of a fragmented approach to food system policy. The study suggests that food policy should explicitly include welfare considerations.
(Brennan, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Animal welfare currently considered an ethical issue but not a priority issue vs public health. Lack of connectedness between One Health / One Welfare approach to food and farming systems and the associated zoonotic risk and prevalent emergence from intensive systems e.g. swine flu, bird flu.”
(Workshop 4).
4. Economic and Political Barriers to Food System Change
Develop targeted policies and interventions for high meat consumers
Current policies do not sufficiently target high meat consumers or sub-groups, limiting effectiveness in driving dietary change. There is no clear government policy to encourage or incentivise reduced red and processed meat consumption, and existing strategies lack structured approaches to ensuring nutrient adequacy in plant-based alternatives.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Study indicates that if high consumers of red and processed meat (>70g/day) reduced their intake to the Scottish Dietary Goal (70g/day), a 16% reduction in total meat consumption would be achieved.
This targeted reduction approach could help lower colorectal cancer risks, BMI, cardiovascular disease, and Type 2 diabetes cases.
Policy Gap: There is no clear government policy specifically encouraging or incentivizing reductions among high meat consumers, such as:
Public health campaigns targeting high meat eaters.
Incentives for shifting to plant-based or lower-meat diets.
Differentiated policies for groups at higher health risk from high meat consumption.
(Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
There are tensions surrounding blanket meat reduction policies, with a focus on targeting high consumers of meat to achieve incremental emissions reductions being seen as more effective.
(Stakeholder Meeting 9).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Lack of tailored approach targeting red meat over-consumers in Scotland.”
(Workshop 1).
Shape future dietary patterns through integrated policy and public engagement
Without stronger Government intervention, major food manufacturers and retailers may dominate with unhealthy and unsustainable options. Policies do not directly address the reduction of ultra-processed foods linked to poor health and environmental harm.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Climate-focused food-based dietary guidelines in other countries advocate for reduced consumption of UPFs due to their high environmental impact. The Scottish dietary guidelines do not yet emphasise avoiding these foods to the same degree, which could be an area for development
(Tregear, Morgan, Spence et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Absence of formal leadership and cross-departmental coordination, leading to fragmented efforts.
(Stakeholder Meeting 3).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Bear in mind that diets are changing – the status quo will drive a worsening of diets.
If government are absent, then big food industry players will fill the vacuum with unhealthy / unsustainable food.”
(Workshop 4).
Support the development of the plant-based food sector
Business opportunities for plant-based products could be strengthened by ensuring consistency in agricultural and horticultural policies.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
need to review possible solutions that will replace and improve on the Common Agricultural Policy, in terms of environmental goods for both the industry and wider society. They recommend stabilising policy incentives to ensure better support for sustainable food production.
(Lampkin, Shrestha, Sellars et al., 2021).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Support for the market that focuses on plant-based food – to drive business opportunities.
Government consistency on the Agricultural and Horticultural Development board (industry advocacy?) – DEFRA co-ordinated.”
(Workshop 3).
Build the economic case for food system transformation
The financial unsustainability of the current food system remains under-examined as a driver for policy change, with climate and health arguments alone proving insufficient.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Highlights ways Scotland can reform its food economy to become more self-sufficient and resilient. It offers insights into where investments and support may be needed to enhance domestic pro‑ duction and promote a resilient and sustainable food system Their study suggests that policy shifts should prioritize local food production and reduce reliance on imports.
(Rathnayaka, Revoredo-Giha & de Roos, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Health economics view on the cost of our current dysfunction! Can we convince people by showing them that it’s not financially feasible to continue as we are (whether at local authority or national level) where just climate or health outcomes have perhaps not convinced.”
(Workshop 4).
Balance regulation with industry compliance and capacity to adapt
Reliance on voluntary industry commitments rather than enforceable regulations limits the effectiveness of climate and food system policies.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Inadequate Governance:
Few policies include clear accountability structures or measurable goals for implementation and evaluation.
Many approaches rely on voluntary industry compliance, reflecting neoliberal frameworks that prioritise individual responsibility over systemic change.
(Lee, Cullerton & Herron, 2020).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Strong lobbying from agricultural and rural stakeholders affects policy decisions on livestock emissions.
(Stakeholder Meeting 4).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Manage post-Brexit trade policy to protect food standards and sustainability
Policy challenges arise from post-Brexit trade disruptions and economic uncertainties, requiring stronger food system resilience.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Discusses how Brexit has disrupted food governance in Scotland, leading to policy uncertainty in sustainable agriculture and food security. They highlight that Scotland needs a more independent policy framework to maintain sustainability goals post-Brexit.
(Attorp & Hubbard, 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Balancing trade tensions, concerns as a fallout from e.g., Brexit.”
(Workshop 1).
5. The Role of Technology, Trade, and Environmental Considerations in Food Policy
Strengthen regulation and oversight of intensive agricultural practices
A clearer policy framework is needed to address the environmental and animal welfare impacts of intensive farming.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Argues that Scotland’s reliance on intensive farming practices negatively impacts biodiversity, soil health, and emissions. The report recommends strengthening agricultural policies to incorporate nature-based solutions and reduce chemical dependency in intensive farming.
(Brodie, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Scottish Government policies must be more joined up with a clear goal to reduce the amount of meat and dairy produced in industrial farming systems.”
(Workshop 1).
Reevaluate the role of food miles in sustainability metrics
The contribution of food miles to total emissions is often overstated, highlighting the need for a more holistic sustainability discussion.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Analysis of the impact of food miles and carbon footprint, showing that overemphasizing local production can exaggerate its sustainability benefits while ignoring production efficiency and food system integration.
(Vittersø, Torjusen, Laitala et al., 2019).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Food miles as an unhelpful concept due to its disproportionately small impact (equal to or less than 5% of total emissions).”
(Workshop 1).
Assess the environmental and social sustainability of emerging food technologies
Emerging production methods (e.g., vertical farming) require evaluation of energy use, labour, and environmental impact to ensure long-term sustainability.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Analyses energy use, labour demand, and environmental sustainability in Scottish vertical farming. They highlight high energy costs due to artificial lighting and climate control but note potential labour efficiency gains.
(Briggs, Tallontire & Dougill, 2019).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Vertical farms/greenhouse tomatoes- what are environmental impacts of production?
Depends on production methods-and extent to which energy and labour is required.”
(Workshop 1).
Leverage product reformulation to support health and sustainability
Reformulating processed food products over time can reduce environmental impacts and improve health.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Analyses the potential of reducing processed meat in Scottish food systems through reformulation strategies. They highlight environmental benefits, including lower greenhouse gas emissions, and health co-benefits.
(Spiro, Hill, & Stanner, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Incremental reformulation of processed food products can contribute to sustainability goals by reducing resource use and environmental impacts over time.
(Stakeholder Meeting 14).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Encourage reformulation of processed foods and move consumers towards wholefoods.”
(Workshop 1).
Fully integrate environmental sustainability into economic frameworks for food policy
Economic and social considerations often take precedence over environmental sustainability in food, agriculture, and public health strategies. Greater policy focus is needed on agroecology to support low-input farming models.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Lack of Integration into Agricultural Policy: Scotland’s agricultural subsidies still favour high-input conventional farming, with no clear financial support for agroecology. No explicit policy targets for agroecology within Scotland’s Land Use Strategy or Climate Action Plan.
(Lozada & Karley, 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
6. Evidence, Modelling, and Policy Implementation Issues
Enhance coherence across food-related policies and strategies
Stronger integration of research evidence and interlinked policy areas is needed to improve decision-making and coordination across food systems.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Need for coordinated, holistic policy approaches: The report notes that effective policy implementation requires cross-departmental collaboration and a holistic approach, addressing both supply and demand aspects of the food system. Currently, policies in Scotland are fragmented, with limited integration across health, agriculture, and environmental sectors.
(Tregear, Morgan, Spence et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Limited use of evidence in policymaking
(Stakeholder Meeting 8).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Bureaucracy-Business/Retail/Economics tape etc causing delays from evidence to policy.”
(Workshop 3).
Improve modelling of food systems and emissions pathways
Existing models do not fully capture the link between livestock production, dietary change, and emissions, leading to flawed policy assumptions. More precise emissions accounting is needed, recognising farming’s role in carbon sequestration.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Argues that current emissions models oversimplify the role of livestock production by not accounting for regional variations, land-use differences, and dietary shifts. They claim policy assumptions based on these models often lead to misleading conclusions about sustainable diets and livestock impact.
(Houzer & Scoones, 2021).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Always use net not gross emissions when modelling the environmental impact of meat. Farming is one of the few industries that sequesters carbon.“
(Workshop 1).
Strengthen the role of evidence in food policy development
Policymakers sometimes prioritise political feasibility over scientific recommendations, limiting evidence-based dietary policy development.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Policymakers sometimes lack awareness of dietary evidence or prioritise political feasibility over scientific recommendations.
(Stakeholder Meeting 10).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Knowledge-evidence-people.”
(Workshop 1).
Identify and address barriers to effective policy implementation
Regulatory and economic constraints slow the translation of research into policy action, affecting food business and retail sector participation.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Bureaucracy-Business/Retail/Economics tape etc causing delays from evidence to policy.”
(Workshop 1).
Boost research and innovation support for sustainable food systems
Greater investment in sustainable food technology research and industry collaboration is needed to support emissions reduction, dietary shifts, and agricultural innovation.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Scotland must enhance investment in food research and technology to support the shift toward sustainable diets. The study emphasises integrating food technology research with industry-led sustainability initiatives.
Bellamy, Furness, Mills et al., 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
There is limited emphasis on emerging technologies such as precision agriculture, alternative proteins, and sustainable farming practices, which could significantly reduce environmental impacts.
(Stakeholder Meeting 2).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Industry Research- small scale workshops and population interventions.”
(Workshop 4).
Shift policy focus from food supply to average consumption patterns
Policies based on average meat consumption may overlook disparities in consumption patterns across different population groups.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Examines variations in meat consumption patterns across different socioeconomic groups in Scotland. The study finds that lower-income groups have limited access to plant-based alternatives, which affects dietary shifts. Policies addressing sustainability should consider economic disparities in meat consumption trends.
(McBey, McCormick, & Hussain, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Current policies tend to focus on average consumption metrics, which may not adequately address disparities in meat consumption patterns.
(Stakeholder Meeting 2).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Improve data collection and metrics for agroecological practices
The lack of monitoring on agricultural practices limits the development of evidence-based policies supporting agroecological change.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Highlights gaps in monitoring agroecological practices in Scotland, particularly in assessing improving rural livelihoods through social
and economic outcomes (as well as environmental outcomes). The study calls for better data collection and policy support to enhance agroecological implementation.
(Lozada & Karley, 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Lack of data. Need to look at what is the actual impact of farming on climate in Scotland – what are the negatives we currently have and then learning from best practise to bring others on that journey. using real Scottish data to drive change. it should go wider than GHGs. it’s about biodiversity, habitat and plant protection and ecosystem, water use and flood management, soil quality, animal welfare etc.
baselining standards – over 170 farms there are some that are already at net zero, or close.”
(Workshop 3).
Address knowledge gaps in red meat production and consumption
Policy must better account for the diversity in red meat production systems and improve public understanding of meat reduction strategies.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Taking a nuanced approach to what has been called “red meat production” here: a farm with 1000 cattle fed on supplements and held indoors is not the same as a croft, a micro diary, or an integrated agroforestry system with 20 cows. Whilst some forms of red meat production will perfectly align with climate and nature restoration targets and score high on all these elements others will not.”
(Workshop 3).
Understand and overcome barriers to reducing meat consumption
Research is needed to identify the challenges consumers face when shifting away from meat consumption.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Barriers included food neophobia, identity incongruence, habitual behaviour and practical difficulties. Strategies should focus on meat reduction, not exclusion, as completely removing meat from the diet was unpopular. As barriers and drivers differed with stage, we call for specialized campaigns. Consumers not intending to reduce meat intake could potentially be persuaded by climate awareness campaigns, and by promotion of small adaptations to familiar meals. Consumers intending to reduce meat intake may be prompted to do so by health awareness campaigns, changes to the choice architecture and increased availability of meatless meals.
(Hielkema & Lund, 2021).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Research on why meat consumption changes are so hard for consumers.”
(Workshop 3).
Strengthen understanding of local food yields and market potential
Addressing the lack of data on community food production, informal markets, and small-scale retail contributions is necessary for better policy decisions.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“What do we know about yield from community production versus supermarkets?
Western Isles (Eriskay; Berneray) has 3 Co-ops and 5 independents- egg sales likely down because of local informal markets.”
(Workshop 1).
Integrate food culture and heritage into policy design and evaluation
More effective ways to measure and incorporate food culture into policy are needed, as current frameworks lack clear metrics.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Food culture not a “SMART” target.
These concepts aren’t measurable and risk being overlooked by more measurable items.”
(Workshop 1).
Embed climate and sustainability audits into food policy frameworks
A stronger link between climate impact assessments and food taxation policies could improve sustainability outcomes.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Climate audit based on production; food tax-importing food from other countries.”
(Workshop 1).
Scale up support for agricultural innovation at farm and system levels
A clearer strategy for financing and scaling precision and regenerative farming would accelerate climate-smart practices.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
No clear mechanism for scaling up climate-smart technologies. The text highlights the importance of innovation (e.g., precision farming, regenerative agriculture) but lacks detail on:
How new technologies will be funded and adopted at scale. Which technologies will be prioritized for investment. How knowledge transfer will be ensured across different farm sizes and regions. Policy Gap: The government lacks a clear investment and implementation strategy for scaling up climate-smart agriculture technologies. Policy Need: Establish a national climate-smart agriculture fund and technology adoption grants for farmers.
(Scottish Government, n.d.a).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
7. Policy resistance and political sensitivities
Develop strategies to manage resistance to livestock reduction policies
Ministers and industry stakeholders resist policies targeting livestock reduction due to economic concerns and public sensitivities. Addressing political tensions and developing strategies to gain support for dietary shifts remains a challenge.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Ministers and stakeholders resist policies due to economic concerns and public sensitivity.
(Stakeholder Meeting 4).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Red meat industry is one of the most profitable industries in Scotland-tensions, how do we sell this to Government to implement?”
(Workshop 1).
Political reluctance to introduce directive diet policy regulations
Concerns about public acceptability have made policymakers cautious about introducing more directive dietary regulations.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Political reluctance to enforce “Nanny-State” (sic) measures. Concerns over public backlash make policymakers hesitant to impose strict dietary regulations
(Stakeholder Meeting 1).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Strengthen policy framing to improve public and stakeholder acceptance
The way policies are framed affects public and political acceptance, with resistance often tied to perceived losses.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Discusses meat reduction policy framing more generally. Fewer than half this UK-representative sample supported meat reduction policies.
Framing measures as benefitting health vs. the environment did not change support.
Policies targeting meat were less supported than policies targeting unhealthy food.
Many respondents had no decided views about the acceptability of policies on meat.
(Pechey, Reynolds, Cook et al., 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Gains vs. losses framing influences policy acceptance: How policies are framed influences their acceptance, with resistance often linked to perceived losses.
(Stakeholder Meeting 1).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Ensure fairness and equity in dietary policy design
Universal approaches may not account for cultural and socioeconomic diversity. Gradual adjustments to the food environment may ease resistance.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
There are tensions surrounding blanket meat reduction policies, with a focus on targeting high consumers of meat to achieve incremental emissions reductions being seen as more effective.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Not a blanket approach-gradually edit the food environment.”
(Workshop 1).
Create integrated policies linking agriculture, public health, and emissions reduction
Farmers may view their primary role as focused on food production, creating resistance to dietary and environmental policies. Stronger integration between agriculture, health, and climate policy is needed.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Farmers often do not consider public health issues within their scope, influencing resistance to health-driven dietary policies.
(Stakeholder Meeting 9).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Linking farmers and public health bodies e.g., local authorities.”
(Workshop 4).
Address ideological resistance to reducing red and processed meat consumption
Deep-rooted cultural norms and traditions contribute to differing perspectives on dietary change, particularly in rural communities.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Cultural reluctance to consume plant-based foods and reduce meat consumption will slow progress and likely negatively feedback to changes in the food environment. There are positive findings as well, the increased declared willingness to change and the recent uptick in media coverage suggest that the transition to sustainable diets could accelerate, but whether it will happen in time will be a matter of enhanced interaction between policymakers, the media, and public.
(Cleland, McBey, Darlene et al., 2025).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Strong cultural attachments to traditional diets, particularly in rural communities, create barriers to dietary change.
(Stakeholder Meeting 9).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Overcome cultural and historical barriers to agricultural transition
Farming is deeply embedded in Scottish identity, with many farmers viewing themselves as stewards of the land. Historical events such as the Highland Clearances continue to shape land use patterns and influence perceptions of food and farming policy today
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Explores how animal agriculture (salmon farming) is deeply embedded in Scottish cultural identity, emphasising its historical, economic, and symbolic significance.
(Rubio Ramon, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Farming is deeply embedded in cultural identity, often viewed as a birthright.
(Stakeholder Meeting 11).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Resolve conflicts between climate policy and current farming priorities
Farmers primarily focus on food production and traditional practices, often leading to conflicts with environmental policies aimed at sustainability and emissions reduction.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Farmer attitudes towards sustainable farming actions in rural Wales: Key barriers included time and cost to implement sustainable farming actions, availability of long-term financial valuation for ecosystem services, occurrence of extreme weather events, and presence of tenanted land.
(Follett, Davis, Wilson et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
There is an ongoing tension between environmental policies focused on sustainability and emissions reduction, and farmers’ primary focus on food production and maintaining traditional agricultural practices.
(Stakeholder Meeting 11).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Address the practical and political challenges of fiscal measures (e.g., taxes, payments)
Discussions on taxation policies, such as a red meat tax, remain controversial due to concerns over fairness, public acceptability, and potential economic impacts on vulnerable populations.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Discussions around implementing fiscal measures, such as a red meat tax, have emerged as potential levers for influencing dietary change. While some fiscal levers, such as taxes on red meat, are being debated, their design requires careful attention to fairness, public acceptability, and economic implications.
(Stakeholder Meeting 5).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Unpopularity of taxes on any foods.”
(Workshop 1).
Embrace and integrate diverse stakeholder perspectives in policy development
Scottish Government and policymakers should engage constructively with disagreement and differing evidence bases among stakeholders.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Conveners (e.g. Scottish Government) need to get more comfortable with disagreement, different evidence bases among stakeholders.”
(Workshop 4).
8: Public involvement in sustainable food policy
Strengthen citizen engagement in food policy development
Public consultation mechanisms, including in the Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act, provide limited opportunities for meaningful citizen participation beyond advisory input, particularly among younger people. Existing public engagement structures in food and farming policy are weak, reducing community influence in decision-making.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Limited youth inclusion in policy discussions: Limited institutional mechanisms exist to incorporate youth perspectives into food and climate policy discussions, despite high climate awareness among younger populations.
(Stakeholder Meeting 4).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Enhance local empowerment and participation in food system governance
Addressing the disconnect between policy and practice by streamlining local empowerment mechanisms, improving access to timely funding, and learning from crofting practices to support sustainable food systems.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Disconnect between areas and policy – big issue. The mechanism to provide the leavers for local empowerment is tedious and complicated. Must be simplified and shortened in terms of time. Need access to funding straight away when opportunities arise. This would avoid silos and increase connectivity e.g. land reform policy.
Need community to take on land and community need funding to do so. There is something about learning from crofting practices in the context of a sustainable food system. Some challenges are related to the free market and the crofting regulation, the right to buy and the lack of regulation.”
(Workshop 4).
9. Scotland in the global policy landscape
Incorporate global best practices into Scottish food policy
Further examining successful international policies could offer valuable insights for Scotland’s approach to meat reduction and sustainable diets.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Analysis of successful policies aimed at reducing meat consumption in Denmark, Sweden, Germany, the Netherlands, and the UK. Key findings: Meat taxes and subsidy removals were effective in reducing meat consumption without major public resistance. Public acceptability increased when revenues from meat taxes were reinvested into sustainable food systems.
Combining fiscal measures with consumer awareness campaigns led to more effective dietary shifts.
(Kmetkova, Zverinova, Scasny et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Appendix H: Extended Economic analysis: Areas for further policy development and supporting evidence
Key Theme
Area For Policy Development
1: Financial Incentives and Risk Mitigation for Sustainable Food Production
Strengthen financial incentives for low-carbon food production
Policies lack regulatory and financial mechanisms to support low-carbon food production, scale up innovative technologies, and integrate climate adaptation strategies. Current financial support favours emissions-intensive farming, and financial relief programs for extreme weather risks are absent.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
No explicit agroecology support in agricultural payments
The Scottish farm payment system does not prioritise agroecological transitions.
Unlike the EU’s Farm-to-Fork Strategy, Scotland lacks clear pesticide reduction, soil health improvement, or biodiversity restoration targets linked to financial incentives.
(Lozada, & Karley, 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Not regenerative food production happening. Take Edinburgh – there is Lauriston community farm – a 100acre site. It would take 200 of these farms to produce enough food for population of Edinburgh…Identify key sites for more food production and increase awareness of the risks to our food sector. Increase resources put towards the issue.”
(Workshop 1).
Compensate farmers for delivering ecosystem services
Financial incentives for biodiversity and climate protection remain underdeveloped, limiting green investment and market development.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Examines how financial incentives for biodiversity and climate protection in Scotland remain inadequate, limiting farmer participation in sustainability initiatives. Financial incentives under the CAP have been insufficient to encourage widespread adoption of biodiversity-supporting measures.
Farmers prioritize economic viability over environmental incentives, leading to low engagement in voluntary sustainability schemes. Scotland lags behind other EU countries, such as Austria and the Netherlands, in providing effective support and financial rewards for climate-friendly farming.
(Brown, Kovacs, Zinngrebe et al, 2019).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Need to pay producers and farmers for the non-food products they produce – no financial incentive to help protect biodiversity and climate.
does seem to be demand for this, biodiversity net gain, or green investment
the financial model doesn’t work yet for
woodland carbon code is not accessible for commercial projects anymore
there was a boom for carbon measure bio net gain, but no longer, markets have not developed yet certainly in Scotland.”
(Workshop 3).
Scale up the use of alternative proteins in animal feed
Microbial proteins, insect- and hemp-based animal feeds lack commercial scaling support, restricting their ability to replace imported soy and improve sustainability.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Limited support for scaling alternative protein animal feeds. Microbial proteins and insect-based feeds remain niche due to insufficient commercial scaling to reduce reliance on imported soy and enhance sustainable feed alternatives.
(Scottish Government, 2023).
Many countries across Europe and Asia have updated their legal frameworks to capitalise on the significant benefits that industrial hemp offers. In contrast, development of the hemp sector in Scotland has been slow, largely due to restrictive regulations. Industrial hemp can sequester more carbon dioxide than many conventional crops, enhance soil biodiversity, remove toxins through phytoremediation, and act as a natural insecticide and pesticide. It is also a valuable source of protein, dietary fibre, essential micronutrients, and bioactive phytochemicals.
(Dogbe, Revoredo-Giha & Russell, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Support farmers in transitioning to agroecological and climate-resilient practices
Farmers face financial and technical challenges in transitioning to sustainable agricultural systems. High upfront costs prevent the adoption of key technologies such as biochar application and precision livestock farming tools.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Slow adoption of low-emission farming practices:
Farmers face high upfront costs for adopting new technologies, such as animal sensors and biochar application. Targeted financial incentives or support could improve uptake.
(Scottish Government, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Promote economic and agricultural equity across the food system
Addressing the regressive nature of food taxes by redirecting financial resources toward more sustainable farming practices.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Implementing both tax policies and using the resulting revenue to subsidise consumers—particularly low-income households—can create a more equitable and less regressive public policy approach. By redistributing income through targeted payments or support schemes, this strategy helps mitigate the financial burden on vulnerable groups while still incentivising healthier and more sustainable food choices.
(Nneli, Dogbe & Revoredo-Giha, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Taxes are regressive-redirect subsidies to more sustainable farming.”
(Workshop 1).
Address perceptions surrounding the economic viability of sustainable farming choices
Enduring perception that beef farming is more profitable than vegetable crop production, influencing farmer choices and limiting opportunities for community wealth-building.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“For farmers: cows are more profitable than cabbage, so beef farming might be better for (e.g.) community wealth building.”
(Workshop 4).
Reform agricultural financial support to align with sustainability goals
Current financial support continues to prioritise high-emission livestock farming, without clear incentives for climate-friendly production or crop diversification.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Scotland’s agricultural subsidies continue to favour high-emission livestock farming, with no clear mechanisms in the Good Food Nation Act to incentivise climate-friendly farming, diversify toward low-carbon crops, or enhance carbon footprint labelling for consumers.
(Brennan, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Assess and recognise the economic value of grazing land
Despite Scotland’s extensive grazing land, concerns remain about the economic efficiency of meat production relative to its high cost.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Economic value of grazing land: Despite abundant grazing land in Scotland and the UK, the relatively high cost of meat raises concerns about economic efficiency.
(Stakeholder Meeting 8).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Manage the rural economic impacts of reducing livestock numbers
Reducing livestock farming without strategic policy support could threaten the financial stability of meat producers and contribute to rural depopulation.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Impact of livestock reduction on rural communities: Livestock reduction policies may exacerbate rural depopulation due to economic reliance on agriculture.
(Stakeholder Meeting 6).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Address price dynamics in meat and dairy markets
Higher red meat prices can sometimes drive increased production, complicating efforts to lower consumption.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Price dynamics and production response: Increases in red meat prices can lead to higher production levels, complicating efforts to reduce consumption.
(Stakeholder Meeting 14).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Improve the affordability and accessibility of meat and dairy alternatives
High prices for plant-based alternatives, driven by supermarket pricing and financial support structures, limit consumer accessibility.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Price is a major factor preventing Scottish consumers from switching to plant-based meat.
Subsidising plant-based alternatives or taxing meat products were ranked as potential solutions.
(McBey, Sánchez, McCormick et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Higher markup on plant-based food in retail: Plant-based foods often carry a premium price, limiting affordability for many consumers.
(Stakeholder Meeting 2).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“We assess that there is currently a price-premium on especially convenience alternatives to meat and dairy. This has many reasons, but people are clear that it will need to be addressed.”
(Workshop 3).
2. Trade and Supply Chain Misalignment with Climate Goals
Align trade and supply chains with climate goals
Scotland’s food trade policies do not fully integrate net-zero ambitions, increasing the risk of offshoring environmental impacts. Expanding sustainable supply chains requires investment in skills, infrastructure, and collaborative mechanisms.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Export Dependencies: Highlights risks of offshoring emissions by reducing local production but offers limited strategies for linking domestic production to dietary transitions.
(Thomson, Moxey & Hall, 2021).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Food imports and emissions: Import reliance complicates carbon accounting and weakens domestic economic resilience.
(Stakeholder Meeting 2).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Offsetting/Offshoring of emissions.”
(Workshop 1).
Address procurement barriers for local and small-scale producers
Large multinational suppliers dominate public contracts, limiting opportunities for local and sustainable food producers.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Current public procurement policies favour large multinational suppliers, making it difficult for local producers to compete for contracts. This limits market access for regional food systems and reduces opportunities to support sustainable, locally sourced food.
(Scottish Government, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Strengthen livestock supply chain infrastructure
Transport, distribution, and processing capacity shortages, including a lack of small abattoirs, create challenges for small-scale farmers.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Rural and island regions face transport and distribution challenges, making it less efficient to get food to markets. Processing capacity is limited: Lack of small abattoirs and local processing facilities hinders small farmers from scaling up.
(Scottish Government, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Encourage consumer support for domestic agriculture
Strengthening links between primary producers and public-sector buyers can improve market access and resilience.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Links between primary producers and public sector…Opportunities for local producers to supply public sector.”
(Workshop 1).
Enhance school meals by funding local and sustainable procurement
Initiatives like Food for Life have the potential to improve the quality and sustainability of school food. However, uptake is often limited by financial constraints at the local authority level, where budgets are already stretched and competing priorities make it difficult to invest in more sustainable food procurement.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Using school dinners for quality
Much better now in terms of options.
E.g., food for life in East Ayrshire- but financial pressures has been hammered.
Transferring circa £10 million from agriculture budget to school food budget to support local procurement policies.”
(Workshop 1).
Balance business influence in food policy decisions
Food policy decision-making often prioritises business interests over sustainability and inclusivity. The limited integration of industry sustainability commitments weakens efforts to reduce food system emissions.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Decision-making processes privilege the business sector, sidelining civil society concerns and limiting democratic participation in food policy development
Challenges in engaging food retailers: Difficulty in engaging with retailers and industry stakeholders hinders sustainable food practices.
(Stakeholder Meeting 8).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“The role of the food industry: their involvement in research, funding of research… Industrial lobbying is strong.”
(Workshop 4).
Expand market access for agroecological and small-scale producers
Small-scale agroecological producers face challenges accessing mainstream markets dominated by large retailers.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Limited financial incentives:
Most environmental incentive schemes do not explicitly support agroecological transitions.
Many agroecological farmers self-fund their practices, creating financial vulnerability.
(Lozada & Karley, 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Linking producers and consumers: Policies and markets often fail to effectively connect producers with consumers, limiting market efficiency.
(Stakeholder Meeting 3).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Minimise emissions from imported food products
Policies targeting dietary change may drive increased food imports, undermining local sustainability. In general, meat from countries with high deforestation or intensive farming may have a higher footprint than Scottish-produced meat.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
This case study applied a carbon displacement framework to hypothetical carbon policies affecting UK beef production. It found that financial pressure to cut emissions could force some UK producers out of business, potentially leading to increased beef imports from countries with higher emissions, thereby raising global emissions. While modest emission reductions are possible through cost-effective practices, deeper cuts would likely require greater financial and technical support. The findings suggest further analysis of UK beef production is needed.
(Department for Food, Rural and Environmental Affairs (Defra), 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Consumption-focused policies risk increasing imports rather than reducing global emissions. Policies targeting consumption may inadvertently increase imports, undermining local sustainability.
(Stakeholder Meeting 2).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Balance demand-side and supply-side strategies in food policy
Over-reliance on demand-side measures without sufficient supply-side interventions limits systemic change in sustainable food systems.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Overemphasis on demand-side strategies: Insufficient focus on supply-side measures weakens the resilience of sustainable food systems.
(Stakeholder Meeting 11).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Balance domestic food standards with pressures from import competition
High food standards increase production costs, but low-cost imports undermine sustainability efforts. Trade strategy should prevent lower-welfare imports from undercutting UK farmers.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Cost of produce will increase with greater standards and requirements, and then we see imports coming in that are favoured for being cheap, not just meat but cereals too. when supply chains get too long, its harder to see where its coming from… e.g. horse meat scandal
need shorter supply chain and more locally produced food.”
(Workshop 3).
Address the impacts of resource-intensive food production
The food industry prioritises high-value convenience foods with inefficient transportation systems, reducing sustainability.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Resource-intensive convenience food production: The industry favours low-volume, high-value, resource-intensive convenience foods, and inefficient transportation, reducing sustainability.
(Stakeholder Meeting 11).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Enhance food system resilience to global and domestic shocks
Structural vulnerabilities in food imports, land control, and export distribution impact local food security and community wealth-building.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Chatham House report – Choke points identified in red/amber/green rating. Current barrier is imported food. It seems we have enough land to address our vulnerability, but the control of the land is an issue. This includes food for animals and fertilizers and exported goods not going to local areas which might not contribute to community wealth building.”
(Workshop 4).
Manage carbon leakage risks in livestock trade and production
Carbon taxes on livestock risk increasing imports and causing carbon leakage without complementary trade adjustments.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
There is a significant risk of carbon leakage resulting from import substitution, where domestic efforts to reduce emissions in meat production may inadvertently lead to increased imports from countries with more carbon-intensive farming practices. Currently, there is no clear mitigation strategy in place to address this issue, which could undermine national climate targets and shift environmental impacts abroad rather than reducing them overall.
(Scottish Parliament, n.d.b).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Promote sustainable practices in supermarket and retail food supply
Since most food decisions are made in supermarkets, responsible retail practices are crucial for shifting consumer demand toward sustainability.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Sustainability-oriented retailers can use innovative behavioural tools to promote healthier and climate-friendlier foods (such as vegetables) while meeting the “triple bottom line”. A real-life supermarket trial in Denmark tested if multi-layered nudges can increase the purchase of fruit and vegetables. The intervention led to small increases in sales. These findings showcase the possibility that supermarkets, in principle, have agency and ability to nudge consumers towards more sustainable diets.
(Bauer, Aarestrup, Hansen, et al., 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Supermarkets are where vast majority of decisions are made so we need to get that side of retail right.”
(Workshop 3).
Develop sustainable supply chain partnerships
Strengthening collaborations for key crops and improving processing infrastructure can enhance food system sustainability.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Supply chains for human consumption- SAOS-Bere Barley; processing facilities-peas and beans.”
(Workshop 1).
Align market demand with sustainable food choices
Consumer preferences, such as demand for sweeter apples, shape market dynamics and need to be considered in food system planning.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Found that of the three perceptions measured, consumers derive the most utility out of how they perceive a product’s taste, rather than how healthy or safe they believe the product to be.
(Malone & Lusk, 2017).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Demand-market wants sweeter apples.”
(Workshop 1).
3. Funding Gaps for Food Systems
Ensure stable funding for urban agriculture
Urban agriculture development is constrained by unstable, short-term funding, limiting its potential contribution to sustainable diets and climate goals.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Urban agriculture (UA) currently relies heavily on short-term or temporary funding streams, which can limit its capacity to scale and sustain operations. This lack of stable, long-term investment undermines its potential to contribute meaningfully to long-term dietary change, local food security, and climate resilience. A more consistent and strategic funding approach is needed to unlock the full benefits of UA as part of a sustainable food system.
(White & Bunn, 2017).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Secure long-term food budgets in public institutions
Dedicated, ring-fenced funding is needed for food provision in schools and hospitals to support quality and sustainability.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Promoting plant-based menus through procurement: Public procurement policies offer significant opportunities to promote plant-based menus in public institutions such as schools, hospitals, and government offices. Effectively leveraging these regulations could support sustainability goals and encourage healthier dietary habits.
(Stakeholder Meeting 1).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Budget and funding
Food budgets not ring fenced in schools/hospitals”
(Workshop 1).
Strengthen support for community-based food initiatives and the third sector
Long-term funding is needed to sustain community-led food programs, address health inequalities, and support vulnerable groups. Over-reliance on overstretched third-sector organisations risks undermining their role in strengthening local food networks.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Lack of long-term funding for community/voluntary organisations.”
(Workshop 1).
Subsidise public dining to promote health and community wellbeing
Affordable, healthy meals outside the home can encourage better eating habits, inspire home cooking, and foster social dining spaces.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Lack of nutritional and environmental standards for out-of-home food: There is a lack of comprehensive regulations governing the nutritional and environmental standards of food sold in restaurants, cafes, and takeaway services. This regulatory gap limits the effectiveness of policy interventions aimed at fostering healthier and more sustainable dietary habits.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Education – aspects of bringing nutritious food into schools as well as teaching children about healthy foods
Public diners – we subsidise everything else! So why do we not subsidise food. Work with culture around eating out of the home to provide healthy and affordable meals for everyone. May support inspiring people re cooking at home, as well as providing a social space.”
(Workshop 4).
4. Consumer-Focused Fiscal Policies and Incentives
Address VAT disparities for plant-based foods
Some plant-based meat alternatives (processed or prepared products such as hot takeaway food) are subject to VAT. Extending VAT exemptions could encourage meat reduction.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Some plant-based meat alternatives are not VAT-exempt. This disparity in fiscal treatment creates a financial barrier to choosing more sustainable and lower-emission protein sources. Extending VAT exemptions or other financial incentives to plant-based meat alternatives could encourage greater consumer uptake, support dietary shifts aligned with climate and health goals, and promote market growth in the plant-based sector.
(Kennedy, Clark, Stewart et al., 2025).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Reduce economic dependence on alcohol and processed food sectors
Scotland’s food system is heavily reliant on the economic contributions of alcoholic beverages and processed foods, raising concerns about long-term sustainability.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Food systems are linked to economic opportunities for people in Scotland – but our food industry is heavily tied to alcoholic drinks and processed foods.”
(Workshop 4).
Internalise environmental and health costs within the food system
The current food system externalises costs like healthcare burdens from poor diets and environmental degradation onto society, rather than incorporating them into economic policies.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Externalisation of costs: The current food system externalises many economic costs, such as healthcare expenses linked to poor diets and environmental degradation costs, which are not adequately accounted for in economic policies.
(Stakeholder Meeting 11).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Manage dietary shifts resulting from red meat reduction policies
Reducing red meat consumption may lead to increased demand for white meat and dairy, with potentially conflicting environmental and health outcomes. Negative perceptions of plant-based alternatives could also limit dietary shifts.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Substitution of red meat and perceptions of plant-based alternatives: Red meat reduction policies may unintentionally drive demand toward other meat products, such as white meat, due to negative perceptions of the healthiness of plant-based alternatives.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Prevent over-reliance on ultra-processed foods in sustainable diet transitions
Moving away from fresh meat could increase reliance on ultra-processed alternatives, posing health and sustainability concerns.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“There’s a risk that moving away from fresh meat means to a turn to ultra-processed food.”
(Workshop 4).
Balance growth in the plant-based sector with sustainability objectives
There is a risk that increased plant-based food demand could lead to more industrial production while factory farming persists.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Increasing demand for plant-based diets in the UK, including Scotland, may drive industrialized food production rather than promoting sustainable agriculture.
As plant-based food demand rises, major food corporations may scale up industrial production, leading to more monoculture farming and intensification.
(Rhymes, Stockdale & Napier, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Risk that promoting plant-based food leads to an increase in industrial production of plant-based foods alongside continued factory farming.”
(Workshop 4).
5. Structural and Social Barriers in Agricultural transition
Assess the viability of agroecological farming models
Limited research on the financial and social sustainability of agroecology prevents evidence-based policymaking.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
There is currently no comprehensive cost-benefit analysis comparing agroecological farming with conventional agricultural systems in the Scottish context. This lack of evidence limits policymakers’ and producers’ ability to make informed decisions about transitioning to more sustainable practices. In particular, there is a need for robust financial models that capture the long-term economic, environmental, and social resilience benefits of agroecology, including reduced input costs, improved soil health, biodiversity gains, and greater climate adaptability. Addressing this evidence gap is essential for supporting policy development and encouraging wider adoption of agroecological approaches.
(Lozada & Karley, 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Strengthen support for rural and agricultural workers
Inadequate policies limit rural workers’ access to land, resources, and affordable housing, creating barriers to sustainable food system employment.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Current policies fall short in addressing structural barriers faced by rural agricultural workers, particularly in relation to secure access to land, essential resources, and affordable housing. These challenges limit opportunities for participation in sustainable food production and contribute to rural inequality. To support a just transition in the food system, policies must more effectively promote equitable access and create enabling conditions for rural livelihoods, especially for new entrants and marginalised communities.
(Centre for Climate and Social Transformations (CAST), 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Develop economic transition strategies for the livestock sector
A clear economic transition strategy is needed to support industries affected by reduced red meat and dairy consumption. Triple Win economic models could help guide policy by capturing co-benefits across community wellbeing, public health, and cost savings.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Triple win economic models are frameworks or strategies designed to deliver simultaneous benefits (or “wins”) across three key domains—usually economic, environmental, and social outcomes. These models are particularly popular in sustainability, public policy, and development sectors.
(Ellis & Tschakert, 2019).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“There is a gap in the development of triple win economic modelling which policy and decision makers can rely on and inform how the money best should be spent. An example is a study made in England on “broken pavements”, the cost claims by people, the cost avoidance of the council not being held accountable against the claims against the total cost implication for NHS i.e. NHS had to pick up the cost because of people hurt by damaged pavement. Community growing and the cost avoidance of seeking health care services is missing.”
(Workshop 1)
Support new entrants to farming and food production
Rising land costs and financial barriers make it difficult for new farmers to secure land and adopt sustainable practices.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Limited financial incentives:
Most environmental incentive schemes do not explicitly support agroecological transitions.
Many agroecological farmers self-fund their practices, creating financial vulnerability.
Access to land tenure and financial support is a major barrier for new entrants, despite them being more likely to adopt agroecology.
Lozada & Karley, 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Land ownership and affordability issues: Competition and rising land costs are pricing out farmers, limiting opportunities for sustainable agricultural transitions.
(Stakeholder Meeting 1).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Build a resilient and skilled workforce across the food sector
To address labour shortages in the food sector, policies should improve migration pathways, expand skills development, and offer incentives to attract and retain workers.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Workforce strategies, skills development and incentives to overcome labour shortages and create attractive career opportunities.”
(Workshop 1).
Appendix I: Extended Social analysis: Areas for further policy development and supporting evidence
Key Theme
Area For Policy Development
1. Food Access and Affordability Inequalities
Ensure equitable access to sustainable and healthy diets
Lower-income, rural, and marginalised groups face financial and logistical barriers to adopting sustainable diets. Existing policies and financial support do not adequately ensure food affordability, while tax-based approaches like red meat levies lack protections for vulnerable households.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Public awareness of sustainable diets and their environmental impacts has increased over the past decade, but this growth is uneven across socioeconomic groups. Higher-deprivation (HD) groups face greater barriers, including availability and access, cost concerns and scepticism about health and environmental benefits, limiting their willingness to adopt sustainable dietary practices.
(Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2021a).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Low-income and rural communities face higher food costs, limited access to affordable healthy food, and reduced resilience to economic shocks.
(Stakeholder Meeting 4).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Food insecurity also discussed – cost of healthy food as a barrier, and food banks often do not allow a healthy diet.”
(Workshop 4, Group 2).
Enhance inclusion and participation in local food systems
Food systems should be designed to accommodate diverse needs, including time constraints, geographic location, and preferred access points.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Suggests attending to a range of consumer-related changes:
Medium-term actions: The nature of consumer demand and its capacity to adjust
to social and cultural expectations in the light of market
realities and policy priorities.
The national, devolved, regional, local dimensions of food
and its role as a determinant of identity.
The desired consumer outcomes including the nature of a
sustainable diet.
The role of regulation, ‘consumer choice editing’ and
marketing in shaping consumer choice
A description of the EU/UK’s ‘sustainable consumer diet’.
The development of communication and education
strategies to engage the public on key food issues.
(Ambler-Edwards, Bailey, Kiff et al., 2009).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Consumers may not feel fully in control of their dietary choices due to economic, social, and cultural constraints.
(Stakeholder Meeting 9).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“How do people want to interact with this system? Time poor, etc. Geography, Creating the spaces that people want to access the food they need at their location.”
(Workshop 1).
Increase the availability of affordable, healthy food options outside the home
Policies insufficiently address affordability and accessibility of healthier out-of-home food choices, disproportionately affecting lower-income consumers.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
There is a persistent gap in policy and practice regarding the affordability and accessibility of healthier food options in out-of-home (OOH) settings, such as restaurants, cafés, takeaways, and workplace canteens. While public health initiatives emphasise the importance of nutritious diets, current policies often fall short in ensuring that healthier choices are both financially viable and widely available across different socioeconomic groups.
Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
There is a lack of comprehensive regulations governing the nutritional and environmental standards of food sold in restaurants, cafes, and takeaway services. This regulatory gap limits the effectiveness of policy interventions aimed at fostering healthier and more sustainable dietary habits.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Improve access to cooking facilities, skills, and food literacy
Households with limited cooking equipment, high energy costs, or inadequate storage face difficulties in preparing sustainable meals.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
The study investigates how residents in energy-efficient, affordable housing in Scotland experience their kitchen environments. With a national push toward low-carbon housing, the paper explores whether energy-efficient designs support or constrain occupants in their daily cooking and living practices. Architectural Design, Building Services & Energy Use, fixtures and storage affected diet and had social and psychological impacts.
(Foster & Poston, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Households with limited access to proper cooking equipment, affordable energy, or sufficient food storage options face challenges in preparing healthy, sustainable meals.
(Stakeholder Meeting 8).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Appeal:
Social and cultural barriers/appeal of healthy food
Including skills and knowledge and time poor
Less links with food production and consumption
Place of food in society (value not just cost).”
(Workshop 1).
Address the psychological, cultural, and economic barriers influencing food choices
Financial stress, mental health challenges, and economic insecurity impact the ability to make sustainable food choices, with food often serving as a coping mechanism.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
The study identified links between kitchen environments and unintended consequences of their design on occupants. These included architectural issues such as draughts, limited natural light, noisy or ineffective ventilation systems, non-opening kitchen windows, and difficulties in placing appliances. Not all findings were exclusive to low-energy homes, highlighting the need for targeted research to explore these issues further. A deeper understanding is required to assess whether tenants’ adaptive behaviours may influence their diet and affect their respiratory, physical, and mental health.
(Foster & Poston, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Mental health, stress, and economic precarity influence people’s ability to make sustainable food choices, with food often used as a coping mechanism in challenging circumstances.
(Stakeholder Meeting 1).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
2. Availability of Healthier and Sustainable Food Options
Expand access to alternative proteins in mainstream food environments
The availability of meat-free options remains low in common food products, with only 12% of ready-to-eat sandwiches in the UK being meat-free.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
The food service sector is leading change by rapidly expanding meat-free sandwich options—34% of its range is now meat-free, with half of those being plant-based. In contrast, major food retailers are falling behind, with some even reducing their meat-free offerings since 2019. Notably, alternative proteins as fillings have risen by 620% since 2019, reflecting increased investment in this area. Among the big supermarkets, Sainsbury’s has improved its plant-based range, while Tesco, Morrisons, and Asda have scaled back. Vegetarian sandwiches have seen a 22% drop across retailer ranges. Overall, meat and cheese still dominate, and most high salt or fat sandwiches contain meat, limiting healthy and sustainable choices. Despite growth, plant-based sandwiches remain the most expensive, making them less accessible—especially during a cost-of-living crisis.
(Eating Better, 2022).
The availability of meat-free alternatives, especially for popular items like sandwiches, remains low, with only 12% of ready-to-eat sandwiches in the UK being meat-free.
(Stewart, Runions, McNeill, et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Lead by example: public sector organisations and institutions to move to offering balanced, plant-based diets. this would make it more of a norm.”
(Workshop 4).
Address urban food swamps and improve access to healthy food
Many urban areas suffer from an overconcentration of fast food and ultra-processed options, requiring targeted policy interventions.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Geographical and socioeconomic inequalities limit access to healthy and sustainable food, leading to “food deserts.”
(Mitev, Portes, Osman et al., 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Urban areas face “food swamps,” characterised by the prevalence of fast food and ultra-processed foods, which require targeted interventions.
(Stakeholder Meeting 1).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Planning to support healthier environments
Support local food and production initiatives e.g., to support those in urban areas and food deserts
Opportunities- GFN and implementing local plans including procurement.”
(Workshop 1).
Improve consumer information and transparency through food labelling
Consumers lack clear sustainability information on takeaway and restaurant food, limiting informed choices. Honest food labelling should ensure transparency on welfare standards, environmental impact, and product origins.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Consumers often feel uninformed about the sustainability of food choices when dining out or ordering takeaways, limiting their ability to make environmentally conscious decisions.
(Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2021a).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Awareness campaigns should address how consumer choices are manipulated by food marketing strategies.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Reduce the consumption of ultra-processed foods
Despite high levels of ultra-processed food consumption in the UK, policies do not promote shifts toward minimally processed, locally sourced foods.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
The report highlights that the UK has high levels of ultra-processed food consumption. There is an opportunity for policies that encourage dietary shifts towards minimally processed locally sourced foods through public awareness campaigns and incentives.
Hasnain et al (2020).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Ultra-processed foods, such as those offered by large fast-food chains (e.g., Domino’s Pizza), are often inconsistent with the principles of a sustainable food culture due to their high environmental footprint.
(Stakeholder Meeting 11).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Overcome negative perceptions of plant-based meat alternatives
Concerns over food standards post-Brexit and perceptions of plant-based meat alternatives (PBMAs) as ultra-processed discourage consumer adoption.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Red meat reduction policies may unintentionally drive demand toward other meat products, such as white meat, due to negative perceptions of the healthiness of plant-based alternatives.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Public perception will be challenging, fear of Frankenfood.”
(Workshop 1).
Integrate sustainable food practices into social and public environments
While schools promote healthy meals, there is little policy support for sustainable food options in fast food outlets and other social settings.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Support for social contexts: Encourage sustainable food options in fast food outlets and social settings, addressing the cultural importance of such spaces for young people.
(McBey, Rothenberg, Cleland et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
There is a lack of comprehensive regulations governing the nutritional and environmental standards of food sold in restaurants, cafes, and takeaway services. This regulatory gap limits the effectiveness of policy interventions aimed at fostering healthier and more sustainable dietary habits.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Local planning systems – don’t currently have levers to determine what food outlets are available in a local area.”
(Workshop 4).
Address sensory and aesthetic barriers to alternative protein adoption
The taste, texture, and unfamiliarity of plant-based foods, along with the “disgust factor” of lab-grown meat and edible insects, limit their acceptance.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
The appeal of plant-based diets is often hindered by unfamiliar flavours, textures, and food neophobia, making them less enticing for some consumers. Additionally, perceived sensory drawbacks and the “disgust factor” present major obstacles to the acceptance of novel protein sources such as edible insects and lab-grown meat, limiting their mainstream adoption.
(Food Standards Agency (FSA), 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Red meat reduction policies may unintentionally drive demand toward other meat products, such as white meat, due to negative perceptions of the healthiness of plant-based alternatives.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
3. Cultural, Health, and Equity Considerations
Ensure cultural equity in dietary policy
Policies promoting meat reduction must consider cultural dietary practices, such as Halal diets, to ensure equitable food access.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
The intersection of cultural dietary practices (e.g., Halal diets in Glasgow) with meat reduction policies raises equity considerations.
(Stakeholder Meeting 4).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Risk of culturally appropriate food.”
(Workshop 1).
Assess health impacts of meat reduction and provide targeted guidance
The Scottish Dietary Goals include a general recommendation to limit red and processed meat intake to 70g per day, but they do not offer specific or targeted guidance for individuals who consume high levels of meat.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Scottish Dietary Goals do not include specific guidelines to support high consumers of red and processed meat in transitioning to healthier, lower-emission diets, limiting the effectiveness of dietary and sustainability interventions. There is a need for guidelines that help high consumers of red and processed meat transition toward healthier, lower-emission diets, which are currently missing from Scottish Dietary Goals.
(Comrie et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Poor health outcomes and dietary patterns in Scotland may worsen if red meat reduction strategies do not account for suitable nutritional replacements.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Price, affordability, and accessibility of food that is recommended in the dietary goals. People rely on ultraprocessed food to plug the gap in their diets due to affordability of healthier or more sustainable items such as locally grown fruit, veg, or meat.
From an education perspective, people know what they should be doing, but it is not possible to do this for many people – need to stop focusing on information, and instead focus on improving provision. We are worsening inequalities by asking people to buy more fruit and vegetables but not making this available equally to them.”
(Workshop 4).
Expand the focus of dietary policy beyond individual health
Policy approaches should move beyond solely focusing on meat reduction messaging and instead integrate messaging that promotes increased consumption of fibre, fruit, and vegetables. Given the limited success of standalone meat reduction campaigns, a more holistic and positive framing may be more effective.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Focus seems to be on meat reduction when it could be on fibre/ F+V increase.”
(Workshop 3).
Overcome misperceptions and structural barriers to healthier eating
Many Scots mistakenly believe they meet dietary guidelines, while strong taste preferences create resistance to reformulated foods. Early education and culturally sensitive messaging are needed.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Many Scottish adults believe their diet meets guidelines, but in reality, most do not.
70% of people consuming high-salt foods (e.g., ready meals, processed meats) believe they are eating within or below the recommended limits.
66% of people consuming confectionery and biscuits frequently think they are within sugar guidelines.
Awareness of unhealthy consumption remains a key issue, suggesting that consumer education and product reformulation could play a crucial role in closing this gap.
(Food and Drink Federation Scotland (FDF), 2020).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Address misconceptions around healthy diets – raise awareness that current dietary patterns (on average, across the country) are unhealthy, and that a meat reduction would in fact be healthy for many people. This should also present plant-based foods as a sustainable option, not just a trend / fad.
This could start with early years and be incorporated into the curriculum. It should take account of varied cultures and traditions, and acknowledge how massively the Scottish population has changed.”
(Workshop 4).
Build public trust in agriculture and dietary recommendations
Greater transparency and engagement are needed to rebuild consumer trust in agricultural institutions. Conflicting media narratives have fuelled public distrust in dietary recommendations.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Significant issue in policies aimed at rebuilding trust in agricultural institutions through transparency and community engagement, particularly in the context of transitioning from meat and dairy to plant-based agriculture. Meat as the Default: Many Scots see meat as an essential part of a meal, making plant-based alternatives feel unnatural.
Scepticism About Health Claims: People distrust health recommendations due to conflicting messages in the media.
Limited Awareness of Environmental Impact: Most consumers do not link meat consumption to climate change.
Price and Convenience: Many participants perceived plant-based options as expensive, inconvenient, or unfamiliar.
(McBey, Watts & Johnstone, 2019).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Media narratives can contribute to the negative depictions of farmers, influencing public perceptions and stakeholder relationships.
(Stakeholder Meeting 1).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Public perception will be challenging, fear of Frankenfood.”
(Workshop 1).
Address the social stigma associated with plant-based diets
The perception of plant-based diets as elitist or judgmental discourages dietary shifts, requiring reframing to improve acceptance.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Found that some participants expressed frustration with what they viewed as urban-centric or moralising narratives around veganism, which they felt overlooked the realities of Scottish rural and farming communities. For example, one participant criticised “vegan warriors” who aggressively promote veganism without understanding rural food systems, labelling such activism as unhelpful and antagonistic.
(Brett, 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Social stigma affects dietary shifts, with plant-based diets sometimes perceived as elitist or judgmental.
(Stakeholder Meeting 11).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“The terms “plant-based” and “vegan” as negative connotations-threats to identity of farmers.”
(Workshop 1).
Shape media narratives around farmers and sustainable diets
Media portrayals can contribute to negative depictions of farmers, influencing public perceptions and policy debates.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Discusses how Scottish farmers are judged by urban-centric standards, where cultural capital is eroded by media-fuelled stereotypes (e.g., greedy landowners, climate change deniers). Explores how these portrayals undermine rural social cohesion and farmer legitimacy.
(Sutherland & Burton, 2011).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Media narratives can contribute to the villainisation of farmers, influencing public perceptions and stakeholder relationships.
(Stakeholder Meeting 6).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Clarify the definition of “plant-based” in policy and markets
The term “plant-based” carries different meanings for different stakeholders, creating confusion in communication and labelling.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Found that meat substitutes were interpreted differently in terms of nutrition, cost, convenience, etc.
(McBey, Watts & Johnstone, 2019).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Plant-based-what does it mean? Something different to everyone.”
(Workshop 1).
Improve knowledge and support for regenerative agricultural practices
Raising awareness and providing policy support for regenerative farming practices can improve adoption and sustainability outcomes.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Leadership, coherence and commitment to align policy implementation and delivery with the Scottish Government’s vision, targets, and ambitions for agriculture, nature recovery, net zero vision and a Just Transition, and to avoid a reinvention – or worse, a watering down, of the status quo (i.e., the CAP), and outline 17 steps towards regenerative agriculture
(Brodie, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Insufficient subsidies and grants to support diversification into sustainable agriculture.
(Stakeholder Meeting 6).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Few examples available of successful regenerative practices.”
(Workshop 4).
Strengthen dialogue and cooperation among producers
Improving communication and collaboration among agricultural producers can support coordinated and sustainable food production.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Building trust and engagement with the farming, crofting, and land management sector — including its representative bodies and media — is essential for increasing the uptake of nature-based solutions (NbS).
Recommendations for the Scottish Government:
Clearly communicate what is expected from the sector under the Agricultural Reform Programme (ARP), and by when. Current uncertainty is contributing to inertia and resistance to change.
Frame communications around the business benefits of adopting NbS — such as improving resilience to economic and climate-related shocks, supporting food production, and boosting profitability. Messaging should directly counter sector narratives that portray NbS as peripheral or burdensome. Share compelling, real-world examples of farmers and land managers who have successfully embedded NbS into their core operations, and promote these stories through sector media outlets like The Scottish Farmer and Landward.
Ensure that individuals with direct experience in farming, crofting, and land management are actively involved in the design and testing of ARP policy. Their input is vital to ensure credibility, practicality, and sector buy-in.
(Brodie, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Scotland’s agricultural vision emphasizes sustainable and regenerative farming practices, aiming to improve land management, enhance biodiversity, and promote long-term environmental viability.
(Stakeholder Meeting 14).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Dialogue between producers-agriculture cooperation.”
(Workshop 3).
Restore cultural connections to food and farming traditions
Addressing the legacy of industrial food production by fostering appreciation for food origins, sustainability, and health impacts.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Explores the strong consumer attachment to locally produced food in Scotland, highlighting how this loyalty is often associated with perceptions of sustainability, trust, and quality. It notes that local origin is frequently seen as a proxy for environmentally responsible and healthier food choices, even when this may not always reflect the full environmental impact.
Recommends enhancing consumer education to improve understanding of food origin, sustainability credentials, and health claims. This includes raising awareness about how production methods, supply chains, and labelling affect environmental and health outcomes—helping consumers make more informed, evidence-based choices.
(Leat, Revoredo-Giha & Lamprinopoulou, 2011).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Consumers often lack awareness of food provenance, challenging narratives around food sovereignty.
(Stakeholder Meeting 11).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Improve relationship with food. Industrial farming/food production to overcome hunger in late 19th/early 20th centuries has altered how we understand and interact with food. Need to improve relationship with food, bringing back cultural elements and also an appreciation of where food comes from, how it is grown/processed, and how it affects our planet and our health.”
(Workshop 4).
Promote sustainable meat reduction in culturally significant meals
Policies overlook opportunities to encourage lower meat intake in culturally significant meals, while social traditions make plant-based alternatives feel unfamiliar or unnatural.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
This study conducted focus groups across Scotland to assess attitudes toward reducing meat in familiar dishes.
Explored acceptance of plant-based alternatives to staple meat-based meals.
Participants expressed mixed reactions, with older and rural Scots more resistant to replacing meat in “staple” meals.
(McBey, Watts & Johnstone, 2019).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Strong cultural attachments to traditional diets, particularly in rural communities, create barriers to dietary change.
(Stakeholder Meeting 3).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Traditions, habits, and culture: Cultural traditions around ways of living – needing food to fuel a physical working day. A meat industry has grown around that – the fish industry hasn’t grown in the same way / as strong. These traditions, which have started in childhood, when people see food being produced, carry those habits into school and beyond.”
(Workshop 4).
Enhance cultural sensitivity in policy design and public messaging
Campaigns should consider cultural, regional, and social differences to avoid alienating certain groups.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Existing studies on barriers to, and enablers for, reducing meat consumption largely focus on the general population or students. Found that social norms, fear of stigmatisation and availability and price of meat and meat alternatives appear to be key factors. These differ significantly between subgroups within the population, influenced by factors such as age, gender, culture and socio-economic status.
(Spiro, Hill & Stanner, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
The intersection of cultural dietary practices (e.g., Halal diets in Glasgow) with meat reduction policies raises equity considerations.
(Stakeholder Meeting 4).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Support farmer-to-farmer knowledge exchange and peer learning
Expanding opportunities for sustainability-focused peer learning and knowledge sharing among farmers.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Transformation in agricultural land management is critical to achieving Scottish Government’s aims of mitigating climate change, addressing the biodiversity crisis, and achieving a just transition for land and agriculture. Providing advice and collaborative learning opportunities through the Farm Advisory Service (FAS) is the key mechanism to deliver behaviour change in the agricultural sector. The Scottish Government is seeking to better integrate the FAS into an agricultural knowledge and innovation system (AKIS) for Scotland. AKIS is a system of innovation which links organisations, institutions, incentives and funding. This research comprises an evidence review and options appraisal for an agricultural knowledge and innovation system (AKIS) for Scotland.
(Sutherland, Banks, Boyce et al., 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Address generational tensions in dietary transitions
In Scotland, younger generations tend to be more climate-conscious in their attitudes toward diet, with greater openness to reducing meat consumption and considering environmental impacts. However, actual behaviour may not always align with these intentions. Resistance from older family and community norms can also create barriers to change.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
A 2024 survey by Consumer Scotland found that 85% of individuals aged 16-24 expressed concern about climate change, compared to 76% of the general population. This heightened awareness among younger Scots is influencing their dietary choices. For instance, a 2023 report by Food Standards Scotland revealed that 45% of 16-24-year-olds reported reducing their meat or fish consumption, a higher proportion than in older age groups. Additionally, the same report noted that 30% of individuals over 65 years would not consider eating less meat or fish, indicating a generational difference in attitudes towards meat consumption.
(Cotton, Gosschalk, Gray et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Younger generations tend to be more environmentally conscious in their dietary choices, often favouring sustainable and plant-based options. However, their efforts to adopt climate-friendly eating habits frequently encounter resistance rooted in longstanding traditions, cultural expectations, and dietary norms upheld by older family members and the broader community. These intergenerational tensions can pose significant barriers to meaningful change.
(Stakeholder Meeting 4).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Carbon labelling on foods – WHO suggests young people more likely to change their diet because of climate concerns than health concerns – I think this links with young people’s climate anxiety etc.”
(Workshop 4).
Improve access to mental health support for farmers
Financial stress, environmental uncertainties, and policy changes contribute to high mental health burdens among farmers, requiring targeted interventions.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Poor mental health is an increasing concern within the farming sector. This article examines the adaptability of “landscapes of support” — a term used to describe the range of mental health support available to farmers, including services provided by government bodies, non-profits, and community organisations. Focusing on the UK, the study draws on a literature review, interviews with 22 support providers, surveys of 93 support actors and 207 farmers, and a concluding workshop. The findings reveal that while many organisations adapted during the COVID-19 pandemic by using digital tools and expanding media outreach, they also faced significant barriers, including funding shortfalls, limited training, staff burnout, and poor rural connectivity. The article identifies opportunities to strengthen these support systems to ensure they are more resilient in the face of future crises.
(Shortland, Hall, Hurley et al., 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
4. Digital and Seasonal Food
Address digital inequalities in food access
Rural and lower-income consumers face barriers to accessing food delivery technologies, creating disparities in digital food system participation.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Policy interventions must account for unequal access to digital tools and platforms, particularly among rural populations and lower-income households. These groups may face barriers such as limited broadband connectivity, lack of digital literacy, or affordability issues, which restrict their ability to engage with online food systems, including grocery delivery, meal planning apps, or sustainability-focused platforms. Addressing these disparities is essential to ensure equitable participation in emerging food technologies and digital food environments.
(Scottish Government, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Digital tools (e.g., benefit calculators) depend on reliable internet access and digital literacy, potentially excluding vulnerable populations with poor dietary outcomes.
(Stakeholder Meeting 12).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Ensure equity in seasonal diet transitions
A shift toward seasonal diets should not exacerbate existing social and economic disparities in food access.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Local produce often needs long-term storage (e.g. apples, onions, potatoes, cabbage) to remain available year-round.
Storage leads to nutrient degradation, especially for vitamin C and antioxidants.
Frozen local foods preserve better but require energy-intensive processing (e.g., blanching), which can also reduce nutrients like B vitamins.
No studies yet published have considered the overall health benefits of eating a wholly local diet compared to a similar diet produced non-locally.
(Edwards-Jones, 2010).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Shift towards seasonality, but this could amplify existing inequalities.”
(Workshop 1).
5: Consumer Education and Behavioural Change
Enhance consumer education on sustainable diets
Without targeted behavioural support, most people in Scotland struggle to align their diets with the Eatwell Guide, limiting progress toward CCC targets.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
The research finds that most people in Scotland do not follow the Eatwell Guide, making meat and dairy an important source of nutrients.
This suggests that simply recommending dietary shifts without supporting consumer behavior change will be ineffective.
Policy Gap: Absence of strong public awareness campaigns to help consumers transition to healthier, more sustainable diets, such as:
Educational initiatives on how to replace meat and dairy with nutrient-rich plant-based foods.
Supermarket incentives or labeling schemes to highlight healthier, climate-friendly food choices.
(Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Meat consumption trends in Scotland suggest an increase, highlighting the challenge of shifting dietary habits toward sustainability.
(Stakeholder Meeting 6).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Dietary guidance- Eatwell Plate- if we followed it emissions would be reduced e.g., high volume of red meat eaters
Which metrics are we using e.g., chicken (low carbon?)
People don’t pay attention to dietary guidance.”
(Workshop 1).
Clarify nutritional guidance for dietary transitions
Policies fail to provide comprehensive public education on suitable dietary substitutions and the potential risks of reducing meat and dairy consumption.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Micronutrient Risks: The report highlights that reducing meat and dairy consumption can lead to decreased intakes of certain key nutrients (e.g., calcium, iron, vitamin B12), especially without careful substitutions. Groups with existing low nutrient intakes are at heightened risk under scenarios of reduced meat and dairy intake. Policies to enhance public understanding of appropriate dietary substitutions and potential nutrient risks associated with reduced meat and dairy are limited, suggesting an opportunity for educational initiatives.
(Comrie et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
The recommended 70g per day of red meat is often seen as a dietary requirement rather than a maximum limit, affecting efforts to normalise lower meat consumption.
(Stakeholder Meeting 2).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Strengthen consumer connections to sustainable and local food systems
A disconnect between modern food habits and local food traditions reduces demand for low-carbon, locally produced foods.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Better and bolder communication is needed to overcome a disconnect between what people buy and how they consume food and the production processes that have negative environmental impacts. Issues around food production and land use, and the links to food consumption need to be addressed.
(Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST), 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
disconnection between people, nature, and food systems weakens public engagement with sustainable diets.
(Stakeholder Meeting 11).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Local and community action around education and reconnecting to the land. Promoting interconnectedness between producers and consumers.
This will look different depending on the setting – urban and rural environments will look different in the nature available to them and how they connect with nature.
Requires input from local authorities, education institutions, local business/producers/suppliers to work together.”
(Workshop 4).
Define and communicate what constitutes a ‘sustainable diet’
The term “sustainable diet” is interpreted in varying ways, from affordability to environmental impact, complicating policy communication and engagement.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Public understanding of what constitutes a “sustainable diet” is often diverse and inconsistent. For some, the concept is primarily linked to environmental impact, such as reducing carbon emissions or minimizing food waste. For others, it may be more closely associated with affordability, food security, or simply ensuring access to enough food to meet basic nutritional needs. This variation in interpretation highlights the need for clearer public communication and education around the multiple dimensions of sustainable diets—including environmental, economic, cultural, and health-related factors—to build a shared understanding and support informed decision-making.
(Cleland, McBey, Darlene et al., 2025).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Improve dietary messaging for young people
Adolescents are aware of environmental issues but lack understanding of the impact of meat consumption. Stronger educational initiatives and trusted voices are needed to clarify dietary choices.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Adolescents were generally knowledgeable about the basic principles of sustainable diets but lacked familiarity with the term itself.
Environmental impacts of food, such as packaging and transportation (food miles), were more commonly understood than the broader sustainability of diets, such as reducing meat consumption.
Many young people prioritized other environmental actions, such as reducing plastic waste and air travel, over dietary changes.
(McBey, Rothenberg, Cleland et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Limited institutional mechanisms exist to incorporate youth perspectives into food and climate policy discussions, despite high climate awareness among younger populations.
(Stakeholder Meeting 4).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Messaging – who are the trusted messages? Social media – young people and protein, influencers – do we need to recruit these people?”
(Workshop 3).
Raise public awareness of the links between diet and climate change
Many consumers do not associate meat consumption with climate change, reducing engagement with sustainable dietary changes. Clear communication is needed about the pathway to net zero and the role of diets.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Research found that many consumers lack awareness of the connection between meat consumption and climate change. Meat is often viewed primarily through the lens of taste, tradition, or nutrition, with little consideration given to its environmental footprint. As a result, the role of meat production in contributing to greenhouse gas emissions, land use, and biodiversity loss is not widely understood. This highlights the need for targeted public education campaigns to bridge the knowledge gap and promote more climate-conscious dietary choices.
(McBey, Watts & Johnstone, 2019).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“We advocate strongly for the government to be very clear what the most impactful household choices are that people can take to reduce emissions and being clear that an average reduction of meat and dairy consumption is part of it.”
(Workshop 3).
Address misconceptions about alternative proteins
Widespread misconceptions about lab-grown meat and edible insects hinder their public acceptance as sustainable protein options.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Consumer Confidence in Safety and Regulation A significant number of consumers express hesitation toward novel food products—particularly lab-grown meat and edible insects—due to concerns about their safety and how they are regulated. Recommended policy response: Strengthen regulatory frameworks, enhance transparency in production processes, and improve public communication to build trust and reassure consumers about the safety of these emerging food technologies.
Cultural Acceptance and Public Perception Deep-seated cultural attitudes and the “disgust factor” continue to pose major barriers to the acceptance of edible insects and lab-grown meat. Addressing these perceptions through culturally sensitive education and engagement is key to improving public receptivity.
(Food Standards Agency Scotland (FSAS), 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Red meat reduction policies may unintentionally drive demand toward other meat products, such as white meat, due to negative perceptions of the healthiness of plant-based alternatives.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Provide practical support for individuals undergoing dietary change
While policies encourage sustainable diets, they do not provide practical tools like meal plans, recipes, or visual guides to aid consumer transitions.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Recommends creating accessible tools—such as recipes, meal plans, visual guides, and infographics—to help translate dietary guidelines into practical, everyday actions. These resources can support individuals in making informed, sustainable food choices by demonstrating how to implement the guidelines in realistic and appealing ways.
(Culliford, Bradbury & Medici, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Use health-focused messaging to promote sustainable dietary change
Policies focus on environmental messaging, but emphasising health benefits could be a more effective motivator for dietary shifts.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Integrate sustainability into education and school food programmes:
Revise school curricula to incorporate up-to-date evidence on sustainable diets, emphasising the connections between food choices, climate action, and health outcomes. Complement this by implementing sustainable and nutritious school meal programs that model environmentally responsible eating habits, helping to normalize healthy, climate-friendly diets from an early age.
(McBey, Rothenberg, Cleland et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Co-benefits of policy alignment: Opportunities exist to align health and sustainability goals, particularly through meat reduction strategies
(Stakeholder Meeting 9).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“To ensure that an average reduction in meat and dairy consumption is compatible with healthy diets and ideally ensure positive impacts on health and nutrition.“
(Stakeholder Workshop 4).
Tackle misinformation about diet and climate impacts
Many people doubt that reducing meat consumption is an effective climate action, believing other behaviours (e.g., reducing plastic use) are more impactful. Improved communication and avoiding oversimplification are needed.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Increased awareness: Over the last decade, public awareness of sustainable diets and their environmental impacts has grown. However, this increase is uneven across different socioeconomic groups.
Persistent barriers: Despite increased awareness, barriers to reducing meat consumption—such as cultural norms, cost, and scepticism about meat alternatives—persist.
Dietary change resistance: Many still perceive actions like reducing meat consumption as less impactful compared to other actions (e.g., reducing plastic use).
(Cleland, McBey, Darlene et al., 2025).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Misinformation in terms of the public health impacts of changing diets. Communication needs to be clearer. Nuance around processing being seen as unhealthy and organic as healthy.”
(Workshop 3).
Reframe public understanding of protein needs
Public understanding of protein needs is often skewed, reinforcing resistance to reducing meat consumption.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Across all stages of the family lifecycle, continued meat consumption was frequently justified by the belief that individuals require nutrients found in meat, such as iron and protein. These nutritional reflections were typically not grounded in scientific evidence but were instead based on ingrained beliefs shaped by social upbringing, rather than informed by alternative or external sources of information.
(Kemper, 2020).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Overemphasis on protein requirements contributes to resistance against reducing meat consumption.
(Stakeholder Meeting 2).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Strengthen consumer awareness of food provenance
Many consumers are unaware of where their food comes from, weakening narratives around food sovereignty and local sourcing.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Consumers often lack awareness of food provenance, challenging narratives around food sovereignty.
(Stakeholder Meeting 11).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Empower consumers to make sustainable food choices
Providing consumers with the right information and tools can support the adoption of more sustainable eating habits.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Encouraging consumers to make informed dietary choices can enhance their ability to adopt sustainable eating habits.
(Stakeholder Meeting 1).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Strengthen proactive public engagement in dietary change efforts
Providing early, transparent information to shape public discourse and build informed support for food system changes.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Reviews research on how providing information about the impact of meat consumption and the benefits of meat substitutes positively affects respondents in China and the US. This information increases their intentions to support meat reduction policies, including more costly measures like a meat tax.
(Bryant, Couture, Ross, et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Inoculation-plant information ahead of public debate.”
(Workshop 1).
Strengthen public health and policy support for sustainable dietary shifts
Public health campaigns and food policies lack coordinated efforts to actively promote widespread transitions to sustainable diets.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Policy Coordination:
Highlights regional land use planning but provides limited discussion on integrating dietary policy into broader climate and health strategies.
(Reay, Warnatzsch, Craig, et al., 2020).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Misalignment between climate, health, and food policies. Current policy frameworks lack coherence, creating conflicting objectives.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Balance individual responsibility with systemic food system change
Policies often overemphasise personal responsibility for diet change, while systemic food environment shifts are more effective and less stigmatising.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Challenges the overemphasis on individual behaviour change as the primary solution to sustainability and public health issues. Instead, it advocates for a shift toward structural and policy-driven approaches that facilitate collective action and address the root causes embedded in social, economic, and environmental systems. By focusing on systemic transformation, such as changes in food infrastructure, regulation, and institutional practices, this approach underscores the need for environments that enable and sustain more equitable and widespread change beyond individual responsibility.
(Meyerricks & White, 2021).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Policies often overemphasize individual responsibility for dietary choices, while structural food environment changes are more effective and less stigmatizing.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Current resilience strategies rely on individuals to be able to prepare themselves, rather than creating a robust food system within Scotland.”
(Workshop 1).
Encourage social norm-based approaches to dietary change
Policies do not leverage peer influence to normalise reduced meat consumption and encourage widespread dietary shifts.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Reviews interventions aimed at reducing meat consumption, categorising them into personal, socio-cultural, and external factors. Personal interventions include educational campaigns, emotionally framed messages, and skill-building (e.g., vegetarian cooking courses). Socio-cultural factors involve changing social norms and addressing cultural resistance to plant-based diets. Opportunities for promoting social norms around sustainable diets through public campaigns and community programmes.
(Kwasny, Dobernig & Riefler, 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Gender norms influence dietary choices, with meat consumption often associated with masculinity, creating barriers to plant-based diets.
(Stakeholder Meeting 1).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Need to make climate-friendly diets the norm?
Need long term changes.”
(Workshop 1).
Improve understanding of the long-term impacts of dietary shifts
Most studies focus on short-term dietary changes without exploring the effectiveness of multi-pronged interventions over time.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Explores the nutritional and behavioural implications of substituting plant-based proteins for animal proteins in Scotland, using household purchase data.
Identifies price sensitivity as a driver of dietary change but does not address long-term behavioural adoption or resistance.
(Dogbe, Wang & Revoredo-Giha, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Address the prioritisation of cost and convenience over sustainability in food choices
Sustainability concerns are often secondary to cost and convenience when consumers make food choices.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Examined the effects of decreasing meat and dairy intake on nutrient consumption and disease risk among Scottish adults. Although many individuals express genuine concern for sustainability and environmental impact, these values are often compromised by practical considerations, particularly cost and convenience. In everyday decision-making, affordability and ease of access tend to take precedence, revealing a gap between environmental awareness and actionable behaviour. This highlights the need for policies and systems that make sustainable choices more accessible, affordable, and integrated into daily life.
(Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Inability to pay for things- poverty in working population
Hard to get to nutrition when you have long term challenge
Need for equipment for prep; time-knowledge-cost
No freedom of choice in these circumstances
Good food is very inaccessible to those with nothing (not home and skills).”
(Workshop 1).
Normalise reduced meat consumption in everyday diets
The recommended limit of 70g per day for red and processed meat in Scotland is often misinterpreted as a dietary requirement rather than a maximum, which can undermine efforts to normalise lower meat consumption.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
It is important to emphasise that the UK recommendation of a maximum of 70g/day on average is a recommendation for individuals, not a population average, and a wide range of intakes for red and processed meat has been reported, for example, a range of 0–208g/day in men aged 19–64 years.
(Spiro, Hill & Stanner, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
The recommended 70g per day of red meat is often seen as a dietary requirement rather than a maximum limit, affecting efforts to normalise lower meat consumption.
(Stakeholder Meeting 4).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“We also find that people are often not very clear about health benefits of a reduction especially in red meat consumption and the role of protein etc…. This is further confused by the NHS recommendation of 70g red meat, which can be misunderstood as a required minimum, rather than a maximum.”
(Workshop 3).
Assess the effectiveness of dietary behaviour change campaigns
Large-scale dietary campaigns often fail to drive change, with community-based, trusted sources being more impactful.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Examined how often people seek, trust, and rely on 22 different sources of diet and nutrition information when making dietary changes. While sources like health websites, internet searches, and diet books were most frequently consulted, participants reported the highest trust in nutrition scientists, professionals, and scientific journals. This highlights a disconnect between popularity and trustworthiness. Trust, more than frequency of use, was a stronger predictor of influence on dietary change. Sources deemed less trustworthy were less likely to be relied upon, and seeking information alone didn’t always lead to effective dietary shifts. These patterns varied across sources.
(Ruani, Reiss & Kalea, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Blanket dietary change campaigns are often ineffective and challenging to evaluate. For greater impact, information should come from trusted, community-based sources.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Evaluate the relative impacts of different behavioural interventions on food choices
Strategies like calorie labelling have shown limited effectiveness in driving significant dietary change.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
There are currently no plans to introduce a mandatory eco-labelling scheme, nor is the government set to endorse any existing or new framework. This decision reflects the limited evidence to date that eco-labels significantly influence consumer or business behaviour at the point of sale (Defra, 2024). Nonetheless, similar to the role nutrition labelling has played, eco-labelling could potentially encourage some level of product reformulation by manufacturers.
(Spiro, Hill, & Stanner, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Behavioural interventions like calorie labelling have limited impact on dietary habits.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Shape food environments to promote healthier and more sustainable choices
Addressing the knowledge-action gap through nudging strategies and food system interventions.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Behavioural nudges, such as making vegetarian options the default choice on menus, have been shown to significantly reduce meat consumption, with studies reporting reductions ranging from 20% to as high as 85%. These strategies work by subtly reshaping consumer choice environments, making plant-based selections more accessible and socially normative without restricting individual freedom.
Promote practical, habitual dietary shifts that are sustainable and health-supportive over the long term.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Encouraging consumers to make informed dietary choices can enhance their ability to adopt sustainable eating habits.
(Stakeholder Meeting 1).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Healthy “enough” (vis-à-vis everyday diets).”
“Habits of eating.”
(Workshop 1).
Rethink policy approaches to dietary change
Shifting from fear-based, top-down behaviour change strategies to more effective and inclusive policy tools.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Examines the comparative evolution of rural development policies and Local Action Groups (LAGs) within a multi-level governance (MLG) framework. It focuses on two UK cases (Argyll and the Islands in Scotland; Coast, Wolds, Wetlands and Waterways in England) and two Italian cases (Delta 2000 in Emilia-Romagna; Capo Santa Maria di Leuca in Puglia).
Findings highlight how LAGs’ mechanisms, outcomes, and partnerships vary, but consistently demonstrate that while EU funding and policy frameworks provide critical support, it is the bottom-up leadership of local actors that most significantly drives success in rural development initiatives.
(Gargano, 2021).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“The tools and language of policy
Behaviour change is top-down using fear”
(Workshop 1).
Appendix J: Extended Technological analysis: Areas for further policy development and supporting evidence
Key Theme
Area For Policy Development
1: Data Gaps and Infrastructure for Policy Monitoring
Develop a comprehensive monitoring framework for sustainable diets
There is no structured system to track the effects of dietary shifts on emissions, health, food security, biodiversity, and sustainability, limiting policy effectiveness.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Lack of Clear Enforcement Mechanisms for Emission Reductions
The 30% agricultural emissions reduction target (by 2032) is ambitious, but the text does not specify:
How reductions will be enforced (e.g., penalties for non-compliance vs. voluntary incentives).
Sector-specific targets for beef, sheep, dairy, and arable farming.
How progress will be measured and verified beyond voluntary reporting.
Policy Gap: Scotland lacks a detailed, binding framework for ensuring compliance with emission reductions in agriculture.
Policy Need: Develop a carbon budgeting system for farms with clear compliance measures, incentives, and accountability mechanisms.
Scottish Government, n.d.).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Lack of data. Need to look at what is the actual impact of farming on climate in Scotland – what are the negatives we currently have and then learning from best practise to bring others on that journey. using real Scottish data to drive change. it should go wider than GHGs. its about biodiversity, habitat and plant protection and ecosystem, water use and flood management, soil quality, animal welfare etc.
baselining standards – over 170 farms there are some that are already at net zero, or close.”
(Workshop 3).
Establish a standardised data infrastructure to support policy integration
The lack of a unified system to collect, share, and analyse food system data hinders the integration of climate, health, and sustainability goals into policy decisions.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Emissions Estimation Uncertainty: The report notes significant variability in greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions estimates for food consumed in Scotland, partly due to differences in accounting for land use change and specific food consumption patterns. Improved data accuracy, especially for children and region-specific consumption, could strengthen policy targeting emissions from specific food groups.
Data Gaps in Food Production Origins: The report identifies a need for detailed information on the origins of foods consumed in Scotland. This information is essential for accurately attributing emissions, particularly as some Scottish produce is processed outside Scotland before being reimported for local consumption. Policy could address this by improving traceability in food supply chains
Integration of Post-Retail Emissions: Only some models account for emissions from consumer actions, such as energy used in cooking or food waste. Policy could incentivize behaviours that reduce these post-retail emissions, such as promoting energy-efficient cooking practices and reducing food waste at home.
(Jaacks, Frank, Vonderschmidt et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Data for policy tracking: Robust data systems are needed to inform policy decisions and track their effectiveness over time.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Within Scottish Government:
Make climate & diet part of a Good Food Nation objective.
Include dietary change as one of Scotland’s climate goals.
Work for better join up across policy areas, work against narrowness. Make this a priority for multiple departments.”
(Workshop 4).
Set clear targets and indicators for sustainable diet policies
The absence of effective metrics makes it difficult to evaluate the impact of policies on health, emissions reduction, and food system sustainability.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
No Specific Emissions Targets for Dairy Farming
Scotland has national climate targets but lacks dairy-specific GHG reduction goals.
Limited data collection on methane emissions at the farm level makes tracking improvements difficult.
Policy intervention: Expand research funding and create national livestock emissions databases.
(Ferguson, Bowen, McNicol et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Measuring dietary change: Identifying effective metrics to measure progress in dietary change is a key challenge.
(Stakeholder Meeting 2).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Enhance monitoring and metrics for agroecological practices
The absence of clear indicators for assessing agroecology’s environmental, economic, and social performance limits its policy integration, while the lack of systematic data collection prevents evidence-based policymaking for sustainable farming transitions.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Limited Research on the Economic Viability of Agroecology
No comprehensive cost-benefit analysis of agroecological farming vs. conventional farming in Scotland.
Need for financial models that demonstrate the long-term resilience benefits of agroecology.
Set Clear Targets for Sustainable Diets and Agriculture
Introduce climate-aligned dietary guidelines, including reduced red meat and dairy consumption.
Support horticulture expansion to increase domestic fruit, vegetable, and pulse production.
Align agroecology with Scotland’s Circular Economy and Net-Zero strategies
(Lozada & Karley, 2022).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Lots of local producers-just not captured in the figures.
Recognising the informal sectors e.g., farm shops, allotments.”
(Workshop 1).
Improve industry accountability through transparent data reporting
The absence of clear industry accountability frameworks hinders progress toward aligning food production and retail practices with dietary and sustainability targets.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Data and Accountability:
The need for robust, accessible data and transparent mechanisms to hold stakeholders accountable is underdeveloped in policy.
(Scottish Government, 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Data for policy tracking: Robust data systems are needed to inform policy decisions and track their effectiveness over time.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Develop robust metrics for tracking dietary change and emissions reduction
The absence of standardised indicators makes it difficult to assess the climate impact of dietary shifts and monitor progress toward emissions reduction goals.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Variability in Emissions Estimates Across food based dietary guidelines (FBDGs):
Highlights the wide range of emissions reductions attributed to different dietary guidelines, which vary due to methodological differences across models. This variability can make it challenging to establish standardized or widely accepted climate benchmarks within FBDGs, which may complicate Scotland’s efforts to adopt clear, evidence-based climate targets.
(Tregear, Morgan, Spence et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Measuring dietary change: Identifying effective metrics to measure progress in dietary change is a key challenge.
(Stakeholder Meeting 2).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Expand broadband access to enable precision agriculture
Poor broadband connectivity in rural areas restricts the adoption of connected animal sensors and precision farming technologies, reducing agricultural efficiency.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Connectivity and Infrastructure Barriers to Digital Agriculture:
Many rural areas lack broadband access, preventing the adoption of connected animal sensors and precision agriculture.
Investment in rural digital infrastructure is essential.
(Scottish Government, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
2: Agricultural Emissions and Climate Reporting
Improve agricultural emissions reporting and accountability
Existing reporting mechanisms do not adequately integrate climate-smart farming technologies, reducing accountability and hindering emissions tracking.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Monitoring and Accountability:
Annual progress reporting on agricultural emissions reductions must be strengthened.
Policies should integrate climate-smart farming technology adoption into monitoring frameworks.
(Scottish Government, n.d.)
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Establish a standardised carbon footprinting and emissions tracking system
The inconsistent use of carbon calculators and the absence of methane emissions data at the farm level, combined with inconsistent GHG emissions calculation methods, make it difficult to assess and mitigate agricultural emissions effectively.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Developing a standardised carbon footprinting tool
Farmers currently use multiple, inconsistent carbon calculators.
Recommendation: Create a universal farm carbon calculator, integrated with existing farm software and databases.
Nourish Scotland (2021).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
Reassess methane accounting methods and livestock emissions data
Methane calculations should be reviewed due to methane’s short atmospheric half-life. There is also a need to ensure fair assessments of emissions from lamb and beef production, particularly in extensive grazing systems.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Need to review data that exists e.g. lamb emission data – lamb is just below beef in terms of emissions, which is unusual as they are the most extensively reared. Environmental impact takes into account amount of land you are using and in NZ where herd size is bigger but they are confined to smaller areas and use hard feed, and somehow they are more emission friendly? it seems Scotland is penalised for highland roaming. i think we need to get a new calculation for this.”
(Workshop 3).
Define specific emissions reduction goals for beef production
While Scotland has national emissions targets, it lacks sector-specific goals for beef production, a major contributor to agricultural emissions.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
No Sector-Specific GHG Reduction Targets for Beef Farming
While Scotland has national emissions targets, no specific reduction goals exist for beef production.
Develop a centralised database for methane efficiency traits in livestock
Unlike Ireland’s cattle breeding data system, Scotland lacks an integrated tool to track genetic progress in methane reduction, limiting breeding efficiency. [13]
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Scotland lacks a centralised database for methane traits in livestock, like the Irish Cattle Breeding Federation (ICBF). Integration with existing breeding tools like ScotEID and EGENES is needed to track genetic progress, alongside cross-country collaboration to enhance data sharing and breeding efficiency
(Jenkins, Herold, de Mendonça et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Increase farmer awareness and uptake of precision livestock farming (PLF) technologies
Many farmers do not view PLF tools as effective for reducing greenhouse gas emissions, limiting their adoption despite proven environmental benefits.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Many farmers do not perceive PLF tools as effective greenhouse gas (GHG) reduction strategies, despite their proven benefits, limiting adoption. Policy intervention: Increase extension services, training programs, and peer-to-peer learning initiatives.
(Ferguson, Bowen, McNicol et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Enhance technological capacity for supply chain resilience against climate disruptions
The potential of technology to improve the resilience of food supply chains against climate-related disruptions remains underutilised.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Technology for Supply Chain Resilience: The potential of emerging and existing technologies to strengthen the resilience of food supply chains in the face of climate-related disruptions remains significantly underexplored and underutilised. Digital tools, data analytics, automation, and innovations offer opportunities to improve monitoring, forecasting, and responsiveness across the supply chain. However, their application in building climate resilience is still limited, and greater attention is needed to scale up these solutions and integrate them into policy and practice.
(Stakeholder Meeting 8).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
3. Food Consumption and Emissions Attribution Issues
Improve food consumption data accuracy for policy evaluation
High-emission foods like meat and dairy are often underreported in dietary assessments, limiting the accuracy of policy evaluations.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Recognising underreporting issues, especially for high-emission foods like meat and dairy, could guide improvements in dietary assessment methods Underreporting in Food Consumption Data: Recognizing underreporting issues, especially for high-emission foods like meat and dairy, could guide improvements in dietary assessment methods. Policies might encourage better data collection and reporting to ensure more accurate emissions assessments and tailored dietary interventions.
(Jaacks, Frank, Vonderschmidt et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Enhance food origin tracking for accurate emissions attribution
The absence of comprehensive tracking for imported and processed Scottish foods makes it difficult to develop precise climate policies.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Need for comprehensive information on the origins of foods consumed in Scotland to improve emissions accounting. The absence of detailed data, particularly for Scottish produce that is processed abroad and reimported, hinders accurate emissions attribution and the development of effective climate policies.
(Jaacks, Frank, Vonderschmidt et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Scottish solutions and data are needed to tackle climate change in Scotland. We need national data and should stop using international data for GHGE and water use for our modelling.”
(Workshop 1).
Increase the granularity of Scotland’s net-zero emissions data
Scotland’s emissions tracking system focuses on high-level data without accounting for regional variations, reducing policy precision.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Need for comprehensive information on the origins of foods consumed in Scotland to improve emissions accounting. The absence of detailed data, particularly for Scottish produce that is processed abroad and reimported, hinders accurate emissions attribution and the development of effective climate policies Data Gaps in Food Production Origins: The report identifies a need for detailed information on the origins of foods consumed in Scotland. This information is essential for accurately attributing emissions, particularly as some Scottish produce is processed outside Scotland before being reimported for local consumption. Policy could address this by improving traceability in food supply chains.
(Jaacks, Frank, Vonderschmidt et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Assess the sustainability impacts of plant-based alternatives
Clear methodologies are required to compare the sustainability of plant-based meat alternatives with traditional meat products.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Assessing Sustainability of Plant-Based Alternatives: Robust and transparent methodologies are urgently needed to assess the sustainability of plant-based meat alternatives in comparison to conventional meat products. Current assessment approaches often vary widely in scope and metrics, making it difficult to draw consistent conclusions about environmental, nutritional, and socio-economic impacts. Developing standardised frameworks would enable clearer comparisons, guide consumers and policymakers, and support innovation in the alternative protein sector.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Use digital tools to promote local, ethical, and sustainable food choices
Encourage consumers to connect with local suppliers and assess animal welfare and product quality through observable online rating systems.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Use digital shopping to encourage people to find and use local suppliers of animal produce and check welfare/quality – like a Tripadvisor score.”
(Workshop 1).
Expand infrastructure and technical support for local food systems
There is inadequate policy support for expanding infrastructure and providing technical assistance to scale up local and regional food production.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
There is currently a lack of dedicated funding mechanisms or targeted incentives to support the scaling up of low-carbon technologies within food production and processing. This gap limits the widespread adoption of innovations that could significantly reduce greenhouse gas emissions across the sector. Without strategic investment and policy support, many promising technologies remain at the pilot or early adoption stage, limiting their potential to contribute to national climate goals and a more sustainable food system.
(Sovacool, Bazilian, Griffiths et al., 2021).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Appendix K: Extended Legal analysis: Areas for further policy development and supporting evidence
Key Theme
Area For Policy Development
1. Regulatory Gaps in Sustainable Food Systems and Supply Chains
Strengthen regulation and incentives for low-carbon food production
There are no targeted resources, tax benefits, or regulatory measures to encourage low-carbon food production, limiting sustainability efforts.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Lack of specific policies to incentivise low-carbon food production or regulate high-emission food products. The absence of targeted subsidies, tax benefits, or regulatory measures limits the transition to more sustainable food systems and weakens efforts to reduce the environmental impact of food production and consumption.
(Milner, Green, Dangour et al. (2015).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Enhance the polluter-pays principle and support for sustainable farming
Inadequate enforcement of environmental accountability and limited financial support for farmers transitioning to sustainable practices slow climate-resilient food system reforms.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Enforcement of the polluter-pays principle[14] remains inadequate, with limited financial incentives and regulatory measures to ensure industry accountability. Additionally, there is insufficient support for farmers transitioning to environmentally sustainable practices, limiting progress toward a more climate-resilient food system.
Weak regulations allow power imbalances between large corporations and small producers to persist, reinforcing supply chain inequalities and environmental harm. Regulating supply chains avoids the barrier of relying on voluntary behaviour change.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Regulatory gaps constrain efforts to ensure fairness and transparency in supply chains, particularly in addressing power imbalances between large corporations and small producers. Weak enforcement of fair practices within the food supply chain sustains inequalities and contributes to environmental harm.
(Food, Farming and Countryside Commission (FFCC), 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Expand the reach of the Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act
The GFN Act primarily governs public sector food policies but lacks mechanisms to regulate supermarkets, food manufacturers, and large-scale agricultural producers.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Limited Leverage Over the Private Sector:
The GFN Act focuses primarily on public sector food policy but does not impose obligations on supermarkets, food manufacturers, or large-scale agricultural producers.
Without mandatory private sector participation, major food system emissions and supply chain issues may remain unaddressed.
(Brennan, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Clarify the role of carbon markets in agriculture
Farmers struggle to engage in carbon markets due to unclear regulations, unstable pricing, and a lack of standardised methodologies.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Scottish farmers have limited engagement with carbon markets due to a lack of standardised methodologies, clear regulations, and stable pricing mechanisms. This uncertainty prevents broader participation, reducing opportunities for farmers to benefit financially from carbon sequestration efforts and limiting the agricultural sector’s contribution to climate mitigation.
(Baker, Conquest & Moxey, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Enhance retailer accountability in a sustainable food system
Retailers are not required to report Scope 3 emissions from the products they buy and sell, limiting accountability for sustainability impacts.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Regulatory Influence and Future Expectations: i. Some firms voluntarily disclose their emissions through the Science Based Targets initiative (SBTi). ii. While there is currently no legal requirement to reduce Scope 3 emissions, emerging policy signals indicate that more stringent regulations are likely in the future.
(Baker, Conquest & Moxey, 2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Support local and regenerative food production
Local food systems face barriers such as limited land and sea access and complex licensing requirements that disadvantage smaller producers.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
“Access to land, access to seas, complex licensing systems that play into the hands of multinational corporations who have the means and expertise to complete these.”
(Workshop 1).
2: Regulation of Food Marketing, Composition, and Consumer Information
Strengthen regulation of unhealthy food promotions
Weak marketing rules allow unhealthy food advertising that worsens health inequalities. Stronger regulation and fiscal measures are needed to shift sales toward healthier, sustainable options.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Impact of food promotions on diet:
Unhealthy foods are heavily promoted, influencing consumer choices and increasing the purchase of unhealthy items.
Children in lower-income areas are more exposed to unhealthy food marketing and have higher childhood obesity rates.
Cost-of-living pressures have made nutritious food less affordable, worsening dietary inequalities. Weak oversight of marketing and promotional strategies for less healthy food options allows widespread exposure, particularly in vulnerable communities. This lack of regulation risks exacerbating health inequalities by reinforcing dietary patterns linked to poor health outcomes.
(Public Health Scotland (PHS), 2024).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Establish nutritional and environmental standards for out-of-home food
The absence of comprehensive regulations for food sold in restaurants, cafes, and takeaways weakens policy efforts to promote healthier and more sustainable dietary habits. There is also a lack of sufficient planning levers to regulate food outlets.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Sustainability Measures:
There is a lack of policies addressing the environmental impacts of takeaway packaging and food delivery systems.
Nutritional Standards for Out-of-Home (OOH) Foods
Regulation of high-calorie, high-salt, and high-sugar foods sold out-of-home remains limited.
Promotion Regulation
Oversight of promotions for less healthy food options—particularly in quick service restaurants (QSRs)—is weak.
Equity in Access
Current policies do not adequately ensure that healthier OOH food options are affordable and accessible for lower-income communities.
(Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2021b).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Mandate reformulation requirements for unhealthy foods
The reliance on voluntary industry commitments for food reformulation weakens public health efforts, as there are no legal obligations for reducing unhealthy ingredients.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
The UK and Scottish Governments rely on voluntary industry measures for food reformulation, with no legal obligation for companies to reduce unhealthy ingredients. This weakens efforts to improve public health and reduce diet-related diseases, leaving progress dependent on inconsistent voluntary compliance. Lack of mandatory reformulation:
The UK and Scottish Governments support mandatory reformulation only if voluntary efforts fail.
Currently, there is no legal requirement for companies to reformulate unhealthy foods.
(Obesity Action Scotland (OAS), 2019).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Implement carbon footprint labelling for food
There are currently no mandatory requirements for carbon footprint labelling on food products, which limits consumers’ ability to make informed, low-emission dietary choices.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Regulation and Accountability a. Despite growing emphasis on emissions reduction, there are no mandatory requirements for carbon footprint labelling on food products, limiting consumers’ ability to make informed low-emission choices. b. Regulatory mechanisms to ensure business compliance with carbon labelling, food waste reduction, and sustainable practices remain weak.
(Climate Change Committee, 2020).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Ensure the right to adequate nutrition
Dietary policies must uphold human rights by ensuring all populations, particularly marginalised communities, have equitable access to nutritious food.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Ensuring the right to adequate nutrition: Issues surrounding the right to adequate nutrition, particularly for marginalized communities, have been highlighted. Dietary policies must align with human rights obligations to ensure equitable access to nutritious food for all populations.
(Stakeholder Meeting 4).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Address gaps in food standards, including non-dairy milk fortification
The absence of mandatory fortification for non-dairy milk alternatives raises concerns about potential nutritional inadequacies for populations relying on these products as dairy substitutes.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Gaps in food standards, including non-dairy milk fortification: There are gaps in regulatory frameworks related to food standards, including the lack of mandatory fortification for non-dairy milk alternatives. This may contribute to nutritional inadequacies among populations that rely on these products as dairy substitutes.
(Stakeholder Meeting 13).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
3: Legal and Governance Barriers to Policy Implementation
Align devolved and UK dietary policies
Legal complexities in the division of powers create difficulties in developing cohesive dietary and climate policies across the UK, leading to inconsistencies between devolved administrations and the UK Government.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Challenges in aligning devolved and UK dietary policies: Aligning diet and climate policies between devolved administrations (e.g., Scotland) and the UK Government presents legal challenges. The division of powers complicates the development of cohesive dietary policies, resulting in inconsistent approaches across the UK.
(Stakeholder Meeting 9).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Manage legal risks from dietary shifts
There are concerns that dietary guidelines encouraging reduced meat and dairy consumption could lead to nutrient deficiencies, creating potential legal risks if public health is adversely affected.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
–
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
Legal risks from unintended nutritional deficiencies: Stakeholders have raised concerns about potential legal risks if dietary guidelines inadvertently lead to health issues, such as nutrient deficiencies. This is particularly relevant with blanket recommendations to reduce meat and dairy consumption without considering adequate nutritional alternatives.
(Stakeholder Meeting 9).
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
4: Administrative and Market Challenges in Sustainable Agriculture
Evaluate the effectiveness of carbon audits in agriculture
While carbon audits for farmers are encouraged, they lack enforceable targets or evidence of significant emissions reductions, making them more bureaucratic than effective.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Limited Impact of Carbon Audits:
There is no clear evidence that carbon audits have led to significant emission reductions in Scottish agriculture.
Administrative Burden and Costs:
Farmers must provide carbon data to multiple buyers, leading to high reporting demands.
Uncertainty About Market-Based Carbon Incentives:
Voluntary carbon credit markets are underdeveloped, leading to hesitation from farmers.
(Baker, Conquest & Moxey (2023).
Supporting evidence:
Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Workshops
–
Appendix L: Extended Environmental analysis: Areas for further policy development and supporting evidence
Key Theme
Area For Policy Development
1. Land Use, Tenure, and Access for Sustainable Agriculture
Improve land tenure security for community food systems
Temporary land use agreements create instability for community gardens, while bureaucratic hurdles, insecure tenure, and limited land availability continue to restrict community food-growing efforts, despite the Community Empowerment (Scotland) Act 2015.[15]
Supporting evidence: Literature review
While the importance of secure land access for community gardens is acknowledged, the prevalence of temporary land use arrangements creates instability, limiting long-term planning and the sustainability of community-based food initiatives.
(Meyerricks, & White, 2021).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
“Need community to take on land and community need funding to do so. There is something about learning from crofting practices in the context of a sustainable food system. Some challenges are related to the free market and the crofting regulation, the right to buy and the lack of regulation.”
(Workshop 4).
Support new agroecological farmers with land and financial access
New farmers struggle to secure land and financial resources, limiting the transition to sustainable farming systems.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Limited access to secure land tenure and financial support remains a significant barrier for new entrants into farming, even though this group is often more open to adopting agroecological and sustainable practices. Addressing these access issues is essential to enable a new generation of climate-conscious farmers.
(Lozada & Karley, 2022).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
Land ownership and affordability issues: Competition and rising land costs are pricing out farmers, limiting opportunities for sustainable agricultural transitions.
(Stakeholder Meeting 1).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
–
Strengthen strategic oversight for land use change
Unregulated forestry expansion risks displacing agricultural land without a public interest test or requirements for net carbon sequestration assessment.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Market-driven forestry expansion poses a risk of displacing agricultural land without adequate strategic oversight. There is currently no requirement for a “public interest test” to assess the impact of afforestation on farming, nor a mandate for large forestry projects to demonstrate long-term net carbon sequestration, limiting sustainable land use planning and balance between agriculture and forestry.
(Scottish Government, 2024).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
“The ARCZero[16] pilot in Northern Ireland showed that well managed grazing land stores more carbon in the soil and promotes more biodiversity than forestry. SG should account for this when planning future goals for land use.”
(Workshop 3).
Develop alternative land use strategies for rough grazing areas
There is no clear plan for repurposing Scotland’s vast rough grazing areas, limiting sustainable land management and biodiversity conservation. Livestock farming remains the only viable option for some land.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
There is no clear plan for repurposing the 60% of Scotland’s rough grazing land that may not be suitable for crop production. The absence of strategic land use policies limits opportunities for sustainable land management, climate mitigation, and biodiversity conservation.
(Kennedy, Clark, Stewart et al., 2025).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
“Reducing livestock farming=farming concerns and biodiversity concerns-livestock farming only viable thing for certain land.”
(Workshop 1).
Recognise the role of grazing land in carbon sequestration and biodiversity
Well-managed grazing land can sequester more carbon and support greater biodiversity than forestry, which should be considered in Scotland’s land-use planning.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Afforestation projects are viewed as potentially effective measures for carbon sequestration and therefore climate change mitigation. Much of the land in temperate regions suitable for afforestation is used for agriculture and consequently afforestation of farmland is frequently proposed. Landowners are commonly reluctant to sacrifice fertile land for purposes other than food and feed production. In Scotland’s uplands, grazed pastures are a common land use that could be put under pressure by demands for woodland planting. This chapter explores how farm woodland planting for carbon sequestration and biofuel production affects livestock output. The concepts presented show that there is great potential for integrating agriculture and forestry to achieve environmental benefits without compromising productivity.
(Beckert, Smith & Chapman, 2016).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
“The ARCZero pilot in Northern Ireland showed that well managed grazing land stores more carbon in the soil and promotes more biodiversity than forestry. SG should account for this when planning future goals for land use.”
(Workshop 3).
Balance livestock reduction with land use trade-offs
With more than 85% of Scottish farmland classified as ‘Less Favoured Area’ (LFA) and often unsuitable for plant protein cultivation, reducing livestock could disrupt feed crop markets and impact farm incomes. Addressing mixed messages on CO₂ impacts of extensively grazed grasslands versus forestry is needed while ensuring food production resilience in a changing climate.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Afforestation is widely regarded as a promising strategy for carbon sequestration and climate change mitigation. However, much of the land suitable for afforestation in temperate regions is already used for agriculture, leading to frequent proposals for planting trees on farmland. Landowners are often hesitant to give up productive land traditionally used for food and feed. In Scotland’s uplands, where grazed pasture is common, there is particular concern about the impact of woodland expansion on livestock farming. This article examines how woodland planting for carbon sequestration and biofuel production can influence livestock output. It highlights the significant potential for integrating forestry and agriculture in ways that deliver environmental benefits without reducing overall productivity.
(Beckert, Smith & Chapman, 2016).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
“Don’t forget >85% of Scottish farmland is ‘less favoured’ so mostly cannot be used to grow plant proteins. Also poor quality crops are sold for animal feed. A reduction in livestock will impact this market and reduce farm incomes.”
(Workshop 3).
Acknowledge biophysical limitations on agriculture
Natural constraints determine what crops can be grown in different regions, influencing food production and sustainability.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
In Scotland, natural constraints such as climate, soil quality, altitude, and water availability significantly shape agricultural decisions—especially regarding what crops can be grown and where. These physical limitations, in combination with socio-economic and policy considerations, influence both food production capacity and agricultural sustainability. This article reviews how regional climate and infrastructure influence where legumes can be grown, considering their role in sustainable agriculture.
(Wiltshire, Freeman, Willcocks et al., 2021).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
“Biophysical constraints on what can be grown. Lobby groups preserving industries. Reputation of Scottish food producers.”
(Workshop 1).
2. Areas for Policy Development in Agricultural Climate Mitigation and Adaptation
Current policies measure emissions from specific foods but fail to consider how broader agricultural and food system changes could drive more effective climate mitigation.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Current assessments highlight emissions from specific foods but fail to consider the broader impact of systemic shifts in agricultural practices and food system transformations, limiting opportunities for comprehensive climate mitigation strategies.
(Nneli, Revoredo-Giha & Dogbe, 2023).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
–
Avoid rebound effects in precision livestock farming (PLF) efficiency gains
Productivity improvements from PLF could inadvertently lead to higher total emissions if herd expansion offsets efficiency gains.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
There is a risk that productivity gains from Precision Livestock Farming (PLF) could lead to an overall increase in total emissions, as improved efficiency per unit could be offset by herd expansion.
(McNicol, Bowen, Ferguson et al., 2024).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
–
Strengthen policy responses to climate risks in agriculture
Policies fail to address the financial impact of extreme weather on farming, lack strategies for water conservation, and fail to enforce improved soil management.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Current policies fail to sufficiently address the financial impacts of extreme weather on agriculture, particularly within the beef sector. Water scarcity risks remain unmanaged due to the lack of strategies for rainwater capture and groundwater conservation. Furthermore, despite increasing concerns about soil degradation, there are no clear policy requirements for improved soil management.
SAC Consulting, n.d.).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
Fragmented governance across Government divisions, leading to disjointed approaches to diet, climate, and health policies: Disjointed approaches to diet, climate, and health policies due to lack of coordinated structures.
(Stakeholder Meeting 3).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
–
Integrate grazing land’s role in biodiversity and carbon capture
Policies fail to recognise the role of sustainable grazing systems in enhancing biodiversity and carbon sequestration.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Current policies do not fully acknowledge or integrate the potential role of grazing systems in supporting biodiversity and carbon sequestration. The absence of clear guidelines or incentives limits opportunities to enhance sustainable grazing practices that contribute to environmental and climate goals
National Farmers Union Scotland (NFUS , n.d.).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
–
Address localised environmental impacts of intensive farming
While overall farming emissions may appear low across systems, specific regions with intensive agricultural activities experience significant localized environmental impacts.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
The use of nitrogen fertilisers in agriculture is a major contributor to nitrous oxide (N₂O) emissions — a potent greenhouse gas. Reducing these emissions poses a significant global challenge, and doing so requires reliable methods for estimating N₂O output across different farming systems. Scientists commonly rely on biogeochemistry (BGC) models to estimate soil-based emissions, but these models can present difficulties: large-scale studies often lack local detail, while small-scale studies may not be widely applicable. In addition, many studies provide limited information on the reliability of their results. This study took a novel approach by focusing on eastern Scotland, a region with well-documented farming practices. Researchers applied a robust BGC model to assess N₂O emissions, nitrate (NO₃) leaching, and nitrogen uptake in crops such as barley, wheat, and oilseed rape. The high-resolution modelling revealed that although eastern Scotland’s intensive cropping systems are efficient, they exhibit elevated N₂O emission intensities per hectare, largely due to the use of synthetic fertilisers.
(Myrgiotis, Williams, Rees et al., 2019).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
Localised environmental impacts of emissions-intensive farming: While the overall environmental impact of farming may be low when averaged across systems, localized environmental impacts can be significant, particularly in areas with emissions-intensive agricultural activities.
(Stakeholder Meeting 8).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
–
Balance environmental goals with socioeconomic sustainability
Environmental goals can coexist with job security and the sustainability of fragile communities, but current policy does not always reflect this balance.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
This study explores what it means to be a responsible farm business in today’s world, especially after COVID-19 and Brexit. Being a responsible business involves tackling poverty, inequality, and environmental harm, but different groups—like customers, the media, and global organisations—have different views on what that means.
Farms are part of a complex rural system filled with tensions and contradictions. This research focuses on how farmers can understand and manage these tensions to run more responsible and sustainable businesses.
Using data from one farm and interviews with five others in the same community, the study develops a framework to show how farmers balance competing demands. It looks at how farmers’ entrepreneurial mindset (or Entrepreneurial Orientation, EO) is shaped by experience and changing times.
The study argues that good policies, informed by real-world farming experiences, can support responsible decision-making.
(Smith, Duncan, Edward et al., 2021).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
“An acknowledgement that supporting our environment does not need to come at the expense of jobs or supporting fragile communities.”
(Workshop 1).
Understand the complexities of meat production and consumption
Variations in where meat is produced and consumed across the UK and internationally influence territorial emissions differently, shaping the regional impacts of dietary change.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Highlights how territorial specialization in meat production and consumption across Europe creates uneven nitrogen and GHG burdens. Countries like the UK import much of their animal feed and meat, meaning dietary change impacts vary regionally based on local vs outsourced emissions.
(Billen, Aguilera, Einarsson et al., 2021).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
“Complexities around where especially meat is produced and where it is consumed across the UK and internationally. Changes in diet in different regions will affect territorial emissions differently.”
(Stakeholder Workshop 3).
Rethink agri-tech and livestock systems for sustainability
Climate and environmental protection should focus on transforming food systems and reducing reliance on livestock feed crops like soy, rather than shifting all animals indoors.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
UK livestock systems rely heavily on imported soy. Holmes proposes a shift to legume-supported agroecology, noting this is better for soil, climate, and economic sovereignty.
(Holmes, 2018).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
“Issues around agri tech and comms being that to protect climate and the environment, we do not need to put all animals indoors, rather than addressing the food systems themselves and the dependence we have on livestock production and the impact of feeding livestock e.g. deforestation to produce soy that only goes to feed livestock.”
(Workshop 3).
Ensure net zero goals align with animal welfare standards
Efforts to intensify food production for climate targets must not compromise animal welfare standards.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Climate change affects agriculture in many different ways. The CCC advises that adaptation efforts should address risks such as flooding, heavier rainfall, and rising temperatures. It also recommends improving the sector’s ability to handle new challenges like shifting pest and disease patterns.
These climate impacts will affect multiple areas of farming. For instance, both crops and livestock will face heat stress and a rise in pests and diseases due to warmer, wetter conditions. Waterlogged soils can reduce crop yields, while livestock may suffer from lower welfare, affecting fertility and production, such as milk yields.
(Jenkins, Avis, Willcocks et al., (2023).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
“Animal welfare: Intensifying food production to meet net zero goals could come at the expense of animal welfare.”
(Workshop 4).
3: Environmental Impacts and Food Systems
Address the environmental impact of ultra-processed foods
Ultra-processed foods, including those from large fast-food chains, often have a high environmental footprint and run counter to principles of sustainable food culture.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Global food systems are increasingly unsustainable for human health, the environment, animal welfare, biodiversity, food culture, social equity, and small-scale farmers. While the high consumption of animal-based foods has long been seen as a key contributor to this problem, growing attention is now being paid to the role of ultra-processed foods (UPFs).
This review examines whether concerns about UPFs are valid. It looks at the typical ingredients and additives in UPFs and the farming practices used to produce them. The findings show that UPFs are closely linked to emissions-intensive farming and livestock systems, and they negatively impact nearly every aspect of food system sustainability. This is largely due to the global spread of cheap, highly processed products made from low-cost ingredients.
Although UPFs generally have lower greenhouse gas emissions than conventional meat and dairy, especially those low in animal-based calories, reducing UPF consumption—without replacing it with other energy-dense foods—can still lead to significant environmental benefits.
To improve sustainability, the review recommends cutting back on UPFs and shifting toward minimally processed, seasonal, organic, and locally produced foods.
(Fardet & Rock, 2020).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
Environmental impact of ultra-processed foods: Ultra-processed foods, such as those offered by large fast-food chains (e.g., Domino’s Pizza), are often inconsistent with the principles of a sustainable food culture due to their high environmental footprint.
(Stakeholder Meeting 11).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
–
Strengthen food system resilience against climate and supply risks
Enhancing farm resilience to weather extremes, power disruptions, and crop variability by reconsidering older, more resilient crop varieties, reducing dependence on a limited range of crops, and growing local varieties better suited to conditions. Greater policy focus is needed on planning and adaptation strategies to support farmers facing climate-related disruptions.
Supporting evidence: Literature review
Report on analysis highlighting how much of Scotland’s traditional food culture connected to native plants has been lost, with significant implications for climate resilience. This loss is rooted in historical events such as land enclosure, the Highland Clearances, the dissolution of monasteries, and strict regulation of industries like whisky production, which excluded traditional local ingredients. These processes contributed to the erasure of knowledge and practices around native plants—plants that could play a vital role in adapting to climate change through low-input, locally adapted food systems.
(Lozada & Karley, 2022).
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings
–
Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops
“We need to be more resilient. Even weather concerns > power cuts etc. can have a huge impact on the resilience of a farm. A bad year of weather patterns can completely skew a crop trial, and previous variants that we maybe do not use/grow as much now, could potentially be more resilient. Poultry especially is much more sensitive to zoonotic/disease strains around years ago.”
(Workshop 3).
How to cite this publication:
Nash, N. (2025) Analysing a Complex Policy Landscape: Diet and Climate in Scotland’, ClimateXChange. DOI
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
A second in-person workshop (Workshop 2) was planned in Edinburgh on Friday 24th January but had to be cancelled at the last minute due to disruption from Storm Eowyn. ↑
Initial steps that can be taken using existing structures or resources. Includes scoping, piloting, stakeholder engagement, and coordination-building activities. ↑
Actions that require broader collaboration, policy alignment across sectors, or formal programme development. Often builds on earlier pilots or evidence. ↑
Longer-term actions requiring legislative change, significant investment, or systemic redesign. These aim to embed lasting transformation. ↑
Scotland’s Agricultural Reform Programme, particularly through greening payments and conditional support mechanisms (e.g., environmental conditionality), does include some financial incentives intended to encourage more sustainable production. ↑
Meeting 14 involved a group meeting rather than a one-to-one meeting, in which multiple participants contributed to the conversation. ↑
Note: The online workshops omitted the future scenarios activity due to time constraints but retained the same core activities and objectives. ↑
NB: Workshop 2 was cancelled the day before it was due to take place because of Storm Eowyn. ↑
Integrated cattle breeding data systems allow the tracking of genetic traits of livestock over time. This can include feed efficiency and methane emissions. By linking performance data to genetic profiles, these systems support selective breeding for lower-emission animals. Without such a tool, it is more difficult to monitor and accelerate genetic progress toward reducing methane emissions from cattle in a coordinated and efficient way. ↑
An environmental policy principle stating that those who produce pollution should bear the costs of managing it to prevent damage to human health or the environment. ↑
The Community Empowerment (Scotland) Act 2015 is legislation that aims to strengthen the voices of communities in decisions that affect them. It gives communities additional rights and opportunities to influence public service provision, ownership of land and buildings, and participation in local planning and decision-making to improve outcomes. See Community Empowerment (Scotland) Act 2015↑
The ARCZero project is a farmer-led initiative in Northern Ireland aimed at measuring and managing carbon flows within agricultural systems to achieve net-zero carbon emissions. Comprising seven diverse farms, the project employs advanced techniques such as detailed soil sampling and LiDAR scanning to assess both greenhouse gas emissions and carbon sequestration capacities. By establishing comprehensive carbon balance sheets, ARCZero empowers farmers to implement informed strategies that reduce emissions and enhance carbon storage, contributing to more sustainable and climate-resilient farming practices. ↑
Scotland’s construction industry relies heavily on traditional primary aggregates. Lower carbon alternatives such as recycled concrete and incineration bottom ash aggregates are gaining traction. Innovations in recycling technology have improved the feasible quality and consistency of alternatives to primary aggregates, leading to greater acceptance among contractors and suppliers.
This study seeks to investigate the availability of alternatives to primary aggregates and analyse barriers to their uptake through literature review, data collection and stakeholder engagement. We also provide four case studies of where alternatives to primary aggregates have been used in Scotland.
Findings
We have found that alternatives to primary aggregates can reduce greenhouse gas emissions significantly, with local sourcing further amplifying these benefits. However, logistical and supply chain challenges may limit these benefits when transportation distances exceed certain thresholds. As such, while there are promising pathways for the increased use of alternatives to primary aggregates in Scotland, strategic actions would be required to address existing barriers and to support the transition towards a more sustainable construction sector.
There are three key interrelated challenges to facilitating increased deployment of alternatives to primary aggregates in Scotland. These are technical viability and infrastructure, standards and market demand, and data availability.
Technical viability and infrastructure: Technical viability of alternatives to primary aggregates is improving. Investment in construction and demolition waste (CDW) infrastructure in Scotland has led to improvements in the purity and quality of alternatives to primary aggregates over the last 10 years. Advanced CDW recycling facilities are prevalent across the central belt, but their reach is limited in rural areas due to logistical and operational challenges, limiting uptake in these regions. Similar to the primary aggregates market, the market for alternatives is characterised by low profit margins, with producers of alternative aggregates also facing high investment costs for the development and expansion of recycling infrastructure. Stakeholders proposed incentivising recycling of recovered flat glass from construction and demolition projects through collaboration with the Scottish food and drink sector.
Standards and market demand: Some stakeholders suggested updating procurement specifications and regulations to reflect the advances in recycling technology noted above. Broader use of alternatives to primary aggregates is restricted by industry standards and related concerns regarding structural performance. Clients are generally risk-averse and influenced by uncertainties in technical performance quality. This limits market demand. Demand for alternatives to primary aggregates is also limited by competition from traditional materials.
Data availability: Although aspired to in this study, it was not possible to meaningfully forecast the availability of alternatives to primary aggregates. Low engagement generated limited responses and did not provide a representative dataset of material availability. Without more consistent and granular data, it is not possible to derive a robust definition of the volumes of materials available. That data is not systematically collected and stored as there is no real regulatory or client-led requirement for it, related to the points above. Evidencing the potential for adequate technical performance is difficult when the existing standards are thought by some to not fully reflect what is possible with modern processing techniques. It is difficult to make the business case for investment in a review and potential revision of standards without understanding the potential scale of environmental and economic impact, which is related to the need for more data.
In the context of the Scottish Aggregates Tax and other potential fiscal initiatives, there are two headline takeaways from this work:
Until robust and reliable Scotland-specific data on volumes of alternatives to primary aggregates is collected, any perceived benefits of tax rate changes will be somewhat speculative.
Potential subsidies for alternatives to primary aggregates are considered here at high level. Further work would be required to conduct a thorough assessment of the viability of any such scheme, which would, again, necessitate much more complete data than is currently available.
Further research
We have learned lessons that could inform future research:
Forecasting the availability of alternatives to primary aggregates in the Scottish construction sector is limited by significant data gaps that prevents meaningful baselining of their use.
Any future studies should factor in a longer data collection period to improve response rates.
A technical review of existing standards could be conducted to assess the feasibility of updating the current suite of industry standards to reflect advancements.
Feasibility studies should assess the expansion of infrastructure to rural regions.
Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Definition
CDW
Construction and Demolition Waste
CXC
ClimateXChange
CO2
Carbon Dioxide
GHG
Greenhouse Gas
GWP
Global Warming Potential
LCA
Lifecycle Analysis
MCI
Material Circularity Indicator
RC
Recycled Concrete
SATBAG
Scottish Aggregates Tax Bill Advisory Group
Table 1: Glossary and abbreviations used during report
Introduction
Study context and aims
The Scottish Government has set the target for Scotland to reach Net Zero carbon emissions by 2045, laid out in the Climate Change (Emissions Reduction Targets) (Scotland) Act 2019 (Scottish Goverment, 2019). To meet this target, they understand that GHG reductions must be made across a number of sectors, including the construction sector, which is widely estimated to generate around half of all of Scotland’s waste (Scottish Government, 2024).
In 2023, the Scottish Government commissioned Circle Economy, an international circular economy research body, to map the flow of materials throughout the Scottish economy. The aim of the work was to identify how circular approaches could generate economic benefits and reduce the environmental impacts of waste and material consumption. Their research, among several recommendations, suggests that adopting circular approaches to construction, such as prioritising the use of alternatives to primary materials and aggregates, has the potential to deliver an 11.5% reduction in Scotland’s emissions (Circle Economy, 2023).
To support this aim, the Scottish Government is considering how the Scottish Aggregate Tax can incentivise the use of alternatives to primary aggregates by imposing a tax on the extraction and use of primary aggregate materials. This comes at an opportune moment, as the Scottish Aggregates Tax is expected to go-live in April 2026, and is set to become the third fully devolved tax in Scotland, after the Land and Buildings Transaction Tax, and the Scottish Landfill Tax. It will replace the existing UK-wide Aggregates Levy in Scotland through charging a tax on the use of aggregate when it becomes subject to commercial exploitation in Scotland and will be administered by Revenue Scotland.
However, the evidence base for the significance of the role that alternatives to primary aggregates can play in reducing the environmental impact of the Scottish construction industry is not currently sufficiently robust. There has been no systemic data collection focussing on supply versus demand for alternatives to primary materials in Scotland, and therefore the full extent of the potential environmental impact is unknown. There is also uncertainty about how much more deployment of alternatives to primary aggregates is possible and what the potential options are to overcome the barriers to this ambition.
This study aims to develop a fuller understanding of the types, development levels, and potential impact of alternatives to primary aggregates, and the barriers to their increased use in Scotland. It focuses primarily on aggregates used within the construction industry, which are understood as granular building materials, primarily comprising of sand, gravel, and crushed stone and rock. They are often produced through the crushing, screening, and extraction processes within quarries, or produced as a by-product from demolition practices. While they play a critical role in construction projects, forming the basis of concrete, asphalt, and other materials, their use is not exclusively limited to this industry.
Our work included a review of available industry and academic literature on the subject, an investigation into the availability of relevant primary quantitative data, and a series of stakeholder engagement interviews and surveys. The combined insights from these activities are summarised in this report and draw learnings for policymakers to consider in the further development of the Scottish Aggregate Tax. The methodology followed is discussed in more detail in Appendix A.
Traditional primary aggregates use
In Great Britain, approximately 250 million tonnes of aggregates are used annually within the construction industry, with an additional 20 million tonnes in Northern Ireland. Scotland plays a vital role in the UK’s aggregate supply chain, both as a significant producer and consumer of materials. In 2022, Scotland produced 21.3 million tonnes of crushed rock, accounting for a substantial share of the UK’s total, alongside 4.5 million tonnes of sand and gravel. Additionally, the country produced 1.2 million tonnes of ready-mixed concrete (around 500,000m3), and 2.5 million tonnes of asphalt. Infrastructure projects dominate Scotland’s construction sector, comprising 22% of output and demonstrating a heavy reliance on aggregates (Mineral Products Association, 2024)
The push for sustainable practices in construction has led to growing interest in viable substitutes for traditional primary aggregates. Historically, primary aggregates, sourced from natural materials like rock, granite, and gravel have dominated the market due to their reliability and robust characteristics. Commonly used in applications such as house building and road development, these virgin materials are often chosen by contractors and developers for their proven durability and performance. However, the environmental costs associated with extracting and processing these carbon-intense materials, including significant GHG emissions and the depletion of finite natural resources, present the need for alternative solutions, some of which are set out below.
Alternatives to primary aggregates in Scotland
In 2021, recycled and secondary sources supplied 28% of total aggregate demand, while the remaining demand was fed from primary aggregate extraction in the UK (Mineral Products Association, 2022).
While there is no definitive categorisation of the different materials which may be classed as ‘alternatives to primary aggregates’, in this project we apply the following broad understanding:
Recycled aggregate: Construction and demolition waste (CDW) that has been processed into usable aggregate.
Secondary aggregate: Materials derived from the process of extracting aggregate or other industrial processes.
The availability of alternatives to primary aggregates plays a critical role in the successful uptake of sustainable materials in the construction sector. Through desk-based research and stakeholder engagement, it was found that there are a range of suppliers actively producing alternatives to primary aggregates in Scotland. The most commonly produced alternatives were found to be:
Recycled concrete (RC) and washed recycled sand, which are primarily used in building and housing construction applications
Incineration bottom ash aggregate (IBA), and
Recycled asphalt plannings which are typically deployed into road construction and infrastructure developments.
Case Studies
Provided alongside this report are four case studies of project examples where alternatives to primary aggregates have been used in Scotland. These are:
Case Study 1 – Using alternatives to primary aggregates to extend full fibre broadband across Scotland.
Case Study 2 – Incinerator Bottom Ash in low-carbon concrete for housing development.
Case Study 3 – Treatment of hazardous soil and use of by-products for secondary aggregates.
Case Study 4 – Sustainable development of the haul road to the East Capellie Recycling Wash Plant.
These case studies demonstrate some of the technical innovations and viability points discussed in Sections 3.1 and 3.3. They also highlight some of the outstanding challenges to stimulating wider replication of the examples discussed, such as a lack of publicly available externally verified full environmental impact calculations, and the lack of firm data on available volumes of the alternative materials discussed. These challenges, among others, are discussed in detail in Section 3.4.
Findings
In this section we present the combined outputs and insights from our literature review, stakeholder engagement, and data collection exercises, organised into general learning themes. Examples of how the themes explored here can impact specific businesses are illustrated in within the Case Studies referenced in section 3.4.
Factors driving uptake of alternatives to primary aggregates
During our stakeholder engagement, representatives of Scottish wash plants and producers of construction materials reported that attitudes to alternatives to primary aggregates have changed significantly over the last ten years. While all stakeholders agreed that there will always be demand for primary aggregates, recent innovations demonstrate that alternatives can now be used effectively in more cases than were previously possible.
Factors driving uptake of alternatives to primary aggregates, as discussed in our interviews, include technical innovations and changing attitudes, explored below.
Technical Innovations
There has been significant investment in development of advanced CDW recycling infrastructure across the central belt of Scotland over the last 10-15 years. Interviewees cited an increase in the number of CDW recycling sites equipped with wash plants, multiple crushers and screening technologies which allow for the removal of contaminants and impurities that can negatively impact the strength of concrete produced from recycled aggregates. This is an advancement on mobile crushing plants traditionally used for the management of CDW, which typically involve single crushing and minimal equipment for the removal of unintended constituents (Pacheco & Brito, 2021). Interviewees felt that these innovations have led to a significant increase in the quality and consistency of the recycled aggregates that can be produced. This view was supported in the interviews by a manufacturer of primary aggregates, a quarry and three operators of CDW recycling and wash plants. Examples of the improved technology are discussed in Case Study 4, provided alongside this report.
When producing concrete, key manufacturers, wash plants and major contractors, are now able to benchmark performance, and grade- and cube test alternatives to primary aggregate. The introduction of these new technologies allows them to understand the compressive strength, relative density and overall quality. Concrete cube testing is an essential process for assessing whether a product meets necessary safety standards and regulatory requirements, and whether they are suitable for different applications within construction. As a result of innovations in wash plant, screening and recycling technologies, these stakeholders are able to produce concrete from alternatives to primary aggregates that are able to meet similar standards and specifications to primary aggregates. This expands the scope of where these materials can be applied.
Changing attitudes
It is acknowledged that the development of Net Zero infrastructure and renewable energy projects, will require a significant increase in concrete production. For some stakeholders, this represented a potential opportunity for greater use of recycled and secondary aggregates. While the rapid growth of renewable energy infrastructure has the potential to reduce overall CO2 emissions, research has indicated that the increased demand for high impact materials, such as steel and concrete which both have significant carbon footprints, may undermine the environmental benefits of this infrastructure unless otherwise mitigated (Rueda-Bayona, et al., 2022). An interviewed manufacturer of primary aggregates and construction materials noted that they expect this to expand the portfolio of projects where alternatives to primary aggregates may be applied, provided that sufficient quality assurance and standards are in place. They noted that where they had the assets and the capability to supply alternative aggregates, these were being used in nearly every case due to demand from clients motivated by Net Zero targets, such as Tier 1 infrastructure contractors[1], Local Authority or residential clients.
Interviewees also noted that attitudes have been shaped by the negative impacts COVID-19 and Brexit had on the supply of construction materials. Following the easing of lockdown in 2022, construction projects and demand for construction materials surged. These events created scarcity in the availability of construction materials, particularly cement, leading to fluctuations in prices and long lead-in times for primary aggregates. Due to significant shortage of construction materials and significant lead-in times and costs associated with procuring these materials, Tier 1 infrastructure and housebuilding projects looked to recycled/recovered construction materials to fill the gap. Practical experience with recycled aggregates helped to dispel concerns regarding the quality and practical application of recycled materials.
Environmental impact
The construction sector is the world’s largest consumer of raw materials. According to UNEP and the World Research Institute, buildings account for 40% of all waste generated by volume, 40% material resource use by volume and between 33-37% of all GHG emissions (World Resources Institute, 2016) (UNEP, 2023). In addition, the extraction of primary aggregates, such as rock, sand and gravel generate significant environmental impacts on local biodiversity and habitats. Open-pit mining necessitates the removal of topsoil and vegetation to access the materials that lie beneath. In the UK, up to 22% of sand and gravel is extracted from marine dredging (Mineral Products Association, n.d.). Whilst controlled and responsible marine aggregate extraction would always seek to minimise adverse impacts, there is widely accepted potential for harm to marine habitats from aggregate extraction (United Nations Environment Programme Finance Initiative, 2022). Both activities generate severe negative impacts on animal and plant species and can contribute to sedimentation and erosion of riverbanks and coastlines (UKGBC, 2025).
There is a growing body of evidence that alternatives to primary aggregates can deliver improved environmental performance compared to traditional materials, particularly offering a lower carbon output. Through a rapid review of the literature, we found evidence on lower emissions associated with carbon-reinforced RC industrial flooring (Luthin, et al., 2023), recycled aggregate concrete (Hasheminezhad, et al., 2024) and concrete mixes (Adesina, 2020).
In a study carried out by Luthin (2023), the sustainability performance of a carbon-reinforced RC industrial floor was measured and assessed during its development using the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI) and Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) methods. These tools were used to evaluate both recycled and virgin materials, respectively. Linear resource flows refer to the traditional approach of resource use, where materials are extracted, used, and then discarded as waste, with minimal or no reuse properties. In contrast, circular resource flows aim to extend the lifecycle of materials by prioritising, reuse, recovery, and recycling, reducing the need for virgin material extraction and waste generation.
The study carried out by Luthin (2023) investigated and analysed the recyclability of a floor that that was produced with an RC mixture as the foundation material for an industrial floor, this was then measured and evaluated upon its strength, performance, and carbon profile. The LCA showed that the reinforced RC industrial floor outperformed traditional concrete in environmental performance, achieving a lower Global Warming Potential (GWP). It was shown that the GWP for producing 1 tonne of RC flooring had an equivalent of 80.3 kg CO2, compared to 195 kg CO2 equivalent for 1 tonne of precast slabs (Luthin, et al., 2023).
Additionally, the MCI assessment found that the circular performance reflected a similar result, with the reinforced RC floor accounting for a notably high MCI score of 0.8184 (82%) (with a score of 0 being completely linear, and 1 being completely circular). This score reflects the significant use of recycled materials in its production and the potential for further recycling at the end of its lifecycle. In comparison, a new concrete floor composed entirely of virgin materials would score close to 0 on the MCI scale, as it would rely entirely on linear resource flows, using new raw materials with little to no recycling or reuse involved. The MCI score of 82% demonstrates how effectively the RC floor minimises the use of virgin resources and maximises the use of alternatives. Results like this, however, should be read in conjunction with other aspects of the compared materials. For example, this study also found that the RC floor would be more expensive to install, and has higher levels of human toxicity than the precast slab option. This highlights that all material choices should be made based on as full a consideration of all factors as possible.
This assessment is supported by Hasheminezhad (2024) who conducted a similar study, reviewing the LCA and environmental performance of RC in comparison to traditional concrete materials. The study aimed to assess and highlight the GHG emissions and energy consumption associated with the entire lifecycle of concrete resources. This included evaluating the impacts across all phases of its use, including material extraction, production, transportation, usage, and end-of-life management (Hasheminezhad, et al., 2024). The study found that recycled aggregate mixtures of concrete do require marginally higher quantities of energy and cement than primary aggregates. This is often required to compensate for the lower strength and higher water consumption of the recycled materials involved. However, the research underlined the substantial environmental benefits of using recycled aggregate mixtures due to lower carbon emissions, especially when the recycled aggregates are sourced locally. This is due to the use of recycled materials significantly reducing the demand for virgin resources, such as natural sand and gravel, while also diverting CDW from landfills, both of which produce significant associated GHG emissions.
The Hasheminezhad et al. (2024) study also highlighted the GWP differences between the two concrete materials, showing that the GWP of RC was lower by up to 15% compared to natural aggregates, particularly when recycled aggregates completely replaced all natural components within the concrete mix. The whole life assessment outlines the importance and influence of energy consumption generated through extraction and transportation practices. With a particular focus on the value-chain of the resource and the importance of locally sourced materials, embodied emissions are a critical factor when assessing the carbon reduction potential of alternative materials. Embodied emissions relate to the GHG emissions associated with a product or material across its entire life-cycle, including sourcing and processing of the materials, and eventual end-of-life treatment. Therefore, these comparisons should factor all impacts associated with extraction, use and disposal.
The importance of reducing emissions in the transportation of aggregates is also highlighted in a review by Adesina (2020). The report recognises the potential for all aggregates to improve their carbon impact, and the major role in emissions profiles of cement content levels. They also note that the construction industry has made steady and effective progress in reducing emissions throughout the lifecycle of concrete mixtures by prioritising the extraction and efficient use of locally sourced aggregates. By adopting a more strategic approach to the processing and transportation of recycled aggregates, the industry can continue to effectively address and mitigate the challenge of high embodied carbon emissions (Adesina, 2020). This potential was emphasised by several of the stakeholder interviewees for this study as an important contributor to Scotland’s overall environmental ambitions.
It is also important to consider the environmental impacts generated through the transport of primary and alternative aggregates from their point of extraction or production to their point of use. As discussed in sections 3.1.1 and 3.4.4, wash plants for the recycling aggregates are heavily concentrated in the central belt of Scotland. Therefore, the logistical feasibility of supplying recycled or alternative aggregates is limited by distance, as after a certain distance, it becomes uneconomical to supply these materials via truck due to transportation costs. Similarly, after a certain distance, the environmental benefits of alternatives to primary aggregates are outweighed by the emissions generated through transport.
The outcome of an LCA assessment of CDW recycling completed by Ricardo in 2021 for Natural Resources Wales[2] found that delivery distances of more than 34km from originating site resulted in higher GHG emissions than were saved from the substitution of virgin materials. This break-even distance will increase as transport is gradually electrified and the electricity grid becomes less carbon intensive. This underlines the point that thorough LCA analysis is the only way to accurately reflect the environmental impacts, positive or negative, of any business decision.
Technical viability
Academic discussion
As discussed in the challenges section 3.4 below, there is a widely held perception that recycled or secondary materials can struggle to meet performance requirement standards. Whilst this will clearly be true for some materials, it is not the case for all, and it is important to be able to demonstrate successful use with technical data (Dhemaied, et al., 2024). There is a body of research which focusses on strength, durability, and workability of CDW-derived aggregates in infrastructure projects, with many studies showing promising results for specific applications. Examples are discussed below and in the case studies provided alongside this report.
Recycled sand can replace natural sand in certain construction contexts without compromising quality. In the Virgin Media O2 project under Scotland’s Full Fibre Charter (Scottish Government, 2022b), sand aggregate derived from CDW was successfully used in telecommunications infrastructure, highlighting the role recycled sand can play in sustainable resource management. Case Study 1 provides more information on this example.
Alternatives to primary aggregates have shown strong potential in asphalt applications, particularly for road construction. The UK’s first carbon-neutral road improvement project employed recycled asphalt aggregate to reduce its carbon footprint significantly (Scottish Construction Now, 2021). Additionally, Tarmac’s biogenic asphalt deployed in this project uses plant-based binders with recycled aggregate to achieve effective carbon capture, reducing reliance on petroleum-based materials. This innovative approach demonstrates the potential for CDW aggregates to maintain or enhance the mechanical properties needed for asphalt in road applications, supporting a low-carbon, sustainable future for Scottish road infrastructure (Tarmac, 2023).
RC is a sustainable construction material, primarily produced as a by-product from construction and demolition activities. It is composed of crushed concrete from structured components such as buildings, roads, and pavements, which is then sorted, cleaned and crushed into aggregate (typically between 2-4mm in diameter). Several studies, as discussed below, confirm the technical feasibility of using CDW-derived aggregates in low-carbon concrete formulations, meeting performance criteria for infrastructure applications while promoting sustainability. According to a review conducted by Han et al. (2023), suitably treated RC can act as a sufficient alternative for virgin concrete materials, with strategic adaptations to mortar content and density in recycled aggregates presenting durability and mechanical benefits to the material. This review highlighted that pre-treatment processes, such as the combined usage of lime soaking and carbonation[3], can also improve the performance and properties of RC within construction. This is both supported and tempered by Thomas et al. (2018), who conducted a performance analysis review measuring the technical feasibility of RC, covering parameters such as the strength and permeability of concrete mixed with recycled materials. The review found that while recycled aggregates show great potential in being a suitable alternative to virgin materials, the strength can be compromised should RC aggregate content exceed 25% of the overall material. However, the review explains that this can be adapted through modifications in the concrete mix design phase, which would be necessary to address changes in the material’s physical and mechanical properties.
Stakeholder opinion
Amongst the stakeholders interviewed for this study, there was broad agreement that the use of alternatives to primary aggregates has been limited due to concerns among construction companies and potential customers regarding quality and consistency in supply of the materials. It was felt that prior experiences, where the quality of materials used had not delivered the required final functionality, have led to clients being wary and sceptical of specifying for anything other than primary aggregates.
Discussion of the current and future situation, however, revealed a mix of viewpoints. There were several reiterations of the opinion that, beyond uses such as landscaping and backfill of drainage and cable trenches, virgin stone will always be preferable to clients. On the other hand, one producer of both primary and recycled aggregates felt that there has been more market acceptance of recycled products over the last four years. As discussed in section 3.1, this has been driven through the normalisation of alternatives to primary aggregates seen during the COVID-19 pandemic and resulting supply chain difficulties, alongside growing recognition of the fact that modern wash plants can produce very high purity output materials. One producer gave an example of a road construction project on their own site, using entirely recycled materials, which has seen 15,000 truck-loads, conveying 0.5M tonnes of materials, without any quality issues (please see Case Study 4 for more detail). This supports the summarised views from the literature discussed above. While there will continue to be the possibility for impurities and deleterious material to be present in alternatives to primary aggregates, it is not correct to assume this is always the case. It was felt amongst some stakeholders that, were robust testing and certification procedures in place to demonstrate how alternative materials comply with industry quality standards, there would be more comfort in their use for a wider range of applications.
These technical considerations, alongside potential environmental and economic benefits, play a critical role in shaping perceptions. Early involvement of client and design stakeholders in planning and decision-making processes is crucial for addressing specific concerns about the material’s use, while effective communication strategies are essential for securing support from both public and private sector clients and project sponsors.
Challenges and barriers to the increased uptake of secondary and alternative aggregates
As part of the movement to incentivise the development of sustainable practices within the construction sector, the broader adoption of non-virgin materials relies not only on their availability and relative demand, but also overcoming several barriers and challenges within the industry. The challenges identified through this study, and highlighted in the separately provided case studies, are categorised and discussed below, along with some initial ideas for options to begin tackling them.
Data challenges
The most significant barrier to developing a full understanding of what is both possible and practical is the lack of availability of robust quantitative data on alternatives to primary aggregates in Scotland. One of the initial ambitions of this project was to forecast the potential contribution to GHG reduction targets of an increase in use of recycled or secondary aggregates in the Scottish construction sector. To calculate this, primary data was sought from key producers and sources of alternatives to primary aggregates in Scotland, including established quarries, wash plants and demolition and excavation companies. The aim was to gain a baseline of annual sales in Scotland. This collated dataset would form a baseline of the potential supply of alternatives to primary aggregates, which would then be mapped against expected demand forecasts, both geographically and volumetrically, to calculate a proportion of how much forecast demand could be met. To calculate the GHG emissions associated with these volumes of secondary and recycled materials, we planned to apply GHG emission factors sourced from various standard approaches.
During the data collection phase, a simplified data collection form was sent to 36 suppliers of primary, and alternatives to primary, aggregates and demolition and excavation companies to request data on the types and volumes of materials sold annually. The research team conducted three rounds of emails and two follow-up calls to each identified supplier over a two-month period to request their participation in the study. Engagement with industry stakeholders was supported by ClimateXChange and members of the Scottish Aggregate Tax Bill Advisory Group (SATBAG).
Despite a large number of suppliers being contacted, the research team received minimal complete responses. There were several reasons for this, including:
Contacted suppliers had limited capacity to provide the requested data due to resourcing constraints or competing deadlines.
Contacted suppliers were concerned about potential commercial sensitivity in sharing the data.
Contacted suppliers did not see the commercial value in participating in the study, despite the relevance of the Scottish Aggregate Tax.
As a result, the limited primary data collected would not have been representative or robust enough to form a baseline for forecasting the future supply potential of alternatives to primary aggregates. Therefore, in agreement with ClimateXChange and the Scottish Government, the efforts to develop a GHG reduction forecast were discontinued and replaced by a focus on stakeholder interviews.
The challenge, and importance, of data availability regarding volumes of recycled and alternative aggregates was reiterated throughout our stakeholder interview phase. This interview phase incorporated four suppliers of recycled and alternative aggregate products contacted during the data collection, and seven public sector, industry and regulatory bodies. The purpose of these interviews was to gain in-depth insights into the key challenges facing the uptake of recycled and secondary aggregates (see Appendix A for further details).
During these interviews, it was noted that data availability inhibits the sector’s ability to forecast the potential environmental benefits of incentivising these alternative aggregates. It also limits understanding of what is possible and practical to aim for when considering the question of supply versus demand. There was a general consensus across the stakeholders interviewed that understanding the volumes available in the secondary market is key, but that such understanding does not currently exist at a sufficient level of accuracy. The difficulty was highlighted as particularly prevalent in Scotland, where interviewees noted suppliers are not used to being surveyed annually. While it is understood that the British Geological Survey is conducted every four years (e.g., in 2019 and 2023), the granularity of detail regarding the origin and characterisation of primary, recycled and alternative aggregates is not particularly well-defined.
To address this challenge, a systematic and robust data collection and reporting mechanism would enable confident, evidence-based decision making, both for Government and for industry members. Ideally, it should provide sufficient granularity to develop a quantitative local authority-level understanding on CDW arisings and volumes of alternatives to primary aggregates produced, stored and sold. Such a system would be complex and expensive to design and implement. The possibility of successful deployment would be maximised through collaborative public-private development.
Potential limited scope for increased use of alternatives to primary aggregates.
In contrast with the potential positive environmental impact and technical viability of alternatives to primary aggregates, is the belief of some stakeholders that there is minimal scope for a significant increase in their use. The potential for increased use of alternatives to primary aggregates needs to be balanced between what is possible and what is practical. The Mineral Products Association’s report, Aggregates demand and supply in Great Britain: Scenarios for 2035 (2022), posits that recycled and secondary aggregates are unlikely to meet projected demand in alignment with construction trends. This is due to the bulk of their supply being directly tied to demolition activity, and the fact that most suitable CDW is already being reused.
This sentiment was backed up in some of our interview conversations with sector bodies. They asserted that, in their estimation, 90% of recoverable CDW is diverted from landfill already and therefore opportunities for significant increases in recycled content are limited beyond incremental improvements. Indeed, the point was made by several interviewees that no-one in any industry likes unnecessary cost and waste, so for many years materials have been reused or repurposed on-site where possible to save costs. As such, construction sites have been adopting the principles of circularity without necessarily reporting it as such. Counter to this, among other stakeholders interviewed with experience in recycled aggregate production, and CDW management in general, there was the opinion that there is still potential for an increase in CDW diversion from landfill. One interviewee confirmed from direct experience that they could easily divert a lot more CDW from landfill and that they have the latent site capacity to process it into recycled aggregate. The only reason this is not done at present is that market demand is not sufficient to warrant the additional processing cost. Another interviewee noted that they have been able to significantly increase capacity since opening their first wash plant in 2017. In this time, they have developed facilities able to handle a much dirtier feedstock and process up to 300,000 tonnes per year at a rate of 150 tonnes an hour.
Addressing the data challenges discussed in Section 3.4.1 should provide clarity on how much scope there is for increased use of alternatives to primary aggregates. If there is found to be additional capacity, then efforts could be made to stimulate demand. These could include championing the role of alternatives to primary aggregates in meeting Net Zero targets through building or collating an evidence base of verified LCA studies or reports which demonstrate positive environmental impact when deployed appropriately.
Another significant opportunity to incentivise the use of alternatives to primary aggregates is through leading-by-example. Through public-sector procurement of relevant projects, mandates and design briefs could be developed to stipulate for, or give appreciable scoring consideration to, the use of alternatives where safe and technically appropriate to do so. The re-released Net Zero Public Sector Buildings Standard (2023) provides an example of how an initiative like this could be developed. While it does provide an embodied carbon (i.e. the emissions embodied in the materials used and construction activities themselves) target for new buildings, it is voluntary and does not stipulate specific measures or materials (Scottish Government, 2023). Opportunities to work within this existing framework, or via other public procurement or planning routes, could be explored and developed.
Challenges due to industry standards
A key factor limiting the uptake of recycled and alternative aggregates was found to be restrictions imposed by industry standards, which are then cascaded into procurement specifications. These established standards are instated to ensure safety, durability, and performance. These standards are designed to regulate the properties and quality of both natural and recycled aggregates across various applications. Key standards are listed in Table 2Error! Reference source not found., below.
Standard
Relevance:
BS EN 12620
Aggregates for concrete, outlining requirements for materials used in concrete production.
BS EN 13242
Aggregates for unbound and hydraulically bound materials, applicable to civil engineering work and road construction.
BS EN 933
Test methods for geometric properties of aggregates, covering particle size, shape, and other physical attributes.
BS 8500-2
Complementary to BS EN 206, this specifies additional requirements for aggregates in UK concrete applications.
WRAP Quality Protocol
Governing the performance standards for recycled aggregates, ensuring their safe and reliable use.
PAS 2050
Focused on assessing the carbon footprint of recycled aggregates.
BS EN 13108
Aggregates for bituminous mixtures, regulating reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) for road surfacing and structural layers.
EA Quality Protocol for IBAA
Specific to Incinerator Bottom Ash Aggregate, ensuring environmental safety and suitability for reuse in construction.
Table 2: Key standards relevant to recycled and natural aggregates
It is important to note that these standards have been developed to ensure the structural integrity, durability and safety of built infrastructure. Any increases to these thresholds must be evidence-based, appropriate for the product’s application, and supported by industry-wide consultation. These limits have been established due to well-grounded concerns regarding the potential of deleterious and contaminant materials making their way into recycled feedstock, which may compromise the safety of the structures. In addition, it was broadly acknowledged by all stakeholders interviewed that while recycled and secondary aggregates have many good properties, they will not fully replace demand for virgin aggregates, which will still be required for some applications. Nonetheless, there was concern among producers of recycled and secondary aggregates that existing standards and testing regimes no longer reflect the potential quality and performance characteristics of alternative aggregates produced through modern recycling techniques. While industry standards for the use of aggregates set an upper threshold of 30% of recycled content rate within concrete, some stakeholders reported confidence in the potential of increasing this upper limit without compromising the structural integrity of the concrete produced. If a concrete product contains a recycled aggregate content higher than this threshold, they can only be sold as an unspecified product and as such will not meet procurement specifications.
The feeling from interviewed producers of both primary and recycled or secondary aggregates is that these limitations may restrict market demand. This issue is compounded by the fact that, largely, project specifications require aggregates to meet specific quality and industry standards for which it is difficult for recycled and secondary aggregates, and secondary aggregate containing products such as RC, to demonstrate full compliance. It was noted during the interviews that a lack of relevant standards reflecting current industry practice for alternatives to primary aggregates may contribute to concerns around potential liability if a fault occurs following completion of a project. As a result, engineers and planners may be less inclined to approve these materials for use, and contractors and procurers may not integrate these materials into contracts and structural drawings. Nonetheless, while there was broad agreement that under the current suite of industry standards it is not possible to accurately test the suitability of non-primary material for some structural works, standards and testing regimes do exist to assess the suitability of these materials for non-structural works, such as pipe-bedding, cable laying and landscaping works.
Moreover, stakeholders noted that alternatives to primary aggregates are often not explicitly included within procurement specifications for public or private construction projects. This has the effect of limiting market demand. It is possibly due to a lack of appropriate standards and testing regimes to discern between high-quality and low-quality alternatives to primary aggregates, which for some stakeholders may contribute to misconceptions regarding the perceived risk of using recycled aggregates. In some cases, it was noted that if procurement specifications require a certain percentage of “recycled content” to be used, contractors may feel more comfortable fulfilling this requirement with lower-impact materials used for furnishings (e.g. wood, polypropylene, vinyl flooring), rather than with aggregates, which may deliver greater reductions in GHG emissions.
Almost all stakeholders agreed that the experience of having low-quality recycled aggregate on the market has contributed to misconceptions regarding the purity and performance achievable through innovative modern technological processing techniques. However, significant investment has recently gone into development of quality control processes and technologies to remove contaminants and increase the purity, and therefore quality, of outputs. This improvement and development has thereby expanded their potential uses for other applications.
For example, an operator of a wash plant noted that traditionally contractors used mobile crushers to produce recycled and secondary aggregates from construction, demolition and excavation activities. These crushers often used dry screening to filter out contaminants. However, due to Scotland’s wet climate – and, in the case of excavation, the silt and clay material common in Scotland’s geology – the crushed feed material would often become sticky, making it difficult to remove contaminants and ultimately reducing the purity of the output. Modern wash plants, on the other hand, are often equipped with multiple crushers, washing and screening technology to crush and effectively segregate aggregates from these contaminants. In the case of excavation activities, this also allows for the collection of the silt and clay as a valuable by-product. Similarly, an interviewed producer of construction materials noted that clients and contractors may not be aware that this sector is rapidly evolving, and that technologies are coming online that can, for example, extract the cementitious properties of concrete and recover the concrete used.
In conclusion, current standards and specifications for recycled and secondary aggregates are felt by industry stakeholders to be outdated or restrictive, failing to support the technological innovations and resultant industry confidence. As noted above, while demand for recycled and secondary aggregates has traditionally been lower than primary aggregates due to concerns regarding quality and consistency in supply, there is a sentiment among some interviewees that this has changed as a result of research and development investment and innovation, leading to significant improvements in the quality of materials that can be produced from CDW. While the structural integrity of built infrastructure must not be compromised, to enable broader recycled and secondary aggregate adoption, updates to standards and specifications are essential to reflect current practice and provide guidance on the materials’ structural performance.
To address these challenges, there is an opportunity to review current industry standards, to understand if there is scope to develop and update them to better reflect modern recycling capabilities and the quality of alternative aggregate products they can produce. Additionally, as with the option to develop a library of proof of environmental performance discussed in Section 3.4.2, a suite of case studies could be built or collated to demonstrate good practice and the technical appropriateness of alternatives to primary aggregates.
Operational and market challenges
There was broad disagreement among the stakeholders interviewed for this study regarding the need to provide additional support for the uptake of alternatives to primary aggregates. This was due to contrasting views regarding the perceived ‘saturation’ of recycling and wash plants across the central belt of Scotland, the operational barriers of expanding aggregate recycling facilities to rural areas, and the challenges in segregating CDW at source.
It was felt that the saturation of state-of-the-art facilities (e.g. wash plants), combined with a lack of demand for non-primary aggregates for reasons discussed above, means some of these businesses are sitting on significant amounts of washed concrete, recycled sand and gravel, with no off-take market (i.e. customers to buy their product). Indeed, four interviewees noted they could significantly increase their recycled output if there was sufficient market demand to justify it.
Within this context, some stakeholders representing primary aggregate suppliers felt that if the Scottish Government used financial or legislative support such as increasing the tax rate applicable under the Scottish Aggregates Tax to generate market demand and incentivise the use of recycled or alternatives to primary aggregates, the primary aggregate sector would be placed at a competitive disadvantage. These state-of-the-art facilities require millions of pounds of investment, which creates a barrier to entry for primary aggregate suppliers seeking to move into the recycled aggregate market due to sustainability and Net Zero benefits. In addition, these stakeholders felt that as some recycled aggregate companies operate their own fleets, they may be more readily able to drop the price of the recycled aggregates in order to sell excess stock, which may contribute to increased market volatility and reduce the competitiveness of primary aggregates.
On the other hand, producers of recycled- and alternatives to primary aggregates felt that their competitiveness was overstated due to the operational and geographic limitations of their business models. It was noted that traditional quarrying allows significant volumes of primary aggregates to be sourced (e.g. through drilling and blasting) and sent out for delivery with lower overheads and lower investment in infrastructure. This allows them to compete favourably against producers of recycled aggregates that require investment in high-specification wash plants, trash screens, and technology to grade and segregate feedstocks.
In addition, suppliers of alternatives to primary aggregates interviewed noted they were also constrained geographically, as their infrastructure needs to be situated in a catchment area where there is a high volume of CDW being generated. This makes competition with traditional primary aggregate suppliers challenging. This is especially true in rural regions outside of Scotland’s central belt, where it is currently not commercially viable to operate wash plants or supply non-primary aggregates due to a lack of non-primary material inputs, and the haulage and fuel costs associated with transporting these to customers. One interviewee noted the fuel costs may be subject to change, if they were able to transition their fleet to electric vehicles supplied by renewable sources. However, this remains a significant operational barrier.
It was generally agreed by interviewed stakeholders and within the supporting literature, that to maximise the financial and environmental benefits of using alternatives to primary aggregates, these should be used as close to the source as possible (e.g. demolition sites or construction sites) (Wang & al., 2024) (Santolini & al., 2024). However, there was concern that availability of recycled and secondary feedstock was also often constrained by resistance within construction and demolition companies to appropriately segregate materials at source, due to concerns regarding feasibility and costs. There was broad agreement that this was due to the structural and commercial pressures that construction and demolition companies face when delivering a contract. It was explained that demolition contracts tend to be awarded for efficiency and speed to avoid financial penalties for not completing a project within the timeframe set by the agreed upon planning permissions. This can lead to a tendency for operators to make business decisions based on the belief that the removal of specific structural elements and the use of screening technology to facilitate reuse and recycling of aggregates will be time consuming and generate additional, unwanted costs.
One specific example is the lack of on-site removal and screening being a key barrier to the recycling of flat glass. Currently, the Scottish Landfill Tax provides little financial incentive to recycle flat glass recovered from buildings as this material qualifies for the lower rate of landfill tax of £4.05/ tonne from 1 April 2025 (previously £3.30/tonne). As a result, recovered glass is crushed for use as a low-value input for aggregates in road construction or landfilled. British Glass (an industry body representing the UK glass industry) noted this is a significant lost opportunity to maximise the value generated from glass recycling, minimise avoidable waste, and reduce GHG emissions. Glass can be continuously recycled and remelted into new glass products without loss of quality, provided it is appropriately segregated to avoid impurities. Their estimates indicate up to 200,000 tonnes of flat glass is generated by the UK demolition and construction sector. If flat glass was diverted from landfill and remelted into new glass products, this could save 60,000 tonnes of CO2 per year. Replacing virgin raw materials with 10% recycled glass saves 3% of furnace energy when producing glass products (British Glass, 2024).
While there are currently no flat glass recycling facilities in Scotland, British Glass emphasised that there is significant market demand from the Scottish food and drink manufacturing sector, particularly Scottish whisky and gin distilleries, for recycled glass materials in order to reduce their Scope 1 emissions (those that are directly generated through their operations). As such, they underlined the clear synergies and shared economic benefits of greater cross-sector collaboration for the recovery and segregation of flat glass products (e.g. windows) for recycling by the food and drink sector into glass packaging (e.g. bottles). This would only be feasible if appropriate on-site practices were implemented by stakeholders within the construction and demolition sector.
To mitigate these operational challenges, stakeholders interviewed felt that the costs of the segregation and processing of recovered aggregates and glass could be passed onto the client, especially if this was mandated or supported by legislation. A change in planning permissions or adjustments to the Scottish Landfill Tax that increases the cost of disposal were both suggested as potentially significant levers for change.
Finally, it should be noted that several interviewees reflected the view that wash plants should be seen as complementary to, and not competitive against, the existing producers of primary materials. Through sector collaboration it was perceived that increasing use of alternatives to primary aggregates would contribute to the extension of the useful lifetime of quarries, while producing materials that may not directly compete with materials derived from hard rock quarries, such as clean crushed stone.
The market stimulation efforts and ideas to tackle challenges due to industry standards discussed in the above two sections would go some way to tackling the challenges discussed here as well. To address the issue of alternatives to primary aggregates only really making environment and commercial sense if used relatively closely to where they are produced, effort could be made to support the development of recycling infrastructure in areas away from the already well-served central belt of Scotland.
Fiscal factors
There was broad agreement among stakeholders that, currently, the cost of purchasing alternatives to primary aggregates is comparable to that of primary aggregates. Yet, despite this similarity in pricing, there is a preference for primary aggregates in the market. Our findings indicate this is driven by the quality issue perceptions discussed above and the associated costs and challenges of ensuring compliance with required standards (e.g., screening, sorting, testing). However, there could be two areas of flexibility that could support a shift of this market dynamic in favour of alternatives to primary aggregates.
These are:
Tax rate adjustments for primary aggregates: The Government could choose to raise the tax rate on primary aggregates to further strengthen the incentive to use alternatives to primary aggregates.
Subsidies for alternatives to primary aggregates: Businesses that reduce the use of primary aggregates by incorporating alternatives into their operations could be made eligible for a subsidy scheme. Payments could enable businesses to lower their costs and for these cost savings to be passed on to customers. This could lead to more competitive pricing for products made with alternatives compared to those made with primary aggregates.
Tax rate adjustments for primary aggregates
The Scottish Government’s review of evidence and policy options for the Scottish Aggregates Tax (2020b) conducted an illustrative modelling exercise (based on tax rates at the time) for four tax rate scenarios:
Option 1 – High levy rate (Tax increase scenario): Under this option, the Scottish Aggregates Tax rate is set above the UK levy rate.
Option 2 – Low levy rate (Tax decrease scenario): Under this option, the Scottish Aggregates Tax rate is set below the UK levy rate.
Option 3 – Scottish Government baseline (No tax scenario): The levy rate is set to zero under this option, to model the impacts of a ‘do nothing’ approach.
Option 4 – New landfill tax band for aggregates (Landfill scenario): The levy rate is kept at the same level as the UK levy rate, while creating an additional band of landfill tax for aggregates which is higher than the rate for landfilling inert materials.
The results of this modelling are reproduced in Table 3 below.
BaU
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Aggregates levy rate
£2.00
£2.50
£1.50
£0.00
£2.00
Landfill tax for inert materials
£2.90
£2.90
£2.90
£2.90
£2.90
New landfill tax band for aggregates
–
–
–
–
£3.80
Demand for aggregates
–
Decrease
Increase
Increase
Unchanged
Production of primary aggregates
–
Decrease
Increase
Increase
Decrease
Imports
–
Decrease
Increase
Increase
Decrease
Exports
–
Increase
Decrease
Decrease
Unchanged
Production of recycled aggregates
–
Increase
Unchanged
Unchanged
Increase
Table 3: Modelled tax rates and impacts under different policy scenarios (reproduced from (Scottish Government, 2020b))
Unsurprisingly, the modelled outcomes for raising the tax rate for primary aggregates and for introducing additional costs for landfilling of aggregates (Options 1 and 4 respectively) show a decrease in the use of primary aggregates and an increase in the use of alternatives. These are expected results for the unambiguous financial interventions into the market modelled. However, the level of redistribution of total demand between primary and alternatives aggregates that is actually possible, and the resultant worth of that compared to additional administrative costs, remains unclear. The 2020 Scottish Government review highlights that 87% of CDW is already recycled in Scotland, and the challenges discussed in Sections 3.4.1 and 3.4.2 above corroborate and augment this note of caution. Until robust and reliable Scotland-specific data on volumes of alternatives to primary aggregates is collected, any perceived benefits of tax rate changes will be somewhat speculative.
Subsidies for alternatives to primary aggregates
While alternatives to primary aggregates will be already be exempt from the Scottish Aggregates Tax, there is the potential to further incentivise their use by offering a subsidy. Potential recipients, such as those economic operators placing alternatives to primary aggregates on the market, would need to comply with any systems set up to verify amounts being claimed, so introducing some administrative burden.
The potential impacts and costs of introducing a subsidy system which aims to offer a positive incentive for using alternatives to primary aggregates are impossible to robustly estimate without access to granular volume data. Any potential scheme itself could require claimants to collect, store and report data on alternatives deployed. This potentially could include volumes and rates of CDW reused on site, capturing material which is not currently reflected in standard waste reporting as it never officially becomes waste. While this would incentivise the use of alternative aggregates and avoid the negative associations of disincentivising primary aggregates through the use of a tax increase, it would necessitate increased administrative and resource burden on both the scheme administrator and relevant claimants. Further work would be required to conduct a thorough assessment of the viability of any such scheme, which would, again, necessitate much more complete data than is currently available.
Summary learnings and next steps
The learnings drawn from the evidence review and potential actions for policymakers are summarised below:
Alignment with net zero targets: The Scottish Aggregates Tax could emphasise the potential role of alternatives to primary materials in meeting net zero targets in the construction sector. This could be relevant for other sectors that may have a use for these materials, such as food and drink manufacturing. This is particularly relevant for the GHG reduction potential of recycled aggregates, as well as for the recycling of flat glass. These environmental benefits can be evidenced through lifecycle assessments, which demonstrate the carbon savings potential of using recycled aggregates and glass.
Data accessibility and transparency: Significant data gaps exist in the monitoring of CDW generation and resultant availability of materials that could be used as alternatives to primary aggregates. This might complicate the implementation of any potential future Scottish Aggregates Tax rate changes and generate reasoned resistance from affected stakeholders. Robust data on waste arisings generated from CDW projects, and the types, quantities and value of alternatives to primary aggregates produced and sold, would enable policymakers to more accurately monitor and understand market dynamics for these types of materials. Given the resource demands of additional data collection, we suggest that systems and processes would need to be developed collaboratively between government and industry partners to promote engagement and adherence.
R&D investment: Continued investment in advanced recycling infrastructure can improve the quality of recycled aggregates. Public-funded R&D could support existing recycling facilities and develop recycling capacity among primary aggregate suppliers, particularly in underserved rural areas.
Addressing quality perceptions: Sector wide misconceptions regarding secondary and recycled materials, often based on historic experience, limit market demand. Public sector and industry partners could seek out targeted opportunities to emphasise successful case studies and promote quality assurance practices.
Updating standards and specifications: Industry standards restrict the use of alternatives to primary aggregates. Investment in R&D to review and potentially update industry standards could better reflect modern recycling capabilities. This could also contribute to addressing the quality perceptions discussed above. This could be complemented by engagement with standards bodies, such as British Standards, National Highways and Transport Scotland.
Capacity building and market demand: Policymakers could capitalise on latent capacity for recycling facilities could increase their capacity by implementing mandates and incentives to require and encouraging the use of alternatives to primary aggregates (e.g. in public sector procurement), where safe and technically appropriate to do so.
Facilitate cross-sector collaboration: Policymakers could support innovation to incentivise cross-sector collaboration for the recovery and recycling of flat glass from construction and demolition projects.
Policymakers should continue to effectively engage with key stakeholder groups within the aggregate industry to ensure any measures, including changes to tax rates and provision of financial incentives, are feasible and accepted. Additionally, the majority of the barriers discussed in this report will require engagement and the development of a mutual understanding with wider stakeholder groups. These include:
Private sector customers of primary and alternatives to primary aggregates, including Tier 1 contractors, homebuilding contractors, landscapers and relevant trade associations.
Public sector customers of primary and alternatives to primary aggregates, including local authorities and relevant public sector procurement representatives.
Relevant industries that may benefit from recycled aggregates, such as the Scottish food and drink sector for the recycling and valorisation of recovered flat glass.
Relevant industry standards bodies and research institutions to review feasibility of updating existing standards for alternatives to primary aggregates.
In summary, while there is a bank of academic, grey literature and stakeholder-opinion evidence that alternatives to primary aggregates can play a practicable and impactful role in reducing GHG emissions in Scotland, there is not universal agreement in the industry on these points. There are significant challenges and knowledge gaps to overcome. There are questions about the feasibility of increasing the proportion of alternatives to primary aggregates deployed, from both the available supply and market demand angles. There are deeply held reservations about the ability of alternatives to primary aggregates to provide the required technical performance, compounded by a sentiment that industry standards do not accurately reflect current recycling capabilities. Finally, there is a clear lack of robust, granular, Scottish-specific data to provide unequivocal clarity on several of the contested points. This study has detailed the key points of these challenges, their roots, and suggested some potential options to begin tackling them to facilitate a move to a more circular economy and sustainable construction sector in Scotland.
References
Adesina, A., 2020. Recent advances in the concrete industry to reduce its carbon dioxide emissions. Envrionmental Challenges, Issue 1.
British Glass, 2024. Make windows not waste, s.l.: s.n.
Circle Economy, 2023. Circularity Gap Report Scotland. [Online] Available at: https://www.circularity-gap.world/scotland [Accessed October 2024].
Dhemaied, R., Soliman, A. & and Lotfy, A., 2024. Global Perspectives on Recycled Concrete Aggregates (RCA): A Comprehensive Review of Worldwide Applications and Best Practices. Procedia Structural Integrity, Volume 64, p. 343–351.
Han, S., Zhao, S., Lu, D. & Wang, D., 2023. Performance Improvement of Recycled Concrete Aggregates and Their Potential Applications in Infrastructure: A Review. Buildings. Buildings, 13(6), p. 1411.
Hasheminezhad, A., Daniel King, H. C. & Kim, S., 2024. Comparative life cycle assessment of natural and recycled aggregate concrete: A review. Science of The Total Environment, Volume 950.
House of Commons, 2022. Building to Net Zero: Costing Carbon in Construction. [Online] Available at: https://committees.parliament.uk/publications/30124/documents/174271/default/ [Accessed October 2024].
Luthin, A., Crawford, R. H. & Traverso, M., 2023. Demonstrating circular life cycle sustainability assessment – a case study of recycled carbon concrete. Journal of Cleaner Production.
Mankelow, J. M., Cameron, D. G. & M A Sen, E. J. E., 2023. Collation of the results of the 2019 Aggregate Minerals Survey for Scotland.. [Online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/research-and-analysis/2023/09/2019-aggregate-minerals-survey-scotland/documents/collation-results-2019-aggregate-minerals-survey-scotland/collation-results-2019-aggregate-minerals-survey [Accessed October 2024].
Mineral Products Association, 2022. Aggregates demand and supply in Great Britain: Scenarios for 2035. [Online] Available at: https://mineralproducts.org/MPA/media/root/Publications/2022/Aggregates_demand_and_supply_in_GB_Scenarios_for_2035.pdf [Accessed October 2024].
Mineral Products Association, 2024. Regional overview of construction and mineral products markets in Great Britain. [Online] Available at: https://mineralproducts.org/MPA/media/root/Publications/2024/Priorities_for_Scotland_Publication.pdf [Accessed October 2024].
Mineral Products Association, n.d. Marine Aggregates. [Online] Available at: https://www.mineralproducts.org/Mineral-Products/Aggregates/Marine-Aggregates.aspx [Accessed 28 January 2025].
Pacheco, J. & Brito, J. d., 2021. Recycled Aggregates Produced from Construction and Demolition Waste for Structural Concrete: Constituents, Properties and Production. Materials (Basel), Issue 19.
Rueda-Bayona, J. G., Eras, J. J. C. & Chaparro, T. R., 2022. Impacts generated by the materials used in offshore wind technology on Human Health, Natural Environment and Resources. Energy, Issue 261.
Santolini, E. & al., e., 2024. Towards more sustainable infrastructures through circular processes: Enviornmental performance assessment of a case study pavement with recycled asphalt in a life cycle perspective. Journal of Cleaner Production.
Scottish Construction Now, 2021. And finally… Work completed on UK’s first carbon neutral road improvement project. [Online] Available at: https://www.scottishconstructionnow.com/articles/and-finally-work-completed-on-uk-s-first-carbon-neutral-road-improvement-project [Accessed October 2024].
Scottish Goverment, 2019. Climate Change (Emissions Reduction Targets) (Scotland) Act 2019. [Online] Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/asp/2019/15/pdfs/asp_20190015_en.pdf [Accessed October 2024].
Scottish Government, 2020a. Update to the Climate Change Plan. [Online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/strategy-plan/2020/12/securing-green-recovery-path-net-zero-update-climate-change-plan-20182032/documents/update-climate-change-plan-2018-2032-securing-green-recovery-path-net-zero/updat [Accessed October 2024].
Scottish Government, 2020b. Evidence Review and Illustrative Policy Options for a Scottish Aggregates Levy. [Online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/research-and-analysis/2020/08/evidence-review-illustrative-policy-options-scottish-aggregates-levy/documents/evidence-review-illustrative-policy-options-scottish-aggregates-levy-final-re [Accessed October 2024].
Scottish Government, 2022b. https://www.gov.scot/publications/scotlands-full-fibre-charter-virgin-media-02-case-study/. [Online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/scotlands-full-fibre-charter-virgin-media-02-case-study/ [Accessed October 2024].
Scottish Government, 2023. Net Zero Public Sector Buildings Standard. [Online] Available at: https://www.netzerostandard.scot/ [Accessed January 2025].
Scottish Government, 2024. Scotland’s Circular Economy and Waste Route Map to 2030 Consultation. [Online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/consultation-paper/2024/01/scotlands-circular-economy-waste-route-map-2030-consultation/documents/scotlands-circular-economy-waste-route-map-2030-consultation/scotlands-circular-economy- [Accessed October 2024].
Tarmac, 2023. Biogenic asphalt with plant based binder for carbon capture and storage. [Online] Available at: https://www.tarmac.com/case-studies/biogenic-asphalt-with-plant-based-binder-for-carbon-capture-and-storage/?cs1_c=52.486243%2C-1.890401&cs1_z=5&cs1_p= [Accessed September 2024].
Thomas, J., Thaickavil, N. & and Wilson, P., 2018. Strength and durability of concrete containing recycled concrete aggregates. Journal of Building Engineering, Volume 19, p. 349–365.
UKGBC, 2025. Aggregates. [Online] Available at: https://ukgbc.org/our-work/topics/embodied-ecological-impacts/aggregates/ [Accessed 28 January 2025].
UNEP, 2023. Building Materials and the Climate: Constructing a New Future, Nairobi: United Nations Envrionment Programme.
Wang, D. & al., e., 2024. Comprehensive evaluation of energy consumption and carbon emissions of asphalt pavement recycling technology. Case Studies in Construction Materials.
World Resources Institute, 2016. Accelerating Building Efficiency: Eigth Actions for Urban Leaders, Washington: World Resources Institute.
Appendices
Appendix A: Methodology
In the completion of this report, the research team completed the following activities:
Task 1: Policy drivers workshop
Task 2: Literature review
Task 3: Data collection
Task 4: Stakeholder interviews
These activities are described in more detail below.
Task 1: Policy Drivers workshop:
Following inception of the project, a workshop was held with representatives of the Scottish Government, CXC, Ricardo and members of the Scottish Aggregates Tax Bill Advisory Group (SATBAG). This workshop was used as springboard to discuss the aims and objectives of this research project, establish a common understanding of:
The taxation and regulatory context as it pertains to the Scottish Aggregates Tax and Scottish Landfill Tax, including:
The potential and feasibility of different tax rates to remove barriers to the use of alternatives to primary aggregates.
Relevant regulations and potential exemptions that might influence their use.
SEPA’s potential role in providing data and regulatory input into the research.
Barriers to the use of secondary and alternatives to primary aggregates, including discussion of: market perceptions, commercialisation issues, cost considerations, and relevant regulations.
Environmental considerations, including: the environmental impact of recycling and potential unintended considerations, alongside policy drivers to minimise waste arising from construction.
Future research and data need to address potential data gaps and requirements to facilitate survey and evidence gathering.
Industry engagement to develop a clearer picture of how tax and regulatory changes will affect different parts of the industry, as well as consideration of cross-border traffic of aggregates between Scotland and other areas, which could impact the effectiveness of any tax or regulatory changes.
Expected impacts and considerations, including price sensitivities to assess the long-term impacts of a policy shift, and the need to carefully balance the economic impact on industries that rely on primary aggregates with the environmental goals of promoting secondary aggregates and minimising waste.
Task 2: Literature review:
An in-depth literature review was undertaken of academic, grey and white paper sources relating to the economic and environmental impacts of the use of alternatives to primary aggregates and their use. The scope of the review primarily focused on Scottish and UK-related studies, and was expanded to cover international best practice studies, particularly as they pertain to life-cycle assessments of alternatives to primary aggregates. These findings were collated in an Excel Document Register to facilitate the identification and analysis of key themes relevant to the study. The sources identified are summarised in Table 4, below.
Task 3: Data collection and analysis:
Following the literature review, the research team progressed to primary data collection from relevant industry stakeholders involved in the supply of alternatives to primary aggregates in Scotland. The purpose of this activity was to gain a baseline understanding of the availability of alternatives to primary aggregates being sold in Scotland. This was then to be used to forecast the potential contribution to GHG reduction targets of an increase in use of recycled or secondary aggregates in the Scottish construction sector. To do this, the research team conducted desk-based research to identify up to 36 suppliers of aggregates, which included: manufacturers of primary aggregates, wash plant operators, construction and demolition waste recyclers, and demolition and excavation companies. Once identified, the collection of primary data was split into two sub-tasks: data collection surveys, and long-form interviews:
Sub-task 3.1: Data collection surveys:
The research team sent out data collection surveys to request the following information for the periods Jan-Dec 2021, Jan-Dec 2022, Jan-Dec 2023:
Material types supplied
Manufacturing locations
Quantities of material produced per year (tonnes)
Associated standards and quality control measures
Challenges associated with either collecting or increasing supply of each material type.
Due to data challenges described in section Error! Reference source not found., the research team received insufficient primary data to accurately forecast the potential availability of alternatives to primary aggregates.
Sub-task 3.2: Stakeholder interviews:
The research team conducted 4 interviews with relevant private companies and industry groups, listed in Table 5, for a duration of 45-60 minutes. The purpose of these interviews was to complement the data collection surveys and gather qualitative data to be used in Task 4, described below.
Research activity
Count
Research activity
Count
Building standards
8
Suppliers contacted for primary datasets
36
Academic and industry papers reviewed
19
Stakeholder interviews/surveys
10
Table 4: Research activities completed
Task 4: Investigate barriers and solutions to the supply of alternatives to primary aggregates:
Following the literature review and data collection phase, the research team conducted a series of interviews with relevant stakeholder groups to discuss any challenges or barriers to the uptake of alternatives to primary aggregates, and to assess potential fiscal or regulatory levers that could be used to mitigate these.
The aim of this phase was to facilitate a deeper understanding of how government and industry can work together to use environmental levies and associated instruments to affect the best possible climate impact and identify any barriers that may negatively impact their implementation. An interview script was developed to gain stakeholder inputs on the following topics:
Perceptions and attitudes toward alternative materials to primary aggregates
Operational considerations related to the supplying of alternatives to primary aggregates
Technical, regulatory and market barriers to the uptake of alternatives to primary aggregates
The policy and regulatory environment related to the application of alternatives to primary aggregates
To ensure that a broad range of viewpoints were considered, 10 interviews were conducted with relevant stakeholder groups identified from the SATBAG and during stakeholder engagement activities in Task 3. These stakeholders are recorded in Table 5.
Stakeholder Group
Organisation
Interview-/Surveyed
Private company
Brewster Bros
Interviewed
Public sector organisation
British Geological Survey
Interviewed
Industry body
British Glass
Interviewed
Industry body
Chartered Institute of Taxation
Interviewed
Local Authority lobbying body
Convention of Scottish Local Authorities
Surveyed
Industry body
Institute of Chartered Accountants Scotland
Interviewed
Private company
J&M Murdoch
Interviewed
Industry body
Mineral Products Association
Workshop
Private company
NWH
Interviewed
Government body
Revenue Scotland
Interviewed
Private company
Tarmac
Interviewed
Private company
Tillicoultry Quarries
Workshop
Industry body
The British Aggregates Association
Interviewed
Private company
W H Malcolm
Workshop
Government representative
William Carlin, Scottish Government
Interviewed
Table 5: Stakeholders engaged
Each interview was recorded and the transcript was cleaned and recorded in an Excel matrix to facilitate objective comparison and analysis of each stakeholder group’s perspective on the above noted topic areas.
Task 5: Synthesising results and report writing
Following completion of Tasks 1-4, the research team reviewed all evidence gathered throughout the study to identify key themes, areas of consensus, and areas where evidence or viewpoints may diverge or contradict each other. These were then mapped against the key objectives of the research project and grouped according to theme. This provided the basis of section Error! Reference source not found. in this report. Following this initial review, an interim report was developed and presented to CXC and representatives of the SATBAG to gain their input and ensure all viewpoints are objectively recorded within the body of the report.
Rob Snaith, R, Foss, J, Connell, J and Bonfait, J. (2025) The role of alternatives to primary aggregates in reducing emissions from the construction sector, ClimateXChange.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Large construction companies that generally manage the entire construction process for a project, often employing sub-contractors as part of the project delivery team. ↑
Saturating in limewater to introduce calcium into the material, thereby augmenting the carbonation reaction in which CO2 in the atmosphere is diffused into cement-based material to react with CH and form calcium carbonates. Results in enhanced strength and durability. ↑
Executive summary
The Scottish Government’s third Scottish National Adaptation Plan (SNAP3) commits to establishing a short-life expert adaptation finance taskforce by 2026 to the support the development of Scottish adaptation investment strategies over the life time of SNAP3.
The Scottish Government and ClimateXChange co-hosted a collaborative “ignite” knowledge exchange workshop on 18 March 2025, bringing together academics, finance experts and practitioners. The event aimed to take the first steps in developing the terms of reference for the adaptation finance taskforce (henceforth referred to as the Taskforce).
The workshop addressed existing challenges in climate adaptation finance, opportunities for further action and examples of successful and innovatively financed adaptation projects from the UK and other countries. Discussions explored key insights highlighted in the Climate Adaptation Finance: Insights and Opportunities for Scotland (2023) paper, which identifies a range of options for Scotland to harness financial solutions for climate adaptation challenges.
There were three main sessions at the workshop:
a panel session on the key challenges and emerging solutions
a panel session exploring case studies for financing resilience
an interactive session to design and prioritise the remit, membership and timeframe for the Taskforce
Key findings and discussion points
Scale of the challenge
Various figures were referenced on the scale of the shortfall between the financial resources needed to adapt to climate change and the amount of finance available (known as the adaptation gap) in Scotland, the UK and internationally. The United Nations Global Adaptation Gap report found that over two thirds of estimated costs/finance needs are in areas that are typically financed by the public sector.
The key message was that climate adaptation finance and investment is lacking and that innovative partnerships across multiple organisations, the private and public sector, are required to bridge the gap. With this challenge comes multiple opportunities for realising co-benefits across the economy and society and for investing in Scotland’s infrastructure, nature and communities.
Workshop speakers and participants highlighted the global scale of the adaptation finance challenge, noting that no nation has fully effective interventions in place. However, there are valuable initiatives and examples of good practice in the international sphere, in the UK and in Scotland. There are opportunities to learn from these pockets of excellence, apply them to the Scottish context and scale them up into bankable frameworks and projects which can be replicated.
Remit of the Taskforce
Attendees supported the idea of a taskforce to advise the Scottish Government on financing adaptation.
A priority for the Taskforce would be to quantify the required adaptation spend and how to prioritise it on a sectoral basis within Scotland. A majority of participants thought that the taskforce should focus on quantifying the finance needed for increasing resilience in Scotland and indicating in which areas or sectors this spend should be prioritised. A possible output could form the basis of an adaptation investment plan.
Working to better integrate adaptation into existing market codes such as Woodland Carbon Code, Peatland Code and emerging biodiversity/natural capital/ecosystem restoration codes was another proposed workstream for the taskforce which had strong support from attendees.
Attendees questioned whether this work needs to be addressed specifically as an adaptation finance taskforce or whether it is part of good sustainable investment and business practices. It may be useful to frame the need for adaptation finance within wider societal challenges such as food security, health and wellbeing, child poverty etc. As an alternative to a taskforce, one participant suggested creating a climate finance platform, or independent broker, to help facilitate partnerships and unlock longer term bankable actions as per the OECD Climate Adaptation Investment Framework.
Taskforce membership
A range of organisations were suggested to form the taskforce membership. Attendees were keen to be involved in the taskforce. A key gap at the event was finance industry practitioner and expert representation. Participants reflected that, although representatives from these institutions were invited, a more effective method of engagement might be to dedicate time to a targeted event for financial institutions and insurance sector representatives.
The proposed members presented in Figure 1 cover four broad areas:
Finance industry
Public sector
Research/academia
Other
Figure 1: Proposed taskforce membership
Timeframe
Due to the Scottish Parliament elections scheduled for May 2026, attendees queried whether a taskforce could be established and provide recommendations before the pre-election period. An alternative could be for it to be proposed as an early action of the new government.
There was general agreement that a taskforce should have start and end point, and the opportunity to reconvene or follow up after their recommendations are made in order to track delivery.
The example of the Net Zero Investor Panel was discussed as a potential format for replication. This took place over 9 months and all members participated either pro bono or had paid for time within their own institutions.
Next steps
The Scottish Government will look to engage further with industry bodies and other stakeholders, recognising the gaps discussed in this report.
ClimateXChange is offering a 7-8 month post-doctoral research opportunity to support the Scottish Government in developing an evidence base for the costs of ensuring a climate resilient Scotland.
Opportunities for financing a climate resilient Scotland – record of discussion
Session 1 – addressing barriers and maximising opportunities
The first morning session was a panel discussion and Q&A aimed at outlining the emerging opportunities and challenges in the adaptation finance space, how this fits into the Scottish fiscal landscape and lessons learned from net zero investment.
David Ulph, Scottish Fiscal Commissioner, provided useful context on the Scottish fiscal landscape including the relationship to Westminster and the overall spending agreement between reserved and devolved powers. He stressed that fiscal sustainability relies on considering include all aspects of mitigation, adaptation and inevitable damages arising from climate change. Emphasis was placed on the role of both private and public sector investment to deliver on all three aspects of climate change spending. More in depth work on mitigation spend has been carried out by SFC and they would be keen to consider adaptation fiscal analysis in future.
The audience heard from Anna Beswick, Policy Fellow at the Grantham Research Institute at LSE working on climate adaptation and resilience, who discussed the scale of the adaptation challenge across the UK and the rationale for increased investment in adaptation. Finance flows are comparatively much lower compared to mitigation though many adaptation actions can also have net benefits for society, the economy and the ability to reach net zero. Anna outlined the goals of the ATTENUATE project (Creating the enabling conditions for UK climate adaptation investment) which include the creation of an Adaptation Investment Framework processes to translate UK National Adaptation Plan ambitions into a range of outcomes. These include creating bankable adaptation projects, how to use public finance to leverage private investment and the understanding the impact of an improved enabling environment for greater investment.
Michael Mullan who leads the OECD’s programme on adaptation finance and investment outlined the context of the global adaptation finance gap and set out the OECD’s investment planning approach through the Climate Adaptation Investment Framework (CAIF). Michael explained that losses related to global climate-induced natural disasters are at an all-time high, but investment is insufficient. The principles for the CAIF could be used as a reference point for the expert task force. Michael also referenced a number of case studies (in Annex X). A key message from Michael’s intervention was that there is currently no global gold standard or “star pupil” for adaptation finance. There are, however, lots of pockets of excellence but they need to be brought together and standardised in order to address the scale of the challenge.
Looking forward to opportunities to try and overcome some of the challenges set out, Ben Connor from Verture presented the findings from the Climate Adaptation Finance: Insights and Opportunities for Scotland (2023) paper published as part of the Adaptation Scotland programme. The barriers to adaptation finance are summarised into six categories in this paper: market, information, technical, bankability, policy, and behavioural. The twelve opportunities to overcome these barriers were then presented in four categories:
Policy
Ambition and vision for a well-adapted Scotland
Develop high integrity, values-led adaptation markets
Mainstreaming adaptation in existing market codes
Data
Quantification of adaptation finance need
Open data platforms and common metrics
Knowledge management and information sharing
Innovation
Grant funds for project development
Blended finance to facilitate private investment
Project delivery innovation
Collaboration
Regional adaptation planning
Support for SMEs
Partnership brokering and collaboration support
These twelve opportunities were discussed as a rough framework for improving adaptation financing in Scotland as part of SNAP3 delivery and used as the basis for the afternoon’s discussion on the remit of the taskforce.
Picture 1: Ben Connor from Verture presenting in Session 1
Recognising that investment in mitigation measures is comparatively more mature than adaptation investment, Dimitris Andriosopoulos Professor of Finance and Director of the Responsible Business Institute (ReBI) at the University of Strathclyde offered some reflections from supporting net zero investment and his experience as a member of the Scottish Government’s Net Zero Investor Panel.
The discussion and Q&A focused on the need to deliver a financial return for private investment and the inherent difficulties in identifying and quantifying this return in the adaptation space. It was suggested that adaptation has a “marketing problem” in this regard. There may be a need to drop the term adaptation all together and just focus on social responsibility, business sustainability, managing climate risks, due diligence and good governance.
An additional barrier limiting adaptation investment was lack of clear signals to the market from government, including cases in the international sphere, resulting from misalignment or lack of join up between governments’ budget/finance and adaptation teams. More collaboration would foster opportunities for larger scale impact.
Discussion reflected a need for balance between the public sector and regulatory levers to incentivise investment and the need to build on the private sector’s understanding of risk and innovation which can sometimes be lacking in the public sector. There was agreement that private investment is needed (it is not an “if” but a “how”) as the public purse will not cover the scale of finance needed.
Session 2 – what works? Case studies for financing resilience
The groundwork for the conversation including the national context was well set out in the first session which allowed for a deeper dive into some examples of examples of ‘what is working’ in Scotland and internationally in session 2. This took a similar format of short presentations and then a panel discussion.
Craig Love, Director of Impact Assessment and Environment at the Scottish National Investment Bank, discussed the regulatory conditions needed for sustainable adaptation investment, specifically the role of financial risk disclosures such as the Taskforce for Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) framework.
Lucy Jenner from Savills spoke about her work with the Pentland Land Managers Association to work at a landscape scale using a blended finance model to increase nature restoration and increased resilience in the Pentland Hills. The Scottish Government Facility for Investment Ready Nature in Scotland (FIRNS) grant helped employ a farmer as a project manager. She reflected that there can be both challenges and opportunities to these landscape scale models, particularly when benefits might be felt in other parts of a catchment (ie those not paying for the adaptation interventions). It is difficult to attribute benefit and to be clear on what is investible.
Ed Heather Hayes from Fife Coast and Countryside Trust and Jyoti Banerjee from North Start Transition presented on another blended finance project pilot at the Dreel Burn in Fife and the opportunities from collaboration on Nature Finance Fife and the Fife Transition Lab. Both projects look for innovative solutions to funding nature restoration and the speakers were advocates for good investment practice and collaboration across sectors. The private partners they have worked with might need more convincing about the need to invest in nature, and need to value ecosystem services, so there is further work required to demonstrate the financial case for investment.
Finally, offering perspectives from the Regions4 network, Melisa Cran highlighted that subnational governments across the world are key drivers of adaptation and that they can be instrumental in delivering innovative approaches to address adaptation finance challenges. She gave examples from Catalonia, Quebec, Lombardy and regions in Brazil which are investing in local-level adaptation, mobilising private capital and testing different climate-resilience financial approaches. Further case study details can be found in Appendix A.
Session 3 – Identifying the remit and membership of the Taskforce
The afternoon session involved facilitated groups of 6-8 people with the purpose of discussing the remit, timeframe and membership of the proposed Scottish Government taskforce on adaptation finance.
In terms of its remit, participants were reminded of the key opportunities for action outlined in the Adaptation Scotland Adaptation Finance Insights and Opportunities paper. These were proposed as potential workstreams for the taskforce. After discussing in groups, participants were encouraged to indicate a prioritisation of workstreams by placing red sticky dots on the various potential opportunities previously identified or offer new suggestions.
The results of this prioritisation exercise can be seen in Table 1 below.
Participants indicated a clear preference for the taskforce to be focused on the quantification of investment/finance needed and mainstreaming adaptation in existing market codes such as the peatland code, woodland carbon code and developing ecosystem restoration codes.
From further discussion, it was suggested the quantification of Scotland’s adaptation finance need would need to go beyond a single high-level figure (as per those referenced in Session 1).
Quantification of investment needs for adaptation should involve the following actions:
Identifying what spend should be included as delivering for adaptation
Highlighting the key sectors which will require adaptation spend
This could be prioritised in terms of levels of risk or sectors of the economy most likely to be impacted by climate change and/or areas where public finance is likely to be most lacking/insufficient
This sequencing (finance gap + priority sectors = spend over next 5-10 years) could form the basis of an adaptation investment plan
There was recognition that we cannot wait until we have the “perfect” quantification of finance, but improved costings are required to help prioritisation of spend and to signal where investment is most needed.
Table 1: prioritisation of workstreams for the Taskforce
Intervention from AS finance insights and opportunities paper
Indication of preference (sticky dots)
Comments/post-its
Quantification of finance needed
12
For this clarification of definitions would be helpful: how does SG define adaptation and resilience? This would feed into data being used to quantify need – i.e. what “counts” as adaptation investment?
Need to understand scale of challenge and where we should prioritise spend
Mainstreaming adaptation in existing market codes (such as peatland code, carbon code etc)
11
Regional adaptation planning
8
(Provide governance of RAPs for investment – pivot to Regional Adaptation and Investment Plans)
Partnership brokering and collaboration support
6
Open data platforms and common metrics
6
Blended finance models
5
PDI
4
(Suggestion to help get ideas to an investment ready stage or supporting sequencing of policies from short to long term), picking off any low hanging fruit
Grant funding for project innovation
2
Vision for a well-adapted Scotland
2
A vision already exists through SNAP3. However, there is a need to get specific, go from how to finance adaptation to how do we finance these specific actions to deliver X vision)
Development of new, high integrity, values led markets
1
Knowledge management and information sharing
0
Targeted support for SMEs
0
Largely covered off by Adaptation Scotland engagement.
Other suggestions
Prioritising policies that can be invested in from private sector perspective rather than where are the biggest gaps
Upskilling and training
Supporting projects to start and then scaling them up (possibly similar to a SG funded incubator/accelerator programme)
Relationship building with the private sector
Need to recognise that this is long-term work but a short-term taskforce may provide a catalyst
Appendix A – Case study resources
ATTENUATE project – three ongoing case studies on bridging the adaptation funding gap
West Midlands Combined Authority on flooding and the risk to the built environment, transport network and social cohesion
London Borough of Hackney on risks to health, welfare and productivity, with a focus on social housing, from high temperatures and heatwaves
HM Treasury and Defra on risks to public and private assets, infrastructure, businesses, health, and to public finances (spending and income) from flooding and high temperatures
Catalonia, Spain: Creation of a Climate Fund funded by vehicle emissions taxes. Has generated 380 million EUR since 2021 to support adaptation and mitigation projects
Lombardy, Italy: Pioneering green budgeting, integrating climate priorities into public finance for better transparency, targeted investments, and increased access to climate funds.
Basque Country, Spain: First region in Spain to integrate the socioeconomic perspective into climate risk assessment, assessing the financial impacts of sea level rise and flooding to losses from €450 million to €2 billion by 2100.
Dr Kate Donovan, Co-Director of Edinburgh Climate Change Institute and Policy Director of ClimateXChange – Welcome
Sarah Chalmers, Scottish Government – Setting the Scottish Policy Context – adaptation finance in the Scottish National Adaptation Plan (2024-29)
10:30-11:30 Session 1 – Key challenges in mobilising adaptation finance and emerging solutions, Chair: Kate Donovan (ECCI and CXC)
Anna Beswick (Grantham Institute, LSE) – Addressing the adaptation finance challenge: rationale for increased investment and the need for the ATTENUATE project
Michael Mullan (OECD) – Global adaptation finance challenge and investment planning approaches (OECD CAIF framework)
Ben Connor (Adaptation Scotland) – Emerging solutions for Scotland
Dimitris Andriosopoulos (University of Strathclyde) – Lessons from Net Zero investment (SG investor panel)
David Ulph (University of St Andrews/Scottish Fiscal Commission) – Key fiscal risks from climate change
11:30-11:45 Coffee break
11:45-13:00 Session 2 – What works? Case studies of financing resilience, Chair: Anne-Marte Bergseng
Craig Love (SNIB) – The role of financial risk disclosures
Ed Heather Hayes (Fife Coast and Countryside Trust) and Jyoti Banerjee (North Start Transition) – Blended finance project pilot – Dreel Burn & Scottish Transition Lab
Lucy Jenner (Savills) – Blended finance project – Pentland Land Managers Association
Melisa Cran (Regions4) – Adaptation finance in other sub-national regions
13:00-14:00 Networking lunch
14:00-15:15 Session 3 – Remit of the SG expert Adaptation Finance Taskforce
Sarah Chalmers, Scottish Government – context and remit
Table discussions
15:15-16:00 Closing discussion Kay White (CXC) and Ben Connor (Verture) and next steps (Sarah Chalmers)
16:00-17:00 Drinks reception
Appendix C – Input from participants (Slido)
Appendix D – Attendee organisations
Adapt40
AECOM
Association of British Insurers
Aviva
Cadlas
Climate Emergency Response Group
ClimateXChange
CLIMPATH
Fife Coast and Countryside Trust
Forth Climate Forest
Government’s Actuary Department
King’s College London
London School of Economics
OECD
Rebalance Earth
Regions4
Scotland Beyond Net Zero
Scottish Government
Scottish Fiscal Commission
Scottish National Investment Bank
Savills
University of Aberdeen
University of Glasgow
University of Strathclyde
University of St Andrews
Verture
The Scottish Government and ClimateXChange wish to thank all participants and presenters for taking part in the workshop on 18 March 2025.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
ClimateXChange, Edinburgh Climate Change Institute, High School Yards, Edinburgh EH1 1LZ
The Scottish Landfill Tax (SLfT), introduced in April 2015, was designed to discourage landfill disposal and encourage prevention, reuse, recycling, and energy recovery.
The tax has two rates. The lower rate of SLfT was designed to provide a low-cost disposal route for inert, low-risk materials, such as rocks and soils. A higher standard rate targeted more polluting materials to support environmental goals.
In early 2024, lower-rate materials exceeded standard-rate materials for the first time. Along with shifts in policy priorities and a widening gap between the lower and standard tax rates, this raises questions about whether the lower rate remains aligned with the Scottish Government’s environmental objectives.
Aims
This research provides an initial evidence base to assess the effectiveness of the lower rate and explore whether changes could better support a low-carbon, circular economy. It examines the most common lower-rate materials, their environmental impacts, the feasibility of diversion and options for policy reform.
We conducted quantitative and qualitative data analysis, a literature review and stakeholder engagement.
Findings
Priority materials
We found that three materials accounted for 77% of all waste landfilled at the lower rate in 2023–24, by weight:
mechanically-treated fines (small particles from treatment of general construction and demolition waste, municipal recyclate etc.)
soils and stones from construction waste
mechanically-treated mineral fines (small particles from treatment of naturally-occurring materials such as rocks and soils, silt, clay, sand and stones, found in quarry, construction and demolition waste etc)
Mechanically-treated fines make up the greatest quantities of all lower-rate materials, despite being intended as a residual output from material recovery processes. Trends raise concerns regarding misclassification and (from our interviews) of intentional production.
Environmental impact analysis, based on the quantities landfilled in Scotland, showed that these three materials also have the highest impacts across indicators such as air pollution, water use and resource scarcity.
The classification of lower-rate materials is complex. The European Waste Catalogue (EWC) codes used by industry do not directly align with SLfT qualifying categories. Moreover, some codes encompass a range of material compositions depending on their source. Mechanically-treated fines are diverse in composition, originating from various construction waste materials. Soils and stones from construction waste, though better defined, also pose classification and compliance challenges. Mechanically-treated mineral fines tend to be more uniform.
Waste prevention and landfill diversion options
Soils and stones are often reused on-site or in restoration, though off-site reuse is constrained by regulation, logistics, and project timing. Options for recovering and re-using mechanically-treated fines are limited, due to contamination and variable composition. The recovery of mechanically-treated mineral fines is easier than the recovery of non-mineral fines but the cost and technical barriers make the use of virgin materials a simpler option.
Upstream measures in the construction sector may have more impact than attempts to recover and re-use waste. Such measures might include improving waste source segregation, designing for reuse and avoiding demolition. While such interventions are technically viable, they are limited in practice by weak incentives, inconsistent standards, and market barriers.
Policy assessment
The SLfT interacts with several fiscal and non-fiscal policies, both existing and on the horizon. These include the upcoming ban on biodegradable municipal waste to landfill; Scottish Aggregates Tax and Digital Waste Tracking, both expected in 2026 (DEFRA, 2023). Based on the assessment of diversion options for the priority materials, we highlighted various fiscal and non-fiscal policy options for future consideration.
Conclusions
This study suggests the lower-rate SLfT may be only partially aligned with Scotland’s current circular economy, waste prevention and climate goals. While it has supported some diversion of inert waste from landfill, it may also be driving unintended behaviours and limiting investment in recovery. Both fiscal and non-fiscal actions may be needed to address these challenges. The upcoming Scottish Aggregates Tax and wider circular economy policy agenda offer opportunities to align SLfT more closely with long-term environmental objectives.
Key areas for further exploration could include:
Raising the lower SLfT rate to incentivise application of the waste hierarchy.
Assigning a new SLfT rate to mechanically-treated fines, to address misclassification and recognise its relatively high environmental impacts.
Strengthening enforcement and guidance on material classification to reduce compliance risks.
Build on existing cross-border regulatory and enforcement cooperation to address ongoing challenges such as waste tourism and the evolution of the landfill tax.
This research is relevant to the Scottish Government, Revenue Scotland, SEPA, and others involved in the design or enforcement of fiscal and waste management policy, as well as stakeholders in the construction, demolition and waste processing sectors.
Glossary / Abbreviations table
AGL
The Aggregates Levy, a UK tax on the use of virgin rock, sand, and gravel for commercial purposes such as building roads and houses; to be replaced in Scotland by the Scottish Aggregates Tax from 1 April 2026
BMW
Biodegradable municipal waste
CCL
The Climate Change Levy, a UK tax to encourage reduction in gas emissions and greater efficiency of energy use.
CPF
Carbon Price Floor, a UK policy which imposes a tax on fossil fuels to incentivise investment in low-carbon power generation
C&D
Construction and demolition
C&D fines
Collective term used in this report for mechanically-treated fines (19 12 12) and mechanically-treated mineral fines (19 12 09) due to similar end-of-pipe diversion options and barriers
EPR
Extended producer responsibility, the responsibility of a producer for the environmentally sound management of a product until the end of its life
EWC code
European Waste Catalogue code, used in Scotland and across the UK for classifying waste, and sometimes referred to as the ‘list of wastes’
GHG
Greenhouse gas
LCA
Lifecycle analysis, a process of evaluating the effects that a product has on the environment throughout its production, use and disposal
LOI
Loss on ignition testing, introduced by HM Revenue and Customs in 2015, is used to determine the organic content of waste fines, helping prevent misclassification for landfill tax purposes: fines with less than 10% LOI qualify for a lower tax rate
RS
Revenue Scotland
SAT
Scottish Aggregates Tax, due to replace the UK AGL from 1 April 2026
SEPA
Scottish Environment Protection Agency
SLfT
Scottish Landfill Tax
SWEFT
Scottish Waste Environmental Footprint Tool, developed by Zero Waste Scotland, quantifies the environmental impact of household waste on a whole lifecycle basis
WAC
Waste acceptance criteria test is used to assess how waste will behave once landfilled, primarily by analysing leachate to determine suitability for disposal.
WTN
Waste transfer note, a document that details the transfer of waste from one person or organisation to another
Introduction
Research context and aims
The Scottish Landfill Tax (SLfT) was introduced in April 2015, following the devolution of landfill taxation under the Scotland Act 2012. It replaced the UK Landfill Tax in Scotland and was designed to discourage landfill disposal and encourage adherence to the waste hierarchy. This hierarchy prioritises prevention, reuse, recycling, and energy recovery over landfill.
The tax is collected and administered by Revenue Scotland and has two rates. The standard rate, which covers materials more likely to pollute the environment or generate greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, will be £126.15 per tonne in 2025-26. The lower rate is £4.05 per tonne as of April 2025 (Revenue Scotland, 2024b). The lower rate applies to materials considered to have low GHG emissions, limited pollution risks, and no hazardous properties when landfilled. For instance, ceramics, glass, soil and stones, and various mixtures of inert materials. Both rates were raised incrementally each year from 2015-16 to 2024-25, and increased by around 24% in April 2025-26 (Revenue Scotland, 2024a).
However, there is a large, widening gap between the rates, and the criteria and conditions for setting them have remained unchanged since 2016. This prompts questions about whether the lower rate continues to align with Scotland’s evolving environmental priorities. It also offers opportunities for policy development, which this research explores. The timing of this study is particularly relevant: a UK Government consultation on landfill tax reform is underway at the time of the publication of this study, concluding in July 2025 (HM Treasury and HMRC, 2025). Moreover, in 2024, the Welsh Government implemented an increase to its lower rate. These developments signal a wider shift in approach across the UK, and this research aims to inform future decision-making in Scotland as part of that wave of change.
Tonnages of landfilled waste have steadily declined over the past decade, but standard rate materials have dropped fastest. In early 2024, the quantity of lower rate materials exceeded that of standard rate materials for the first time. Figure 1 shows the gap between standard rate material (in orange) and lower rate material (in teal) has narrowed in the last 5 years. The widening gap between the lower and higher tax rates has also increased concerns about whether this is driving waste misclassification and crime. It is hard to determine a clear trend related to the landfilling of lower rate material in the years since 2020.
Figure 1: Tonnes of taxable waste declared by quarter in Scotland (source: Revenue Scotland)
The upcoming ban on landfilling biodegradable municipal waste, effective from the end of 2025, is expected to accelerate this trend (Scottish Government, 2022). It is therefore timely to focus in on lower rate materials to assess if SLfT is still serving its purpose. The Scottish Government has committed to explore whether changes may be needed to this or related policy levers, to support progress towards a low-carbon, circular economy (Scottish Government, 2024a).
The SLfT intended to support Scotland’s environmental objectives, which include
Reducing the volume of waste sent to landfill.
Lowering GHG emissions.
Minimising pollution risks in landfill environments.
Promoting the application of the waste hierarchy.
Scotland’s waste and resources policies have evolved since the landfill tax was introduced. They are now strongly oriented towards the objectives set out in the Circular Economy (Scotland) Act 2024 and the Circular Economy and Waste Route Map to 2030 (Scottish Government, 2024a). These provide a framework for increasing resource efficiency and reducing reliance on landfill. Specific information on these can be found in Appendix A.
The Route Map commits to developing a residual waste plan to 2045 and reviewing materials currently landfilled to identify alternative management routes by 2027. The SLfT legislation allows for additional lower rates to be created in support of future policy (Scottish Government, 2022).
Scotland’s net zero targets and biodiversity strategy were introduced in light of the twin climate and biodiversity crises. They have reinforced the need for waste and resources policies that support decarbonisation across all sectors. Most environmental impacts associated with resource use take place before materials are disposed of. A circular economy, with an emphasis on resource efficiency and waste prevention, is therefore essential for meeting Scotland’s environmental objectives. SLfT should be evaluated in this context, considering not only tonnages landfilled but the whole-life environmental impacts of materials.
Project objective, aims and research questions
The overarching objective of this research is to evaluate the effectiveness of the lower rate of SLfT in supporting Scotland’s environmental policy objectives. These policy objectives include reducing the volume of waste sent to landfill, lowering GHG emissions, minimising pollution risks, and encouraging materials to move up the waste hierarchy.
This research supports policy development by assessing whether the lower rate of SLfT remains effective in advancing Scotland’s environmental objectives. It also examines whether adjustments to the tax or related policy levers could accelerate progress towards these objectives. Specifically, this study aims to:
evaluate the effectiveness of the lower rate in supporting Scotland’s environmental goals;
identify the lower-rate materials that have the greatest environmental impact;
explore waste prevention and diversion options for lower-rate materials and their feasibility;
assess key barriers to reducing reliance on lower-rate landfill disposal;
examine how the SLfT interacts with other fiscal and non-fiscal waste and environmental management policies and identify areas for future research and policy interventions.
To achieve these aims, the following research questions are addressed:
Which materials landfilled at the lower rate rank the highest in terms of quantity and negative environmental impacts?
What diversion options and alternative treatments exist for these materials, and how feasible are they in light of technical, market, and policy barriers?
What are the key barriers to reducing the volume of materials landfilled at the lower rate, and how can they be addressed?
How does the SLfT intersect with other fiscal and non-fiscal waste management and environmental policies, and what options exist to strengthen policy?
This report provides an initial evidence base for discussions on potential changes to the lower rate of SLfT. It does not present a cost-benefit analysis of policy options. It highlights the highest-impact materials and presents opportunities to divert from landfill, noting key barriers.
These findings aim to contribute to ongoing policy discussions and future research,
in support of Scotland’s transition to a low-carbon, circular economy.
Methodology
This study was conducted from December 2024 to March 2025 by Resource Futures and Aether, in collaboration with a steering group comprising the ClimateXChange research lead and representatives of the Scottish Government, SEPA and Revenue Scotland. It followed a three-stage approach (see Figure 2).
We designed the methodology to provide an initial evidence base to progress policy development. Robust data analysis was used to identify key materials and focus future research. Key materials were determined based on impact.
Figure 2: Research approach
We used quantitative and qualitative data analysis, a literature review, and stakeholder engagement to support this approach. Table 1 below summarises each research stage and corresponding data collection methods. These are further detailed in Appendices B and C.
Table 1: Data collection methods by research stage
Data collection methods
Research stage
Prioritisation of materials
Review of diversion and prevention options
Policy assessment
Weight-based EWC code analysis
X
Environmental impacts analysis
X
Desk-based research
X
X
Stakeholder engagement
X
X
X
In the first stage, we assessed tonnage and environmental impacts data on materials landfilled at the lower rate. This enabled us to prioritise the top three material streams.
We analysed tonnage data by EWC code, or groups of codes where necessary. This relied on data obtained from SEPA and Revenue Scotland. To assess environmental impacts, we used the Scottish Waste Environmental Footprint Tool (SWEFT). This covers a range of environmental indicators, including GHG emissions, resource depletion, and pollution potential (Zero Waste Scotland, 2024). We refined our understanding of the top material streams, through engagement with waste management operators, industry experts, policymakers, and the project steering group.
In the second stage, we examined opportunities to move lower-rate materials up the waste hierarchy. A high-level literature review identified prevention, reuse, recycling, and recovery options, assessing their technical feasibility. Stakeholder interviews provided further insights into potential diversion options and barriers to these.
In the final stage, we reviewed how the lower rate of SLfT interacts with related policies. We used desk-based research to review other relevant measures and draw comparisons with landfill taxation in other jurisdictions. Engagement with policymakers and regulators provided insights into how the tax operates in practice. We identified areas where further research is needed to address gaps or unintended consequences.
For the stakeholder engagement, we conducted eight in-depth, semi-structured interviews, and gathered additional insights via email, in January to March 2025. Further details of the methodology, including the stakeholder engagement, can be found in Appendix C.
Quantitative data review to determine priority materials
This section sets out how we identified the three highest-impact material streams taxed at the lower rate, which are assessed in more detail in Sections 5 and 6.
We first give a summary of the process for preparing and classifying waste for landfill in Scotland (Section 4.1). We then present findings by weight based on Revenue Scotland and SEPA data (Section 4.3) then on the weighted environmental impact of materials (Section 4.4). This forms the basis for prioritising lower-rate materials summarised in Section 4.5.
Introduction to classifying and preparing waste for landfill in Scotland
For waste to be landfilled in Scotland, waste producing businesses must follow a structured process to ensure compliance with environmental regulations. This process involves multiple parties, including waste producers, skip operators, transfer station operators, landfill operators, and regulators such as SEPA and Revenue Scotland.
Key steps in preparing waste for landfill include:
Waste identification – determining the type of waste based on its source, composition, and potential hazards.
Waste characterisation – including chemical analysis and testing (where required) to assess hazardous properties and biodegradability.
Waste classification – the waste is assigned a European Waste Catalogue (EWC) code by the waste producer. EWC codes must be included on waste transfer notes (for non-hazardous waste) and hazardous waste consignment notes. These documents accompany waste during its movement and disposal and are checked by waste carriers, site operators, and regulators.
Pre-treatment and landfill acceptance requirements – including necessary treatment to reduce environmental impact, compliance with landfill permit conditions, and landfill waste acceptance criteria (WAC) testing, where required.
Documentation and record-keeping – maintenance of records, results and transfer documentation to ensure legal compliance.
Two key documents to support businesses in meeting these obligations are:
Waste Classification Technical Guidance (WM3) (SEPA et al, 2015): The guidance, co-produced by SEPA, Natural Resources Wales, Northern Ireland Environment Agency, and Environment Agency, provides comprehensive instructions on identifying whether waste possesses hazardous properties.
Criteria and Procedures for the Acceptance of Waste at Landfills (Scotland) Direction 2005 (Scottish Government, 2012a): The document gives criteria and procedures for waste acceptance at landfills, ensuring compliance with environmental standards. WAC are described in the accompanying ‘Schedule’ to this Direction.
SEPA holds responsibility for governance of compliance and therefore holds national level data on the transfer and treatment of waste into, within, and out of landfills in Scotland. As regulator of the SLfT, Revenue Scotland holds parallel data obtained through tax returns. The anonymised data from Revenue Scotland, alongside SEPA’s, underpins the analysis presented in the following section.
While many elements of the landfill preparation process are legal requirements, some practices – such as separating certain materials for recovery – are strongly encouraged by regulators or industry bodies due to viable diversion routes or market demand. These distinctions are important context for the findings presented later in this report.
Overview of waste data analysis
This section presents a summary of analysis performed on waste tonnages data provided by SEPA, and SLfT returns data from Revenue Scotland which was anonymised for the purposes of this study. The data provided by SEPA and Revenue Scotland are categorised by EWC code (European Commission, 2000). These data insights can be used to help progress policy development.
EWC codes are a list of waste descriptions used in all UK nations and EU member states. However, as explained in detail in Section 5.3, EWC codes do not directly correlate to SLfT rates. EWC codes must be used on waste transfer notes and hazardous waste consignment notes. The submission of waste transfer notes also comes with ‘operator descriptions’ to further explain the EWC code categorisation. There are around 650 individual codes split across 20 ‘chapters’. The chapter typically defines the industry or source of waste; however, some definitions are more material- or process-based. Despite the large library of codes, some remain broad in scope. This means that use of the EWC codes within a dataset does not automatically achieve transparency or traceability in terms of material definitions.
For this report, descriptors have been adopted for each EWC code, or group of codes, present within the lower-rate tonnages data provided by Revenue Scotland. These are outlined in Table below.
Table 2: EWC codes within the lower tax rate in Scotland
Mixed niche materials, including from end-of-life vehicles
17 01 01
Concrete
We ranked the data from Revenue Scotland on lower-rate waste to landfill by weight. Data from SEPA for each matching EWC code, or group of codes, was then used to identify the amount of each material landfilled at lower rate as a proportion of the total landfilled. This allowed for prioritisation based on overall tonnage of lower rate material. Further information on steps for data cleansing and review is provided in Appendix B.
Results show the largest quantities landfilled in Scotland by material (at both lower and standard rate), in the financial year 2023 to 2024, were soil and stones, mechanically-treated fines and mechanically-treated mineral fines.
It is important to note that the data presented does not account for exemptions, meaning the reported tonnages are likely an underestimate of the actual quantities of waste generated. Exemptions are highlighted later in the report throughout Sections 6 and 7.
Figure 3 below highlights how the ranking changes when considering only materials landfilled at lower rate (in teal) with results for standard rate material also shown (in orange). The top three materials by weight are:
19 12 12: Mechanically-treated fines (fine particles left over from mechanical waste processing)
17 05 04: Soil and stones (non-hazardous soils and stones from C&D waste)
19 12 09: Mechanically-treated mineral fines (fine particles of minerals, e.g. sand and stones, left over from mechanical waste processing)
These three materials make up 77% of the material landfilled at lower rate in 2023-24. The analysis shows that most mechanically-treated fines and mechanically-treated mineral fines are landfilled at the lower rate. In comparison, only a small portion of soil and stones is landfilled at the lower rate.
Figure 3: Tonnage of waste to landfill at standard and lower tax rates by EWC code, 2023-2024.
Analysis of waste quantities and composition data
We identified short-term trends for each material. We also reviewed operator descriptions in the SEPA data to better understand the materials and their origins. Summaries are presented for the three material groups landfilled in the greatest quantities at the lower rate of tax. These are presented in order with the highest tonnage first.
Mechanically-treated fines: EWC 19 12 12
This non-hazardous material group contains fine particle rejects from mechanical waste processing, including sorting, crushing, pelletising and compacting, as well as a minority share of anaerobic digestion residue. A more detailed description is provided in Section 5.1.
Approximately 60% of mechanically-treated fines were landfilled at the lower rate of tax in 2023-24. As shown through SEPA and Revenue Scotland data in Figure 4 below, the overall quantity landfilled has decreased over the most recent three-year period. However, the quantity landfilled at lower rate (in teal) has increased, while the quantity landfilled at standard rate (in orange) has decreased.
For context, the quantity landfilled under the lower rate was consistently under 200,000 tonnes before 2020. This increased sharply to a peak in 2022-23, before declining slightly again in 2023-24, but remaining well over pre-2020 levels.
Figure 4: Tonnage of waste to landfill at standard and lower tax rates for the three priority materials from 2021 to 2024.
Soils and stones from construction waste: EWC 17 05 04
The soils and stones EWC code group is for non-hazardous materials and results from construction and demolition waste. It is restricted to topsoil, peat, subsoil and stones only. Therefore, soil waste classification testing must take place to determine if soils are non-hazardous or inert (qualifying for the lower rate), or hazardous (standard rate). More information is provided in Section 5.2.
Approximately 21% of soils and stones was landfilled at the lower rate in 2023-24. Figure 4 shows that both the total quantity landfilled (ie the combined teal and orange bars), and the quantity landfilled at lower rate (in teal), have decreased from a 2021-22 peak. As a result, the portion of this waste group landfilled at the lower rate has remained stable over the most recent three years.
Based on the operator descriptions submitted with the waste transfer notes, this EWC material group contained just over 12,000 tonnes (2.2%) of ‘contaminated’ soil in 2023-24. It should be noted that contaminated is not equivalent to ‘hazardous’. Descriptions of this EWC code attached to records of larger waste quantities simply state “contaminated soil” with no further specificity. Descriptions accompanying some of the smaller quantities of lower-rate waste have mention of contamination by Japanese knotweed.
In addition, around 10,000 tonnes (1.8%) was recorded as having traces of asbestos in 2023-24, almost entirely from one waste record. This was much higher than any records mentioning traces of asbestos for previous years.
These findings highlight uncertainty around the application of WAC testing to this code. Soil and stones containing hazardous substances may potentially have been misclassified under the non-hazardous code 17 05 04, instead of its hazardous counterpart, 17 05 03. From stakeholder interviews, it is understood that misclassification is likely to contribute to the large quantity of soil and stones being disposed of under this material group.
Mechanically-treated mineral fines: EWC 19 12 09
This material group is classified as fines from naturally occurring rocks and soils, silt, clay, sand and stones. It is non-hazardous. A more detailed description is available in Section 5.1.
76% of this material group was landfilled at the lower rate of tax in 2023-24, which was similar to the portion in 2022-23. Looking further back, the quantity landfilled at lower rate peaked at just over 120,000 tonnes in 2019-20, before a significant decline in the following two COVID years. Quantities landfilled at the lower rate have bounced back slightly but not to pre-COVID levels.
As shown in Figure 4 above, this material group is landfilled in proportionally greater quantities under the lower rate (in teal) than the standard rate (in orange).
Baseline environmental impact of materials
We used Zero Waste Scotland’s SWEFT data to provide a high-level assessment of how the materials landfilled at lower rate may impact the environment. This enabled us to check whether any lower-tonnage material groups warranted further attention due to their disproportionately higher environmental impacts.
The tonnages for 2023-24 were multiplied by lifecycle-based SWEFT factors. Lifecycle-based SWEFT factors consider the entire environmental impact of a material, from extraction to disposal, which helps assess its true ecological footprint. This produced a weighted impact for each material group against each of SWEFT’s six environmental indicators. Further information on methods and assumptions in application of SWEFT is provided in Appendix B.
Because SWEFT factors covers a range of environmental impacts, they cannot be aggregated into a single, comparable “score”. To visualise and compare relative impacts, we used a spider diagram (see Figure 5), which presents the results for the top six material groups landfilled at lower rate in Scotland during 2023-4.
Figure 5 below shows that the top three material groups by tonnage also have the greatest environmental impacts. These materials – mechanically-treated fines, soil and stones, and mechanically-treated mineral fines – are shown in the colours teal, dark orange and black respectively .
Mechanically-treated fines are estimated to have the largest weighted impacts on air pollution, mineral resource scarcity, water consumption and land use. Soil and stones, and mechanically-treated mineral fines, have the next-highest impacts for the same indicators.
One mixed material group (shown in light orange) scores highest on GHG emissions and biodiversity. However, this group, was found to be almost entirely made up of drill cuttings in 2023/24 based on operator descriptions within the SEPA data. As a result, we chose to describe this as a niche material (see Table 2). This results in a high environmental impact but with high uncertainty.
No other material groups were flagged as priorities for further research based on this high-level analysis of environmental impacts. As such, the three lower-rate material groups landfilled in highest quantities were prioritised for further research.
Figure 5: SWEFT tool results presented by material and relative environmental impact (only top six scoring material groups are shown)
Priority materials and supporting interview data
From the analysis of tonnage landfilled and environmental impact assessment, three material groups were prioritised: soils and stones, mechanically-treated fines, and mechanically-treated mineral fines. These materials accounted for 77% of lower-rate landfilled waste in 2023-24 and had some of the highest environmental impacts, particularly on air pollution, resource scarcity, and land use.
Grouped codes of niche materials were excluded due to data limitations: (i) they consist of multiple waste types with varying, and unknown, compositions and quantities, and (ii) the lack of specificity meant the assessment of environmental indicators relied more on generalised assumptions.
Focusing on the three dominant materials enabled targeted research into impactful interventions to reduce landfill and improve resource recovery. This selection was also verified through analysis of interviewee responses. For example:
Mechanically treated fines, mechanically-treated mineral fines and soils and stones were confirmed as the main materials: “They are the majority of materials in the lower rate.” (Commercial remediation company interview); “A lot of the lower rate material will essentially be fines.” (C&D waste management processor)
Most high-quality materials are already reused in construction: “The only reason construction companies take things off sites now is because they can’t use it.” (C&D skip operator)
Mechanically-treated fines come from transfer stations and skip waste: “Mechanical fines come from transfer stations and sorting of skips waste. Skip operators generate the majority of the fines in the Scottish market.” (Commercial remediation company)
Mechanical-treated fines create challenges for waste management: “Mechanically-treated fines are the top waste we question whether the rate is right.” (SEPA interview) and “we tend to stay away from mechanically-treated fines, because the administration and risk of misclassification sits with us.” (Commercial landfill operator)
Complexities in the categorisation of priority materials
Determining when a material qualifies for the lower rate is not straightforward. This is due to the complex properties of the lower-rate materials, the sources of these materials and the different classification systems used in policy. To aid in understanding, this section outlines what the three priority material streams comprise, the sources of these materials and their link to categorisations in Scottish policy.
Mechanical fines: EWC 19 12 12 and 19 12 09
Two of the priority materials, mechanically-treated fines and mechanically-treated mineral fines, belong to the same EWC chapter 19 12. This chapter refers to waste from the mechanical treatment of waste, for example sorting, crushing, compacting or pelletising (Dsposal, n.d.). These are commonly referred to as trommel fines, or mechanical fines (typically 10-40mm).
Fines that qualify for the lower rate under both waste codes largely come from construction and demolition (C&D) waste and, therefore, share similar diversion options and barriers which are discussed in Section 6. The term ‘mechanical fines’ is used hereafter as shorthand when these two categories of fines are discussed together.
The key distinction between the codes is their composition:
Mechanically treated mineral fines (EWC 19 12 09): Primarily from excavation and mechanical treatment of quarry waste, C&D waste, and aggregate recycling (WRAP and Environment Agency, 2013). Composition is relatively uniform.
Mechanically treated fines (EWC 19 12 12): Includes fines from mixed C&D waste, municipal recyclate, and residual waste. Fines qualifying for the lower rate are primarily from mixed C&D waste due to higher inert content (Di Maria et al., 2013; Vincent et al., 2022). Composition is far more varied.
The interview findings and other data suggest that mechanical fines – whether classified under EWC 19 12 09 or 19 12 12 – are commonly produced at transfer stations and through the mechanical sorting of skip waste, particularly when handling C&D material. Composition is mostly crushed bricks, tiles, concrete, and ceramics – similar to mineral fines (the same as mechanically-treated mineral fines). However, the code can also include additional inert materials, including fines from the mechanical treatment to recycle furnace slags, bottom ash, and plasterboard to recover gypsum[3] (Environment Agency, 2023a; Environment Agency, 2023b).
To summarise, both types of mechanical fines may contain a small amount of contamination and non-qualifying material, but can still be eligible for the lower rate if they meet the conditions set out in Article 4 of the 2016 Order. To qualify, fines must either consist entirely of qualifying material or contain only a minimal amount of non-qualifying material, must not be artificially mixed or hazardous under WM3, and must pass the Loss on Ignition (LOI) test with a result of 10% or less (Revenue Scotland, n.d.). Otherwise, they are subject to the standard rate.
Some waste producers intentionally misclassify mechanical fines to avoid the higher rate of tax, using blending techniques to bring LOI values down (Ali, 2023; SEPA, C&D waste management processor interview, commercial landfill operator interview). Many small- to medium-sized skip operators handle this waste, making enforcement difficult (waste industry association and commercial remediation company interview).
Soils and stones from construction waste: EWC 17 05 04
The EWC code 17 05 04 refers to non-hazardous soils and stones from C&D waste (including excavated material from contaminated sites) (Dsposal, n.d.; Environmental Standards Scotland, 2024; Katsumi, 2015; Commercial remediation company interview; C&D waste management processor interview). In Scotland, this material becomes waste after removal from a site. It can be used for work on site without being classified as waste.
Soils and stones require multiple tests. They must be classified as hazardous or non-hazardous following the WM3 classification. When subjected to testing it is likely for other materials to be found, which could make the soil active (non-inert), such as grass. Unless the contaminating materials are in small amounts and pass the soil LOI test, the whole load will be charged the standard rate. Non-hazardous soil and stone can only be disposed of in inert landfill sites and charged the lower rate if a WAC test confirms this is appropriate. A WAC test will determine the leaching ability of any contaminants in the soil.
Misalignment in waste code and policy guidance
This section compares EWC code definitions (Dsposal, n.d.), Revenue Scotland guidance (Revenue Scotland, n.d.), and SEPA guidance (SEPA, 2015) for the three priority materials.
The Scottish Landfill Tax (Qualifying Material) Order 2016 determines which materials qualify for the lower tax rate. There are seven groups of materials which qualify for the lower rate. However, these seven qualifying material groups and EWC codes do not align. This allows material to be classed as standard or lower rate under a single EWC code, as seen in the analysis of waste quantities (Section 4.3). Such misalignment is common in other jurisdictions in the UK and beyond with the widespread use of EWC codes and varying landfill policies.
Table 3 below presents a systematic review of the EWC codes for the priority three materials against other categorisations in Scottish policy. This provides a more specific, detailed understanding of these material streams.
Soils and stones (EWC 17 05 04) are the most straightforward to categorise, aligning clearly with Group 1 (Rocks and soils) and with no additional SEPA definitions or overlaps.
In contrast, mechanically treated fines (EWC 19 12 12) are the most complex to classify. As discussed in Section 5.1, this code can encompass materials across all seven qualifying groups, depending on source and composition, making consistent classification more challenging and reliant on testing and operator descriptions.
Table : Alignment of priority EWC codes with SLfT and SEPA definitions
Priority material
Mechanically treated mineral fines
Mechanically treated fines
Soil and stones
EWC code
EWC 19 12 09
EWC 19 12 12
EWC 17 05 04
EWC chapter
EWC 19 12: the mechanical treatment of waste, for example sorting, crushing, compacting or pelletising (Dsposal, n.d).
EWC 19 12: the mechanical treatment of waste, for example sorting, crushing, compacting or pelletising (Dsposal, n.d).
EWC 17 05: soil (including excavated soil from contaminated sites), stones and dredging spoil.
The Scottish Landfill Tax (Qualifying Material) Order 2016 groups
Group 1: Rocks and soils.
Group 3: Minerals.
Group 1: Rocks and soils.
Group 2: Ceramic and concrete materials.
Group 3: Minerals.
Group 4: Fines from the mechanical treatment to recycle furnace slags.
Group 5: Fines from the mechanical treatment to recycle bottom ash.
Group 6: Low activity inorganic compounds.
Group 7: Fines from the mechanical treatment of plasterboard to recover gypsum.
Group 1: Rocks and soils.
SEPA definitions (SEPA, 2015)
Fines from processing naturally occurring rocks and soils (e.g. group 1).
Fines from processing wholly inert bricks, tiles and concrete (e.g. group 3).
Fines from processing municipal recyclate or residual waste.
Fines from the processing of mixed C&D waste.
No further definitions given.
Waste prevention and landfill diversion options
In this section, we outline findings on the end-of-pipe and upstream diversion options for the three priority materials described in Section 5: mechanically-treated fines, mechanically-treated mineral fines, and soils and stones. A preliminary feasibility assessment of these technologies is also presented.
‘End-of-pipe’ diversion options involve reprocessing materials that have already been classified as waste, to divert them from landfill. ‘Upstream’ diversion options entail keeping materials at their highest value and reducing waste generation. For mechanical fines, this means preventing C&D waste from being mechanically treated (for example, keeping bricks as bricks). For soil and stones, it involves direct reuse.
We use the term ‘mechanical fines’ where the diversion options relate to both mechanically-treated fines and mechanically-treated mineral fines.
Mechanical fines: End-of-pipe diversion
This section outlines the diversion options and associated barriers for mechanical fines.
As some common challenges were identified, Section 6.1.1 first identifies overarching barriers relevant to all the diversion options. These barriers provide essential context for Sections 6.1.2 to 6.1.5.
Overarching barriers
Due to their complex and variable composition and technical processing requirements, mechanical fines are difficult, risky and costly to recover. According to a waste management company representative interviewed, currently only large- and medium-sized regional players are able to recover a proportion of mechanically-treated fines.
Material complexity (technical barrier): Mechanical fines contain mixed materials, sometimes requiring washing to remove contaminants (Burdier et al., 2022). Differing physical and chemical properties, including composition and size, affect the feasibility of end-of-pipe recovery (Hernandez Garcia et al., 2024). This is further impacted by Scotland’s wet climate, which reduces the effectiveness of dry screening technologies (as highlighted in research conducted by Ricardo for ClimateXChange, due to be published in summer 2025). Composition testing to match materials to diversion options is expensive. Virgin materials are often easier and cheaper to use.
Contamination (health and safety barrier): Heavy metals in some mechanical fines pose health and safety risks, limiting recovery (Oujana & Sanchez, 2018). Washing removes some contaminants (Vincent et al., 2022), but can create toxic wastewater and solid waste requiring further treatment (Cottrell, Ali and Etienne, 2024). The circularity benefits should be weighed against the resources and power needed to wash and process fines.
Processing infrastructure (operational barrier): Washing plants remove silt and clay to produce clean aggregate. However, washing systems are expensive and often require bespoke designs so they do not clog processing systems, reducing efficiency (Vincent et al., 2022; C&D waste management processor interview). Stakeholders cite uncertain policies and tax implications as barriers to investment (C&D waste management processor, C&D skip operator and SEPA interviews).
LOI testing (health and safety and regulatory barrier): LOI determines whether fines qualify for the lower rate tax or if they can be reused (interviews with C&D waste management processor and Commercial landfill operatorSUEZ). One interviewee reported that use of LOI tests to achieve end-of-waste status for mechanical fines was not permitted by SEPA due to its uncertain composition:
“We tried for a couple of years to get end-of-waste status on this material because some of the material, it does look really good and it would serve a purpose in further aspects of construction. But they’re very adamant that it’s a big no, because of the testing and because this material doesn’t come from a single source. You can’t test it as a single source, so it’s a bit of an unknown.” (C&D waste management)
Liability (enforcement barrier): The current liability structure is a barrier to diversion, as it places the risk of misclassification on landfill operators rather than waste producers. This reduces producers’ incentive to ensure accurate classification or pursue upstream diversion. With no direct repercussions, producers can intentionally or unintentionally misclassify mechanical fines as lower-rate material (see Section 5.3).
The following sections detail end-of-pipe diversion options for mechanical fines, noting more specific barriers to mechanically-treated mineral and mechanically-treated fines where relevant.
Landfill/quarry cover, engineering and restoration
Inert mechanical fines are used for engineering and landscaping, such as quarries and pavement base layers, or for daily landfill cover. There is demand in Scotland for such uses, particularly due to a shortage of soils and stones (commercial landfill operator interview). While this can support diversion from landfill, it can waste nutrient-rich fines that might be better suited for agricultural use (Renella, 2021).
Recycled aggregate
Mechanically-treated mineral fines can be stored on site for six months and reused as aggregate without a waste licence under the Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations 2011 (schedule 1, paragraph 19). Mechanically-treated fines do not qualify for this exemption, however, and SEPA does not include them as waste suitable for the manufacture of recycled aggregate (SEPA, 2013).
Recycled aggregates (from crushed bricks, ceramics, and concrete) are used in roads, railways, and non-structural concrete production. Their carbon footprint can be lower than virgin aggregates when transport distances are short (ClimateXChange and Ricardo, 2025).
Reducing the environmental impact of concrete through recovery of inert fines has received a lot of research interest. For example, in 2023, 934 publications about reuse of clay waste (e.g. brick powder) in cement mixtures were published (Hernández García, Monteiro and Lopera, 2024). Studies suggest the material could replace 10-20% of virgin sand in non-structural concrete (Mansoor, Hama, Hamdullah, 2024; Ali, 2023; Zhao, et al., 2020). Despite the diversion potential for fines, innovations have not been scaled up commercially as virgin aggregates are favoured (European Commission, 2023).
Barriers:
Recycled aggregates have different properties to natural aggregates and suit only low to moderate strength concrete (European Commission, 2023; Ali, 2023; Transport Scotland et al., 2020; commercial landfill operator interview; Ferriz-Papi and Thomas, 2020).
Fine material can be inappropriate for some filling activities. For example, fines can be too smooth for use in layers for road-based applications (Burdier et al., 2022). It could be beneficial to consider other diversion options that suit these physical properties, such as reuse in paint to improve grip, rather than invest in technologies to change them.
Quality and supply of fines are inconsistent (European Commission, 2023).
Despite a high concentration of wash plants in Scotland (C&D waste management processor interview), mechanical fines require further space and infrastructure investment to be diverted to precast or ready-mixed concrete plants (European Commission, 2023).
Wet fines from wash plants require more cement in concrete mixtures, increasing resource use and cost (commercial remediation company interview). Raw material and energy savings from using recycled aggregate need to be balanced against these impacts.
The lack of market uptake of recycled aggregates is likely due to a lack of know-how by concrete producers and trained personnel for recycled aggregates production (ClimateXChange and Ricardo, 2025; European Commission, 2023; Hernández García, Monteiro and Lopera, 2024).
Land treatment and agricultural soil improvement
Inert mechanical fines can improve land, for example, by stabilising soil through land remediation or as a fertiliser for agriculture (Manning and Vetterlein, 2004; Burlakov, et al., 2021; Ali, 2023). This could be a positive diversion option for mechanically-treated mineral fines that are less useful for construction purposes (Renella, 2021).
Mechanically-treated fines can help replenish nutrients to the soil and reduce reliance on commercial fertilisers (Braga et al., 2019; Szmidt and Ferguson, 2004; Campe, Kittrede and Klinger, 2012). By mixing these fines with organic materials, they can create a soil-like material for plants to grow in. Some fine particles, like clay, silt or ash, help keep the organic matter stable (Haynes, Zhou and Weng, 2021; Renella, 2021).
Mechanically-treated fines contain a mixture of these materials. However, the UK Government restricts the use of soil substitutes made from mechanically-treated fines as opposed to mechanically-treated mineral fines (Environment Agency, 2023b). This can only be done under specific permits, such as for landfill restoration schemes, and when ecological improvement is also demonstrable.
In Scotland, under the Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations 2011 (schedule 1, paragraph 9), exemptions allow the use of mechanically-treated mineral fines on land for agriculture and ecological improvement. Waste companies in Scotland sometimes use mineral fines from skips to create compost for local agriculture (C&D skip operator interview). SEPA, who registers such activities, has reported that this exemption often results in farmers being paid to accept such waste to reduce landfill disposal costs (SEPA interview). However, it is uncertain how much is used for genuine purposes, and how much is diverted to avoid paying tax (C&D waste management processor interview).
Barriers:
Silt and clay fines, which are beneficial for soils, are generally landfilled and this is because of high contamination of heavy metals or presence of organic materials (Renella, 2021).
Nutrient content varies, limiting predictability of composition and related cost savings for farmers. For example, recycled mechanical fines with high nutrient content can reduce costs by 25%, whereas those with low nutrient content may increase costs by 9% (Braga et al., 2019).
Potential conflicts with regulation on fertilisers. For example, UK government restricts the use of soil substitutes made from mechanically-treated fines (Environment Agency, 2023b) and new EU regulations may exclude some fines from fertiliser use (Renella, 2021).
Gypsum fines recycling
Gypsum fines (within EWC 19 12 12) can be recovered from plasterboard and used to make new plasterboards, cement, blocks and bricks (commercial landfill operator interview; Suárez, Roca and Gasso, 2016). Gypsum can also be used to improve soil in land remediation, particularly in areas with alkalinity or heavy metal contamination. SEPA advises that this is acceptable for treating land that has been flooded by seawater (SEPA, n.d).
Waste owners are encouraged to separate gypsum from other waste for recovery, as there are feasible diversion options and “because there’s a good recycling market for gypsum” (waste industry association interview). However, according to a commercial landfill operator, the composition of mechanically-treated fines “tends to be quite high in plasterboard and gypsum, which then means that we struggle to control the gas and the odours”. Gypsum can only be disposed of in landfills where no biodegradable waste is accepted as it has hazardous properties, releasing gas and odour, when mixed with biodegradable waste (commercial landfill operator interview).
When the ban on biodegradable waste to landfill is introduced at the end of 2025, it will potentially make the lower-rate landfill of mechanically-treated waste containing gypsum easier. Additional incentives for diversion to counter this could be necessary.
Barriers:
Recycled gypsum has high market demand, but the lower rate categorisation encourages landfill over recycling (waste industry association interview, commercial remediation company interview, commercial landfill operator interview).
Heavy contamination of mechanical fines restricts the potential to find and extract gypsum (Suárez, Roca and Gasso, 2016).
Lack of incentives to enhance sorting of gypsum and plasterboard; and conversely incentives to process waste products containing gypsum into mechanical fines to qualify for the lower-rate tax (commercial landfill operator interview).
Mechanical fines: Upstream diversion
This section describes the upstream diversion options involving the reduction and reuse of concrete, bricks, tiles and ceramics. These options can prevent mechanical fines from being generated in the first place.
Reducing demolition through refurbishing and retrofitting
Refurbishing or repurposing buildings and assets extends their usable life, avoiding the generation of demolition waste. In doing so, it helps reduce both material use and embodied carbon, making it a key strategy for sustainable construction.
Lifecycle analysis (LCA) is a valuable tool for comparing the impacts of refurbishing and retrofitting with demolition and new build. While new builds may achieve lower operational carbon, they usually require more materials and result in more embodied carbon emissions. In many cases, this means retrofit has lower emissions overall.
Adopting a retrofit-first approach can reduce unnecessary demolition, prioritising reuse unless structures are severely derelict or face irreparable structural issues (Green Alliance, 2023; construction company interview). To support this, pre-demolition assessments could be introduced earlier in the planning process, ensuring that any proposed demolition is justified in terms of carbon and material impacts (Green Alliance, 2023).
Barriers:
VAT policy favours new builds (0%) over renovations (20%) (Green Alliance, 2023).
Current policies focus on reducing operational emissions, such the Heat in Buildings Strategy to increase energy efficiency (Scottish Government, 2021a), rather than embodied carbon emissions (Green Alliance, 2022).
Circular principles are underused in construction and infrastructure, such as rail infrastructure projects (O’Leary, Osmani and Goodier, 2024).
Reduction and reuse of construction materials
Reducing demand for materials in the design stage has the greatest impact on reducing the environmental impact of construction (Green Alliance, 2023). This is particularly important for cement, which is challenging to remove from a building for reuse. Reduction and reuse can be increased through circular construction tools and approaches, sometimes described as ‘modern methods of construction’. These can improve companies’ understanding of GHG emissions throughout their supply chains. Examples include modular buildings, digital tools such as material passports, offsite manufacturing, and sustainable material substitution (Green Alliance, 2023).
Barriers:
Current circular building standards are voluntary, such as the UK Net Zero Carbon Building Standard, and the Scottish Government’s Net Zero Public Sector Buildings Standard (Scottish Government, 2021b; UK Net Zero Carbon Building Standards, n.d.). Construction design is determined by the client. With voluntary initiatives, cost factors are more likely to win over environmental factors (Construction company interview).
There are no mandatory requirements for construction companies in Scotland to conduct an LCA or report scope 3 emissions (those in its upstream and downstream value chains, which typically include the majority of material-related impacts) (construction company interview; Green Alliance, 2022).
Skills shortages and inconsistent standards, for instance for LCAs and product passports, limit the sector’s ability to apply circular practices (Hurst and O’Donovan, 2024; construction company interview).
Certain industry practices lead to unnecessary waste. For example, to ensure they have enough supply, contractors will often order 5-10% surplus, which can be hard to reuse (construction company interview).
Sustainable construction materials often cost more (construction company interview).
Environmental benefits of modern methods of construction are not fully accounted for in public procurement and other financial investment opportunities (Green Alliance, 2023).
Designing for deconstruction
Designing buildings with future disassembly in mind allows more materials, especially bricks and tiles, to be reused instead of downcycled. Such direct reuse has a greater impact in reducing raw material use than recycling (Green Alliance, 2023). However, deconstruction should only be pursued if the building is not fit for repurposing (construction company interview).
Early sorting of demolition materials also improves recovery outcomes. Many mechanical fines are produced from mixed, unsorted demolition waste, which results in variable and lower-quality outputs. Sorting materials earlier produces cleaner, inert fines that are more straightforward to reuse (C&D waste management processor interview, SEPA interview).
A major barrier to recovery and recycling of mechanically-treated fines is their complexity and variability (Section 6.1.1). To minimise the challenges associated with this, upstream measures should support sorting at source, before waste reaches skips or waste transfer sites (C&D waste management processor interview, SEPA interview). Greater source separation would generate more inert-only fines, which are also easier to find uses for due to waste management exemptions.
Barriers:
Mainstream current and historical construction practices do not design for deconstruction (Arup and Ellen McArthur Foundation, 2020).
Investors are not incentivised to incorporate circularity principles in design, considering material recovery (Arup and Ellen McArthur Foundation, 2020).
Demand for low-quality recycled aggregate (Section 6.1.2) takes the focus away from higher-quality recycling and reuse.
Integrated C&D tools and requirements for identifying, classifying and certifying salvaged materials are lacking (construction company interview).
Soil and stones: End-of-pipe diversion
This section explores the end-of-pipe diversion options for soils and stones from construction waste (EWC 17 05 04). End-of-pipe diversion options are concerned with when the material is classified as waste, and is then reprocessed into another material. As there are many exemptions for soil and stones reuse, the main diversion options are upstream, occurring before waste classification. The main end-of-pipe diversion option is to produce recycled aggregates.
Recycled aggregates
Soils can be washed to separate sand, gravel, and stone from contaminants, especially on brownfield sites, and reused as aggregate in construction (Magnusson et al., 2015; Choi et al., 2018; waste industry association interview).
Barriers:
Recycled aggregate is more expensive than virgin materials (Magnusson et al., 2015; commercial remediation company interview). Quarrying for natural aggregate is cheaper and more accessible (commercial remediation company and waste industry association interviews).
Soil remediation technologies are not widely used in Scotland (C&D skip operator interview).
Fluctuations in cost and quality lead to inconsistent demand, impacting the feasibility of supply. For example, a facility failed in 2016 due to lack of demand (commercial landfill operator interview). There is good supply in Scotland of recycled quarry materials, but demand is low (commercial remediation company interview).
There is low industry understanding of how to use recycled aggregates. For example, road projects where the ground is damp tend to require natural aggregates; recycled aggregates are more applicable for farm tracks, because they meet requirements for tractors more easily than cars (C&D skip operator interview).
There is a higher recycling and reuse rate for soils and aggregates on site; what is taken off site tends to be less usable (C&D skip operator interview).
Soil and stones: Upstream diversion options
This section covers how soils and stones can be kept on site or reused at another site under exemptions, avoiding classification as waste.
Landfill/quarry cover, engineering and restoration
Soils and stones are used for temporary or final landfill cover, haul roads within a site, and restoring quarry sites. In landfill restoration, layers of subsoil and topsoil must be added, to enable development of vegetation (SEPA, 2018).
In Scotland, exemptions from SLfT apply under the Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations 2011 (Schedule 1, paragraph 9). This relates to where soil and stones treat land for agricultural or ecological benefit. Soil and stones are not subject to the same per-hectare limits for infilling agricultural land as other waste types (Waste Management Licensing Regulations, Schedule 2, paragraph 2), making it easier to divert them in larger quantities.
Barriers:
Fewer landfills are operational. The number has declined since 2005 (SEPA, 2023) and this is expected to reduce further after the ban on landfilling biodegradable municipal waste (interviews with commercial remediation company; waste industry association; large public body).
Landscaping and construction
On-site reuse of soils reduces transportation and storage issues, making it the most cost-effective option (commercial remediation company interview). Transfer to another work site requires a waste management licence or exemption. Exemptions apply where soils and stones are used to treat land, provided certain conditions are met (Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations 2011, Schedule 1, Paragraph 7).
SEPA has issued regulatory guidance to support the sustainable reuse of greenfield soils which are soils from undeveloped, uncontaminated land. The soil must be used for a specified purpose, identified before excavation begins, and transfer must be approved by SEPA. Purposes may include the operational land of railways or land which is woodland, park, garden, verge, landscaped area, sports or recreation ground, churchyard or cemetery.
Interviewees indicated that practices for coordinating soil reuse in Scotland vary between projects based on developers (commercial remediation company and engineering consultancy interview). Public sector contracts sometimes include reuse requirements, while private contracts typically show less incentive. Carbon considerations are an emerging driver for on-site reuse, where these materials are less ideal than virgin quarry materials but still meet requirements (engineering consultancy interview).
Barriers:
The UK has over 700 soil types requiring thorough classification by type (topsoil/subsoil) and hazard level (hazardous/non-hazardous, active/inactive) prior to reuse (The Royal Society, 2020; Soil Association, 2021).
Mismatches in soil type, availability, project timelines, and storage requirements often hinder reuse (Thompson, 2021; Choi et al., 2018; Hale et al., 2021; Marasini et al., 2012; SEPA, commercial remediation company and engineering consultancy interviews).
Geography and pressure to keep heavy vehicle movements off community roads incentivises finding reuse options close to sites of origin, but timing can prevent this (engineering consultancy interview).
In some cases, the SLfT can have less negative financial impact on a project than costs of storage, transport, or project delays, making reuse impractical (engineering consultancy interview).
Reuse of soil and stones may be deprioritised compared to the sustainability of manufactured materials like concrete (Berryman et al., 2023) especially where time and budget constraints apply (commercial remediation company and engineering consultancy interviews).
Reuse options for contaminated soils are limited. Untreated soil is costly to landfill, while treated soil is typically restricted to low-grade uses such as embankments (engineering consultancy interview).
Liability concerns discourage topsoil reuse as developers and landowners remain responsible for future environmental impacts (Hale et al., 2021).
Multiple compliance pathways such as exemptions, permits, and definition of waste protocols create confusion, increasing the risk of non-compliance, misclassification, and illegal disposal (commercial remediation company interview; Thompson, 2021).
Despite Berryman’s et al. (2023) guidance aimed at harmonising best practice, industry uptake remains inconsistent. The absence of a unified legislative framework results in varied approaches across agriculture, land development, engineering, and land management sectors (Thompson, 2021).
Preliminary feasibility assessment of diversion options
This section presents an indicative assessment of the viability of different waste diversion options for the three priority materials: mechanically-treated fines (19 12 12), mechanically-treated mineral fines (19 12 09), and soils and stones (17 05 04). The assessment considers how feasible the diversion options currently are. This includes information on current use, research and development activity, and the barriers mentioned above in section 6.
The feasibility score therefore indicates the extent that future interventions are needed to target barriers and enable diversion. The feasibility scoring is as follows:
1 = Not currently feasible, would require significant intervention to upscale.
2 = Feasible to some extent, some barriers would need to be addressed.
3 = Most feasible, already happening widely in Scotland.
n/a = not applicable, didn’t come up as a diversion option for the material in the research.
The methodology behind this assessment can be viewed in Appendix D.
Tables 4 and 5 below present the preliminary feasibility assessment of the end-of-pipe and upstream diversion options. For reference we also include a general impact rating of the technology based on the findings from desk-based research and stakeholder interviews. The impact rating reflects the overall environmental and circular economy benefits (e.g. quantities of materials diverted from landfill) that could be achieved if the option were implemented more widely, using a simple scale of ‘high’, ‘medium’ or ‘low’.
Key takeaways of the assessment are:
Mechanically-treated fines have a limited number of feasible end-of-pipe solutions at present. Landfill cover and gypsum recycling are technically possible, but most other downstream options score low on feasibility and offer only low to medium impact. As a result, it is likely better to prioritise upstream interventions – such as deconstruction, modular construction, and refurbishment – for their higher impact potential, even though they are not yet widely adopted.
Mechanically-treated mineral fines have more feasible end-of-pipe diversion options, including reuse in land restoration and aggregate recycling. These options are already in operation and could be scaled further considering the opportunity to provide ecological improvements so maximum value is retained.
Soils and stones show the greatest feasibility overall, particularly for recycled aggregates and reuse in landscaping. While some remediation technologies are not yet fully developed, most of the downstream options are already in use.
Gypsum and plasterboard recycling is moderately feasible and could play a larger role with better separation and recovery at source.
Upstream interventions such as modular construction, deconstruction, and refurbishment, score high on impact across all materials where relevant, but face barriers related to investment, data, and planning. Technological readiness is improving – especially with AI-driven solutions for sorting and design – and deployment is likely to increase in the next 5–10 years with the right incentives and digital infrastructure.
Table : Preliminary feasibility assessment of end-of-pipe diversion options
Diversion options
Potential impact (low, med, high)
Mechanically-treated fines
Mechanically-treated mineral fines
Soils and stones
Landfill/quarry cover, engineering and restoration
Low
3
3
3
Recycled aggregates
Medium
1
2
3
Land treatment and agricultural soil improvement
Medium
1
3
n/a
Gypsum fines recycling
Medium
2
n/a
n/a
Table 5: Preliminary feasibility assessment of upstream diversion options
Diversion options
Potential impact (low, med, high)
Mechanically-treated fines
Mechanically-treated mineral fines
Soils and stones
Remediation technologies (e.g. soil washing)
Medium
1
1
2
Landscaping and construction soil reuse
High
n/a
n/a
2
Modular construction and material reuse
High
1
1
n/a
Deconstruction and material sorting
High
1
1
n/a
Refurbish or retrofit before demolition
High
1
1
n/a
Key (see the methodology above for more information)
Score
Colour
1: Not currently feasible
2: Feasible to some extent
3: Most feasible
n/a: Not a diversion option
Policy assessment
This section provides an overview of existing policies influencing the management and diversion of the three priority materials. It also identifies policy gaps and presents potential interventions discussed in previous sections to enhance waste diversion, aligning with Scotland’s environmental objectives.
Overview of existing policies
Several key policies and fiscal mechanisms shape the management and disposal of the priority materials in Scotland. Some policies are devolved to the Scottish Government, while others are reserved, under UK Government control. These policies shape the incentives and barriers encountered by waste producers and processors in diverting materials from landfill.
Fiscal measures
Scottish Landfill Tax (SLfT), the focus of this study, is devolved legislation introduced in 2015 to reduce the environmental impacts of waste, encouraging waste reduction and adherence to the waste hierarchy in Scotland. While standard-rate SLfT has risen significantly to £126.15 per tonne in 2025-26, the lower rate (£4.05 per tonne in 2025-26) remains considerably lower, as is broadly the case in the rest of the UK. As discussed, this lower rate is applied to seven groups of qualifying materials (Section 5.3), typically inert or less polluting wastes such as some construction and demolition waste. The lower-rate aims to provide an economic incentive for their diversion from landfill while avoid imposing undue costs on sectors where alternative treatment options may be limited.
The Aggregates Levy (AGL) is a UK-wide tax applied to commercially exploited (virgin) crushed rock, sand, and gravel to encourage the use of recycled alternatives. A Scottish Aggregates Tax(SAT) is expected to replace the UK AGL from April 2026, offering an opportunity to explore ways to further incentivise the use of secondary aggregates (Scottish Government, 2024b).
The Climate Change Levy (CCL) and Carbon Price Floor (CPF) are UK-wide fiscal measures designed to reduce carbon emissions by taxing energy use and setting a minimum price for carbon from electricity generation (HM Revenue and Customs, 2024). While these policies primarily lead to emissions reductions (Döbbeling-Hildebrandt et al. 2024, p.2) they also indirectly affect waste management across the UK by incentivising energy efficiency and low-carbon industrial processes.
Other regulatory measures
The Waste (Scotland) Regulations 2012, which are devolved secondary legislation, require waste producers to prioritise prevention, reuse, and recycling over landfill disposal (Scottish Government, 2012b). Businesses must segregate recyclable materials to improve recycling rates (Zero Waste Scotland, 2023). While these regulations reinforce waste hierarchy principles, they do not specifically address lower-rate waste streams.
The upcoming ban on biodegradable municipal waste (BMW) to landfill, effective 31 December 2025, is a devolved Scottish Government policy aimed at reducing environmental impacts from organic waste. While this ban will primarily impact standard-rate waste (Scottish Government, 2022), it could have indirect consequences for certain lower-rate materials. Minerals, and soils and stones, traditionally used for landfill engineering purposes, may see temporarily higher demand for use in landfill closures, but a long-term decline in demand. Alternative diversion pathways would be needed for these to align with Scotland’s circular economy objectives. In addition, gypsum, which currently can only be landfilled at sites without bio-waste, is likely to become easier to landfill. There may also be an increase bio-based mechanically-treated fines from municipal waste streams. Increased enforcement of fines’ classification and incentives for recycling may therefore be required. However, the ban will not signal the complete end of bio-waste to landfill, as it includes certain exemptions.
Digital Waste Transfer Notes (WTNs), a UK-wide initiative, aims to improve traceability and enforcement by transitioning to an electronic system for recording waste movements (DEFRA, 2023). This system aims to reduce the misclassification of waste, including lower-rate materials like mechanically-treated fines, by providing greater transparency in the movement of waste. It is expected to “shine a light on transactions and actors” currently missing from the system, while enhancing compliance with landfill tax regulations (CIWM, 2023). The April 2025 roll-out has recently been postponed to April 2026.
These are the key fiscal and regulatory policies interacting with lower-rate materials. However, gaps remain in their effectiveness for supporting diversion options for the three categories of waste which make up the bulk of lower-rated waste in Scotland notably mechanically-treated fines, soils and stones, and mineral waste. Addressing these gaps could involve targeted interventions, as discussed in the following sections and Appendix A.
Policy gaps and potential interventions
Despite existing regulatory and fiscal policies, several policy gaps hinder the effective diversion of lower-rate materials from landfill, such as mechanically-treated fines, and soils and stones from construction. These gaps are categorised according to their relation to either end-of-pipe waste management or upstream prevention in the material life-cycle.
This section outlines potential interventions to address such gaps. These are not policy recommendations but options to consider. Further research, analysis and consultation would be required before deciding whether to take any, or all, forward.
End-of-pipe diversion
Compliance risks and landfill misclassification
A key enforcement challenge is misclassification of waste at landfill sites. The widening gap between standard- and lower-rate SLfT (now standing at above £100 per tonne in 2025-26) may have inadvertently created financial incentives for waste producers to classify waste as lower-rate whenever possible. Along with the complex classification criteria (see section 5.3), this may have led to both deliberate and unintentional misclassification, particularly for mechanically-treated fines.
Rather than being residual outputs of material recovery, large quantities of fines are purposefully produced to qualify for the lower rate (Section 6.1.1). This distorts waste tracking data and results in potentially recoverable material being landfilled.
Landfill operators hold tax liability for misclassification, even though they do not generate or pre-process the waste. This creates financial risks for operators, leading some to refuse lower-rate fines altogether.
Ambiguity in classification raises costs for both regulators and waste operators. Waste producers may unintentionally misclassify waste due to lack of clear, standardised guidance, leading to incorrect application of the lower tax rate (see Section 7.2.1.1). Although better guidance could reduce some misclassification, it is unlikely to fully resolve the issue. This is because the underlying rules that determine whether fines are subject to the lower or standard rate are themselves complex and difficult to apply consistently, particularly when mapped against EWC waste code classifications (see Section 5.3). Clearer guidance may help reduce ambiguity, though it may also be worth exploring whether simplification of the tax qualification rules could support more consistent classification.
A recent SEPA report on the BMW-to-landfill ban notes that sorting residues from processing municipal waste (including mechanically-treated fines) may be generated in greater volumes in order to bypass the ban (SEPA, 2024a). This risks undermining the intent of the bio-waste ban policy through reclassification rather than genuine diversion. This risk is supported by our findings about the production of mechanically-treated fines to qualify for the lower rate (Section 6.1.1).
Potential fiscal interventions:
Explore the feasibility of a specific tax rate for mechanically-treated fines which is much closer to the standard rate, or reclassification under the standard rate. This could discourage excessive fines production while retaining the lower rate for less problematic inert materials. A careful balance would need to be struck to avoid unintended consequences, particularly for businesses reliant on landfill for inert waste management. Supportive measures, addressing upstream value chains, would likely be needed.
Potential non-fiscal interventions
Technical: Review LOI testing requirements to ensure they do not deter investment in fines processing, while maintaining environmental safeguards (C&D waste management processor interview; waste industry association interview; C&D skip operator interview).
Enforcement: Explore the potential for enhanced regulatory oversight through the upcoming digital waste transfer notes (WTNs) system to track and verify waste classification at source rather than at landfill. Through this, tax liability for misclassified mechanical fines could be shifted to the company which produced the fines, even if this is discovered after it has been accepted at landfill, along with penalties for misclassification.
Other: Improve guidance on EWC code classification by providing clearer criteria to support consistent decisions on whether waste qualifies for the lower rate. This could include practical examples of lower-rate materials, decision trees, and alignment with the upcoming digital waste transfer note system. In the longer term, there may also be value in exploring whether simplifying the underlying rules on lower-rate material classification could further reduce classification ambiguity.
Separation and recovery of mechanically-treated fines
Inadequate pre-sorting of C&D waste leads to contamination and fines production. Once contaminated, fines are difficult to reprocess. Industry practices in Scotland and globally do not sufficiently prioritise separation at the source, meaning valuable materials are lost to landfill.
Potential fiscal interventions:
Continue strengthening incentives to increase the demand for recycled fines. This is already starting with the planned introduction of the Scottish Aggregates Tax in April 2026 which will initially align with the UK Aggregates Levy. Over time, there may be scope for policy divergence in Scotland. Additional financial incentives – such as tax breaks or recycled content requirements – could drive up industry circularity, such as for reused material content, recycled material content and reusable materials (Green Alliance, 2023). However, interventions would have to avoid unintended consequences related to availability of recycled fines. This could be a particular issue in rural areas, which are further from recycling infrastructure (commercial remediation company interview).
Potential non-fiscal interventions:
Technological: More support for technologies and infrastructure to reprocess fines and reduce contamination could help address issues with fines in washing facilities. Programmes like the Knowledge Transfer Partnership could play a role. Existing examples include phytoremediation, which uses plants and microorganisms to degrade pollutants and reduce heavy metals (Yadav et al., 2022).
Technological: Technologies exist to make the shape of fines coarser and more suitable for construction purposes, though the outputs are currently more costly than natural aggregates (C&D skip operator interview). Further reuse routes could be explored, for example how to promote fine aggregates being added to paints for flooring to increase traction.
Regulatory: Encourage early-stage waste management planning by integrating material audits into construction permitting. This includes site investigations, sampling and testing to support effective use of recycled aggregates.
Other: Improve industry understanding of recycled fines through guidance and awareness campaigns, including how and when they can be reused (C&D skip operator interview).
Cross-border waste movement risks
SLfT operates within a broader UK framework, presenting cross-border waste movement compliance challenges. For instance, if Scotland increased its lower-rate SLfT while England maintained the current lower rate, waste exports may increase, undermining the tax’s effectiveness as well as Scottish tax revenues. Similarly, restricting mechanical fines’ eligibility for the lower rate in Scotland could lead to this waste stream being diverted to England instead of being recovered.
These risks are particularly relevant in light of recent and proposed changes across the UK. As mentioned, the Welsh Government increased its lower rate of Landfill Disposals Tax in 2024, and the UK Government is currently consulting on significant reforms to Landfill Tax in England and Northern Ireland, with the consultation due to conclude in July 2025 (HM Treasury and HMRC, 2025).
Introducing financial or enforcement-based interventions is challenging in a cross-border context. The Scottish Government has limited or no authority over waste processed or disposed of in other UK jurisdictions.
Potential fiscal interventions:
Considering penalties for cross-border misclassification, similar to Wales’ Unauthorised Disposals Tax (150% of the standard rate) and the proposal in the UK government’s consultation (200% of the standard rate) which creates an additional financial deterrent for people seeking to dispose of waste illegally.
Potential non-fiscal interventions:
Regulatory/enforcement: Enhancing regulatory and enforcement coordination between Scotland, England, and Wales to ensure greater policy consistency and prevent waste tourism.
Upstream diversion
Reducing reliance on landfill also requires preventing lower-rate materials from being generated as waste. However, this is constrained by limited incentives for circular practices, inconsistent reuse standards, weak producer responsibility measures and insufficient integration of circularity in planning and procurement.
Lack of incentives for designing in circularity
Soils, stones, and minerals removed from C&D sites are often generated, and classified as waste, without efforts to improve their quality or assess their reuse potential. This results in unnecessary landfill disposal, despite available prevention and recovery pathways. Lack of guidance on soil and stone classification, combined with inconsistent reuse standards, means that secondary materials markets remain underdeveloped.
Mechanically-treated fines are often the result of poor material selection at the design and procurement stages. If more construction materials and products were designed for disassembly, reuse, or easier sorting, rather than demolition, the production of fines could be significantly reduced. Currently, there is no strong economic driver for waste producers to prioritise clean, separable materials over mixed waste streams that result in fines.
Current planning regulations and public procurement rules do not sufficiently integrate circular economy principles. Without upfront material assessments, valuable materials are classified as waste and disposed of unnecessarily.
The UK and the devolved nations are moving toward more comprehensive extended producer responsibility (EPR) schemes for other materials. If an effective system is adopted for construction, this could encourage producers to adopt circular practices and reduce waste generation at the design stage. There have also been sub-national developments in London, where large planning applications for approval by the mayor now require whole lifecycle carbon assessments, carbon reduction plans, and circular economy statements. Before a redevelopment or demolition plan can be approved, an audit must be carried out to determine the reuse potential of materials in the existing building (Mayor of London, 2022).
Circular economy policies such as these are needed to transition the construction sector as a whole, changing value chains so that much less of the priority materials in this study are generated. The lower rate of SLfT could be iteratively increased in tandem with these interventions, as a supporting measure; if it were to be raised too rapidly without supporting upstream interventions, negative impacts on the construction sector and on illegal disposal would likely occur.
Potential fiscal interventions:
Consider raising the overall lower rate of SLfT to provide a greater incentive for circular practices on construction sites. Even a relatively modest increase could help to justify the costs of storing and transporting materials such as soils and stones for reuse (engineering consultancy interview). Wales’ new lower rate (£6.30 per tonne) could serve as a benchmark. A rate of £6 per tonne was deemed viable by industry interviewees (commercial landfill operator and C&D waste management processor).
Consider monitoring the development and impacts of the upcoming Scottish Aggregates Tax (SAT), which will replace the UK Aggregates Levy from April 2026. While the SAT will be limited to the commercial exploitation of aggregates as defined in the 2024 Act (Scottish Government, 2024b), its introduction provides a useful opportunity to review whether taxation influences the quantities of lower-rate aggregates sent to landfill. Insights from this review could help inform future considerations around the treatment of other virgin materials used in construction, within the context of devolved powers and existing legislative frameworks.
Consider financial incentives for reuse in construction, such as tax relief for projects incorporating secondary materials (construction company interview).
Ensure SLfT exemptions support the diversion of lower-rate materials from landfill. A review of existing and upcoming exemptions, for instance with the bio-waste to landfill ban, may help assess their effectiveness in facilitating prevention, reuse and recovery while maintaining environmental protections.
Consider engaging with HM Revenue and Customs over VAT reform, such as extending zero-rate VAT to refurbishment and retrofit to reduce incentives for demolition and new build construction.
Non-fiscal interventions
Policy: Consider the expansion of EPR to cover construction materials, shifting financial responsibility for waste management onto producers to encourage modular design and reuse.
Policy: Consider mandatory, rather than voluntary, circularity requirements targeting construction project clients (construction company interview). Investigate opportunities to strengthen public procurement rules to prioritise secondary materials, reuse, spoil management and design for deconstruction. These requirements could support more systematic waste prevention at the planning stage and drive investment in circular practices (SEDA, 2024; O’Leary, Osmani and Goodier, 2024).
Policy: Consider reforms to embed circularity in planning policy, such as requirements for pre-demolition assessments, material recovery assessments before deconstruction and resource management plans to include deconstruction design (Construction company interview; Green Alliance, 2023).
Policy: Explore adoption of carbon reporting tools that account for lifecycle emissions, including embodied carbon and Scope 3 (SEDA, 2024). Distinct reuse and recycling reporting for high-impact materials like concrete may also help reduce downcycling (Green Alliance, 2023).
Technological: Consider supporting the development of product passports or material databases for construction materials to improve transparency and enable reuse (construction company interview).
Technological: Consider the future use of AI and matching platforms to optimise design and reuse coordination (Huang et al., 2022; Choi et al., 2018; construction company interview).
Operational: Consider investigating early-stage site audits, sampling and testing to support on-site recovery and reuse of recycled aggregates (C&D skip operator and engineering consultancy interviews).
Operational: Consider the potential for construction material hubs to store and redistribute soils and other surplus materials. However, barriers remain around ownership, quality control, certification and fraud risk (commercial remediation company and construction company interviews).
Other: Consider aligning government strategies on housing and urban development with circular economy targets to create long-term demand for reused materials (Green Alliance, 2023).
Other: Consider investing in training and awareness to support greater uptake of recycled aggregates and reused soils. Cultural shifts may be needed to encourage viewing soil and stones as valuable resources, rather than ‘dirt’ (Thompson, 2021; Berryman et al., 2023).
Addressing both end-of-pipe and upstream barriers will be essential for improving SLfT effectiveness and enhancing material recovery. As with other areas of circular economy policy, coordinated packages of measures working across material value chains, targeting incentives at multiple stakeholders, are likely to be needed. By considering these policy measures, Scotland could identify strategies to reduce landfill reliance, improve material efficiency, and accelerate its transition to a circular economy.
Conclusions
This section summarises the key findings of the research and assesses whether the lower-rate SLfT remains effective in supporting Scotland’s environmental and waste management objectives. It also considers the broader policy implications, including potential enforcement challenges, unintended consequences, and cross-border impacts.
Summary of key findings
The lower rate of SLfT was introduced to enable the cost-effective disposal of low-risk, inert waste while ensuring compliance with Scotland’s broader environmental policies. Overall landfill trends show a mild downward trend in landfilled lower-rate materials at least until early 2020 (Figure 1), suggesting the tax may have initially influenced disposal patterns. Tonnages of lower rate material to landfill have since fluctuated without a clear trend (Figure 1). This research identifies several factors that may influence the continued effectiveness of the lower rate:
Lower-rate landfill disposal is dominated by three specific waste streams—mechanically-treated fines, soils and stones, and mechanically-treated mineral fines—which together accounted for 77% of all lower-rate waste landfilled in 2023-24.
Mechanically-treated fines are landfilled in the greatest quantities out of all lower-rate materials, and have seen the greatest increase in quantities between 2021-2024 (with a slight dip in 2022-23). This is despite originally being intended as residual outputs from material recovery processes. This trend raises concerns over misclassification and evidence from our interviews of fines being produced on purpose.
Environmental impact analysis highlights that mechanically-treated fines pose significant risks, contributing disproportionately to air pollution, resource depletion, and biodiversity loss compared to other lower-rate materials.
Current SLfT structures, fiscal incentives, and policy measures are not effectively supporting higher-value diversion options for lower-rate materials. The relatively affordable lower tax rate continues to make landfill the most economically attractive option for many waste producers of the priority materials, as it does in some other parts of the UK.
The upcoming ban on BMW (effective December 2025) will change landfill dynamics, reducing long-term demand for materials traditionally used in landfill engineering, and may lead to more lower-rate materials being sent to landfill.
Misclassification of waste remains a major issue, exacerbated by complex EWC code classifications that do not always align with SLfT qualifying material criteria. The lack of easy-to-use guidance and strong oversight contributes to both deliberate and unintentional misclassification.
These findings suggest that while the lower-rate SLfT has played a role in reducing landfill disposal overall, there may be opportunities to better align it with Scotland’s evolving circular economy and net zero ambitions.
Does the lower rate of Scottish Landfill Tax (SLfT) still support Scotland’s environmental objectives?
The lower-rate SLfT was designed to provide a cost-effective landfill option for inert, low-risk materials while supporting Scotland’s environmental policies, including waste reduction, emissions reduction, and adherence to the waste hierarchy. Since it was introduced, Scotland has introduced ambitious net zero targets and has increased its policy focus on achieving a circular economy. Compared to when the UK-wide Landfill Tax was first introduced in 1996, there is now more emphasis on reducing environmental impacts associated with upstream material use, rather than solely reducing emissions and hazards once materials are in landfill.
This research finds that the lower rate is no longer fully aligned with Scotland’s environmental objectives. Evidence suggests that progress in diverting lower-rate materials may have stalled, with data indicating a levelling-off of lower-rate landfill tonnages since 2020–21 (Figure 1). In addition, there is insufficient incentive to divert materials upstream, including via the planning and design stages of the construction projects which generate much of these materials.
Misalignment with policy goals
While the SLfT was intended to discourage landfill disposal and promote alternative waste management options, the lower rate has, in some cases, created unintended incentives:
Mechanically-treated fines have become a dominant lower-rate waste stream despite their potential for reduction and recovery, indicating that the tax structure may not sufficiently encourage more circular treatment of the mixed construction materials that make up this waste stream.
The low cost of landfill disposal creates limited incentives for repurposing soils and stones, which could otherwise be reused in construction and landscaping.
The lower rate of tax, at £4.05 per tonne (2025-26) appears to have had a limited impact in shifting waste up the hierarchy, with landfill remaining the most economically viable option for many waste producers.
Environmental and economic consequences
Mechanically-treated fines, which now make up a significant portion of lower-rate landfill disposal, have disproportionately high environmental impacts (on a whole life-cycle basis) compared to other lower-rate materials, including contributions to air pollution, resource depletion, and biodiversity loss.
The financial attractiveness of landfill compared to investment in secondary material recovery remains a major barrier. The cost of processing and diverting lower-rate materials often exceeds landfill costs, discouraging investment in alternative waste management solutions.
Compliance and enforcement challenges
The widening tax differential between standard- and lower-rate waste contributes to increased misclassification, particularly for mechanically-treated fines, where interviewees pointed to the ‘production’ of fines in order to qualify for the lower rate.
Landfill operators, who bear the primary tax liability for misclassified waste, face increased financial and compliance risks, leading some to refuse lower-rate fines due to the high burden of tax assessments and retrospective penalties.
Complexities in aligning SLfT qualifying criteria with EWC codes contribute to misclassification, due to a lack of clear guidance for waste producers and operators.
Conclusion and policy implications
The lower-rate SLfT remains partially effective but is increasingly misaligned with Scotland’s circular economy and wider environmental objectives. While it has supported landfill diversion in some cases, the increasing quantity of mechanically-treated fines being landfilled at lower rate undermines resource efficiency and waste hierarchy goals. Without adjustments, in conjunction with other supporting policies, there is a risk that the tax may continue to favour landfill disposal over resource recovery, limiting Scotland’s progress toward a low-carbon, circular economy.
To ensure Scotland meets its waste reduction, emissions reduction, and circular economy goals, reforms to the lower-rate SLfT are necessary. Key areas for further exploration could include:
Raising the lower SLfT rate by a greater margin than in previous years (as Wales is doing and proposed in the UK’s 2025 consultation), to incentivise application of the waste hierarchy.
Assigning a significantly higher SLfT rate to mechanically-treated fines specifically, to address misclassification and recognise its relatively high environmental impacts.
Strengthening enforcement and guidance on material classification to reduce compliance risks.
Build on existing cross-border regulatory and enforcement cooperation to address ongoing challenges such as waste tourism and the evolution of the landfill tax, recognising the complexities of working across different regimes.
By considering these targeted interventions, Scotland can help reduce reliance on landfill, improve material efficiency, and ensure that landfill tax policy aligns with long-term sustainability goals.
References
Ali, M. (2023) ‘An investigation into the uses of trommel fınes produced from recyclıng of constructıon and demolition waste’, Construction and Building Materials, 369(130579), pp.1-11. Available at https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0950061823002908 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Berryman, C. et al. (2023) Sustainable management of surplus soil and aggregates from construction (C809). London, UK: CIRIA.
Bogas, J.A., Silva, M. and Glória Gomes, M. (2019) ‘Unstabilized and stabilized compressed earth blocks with partial incorporation of recycled aggregates’, International Journal of Architectural Heritage, 13(4), pp.569-584. Available at: https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/abs/10.1080/15583058.2018.1442891 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Braga, B.B., de Carvalho, T.R.A., Brosinsky, A., Foerster, S. and Medeiros, P.H.A., (2019) ‘From waste to resource: Cost-benefit analysis of reservoir sediment reuse for soil fertilization in a semiarid catchment’, Science of the total environment, 670, pp.158-169. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0048969719310654 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Burdier, M., Anshassi, M., Guo, Y., Laux, S. and Townsend, T. (2022) ‘Enhancing the beneficial reuse properties of construction and demolition debris fines using lab-scale washing’, Resources, Conservation and Recycling, 183(106361). Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0921344922002063 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Campe, J. et al. (2012) The potential of remineralization with rock mineral fines to transform agriculture, forests, sustainable biofuels production, sequester carbon, and stabilize the climate. Available at: https://www.remineralize.org/wp-content/uploads/Rio%20Summit-RTE-2012.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Choi, H, et al. (2018) ‘Soil Recycling Among Construction Sites by Optimizing Schedule and Costs for Earthmoving’ Journal of Asian Architecture and Building Engineering, 16(2), pp. 439-446. Available at: https://doi.org/10.3130/jaabe.16.439 (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
European Commission (2000) 2000/532/EC: Commission Decision of 3 May 2000 replacing Decision 94/3/EC establishing a list of wastes pursuant to Article 1(a) of Council Directive 75/442/EEC on waste and Council Decision 94/904/EC establishing a list of hazardous waste pursuant to Article 1(4) of Council Directive 91/689/EEC on hazardous waste. Available at: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dec/2000/532/2023-12-06 (Accessed: 27/03/2025)
Cottrell, J.A., Ali, M. and Etienne, G. (2024) ‘Utilisation of construction, demolition and excavation waste for the production of compressed trommel fines blocks’, Construction and Building Materials, 416(134985), pp.1-11. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0950061824001260 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
ClimateXChange and Ricardo (2025) Evidence review on the potential role of alternatives to primary aggregates to deliver reductions in GHG emissions [Forthcoming; publication expected summer 2025].
Di Maria, F., Micale, C., Sordi, A., Cirulli, G. and Marionni, M. (2013) ‘Urban mining: Quality and quantity of recyclable and recoverable material mechanically and physically extractable from residual waste’, Waste Management, 33(12), pp.2594-9. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0956053X13003814 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Döbbeling-Hildebrandt, N. et al. (2024) ‘Systematic review and meta-analysis of ex-post evaluations on the effectiveness of carbon pricing’, Nature Communications, 15(1) pp.1-12, Available at: https://www.nature.com/articles/s41467-024-48512-w#ref-CR69 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
European Commission (2000) 2000/532/EC: Commission Decision of 3 May 2000 replacing Decision 94/3/EC establishing a list of wastes pursuant to Article 1(a) of Council Directive 75/442/EEC on waste and Council Decision 94/904/EC establishing a list of hazardous waste pursuant to Article 1(4) of Council Directive 91/689/EEC on hazardous waste.
Hale, S. E (2021) ‘The Reuse of Excavated Soils from Construction and Demolition Projects: Limitations and Possibilities’, Sustainability, 13(11), p. 6083. Available at: https://doi.org/10.3390/su13116083 (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
Haynes, R.J., Zhou, Y.F. and Weng, X. (2022) ‘Formulation and use of manufactured soils: A major use for organic and inorganic wastes’, Critical Reviews in Environmental Science and Technology, 52(22), pp.4113-4133. Available at: https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/abs/10.1080/10643389.2021.1989909 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Hernández García, L.C., Monteiro, S.N., Colorado Lopera, H.A. (2024) ‘Recycling Clay Waste from Excavation, Demolition, and Construction: Trends and Challenges’, Sustainability, 16(14), pp. 1-20. Available at: https://www.mdpi.com/2071-1050/16/14/6265
Huang, T. et al. (2022) ‘A BIM-GIS-IoT-Based System for Excavated Soil Recycling’, Buildings, 12(4), p. 457. Available at: https://doi.org/10.3390/buildings12040457 (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
Hurst, L.J. and O’Donovan, T.S. (2024). ‘Embodied impacts of key materials for UK decarbonised domestic retrofit: Differences between sources of embodied carbon and embodied energy data’, Energy and Buildings, 319(114515), pp. 1-12. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0378778824006315 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Kasinikota, P. and Tripura, D.D. (2021) ‘Evaluation of compressed stabilized earth block properties using crushed brick waste’, Construction and Building Materials, 280(122520). Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0950061821002804 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Katsumi, T. (2015) ‘Soil excavation and reclamation in civil engineering: Environmental aspects’, Soil Science and Plant Nutrition, 61(sup1), pp. 22–29. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1080/00380768.2015.1020506 (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
Magnusson, S. et al. (2015) ‘Sustainable management of excavated soil and rock in urban areas: A literature review’ Journal of Cleaner Production, 93, pp. 18-25. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2015.01.010 (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
Manning, D. and Vetterlein, J. (2004) ‘ExpLOItation and use of quarry fines’, Mist Project-Solutions, 44, pp.1-60. http://www.katlapumice.com/mist/mist2.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
O’Leary, M.J., Osmani, M. and Goodier, C. (2024) ‘Circular economy implementation strategies, barriers and enablers for UK rail infrastructure projects’, Resources, Conservation & Recycling Advances, 21. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2667378923000676 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Oujana, S. and Sanchez, D. (2018) ‘Origins of the Problematic Substances in Fines, for Their Acceptance at Inert Landfills’, Journal of Geoscience and Environment Protection, 6(5), pp.237-246. Available at: https://www.scirp.org/journal/paperinformation?paperid=84938 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Renella, G. (2021) ‘Recycling and Reuse of Sediments in Agriculture: Where Is the Problem?’ Sustainability, 13(4), pp. 1-12. Available at: https://www.mdpi.com/2071-1050/13/4/1648
Scottish Ecological Design Association (SEDA) (2024) 2045: The Big Conversation.
SEPA; the Civil Engineering Contractors Association (Scotland); the Environment Industries Commission (2010) Regulatory guidance: Promoting the sustainable reuse of greenfield soils in construction. Available at: https://www.sepa.org.uk/media/154233/reuse_greenfield_soils_construction.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
SEPA; Activities Exempt from Waste Management Licensing. Scottish Statutory Instrument 2011 No. 228: The Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations 2011. Paragraph 19. Available at:
Suárez, S., Roca, X. and Gasso, S. (2016) ‘Product-specific life cycle assessment of recycled gypsum as a replacement for natural gypsum in ordinary Portland cement: application to the Spanish context’, Journal of cleaner production, 117, pp.150-159. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0959652616000792 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Zhao, Z. et al (2020) ‘Use of recycled concrete aggregates from precast block for the production of new building blocks: An industrial scale study’, Resources, Conservation and Recycling, 157(104786). Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0921344920301075 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Zhao, X. (2021) ‘Stakeholder-associated factors influencing construction and demolition waste management: A systematic review’, Buildings, 11(4), pp. 1-22. Available at: https://doi.org/10.3390/buildings11040149 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Appendices
Alignment of the Scottish Landfill Tax (SLfT) with broader policy frameworks
This appendix provides further context on how the SLfT aligns with key environmental policy frameworks, specifically the Circular Economy (Scotland) Act 2024 and Scotland’s wider decarbonisation strategy. It highlights the role of SLfT in supporting waste hierarchy principles, promoting resource efficiency, and contributing to net-zero targets through practical examples – while also noting current limitations.
Circular Economy (Scotland) Act 2024
Example 1: Waste hierarchy alignment
The Circular Economy (Scotland) Act 2024 places strong emphasis on the waste hierarchy, which prioritises prevention, reuse, recycling, and recovery before landfill. SLfT reinforces this principle by applying a financial disincentive to landfill disposal. The lower rate of SLfT, applied to certain inert materials such as glass, ceramics and soil, encourages their diversion from landfill toward reuse or recycling. This supports the Act’s objectives by reducing dependence on landfill and promoting material circulation within the economy. However, as outlined in Section 3.1 the lower rate appears to be an insufficient incentive to drive significant upstream changes, such as waste prevention or more ambitious reuse practices.
Example 2: Waste prevention and resource efficiency
The Act also aims to improve resource efficiency across sectors. By differentiating tax rates based on environmental impact, SLfT promotes the recovery of materials with low impacts and discourages disposal of more polluting waste. This financial incentive supports businesses in adopting sustainable waste practices. That said, the influence of SLfT on broader resource efficiency is limited, as its primary focus is end-of-pipe disposal rather than incentivising upstream design, reduction, or material substitution choices
Scotland’s decarbonisation strategy
Example 3: Reducing emissions from waste management
Scotland’s decarbonisation strategy includes a target of net-zero emissions by 2045. Landfilled waste—particularly biodegradable materials—generates GHGs such as methane. SLfT supports emissions reduction by applying a higher tax rate to waste streams which emit more GHGs in landfill, encouraging their diversion. The upcoming ban on landfilling biodegradable municipal waste in 2025 builds on this, aligning landfill policy with Scotland’s climate commitments. However, SLfT’s impact remains focused on reducing emissions from landfilled waste, and does not yet provide strong incentives to reduce embodied carbon or promote lower-carbon materials earlier in the lifecycle.
Example 4: Circular economy and carbon footprint reduction
The strategy also promotes circular economy practices as a means of reducing carbon emissions. SLfT complements this by encouraging alternatives to landfill, such as repurposing lower-rate materials like soil and stones for construction. This can reduce the need to extract virgin materials, contributing to lower carbon footprints. Nonetheless, SLfT’s role in driving circular construction practices remains limited, as it does not directly incentivise material reuse, design for deconstruction, or low-carbon construction methods upstream.
Integration of policy goals
Example 5: Aligning SLfT with policy reviews and landfill ban
The Scottish Government has committed to reviewing waste management options by 2027, alongside the upcoming ban on landfilling biodegradable municipal waste. These developments present an opportunity to better integrate SLfT with other fiscal and regulatory tools. While SLfT plays a role in discouraging landfill and supporting environmental objectives, its effectiveness is partly constrained by limited coordination with wider policies on construction, procurement, and materials management. Stronger understanding of policy cross overs could enhance the overall impact of SLfT.
Methodology for quantitative data gathering and analysis
Data requests
Both Revenue Scotland (as regulators of the SLfT) and SEPA (as the national environmental authority) hold and publish statistical data on waste to landfill in Scotland. However, the public-facing outputs are summarised and categorised from more disaggregated data. This is primarily to protect confidentiality within the tax returns (RS) and to make the outputs more accessible to the public (SEPA). As such, we made data requests to both organisations.
RS provided annual financial year (FY) data for five full years against 13 EWC codes / group codes as highlighted in Section 4.1. Multiple codes were grouped together in six of the 13 rows of data where RS needed to aggregate data to protect confidentiality. This is where only one company is responsible for an entire tax return for a single code and could therefore be directly identifiable.
SEPA provided 3 full years of data broken down by quarter, also at EWC code level. This annual data is publicly available but the latest year was released early to us by SEPA for the purposes of this report. The data is fully disaggregated and includes operator name & address, operator description and waste origin. There are 2,514 individual records in the data file.
We also made a request to Zero Waste Scotland for access to their Scottish Waste Environmental Footprint Tool (SWEFT). The tool provides lifecycle-based factors for certain waste categories across different treatment pathways (e.g. landfill, recycling, incineration…) for six different environmental criteria:
Climate / greenhouse gases, as kg CO2 eq. The contribution of emissions of greenhouse gases to climate change, measured as Global Warming Potential (GWP100)
Biodiversity, as species loss. An aggregated measure of species at risk, based on the ReCiPe endpoint indicator for Ecosystem quality.
Air pollution, as kg PM2.5 eq., Air pollution’s damage to human health, measured as the equivalent impact of PM2.5.
Mineral resource scarcity, as kg Cu eq. Mineral resource scarcity is a measure of the difficulty to mine a resource in the future given expected future production (measured in kg of copper equivalent).
Water consumption, as m3. Water consumption consists of the volume of water withdrawn and used.
Land use, as m2 annual crop eq. The species lost due to loss of habitat and soil disturbance, expressed as the equivalent species loss per sqm typical crop production.
Given the timeframe of this project and the desire to consider the role of SLfT against Scotland’s wider environmental objectives – the use of such a tool was considered appropriate to provide quick assessment across a broad coverage of potential environmental impacts.
Data cleansing
We then cleansed the data:
Annual totals were created in the SEPA data by FY, assuming that a financial year is the sum of Q2, Q3, Q4 and the following Q1.
SEPA data was filtered to remove any EWC codes that do not appear in the RS data for lower rate materials.
Tonnages for EWC codes in the SEPA dataset were aggregated where relevant in order to match the EWC code grouping provided by RS.
A SWEFT category was assigned to each material / material group in the RS/SEPA data. This was based on expert judgement of the project team, with the allocations presented in Table A 1 below. It is noted that SWEFT has to date only been compiled for household waste streams. Therefore, the nature of materials from a commercial / industrial source (more likely to qualify as lower rate materials) may differ in nature from household wastes of a similar material description. Given the timeline of this project and the aim to use SWEFT as an indicator of environmental impacts, this was deemed to be an acceptable weakness in the data review method.
We reviewed landfill tonnage data for potential discrepencies by comparing the national total to landfill (SEPA) which is assumed to represent the sum of both lower- and standard- rate materials against the RS data for the same period. For two of the grouped codes, the RS data for lower rate materials was found to be greater than the total to landfill represented by the SEPA data. In one case, this was resolved through communication with the data providers. For the remaining group, it was stated that “there can be slight differences in counting between the organisations due to water discounts applied, permanent removals, and movement from/to non-disposal areas”. For the most part, this verification exercise found good alignment between the two datasets. This is supported by the finding that the two datasets match in totals for some of the EWC codes that are only landfilled at lower rate. As such, the group with a remaining discrepency was identified to the project steering group for their information, without there being a significant impact on research outcomes.
Data analysis and prioritisation scores
We analysed the data with the view of identifying materials/ material groups to prioritise for further research.
For each of the 13 material groups in the RS dataset, we calculated the percentage of lower rate material as a portion of the total material landfilled (SEPA totals) for that group. This allowed for the groups with the highest quantities landfilled at lower rate to be identified and prioritised for further research, whilst providing additional context on the relationship between lower and standard rate wastes within the material definitions.
We reviewed a number of different reference material including the SEPA operator descriptions for each landfill record to give specificity to the materials included under each of the defined material groups. This also enabled us to screen out certain material groups as “niche materials” as described in Section 4.1.
Environmnetal impacts were estimated for each of the 13 material groups across the six environmental indicators included in SWEFT. This was completed by multiplying the 2023/24 tonnage for each material group with the corresponding SWEFT factor.
Based on step III, we ranked material groups in terms of their weighted impact against each environmental indicator. The output of this is provided in Table A 1 below.
An alternative view of the results was defined by calculating the relative impact of each material group across each indicator proportionally from zero to one. This helps to show the significance of impact for each material group which is not automatically understood from the appraoch in step IV. For example, there may be a significant difference in the scale of environmental impact between the first and second ranked material group for a given indicator. The ouput of this analysis is the spider diagram presented in section 4.4.
We assigned an overall priority score to each of the 13 material groups by considering both the overall tonnage disposed at lower rate; and the indicative environmental impacts. The ouput of this priority scoring is provided in Table A 1 below.
This method for prioritising materials was agreed with the project steering group as a basis for narrowing down the materials / material groups for further research and policy review.
Table A : Descriptor terms, SWEFT category, tonnage and weighted environmental impact rankings (SWEFT output)
NA: SWEFT factor = zero for biodiversity loss associated with landfill for those waste categories.
Methodology for qualitative data gathering and analysis
The qualitative research consisted of a literature review and interviews to support an assessment of diversion and policy options.
Desk-based research
The desk-based research was initiated in two stages. The first stage was a preliminary review of diversion options for four top ranking materials, based on the quantitative data collection and analysis of SEPA and RS data (Appendix B). These were: mechanically treated fines, mechanically treated mineral fines, soils and stones, bottom ash, and slags. The second stage was a more detailed review following the quantitative assessment of environmental impacts and a narrowing of focus on three priority materials (Appendix B). After prioritisation was finalised, further research was not conducted for bottom ash and slags.
The priority materials were researched using academic search engines, such as Google Scholar, Scopus and Web of Science. Organisations concerned with inert waste were checked for relevant sources, such as WRAP, Zero Waste Scotland and Green Alliance. Sources were prioritised for review if they were based in Scotland or the UK, summarised a wide range of sources through a literature review, or were indicated to be widely referenced.
Often, sources were not published based on EWC codes. Instead, they refer to common industry names for the materials, for instance, ‘trommel fines’ or ‘mechanical fines’ rather than ‘EWC 19 12 12’. In addition, as research refers to the recycling and recovery of mechanical fines generally, we combined searches on diversion options for mechanically-treated fines and mechanically treated mineral fines.
A combination of search terms were used, including terms related to:
Research questions, e.g. downstream, upstream, diversion, circular, barriers, enablers, limitations, risk, disposal and landfill.
Priority materials, e.g. trommel fines, mechanical fines, minerals, bricks, tiles, ceramics, fines, skip fines, soils, stones and gypsum.
Circularity or waste hierarchy stages, e.g. reuse, recovery, recycling, retrofit and refurbishment.
Industries, e.g. construction, demolition, quarrying, excavation, engineering and recycling.
Diversion options, e.g. aggregate, treatment, land, deconstruction, engineering, landscaping and cover materials.
Geography, e.g. Scotland, UK, Europe and rural.
Stakeholder engagement
Eight one-hour, semi-structured interviews were conducted online and in-person between January and March 2025. In addition, questions were answered via email by some of these stakeholders, and a 3 further stakeholders. The full list can be viewed below in Table A 2 .
Table A 2: Stakeholder engagement list
Stakeholder category
Stakeholder reference
Form of data collection
Date of interview
Position held
Regulator
Revenue Scotland-A
Interview
21 Jan 2025
SEPA Specialist
SEPA
Interview
21 Jan 2025
Waste Policy Lead
Revenue Scotland-B
Email
N/A
Head of Scottish Landfill Tax
Waste management, including industry associations
Commercial landfill operator
Interview and email
10 Feb 2025
Regional Operations Manager
C&D waste management processor
Interview and email
17 Jan 2025
Managing Director
Chair
Waste industry association
Interview
22 Jan 2025
Policy Advisor
Large public body
Email
N/A
National Sustainability Manager
Upstream sources
Commercial remediation company
Interview
03 Feb 2025
Regional Remediation Manager, Scotland
Engineering consultancy
Interview
21 Feb 2025
Technical Director
C&D skip operator
Interview
06 Feb 2025
Operations Director
Construction company
Interview
25 March 2025
Head of Supply Chain Development
A set of standard interview/email questions were developed based on the overarching research questions asked in the project. Before each contact with a stakeholder, these standard questions were tailored to the stakeholder’s knowledge and background and developed into an interview proforma. The standard questions investigated the following key points:
verifying quantitative findings on priority materials and sources of lower-rate materials;
identifying existing or future end-of-pipe diversion options for each priority material;
identifying existing or future upstream diversion options for each priority material;
understanding the barriers hindering the advancement of each diversion option, including technical, operational, policy, financial or wider barriers;
understanding potential policy options to address barriers associated with accelerating the diversion options; and
understanding the unintended consequences of any policy options.
All meeting invites were issued by the Scottish Government via email and were accompanied by a participant information and consent form for interviewees to review and sign. This included full details of data use and protection, in line with UK Government guidance.[5]
Interview requests were sent out in two stages to support research aims. The first stage targeted regulators, waste management organisations, local governments and tax-implementing organisations. They were selected to provide insights on data availability and granularity, triangulate/verify the assessment prioritising certain materials, and identify further stakeholders to contact. The second stage targeted ‘the source’ of lower-rate materials sent to landfill. Namely, stakeholders from sectors using large amounts of priority materials. Their insights were used to understand the on-the-ground situation, and triangulate quantitative findings on priority materials and desk-based findings on diversion options.
Qualitative analysis
Findings from desk-based research and stakeholder engagement were added to a spreadsheet, using the template shown below in Table 6. This spreadsheet enabled assessment of the diversion options, barriers and enablers. In addition, it informed the analysis of policy options and unintended consequences of these options, and was used to conduct the feasibility assessment described below in Appendix D.
Table : Template of structural headings used to analyse qualitative data
Priority material
Description of diversion option
Limitations
Upstream or downstream
Current barriers
Potential enablers
Risks
Methodology for the preliminary feasibility assessment
This initial feasibility assessment evaluates the viability of different waste diversion options for mechanically-treated fines (19 12 12), mechanically-treated mineral fines (19 12 09), and soils and stones (17 05 04) by considering their existing use in Scotland, research and development efforts, and regulatory and financial barriers. The Table A 2 below details the logic behind our assessment given in Section 6.5.
Note that this assessment serves more as a summary of Section 6 and a high-level guide for policy-makers, than an in-depth feasibility assessment.
Table A : Feasibility assessment methodology
Diversion option
Lifecycle stage of diversion
Key barriers
Feasibility score
(3 max)
Feasibility score justification
Mechanically-treated fines (19 12 12)
Landfill cover/quarry cover, engineering and restoration
End-of-pipe
Demand exists, minimal barriers
3
Common practice in Scotland, demand for landfill cover
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Some of the data provided by Revenue Scotland was grouped to ensure confidentiality is retained, for example where there is only one operator responsible for a specific code. These grouped codes have been verified by the project team as containing mostly niche materials, and therefore excluded from the shortlist. ↑
This group contains a code for mixed household wastes (20 03 01). An insignificant portion of this code is expected to be landfilled at lower rate. As such, it was assessed separately from the niche materials that make up the remainder of this group (which are more likely to be landfilled under the lower rate). ↑
Diversion options for gypsum have been reviewed, as the upcoming ban on landfilling biodegradable waste may unintentionally make it easier to landfill gypsum. Currently restricted from co-disposal with biowaste, gypsum may no longer face this barrier once all landfills exclude biodegradable waste. ↑
This group contains a code for mixed household wastes (20 03 01). An insignificant portion of this code is expected to be landfilled at lower rate. As such, it was assessed separately from the niche materials that make up the remainder of this group (which are more likely to be landfilled under the lower rate). ↑